HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E877 Series

HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770

HP Color LaserJet Managed Flow MFP E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770

Service Manual

www.hp.com/support/colorljE877mfp
 HP Color LaserJet Managed E877, E87740,
E87750, E87760, E87770 - Service Manual

SUMMARY

This guide provides theory of operation, troubleshooting, and repair information.

Legal information
Copyright and License

© Copyright 2023 HP Development

Company, L.P.

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation

without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.

The information contained herein is subject

to change without notice.

The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.

Edition 7, 4/2024
Revision History

View a list of document revisions.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP
products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be
liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

Table Revision History

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

7 April 2024 Updated Echo PCA components, see PCA overview, Echo PCA, Parts
and diagrams: PCA, and EMR diagrams: PCA.

Added new part number (Kit-Screws c-clips e-clips kit) Parts and
diagrams: Covers

Added new feature "Low Volume Print Mode" in Service Functions,

seeService menu.

6 March 2024 Added new remove and replace procedures for the following:

● HP LaserJet Managed E826, E82650, E82660, E82670, HP Color

LaserJet Managed E877, E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770 - Removal
and replacement: Stacker Unit with PQ diagnostics

● HP LaserJet Managed E826, E82650, E82660, E82670, HP Color

LaserJet Managed E877, E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770 - Removal
and replacement: Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics

5.1 March 2024 Updated part number in remove and replace procedure to match parts
list for HP LaserJet 300ipm 300-sheet Flow DADF high speed scanner (z
bundle)

5 January, 2024 Updated the following information:

● ILSB Information updated for PQ Diagnostics:

See:Optional input and output devices configuration

● See:Print Quality Diagnostics output devices

– Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet

finisher with Print Quality Diagnostics

Updated part number on electrical mechanical diagram to correct part

number: JC39-02260A changed to 5QK03-50018

Updated Remove and replace chapter.

Added: Essential adjustments when replacing or reinstalling the

supplies or LLCs

2.10 November, 2023 Corrected part number for Prefeed 4 Sensor S201 on page 3549 to
0604-001490

2.9 September, 2023 Add footnote to Booklet Maker speed.

iii
 Table Revision History (continued)

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

2.8 August, 2023 Changed PN and part description of "Riser for HDD, USB ports
(4XN67-60001)" to "SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit (4XN67-67001)" per
HPPK PR #377.

2.7 May, 2023 Updated HCI cassette remove/replace per HPPK PR 348.

Updated printer dimension content per HPPK PR 335.

Removed invalid video links form ISA WUR topics (300/200-sheet) per
HPPK PR 328.

2.6 April, 2023 Updated drum and developer part numbers (theory) per HPPK PR 321.

Added drawer type physical keyboard (5QK47-60002 ) content in

multiple topics (theory, remove/replace, EM diagrams, parts) per HPPK
PR322.

2.5 March, 2023 Updated ITB engage motor description (removed step motor conref) in
remove/replace and parts per HPPK PR 312.

Added starter toner cartridge information to supplies specifications

table per HPPK PR 307.

Updated 10.1 control panel PN per HPPK PR 302.

Removed FDB Reactor part numbers per HPPK PR300 (theory).

Updated inner finisher sensor callout (theory) per HPPK PR 301.

2.5 February, 2023 Updated theory chapter (output devices) to include Print Quality
Diagnostics (ILSB) content per HPPK PR 279.

Updated theory chapter (hardware configuration) to include SSD

content per HPPK PR 278.

Updated parts chapter (base engine / inner finisher) per HPPK PR

267/268.

2.3 January, 2023 Deleted ADF image sensor service part number and associated
content per HPPK PR 261.

Updated parts chapter (Tray2/3, DCF, HCI) to included sub auto closing
unit per HPPK PR 262.

Updated theory/parts chapters to reflect A3 white backing and hinge kit

consolidations per HPPK PR 263/264.

Added Card Reader Rotation Adapter Kit (other options) per HPPK PR
256.

Updated ISA part numbers per HPPK PR257.

Updated Tarot platen parts illustration and FFC PNs per HPPK PR 258.

2.2 January, 2023 Removed mention of Drum MEMS PCA per portal request 236, and
added part numbers for all CMF panel colors per portal request 238.

2.1 January, 2023 Added control panel diagnostic button note per HPPK PR228. See
Control panel – 10.1 inch.

2.0 January, 2023 Changed PCA graphics per portal ticket 227.

1.3 December, 2022 Remove all 3SJ21-60001 MEMS PCA content per HPPK portal request
207.

iv Revision History
Table Revision History (continued)

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

1.2 December, 2022 Added keyboard overlay part numbers (theory/parts chapters) per
HPPK portal request 205.

Updated toner flow part numbers (theory) and TCU motor callout
number (parts) per HPPK portal request 206.

1.1 October, 2022 Added a reinstallation step to the replacement procedure for the main
formatter board.

1.0 June, 2022 Service manual initial release

v
 Conventions used in this guide

Learn about the conventions used in this publication.

TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the
product.

WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.

vi Conventions used in this guide

Table of contents

1 Product information, configurations, and specifications........................................................................................................................................ 1

Printer views ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Printer front view................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
Printer back view................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2
Interface ports view......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Control-panel view............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Basic specifications........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
Supported operating systems.......................................................................................................................................................................7
Mobile printing solutions................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Printer dimensions ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Operating-environment range.................................................................................................................................................................... 13
General specifications..................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Print specifications............................................................................................................................................................................................. 14
Scan specifications............................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
Copy specifications............................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
Paper handling specifications....................................................................................................................................................................16
Supplies..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................19
Maintenance parts (Long Life Consumables (LLC))............................................................................................................................... 20
Network and software specifications.............................................................................................................................................................. 21
Network interface ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 21
Options................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Optional input and output devices configuration........................................................................................................................ 23
Option specifications....................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
Color skin configuration.................................................................................................................................................................................. 31

2 Product installation and maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................................. 34

Product installation................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 34
PM table (Preventive Maintenance)................................................................................................................................................................... 34
Cleaning.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................36
Cleaning the paper dust stick ....................................................................................................................................................................36
Cleaning the ACR (CTD) Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................37
Cleaning the LSU window ..............................................................................................................................................................................38
Cleaning the scanner glass.........................................................................................................................................................................40
Cleaning the ADF CIS (Contact Image Sensor).............................................................................................................................. 41
Inspection procedures................................................................................................................................................................................................. 41
LLC removal and replacement procedures ................................................................................................................................................. 43
Counter reset after LLC replacement ............................................................................................................................................................. 44

3 Theory of operation........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45
Base printer ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Covers (1 of 2)..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 45

vii
 Covers (2 of 2)....................................................................................................................................................................................................................46
Feeding system.................................................................................................................................................................................................................47
Feeding system overview...............................................................................................................................................................................47
Feeding system workflow...................................................................................................................................................................48
Feeding system rollers .........................................................................................................................................................................48
Feeding system sensors.....................................................................................................................................................................50
Feeding system motors and solenoids ..................................................................................................................................... 51
Tray 1 unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Tray 1 overview............................................................................................................................................................................................ 53
Tray 1 unit operation................................................................................................................................................................................ 55
Tray 1 unit driving........................................................................................................................................................................................57
Tray 2/3 unit...............................................................................................................................................................................................................57
Tray 2/3 unit overview............................................................................................................................................................................58
Tray 2/3 operation .....................................................................................................................................................................................67
Tray 2/3 driving ...........................................................................................................................................................................................68
Registration unit and loop sensing..........................................................................................................................................................70
Registration unit and loop sensing overview........................................................................................................................70
Registration unit operation ................................................................................................................................................................72
Loop sensor operation ..........................................................................................................................................................................72
Registration unit driving .......................................................................................................................................................................73
Exit unit.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................73
Exit unit overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................73
Job separator (optional).......................................................................................................................................................................76
Exit unit operation for simplex printing......................................................................................................................................77
Exit unit operation for duplex printing ........................................................................................................................................78
Exit unit driving ............................................................................................................................................................................................78
Duplex unit................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 79
Duplex unit overview.............................................................................................................................................................................. 79
Duplex unit operation .............................................................................................................................................................................81
Duplex unit driving ................................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Toner flow system...........................................................................................................................................................................................................83
Toner flow overview ...........................................................................................................................................................................................83
Toner flow workflow................................................................................................................................................................................83
Toner flow sensors..................................................................................................................................................................................84
Toner flow motors.....................................................................................................................................................................................85
Toner cartridge.......................................................................................................................................................................................................87
Toner cartridge overview.....................................................................................................................................................................87
Toner cartridge operation..................................................................................................................................................................90
Toner dispense and toner cartridge unlock driving........................................................................................................90
Toner reservoir ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 92
Toner reservoir overview .................................................................................................................................................................... 92
Toner residual amount sensor operation ...............................................................................................................................94
Toner reservoir operation ..................................................................................................................................................................95
Toner reservoir driving ......................................................................................................................................................................... 95
Toner Collection Unit (TCU)...........................................................................................................................................................................96
Toner Collection Unit (TCU) overview.........................................................................................................................................96
Toner collection unit operation.....................................................................................................................................................100
Toner collection unit driving.............................................................................................................................................................101
Image creation................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 102

viii
 Image creation overview.............................................................................................................................................................................. 102
Image creation workflow .................................................................................................................................................................. 102
Image creation sensors ....................................................................................................................................................................103
Image creation motors.......................................................................................................................................................................105
Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)............................................................................................................................................................................107
Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) overview..........................................................................................................................................107
Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) operation .......................................................................................................................................108
Developer and drum unit ..............................................................................................................................................................................110
Developer and drum unit overview ............................................................................................................................................110
Developer and drum unit operation........................................................................................................................................... 114
Developer and drum unit driving.................................................................................................................................................. 115
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) ...............................................................................................................................................................................116
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) overview .............................................................................................................................................116
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) operation............................................................................................................................................118
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) driving...................................................................................................................................................119
Second Transfer (T2) unit.............................................................................................................................................................................120
Second Transfer (T2) unit overview...........................................................................................................................................120
Second Transfer (T2) unit operation ......................................................................................................................................... 122
ITB cleaning unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 122
ITB cleaning unit overview............................................................................................................................................................... 122
ITB cleaning unit operation ..............................................................................................................................................................124
Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit.......................................................................................................................................................124
Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit overview.................................................................................................................... 125
Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit operation...................................................................................................................127
Color Toner Density (CTD) operation ....................................................................................................................................... 128
Color plane registration shutter driving ................................................................................................................................ 128
Fuser unit................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 129
Fuser unit overview............................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Fuser unit temperature control..................................................................................................................................................... 131
Fuser gap sensor operation............................................................................................................................................................ 131
Fuser wrap jam sensor operation.............................................................................................................................................. 132
Fuser driving ..............................................................................................................................................................................................133
Environmental sensor, fan, switch ....................................................................................................................................................................133
Environmental sensor, fan, switch overview..................................................................................................................................133
Control panel ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................137
Control panel – 10.1 inch..................................................................................................................................................................................137
Control panel – 8 inch .....................................................................................................................................................................................139
Hardware configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................................140
PCA overview........................................................................................................................................................................................................140
Formatter ................................................................................................................................................................................................................143
Trusted Platform Module (TPM)...............................................................................................................................................................150
Riser card ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 151
Riser card for HDD ................................................................................................................................................................................. 151
SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit.................................................................................................................................................. 152
Riser card for HDD, USB ports, and accelerator board.............................................................................................. 152
Accelerator ............................................................................................................................................................................................................153
Storage .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................154
Solid-state drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................154
Hard-disk drive ..........................................................................................................................................................................................157

ix
 USB hub PCA ........................................................................................................................................................................................................158
Island of data (IOD)...........................................................................................................................................................................................159
Echo PCA .................................................................................................................................................................................................................159
Power key PCA.....................................................................................................................................................................................................160
Keyboard PCA ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Toner Collection Unit full sensor PCA................................................................................................................................................. 162
Paper size sensor PCA.................................................................................................................................................................................. 162
Drum CRUM PCA ...............................................................................................................................................................................................163
Toner cartridge CRUM PCA........................................................................................................................................................................163
Eraser PCA .............................................................................................................................................................................................................164
Fuser CRUM PCA...............................................................................................................................................................................................164
Control panel PCA.............................................................................................................................................................................................165
Control panel base PCA ....................................................................................................................................................................165
Control panel PCA – 10.1 inch..........................................................................................................................................................166
Control panel PCA – 8 inch...............................................................................................................................................................166
High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)........................................................................................................................................................167
Lower Voltage Power Supply (LVPS).....................................................................................................................................................169
Fuser Drive Board (FDB) ............................................................................................................................................................................... 170
Integrated Scan Asset ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................171
Automatic document feeder system: 300sh Flow ADF......................................................................................................................171
ADF cover..................................................................................................................................................................................................................171
ADF unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................171
ADF system overview......................................................................................................................................................................................173
300-sheet ADF workflow ...................................................................................................................................................................173
ADF sensors................................................................................................................................................................................................173
ADF system motor / solenoid / roller.........................................................................................................................................175
Lift plate unit...........................................................................................................................................................................................................177
Pickup unit............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 179
Deskew unit............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 182
Scan and exit unit ..............................................................................................................................................................................................184
Document feeder simplex operation..................................................................................................................................................185
Deskew operation .............................................................................................................................................................................................188
Document feeder hinges operation ....................................................................................................................................................188
ADF image scanner cleaning ...................................................................................................................................................................189
ADF PCA...................................................................................................................................................................................................................190
Automatic document feeder system: 200sh Flow ADF, 200sh ADF.........................................................................................191
ADF cover.................................................................................................................................................................................................................191
ADF unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 192
ADF system overview.....................................................................................................................................................................................193
200-sheet ADF workflow...................................................................................................................................................................193
ADF sensors...............................................................................................................................................................................................193
ADF system motor / solenoid / roller........................................................................................................................................194
Lift plate unit..........................................................................................................................................................................................................196
Pickup unit................................................................................................................................................................................................................197
Deskew unit............................................................................................................................................................................................................198
Scan and exit unit .............................................................................................................................................................................................200
Document feeder simplex operation.................................................................................................................................................200
Deskew operation ............................................................................................................................................................................................203

x
 Document feeder hinges operation ...................................................................................................................................................203
ADF image scanner cleaning ..................................................................................................................................................................204
ADF PCA..................................................................................................................................................................................................................204
Scanner system: Tarot high speed (HS) platen ...................................................................................................................................... 205
Tarot high speed platen workflow......................................................................................................................................................... 205
Tarot high speed platen covers..............................................................................................................................................................206
Tarot high speed platen sensors, motor ...........................................................................................................................................207
Image scanner and flat-bed glass cleaning ..................................................................................................................................207
Tarot high speed (HS) platen PCA.........................................................................................................................................................208
Input devices..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................208
Department stand.......................................................................................................................................................................................................209
Department Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5).............................................................................................................................210
DCF (Tray 4, 5) covers......................................................................................................................................................................................210
DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow ........................................................................................................................................... 211
DCF (Tray 4, 5) unit............................................................................................................................................................................................. 212
DCF (Tray 4, 5) rollers....................................................................................................................................................................................... 212
DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors .................................................................................................................................................................................. 215
DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors......................................................................................................................................................................................217
DCF (Tray 4, 5) operation...............................................................................................................................................................................218
DCF (Tray 4, 5) motor operation............................................................................................................................................................... 219
DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA........................................................................................................................................................................................... 220
Department High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4)............................................................................................................................. 222
HCI (Tray 4) covers ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 222
HCI (Tray 4) workflow...................................................................................................................................................................................... 222
HCI (Tray 4) unit................................................................................................................................................................................................... 223
HCI (Tray 4) rollers..............................................................................................................................................................................................224
HCI (Tray 4) sensors ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 225
HCI (Tray 4) motors........................................................................................................................................................................................... 226
HCI (Tray 4) operation .................................................................................................................................................................................... 229
HCI (Tray 4) motor operation..................................................................................................................................................................... 229
HCI (Tray 4) PCA .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 231
HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 232
Department Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI, Tray 5 or 6) ............................................................................................. 233
sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) covers.............................................................................................................................................................................. 233
sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feeding system workflow................................................................................................................................... 235
sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................237
sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) roller.................................................................................................................................................................................. 238
sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) sensors........................................................................................................................................................................... 239
sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motors ...............................................................................................................................................................................241
sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) operation........................................................................................................................................................................244
sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motor operation ........................................................................................................................................................245
sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) PCA.....................................................................................................................................................................................245
Output devices ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 246
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker.............................................................................................................................................. 247
Detailed Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................ 247
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker covers................................................................................................................ 252
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker unit overview ................................................................................................ 255
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker workflow ............................................................................................... 255

xi
 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors ................................................................................................. 256
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids.................................................................. 261
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker rollers...................................................................................................... 264
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCAs........................................................................................................ 265
Bridge unit..............................................................................................................................................................................................................266
Bridge unit overview............................................................................................................................................................................266
Stapler-stacker finisher ...............................................................................................................................................................................268
Entrance unit.............................................................................................................................................................................................268
Punch unit (optional).............................................................................................................................................................................270
Tray diverter unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................273
Top exit unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................276
Top output tray unit ...............................................................................................................................................................................277
Main exit unit..............................................................................................................................................................................................279
Paddle unit................................................................................................................................................................................................... 281
End fence unit .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 284
Tamper unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................286
Stapler unit.................................................................................................................................................................................................289
Ejector unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 293
Main output tray unit...........................................................................................................................................................................296
Paper holding unit .................................................................................................................................................................................299
Buffer unit ...................................................................................................................................................................................................302
Booklet maker..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 307
Booklet entrance unit......................................................................................................................................................................... 307
Booklet paddle unit ..............................................................................................................................................................................309
Booklet end fence unit........................................................................................................................................................................310
Booklet presser unit............................................................................................................................................................................. 312
Booklet tamper unit ..............................................................................................................................................................................314
Booklet stapler unit...............................................................................................................................................................................316
Booklet fold unit.......................................................................................................................................................................................319
Booklet diverter unit.............................................................................................................................................................................324
Booklet exit unit ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 326
Booklet output tray unit .................................................................................................................................................................... 328
PCA ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................331
Finisher main PCA..................................................................................................................................................................................331
Booklet maker PCA ..............................................................................................................................................................................334
Manual staple PCA...............................................................................................................................................................................335
Inner finisher ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................336
Detailed specifications................................................................................................................................................................................336
Cover .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................340
Inner finisher overview................................................................................................................................................................................. 342
Inner finisher workflow...................................................................................................................................................................... 342
Inner finisher sensor...........................................................................................................................................................................343
Inner finisher motor and solenoid.............................................................................................................................................345
Inner finisher roller ...............................................................................................................................................................................346
Inner finisher PCA .................................................................................................................................................................................346
Punch unit (optional)........................................................................................................................................................................................347
Punch unit overview .............................................................................................................................................................................347
Punch unit operation...........................................................................................................................................................................350
Entrance unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................350

xii
 Entrance unit overview......................................................................................................................................................................350
Diverter unit.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 352
Diverter unit overview........................................................................................................................................................................ 352
Diverter unit operation ......................................................................................................................................................................353
Exit unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................354
Exit unit overview...................................................................................................................................................................................354
Paper support unit...........................................................................................................................................................................................356
Paper support unit overview.........................................................................................................................................................356
Paper support unit operation ........................................................................................................................................................357
Paddle unit.............................................................................................................................................................................................................358
Paddle unit overview...........................................................................................................................................................................358
Paddle unit operation .........................................................................................................................................................................360
End fence unit.......................................................................................................................................................................................................361
End fence unit overview ....................................................................................................................................................................361
End fence unit operation.................................................................................................................................................................. 362
Tamper unit ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................363
Tamper unit overview .........................................................................................................................................................................363
Tamper unit operation........................................................................................................................................................................364
Stapler unit............................................................................................................................................................................................................365
Stapler unit overview..........................................................................................................................................................................365
Staple and staple cartridge............................................................................................................................................................367
Stapler unit operation........................................................................................................................................................................368
Ejector unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................369
Ejector unit overview ..........................................................................................................................................................................369
Ejector unit operation...........................................................................................................................................................................371
Output tray and paper holding unit ......................................................................................................................................................372
Output tray and paper holding unit overview ....................................................................................................................372
Output tray and paper holding unit operation ..................................................................................................................375
PCA ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................376
Inner finisher main PCA .....................................................................................................................................................................376
Inner finisher rear joint PCA............................................................................................................................................................378
Print Quality Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................................................................379
Print Quality Diagnostic overview........................................................................................................................................................380
Print Quality Diagnostic workflow.............................................................................................................................................380
Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics ...........................................................................................................................381
Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................385
Print Quality Diagnostic operation ...........................................................................................................................................388

4 Problem solving..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................390
General troubleshooting guide.....................................................................................................................................................................................390
Troubleshooting process .......................................................................................................................................................................................390
Determine the problem source..............................................................................................................................................................390
Power subsystem..................................................................................................................................................................................390
Control panel checks..........................................................................................................................................................................393
Individual component diagnostics ...........................................................................................................................................398
Tools for troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................................................................401
Problem-solving checklist ...........................................................................................................................................................................401
Step 1: Check that the printer power is on ...........................................................................................................................401
Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages...................................................................................................401

xiii
 Step 3: Test print functionality ......................................................................................................................................................401
Step 4: Test copy functionality.....................................................................................................................................................402
Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality............................................................................................................................402
Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality.........................................................................................................................402
Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer.............................................................................................................402
Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality.........................................................................402
Factors that affect printer performance.............................................................................................................................403
Print menu map..................................................................................................................................................................................................403
Print current settings pages ....................................................................................................................................................................403
Additional tools for troubleshooting...................................................................................................................................................404
Remote Admin ....................................................................................................................................................................................................404
Required software and network connection.....................................................................................................................404
Connect a remote connection.....................................................................................................................................................406
Disconnect a remote connection................................................................................................................................................ 411
Clear paper jams .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 412
Paper jam locations......................................................................................................................................................................................... 412
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams......................................................................................................................................... 413
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?....................................................................................................................... 414
31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder ....................................................................................................................................... 414
13.A1 jam error in tray 1 (multipurpose tray).................................................................................................................................... 416
13.A2, 13.A3, 13.A4 jam errors in tray 2, tray 3, or the optional 2 x 520-sheet trays..............................................417
13.E1 jam error in the output bin .............................................................................................................................................................. 419
13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF jam errors in the right door and fuser area.......................................................................................... 419
HP service and support ..........................................................................................................................................................................................420
How to search for printer documentation................................................................................................................................................. 422
How to search WISE for printer information and documentation ................................................................................ 422
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP).................................................................................................................... 428
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)........................................................................................ 429
Control panel messages document (CPMD) .......................................................................................................................................................431
Error codes (types and structure) ....................................................................................................................................................................431
Image-quality troubleshooting guide (IQTG)........................................................................................................................................................433

5 Control panel menus..................................................................................................................................................................................................................435

Pre-boot menu options .......................................................................................................................................................................................................435
Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.......................................................................................................435
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel..............................................................................437
Remote Admin................................................................................................................................................................................................................445
Required software and network connection................................................................................................................................445
Telnet client................................................................................................................................................................................................445
Network connection............................................................................................................................................................................446
Connect a remote connection.................................................................................................................................................................447
Start the telnet server function at the printer...................................................................................................................447
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer ..........................................................................................449
Disconnect a remote connection.......................................................................................................................................................... 451
Reports menu............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 452
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 454
Copy menu...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................496

xiv
Scan menu...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................505
Fax menu (when a fax option is installed)..............................................................................................................................................................534
Print menu ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................538
Supplies menu ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................538
Trays menu...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................539
Support Tools menu..............................................................................................................................................................................................................539
Service menu..................................................................................................................................................................................................................539
Event Log ................................................................................................................................................................................................................540
Counts ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 541
Coverage Report .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 542
Scanner Settings.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 542
Serial Number.....................................................................................................................................................................................................543
Service ID...............................................................................................................................................................................................................543
Cold Reset Paper..............................................................................................................................................................................................544
Low Alerts...............................................................................................................................................................................................................544
Reset Supplies Level ......................................................................................................................................................................................544
Consumables Access Control................................................................................................................................................................ 545
Software Version .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 545
Service Reports.................................................................................................................................................................................................546
ACS Page Adjustment ..................................................................................................................................................................................546
Print Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................................................................................546
Buckle Adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................................................................547
Finisher Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................................................................548
Reset Engine NVM ...........................................................................................................................................................................................556
Engine NVM Read/Write...............................................................................................................................................................................557
Sensors ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................559
Component tests..............................................................................................................................................................................................569
TR Control Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................................577
Drain............................................................................................................................................................................................................................579
Low-temperature Idling Mode...................................................................................................................................................................579
Altitude Adjustment........................................................................................................................................................................................580
Humidity ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................581
Vapor Mode ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................581
Footer........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 582
PTT Test Mode..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 582
Test Support......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 582
Part Replacement Count ............................................................................................................................................................................ 582
Reset Supplies....................................................................................................................................................................................................583
Fax V.29 Speed...................................................................................................................................................................................................584
Maintenance menu ....................................................................................................................................................................................................584
Backup/Restore.................................................................................................................................................................................................585
Import/Export......................................................................................................................................................................................................585
Cleaning Page.....................................................................................................................................................................................................585
ACR Reference Adjustment......................................................................................................................................................................585
Auto Color Registration ...............................................................................................................................................................................586
Full Auto Color Registration......................................................................................................................................................................586
Custom Color .......................................................................................................................................................................................................587

xv
 Auto Tone Adjustment....................................................................................................................................................................................587
CTD Sensor Cleaning....................................................................................................................................................................................588
Setting Standard Tone..................................................................................................................................................................................588
Manual Tone Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................................................589
Color Calibration...............................................................................................................................................................................................589
Calibrate Scanner............................................................................................................................................................................................590
USB Firmware Upgrade................................................................................................................................................................................590
Enhanced 1200 DPI Print Quality...........................................................................................................................................................590
License Management ...................................................................................................................................................................................590
Troubleshooting menu .............................................................................................................................................................................................593
Configuration/Status Pages ....................................................................................................................................................................594
Fax Reports...........................................................................................................................................................................................................594
Other Pages .........................................................................................................................................................................................................594
Fax T.30 Trace Report....................................................................................................................................................................................595
Fax V.34....................................................................................................................................................................................................................595
JBIG Compression...........................................................................................................................................................................................595
Fax Speaker Mode...........................................................................................................................................................................................596
Fax Service Log..................................................................................................................................................................................................596
PQ Troubleshooting Pages ........................................................................................................................................................................596
Color Band Test..................................................................................................................................................................................................599
Advanced Print Quality Pages ................................................................................................................................................................599
Event Log ................................................................................................................................................................................................................600
Paper Path Page................................................................................................................................................................................................600
Run Fax Test..........................................................................................................................................................................................................600
Retrieve Diagnostic Data............................................................................................................................................................................600
Retrieve Fax Diagnostic Data..................................................................................................................................................................600

6 Remove and replace....................................................................................................................................................................................................................601

Before servicing........................................................................................................................................................................................................................601
Order parts by authorized service providers ..........................................................................................................................................601
Ordering ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................601
Orderable parts ..................................................................................................................................................................................................601
How to use parts lists and diagrams..............................................................................................................................................................601
ESD precautions ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................602
Service approach...................................................................................................................................................................................................................602
Precautions when replacing parts..................................................................................................................................................................602
Before performing service ...................................................................................................................................................................................603
After performing service .......................................................................................................................................................................................603
Post-service test ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................604
Print-quality test ................................................................................................................................................................................................604
Copy-quality test...............................................................................................................................................................................................604
Fax-quality test ...................................................................................................................................................................................................604
Parts removal order........................................................................................................................................................................................604
Essential adjustments when replacing or reinstalling the supplies or LLCs ..............................................................................604
How to perform the ACR Reference Adjustment.................................................................................................................................605
How to perform Auto Color Registration....................................................................................................................................................608
How to perform Auto Tone Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................................609
How to set Standard Tone ......................................................................................................................................................................................610

xvi
 How to Reset Supplies..............................................................................................................................................................................................613
Base printer .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................614
Covers...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................614
Base covers...........................................................................................................................................................................................................614
Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover ..................................................................................................................614
Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover....................................................................................................................618
Removal and replacement: Controller cover ....................................................................................................................620
Removal and replacement: Exit rear cover......................................................................................................................... 622
Removal and replacement: Left top cover ..........................................................................................................................626
Removal and replacement: Left upper cover....................................................................................................................628
Removal and replacement: Left cover ................................................................................................................................... 632
Removal and replacement: Middle upper cover.............................................................................................................635
Removal and replacement: Right door sHCI dummy cover ...................................................................................638
Removal and replacement: Right upper cover ................................................................................................................640
Removal and replacement: Right rear cover.....................................................................................................................648
Removal and replacement: Right front cover.................................................................................................................... 651
Removal and replacement: Right middle cover assembly......................................................................................653
Removal and replacement: Right middle cover................................................................................................................661
Removal and replacement: Power key...................................................................................................................................669
Removal and replacement: Hardware integration pocket (HIP) cover.............................................................678
Removal and replacement: Middle left cover ...................................................................................................................680
Removal and replacement: Exit cover stacker ................................................................................................................682
Removal and replacement: Inner cover................................................................................................................................685
Removal and replacement: Tie stoppers .............................................................................................................................698
Removal and replacement: Front lower cover.................................................................................................................. 700
Removal and replacement: Front cover assembly ....................................................................................................... 703
Removal and replacement: Front cover assembly - CMF panel.......................................................................... 705
Removal and replacement: TCU cover assembly and TCU CMF panel ......................................................... 709
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 color panel...................................................................................................................712
Removal and replacement: Tray 3 color panel.................................................................................................................. 714
Feeding system.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 716
Right door assembly ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 716
Removal and replacement: Right door assembly........................................................................................................... 716
Removal and replacement: Right door front link ..............................................................................................................721
Removal and replacement: Right door front damper ..................................................................................................726
Removal and replacement: Right door front damper bracket................................................................................731
Tray 1 unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 736
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 unit.................................................................................................................................... 736
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 empty sensor.............................................................................................................754
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 clutch ...............................................................................................................................773
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)............................................................. 783
Tray 2-3 units......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 786
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 or Tray 3........................................................................................................................ 786
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup assembly.................................................................................................... 788
Removal and replacement: Tray 2, 3 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)....................................................... 798
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 empty and stack height sensors...............................................................802
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 prefeed sensor ........................................................................................................814
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 open and paper size sensor.........................................................................826

xvii
 Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup drive assembly ......................................................................................830
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup motor.............................................................................................................835
Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup drive assembly ......................................................................................838
Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup motor ............................................................................................................. 841
Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup assembly ...................................................................................................844
Removal and replacement: Tray 2, 3 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)....................................................... 852
Removal and replacement: Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors...............................................................856
Removal and replacement: Tray 3 prefeed sensor.......................................................................................................866
Removal and replacement: Tray 3 open and paper size sensor..........................................................................876
Removal and replacement: Tray heater (accessory) ..................................................................................................880
Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly .........................................................................................................883
Removal and replacement: Feed motor.................................................................................................................................891
Removal and replacement: Feed 2 sensor .........................................................................................................................902
Registration unit and loop sensing unit............................................................................................................................................. 912
Removal and replacement: Registration unit..................................................................................................................... 912
Removal and replacement: Registration sensor.............................................................................................................919
Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly.........................................................................................927
Removal and replacement: Registration motor ..............................................................................................................934
Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer (T2) unit........................................................................................ 942
Removal and replacement: Loop sensor 1 ...........................................................................................................................947
Removal and replacement: Loop sensor 2 .........................................................................................................................955
Removal and replacement: Loop actuator .........................................................................................................................962
Removal and replacement: Right door exit assembly.................................................................................................970
Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor ...................................................................................................................972
Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor harness ..............................................................................................976
Removal and replacement: Paper dust holder assembly.........................................................................................979
Exit unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................982
Removal and replacement: Exit unit ........................................................................................................................................982
Removal and replacement: Output bin 1 sensor.............................................................................................................996
Removal and replacement: Return gate solenoid ........................................................................................................1012
Removal and replacement: Exit 2 motor.............................................................................................................................1028
Removal and replacement: Exit 2 sensor ..........................................................................................................................1043
Removal and replacement: Duplex jam 1 sensor..........................................................................................................1058
Removal and replacement: Duplex 1 motor.......................................................................................................................1074
Removal and replacement: Exit stack guide....................................................................................................................1089
Duplex unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................1091
Removal and replacement: Duplex assembly .................................................................................................................1091
Removal and replacement: Duplex jam 2 sensor...........................................................................................................1101
Removal and replacement: Duplex 2 motor........................................................................................................................ 1111
Toner flow ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1117
Toner cartridge....................................................................................................................................................................................................1117
Removal and replacement: Toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly...........................................1117
Removal and replacement: Toner dispense motor...................................................................................................... 1125
Removal and replacement: Toner dispense motor sensor.................................................................................... 1132
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (control panel method)...........................................................1140
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (disassemble method) ........................................................... 1142
Removal and replacement: Toner CRUM module assembly.................................................................................1149
Reservoir unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................................1157
Removal and replacement: Toner reservoir.......................................................................................................................1157

xviii
 Removal and replacement: Toner reservoir motor....................................................................................................... 1171
Toner collection unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................1180
Removal and replacement: Toner collection duct unit (TCDU)............................................................................1180
Removal and replacement: Toner collection duct unit (TCDU) detection sensor.................................. 1182
Removal and replacement: Toner collection duct unit (TCDU) drive assembly ......................................1198
Removal and replacement: Toner collection duct unit (TCDU) motor ............................................................. 1211
Removal and replacement: Toner collection duct unit (TCDU) motor sensor ..........................................1224
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU)........................................................................................... 1239
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) detection sensor...................................................1241
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) drive assembly..................................................... 1263
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) motor...........................................................................1280
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) motor sensor.........................................................1298
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) full sensor PCA......................................................1316
Image creation.............................................................................................................................................................................................................1334
Laser scanner unit (LSU) ...........................................................................................................................................................................1334
Removal and replacement: Laser scanner unit (LSU)...............................................................................................1334
Developer and drum...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1341
Removal and replacement: Drum unit................................................................................................................................... 1341
Removal and replacement: Developer unit......................................................................................................................1345
Removal and replacement: Developer powder.............................................................................................................1353
Removal and replacement: Drum and developer drive assembly ..................................................................1362
Removal and replacement: Drum motor (Y/M/C)..........................................................................................................1369
Removal and replacement: Drum motor (K and ITB)...................................................................................................1373
Removal and replacement: Drum home sensor............................................................................................................1376
Removal and replacement: Developer motor (Y/M/C)............................................................................................... 1379
Removal and replacement: Developer motor (K) .........................................................................................................1382
Removal and replacement: Left cable guide...................................................................................................................1385
Removal and replacement: Right cable guide................................................................................................................1389
Image transfer belt (ITB) ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1392
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB)................................................................................................ 1392
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) engage motor assembly....................................1400
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) engage motor ............................................................ 1407
ITB cleaning unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 1415
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) cleaning unit kit.......................................................... 1415
Color plane registration (CPR)................................................................................................................................................................1418
Removal and replacement: Color plane registration (CPR) unit.........................................................................1418
Removal and replacement: CPR sensor.............................................................................................................................1429
Removal and replacement: CPR shutter sensor..........................................................................................................1439
Removal and replacement: CPR shutter motor ............................................................................................................. 1451
Fuser unit..............................................................................................................................................................................................................1463
Removal and replacement: Fuser unit .................................................................................................................................1463
Removal and replacement: Fuser and exit drive assembly..................................................................................1465
Removal and replacement: Fuser and exit motor..........................................................................................................1471
Removal and replacement: Fuser gap motor ..................................................................................................................1476
Removal and replacement: Fuser gap sensor...............................................................................................................1480
Environmental sensor, switch, and fan.......................................................................................................................................................1490
Base sensor, switch, and fan..................................................................................................................................................................1490
Removal and replacement: Outer temperature humidity sensor assembly ...........................................1490
Removal and replacement: LVPS fan ....................................................................................................................................1503

xix
 Removal and replacement: FDB fan ...................................................................................................................................... 1507
Removal and replacement: LVPS FDB fan assembly ................................................................................................. 1510
Removal and replacement: Front fan assembly............................................................................................................ 1514
Removal and replacement: Fuser fan duct ......................................................................................................................1528
Removal and replacement: LSU fan....................................................................................................................................... 1532
Removal and replacement: Front door switch assembly.......................................................................................1536
Removal and replacement: Right door switch assembly.......................................................................................1553
Control panel .................................................................................................................................................................................................................1557
Base control panel..........................................................................................................................................................................................1557
Removal and replacement: Control panel..........................................................................................................................1557
PCAs.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1561
Main PCA ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................1561
Removal and replacement: Formatter..................................................................................................................................1561
Removal and replacement: Riser card and cradle......................................................................................................1568
Removal and replacement: Rivet-HDD .................................................................................................................................1573
Removal and replacement: Cradle-HDD .............................................................................................................................1575
Removal and replacement: Hard disk 500GB ................................................................................................................ 1579
Sub PCAs..............................................................................................................................................................................................................1584
Removal and replacement: Accelerator card (optional).........................................................................................1584
Removal and replacement: USB hub PCA......................................................................................................................... 1587
Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD)............................................................................................................1595
Removal and replacement: Echo PCA and rivet ...........................................................................................................1600
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) full sensor PCA.....................................................1604
Removal and replacement: Power key PCA...................................................................................................................... 1622
Removal and replacement: Keyboard (Flow models) ................................................................................................1630
Removal and replacement: Fax card (optional).............................................................................................................1639
Power supply PCAs .......................................................................................................................................................................................1642
Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS)........................................................................1642
Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)........................................................................... 1647
Removal and replacement: Fuser-drive board (FDB).................................................................................................1652
Integrated scanner asset (ISA)...................................................................................................................................................................................1656
Whole unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1656
300-Sheet ISA for z bundle......................................................................................................................................................................1656
Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner for Flow z bundle (5QK39A for Flex-build)..........1656
200-Sheet ISA for dn bundle ..................................................................................................................................................................1662
Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner for dn bundle (5QK38A for Flex-build)...................1662
ADF (Automatic document feeder)............................................................................................................................................................... 1667
300-Sheet ADF for z bundle.................................................................................................................................................................... 1667
Removal and replacement: ADF (300sh)............................................................................................................................ 1667
Removal and replacement: ADF front cover (300sh) .................................................................................................1676
Removal and replacement: ADF CMF panel....................................................................................................................1683
Removal and replacement: ADF rear cover (300sh)..................................................................................................1685
Removal and replacement: ADF top cover (300sh)....................................................................................................1690
Removal and replacement: ADF white backing kit (300sh)...................................................................................1692
Removal and replacement: ADF input tray (300sh).................................................................................................... 1697
Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (300sh) ...................................................................................... 1700
Removal and replacement: ADF PCA (300sh) ................................................................................................................ 1704
Removal and replacement: ADF flat-flexible cable (300sh).................................................................................. 1709

xx
 Removal and replacement: ADF power cable (300sh).............................................................................................. 1715
Removal and replacement: ADF hinge kit (300sh) ........................................................................................................1721
Removal and replacement: ADF hinge damper module 300sh) ........................................................................1729
200-Sheet ADF for dn bundle .................................................................................................................................................................1735
Removal and replacement: ADF (200sh).............................................................................................................................1735
Removal and replacement: ADF CMF panel.....................................................................................................................1743
Removal and replacement: ADF white backing kit (200sh)....................................................................................1746
Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (200sh) ........................................................................................1751
Removal and replacement: ADF PCA (200sh) ................................................................................................................ 1756
Removal and replacement: ADF flat-flexible cable (200sh)...................................................................................1762
Removal and replacement: ADF power cable (200sh) ............................................................................................. 1768
Removal and replacement: ADF hinge kit (200sh)........................................................................................................ 1774
Removal and replacement: ADF hinge damper module (200sh)....................................................................... 1781
Flatbed Scanner (Tarot HS)................................................................................................................................................................................. 1788
Whole unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1788
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner whole unit........................................................................................ 1788
Covers .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1796
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner rear cover........................................................................................ 1796
PCA, harness, and sensor........................................................................................................................................................................ 1798
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner PCA assembly.............................................................................. 1798
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 50 pin.......................................................................................1802
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 68 pin....................................................................................... 1807
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner discrete power cable............................................................... 1812
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner flatbed open sensor................................................................. 1817
Input device (department)..............................................................................................................................................................................................1820
sHCI (department) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................1820
Covers ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1820
Removal and replacement: sHCI right cover ..................................................................................................................1820
Removal and replacement: sHCI rear cover....................................................................................................................1823
Removal and replacement: sHCI harness cover.......................................................................................................... 1825
Removal and replacement: sHCI rear top cover ...........................................................................................................1827
Removal and replacement: sHCI pickup cover..............................................................................................................1830
Removal and replacement: sHCI top cover......................................................................................................................1833
Removal and replacement: sHCI front cover..................................................................................................................1838
Removal and replacement: sHCI front top cover..........................................................................................................1841
Removal and replacement: sHCI link door 1st front and rear..............................................................................1845
Removal and replacement: sHCI link door 2nd front and rear ...........................................................................1850
Removal and replacement: sHCI link holder front and rear .................................................................................1855
Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................1860
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) pickup assembly ........................................................................1860
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) top cover open switch assembly ...................................1866
Roller........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1869
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) tray roller kit...................................................................................1869
Motor ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1872
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) pickup, feed drive assembly ...............................................1872
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) pickup motor ..................................................................................1876
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) feed motor ...................................................................................... 1879
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) lift drive assembly.....................................................................1883

xxi
 Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) lift motor...........................................................................................1886
Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1889
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) detection sensor 1.....................................................................1889
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) detection sensor 2....................................................................1893
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) door open sensor......................................................................1896
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) paper level sensors..................................................................1899
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) stack height and paper empty sensors ....................1903
Removal and replacement: sHCI prefeed 5 sensor ...................................................................................................1908
PCA ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1912
Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) PCA........................................................................................................ 1912
DCF (department).......................................................................................................................................................................................................1916
Covers .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1916
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover .............................................................................................1916
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover...............................................................................................1918
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover................................................................................................1920
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door............................................................................................... 1922
Removal and replacement: Tray 4, 5 CMF panels........................................................................................................ 1924
Removal and replacement: Caster wheel ..........................................................................................................................1927
Removal and replacement: Holder wheel kit - guide adjust .................................................................................1929
Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................1931
Removal and replacement: Tray 4, 5 cassettes..............................................................................................................1931
Roller........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1933
Removal and replacement: DCF roller kit ..........................................................................................................................1933
Motor .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1936
Removal and replacement: DCF pickup drive assembly........................................................................................1936
Removal and replacement: Tray 4 pickup motor ..........................................................................................................1939
Removal and replacement: Tray 5 pickup motor ..........................................................................................................1942
Removal and replacement: DCF feed drive assembly.............................................................................................1944
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) feed motor............................................................................................ 1947
Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1950
Removal and replacement: Tray 4, 5 paper size sensors.......................................................................................1950
Removal and replacement: Tray 4 pickup assembly .................................................................................................1953
Removal and replacement: Tray 4 paper empty and stack height sensors ............................................. 1957
Removal and replacement: Tray 4 prefeed sensor......................................................................................................1961
Removal and replacement: Tray 5 pickup assembly .................................................................................................1966
Removal and replacement: Tray 5 paper empty and stack height sensors ...............................................1971
Removal and replacement: Tray 5 prefeed sensor......................................................................................................1975
Removal and replacement: DCF feed sensor..................................................................................................................1981
PCA and harness............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1987
Removal and replacement: Tray heater.............................................................................................................................. 1987
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA............................................................................................................1990
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door open switch holder assembly .......................1992
Removal and replacement: DCF IF harness ....................................................................................................................1996
Removal and replacement: DCF door open switch sensor and harness...................................................1999
Removal and replacement: DCF motor harness 2nd...............................................................................................2003
Removal and replacement: DCF sensor harness 1st...............................................................................................2005
Removal and replacement: DCF sensor harness 2nd ............................................................................................2009
Removal and replacement: DCF size harness...............................................................................................................2013
HCI (department) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2017

xxii
 Covers .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2017
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) right cover ................................................................................................... 2017
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) rear cover ....................................................................................................2019
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) left cover....................................................................................................... 2021
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) right door..................................................................................................... 2023
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) front CMF panel...................................................................................... 2025
Removal and replacement: Caster wheel .........................................................................................................................2027
Removal and replacement: Holder wheel kit - guide adjust ................................................................................2029
Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................2031
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) unit ....................................................................................................................2031
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) cassette.......................................................................................................2034
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly....................................................................................2036
Roller.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................2040
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) roller kit.........................................................................................................2040
Motor ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................2044
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift and lift motors .............................................................................2044
Removal and replacement: Shift plate................................................................................................................................2048
Removal and replacement: Knockup plate assembly .............................................................................................2053
Removal and replacement: Paper gate..............................................................................................................................2056
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) feed motor drive assembly............................................................2059
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) pickup motor drive assembly.......................................................2062
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift gate solenoid................................................................................2064
Sensor ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................2068
Removal and replacement: Prefeed 4 sensor ...............................................................................................................2068
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) feed sensor ................................................................................................2074
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) paper empty and stack height sensors.................................2079
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) knockup home and shift tray end sensors.........................2083
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray level sensor 1 and 2.......................................................2088
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray empty and home sensors ........................................ 2092
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) tray open sensor ...................................................................................2096
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) gate solenoid home sensor...........................................................2098
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) gate solenoid home sensor.............................................................2101
PCA and harness............................................................................................................................................................................................2105
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) PCA...................................................................................................................2105
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA.........................................................................................................2108
Removal and replacement: HCI main IF harness.......................................................................................................... 2112
Removal and replacement: HCI sub tray IF harness .................................................................................................. 2115
Removal and replacement: HCI DC motor IF (lift and shift) ....................................................................................2117
Removal and replacement: HCI motor IF (pick and feed)....................................................................................... 2120
Removal and replacement: HCI inner drawer IF ............................................................................................................2124
Output device ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................2127
Stapler/stacker and (or) Booklet finisher ..................................................................................................................................................2127
Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................2127
Removal and replacement: Front door .................................................................................................................................2127
Removal and replacement: Caster cover..........................................................................................................................2130
Removal and replacement: Left lower cover................................................................................................................... 2132
Removal and replacement: Left upper cover..................................................................................................................2140
Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray...........................................................................................................2150

xxiii
 Removal and replacement: Top output tray..................................................................................................................... 2152
Removal and replacement: Main output tray.................................................................................................................. 2155
Removal and replacement: Rear cover................................................................................................................................2157
Removal and replacement: Front cover.............................................................................................................................. 2159
Removal and replacement: Punch cover ...........................................................................................................................2164
Removal and replacement: Top cover..................................................................................................................................2166
Removal and replacement: Top door ....................................................................................................................................2168
Removal and replacement: Right upper cover ...............................................................................................................2172
Removal and replacement: Front lower left cover .......................................................................................................2175
Removal and replacement: Front lower right cover ...................................................................................................2180
Removal and replacement: Shaft hinge - door .............................................................................................................. 2182
Removal and replacement: Caster.........................................................................................................................................2184
Removal and replacement: Caster fix nut..........................................................................................................................2187
Removal and replacement: Booklet front cover ...........................................................................................................2190
Bridge unit (or) Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................... 2192
Removal and replacement: Bridge unit (or) Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics......................................... 2192
Removal and replacement: Bridge door sensor...........................................................................................................2196
Removal and replacement: Bridge entrance sensor............................................................................................... 2202
Removal and replacement: Bridge exit sensor..............................................................................................................2207
Removal and replacement: Bridge motor.......................................................................................................................... 2214
Entrance unit..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2220
Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor ................................................................................................................ 2220
Removal and replacement: Entrance motor assembly .......................................................................................... 2235
Removal and replacement: Entrance motor................................................................................................................... 2239
Punch unit.............................................................................................................................................................................................................2243
Removal and replacement: Punch unit................................................................................................................................2243
Tray diverter unit .............................................................................................................................................................................................2245
Removal and replacement: Top jam cover assembly ...............................................................................................2245
Removal and replacement: Tray diverter ...........................................................................................................................2249
Removal and replacement: Top door open switch ..................................................................................................... 2253
Removal and replacement: Tray diverter cam ...............................................................................................................2257
Removal and replacement: Tray diverter home sensor ......................................................................................... 2265
Top exit unit..........................................................................................................................................................................................................2273
Removal and replacement: Top exit sensor.....................................................................................................................2273
Removal and replacement: Exit motor assembly ....................................................................................................... 2283
Removal and replacement: Exit motor................................................................................................................................2286
Top output tray unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................2289
Removal and replacement: Top lower feed assembly.............................................................................................2289
Removal and replacement: Tray extension......................................................................................................................2298
Removal and replacement: Top output tray paper full sensor...........................................................................2301
Main exit unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................................2308
Removal and replacement: Main exit sensor.................................................................................................................2308
Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor assembly................................................................................ 2315
Removal and replacement: Main exit cam home sensor...................................................................................... 2320
Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor ....................................................................................................... 2325
Removal and replacement: Front door switch ..............................................................................................................2330
Paddle unit..........................................................................................................................................................................................................2336
Removal and replacement: Paddle........................................................................................................................................2336
Removal and replacement: Paddle motor assembly ...............................................................................................2346

xxiv
 Removal and replacement: Paddle home sensor........................................................................................................ 2351
Removal and replacement: Paddle motor.........................................................................................................................2357
End fence unit...................................................................................................................................................................................................2363
Removal and replacement: End fence home sensor ...............................................................................................2363
Removal and replacement: End fence motor assembly.........................................................................................2377
Removal and replacement: End fence motor................................................................................................................. 2382
Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch guide....................................................2388
Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch lower guide......................................2398
Tamper unit .........................................................................................................................................................................................................2407
Removal and replacement: Front tamper..........................................................................................................................2407
Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor..........................................................................................2418
Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor ......................................................................................................... 2430
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper.......................................................................................................................... 2440
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor......................................................................................... 2450
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor ........................................................................................................... 2461
Stapler unit.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2473
Removal and replacement: Stapler unit ............................................................................................................................. 2473
Removal and replacement: Staple cartridge..................................................................................................................2479
Removal and replacement: Stapler front sensor......................................................................................................... 2481
Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-front and mid-rear sensors .......................................................... 2489
Removal and replacement: Manual staple sensor .................................................................................................... 2496
Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor .................................................................................................. 2502
Ejector unit .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2510
Removal and replacement: Ejector unit.............................................................................................................................. 2510
Removal and replacement: Ejector sensor......................................................................................................................2524
Removal and replacement: Ejector 1 home sensor...................................................................................................2540
Removal and replacement: Ejector 1 motor sensor .................................................................................................. 2555
Removal and replacement: Ejector 2 motor sensor ..................................................................................................2570
Main output tray unit................................................................................................................................................................................... 2585
Removal and replacement: Main output tray................................................................................................................. 2585
Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack sensor .................................................................2588
Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor.....................................................................2600
Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor sensor................................................................................ 2612
Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor drive assembly ............................................................ 2616
Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch...................................................................2620
Paper holding unit .........................................................................................................................................................................................2630
Removal and replacement: Front and rear paper holding sensor..................................................................2630
Removal and replacement: Paper holding home sensor......................................................................................2643
Removal and replacement: Paper holding motor drive assembly..................................................................2656
Buffer unit ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................2669
Removal and replacement: Buffer solenoid assembly...........................................................................................2669
Removal and replacement: Buffer motor ..........................................................................................................................2676
Booklet finisher (only) ............................................................................................................................................................................................2680
Booklet maker...................................................................................................................................................................................................2681
Removal and replacement: Booklet maker ......................................................................................................................2681
Removal and replacement: Harness guide......................................................................................................................2691
Booklet entrance unit ..................................................................................................................................................................................2703
Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance unit......................................................................................................2703
Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance sensor...............................................................................................2716

xxv
 Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly...................................................2730
Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance motor................................................................................................2734
Booklet paddle unit .......................................................................................................................................................................................2745
Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle home sensor....................................................................................2745
Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor assembly.............................................................................2749
Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor .....................................................................................................2754
Booklet end fence unit................................................................................................................................................................................2759
Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence home sensor.............................................................................2759
Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence motor.............................................................................................. 2772
Booklet presser unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................2784
Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor..................................................................................2784
Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper....................................................................................................................2789
Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper home sensor..................................................................................2806
Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper motor ....................................................................................................2824
Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper sensor................................................................................................. 2842
Booklet stapler unit......................................................................................................................................................................................2860
Removal and replacement: Booklet stapler....................................................................................................................2860
Removal and replacement: Booklet staple cartridge...............................................................................................2877
Booklet fold unit..............................................................................................................................................................................................2880
Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade assembly................................................................................2880
Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade home sensor ....................................................................... 2892
Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly ................................................................2898
Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor.........................................................................................2904
Removal and replacement: Booklet blade home sensor .......................................................................................2910
Removal and replacement: Booklet blade motor ........................................................................................................2927
Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor assembly ...................................................................................2933
Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor.............................................................................................................2937
Booklet diverter unit.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2942
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter.................................................................................................................. 2942
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter home sensor.................................................................................2959
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor assembly .........................................................................2966
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor...................................................................................................2972
Booklet output tray unit .............................................................................................................................................................................2978
Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray...........................................................................................................2978
Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray sensor.........................................................................................2981
PCA ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................2989
Removal and replacement: Main PCA.................................................................................................................................2989
Removal and replacement: PCA..............................................................................................................................................2995
Miscellaneous parts....................................................................................................................................................................................3005
Removal and replacement: Finisher mounting brackets...................................................................................... 3006
Inner finisher ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3008
Whole unit and rail.........................................................................................................................................................................................3009
Removal and replacement: Inner finisher ........................................................................................................................3009
Removal and replacement: Guide rails................................................................................................................................3013
Cover ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3017
Removal and replacement: Front cover assembly ..................................................................................................... 3017
Removal and replacement: Top cover assembly .........................................................................................................3021
Removal and replacement: Middle cover assembly................................................................................................. 3027
Removal and replacement: Punch cover assembly..................................................................................................3033

xxvi
 Removal and replacement: Output tray assembly.................................................................................................... 3037
Removal and replacement: PCA cover................................................................................................................................3041
Removal and replacement: Finisher sub stay assembly.......................................................................................3044
Removal and replacement: Rear cover - base..............................................................................................................3055
Removal and replacement: Rear cover - punch ...........................................................................................................3059
Removal and replacement: Lock release handle........................................................................................................3062
Removal and replacement: Main interface harness ................................................................................................3065
Removal and replacement: Exit bin full............................................................................................................................... 3076
Punch unit............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3079
Removal and replacement: Hole punch............................................................................................................................. 3079
Removal and replacement: Punch waste full sensor...............................................................................................3085
Entrance unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................3095
Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor ................................................................................................................3095
Removal and replacement: Entrance motor assembly ...........................................................................................3100
Removal and replacement: Entrance motor...................................................................................................................... 3111
Removal and replacement: Entrance motor timing belt ......................................................................................... 3122
Removal and replacement: Entrance roller......................................................................................................................3128
Removal and replacement: Middle roller............................................................................................................................3139
Exit unit....................................................................................................................................................................................................................3147
Removal and replacement: Exit roller assembly ...........................................................................................................3147
Removal and replacement: Exit sensor ..............................................................................................................................3156
Removal and replacement: Exit sensor actuator ........................................................................................................3166
Removal and replacement: Exit motor assembly ........................................................................................................ 3176
Removal and replacement: Exit motor..................................................................................................................................3181
Paper support unit.........................................................................................................................................................................................3186
Removal and replacement: Rear paper support..........................................................................................................3186
Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor......................................................................................3194
Removal and replacement: Paper support motor assembly ............................................................................. 3202
Removal and replacement: Paper support motor.......................................................................................................3210
Removal and replacement: Front paper support.........................................................................................................3219
Paddle unit.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3226
Removal and replacement: Main paddle assembly.................................................................................................. 3226
Removal and replacement: Sub paddle assembly ....................................................................................................3236
Removal and replacement: Main paddle home sensor.......................................................................................... 3243
Removal and replacement: Main paddle motor assembly ..................................................................................3250
End fence unit................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3254
Removal and replacement: End fence sensor .............................................................................................................. 3254
Tamper unit ........................................................................................................................................................................................................3265
Removal and replacement: Front tamper.........................................................................................................................3265
Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor ..........................................................................................................3272
Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor........................................................................................3280
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper..........................................................................................................................3288
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor ..........................................................................................................3295
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor.........................................................................................3302
Stapler unit.........................................................................................................................................................................................................3309
Removal and replacement: Stapler assembly..............................................................................................................3309
Removal and replacement: Staple cartridge..................................................................................................................3314
Removal and replacement: Stapler position sensor................................................................................................. 3317
Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor ..................................................................................................3329

xxvii
 Ejector unit .........................................................................................................................................................................................................3338
Removal and replacement: Ejector .......................................................................................................................................3338
Output tray and paper holding unit ...................................................................................................................................................3347
Removal and replacement: Output tray motor assembly .....................................................................................3347
Removal and replacement: Output tray motor.............................................................................................................3353
Removal and replacement: Output tray motor sensor...........................................................................................3360
Removal and replacement: Output tray lower limit switch assembly.......................................................... 3367
Removal and replacement: Output tray top of stack sensor kit .......................................................................3374
Removal and replacement: Paper holding actuator.................................................................................................3385
Removal and replacement: Paper holding kit ................................................................................................................3396
Removal and replacement: Paper holding solenoid ................................................................................................. 3407
Removal and replacement: Paper holding sensor......................................................................................................3418
PCA and switch ...............................................................................................................................................................................................3429
Removal and replacement: PCA..............................................................................................................................................3429
Removal and replacement: Rear joint PCA.......................................................................................................................3441
Removal and replacement: Front cover switch............................................................................................................. 3451
Removal and replacement: Top cover switch ................................................................................................................3462
Removal and replacement: Docking sensor .................................................................................................................. 3467
Stacker or bridge unit with print quality diagnostics........................................................................................................................3471
Stacker assembly with print quality diagnostics.....................................................................................................................3471
HP LaserJet Managed E826, E82650, E82660, E82670, HP Color LaserJet Managed E877,
E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770 - Removal and replacement: Stacker Unit with PQ
diagnostics ...............................................................................................................................................................................................3471
Bridge unit with print quality diagnostics .....................................................................................................................................3476
HP LaserJet Managed E826, E82650, E82660, E82670, HP Color LaserJet Managed E877,
E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770 - Removal and replacement: Bridge unit with PQ
Diagnostics..............................................................................................................................................................................................3476

7 Parts and diagrams ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................3484

Base printer .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3484
Covers...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3484
Parts and diagrams: Covers..................................................................................................................................................................3484
Feeding system.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3487
Tray 1........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3487
Parts and diagrams: Tray 1........................................................................................................................................................... 3487
Tray 2, 3..................................................................................................................................................................................................................3489
Parts and diagrams: Tray 2, 3.....................................................................................................................................................3489
Registration and loop sensors.............................................................................................................................................................3490
Parts and diagrams: Registration and loop sensors................................................................................................3490
Exit unit.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3492
Parts and diagrams: Exit unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 3492
Duplex ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................3493
Parts and diagrams: Duplex........................................................................................................................................................3493
Toner flow .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................3494
Toner cartridge................................................................................................................................................................................................3494
Parts and diagrams: Toner...........................................................................................................................................................3495
Reservoir .............................................................................................................................................................................................................3496
Parts and diagrams: Reservoir.................................................................................................................................................3496
Toner collection unit (TCU) ......................................................................................................................................................................3498

xxviii
 Parts and diagrams: Toner collection unit........................................................................................................................3498
Image creation............................................................................................................................................................................................................3499
Laser scanner unit (LSU) ..........................................................................................................................................................................3499
Parts and diagrams: laser scanner unit ............................................................................................................................3499
Developer............................................................................................................................................................................................................3500
Parts and diagrams: Developer ...............................................................................................................................................3500
Drum .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................3502
Parts and diagrams: Drum...........................................................................................................................................................3502
ITB .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3503
Parts and diagrams: ITB ................................................................................................................................................................3503
CPR ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3505
Parts and diagrams: CPR..............................................................................................................................................................3505
Fuser.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................3506
Parts and diagrams: Fuser ..........................................................................................................................................................3506
Sensor and fan ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3506
Parts and diagrams: Sensor and fan .............................................................................................................................................. 3507
PCA......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3508
Parts and diagrams: PCA.........................................................................................................................................................................3508
ADF / Image scanner assembly.................................................................................................................................................................................3510
Image scanner assembly (ISA)........................................................................................................................................................................3510
Parts and diagrams: Image scanner assembly (ISA) ...........................................................................................................3510
300sh flow ADF........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3512
Parts and diagrams: 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2)............................................................................................................................... 3512
Parts and diagrams: 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2).............................................................................................................................. 3513
200sh ADF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3515
Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (1 of 2).......................................................................................................................................... 3515
Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (2 of 2)......................................................................................................................................... 3516
Tarot HS platen ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3516
Parts and diagrams: Tarot HS platen.................................................................................................................................................3517
Input devices.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3517
Department Dual cassette feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5)............................................................................................................................ 3519
Parts and diagrams: DCF (1 of 2).......................................................................................................................................................... 3519
Parts and diagrams: DCF (2 of 2) ......................................................................................................................................................... 3521
Department High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4).......................................................................................................................... 3523
Parts and diagrams: HCI (1 of 2)........................................................................................................................................................... 3523
Parts and diagrams: HCI (2 of 2).......................................................................................................................................................... 3525
Department Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI, Tray 5 or 6) ...........................................................................................3527
Parts and diagrams: sHCI (1 of 2).........................................................................................................................................................3527
Parts and diagrams: sHCI (2 of 2).......................................................................................................................................................3529
Output device .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3530
Inner finisher .................................................................................................................................................................................................................3531
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (1 of 5).....................................................................................................................................3531
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (2 of 5)................................................................................................................................... 3532
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (3 of 5)...................................................................................................................................3534
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (4 of 5)...................................................................................................................................3536
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (5 of 5)...................................................................................................................................3538
Stapler/Stacker finisher.......................................................................................................................................................................................3540
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4) ..........................................................................................................3540

xxix
 Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4) ......................................................................................................... 3542
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4) .........................................................................................................3544
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4) .........................................................................................................3545
Booklet finisher ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3547
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (1 of 5)...............................................................................................................................3547
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (2 of 5).............................................................................................................................3549
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (3 of 5).............................................................................................................................. 3551
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (4 of 5).............................................................................................................................3553
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (5 of 5).............................................................................................................................3554
Print Quality Diagnostics output devices ...............................................................................................................................................3556
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher with Print Quality Diagnostics ...3556
Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics ........................................................................................3557
Alphabetical parts list.......................................................................................................................................................................................................3558
Base printer ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................3484
Covers ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................3484
Parts and diagrams: Covers.......................................................................................................................................................3484
Feeding system............................................................................................................................................................................................... 3487
Tray 1 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3487
Parts and diagrams: Tray 1................................................................................................................................................ 3487
Tray 2, 3 ......................................................................................................................................................................................................3489
Parts and diagrams: Tray 2, 3..........................................................................................................................................3489
Registration and loop sensors .................................................................................................................................................3490
Parts and diagrams: Registration and loop sensors.....................................................................................3490
Exit unit....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3492
Parts and diagrams: Exit unit.......................................................................................................................................... 3492
Duplex .........................................................................................................................................................................................................3493
Parts and diagrams: Duplex ............................................................................................................................................3493
Toner flow ............................................................................................................................................................................................................3494
Toner cartridge ....................................................................................................................................................................................3494
Parts and diagrams: Toner ...............................................................................................................................................3495
Reservoir ..................................................................................................................................................................................................3496
Parts and diagrams: Reservoir......................................................................................................................................3496
Toner collection unit (TCU) ...........................................................................................................................................................3498
Parts and diagrams: Toner collection unit.............................................................................................................3498
Image creation ................................................................................................................................................................................................3499
Laser scanner unit (LSU) ...............................................................................................................................................................3499
Parts and diagrams: laser scanner unit .................................................................................................................3499
Developer.................................................................................................................................................................................................3500
Parts and diagrams: Developer....................................................................................................................................3500
Drum ............................................................................................................................................................................................................3502
Parts and diagrams: Drum ...............................................................................................................................................3502
ITB..................................................................................................................................................................................................................3503
Parts and diagrams: ITB .....................................................................................................................................................3503
CPR ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................3505
Parts and diagrams: CPR ..................................................................................................................................................3505
Fuser............................................................................................................................................................................................................3506
Parts and diagrams: Fuser...............................................................................................................................................3506
Sensor and fan................................................................................................................................................................................................3506

xxx
 Parts and diagrams: Sensor and fan ................................................................................................................................... 3507
PCA ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3508
Parts and diagrams: PCA..............................................................................................................................................................3508
ADF / Image scanner assembly......................................................................................................................................................................3510
Image scanner assembly (ISA).............................................................................................................................................................3510
Parts and diagrams: Image scanner assembly (ISA)................................................................................................3510
300sh flow ADF................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3512
Parts and diagrams: 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) ................................................................................................................... 3512
Parts and diagrams: 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) .................................................................................................................. 3513
200sh ADF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3515
Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (1 of 2)............................................................................................................................... 3515
Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (2 of 2).............................................................................................................................. 3516
Tarot HS platen................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3516
Parts and diagrams: Tarot HS platen .....................................................................................................................................3517
Input devices..................................................................................................................................................................................................................3517
Department Dual cassette feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5)................................................................................................................. 3519
Parts and diagrams: DCF (1 of 2)............................................................................................................................................... 3519
Parts and diagrams: DCF (2 of 2).............................................................................................................................................. 3521
Department High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4)............................................................................................................... 3523
Parts and diagrams: HCI (1 of 2)................................................................................................................................................ 3523
Parts and diagrams: HCI (2 of 2)............................................................................................................................................... 3525
Department Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI, Tray 5 or 6)................................................................................3527
Parts and diagrams: sHCI (1 of 2)..............................................................................................................................................3527
Parts and diagrams: sHCI (2 of 2)............................................................................................................................................3529
Output device..............................................................................................................................................................................................................3530
Inner finisher......................................................................................................................................................................................................3531
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (1 of 5) .........................................................................................................................3531
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (2 of 5)........................................................................................................................ 3532
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (3 of 5) .......................................................................................................................3534
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (4 of 5) .......................................................................................................................3536
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (5 of 5) .......................................................................................................................3538
Stapler/Stacker finisher ...........................................................................................................................................................................3540
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)...............................................................................................3540
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4).............................................................................................. 3542
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)..............................................................................................3544
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)..............................................................................................3545
Booklet finisher................................................................................................................................................................................................3547
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (1 of 5) ...................................................................................................................3547
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (2 of 5) .................................................................................................................3549
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (3 of 5) .................................................................................................................. 3551
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (4 of 5) .................................................................................................................3553
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (5 of 5) .................................................................................................................3554
Print Quality Diagnostics output devices....................................................................................................................................3556
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher with Print Quality
Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................................................................3556
Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics .............................................................................3557
Numerical parts list............................................................................................................................................................................................................3583

xxxi
 Base printer ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................3484
Covers ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................3484
Parts and diagrams: Covers.......................................................................................................................................................3484
Feeding system............................................................................................................................................................................................... 3487
Tray 1 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3487
Parts and diagrams: Tray 1................................................................................................................................................ 3487
Tray 2, 3 ......................................................................................................................................................................................................3489
Parts and diagrams: Tray 2, 3..........................................................................................................................................3489
Registration and loop sensors .................................................................................................................................................3490
Parts and diagrams: Registration and loop sensors.....................................................................................3490
Exit unit....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3492
Parts and diagrams: Exit unit.......................................................................................................................................... 3492
Duplex .........................................................................................................................................................................................................3493
Parts and diagrams: Duplex ............................................................................................................................................3493
Toner flow ............................................................................................................................................................................................................3494
Toner cartridge ....................................................................................................................................................................................3494
Parts and diagrams: Toner ...............................................................................................................................................3495
Reservoir ..................................................................................................................................................................................................3496
Parts and diagrams: Reservoir......................................................................................................................................3496
Toner collection unit (TCU) ...........................................................................................................................................................3498
Parts and diagrams: Toner collection unit.............................................................................................................3498
Image creation ................................................................................................................................................................................................3499
Laser scanner unit (LSU) ...............................................................................................................................................................3499
Parts and diagrams: laser scanner unit .................................................................................................................3499
Developer.................................................................................................................................................................................................3500
Parts and diagrams: Developer....................................................................................................................................3500
Drum ............................................................................................................................................................................................................3502
Parts and diagrams: Drum ...............................................................................................................................................3502
ITB..................................................................................................................................................................................................................3503
Parts and diagrams: ITB .....................................................................................................................................................3503
CPR ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................3505
Parts and diagrams: CPR ..................................................................................................................................................3505
Fuser............................................................................................................................................................................................................3506
Parts and diagrams: Fuser...............................................................................................................................................3506
Sensor and fan................................................................................................................................................................................................3506
Parts and diagrams: Sensor and fan ................................................................................................................................... 3507
PCA ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3508
Parts and diagrams: PCA..............................................................................................................................................................3508
ADF / Image scanner assembly......................................................................................................................................................................3510
Image scanner assembly (ISA).............................................................................................................................................................3510
Parts and diagrams: Image scanner assembly (ISA)................................................................................................3510
300sh flow ADF................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3512
Parts and diagrams: 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) ................................................................................................................... 3512
Parts and diagrams: 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) .................................................................................................................. 3513
200sh ADF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3515
Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (1 of 2)............................................................................................................................... 3515
Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (2 of 2).............................................................................................................................. 3516
Tarot HS platen................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3516

xxxii
 Parts and diagrams: Tarot HS platen .....................................................................................................................................3517
Input devices..................................................................................................................................................................................................................3517
Department Dual cassette feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5)................................................................................................................. 3519
Parts and diagrams: DCF (1 of 2)............................................................................................................................................... 3519
Parts and diagrams: DCF (2 of 2).............................................................................................................................................. 3521
Department High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4)............................................................................................................... 3523
Parts and diagrams: HCI (1 of 2)................................................................................................................................................ 3523
Parts and diagrams: HCI (2 of 2)............................................................................................................................................... 3525
Department Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI, Tray 5 or 6)................................................................................3527
Parts and diagrams: sHCI (1 of 2)..............................................................................................................................................3527
Parts and diagrams: sHCI (2 of 2)............................................................................................................................................3529
Output device..............................................................................................................................................................................................................3530
Inner finisher......................................................................................................................................................................................................3531
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (1 of 5) .........................................................................................................................3531
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (2 of 5)........................................................................................................................ 3532
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (3 of 5) .......................................................................................................................3534
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (4 of 5) .......................................................................................................................3536
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (5 of 5) .......................................................................................................................3538
Stapler/Stacker finisher ...........................................................................................................................................................................3540
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)...............................................................................................3540
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4).............................................................................................. 3542
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)..............................................................................................3544
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)..............................................................................................3545
Booklet finisher................................................................................................................................................................................................3547
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (1 of 5) ...................................................................................................................3547
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (2 of 5) .................................................................................................................3549
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (3 of 5) .................................................................................................................. 3551
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (4 of 5) .................................................................................................................3553
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (5 of 5) .................................................................................................................3554
Print Quality Diagnostics output devices....................................................................................................................................3556
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher with Print Quality
Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................................................................3556
Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics .............................................................................3557

8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams......................................................................................................................................3608

Base printer .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3608
EMR diagrams: Tray 1..............................................................................................................................................................................................3608
EMR diagrams: Tray 2/3........................................................................................................................................................................................3609
EMR diagrams: Registration and loop sensors.....................................................................................................................................3611
EMR diagrams: Exit unit......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3612
EMR diagrams: Duplex ...........................................................................................................................................................................................3613
EMR diagrams: Toner cartridge.......................................................................................................................................................................3614
EMR diagrams: Reservoir ....................................................................................................................................................................................3615
EMR diagrams: Toner collection unit ...........................................................................................................................................................3616
EMR diagrams: LSU .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3617
EMR diagrams: Developer...................................................................................................................................................................................3619
EMR diagrams: Drum ..............................................................................................................................................................................................3621
EMR diagrams: ITB................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3622

xxxiii
 EMR diagrams: CPR ................................................................................................................................................................................................3623
EMR diagrams: Fuser............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3624
EMR diagrams: Sensor and fan......................................................................................................................................................................3626
EMR diagrams: PCA ................................................................................................................................................................................................3629
Input devices...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3644
EMR diagrams: Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF) .......................................................................................................................................3644
EMR diagrams: High Capacity Input Tray (HCI) ...................................................................................................................................3648
EMR diagrams: Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI) ..............................................................................................................3653
Output devices ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................3656
EMR diagrams: Inner finisher...........................................................................................................................................................................3656
EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher .................................................................................................3666

Appendix A Certificate of Volatility...................................................................................................................................................................................3685

Certificate of Volatility .....................................................................................................................................................................................................3685

Glossary of terms ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3688

Index..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3698

xxxiv
List of videos

View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper jams...............................414

View a video of how to clear a jam in the document feeder.................................................................................................................................414

View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 1...................................................................................................................................................................... 416

View a video of how to clear a paper jam in Tray 2, Tray 3, and the optional 2 x 520-sheet trays.............................................. 417

View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin.................................................................................................................................................. 419

View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area.............................................................................................................. 419

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE..................................................................................................... 421

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users...................................................................................................................................421

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).......................................................422

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP] search).............................422

View a video of how to access WISE for HP channel partners......................................................................................................................... 429

View a video of removing and replacing the rear upper cover...........................................................................................................................614

View a video of removing and replacing the rear lower cover............................................................................................................................618

View a video of removing and replacing the controller cover............................................................................................................................620

View a video of removing and replacing the exit rear cover................................................................................................................................622

View a video of removing and replacing the left top cover...................................................................................................................................626

View a video of removing and replacing the left upper cover............................................................................................................................ 628

View a video of removing and replacing the left cover............................................................................................................................................632

View a video of removing and replacing the middle upper cover....................................................................................................................635

View a video of removing and replacing the right door sHCI dummy cover............................................................................................638

View a video of removing and replacing the right upper cover.........................................................................................................................640

View a video of removing and replacing the right rear cover.............................................................................................................................648

View a video of removing and replacing the right front cover.............................................................................................................................651

View a video of removing and replacing the right middle cover assembly..............................................................................................653

View a video of removing and replacing the right middle cover........................................................................................................................661

View a video of removing and replacing the power key..........................................................................................................................................669

View a video of removing and replacing the HIP cover............................................................................................................................................678

View a video of removing and replacing the middle left cover..........................................................................................................................680

View a video of removing and replacing the exit cover stacker........................................................................................................................682

xxxv
 View a video of removing and replacing the inner cover.......................................................................................................................................685

View a video of removing and replacing the front lower cover..........................................................................................................................700

View a video of removing and replacing the front cover........................................................................................................................................ 703

View a video of removing and replacing the front cover CMF panel.............................................................................................................705

View a video of removing and replacing the TCU cover and CMF panel....................................................................................................709

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 color panel......................................................................................................................... 712

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 color panel.........................................................................................................................714

View a video of removing and replacing the right door............................................................................................................................................716

View a video of removing and replacing the right door front link......................................................................................................................721

View a video of removing and replacing the right door front damper.......................................................................................................... 726

View a video of removing and replacing the right door front damper bracket....................................................................................... 731

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 unit...........................................................................................................................................736

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 empty sensor................................................................................................................... 754

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 clutch......................................................................................................................................773

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 roller kit.................................................................................................................................783

View a video of removing and replacing Tray 2............................................................................................................................................................. 786

View a video of removing and replacing Tray 3............................................................................................................................................................. 786

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup assembly...........................................................................................................788

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 roller kit................................................................................................................................798

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 roller kit............................................................................................................................... 798

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 empty sensor..................................................................................................................802

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 stack height sensor................................................................................................... 802

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 prefeed sensor............................................................................................................... 814

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 open and paper size sensor................................................................................ 826

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly.............................................................................................830

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup motor................................................................................................................... 835

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 pickup drive assembly.............................................................................................838

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 pickup motor.................................................................................................................... 841

View a video of removing and replacing the tray 3 pickup assembly...........................................................................................................844

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 roller kit............................................................................................................................... 852

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 roller kit............................................................................................................................... 852

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 empty sensor................................................................................................................. 856

xxxvi
View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 stack height sensor................................................................................................... 856

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 prefeed sensor..............................................................................................................866

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 open and paper size sensor................................................................................ 876

View a video of removing and replacing the tray heaters....................................................................................................................................880

View a video of removing and replacing the feed drive assembly................................................................................................................. 883

View a video of removing and replacing the feed motor.........................................................................................................................................891

View a video of removing and replacing the feed 2 sensor................................................................................................................................. 902

View a video of removing and replacing the registration unit.............................................................................................................................912

View a video of removing and replacing the registration sensor.....................................................................................................................919

View a video of removing and replacing the registration drive assembly.................................................................................................927

View a video of removing and replacing the registration motor...................................................................................................................... 934

View a video of removing and replacing the T2 unit..................................................................................................................................................942

View a video of removing and replacing the loop sensor 1...................................................................................................................................947

View a video of removing and replacing the loop sensor 2................................................................................................................................. 955

View a video of removing and replacing the loop actuator..................................................................................................................................962

View a video of removing and replacing the right door exit assembly.........................................................................................................970

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser out sensor...........................................................................................................................972

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser out sensor harness..................................................................................................... 976

View a video of removing and replacing the paper dust holder........................................................................................................................979

View a video of removing and replacing the exit unit............................................................................................................................................... 982

View a video of removing and replacing the output bin 1 sensor.................................................................................................................... 996

View a video of removing and replacing the return gate solenoid................................................................................................................ 1012

View a video of removing and replacing the exit 2 motor....................................................................................................................................1028

View a video of removing and replacing the exit 2 sensor................................................................................................................................. 1043

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex jam 1 sensor.................................................................................................................1058

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex 1 motor.............................................................................................................................. 1074

View a video of removing and replacing the exit stack guide.......................................................................................................................... 1089

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex assembly........................................................................................................................ 1091

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex jam 2 sensor.................................................................................................................. 1101

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex 2 motor................................................................................................................................1111

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly..................................................1117

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense motors.......................................................................................................... 1125

xxxvii
 View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense motor sensor........................................................................................... 1132

View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges using the control panel.................................................................1140

View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges by disassembling.............................................................................. 1142

View a video of removing and replacing the toner CRUM module assembly........................................................................................1149

View a video of removing and replacing the toner reservoir..............................................................................................................................1157

View a video of removing and replacing the toner reservoir motor...............................................................................................................1171

View a video of removing and replacing the TCDU...................................................................................................................................................1180

View a video of removing and replacing the TCDU detection sensor......................................................................................................... 1182

View a video of removing and replacing the TCDU drive assembly............................................................................................................. 1198

View a video of removing and replacing the TCDU motor.....................................................................................................................................1211

View a video of removing and replacing the TCDU motor sensor................................................................................................................. 1224

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit................................................................................................................1239

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit detection sensor........................................................................1241

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit drive assembly.......................................................................... 1263

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit motor.................................................................................................1280

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit motor sensor.............................................................................. 1298

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit full sensor PCA...........................................................................1316

View a video of removing and replacing the LSU...................................................................................................................................................... 1334

View a video of removing and replacing the drum unit..........................................................................................................................................1341

View a video of removing and replacing the developer unit............................................................................................................................. 1345

View a video of how to fill a developer unit with developer powder.............................................................................................................1353

View a video of removing and replacing the drum and developer drive assembly..........................................................................1362

View a video of removing and replacing the drum motor Y/M/C....................................................................................................................1369

View a video of removing and replacing the drum motor K and ITB............................................................................................................ 1373

View a video of removing and replacing the drum home sensor................................................................................................................... 1376

View a video of removing and replacing the developer motor Y/M/C.........................................................................................................1379

View a video of removing and replacing the developer motor K................................................................................................................... 1382

View a video of removing and replacing the left cable guide...........................................................................................................................1385

View a video of removing and replacing the right cable guide....................................................................................................................... 1389

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB........................................................................................................................................................ 1392

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB engage motor assembly............................................................................................ 1400

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB engage motor......................................................................................................................1407

xxxviii
View a video of removing and replacing the ITB cleaning unit kit.................................................................................................................. 1415

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR unit............................................................................................................................................ 1418

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR front sensor.......................................................................................................................1429

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR center sensor...................................................................................................................1429

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR rear sensor........................................................................................................................ 1429

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR shutter sensor.................................................................................................................1439

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR shutter motor.....................................................................................................................1451

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser unit.........................................................................................................................................1463

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser and exit drive assembly......................................................................................... 1465

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser and exit motor................................................................................................................. 1471

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser gap motor..........................................................................................................................1476

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser gap sensor.......................................................................................................................1480

View a video of removing and replacing the outer temperature humidity sensor assembly...................................................1490

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS fan (E877)...........................................................................................................................1503

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS fan (E826).......................................................................................................................... 1503

View a video of removing and replacing the FDB fan (E877)..............................................................................................................................1507

View a video of removing and replacing the FDB fan (E826).............................................................................................................................1507

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS FDB fan assembly (E877)........................................................................................ 1510

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS FDB fan assembly (E826)........................................................................................1510

View a video of removing and replacing the front fan assembly....................................................................................................................1514

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser fan duct..............................................................................................................................1528

View a video of removing and replacing the LSU fan..............................................................................................................................................1532

View a video of removing and replacing the front door switch.......................................................................................................................1536

View a video of removing and replacing the right door switch....................................................................................................................... 1553

View a video of removing and replacing the Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm (10.1 in 2nd)........................................................ 1557

View a video of removing and replacing the Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm (8 in).......................................................................1557

View a video of removing and replacing the formatter..........................................................................................................................................1561

View a video of removing and replacing the riser card and cradle..............................................................................................................1568

View a video of removing and replacing the hard-disk drive rivet.................................................................................................................1573

View a video of removing and replacing the hard disk drive cradle.............................................................................................................1575

View a video of removing and replacing the hard disk drive............................................................................................................................. 1579

View a video of removing and replacing the accelerator card....................................................................................................................... 1584

xxxix
 View a video of removing and replacing the USB hub PCA................................................................................................................................1587

View a video of removing and replacing the IOD.......................................................................................................................................................1595

View a video of removing and replacing the echo PCA........................................................................................................................................1600

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit full sensor PCA..........................................................................1604

View a video of removing and replacing the power key PCA............................................................................................................................ 1622

View a video of removing and replacing the keyboard (fold type)................................................................................................................ 1630

View a video of removing and replacing the fax card............................................................................................................................................ 1639

View a video of removing and replacing the HVPS..................................................................................................................................................1642

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS.................................................................................................................................................... 1647

View a video of removing and replacing the FDB......................................................................................................................................................1652

View a video of removing and replacing the sHCI door links........................................................................................................................... 1850

View a video of removing and replacing the sHCI Tray 5 or 6 pickup, feed drive assembly....................................................... 1872

xl
1 Product information, configurations, and
specifications

You will learn more about the product information, configurations, and specifications.

Printer views
Learn more specifically about the different views of the printer.

Printer front view

Locate features on the front of the printer.

Figure 1-1 Printer front view

1 2

13
15 5

14
6
7

9
10
13
11
12

NOTE: Not shown: A pull-out keyboard is included under the control panel for z models only.

Product information, configurations, and specifications 1

 Table 1-1 Printer front view

Item Description

1 Automatic document feeder cover, for access for clearing

jams

2 Automatic document feeder input tray

3 Automatic document feeder output tray

4 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for

easier viewing)

5 On/off button

6 Right door, for access for clearing jams

7 Easy-access USB port

Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a

computer or to update the printer firmware.

NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.

8 Tray 1

9 Front door, for access to the toner cartridges and toner

collection duct unit (TCDU)

10 Power connection

11 Tray 2

12 Tray 3

13 Toner collection unit (TCU) access door

14 Output bin

15 Hardware integration pocket (HIP), for connecting accessory

and third-party devices

Printer back view

Locate features on the back of the printer.

2 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

 Figure 1-2 Printer back view

2
3

Table 1-2 Printer back view

Item Description

1 Formatter cover

CAUTION:

There is a risk of electric shock. This cover should only be opened by a qualified service technician.

2 Interface ports

3 Thumbscrew

CAUTION:

The thumbscrew should be tightened with a tool after both initial installation and subsequent access
to the formatter cover.

4 Serial number and product number label

Interface ports view

Locate the interface ports on the printer formatter.

Interface ports view 3

 Figure 1-3 Interface ports view

1
2
3

4
5

Table 1-3 Interface ports view

Item Description

1 Hi-speed USB 2.0 host port for connecting external USB devices (this port might be covered)

NOTE: For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port near the control panel.

2 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 host port for connecting external USB devices (this port might be covered)

3 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port

4 Slot for a cable-type security lock

5 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 printing port

Control-panel view
The control panel provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.

NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.

The Home screen provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.

NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer
configuration.

4 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Figure 1-4 Control-panel view
1 2 3 4

Reset Sign In i ? 12:42 PM

5
Copy Scan Print Fax

Table 1-4 Control-panel view

Item Control Description

1 Reset button The Reset button returns the printer to default settings
and is always present if users are not logged in.

The Reset button is not present when the Sign Out

button is present.

Touch the Reset button to resume and release jobs from

the previous pause state and interrupt mode, reset the
quick copy count in the copy count field, exit special
modes, reset the display language and the keyboard
layout.

2 Sign In or Sign Out button Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.

Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The
printer restores all options to the default settings.

NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has

configured the printer to require permission for access
to features.

Control-panel view 5
 Table 1-4 Control-panel view (continued)

Item Control Description

3 Information button Touch the information button to access a screen that

provides access to several types of printer information.
Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen for the
following information:

● Display Language: Change the language setting for

the current user session.

● Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.

● Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect

directly to the printer using a phone, tablet, or other
device with Wi-Fi (only available when the optional
wireless accessory is installed).

● Wireless: View or change wireless connection

settings (only available when the optional wireless
accessory is installed).

● Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection

settings.

● HP Web Services: View information to connect and

print to the printer using HP Web Services (ePrint).

4 Help button Touch the Help button to open the embedded help
system.

The status line provides information about the overall

printer status.

5 Applications area Touch any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the
screen sideways to access more applications.

NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The

administrator can configure which applications appear
and the order in which they appear.

On Flow printers the Scan button is replaced by the

Scan+ button .

Touch the Scan+ button to send a scan job to multiple

destinations at once, including email, SharePoint,
network folder, USB drive, fax, or printed hard copy. It also
includes a preview mode that supports simple editing.

6 Copy button Touch the Copy button to start a copy job.

7 Home-screen page indicator Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in
an application. The current page is highlighted. Swipe the
screen sideways to scroll between pages.

Specifications
Learn about the specifications.

Basic specifications
Learn about the basic specifications of the printer.

6 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Supported operating systems
Learn about supported operating systems.

The following information applies to the Printer-Specific Windows PCL 6 and HP print drivers for macOS
and to the software installer.

Windows: The HP Software Installer can be downloaded from the printer support website for this printer
and installs the correct "HP PCL 6” print driver, depending on the Windows operating system, along
with optional software when using the software installer. Download the "HP PCL 6" print driver from the
printer-support website for this printer: www.hp.com/support.

macOS: Mac computers are supported with this printer. Download HP Easy Start either from 123.hp.com
or from the Printer Support page, and then use HP Easy Start to install the HP print driver. HP Easy Start
is not included in the HP Software Installer.

1. Go to 123.hp.com/LaserJet.

2. Follow the steps provided to download the printer software.

Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.

UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX®, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.

Table 1-5 Supported operating systems and print drivers

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on the web)

Windows 7, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver is installed for this operating system as
part of the software installation.

Windows 10, 32-bit, 64-bit, and ARM64 The “HP PCL-6” printer-specific print driver is installed for this operating system as
part of the software installation.

Windows 11, 64-bit, and ARM64 The “HP PCL-6” printer-specific print driver is installed for this operating system as
part of the software installation.

Windows Server 2008 R2, 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2012, 64-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2012 R2, 64-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2016, 64-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2019, 64-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2022, 64-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

macOS 12 (Monterey), macOS 11 (Big To install the print driver, download HP Easy Start from 123.hp.com. Follow the steps
Sur), macOS 10.15 (Catalina) provided to install the printer software and print driver.

Supported operating systems 7

 Table 1-5 Supported operating systems and print drivers (continued)

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on the web)

Debian 10,11, OpenSuse 15.1,15.2,15.3, Print drivers are available at specific operating system web sites.
Fedora 31,32,33,34,35, Rhel 6,7,8, Ubuntu
20.04,20.10,21.04,21.10, linuxmint 20.1,20.2,
Manjarolinux 20.2,21.0.7, Zorin 15,16
Mxlinux 21, Elementary 6P

NOTE: Supported operating systems can change. For a current list of supported operating systems,
go to support.hp.com for HP's all-inclusive help for the printer.

NOTE: For details on client and server operating systems and for HP Smart UPD driver support for
this printer, go to www.hp.com/go/smartupd. Under Additional information, click the links.

Table 1-6 Minimum system requirements

Windows macOS

● Internet connection ● Internet connection

● Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network ● 1 GB of available hard-disk space

connection

● 2 GB of available hard-disk space

Mobile printing solutions

Learn what HP offers for mobile printing solutions.

HP offers multiple mobile solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device. To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to HP
Customer Support - Knowledge Base.

● Apple AirPrint

● Mopria Certified

● WiFi Direct Printing

● NFC Touch to Print

● ePrintIT PrinterOn

Printer dimensions
Learn about the printer dimensions.

8 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Figure 1-5 Printer and dual cassette feeder dimensions (fully open)

1522.8 mm
(59.9 in)

50 mm
(2.0 in)
100 mm
(3.9 in)

1040 mm
1324.7 mm (40.9 in)
(52.1 in)

Printer dimensions 9
 Figure 1-6 Printer, dual cassette feeder, and inner finisher dimensions (fully open)

1502.8 mm
(59.1 in)

50 mm
(2.0 in)

100 mm
(3.9 in)
1452.8 mm
1334.7 mm (57.1 in)
(52.5 in)

10 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Figure 1-7 Printer, booklet finisher, and 2K high-capacity input dimensions (fully open)

1522.8 mm
(59.9 in)

50 mm
100 mm
(2.0 in)
(3.9 in)

1800.5 mm
1324.7 mm (70.8 in)
(52.1 in)

Printer dimensions 11
 Figure 1-8 Printer, booklet finisher, 2K high-capacity input, and side high-capacity input dimensions (fully
open)

1522.8 mm
(59.9 in)

50 mm
(2.0 in)
100 mm
(3.9 in)

1324.7 mm
(52.1 in) 2261.7 mm
(89.0 in)

12 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

 Figure 1-9 Printer, 2K high-capacity input, and side high-capacity input dimensions (fully open)

1522.8 mm
(59.9 in)

50 mm
(2.0 in)

100 mm
(3.9 in)
1555 mm
(61.2 in)
1324.7 mm
(52.1 in)

Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specifications.

Table 1-7 Operating-environment specifications

Environment Recommended Storage

Temperature 15° to 27°C (59° to 80.6°F) 10° to 32.5°C (50° to 90.5°F)

Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 80% relative humidity (RH)

General specifications
Learn about general specifications for printer models.

Operating-environment range 13
 Table 1-8 General specifications

Item Specification

ASIC GigaTron Quad 1.6 GHz ARM A72 + Dual 1.4 GHz ARM A53

Memory 6 GB

Storage 500 GB HDD

Connectivity (I/O standard) Gigabit LAN

USB 3.2 Gen1 (USB 3.0) Device

USB 3.2 Gen1 (USB 3.0)/2.0 Host ports

TPM

Power Requirement Input voltage: 110 to 127Vac (+/- 10%), 220 to 240Vac (+/- 10%), 50/60 Hz (+/- 3%)

Sound Power Level Blue Angel UZ-205:

● 40ppm: ≤7.3 Bel(A)

● 50ppm: ≤7.4 Bel(A)

● 60ppm: ≤7.5 Bel(A)

● 70ppm: ≤7.6 Bel(A)

ISO, Idle:

Sound Pressure Level ≤30dB(A)

Print specifications
Learn about the print specifications.

Table 1-9 Print specifications

Item Specification

Print speed (normal, A4/letter) E87740 base: 40 ppm

E87750: 50 ppm

E87760: 60 ppm

E87770: 70 ppm

Resolution 1200 dpi

Print Languages HP PCL 6, HP Postscript level 3 emulation, PDF (v 1.7), AirPrint™ compatible

Supported Network Protocols IPv4/IPv6: Apple Bonjour Compatible (Mac OS 10.2.4 or higher), SNMPv1/v2c/v3, HTTP, HTTPS,
FTP, TFTP, Port 9100, LPD, WS Discovery, IPP, Secure-IPP, IPsec/Firewall

IPv4: Auto-IP, SLP, Telnet, IGMPv2, BOOTP/DHCP, WINS, IP Direct Mode, WS Print

Other: NetWare NDS, Bindery, ePrint

IPv6: DHCPv6, MLDv1, ICMPv6

USB printing Yes

14 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Scan specifications
Learn about the scan specifications.

Table 1-10 Scan specifications

Item Specification

Scan Speed (normal, A4) E877/E826 dn models ADF: Simplex 90 ipm / Duplex 180 ipm

E877/E826 z models ADF: Simplex 150 ipm / Duplex 300 ipm

Input capacity E877/E826 dn models ADF: 75 gsm / 200 sheets

E877/E826 z models ADF: 75 gsm / 300 sheets

Grayscale Levels 256

Scan File Format Digital Send: Hi-Compression PDF, PDF, JPEG, TIFF, MTIFF, XPS, PDF/A

Scan to easy access USB: Hi-Compression PDF, PDF, JPEG, TIFF, MTIFF, XPS, PDF/A

Print from easy access USB: PDF, PS, JPEG, TIFF, PNG, Print Ready files (.prn, .pcl, .cht)

Scan Size Maximum ADF:

297 x 437 mm (11.7 x 17.2 in)

Flatbed:

297 x 437 mm (11.7 x 17.2 in)

Scan Size Minimum ADF:

148 x 210 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in)

Standard Media Size ADF:

Legal, Oficio, Executive, Statement, Ledger, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, 16K

● Width: 148 - 297 mm (5.8 - 11.7 in)

● Length: 148 - 432 mm (5.8 - 17 in)

Media Weights ADF:

● Simplex: 60 to 128 g/m² (16 to 28 lb)

● Duplex: 60 to 128 g/m² (16 to 28 lb)

Copy specifications
Learn about the copy specifications.

Table 1-11 Copy specifications

Item Specification

Copy Speed (Normal, A4, E87740 base: 40 cpm

default rate from flatbed or
ADF) E87750: 50 cpm

E87760: 60 cpm

E87770: 70 cpm

Scan specifications 15
 Table 1-11 Copy specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Copy Speed (Normal, Letter, E87740 base: 40 cpm

default rate from flatbed or
ADF) E87750: 50 cpm

E87760: 60 cpm

E87770: 70 cpm

Copy Speed (Normal, A3, E87740 base: 21 cpm

default rate from flatbed or
ADF) E87750: 26 cpm

E87760: 30 cpm

E87770: 35 cpm

Copy Speed (Duplex, A3) E87740 base: 21 ipm

E87750: 26 ipm

E87760: 30 ipm

E87770: 35 ipm

Copy Resolution Black Text:

Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Color Text and Graphics:

Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Copier Reduce/enlarge Flatbed: 25 to 400%

ADF: 25 to 400%

Paper handling specifications

Learn about the paper handling specifications.

Table 1-12 Paper handling specifications

Item Specification

Input Capacity Tray 1: 100 sheets (80 gsm)

Tray 2: 520 sheets (80 gsm)

Tray 3: 520 sheets (80 gsm)

Custom Media Sizes Tray 1: 98 x 139.7 mm (3.8 x 5.5 in) to 320 x 457 mm (12.6 x 18 in)

Tray 2: 98 x 140 mm (3.8 x 5.5 in) to 297 x 241.5 mm (11.7 x 9.5 in)

Tray 3: 140 x 182 mm (5.5 x 7.2 in) to 320 x 457 mm (12.6 x 18 in)

16 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-12 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Standard Media Sizes Tray 1:

A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, A6, RA4, SRA4, B4 (JIS), B5 (JIS), B6 (JIS), 10x15cm, Oficio, 8K, 16k, Postcard
(JIS), Dpostcard (JIS), Envelope B5, Envelop C5,Envelope C6, Envelope DL

Tray 2:

A4, A5, A6, B6, Letter, Statement, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C6,
Envelope No. 10, Envelope No. 9, Custom (98 x 140 mm (3.86 x 5.5 in) to 297 x 241.5 mm (11.7 x 9.5
in))B4 (JIS)

Tray 3:

SRA3, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5(JIS), B5(ISO), Tabloid extra, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Executive, Statement,
8K, 16K, Oficio, Folio, Custom (140 x 182 mm (5.5 x 7.17 in)to 320 x 457 mm (12.6 x 18 in))

Media types supported Tray 1:

Thin, Plain, Thick, Heavy weight, Extra Heavy weight 1, Extra Heavy weight 2, Heavy Cardstock,
Extra Heavy weight 3, Extra Heavy weight 4, Envelope, Label, Transparency, Thin Glossy, Thick
Glossy, Heavy Glossy

Tray 2, 3:

Thin, Plain, Thick, Heavy weight, Extra Heavy weight 1, Extra Heavy weight 2, Extra Heavy weight
3, Extra Heavy weight 4, Thin Glossy, Thick Glossy, Heavy Glossy

Paper handling specifications 17

 Table 1-12 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Media Weights Tray 1:

● Thin: 60~70 g/m²

● Plain: 71~90 g/m²

● Thick: 91~105 g/m²

● Heavy weight: 106~130 g/m²

● Extra Heavy weight 1: 131~175 g/m²

● Extra Heavy weight 2: 176~220 g/m²

● Heavy Cardstock: 221 ~ 256 g/m²

● Extra Heavy weight 3: 257~300 g/m²

● Extra Heavy weight 4: 301~325 g/m²

● Envelope: 76~120 g/m²

● Label: 120~150 g/m²

● Transparency: 138~146 g/m²

● Thin Glossy: 106~163 g/m²

● Thick Glossy: 164~216 g/m²

● Heavy Glossy: 217~256 g/m²

Tray 2, 3:

● Thin: 60~70 g/m²

● Plain: 71~90 g/m²

● Thick: 91~105 g/m²

● Heavy weight: 106~175 g/m²

● Extra Heavy weight 1: 176~216 g/m²

● Extra Heavy weight 2: 217~256 g/m²

● Extra Heavy weight 3: 257~300 g/m²

● Extra Heavy weight 4: 301~325 g/m²

● Thin Glossy: 106~163 g/m²

● Thick Glossy: 164~216 g/m²

● Heavy Glossy: 217~256 g/m²

Standard Media Sizes 139.7 x 182 mm (5.5 x 7.16 in) to 320 x 457 mm (12.6 x 18 in)
(duplex)

Media Weights (duplex) 60 to 300 g/m²

Media types supported Plain, Thin, Thick, Heavy weight, Extra Heavy weight, Cotton, Colored, Pre-Printed, Recycled,
(duplex) Bond, Archive, LetterHead, Hole Punched, Thin Cardstock, Thick Cardstock, Heavy Cardstock,
Extra Heavy Cardstock, Thin Glossy, Thick Glossy, Heavy Glossy

18 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-13 Paper trays and accessories

Trays and accessories Availability

Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity) Included

Tray 2 (520-sheet capacity) Included

Tray 3 (520-sheet capacity) Included

2 x 520-sheet paper tray/stand Optional

2,000-sheet high-capacity input tray/stand Optional

3,000-sheet side-mount high-capacity input tray/stand Optional

Printer stand Optional

Stapler/stacker finishing accessory Optional

Booklet maker finishing accessory Optional

Inner finisher accessory Optional

2/3 hole punch accessory Optional

2/4 hole punch accessory Optional

Swedish hole punch accessory Optional

HP Job separator Optional

HP Second exit Included

Supplies
Learn about the supplies.

Table 1-14 Supplies

Item Product number Average yield

Black toner cartridge1 W9160MS Approx. 10,000 pages

Starter toner (APJ only)

Cyan toner cartridge1 W9161MS Approx. 9,000 pages

Starter toner (APJ only)

Yellow toner cartridge1 W9162MS Approx. 9,000 pages

Starter toner (APJ only)

Magenta toner cartridge1 W9163MS Approx. 9,000 pages

Starter toner (APJ only)

Black toner cartridge1 W9160MC Approx. 45,000 pages

Standard

Cyan toner cartridge1 W9161MC Approx. 30,000 pages

Standard

Supplies 19
 Table 1-14 Supplies (continued)

Item Product number Average yield

Yellow toner cartridge1 W9162MC Approx. 30,000 pages

Standard

Magenta toner cartridge1 W9163MC Approx. 30,000 pages

Standard

Black toner cartridge1 W9170MC Approx. 50,000 pages

High capacity

Cyan toner cartridge1 W9171MC Approx. 45,000 pages

High capacity

Yellow toner cartridge1 W9172MC Approx. 45,000 pages

High capacity

Magenta toner cartridge1 W9173MC Approx. 45,000 pages

High capacity

Toner collection unit (TCU) 6SB85A 130,000 pages

1Print cartridge life is approximate, based on average A4 /Letter-size page count with ISO coverage.
Declared cartridge yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Actual yields vary considerably based
on images printed and other factors. For more information, visit www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.

NOTE: Depending on the print pattern and job mode used, the lifespan of the consumable can vary.

IMPORTANT: Toner cartridges or other supplies must be purchased in the same country/region as
the printer being used. Otherwise, new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with the
printer. This is due to differing configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the
conditions of a specific country/region.

Maintenance parts (Long Life Consumables (LLC))

Learn about the printer maintenance parts.

HP recommends replacing the following maintenance parts at specific intervals to make sure the printer
produces quality copies and to extend the service life of the printer.

Some of the printer parts have a shorter lifespan than the life of the printer.

Table 1-15 Maintenance parts

Item Product number Life

Black developer unit 5PN72A 900,000 pages

Yellow developer unit 5PN73A 900,000 pages

Magenta developer unit 5PN74A 900,000 pages

Cyan developer unit 5PN75A 900,000 pages

20 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-15 Maintenance parts (continued)

Item Product number Life

Fuser unit (100V) 5PN53A 600,000 pages

NOTE: Only for Japan

Fuser unit (110V) 5PN76A 600,000 pages

Fuser unit (220V) 5PN77A 600,000 pages

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit 5PN78A 600,000 pages

ITB cleaner 5PN79A 300,000 pages

Transfer roller 5PN80A 300,000 pages

Pickup/ Forward/ Reverse (separation) 5PN66A 360,000 pages

roller (for Tray 2-X)

Tray 1 (MP) Pickup/ Forward/ Reverse 5RC03A 200,000 pages

(separation) Roller

ADF roller kit (z bundle) 5RC00A 300,000 pages

ADF roller kit (dn bundle) J8J95A 150,000 pages

Black imaging drum W9077MC 300,000 pages

CYM imaging drum W9078MC 240,000 pages

NOTE: Depending on print patterns and the job mode used, maintenance part lifespans vary. See
Replacing the maintenance part for further instructions.

Network and software specifications

Learn about the network and software specifications.

Network interface
Learn about the network interface.

Network OS

Windows

● Windows 7

● Windows 10

● Windows 11

● Windows Server 2008 R2

● Windows Server 2012

● Windows Server 2012 R2

● Windows Server 2016

● Windows Server 2019

Network and software specifications 21

 Mac

● macOS 12(Monterey)

● macOS 11(Big Sur)

● macOS 10.14(Mojave)

● macOS 10.15(Catalina)

Linux

● CentOS 8, 64-bit

● Ubuntu 20.04.2.0 LTS

● Fedora 33

● Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8

Others

● Unix (HP-UX, Solaris, SunOS, SCO)

Table 1-16 Network interfaces

Type Protocol Details

Network Protocol TCP/IP TCP/IPv4, HTTP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, LDAP,

SMTP, SSL/TLS, IPSec, DNS, WINS, SLP,
Bonjour, SSDP, DDNS, DHCP/BOOTP,
IPv6

Network Protocol NetBIOS over TCP/IP Supported

Network Protocol Others HTTPS, IPSec, 802.1x

IP Addressing Static IP Supported

IP Addressing Auto IP Supported

IP Addressing BOOTP Supported

IP Addressing DHCP Supported

SNMP/MIB Access MIB-2 (RFC 1213) Supported

SNMP/MIB Access Host Resource MIB (RFC 2790) Supported

SNMP/MIB Access Printer MIB (RFC 3805) Supported

SNMP/MIB Access Finisher MIB (RFC 3806) Supported

SNMP/MIB Access HP Compatibility Supported partially

SNMP/MIB Access SNMP Trap Supported

Printing Protocols Windows Printing (SMB) Not supported

Printing Protocols LPR/LPD Supported

Printing Protocols IPP Supported

Printing Protocols Port 9100 Supported

Device Discovery DNS Supported

22 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-16 Network interfaces (continued)

Type Protocol Details

Device Discovery Dynamic DNS Supported

Device Discovery Multicast DNS (Bonjour) Supported

Device Discovery WSD (including Print and Scan) Supported (Print and Scan)

Device Discovery SLP Supported

Device Discovery uPNP (SSDP) Supported

Options
Learn about printer options and accessories.

Optional input and output devices configuration

Learn about the optional input and output devices configuration.

The E877, E826, E786, E731, E785 and E730 series have optional input devices and output devices.

NOTE: The figure below is representational only. Individual devices might appear different from what
is shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-10 Optional input and output devices configuration

10 11 12

16

13
15 17

9
14

2 4 6
1
3 5 7

NOTE: There may be a difference between the appearance of your printer and the photo.

Table 1-17 Optional input and output devices configuration

# Description Part E877 E826 E786 E731 E785 E730

number series series series series series series

1 HP High Capacity Input Tray 6GW56A Not Not Not Not

Side (sHCI) available available available available

Options 23
 Table 1-17 Optional input and output devices configuration (continued)

# Description Part E877 E826 E786 E731 E785 E730

number series series series series series series

2 HP LaserJet Workgroup 6GW54A Not Not

Cabinet available available

3 HP LaserJet Department 6GW53A Not Not Not Not

Cabinet available available available available

4 HP LaserJet Workgroup 2000 6GW48A Not Not Not Not

Sheet High Capacity Input available available available available
Tray (HCI)

5 HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High 6GW57A Not Not Not Not

Capacity Tray Department available available available available
(HCI)

6 HP LaserJet Workgroup Dual 6GW46A Not Not

Cassette Feeder (DCF) available available

7 HP LaserJet Dual Cassette 6GW47A Not Not Not Not

Department Feeder (DCF) available available available available

8 HP LaserJet Spacer 6GW58A Not Not Not Not Not

available available available available available
NOTE: This option is
required if installing the
Stapler/Stacker or Booklet
finisher.

9 HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher 6GW51A Not Not

Not Not available available
HP LaserJet Booklet finisher 63C81A available available
with Print Quality Diagnostics Not Not
available available
NOTE: The following options
are available:

● 15 HP LaserJetHole
Punch 2/3 Accessory -
Y1G10A

● 15 HP LaserJet Hole
Punch 2/4 Accessory -
Y1G11A

● 15 HP LaserJet
Hole Punch Swedish
Accessory - Y1G12A

● Y1G14A - HP LaserJet
Stapler/Stacker Finisher
Refill Staple Cartridge
(not shown)

● Y1G13A - HP LaserJet
Inner Finisher and
Booklet Maker Finisher
Refill Staple Cartridge
(not shown)

24 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-17 Optional input and output devices configuration (continued)

# Description Part E877 E826 E786 E731 E785 E730

number series series series series series series

10 HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker 6GW55A Not Not

Finisher Not Not available available
63C80A available available
HP LaserJet Booklet finisher Not Not
with Print Quality Diagnostics available available

NOTE: The following options

are available:

● 15 HP LaserJetHole
Punch 2/3 Accessory -
Y1G10A

● 15 HP LaserJet Hole
Punch 2/4 Accessory -
Y1G11A

● 15 HP LaserJet
Hole Punch Swedish
Accessory - Y1G12A

● Y1G14A - HP LaserJet
Stapler/Stacker Finisher
Refill Staple Cartridge
(not shown)

11 HP LaserJet Workgroup Job 6GW52A Not Not

Separator available available

12 HP LaserJet Department Job 6GW50A Not Not Not Not

Separator available available available available

13/1 HP LaserJet Inner Finisher 6GW49A

4
NOTE: The following options
are available:

● 14 HP LaserJet Inner
Finisher Hole 2/3 Punch
- 155P7A

● 14 HP LaserJet Inner
Finisher Hole 2/4 Punch
- 155P8A

● 14 HP LaserJet Inner
Finisher Swedish Punch
- 155P9A

● Y1G13A - HP LaserJet
Inner Finisher and
Booklet Maker Finisher
Refill Staple Cartridge
(not shown)

NOTE: Inner finisher

supports up to 60 ppm.

15 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Y1G10A Not Not

Accessory available available

15 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Y1G11A Not Not

Accessory available available

Optional input and output devices configuration 25

 Table 1-17 Optional input and output devices configuration (continued)

# Description Part E877 E826 E786 E731 E785 E730

number series series series series series series

15 HP LaserJet Hole Punch Y1G12A Not Not

Swedish Accessory available available

16 HP LaserJet Second Exit Y1G23A Not Not

Available Available
NOTE: This option is
required if installing the
Stapler/stacker, Booklet
Finisher, Inner Finisher, or job
separator.

17 HP LaserJet Stacker with 63C82A Not Not Not Not

Print Quality Diagnostics Available Available Available Available

Option specifications
Learn about option specifications.

Table 1-18 HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Feeder option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW47A

Capacity 520 x 2 sheets

Media sizes ● Tray 4: 139.7 mm x 182 mm – 320 mm x 457.2 mm (5.5 in x

7.17 in – 12.59 in x 18 in)

● Tray 5: 139.7 mm x 182 mm – 320 mm x 457.2 mm (5.5 in x

7.17 in – 12.59 in x 18 in)

Media types Thin/Plain/Thick/Heavy Weight/Extra Heavy

Weight/Letterhead/Pre-Printed/Hole Punched/Colored/Bond/
Recycled/Glossy/Thin Glossy/Thick Glossy/Heavy Glossy

26 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-18 HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Feeder option specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Media weight ● Thin paper: 60–70 grams per square meter (16–18.5 lb)
(duplex)

● Plain paper: 71–90 grams per square meter (18.5–24 lb)

(duplex)

● Thick paper: 91–105 grams per square meter (25–28 lb)

(duplex)

● Heavy Weight paper: 106–130 grams per square meter

(28.2-34.5 lb) (duplex)

● Extra Heavy Weight paper: 131–175 grams per square

meter (34.8-46.5 lb) (duplex)

● Extra Heavy Weight 2 paper: 176-220 grams per square

meter (46.8-58.5 lb) (duplex)

● Extra Heavy Weight 3 paper: 221–256 grams per square

meter (58.5-68 lb) (duplex)

● Extra Heavy Weight 4 paper: 257-300 grams per square

meter (68.3-79.8 lb) (duplex)

● Letterhead: 71–90 grams per square meter (18.5–24 lb)

(duplex)

● Preprinted: 71–90 grams per square meter (18.5–24 lb)

(duplex)

● Hole-punched paper: 71–90 grams per square meter

(18.5–24 lb) (duplex)

● Colored: 71–90 grams per square meter (18.5–24 lb)

(duplex)

● Bond paper: 105–120 grams per square meter (28-32 lb)

(duplex)

● Recycled: 60–90 grams per square meter (16-24 lb)

(duplex)

● Glossy: 106–130 grams per square meter (28.2-34.5 lb)

(duplex)

● Thin glossy: 106–130 grams per square meter (28.2-34.5

lb) (duplex)

● Thick glossy: 131-175 grams per square meter (34.8-46.5

lb) (duplex)

● Heavy glossy: 176-216 grams per square meter (46.8-58

lb) (duplex)

Sensing ● H/W install detect: Yes

● Paper empty and low level detect: Yes

● Paper type detect: No

● Paper size detect: Yes

Dimensions 585 mm x 694.6 mm x 312.2 mm (23 in x 27 in x 12 in)

Weight Net 28.5 kg (62.8 lb), packing 32 kg (70.5 lb)

Option specifications 27
 Table 1-19 HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray Department option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW57A

Capacity 2000 sheets at 80 grams per square meter (20 lb)

Media sizes A4, letter

Media types Plain paper, thin paper, thick paper, punched paper

Media weight 60 to 300 grams per square meter

Sensing ● H/W install detect: Yes

● Paper empty and low level detect: Yes

● Paper type detect: No

● Paper size detect: Yes

Table 1-20 HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW56A

Capacity 3000 sheets at 80 grams per square meter (20 lb)

Media sizes A4, letter

Media types Plain paper, thin paper, thick paper, punched paper

Media weight 60 to 300 grams per square meter

Sensing ● H/W install detect: Yes

● Paper empty and low level detect: Yes

● Paper type detect: No

● Paper size detect: Yes

Table 1-21 HP LaserJet Department Cabinet option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW53A

Dimensions 585 mm x 670 mm x 257 mm

Weight (net) 18 kg

Table 1-22 HP LaserJet Job Separator Department option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW50A

Capacity 125 sheets at 80 grams per square meter

28 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-23 HP LaserJet Inner Finisher option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW49A

Capacity 500 sheets stacking, internal

Staple cartridge capacity 5000 staples/cartridge

Stacking ● Top tray: 50 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per square meter)

● Finishing tray: 500 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per square

meter)

Stapling ● Maximum number of sheets: 50 sheets stapling with 90

grams per square meter sheet

● Stapling positions: Front flat and corner (45), dual, rear

flat and corner (45)

Saddle stapling N/A

Offline stapling N/A

Offset at non-staple job Yes

Offset at staple job N/A

Output stacking Face down

Table 1-24 HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW55A

Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 3,250 sheets stacking

Staple cartridge capacity 5000 staples/cartridge

Stacking ● Top tray: 250 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per square

meter)

● Finishing tray: 3000 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per

square meter)

Stapling ● Maximum number of sheets: 65 sheets stapling with 90

grams per square meter sheet

● Stapling positions: 2 corners (single, 45 degree), center

(double)

Offline stapling Yes

Offset at non-staple job Yes

Offset at staple job Yes

Output stacking Face down

Table 1-25 HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW51A

Option specifications 29
 Table 1-25 HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher option specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 2000 sheets stacking

Staple cartridge capacity 5000 staples/cartridge

Stacking ● Top tray: 250 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per square

meter)

● Finishing tray: 2000 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per

square meter)

Stapling ● Maximum number of sheets: 65 sheets stapling with 90

grams per square meter sheet

● Stapling positions: 2 corners (single), center (double)

Saddle stapling Maximum number of sheets: 25 sheets stapling with 80 grams

per square meter sheet

Offline stapling Yes

Offset at non-staple job Yes

Offset at staple job Yes

Output stacking Face down

Table 1-26 HP LaserJet Hole Punch Accessory option specifications

Item Specification

Part number HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory: Y1G10A

HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory: Y1G11A

HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory: Y1G12A

Available unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4 hole, Swedish 4

Media weight 52–300 grams per square meter

Table 1-27 HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole Punch option specifications

Item Specification

Part number HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Punch: 155P7A

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4 Punch: 155P8A

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Punch: 155P9A

Available unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4 hole, Swedish 4

Media weight 52–256 grams per square meter

Table 1-28 Other options

Item Part number

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Accy Y1G22A

30 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-28 Other options (continued)

Item Part number

HP LaserJet Second Exit Accy Y1G23A

HP Accessibility Assistant 478C2A

HP Removable Hard Drive Enclosure 2NR12A

HP Accessibility Kit 2TD64A

HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless Accy 3JN69A

HP Legic Reader 4QL32A

HP Internal USB Ports 4XN67A

HP MFP Analog Dual Fax 810 Accessory 5QK14A

HP LaserJet Workflow Accelerator Card (z model only) 6HN30A

HP Secure Ultimate Performance TAA Hard Disk Drive 6HN31A

HP MFP Analog Dual Fax 811 Accessory (BBU only) 7ZA07A

HP MFP Analog Single Fax 800 Accessory 7ZA08A

HP MFP Analog Single Fax 801 Accessory (BBU only) 7ZA09A

HP Jetdirect LAN Accessory 8FP31A

HP Secure Ultimate Performance Hard Disk Drive 9EQ11A

HP Foreign Interface Harness B5L31A

HP SmartCard NIPRNet Solution for US Government CC543B

HP SmartCard SIPRNet Solution for US Government F8B30A

HP USB Universal Card Reader X3D03A

HP Card Reader Rotation Adapter Kit1 63C82-67029

HP HIP2 Keystroke Reader Y7C05A

HP SIM for HID iClass for HIP2 Reader Y7C07A

1 The Card Reader Rotation Adapter Kit is helpful when the card insertion angle/direction is not aligned
with the card reader.

Color skin configuration

Learn about the color skin configuration.

The E877, E826, E786, E731, E785 and E730 series provides various color skins to satisfy customer's
needs.

NOTE: The figure below is representational only. Individual devices might appear different from what
is shown in the following figure.

Color skin configuration 31

 Figure 1-11 Color skin configuration

Table 1-29 Color skin configuration

No Color type Description E877 E826 E786 E731 E785 E730

series series series series series series

1 Mineral gray Printer cover set 190A2A 190A3A 190A0A 190A1A 190A0A 190A1A

(Scanner front cover, Front door,

Cover for tray 2, 3)

Dual Casset Feeder (DCF) cover 190A4A 190A4A 190A6A 190A6A 190A6A 190A6A
panel

High Capacity Input (HCI) tray 190A5A 190A5A 190A7A 190A7A 190A7A 190A7A
cover panel

Cabinet cover panel 190A8A 190A8A 190A9A 190A9A 190A9A 190A9A

2 Persimmon Printer cover set 190B2A 190B3A 190B0A 190B1A 190B0A 190B1A

(Scanner front cover, Front door,

Cover for tray 2, 3)

Dual Casset Feeder (DCF) cover 190B4A 190B4A 190B6A 190B6A 190B6A 190B6A
panel

High Capacity Input (HCI) tray 190B5A 190B5A 190B7A 190B7A 190B7A 190B7A
cover panel

Cabinet cover panel 190B8A 190B8A 190B9A 190B9A 190B9A 190B9A

3 Green Printer cover set 190C2A 190C3A 190C0A 190C1A 190C0A 190C1A

(Scanner front cover, Front door,

Cover for tray 2, 3)

Dual Casset Feeder (DCF) cover 190C4A 190C4A 190C6A 190C6A 190C6A 190C6A
panel

High Capacity Input (HCI) tray 190C5A 190C5A 190C7A 190C7A 190C7A 190C7A
cover panel

Cabinet cover panel 190C8A 190C8A 190C9A 190C9A 190C9A 190C9A

4 Mellow yellow Printer cover set 190D2A 190D3A 190D0A 190D1A 190D0A 190D1A

(Scanner front cover, Front door,

Cover for tray 2, 3)

32 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-29 Color skin configuration (continued)

No Color type Description E877 E826 E786 E731 E785 E730

series series series series series series

Dual Casset Feeder (DCF) cover 190D4A 190D4A 190D6A 190D6A 190D6A 190D6A
panel

High Capacity Input (HCI) tray 190D5A 190D5A 190D7A 190D7A 190D7A 190D7A
cover panel

Cabinet cover panel 190D8A 190D8A 190D9A 190D9A 190D9A 190D9A

5 Purple reign Printer cover set 190F2A 190F3A 190F0A 190F1A 190F0A 190F1A

(Scanner front cover, Front door,

Cover for tray 2, 3)

Dual Casset Feeder (DCF) cover 190F4A 190F4A 190F6A 190F6A 190F6A 190F6A
panel

High Capacity Input (HCI) tray 190F5A 190F5A 190F7A 190F7A 190F7A 190F7A
cover panel

Cabinet cover panel 190F8A 190F8A 190F9A 190F9A 190F9A 190F9A

Color skin configuration 33

 2 Product installation and maintenance

You will learn more about product installation and maintenance.

Product installation
For more information about hardware, engine, and accessory installation for the printer, review the
following document.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP - Installation Guides

Maintenance
Learn about preventive maintenance and printer cleaning procedures.

PM table (Preventive Maintenance)

HP recommends cleaning and checking the following maintenance items at the specified intervals.

Some easy items are strongly recommended to be executed during every visit, regardless of the page
count, to make sure the printer produces quality copies and to extend the service life of the printer. Also,
HP recommends inspecting consumable parts and replacing if needed to reduce the visit count. After
replacing, a counter reset should be done to make sure the next replacement window is clear.

NOTE:

● Use the table below as just a reference. The page counts below assume a color usage ratio of 40%.

● Depending on the printing patterns and the job mode used, consumable part lifespans vary.

● Toner cartridges and the Toner Collection Unit are excluded from this table because they are
classified as supplies, not long life consumables (LLCs).

In the table below, the following abbreviations are used:

● C: Clean

● I: Inspect

● R: Replace

The counts below indicate the recommended engine counter value for each item (Engine life 3,600K).

34 Chapter 2 Product installation and maintenance

Table 2-1 Preventive Maintenance

Type Item 300K 600K 900K 1800K 2100K Notes

1500K 1200K 2700K 3600K

3300K 2400K

3000K

Clean/ Paper dust C C C C C Recommend

Inspect holder ed at every
visit

ACR (CTD) C C Needed

Sensor when ITB is
replaced

LSU window C C C C C Recommend

ed at every
visit

Scanner C C C C C Recommend
glass ed at every
visit

ADF CIS C C C C C Recommend

(Contact ed at every
Image visit
Sensor)

Paper guide I I I I I Recommend

adjustment ed at every
check in visit
Trays

Consumable K OPC I/R I/R I/R I/R I/R

check
Y/M/C OPC I/R I/R Assumes
40% color
usage

ITB Cleaner I/R I/R I/R I/R I/R

Intermediate I/R I/R

transfer belt
(ITB)

Transfer I/R I/R

roller

Fuser I/R I/R

K Deve units I/R I/R

Y/M/C Deve I/R Assumes

units 40% color
usage

Roller kit for I/R I/R I/R I/R I/R Recommend

Tray 1 ed at every
visit

Roller kit for I/R I/R I/R I/R I/R Recommend

Tray 2-x ed at every
visit

ADF Roller kit I/R I/R I/R I/R I/R Recommend

ed at every
visit

PM table (Preventive Maintenance) 35

 Cleaning
Use the procedures below to carry out regular cleaning procedures.

Cleaning the paper dust stick

Learn about cleaning the paper dust stick.

The paper dust stick needs to be cleaned after a specified number of pages are printed. A Clean the
paper dust stick message will appear on the control panel. This is when the paper dust stick must be
cleaned. Use the following procedure to complete this task.

1. Open the front door (callout 1), and then remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU; callout 2).

CAUTION: To avoid spilling toner, do not tilt the TCDU when handling it.

NOTE: To remove the TCDU, push in on two tabs to release the duct, and then pull it straight out
(callout 2) of the printer to remove it.

2. Pull out the paper dust stick.

3. Remove the paper dust.

Figure 2-1 Remove the paper dust

36 Chapter 2 Product installation and maintenance

 4. Insert the paper dust stick back into the slot.

5. Install the TCDU, and then close the front door.

NOTE: Make sure the cover is securely closed. If the message still appears, repeat this process.

Cleaning the ACR (CTD) Sensor

Use the following procedure to clean the ACR (CTD) sensor.

The engine has the feature of ACR (CTD) sensor cleaning automatically with the motor driving the
sensor cover shutter open and closed. Nonetheless, we recommend you clean the sensor manually at
every ITB replacement to make sure the sensor is clean.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the ITB cleaner and ITB unit.

For instructions on removing these items, see {Xref Error! Target does not exist.}Removing and
replacing the ITB and cleaning unit kit

Cleaning the ACR (CTD) Sensor 37

 3. Clean the sensor window using a lint-free cloth while pushing the shutter to right.

4. Replace the ITB cleaner and ITB unit, and close the right door.

Cleaning the LSU window

It is recommended that the LSU window be cleaned during every maintenance visit. Use the following
procedure to complete this task.

NOTE: This task must be completed when the printer power is on due to the LSU shutter position.

1. Open the front door.

38 Chapter 2 Product installation and maintenance

2. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU). Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and
then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer to remove it.

3. Clean the LSU window for each color using the cleaning bar attached inside the front cover.

Insert the cleaning bar into the hole. Push it in and pull it out several times to clean the window, as
shown in the images below.

Cleaning the LSU window 39

 4. Replace the cleaning bar and the TCDU, and then close the front door.

Cleaning the scanner glass

It is recommended that the scanner glass be cleaned during every maintenance visit. Use the following
procedure to complete this task.

1. Open the ADF by lifting it up.

2. Clean the image scanner area and flat-bed glass using a lint-free cloth.

3. Close the ADF.

40 Chapter 2 Product installation and maintenance

Cleaning the ADF CIS (Contact Image Sensor)
It is recommended that the ADF CIS (Contact Image Sensor) be cleaned during every maintenance visit.
Use the following procedure to complete this task.

1. Open the ADF by lifting it up.

2. Clean the CIS scanning area, located underneath ADF, using a lint-free cloth.

3. Close the ADF.

Inspection procedures
Use the following procedures to inspect the printer during maintenance visits.

Inspect paper guide adjustment in trays

Checking paper guide adjustment and paper loading status is recommended during every visit. This is
important in order to reduce paper jams. Many paper jams occur due to incorrect paper stacking in the
trays.

1. Fan the paper.

2. Load the paper. Make sure the paper guides are correctly adjusted.

Cleaning the ADF CIS (Contact Image Sensor) 41

 Inspect consumables (LLC life remaining)
The check of consumable life remaining is recommended at every visit so that the LLC is replaced at
the proper time, and does not exceed its end of life. Active replacement is recommended if the LLC life
remaining low. This will maintain the expected print quality and, also help to reduce extra visits.

Find the Print Supplies information report by using the following control panel menu navigation:

1. Select the following control panel menus:

● Support tools

● Service (Enter Pin: 03087722)

● Advanced service

● Service reports

2. Select Supplies information report and click the Print button.

Check the life remaining for each LLC in the Supplies information report. Refer to the following LLC (Long
life consumable) list.

Table 2-2 Long life consumables (LLCs)

Item Part number Life Remark

Yellow OPC W9078MC 240,000 pages

Magenta OPC W9078MC 240,000 pages

Cyan OPC W9078MC 240,000 pages

42 Chapter 2 Product installation and maintenance

 Table 2-2 Long life consumables (LLCs) (continued)

Item Part number Life Remark

Black OPC W9077MC 300,000 pages

ITB cleaner 5PN79A 300,000 pages Manual counter reset

Intermediate transfer belt 5PN78A 600,000 pages Manual counter reset. ITB
(ITB) unit kit cleaner involved in this kit

Transfer roller 5PN80A 600,000 pages Manual counter reset

Fuser unit (100V) 5PN53A 600,000 pages Only for Japan

Fuser unit (110V) 5PN76A 600,000 pages

Fuser unit (220V) 5PN77A 600,000 pages

Yellow developer unit 5PN73A 900,000 pages Manual counter reset

Magenta developer unit 5PN74A 900,000 pages Manual counter reset

Cyan developer unit 5PN75A 900,000 pages Manual counter reset

Black developer unit 5PN72A 900,000 pages Manual counter reset

Pickup/Forward/Separation 5PN66A 360,000 pages Manual counter reset

roller (for Tray 2-x)

Pickup/Forward/Separation 5RC03A 200,000 pages Manual counter reset

roller (for Tray1)

ADF roller kit (for 200 sheets J8J95A 150,000 pages Manual counter reset
dn bundle)

ADF roller kit (for 300 sheets z 5RC00A 300,000 pages Manual counter reset
bundle)

NOTE: Maintenance part lifespans will vary depending upon printing patterns and the job mode used.

LLC removal and replacement procedures

Use the following links to see removal and replacement procedures for long-life consumables (LLCs).

● Removal and replacement: Drum unit

● Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) cleaning unit kit

● Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB)

● Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer (T2) unit

● Removal and replacement: Fuser unit

● Removal and replacement: Developer unit

● Removal and replacement: Tray 2, 3 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)

● Removal and replacement: Tray 1 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)

● Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (300sh) (pickup, feed, and separation rollers)

● Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (200sh) (pickup, feed, and separation rollers)

LLC removal and replacement procedures 43

 Counter reset after LLC replacement
The LLCs listed below require their counter reset manually after replacement. LLCs not listed here have
EEPROM/CRUM counters that are reset automatically.

● ITB cleaner (use steps 1 and 2)

● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit kit (use steps 1 and 2)

● Transfer roller (use steps 1 and 2)

● Developer units (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black) (use steps 1 and 2)

● Pickup/Forward/Separation roller (for Tray 2-x) (use steps 1 and 2)

● Pickup/Forward/Separation roller (for Tray1) (use steps 1 and 2)

● ADF roller kit (for 200-sheet dn bundle ADF and 300-sheet z bundle ADF) (use steps 3 and 4)

Reset the counter from the control panel using the following instructions.

1. For all LLCs except the ADF roller kit: Select the following menus:

● Support tools

● Service (Enter Pin: 03087722)

● Reset supplies

2. Select the LLC being replaced, and then click the Reset button.

3. For the ADF roller kit LLC only: Select the following menus:

● Settings

● Manage Supplies

● Reset supplies

4. Select the Document Feeder Kit item, and then click the Reset button.

44 Chapter 2 Product installation and maintenance

3 Theory of operation

You will learn more about theory of operation.

Base printer
Learn about the theory of operation for the base printer.

Covers (1 of 2)
Learn about the printer covers.

Figure 3-1 Covers (1 of 2)

C9
C8

C11
C14

C16
C17

C12

C15 C10

C20

C18
C21

C22

C23
C19

C13

Table 3-1 Covers (1 of 2)

Callout Part name Part number

C8 Middle cover 6ER04-40033

NOTE: Located behind the middle upper cover (towards the rear of the printer)
under the ISA whole unit.

C9 Middle upper cover 6ER04-40026

C10 Right door sHCI dummy cover JC63-04918B

Theory of operation 45
 Table 3-1 Covers (1 of 2) (continued)

Callout Part name Part number

C11 Right upper cover 6ER04-40021

C12 Right rear cover 6ER04-61003

C13 Right front cover 6ER04-40005

C14 Right middle cover assembly 6ER04-61006

C15 HIP cover 6EQ94-40032

C16 Middle left cover 6ER04-40036

C17 Exit cover stacker 6ER04-61004

C18 Inner cover 6ER04-40048

NOTE: This cover is behind the front cover (C20).

C19 Front lower cover 6ER04-40030

NOTE: This cover is behind Tray 2.

C20 Front cover assembly 6ER04-61001

C21 TCU cover assembly 6ER04-40050

C22 Tray 2 cover - CMF panel 5QK03-40027

C23 Tray 3 cover - CMF panel 5QK09-40058

Covers (2 of 2)
Learn about the printer covers.

46 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-2 Covers (2 of 2)

C4

C1 C6

C5
C3

C7
C2

Table 3-2 Covers (2 of 2)

Callout Part name Part number

C1 Rear upper cover 6ER04-40008

C2 Rear lower cover 6ER04-61002

C3 Controller cover 6ER04-61005

C4 Exit rear cover 6ER04-40028

C5 Left top cover 6ER04-40027

C6 Left upper cover JC63-04862B

C7 Left cover 6ER04-40049

Feeding system
Learn about the feeding system.

Feeding system overview

Learn about the feeding system overview.

The feeding system is responsible for the process ranging from picking up paper to ejecting it out of the
machine. This system is mainly composed of Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, registration unit, loop sensing unit, exit
unit, and duplex unit.

Feeding system 47
 Feeding system workflow
Learn about the feeding workflow.

Figure 3-3 Feeding system workflow

Table 3-3 Feeding system workflow

Callout Part name Description

1 Tray 1 Picks up one sheet of paper and delivers it to the registration unit

2 Tray 2 Stores paper for printing, picks up and transfers the paper to the registration
unit

3 Tray 3 Stores paper for printing, picks up and transfer the paper to the registration
unit

4 Registration unit Arranges the paper moved from the tray

5 Loop sensing unit Controls the paper moving speed between the drum and the fuser

6 Exit unit Discharges the paper to the outside of the product or make and move the
paper path so that the paper can be moved toward the duplex unit for duplex
printing

7 Duplex unit Allows paper to move from the exit unit to the registration unit for duplex
printing

Feeding system rollers

Learn about the feeding system rollers.

48 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-4 Feeding system rollers

Table 3-4 Feeding system rollers

Callout Part name Part number Description

R2 Tray 1 pickup roller JC93-01721A Picks up paper on the tray

R3 Tray 1 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper inside the printer

R4 Tray 1 reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevents multiple pages feeding into the printer

R1 Tray 1 prefeed roller SNA Moves paper to the registration roller

R5 Tray 2 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper from the knock-up plate of the tray

R6 Tray 2 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the feed roller

R7 Tray 2 reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevents multiple paper feeding into the machine

R11 Tray 2 feed roller SNA Moves paper to the registration roller

R8 Tray 3 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper from the knock-up plate of the tray

R9 Tray 3 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the feed roller

R10 Tray 3 reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevents multiple paper feeding into the machine

R12 Tray 3 feed roller SNA Moves paper to the registration roller

R13 Trans roller SNA Moves paper from Tray 3 or Tray 4 to the registration

R14 Registration roller SNA Arranges a paper moved from the tray and moves the
paper to the ITB - second transfer roller

R15 Exit 1 roller SNA Moves paper to the exit 1

Feeding system rollers 49

 Table 3-4 Feeding system rollers (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

R16 Exit 2 feed roller SNA Moves paper to the exit 2 roller

R17 Exit 2 roller SNA Moves paper to the exit 2

R18 Duplex 1 roller SNA Moves paper to the duplex unit during duplex printing

R19 Duplex 2 roller SNA Moves paper to the duplex 2 roller

R20 Duplex 3 roller SNA Moves paper to the registration roller

Feeding system sensors

Learn about the feeding system sensors.

Figure 3-5 Feeding system sensors

Table 3-5 Feeding system sensors

Callout Part name Part number Sensor type Description

S1 Tray 1 paper empty 0604-001490 Photo interrupter (reflect) Checks whether a paper is on
sensor the Tray 1

S2 Tray 2 empty sensor 3SJ00-60110 Photo interrupter (sensing) Checks whether a paper is on
the Tray 2

S3 Tray 2 stack height 3SJ00-60110 Photo interrupter (sensing) Sets the proper height of paper
sensor to make a contact with the
pickup roller

50 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-5 Feeding system sensors (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Sensor type Description

S4 Tray 2 prefeed sensor 0604-001490 Photo interrupter (reflect) Keeps the proper distance
between papers on the paper
path

S5 Tray 2 open, paper JC93-01408A Checks whether the tray is

size sensor closed, make signals to identify
the paper size

S6 Tray 3 empty sensor 3SJ00-60110 Photo interrupter (sensing) Checks whether a paper is on
the Tray 3

S7 Tray 3 stack height 3SJ00-60110 Photo interrupter (sensing) Sets the proper height of paper
sensor to make a contact with the
pickup roller

S8 Tray 3 prefeed sensor 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (reflect) Keeps the proper distance
between papers on the paper
path

S9 Tray 3 open, paper JC93-01408A Checks whether the tray is

size sensor closed, make signals to identify
the paper size

S10 Feed 2 sensor 0604-001490 Photo interrupter (reflect) Checks whether the paper
correctly comes from the Tray
3, 4, 5 or 6

S11 Registration sensor 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (reflect) Checks whether the paper
comes into the registration unit

S12 Loop sensor 1 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Checks whether the paper is
moved with the proper speed
and movement by the fuser

S13 Loop sensor 2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Checks whether the paper is
moved with the proper speed
and movement by the fuser

S14 Fuser out sensor 0960-5271 Paper sensor Checks whether the paper
escapes well from the fuser

S15 Out bin 1 full sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Checks whether the paper
correctly goes out on the output
bin, and it is loaded up to the
maximum capacity

S16 Out bin 2 full sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Checks whether the paper goes
out on the output bin correctly,
and it is loaded up to the
maximum capacity. (Optional,
included in the job separator)

S17 Exit 2 sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Checks whether the paper goes
out to the out bin 2

S18 Duplex jam 1 sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Moves paper to the duplex unit
during duplex printing

S19 Duplex jam 2 sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Checks whether the paper goes
through the duplex unit

Feeding system motors and solenoids

Learn about the feeding system motors and solenoids.

Feeding system motors and solenoids 51

 Figure 3-6 Feeding system motors and solenoids

Table 3-6 Feeding system motors and solenoids

Callout Part name Part number Motor type Description

M1 Feed motor JC31-00163A Hybrid stepping motor Drives the Tray1 rollers, feed
rollers, and trans roller

M2 Tray 2 pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Stepping motor Drives the Tray 2 pickup,
forward, and reverse rollers or
knock-up plate

M3 Tray 3 pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Stepping motor Drives the Tray 3 pickup,
forward, and reverse rollers or
knock-up plate

M4 Registration motor JC31-00123B Hybrid stepping motor Drive the registration roller and
and Tray 1 motor Tray 1 roller

M6 Duplex motor JC93-01687A Stepping motor Drives the rollers in the duplex
unit to move the paper from the
exit unit to the registration unit

M24 Exit motor JC93-01686A Stepping motor Drives the rollers in the exit unit
to move the paper from the
fuser unit to the exit unit

SL1 Tray 1 pickup solenoid JC33-00029B Solenoid Moves the pickup roller up and
down

SL2 Return gate solenoid JC33-00031B Solenoid Changes the paper path to the
(optional) second exit unit

52 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Tray 1 unit
Learn about the Tray 1 unit.

Tray 1 overview
Learn about Tray 1 operation.

The Tray 1 unit picks up the paper and delivers to the registration unit.

To ensure that the paper is placed on the Tray 1, a reflective type of tray empty sensor is placed on
the side of the paper doorway. The Tray 1 unit is equipped with three rollers to pull a paper and push it
into the inside of the machine, each called pickup, forward, and reverse roller. The pickup roller moves
downward to pull the paper, which is controlled by the Tray 1 solenoid. The Tray 1 pickup clutch controls
the timing of three rollers’ rotation coming from the feed motor. The Tray 1 feed roller is mounted to move
the pulled paper into the registration unit. The Tray 1 clutch controls the timing of the Tray 1 feed roller’s
rotation coming from the feed motor.

Figure 3-7 Overview of Tray 1 unit

Tray 1 unit 53
 Figure 3-8 Detail view of Tray 1 unit

Table 3-7 Parts information for Tray 1 unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U2 Tray 1 unit JC90-01844A Picks up paper and delivers to registration unit

M1 Feed motor JC31-00189A Drives the Tray 1 feed roller, and pickup/forward/reverse
rollers

CL1 Tray 1 clutch JC47-00037A Controls the timing of Tray 1 feed roller’s rotation coming
from the feed motor

54 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-7 Parts information for Tray 1 unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

R1 Tray 1 feed roller JC66-05466A Moves paper inside the machine

CL2 Tray 1 pickup clutch Z9Y05-60012 Controls the timing of three rollers’ rotation coming from
the feed motor (Pickup roller, Forward roller, Reverse
roller)

K1 Tray 1 roller kit 5RC03-67001 Includes pickup, forward, and reverse rollers

R2 Tray 1 pickup roller JC93-01721A Picks up paper on the Tray 1

R3 Tray 1 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper inside the printer

R4 Tray 1 reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevents multiple paper feeding into the printer

SL1 Tray 1 solenoid JC33-00029B Moves the pickup roller up and down

S1 Tray 1 paper empty sensor 0604-001490 Checks whether a paper is on the Tray 1

U1 Right door assembly JC95-02247A

1 Right door front link JC66-04398A

2 Right door front damper JC66-01425A

3 Right door front damper JC61-08935A

bracket

Tray 1 unit operation

Learn about Tray 1 unit operation.

Tray 1 uses the following sequence of operation.

1. The paper empty sensor (callout 1) detects if paper is loaded in Tray 1.

Figure 3-9 Tray 1 empty sensor

2. The Tray 1 solenoid (callout 2) moves to the left.

The Tray 1 pickup roller (callout 3) moves downward until it touches the paper in the tray.

Tray 1 unit operation 55

 Figure 3-10 Tray 1 solenoid and pickup roller

3. The Tray 1 pickup roller moves the paper to the Tray 1 forward and reverse rollers (callout 4).

The Tray 1 forward roller moves the paper to the registration unit (callout 5).

Figure 3-11 Moving the paper to the registration unit

4. The Tray 1 pickup roller returns to the original position to wait for the next printing job (callout 6).

Figure 3-12 Tray 1 pickup roller returns to the original position

56 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Tray 1 unit driving
Learn about Tray 1 unit driving.

Figure 3-13 Tray 1 unit driving

● Tray 1 driving: 1 feed motor > 2 pulley and gear > 3 gear > 4 gear and coupler (feed roller 1 drive) > 5
Tray 1 pickup clutch (Tray 1 pickup roller, Tray 1 forward roller)

Figure 3-14 Tray 1 pickup driving

● Tray 1 pickup driving: 6 gear > 7 Tray 1 feed roller > 8 Tray 1 pickup clutch > 9 gear > 10 gears > 11 Tray 1
pickup and forward roller

Tray 2/3 unit

Learn about the Tray 2/3 unit.

Tray 1 unit driving 57

 Tray 2/3 unit overview
Learn about the Tray 2/3 unit overview.

The Tray 2/3 units store paper. The Tray 2/3 pickup assembly picks up and transfers the paper to the feed
roller. Then the feed roller sends the paper to the registration unit.

NOTE: The initial setting of the Tray 2/3 unit is based on ISO216 standard. In countries where letter
size paper is used as the base, the tray guide must be adjusted to store the paper correctly before
printing.

Tray 2/3 cassette

Learn about Tray 2/3 cassette operation.

The paper size is set using the front and rear guides in each tray cassette. Inside the cassettes there is
a knock-up plate operated by the pickup motor, which serves to lift the paper for the pickup process.

Figure 3-15 Overview of Tray 2/3 cassettes

Table 3-8 Overview of Tray 2/3 cassette

Callout Part name Part number Description

U3 Tray 2 cassette JC90-01853A Stores paper

58 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-8 Overview of Tray 2/3 cassette (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

U4 Tray 3 cassette 5QK09-60121 Stores paper

Figure 3-16 Detail view of Tray 2 cassette

Table 3-9 Detail view of Tray 2 cassette

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Rear guide SNA Keeps the paper well organized and settled

2 Knock-up plate SNA Raises the leading edge of the paper for pickup process

3 Front guide SNA Keeps the paper well organized and settled

Figure 3-17 Detail view of Tray 3 cassette

Table 3-10 Detail view of Tray 3 cassette

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Rear guide SNA Keeps the paper well organized and settled

Tray 2/3 cassette 59

 Table 3-10 Detail view of Tray 3 cassette (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

2 Knock-up plate SNA Raises the leading edge of the paper for pickup process

3 Front guide SNA Keeps the paper well organized and settled

Tray 2/3 pickup assembly

Learn about Tray 2/3 pickup assembly.

The Tray 2/3 pickup sections have a pickup roller, a forward roller, and a reverse roller that pulls the
paper from the tray.

The Tray 2 empty sensor checks whether paper is loaded on the tray. The stack height sensor detects
the proper height to raise the knock-up plate to a position where it can be picked up. When the
appropriate pressure is formed between the pickup roller and the paper, and the pickup roller and
the forward roller are driven by the pickup motor, the paper is picked up and the reverse roller prevents
multiple paper feeding. The prefeed sensor detects whether the paper leading edge is on the pickup
roller or the forward roller during pickup process, maintaining the proper span between the first paper
and the next page paper.

Figure 3-18 Overview of Tray 2 pickup assembly

Table 3-11 Overview of Tray 2 pickup assembly

Callout Part name Part number Description

K2 Tray 2 roller kit 5PN66-67001 Roller kit for Tray 2 or Tray 3 includes pickup, forward and
reverse roller

R5 Tray 2 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper from the knock-up plate of the tray

R6 Tray 2 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the registration roller

R7 Tray 2 reverse roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the registration roller

S2 Tray 2 empty sensor 3SJ00-60110 Checks whether the tray is empty

60 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-11 Overview of Tray 2 pickup assembly (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S3 Tray 2 stack height sensor 3SJ00-60110 Checks how much paper is loaded in the tray

S4 Tray 2 prefeed sensor 0604-001490 Checks whether picking up a paper is properly

processed

S5 Tray 2 open, paper size JC93-01408A Checks whether the tray is closed, make signals to
sensor identify the paper size

M2 Tray 2 pickup motor JC93-01083A Drives the Tray 2 pickup, forward, and reverse roller or
the knock-up plate

Figure 3-19 Detail view of Tray 2 pickup assembly

Table 3-12 Parts information for Tray 2 pickup assembly

Callout Part name Part number Description

U5 Tray 2 pickup assembly JC93-01694A

R5 Tray 2 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper from the knock-up plate of the tray

R6 Tray 2 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the registration roller

R7 Tray 2 reverse roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the registration roller

1 Tray 2 empty sensor SNA Checks whether the tray is empty

actuator

S2 Tray 2 empty sensor 3SJ00-60110 Checks whether the tray is empty

S3 Tray 2 stack height sensor 3SJ00-60110 Checks how much paper is loaded in the tray

S4 Tray 2 prefeed sensor 0604-001490 Checks whether picking up a paper is properly

processed

Tray 2/3 pickup assembly 61

 Figure 3-20 Detail view of Tray 2 cassette, side view

Table 3-13 Parts information for Tray 2 pickup assembly, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

U9 Tray 2 pickup drive JC93-01663A

assembly

M2 Tray 2 pickup motor JC93-01083A Drives the Tray 2 pickup, forward, and reverse roller or
the knock-up plate

Figure 3-21 Overview of Tray 3 pickup assembly

Table 3-14 Overview of Tray 3 pickup assembly

Callout Part name Part number Description

K3 Tray 3 roller kit 5PN66-67001

62 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-14 Overview of Tray 3 pickup assembly (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

R8 Tray 3 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper from the knock-up plate of the tray

R9 Tray 3 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the registration roller

R10 Tray 3 reverse roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the registration roller

S6 Tray 3 empty sensor 3SJ00-60110 Checks whether the tray is empty

S7 Tray 3 stack height sensor 3SJ00-60110 Checks how much paper is loaded in the tray

S8 Tray 3 prefeed sensor 0604-001381 Checks whether picking up a paper is properly

processed

S9 Tray 3 open, paper size JC93-01408A Checks whether the tray is closed, make signals to
sensor identify the paper size

M3 Tray 3 pickup motor JC93-01083A Drives tray 3 pickup, forward, and reverse roller or the
knock-up plate

Figure 3-22 Detail view of Tray 3 pickup assembly

Table 3-15 Parts information for Tray 3 pickup assembly

Callout Part name Part number Description

U6 Tray 3 pickup assembly JC93-01695A

R8 Tray 3 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper from the knock-up plate of the tray

R9 Tray 3 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the registration roller

R10 Tray 3 reverse roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the registration roller

2 Tray 3 empty sensor SNA Checks whether the tray is empty

actuator

S6 Tray 3 empty sensor 3SJ00-60110 Checks whether the tray is empty

S7 Tray 3 stack height sensor 3SJ00-60110 Checks how much paper is loaded in the tray

Tray 2/3 pickup assembly 63

 Figure 3-23 Detail view of Tray 3 pickup assembly. side view

Table 3-16 Parts information for Tray 3 pickup assembly, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

U10 Tray 3 pickup drive JC93-01663A

assembly

M3 Tray 3 pickup motor JC93-01083A Drives Tray 3 pickup, forward, and reverse roller or the
knock-up plate

NOTE: The Tray 2 pickup assembly and the Tray 3 pickup assembly have a similar shape, but they are
not interchangeable.

Tray 2/3 paper size sensor, tray heater

Learn about Tray 2/3 paper size sensor, tray heater.

The Tray 2/3 paper size sensor recognizes the paper size, at the same time the tray open sensor detects
whether the tray is opened or closed. The tray heater can be installed to prevent image defects or
curling of printed paper. This part is available as an option.

Figure 3-24 Detail view of Tray 2/3 paper size sensor, tray heater

64 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-17 Parts information for Tray 2/3 paper size sensor, tray heater

Callout Part name Part number Description

S5 Tray 2 open, paper size JC93-01408A

sensor

S9 Tray 2 open, paper size JC93-01408A

sensor

a Tray open sensor NA Checks whether the tray is closed

b Paper size sensor NA Makes signals to identify the paper size

c Tray heater connector NA Supplies power to the tray heater

U61 Tray heater Y1G22-67901 Dries damp paper

(110V)

Y1G22-67902
(220V)

Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor

Learn about Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor.

The paper from Tray 2 goes through the Tray 2 feed roller to the registration unit. The paper from Tray 3
goes through the Tray 3 feed roller and feed 2 sensor to the registration unit. The feed roller is driven by
the feed motor.

Figure 3-25 Overview of Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor

Table 3-18 Overview of Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor

Callout Part name Part number Description

M1 Feed motor JC31-00189A Drives the Tray1 and feed rollers

R11 Tray 2 feed roller SNA Moves paper to the registration roller

R12 Tray 3 feed roller SNA Moves paper to the tray 3 trans roller

R13 Tray 3 trans roller SNA Moves paper to the registration roller

Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor 65

 Table 3-18 Overview of Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S10 Feed 2 sensor 0604-001490 Checks whether paper comes from Tray 3, 4, 5 or 6
correctly

Figure 3-26 Detail view of Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor, side view

Table 3-19 Parts information for Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

U7 Feed drive assembly JC93-01664A Drives the rollers of Tray1 and the feed rollers

M1 Feed motor JC31-00189A Drives the rollers of Tray1 and the feed rollers

Figure 3-27 Detail view of Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor

Table 3-20 Parts information for Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

R11 Tray 2 feed roller SNA Moves paper to the registration roller

66 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-20 Parts information for Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor, side view (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

R12 Tray 3 feed roller SNA Moves paper to the tray 3 trans roller

R13 Tray 3 trans roller SNA Moves paper to the registration roller

U8 Right door take away JC95-01972A

assembly

S10 Feed 2 sensor 0604-001490 Checks whether the paper correctly comes from the tray
3, 4, 5 or 6

Tray 2/3 operation

Learn about Tray 2/3 operation.

Tray 2/3 uses the following sequence of operation.

1. When the tray is closed, the tray input lever is pushed.

The pickup roller moves down to contact with the surface of the paper (callout 1), and the reverse
roller moves upward to make a contact with the forward roller (callout 2).

Figure 3-28 Tray 2/3 pickup roller and reverse roller

2. The Tray 2/3 motor drives the knock-up plate to move upward to the paper to the pickup roller.

The pickup roller moves the paper to the forward roller (callout 3). The forward roller makes the
paper moves into the registration roller, and the reverse roller prevents multiple sheets of paper
from being lifted at once.

Tray 2/3 operation 67

 Figure 3-29 Tray 2/3 knock-up plate and forward roller

3. The feed roller moves one sheet of paper to the registration roller (callout 4).

Figure 3-30 Moving the paper to the registration unit.

Tray 2/3 driving

Learn about Tray 2/3 driving.

68 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-31 Tray 2/3 driving

● Pickup: Tray 2/3 pickup motor > clockwise rotation > 1 gear > 2 gear (Tray 2/3 pickup roller, forward
roller)

● Tray lift: Tray 2/3 pickup motor > counterclockwise rotation > 1 gear > 3 gear > 4 gear > 5 gear > 6
gear and coupler (lift plate)

Figure 3-32 Tray 1 driving

● Tray1 driving: 1 feed motor > 2 pulley and gear > 6 gear and coupler (feed roller 2 drive) > 7 pulley and
coupler (feed roller 3 drive)

Tray 2/3 driving 69

 Registration unit and loop sensing
Learn about registration and loop sensing.

Registration unit and loop sensing overview

Paper passes out of the tray through the registration unit and loop sensor toward the fuser unit.

Paper moves to the registration unit. It stops the paper for a very short period and aligns with the leading
edge of the paper correctly. Registration motor drives the registration roller so that the paper goes
between the ITB and Tray 2 roller. The paper reaches the loop sensor. The rotation speed of the fuser
unit is finely adjusted according to the change of the loop sensor signal. The paper passing through the
fuser goes out through the fuser out and the paper moves toward the exit unit.

Figure 3-33 Overview of the registration and loop sensing unit

Table 3-21 Overview of the registration and loop sensing unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U11 Registration unit 8GS05-60128 Arranges the paper moved from the tray

R14 Registration roller NA Aligns with the leading edge straight, moves the paper to
the drum and second transfer roller

1 Loop sensor actuator NA Makes the signal changed when touching the paper

S11 Registration sensor 0604-001381 Checks whether the paper comes into the registration
unit

S12 Loop sensor 1 0604-001393 Checks whether the paper is moved with the proper
speed and movement by the fuser

S13 Loop sensor 2 0604-001393 Checks whether the paper is moved with the proper
speed and movement by the fuser

S14 Fuser out sensor 0960-5271 Checks whether the paper moves out from the fuser
without a paper jam

M4 Registration motor JC31-00189A Drives the registration roller

70 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-34 Detail view of registration and loop sensing unit

Table 3-22 Detail view of registration and loop sensing unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

R14 Registration roller NA Aligns with the leading edge straight, moves the paper to
the drum and second transfer roller

U13 Second transfer unit 5PN80A

1 Loop sensor actuator NA Makes the signal changed when touching the paper

S12 Loop sensor 1 0604-001393 Checks whether the paper is moved with the proper
speed and movement by the fuser

S13 Loop sensor 2 0604-001393 Checks whether the paper is moved with the proper
speed and movement by the fuser

S14 Fuser out sensor 0960-5271 Checks whether the paper moves out from the fuser
without a paper jam

Figure 3-35 Detail view of registration and loop sensing unit, side view

Registration unit and loop sensing overview 71

 Table 3-23 Detail view of registration and loop sensing unit, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

U12 Registration drive JC93-01665A Drives the registration roller

assembly

M4 Registration motor JC31-00189A Drives the registration roller assembly

Registration unit operation

Learn about registration unit operation.

Figure 3-36 Registration unit operation

1. The paper is moved into the registration until it reaches the registration roller.

2. The registration roller keeps moving the paper toward the roller for a short period of time to align
with the leading edge straight.

3. The registration roller moves the paper to the drum and second transfer roller.

NOTE: Problems such as skew may occur due to the incorrect alignment of the paper. To correct this,
Service Tools has a function to adjust the timing of the registration roller’s resume operation.

Loop sensor operation

Learn about loop sensor operation.

72 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-37 Loop sensor operation

1. If the fuser unit moves the paper slower than the proper level, the curl of the paper accumulates and
touches the loop sensor actuator (Callout a), it makes loop sensor (Callout b) signal change.

2. The fuser operation speed is increasing slightly, and it makes the curl of the paper decreased until
the loop sensor signal turns back to the original state.

Registration unit driving

Learn about registration unit driving.

Figure 3-38 Registration unit driving

● Registration unit driving: 1 registration motor > 2 pulley and gear (registration roller)

Exit unit
Learn about the exit unit.

Exit unit overview

Learn about the exit unit.

Registration unit driving 73

 The exit unit is the last step of printing, and it discharges the paper to the outside of the product or
moves the paper through the paper path so that the it can be moved toward the duplex unit for duplex
printing.

The exit unit is largely composed of an exit 1 section for discharging the paper to the output bin, and an
exit 2 section for ejecting the paper to the out bin 2 or returning the paper to the duplex unit.

The exit 1 works a role of discharging the paper to the out bin. It is composed of an output bin full sensor
that checks whether the paper is correctly discharged to the output bin and the stacked paper exceeds
the maximum capacity. The return gate solenoid changes the paper path to move the paper to output
bin 2. The roller to move the paper inside the unit is driven by a fuser motor.

The exit 2 is used to print the paper to out bin 2 or to store the paper for duplex printing. The exit 2 sensor
is installed to check whether the paper is discharged to out bin 2, and an out bin 2 full sensor is provided
to detect whether the bin is full. There is a duplex jam 1 sensor to check if the paper has entered the
duplex part correctly when printing duplex.

The exit 2 motor works for transferring paper to out bin 2, and the duplex 1 motor works for moving the
paper in the opposite direction for duplex work.

Figure 3-39 Overview of the exit unit

74 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-24 Overview of the exit unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U17 Job separator (optional) 5QK03-61008

U16 Exit unit JC90-01856A

S15 Out bin 1 full sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper correctly goes out on the
output bin, and it is loaded up to the maximum capacity

SL2 Return gate solenoid JC33-00031B Open or closes the paper path in case of duplex printing

S16 Out bin 2 full 0604-001393 Check whether the paper goes out on the output bin
sensor(optional) correctly, and that it is loaded up to the maximum
capacity (Optional, included in job separator)

M5 Exit 2 motor JC93-00336A Drive the exit 2 roller

S18 Duplex jam 1 sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper correctly moves to the duplex
unit

M6 Duplex 1 motor JC93-00336A Drive the duplex 1 roller

S17 Exit 2 sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper goes out to the out bin 2

R15 Exit 1 roller SNA Moves the paper to the exit 1

R16 Exit 2 feed roller SNA Moves the paper to the exit 2 roller

R17 Exit 2 roller SNA Moves the paper to the exit 2

R18 Duplex 1 roller SNA Moves the paper to the duplex unit during duplex print

U18 Exit stack guide JC90-01865A Guide the paper to sit well on the tray

Figure 3-40 Detail view of the exit unit

Table 3-25 Detail view of the exit unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

S15 Out bin 1 full sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper correctly goes out on the
output bin, and it is loaded up to the maximum capacity

S16 Out bin 2 full sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper goes out to the output bin
(optional) correctly, and that it is loaded up to the maximum
capacity (Optional, included in job separator)

Exit unit overview 75

 Table 3-25 Detail view of the exit unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M5 Exit 2 motor JC93-00336A Drive the exit 2 roller

S18 Duplex jam 1 sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper correctly moves to the duplex
unit

M6 Duplex 1 motor JC93-00336A Drive the duplex 1 roller

S17 Exit 2 sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper goes out to the out bin 2

R15 Exit 1 roller SNA Moves the paper to the exit 1

R17 Exit 2 roller SNA Moves the paper to the exit 2

Figure 3-41 Detail view of the exit unit, side view

Table 3-26 Detail view of the exit unit, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

U18 Exit stack guide JC90-01865A Guide the paper to sit well on the tray

Job separator (optional)

Learn about the job separator.

Figure 3-42 Job Separator (Optional)

Job separator is an output accessory that is installed at the exit 2 area in the exit unit. This optional
package includes out bin 2 full sensor, actuator, and out bin 2 tray to store and manage stored papers at
the exit 2 tray.

76 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-43 Overview of the job separator

Table 3-27 Overview of the job separator

Callout Part name Part number Description

U17 Job separator 5QK03-61008 Separates print, copy, or scan jobs

1 Exit 2 tray NA Stores printed paper

2 Exit 2 actuator NA

S16 Output bin 2 full sensor 0604-001393 Checks whether paper goes to the output bin correctly,
and is loaded to maximum capacity

Exit unit operation for simplex printing

Learn about exit unit operation for simplex printing.

1. In case of simplex printing to output bin, a paper flows through the paper path (callout 1).

Figure 3-44 Simplex printing to output bin

2. When using out bin 2, return gate solenoid moves to the direction of the arrow (callout 2). Return gate
moves clockwise (callout 3) to shut off the paper path to output bin. The paper moves through paper
path (callout 4).

Exit unit operation for simplex printing 77

 Figure 3-45 Simplex printing to out bin 2

Exit unit operation for duplex printing

Learn about exit unit operation for duplex printing.

1. A paper moves though out bin 2 path.

Figure 3-46 Duplex printing to out bin 2

2. Return gate solenoid moves to the direction of the arrow (callout 3). Return gate moves
counterclockwise to be back to the original position.

3. A paper continues to move in 1 direction, then goes up on the actuator (callout 4). . A paper moves to
duplex unit.

Exit unit driving

Learn about exit unit driving.

78 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-47 Exit unit driving

● Duplex 1 driving: 1 duplex 1 motor > 2 gear > 3 gear (duplex 1 roller)

● Exit 2 driving: 1 exit 2 motor > 2 gear > 3 gear (exit 2 roller)

Duplex unit
Learn about the duplex unit.

Duplex unit overview

Learn about the duplex unit.

Duplex unit is a device that allows paper to move from the exit unit to the registration unit for duplex
printing.

The paper returned from the exit unit moves through this unit mounted on the right door. Duplex jam 2
sensor is applied at the end of the duplex unit paper path to check whether the paper flows through the
duplex unit correctly. The operation of this unit is run by the duplex motor mounted on the back of the
right door unit.

Duplex unit 79
 Figure 3-48 Overview of the duplex unit

Table 3-28 Overview of the duplex unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U19 Duplex assembly JC95-02250A

S19 Duplex jam 2 sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper goes though the duplex unit

M7 Duplex 2 motor JC93-01085A Drive rollers to move the paper from the exit unit to the
registration unit

R19 Duplex 2 roller NA Move a paper to the duplex 2 roller

R20 Duplex 3 roller NA Move a paper to the registration roller

80 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-49 Detail view of the duplex unit

Table 3-29 Parts information of the duplex unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

S19 Duplex jam 2 sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper goes though the duplex unit

M7 Duplex 2 motor JC93-01085A Drive rollers to move the paper from the exit unit to the
registration unit

R19 Duplex 2 roller NA Move a paper to the duplex 2 roller

R20 Duplex 3 roller NA Move a paper to the registration roller

Duplex unit operation

Learn about duplex unit operation.

Duplex unit operation 81

 Figure 3-50 Duplex unit operation

1. In case of duplex printing, a paper turns back and moves to the duplex unit from the exit unit (callout
1).

2. Duplex motor drives feeding rollers so that the paper goes through the duplex unit (callout 2).

3. The paper arrived at the registration roller starts the next printing (callout 3).

Duplex unit driving

Learn about duplex unit driving.

82 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-51 Duplex unit driving

● Duplex unit driving: 1 Duplex 2 motor > 2 gear > 3 gear (Duplex 2 roller)

Toner flow system

Learn about the toner flow system.

Toner flow overview

Learn about the toner flow overview.

Toner flow workflow

Learn about the toner flow workflow.

Figure 3-52 Toner flow workflow

Toner flow system 83

 Table 3-30 Toner flow workflow

Callout Part name Description

1 Toner cartridge Store the toner and moves the toner to the toner reservoir when printing

2 Toner reservoir Store the toner and moves the toner to the developer unit

3 Image creation Form images and transfers toner to the paper to print out

4 Toner collection unit Receive discarded toner from drum and ITB and store it

Toner flow sensors

Learn about the toner flow sensors.

Figure 3-53 Toner flow sensors

Table 3-31 Toner flow sensors

Callout Part name Part number Sensor type Description

S20 Yellow toner dispense 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check the operation of yellow
motor sensor toner dispense motor

84 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-31 Toner flow sensors (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Sensor type Description

S21 Magenta toner 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check the operation of
dispense motor magenta toner dispense motor
sensor

S22 Cyan toner dispense 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check the operation of cyan
motor sensor toner dispense motor

S23 Black toner dispense 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check the operation of black
motor sensor toner dispense motor

S24 Yellow toner residual JC32-00024A Inductance sensor Detect the yellow toner level in
amount sensor the cartridge

S25 Magenta toner JC32-00024A Inductance sensor Detect the magenta toner level
residual amount in the cartridge
sensor

S26 Cyan toner residual JC32-00024A Inductance sensor Detect the cyan toner level in
amount sensor the cartridge

S27 Black toner residual JC32-00024A Inductance sensor Detect the toner black level in
amount sensor the cartridge

S28 Toner collection duct 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Detect whether toner collection
unit detection sensor duct unit is installed

S29 Toner collection duct 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Detect whether the toner
unit motor sensor collection duct unit motor
operates correctly

S30 Toner collection unit 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Detect whether toner collection
detection sensor unit is installed

S31 Toner collection unit 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Detect whether the toner
motor sensor collection unit motor operates
correctly

S32 Toner collection unit JC92-02471A Photo interrupter (reflect) Detect whether the toner
full sensor collection unit is full

Toner flow motors

Learn about the toner flow motors.

Toner flow motors 85

 Figure 3-54 Toner flow motors

Table 3-32 Toner flow motors

Callout Part name Part number Motor type Description

M8 Yellow toner dispense SS216-80501 Stepping motor Drive the yellow toner cartridge
motor

M9 Magenta toner SS216-80501 Stepping motor Drive the magenta toner

dispense motor cartridge

M10 Cyan toner dispense SS216-80501 Stepping motor Drive the cyan toner cartridge
motor

M11 Black toner dispense SS216-80501 Stepping motor Drive the black toner cartridge
motor

M12 Yellow Magenta JC93-01659A Stepping motor Transfer yellow and magenta
reservoir motor toner from toner cartridge to
developer unit

M13 Cyan Black reservoir JC93-01659A Stepping motor Transfer cyan and black toner
motor from the toner cartridge to the
developer unit

M14 Toner collection duct JC31-00110C Stepping motor Drive toner collection duct unit
unit motor auger so that the waste toner
moves to the toner collection
unit

86 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-32 Toner flow motors (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Motor type Description

M15 Toner collection unit JC31-00110C Stepping motor Drive toner collection unit auger
motor

Toner cartridge
Learn about the toner cartridge.

Toner cartridge overview

Learn about the toner cartridge overview.

The toner cartridge is a unit that safely stores toner for printing and supplies toner in the reservoir
direction during printing.

When the toner cartridge is mounted on the product, the toner shutter opens to create a passage for
the toner to flow to the reservoir, and at the same time, the toner dispense motor rotates, preventing the
toner cartridge from being removed from the printer. If it is determined that the toner level reaches the
replacement threshold in the toner cartridge, the toner unlock function is activated, and when the user
selects it in the control panel, the toner cartridge can be replaced in the printer.

The toner is transferred to the reservoir unit by driving the toner dispense motor. Toner dispense motor
sensor is located next to the motor to check whether the motor rotates. Through the auger inside the
toner cartridge, the toner moves toward the toner shutter and falls into the toner reservoir by gravity.

Figure 3-55 Overview of the toner cartridge

Table 3-33 Overview of the toner cartridge

Callout Part name Part number Description

U20 Toner dispense and JC93-01666A –

reservoir motor assembly

Toner cartridge 87
 Table 3-33 Overview of the toner cartridge (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S20 Yellow toner dispense 0604-001393 Check the operation of yellow toner dispense motor
motor sensor

S21 Magenta toner dispense 0604-001393 Check the operation of magenta toner dispense motor
motor sensor

S22 Cyan toner dispense 0604-001393 Check the operation of cyan toner dispense motor
motor sensor

S23 Black toner dispense 0604-001393 Check the operation of black toner dispense motor
motor sensor

M8 Yellow toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply yellow toner to reservoir
motor

M9 Magenta toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply magenta toner to
motor reservoir

M10 Cyan toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply cyan toner to reservoir
motor

M11 Black toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply black toner to reservoir
motor

Figure 3-56 Detail view of the toner cartridge

Table 3-34 Detail view of the toner cartridge, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

S20 Yellow toner dispense 0604-001393 Check the operation of yellow toner dispense motor
motor sensor

S21 Magenta toner dispense 0604-001393 Check the operation of magenta toner dispense motor
motor sensor

S22 Cyan toner dispense 0604-001393 Check the operation of cyan toner dispense motor
motor sensor

S23 Black toner dispense 0604-001393 Check the operation of black toner dispense motor
motor sensor

M8 Yellow toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply yellow toner to reservoir
motor

88 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-34 Detail view of the toner cartridge, side view (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M9 Magenta toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply magenta toner to
motor reservoir

M10 Cyan toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply cyan toner to reservoir
motor

M11 Black toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply black toner to reservoir
motor

U29 Toner CRUM module JC93-01277A Part where the toner cartridge plug is connected
assembly

Figure 3-57 Detail view of the toner cartridge

Table 3-35 Detail view of the toner cartridge

Callout Part name Part number Description

U21 Yellow toner cartridge – W9162-67004 Stores yellow toner

standard yield

U22 Magenta toner cartridge – W9163-67004 Stores magenta toner

standard yield

U23 Cyan toner cartridge – W9161-67004 Stores cyan toner

standard yield

U24 Black toner cartridge – W9160-67004 Stores black toner

standard yield

U25 Yellow toner cartridge – W9172-67007 Stores yellow toner

high yield

U26 Magenta toner cartridge – W9173-67007 Stores magenta toner

high yield

U27 Cyan toner cartridge – high W9171-67007 Stores cyan toner

yield

U28 Black toner cartridge – W9170-67007 Stores black toner

high yield

Toner cartridge overview 89

 Toner cartridge operation
Learn about toner cartridge operation.

Figure 3-58 Toner cartridge operation

1. Toner dispense motor drives when toner concentration sensor needs to supply toner to the
developer unit (callout 1).

2. Toner auger drives, toner moves in the direction of the arrow (callout 2).

3. Toner moves toward the reservoir. The toner residual amount sensor detects the toner level in the
toner cartridge (callout 3).

Toner dispense and toner cartridge unlock driving

Learn about toner dispense and toner cartridge unlock driving.

90 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-59 Toner dispense and toner cartridge unlock driving

Toner dispense, toner cartridge lock (clockwise)

● K toner dispense driving: 16 K toner dispense motor > 17 gear > 18 gear > 19 gear (photo interrupter) >
20 gear

● C toner dispense driving: 11 C toner dispense motor > 12 gear > 13 gear > 14 gear (photo interrupter) >
15 gear

● M toner dispense driving: M toner dispense motor > 7 gear > 8 gear > 9 gear (photo interrupter) > 10
gear

● Y toner dispense driving: 1 Y toner dispense motor > 2 gear > 3 gear > 4 gear (photo interrupter) > 5
gear

Toner cartridge unlock (counterclockwise)

● K toner cartridge unlock: 16 K toner dispense motor > 17 gear > 18 gear > 19 gear (photo interrupter) >
20 gear

● C toner cartridge unlock: 11 C toner dispense motor > 12 gear > 13 gear > 14 gear (photo interrupter) >
15 gear

● M toner cartridge unlock: M toner dispense motor > 7 gear > 8 gear > 9 gear (photo interrupter) > 10
gear

Toner dispense and toner cartridge unlock driving 91

 ● Y toner cartridge unlock: 1 Y toner dispense motor > 2 gear > 3 gear > 4 gear (photo interrupter) > 5
gear

Toner reservoir
Learn about the toner reservoir.

Toner reservoir overview

Learn about the toner reservoir overview.

The toner reservoir unit serves to receive toner from the toner cartridge and transfers it to the
developer unit. The toner level in the cartridge is detected by the toner residual amount sensor which
is located right below the toner cartridge. Toner flow is operated by two toner reservoir motors, the one
supplying yellow and magenta toner, and the other one supplying cyan and black toner.

Figure 3-60 Overview of the toner reservoir

Table 3-36 Overview of the toner reservoir

Callout Part name Part number Description

U30 Yellow toner reservoir unit 5QK03-60130 Store and transfer yellow toner from toner cartridge to
developer unit

U31 Magenta toner reservoir 5QK03-60130 Store and transfer magenta toner from toner cartridge
unit to developer unit

U32 Cyan toner reservoir unit 5QK03-60130 Store and transfer cyan toner from toner cartridge to
developer unit

U33 Black toner reservoir unit 5QK03-60129 Store and transfer black toner from toner cartridge to
developer unit

S24 Yellow toner residual JC32-00024A Detect the yellow toner level in the cartridge
amount sensor

S25 Magenta toner residual JC32-00024A Detect the magenta toner level in the cartridge
amount sensor

92 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-36 Overview of the toner reservoir (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S26 Cyan toner residual JC32-00024A Detect the cyan toner level in the cartridge
amount sensor

S27 Black toner residual JC32-00024A Detect the black toner level in the cartridge
amount sensor

Figure 3-61 Detail view of the toner reservoir

Table 3-37 Detail view of the toner reservoir

Callout Part name Part number Description

S24 Yellow toner residual JC32-00024A Detect the yellow toner level in the cartridge
amount sensor

S25 Magenta toner residual JC32-00024A Detect the magenta toner level in the cartridge
amount sensor

S26 Cyan toner residual JC32-00024A Detect the cyan toner level in the cartridge
amount sensor

S27 Black toner residual JC32-00024A Detect the black toner level in the cartridge
amount sensor

Toner reservoir overview 93

 Figure 3-62 Detail view of the toner reservoir, side view

Table 3-38 Detail view of the toner reservoir, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

U20 Toner dispense and JC93-01666A

reservoir motor assembly

M12 Cyan, black reservoir JC93-01659A Drive cyan and black reservoir auger
motor

M13 Yellow, magenta reservoir JC93-01659A Drive yellow and magenta reservoir auger
motor

Toner residual amount sensor operation

Learn about the toner residual amount sensor operation.

1. When the toner is left enough in the toner cartridge, toner consumption is calculated by an
algorithm.

Figure 3-63 Toner depletion residual amount operation

2. If toner in the toner cartridge runs out, the toner residual amount sensor (callout a) detects the
toner level in the cartridge by checking carrier amount and displays a toner with very low message.

94 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Toner reservoir operation
Learn about the toner reservoir operation.

Figure 3-64 Toner reservoir operation

1. Toner comes from the toner cartridge when the toner concentration sensor checks toner is very low
for creating the images at the developer unit (callout 1).

2. Toner reservoir auger moves toner to the direction of toner duct (callout 2).

3. Toner moves from the toner reservoir to the developer unit (callout 3).

Toner reservoir driving

Learn about toner reservoir driving.

Toner reservoir operation 95

 Figure 3-65 Toner reservoir driving

● K toner reservoir driving: 25 K, C toner reservoir motor > 27 gear > 28 gear

● C toner reservoir driving: 25 K, C toner reservoir motor > 26 gear

● M toner reservoir driving: 21 M, Y toner reservoir motor > 23 gear > 24 gear

● Y toner reservoir driving: 21 M, Y toner reservoir motor > 22 gear

Toner Collection Unit (TCU)

Learn about the Toner Collection Unit (TCU).

NOTE: This topic describes the operation of the toner collection duct unit (TCDU) as it relates to the
TCU system. It is important to know that the printer firmware user interface uses the term waste toner
unit when referring to the TCDU.

Toner Collection Unit (TCU) overview

Learn about the Toner Collection Unit (TCU).

The toner collection unit receives and stores waste toner from developer unit, drum unit and ITB unit.

When the toner collection duct unit (TCDU) is installed, the waste toner shutter is opened, and the TCDU
is connected to the machine. The TCDU detection sensor judges whether the TCDU unit is installed. The
TCDU auger sensor detects the waste toner level and, when it exceeds a certain level, drives the TCDU

96 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

motor to send the waste toner to the toner collection unit. The waste toner is moved by the auger and
then falls to the toner collection unit by gravity.

The toner collection unit is a consumable item, the waste toner is received from the TCDU and stored.
The waste toner detection sensor determines whether the toner collection unit is installed. The toner
collection unit full sensor detects the toner level and turns the toner collection unit motor. Then, the
toner is spread evenly, the wasted toner level goes down. If the wasted toner level does not go down
even though the toner collection unit motor rotates, the set will display the toner collection unit is full
and print-related operations will be disabled. The toner collection unit motor sensor checks whether the
TCDU motor is rotating.

NOTE: The Toner Collection Unit (TCU) is interchangeably used with the Waste Toner Bottle (WTB).
These are synonymous for related parts or terms.

Figure 3-66 Overview of the toner collection unit

Table 3-39 Overview of the toner collection unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U34 Toner collection duct unit JC96-13015A Store the waste toner and moves it to the toner
(TCDU) collection unit

S28 TCDU detection sensor 0604-001393 Detect whether the TCDU is installed

U35 TCDU drive assembly JC93-01669A

S29 TCDU motor sensor 0604-001393 Check the toner duct motor operation

M14 TCDU motor JC31-00110C Drive the TCDU auger so that the waste toner moves to
the toner collection unit

U36 Toner collection unit 6SB85-67001 Stores toner moved from the TCDU

S30 Toner collection unit 0604-001393 Detect whether the toner collection unit is installed
detection sensor

U37 Toner collection drive JC93-01168A

assembly

M15 Toner collection unit motor JC31-00110C Drive the toner collection unit auger

Toner Collection Unit (TCU) overview 97

 Table 3-39 Overview of the toner collection unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S31 Toner collection unit motor 0604-001393 Detect whether the toner collection unit motor correctly
sensor operates

S32 Toner collection unit full JC92-02471A Detect whether the toner collection unit is full
sensor

Figure 3-67 Detail view of the toner collection unit, view 1

Table 3-40 Detail view of the toner collection unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

U34 Toner collection duct unit JC96-13015A Stores the waste toner and moves it to the toner
(TCDU) collection unit

U36 Toner collection unit 6SB85-67001 Stores toner moved from the TCDU

98 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-68 Detail view of the toner collection unit, view 2

Table 3-41 Detail view of the toner collection unit, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

S28 Toner collection duct unit 0604-001393 Detect whether the TCDU is installed
(TCDU) detection sensor

S29 TCDU motor sensor 0604-001393 Checks the TCDU motor operation

Figure 3-69 Detail view of the toner collection unit, view 3

Table 3-42 Detail view of the toner collection unit, view 3

Callout Part name Part number Description

M14 Toner collection duct unit JC31-00110C Drives the TCDU auger so that the waste toner moves to
(TCDU) motor the toner collection unit

Toner Collection Unit (TCU) overview 99

 Figure 3-70 Detail view of the toner collection unit, view 4

Table 3-43 Detail view of the toner collection unit, view 4

Callout Part name Part number Description

S30 Toner collection unit 0604-001393 Detect whether the toner collection unit is installed
detection sensor

M15 Toner collection unit motor JC31-00110C Drive the toner collection unit auger

S31 Toner collection unit motor 0604-001393 Detect whether the toner collection unit motor correctly
sensor operates

S32 Toner collection unit full JC92-02471A Detect whether the toner collection unit is full
sensor

Toner collection unit operation

Learn about the toner collection unit operation.

1. After printing, the remaining toner moves from the developer, drum, and ITB cleaning unit to the
toner collection duct unit (TCDU; callout 1).

Figure 3-71 Toner collection unit operation

2. The moved toner moves to the left using the auger in the TCDU (callout 2).

100 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 3. The toner falls into the toner collection unit through the hole on the left side of the TCDU (callout 3).

Figure 3-72 Toner collection unit operation

4. The toner moved to the toner collection unit is spread evenly and stored by the action of the toner
collection unit (callout 4).

5. The toner collection unit full sensor checks whether the toner collection unit is full.

Toner collection unit driving

Learn about toner collection unit driving.

Figure 3-73 Toner collection unit driving, view 1

● Toner collection 1 driving: 1 toner collection duct unit (TCDU) motor > 2 gear (TCDU auger)

Toner collection unit driving 101

 Figure 3-74 Toner collection unit driving, view 2

● Toner collection unit driving: 1 waste toner motor > 2 gear (waste toner auger)

Image creation
Learn about image creation.

Image creation overview

Learn about the image creation overview.

Image creation workflow

Learn about the image creation workflow.

102 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-75 Image creation workflow

Table 3-44 Image creation workflow

Callout Part name Description

1 Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) Construct a latent image by removing electric charges by a laser on the
surface of the drum

2-1 Developer Receive toner from reservoir unit and makes toner have electrical properties

2-2 Drum Receive toner from the developer unit and creates the image

3 Image Transfer Belt (ITB) Combine the four color-toners to transfer the toner onto the paper

4 Second transfer Transfer the image formed on the ITB to the paper

5 ITB cleaning Remove toner generated during printing and color registration patterns
generated during color plain registration process

6 Color Plane Registration Superpose cyan, magenta, yellow, and black 4 colors to express images
(CPR) correctly

7 Fuser Apply heat and pressure to the toner particles to adhere to the paper

Image creation sensors

Learn about the toner flow sensors.

Image creation sensors 103

 Figure 3-76 Image creation sensors

Table 3-45 Image creation sensors

Callout Part name Part number Sensor type Description

S35 LSU temperature NA – Sense the temperature inside

sensor LSU

S36 LSU LD power 1,2,3,4 NA – Generate the laser light by color

S37, LSU Hsync 1,2,3,4 NA – Decide the starting point of a

S38 line

S33 LSU shutter open NA Photo interrupter (sensing) Check whether the LSU cover is
sensor open or closed

S34 LSU shutter close NA Photo interrupter (sensing) Check whether the LSU cover is
sensor open or closed

P18-1 Yellow eraser NA – Convert drum surface potential

to the initial state

P18-2 Magenta eraser NA – Convert drum surface potential

to the initial state

104 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-45 Image creation sensors (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Sensor type Description

P18-3 Cyan eraser NA – Convert drum surface potential

to the initial state

P18-4 Black eraser NA – Convert drum surface potential

to the initial state

S43 Yellow toner NA Density sensor Measure toner concentration

concentration sensor in the yellow developer unit to
control the amount of supplying
toner

S44 Magenta toner NA Density sensor Measure toner concentration in

concentration sensor the magenta developer unit to
control the amount of supplying
toner

S45 Cyan toner NA Density sensor Measure toner concentration

concentration sensor in the cyan developer unit to
control the amount of supplying
toner

S46 Black toner NA Density sensor Measure toner concentration

concentration sensor in the black developer unit to
control the amount of supplying
toner

S47 ITB engage sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check the position of the color
transfer roller

S51 CPR shutter sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Detect shutter location

S48 Front CPR sensor JC32-00014A Density sensor Detect front side image density

S49 Center CPR sensor JC32-00014A Density sensor Detect center image density

S50 Rear CPR sensor JC32-00014A Density sensor Detect rear side image density

S55 Fuser gap sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Move the toner fixed paper to
the exit unit

S53 Thermistor NA Non-contact type Measure the surface

temperature of the fuser belt by
4 non-contact type thermistors

S52 Thermostat NA – Cut off the power supply to

the halogen lamp by opening
the circuit when the fusing belt
becomes abnormally hot

S54 Wrap jam sensor NA Density sensor Identify whether wrap jam
occurs inside the fuser unit

Image creation motors

Learn about the image creation motors.

Image creation motors 105

 Figure 3-77 Image creation motors

Table 3-46 Image creation motors

Callout Part name Part number Motor type Description

M16 LSU motor SNA Polygon motor Apply the laser to the drum
surface as a line

M17 LSU shutter motor SNA Stepping motor Drive the LSU shutter

M21 Yellow drum motor JC31-00123C BLDC motor Drive the yellow drum

M22 Magenta drum motor JC31-00123C BLDC motor Drive the magenta drum

M23 Cyan drum motor JC31-00123C BLDC motor Drive the cyan drum

M24 Black drum motor JC31-00123C BLDC motor Drive the black drum

M25 Yellow magenta cyan JC31-00123B BLDC motor Drive the yellow, magenta, cyan
developer motor developer unit

M26 Black developer JC31-00123B BLDC motor Drive the black developer unit
motor

M27 ITB engage motor SNA Stepping motor Detach or attach the color
transfer roller to the drum

M29 Fuser, exit motor JC93-01084A BLDC motor Drive the fuser unit, the exit1
roller, and the exit trans roller

106 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-46 Image creation motors (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Motor type Description

M30 Fuser gap motor JC31-00144G Stepping motor Make a contact with the
fuser belt and the pressure
roller when printing. The motor
detaches the fuser belt from
the pressure roller after printing

Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)

Learn about the Laser Scanning Unit (LSU).

Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) overview

Learn about the Laser Scanning Unit (LSU).

The Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) constructs a latent image by removing electric charges by a laser on the
surface of the drum.

The LSU temperature sensor detects the inside temperature of the LSU. In case of detecting
temperature change inside the LSU, Color Plain Registration (CPR) will be performed. The LSU Laser
Diode (LD) power makes a laser, driving the LSU motor to expose the laser on the drum as a line. The
LSU skew adjustment motor operates when the CPR is activated and enables parallel cyan, magenta,
and yellow color alignment with black color. The LSU shutter is closed when the front door or side cover
is opened and the power is on. This protects the LSU window from toner contamination. Except in this
instance, the LSU shutter stays open. The LSU shutter sensor checks the operation of the LSU shutter.

NOTE: When the LSU is replaced or re-installed, CPR reference adjustment in ServiceTools is
recommended.

Figure 3-78 Overview of the laser scanning unit

Table 3-47 Overview of the laser scanning unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U38 LSU unit JC97-05149A Develop an image on the drum surface

Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) 107

 Table 3-47 Overview of the laser scanning unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M16 LSU motor SNA Apply the laser to the drum surface as a line

M17 LSU shutter motor SNA Drive the LSU shutter

S33 LSU shutter open sensor SNA Check where the LSU cover is open or closed

S34 LSU shutter close sensor SNA Check where the LSU cover is open or closed

M18 Yellow LSU skew SNA Adjust the parallel alignment of the yellow color based on
adjustment motor the black color

M19 Magenta LSU skew SNA Adjust the parallel alignment of the magenta color based
adjustment motor on the black color

M20 Cyan LSU skew adjustment SNA Adjust the parallel alignment of the cyan color based on
motor the black color

S35 LSU temperature SNA Sense the temperature inside LSU

S36 LSU LD power SNA Generate the laser

S37 LSU Hsync 1, 2 SNA Decide the starting point of a line

S38 LSU Hsync 3, 4 SNA Decide the starting point of a line

Figure 3-79 Detail view of the laser scanning unit

Table 3-48 Detail view of the laser scanning unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

M17 LSU shutter motor SNA Drive the LSU shutter

S36 LSU LD power SNA Generate the laser

S38 LSU Hsync 3, 4 SNA Decide the starting point of a line

Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) operation

Learn about the Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) operation.

108 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

1. The LSU shutter is closed to prevent glass contamination. When replacing toner, replacing LLC
components, or doing other maintenance, the LSU shutter motor drives to open and close the
sensor.

Figure 3-80 Laser scanning unit operation

2. The LSU shutter is opened to emit laser scanning beam to the drum surface.

3. The polygon motor (Callout b) operates, making laser diode power to generate the laser. The F1
(callout c) and F2 (callout c) refract the laser to reach the drum surface. The potential of the drum
surface exposed to the laser changes in the form of an image.

Figure 3-81 Laser scanning unit operation

4. There are 2 LSU Hsync boards with 1 beam detection sensors (2 sensors in total). The 2 beams
generate horizontal sync (Hsync) by detecting the beam from the LSU LD power located at the scan
start point, and scan the data based on this Hsync.

Figure 3-82 Laser scanning unit operation

Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) operation 109

 5. Adjustment.

a. Sub Scan line position for the cyan, magenta, and yellow color

The adjustment of the sub scan line position for the cyan, magenta, and yellow color is based
on the line position for the black color. The printer measures the gap between the lines of each
color in the pattern on the ITB. When the gap of a color is incorrect, the printer moves the image
of the color up or down on the sub scan axis. To do this, it changes the laser write timing for that
color.

b. Main Scan line position for the cyan, magenta, and yellow color

When the printer detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it changes
the laser write start timing for each scan line.

c. Magnification Adjustment for the cyan, magenta, and yellow color

When the printer detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock
frequency for the required color.

d. Skew for the cyan, magenta, and yellow color

The adjustment of the skew for the cyan, magenta, and yellow color is based on the line position
for black color.

Developer and drum unit

Learn about the developer and drum unit.

Developer and drum unit overview

The developer unit receives toner from the reservoir unit and creates images by the toner with the drum
unit.

The toner concentration sensor determines whether the toner in the developer unit is insufficient. In this
case, the developer unit receives the toner from the reservoir unit. The newly supplied toner is evenly
mixed with the existing toner by the mixing auger. At this time, the developer unit's roller and auger are
driven by the developer motor. The end of the developer unit is connected to the toner collection duct
unit (TCDU). After the developing process, waste toner is moved away to the TCDU.

The drum unit receives toner from the developer unit and develops the image. Most of the developed
toner is moved to the transfer unit, to combine the yellow, magenta, cyan, and black colors, and then
prints out on the paper. Remaining toner that is not relocated to the transfer unit is separated from the
drum by the cleaning blade and moved to the TCDU.

The drum unit is driven by the drum motor, and the black drum motor drives not only the black drum unit
but also the ITB at the same time. As for the rotation of the drum motor, the drum home sensor checks
whether the drum motor rotates.

NOTE: When replacing drum or drum motor, running “Full Auto Color Registration” in Service Tools is
recommended.

110 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-83 Overview of the developer units

Table 3-49 Developer unit callouts

Callout Part name Part number Description

U43 Yellow developer unit 5PN73-67002 Mixes and charges the yellow toner with the carrier, and
delivers them to the drum unit

U44 Magenta developer unit 5PN74-67002 Mixes and charges the magenta toner with the carrier,
and delivers them to the drum unit

U45 Cyan developer unit 5PN75-67002 Mixes and charges the cyan toner with the carrier, and
delivers them to the drum unit

U46 Black developer unit 5PN72-67002 Mixes and charges the black toner with the carrier, and
delivers them to the drum unit

S43 Yellow toner concentration SNA Measures toner concentration in the yellow developer
sensor unit to control the amount of supplying toner

S44 Magenta toner SNA Measures toner concentration in the magenta developer
concentration sensor unit to control the amount of supplying toner

S45 Cyan toner concentration SNA Measures toner concentration in the cyan developer unit
sensor to control the amount of supplying toner

S46 Black toner concentration SNA Measures toner concentration in the black developer
sensor unit to control the amount of supplying toner

M25 Yellow, magenta, cyan JC31-00123B Drives the yellow, magenta, cyan developer units
developer motor

M26 Black developer motor JC31-00123B Drives the black developer unit

Developer and drum unit overview 111

 Figure 3-84 Overview of the drum units

Table 3-50 Drum unit callouts

Callout Part name Part number Description

U39 Yellow drum unit W9078-67001 Receives yellow toner from the developer unit and
creates the image

U40 Magenta drum unit W9078-67001 Receives magenta toner from the developer unit and
creates the image

U41 Cyan drum unit W9078-67001 Receives cyan toner from the developer unit and creates
the image

U42 Black drum unit W9077-67001 Receives black toner from the developer unit and
creates the image

M21 Yellow drum motor JC31-00123C Drives the yellow drum

M22 Magenta drum motor JC31-00123C Drives the magenta drum

M23 Cyan drum motor JC31-00123C Drives the cyan drum

M24 Black drum motor JC31-00123C Drives the black drum

S39 Yellow drum home sensor 0604-001393 Checks the operation of the yellow drum motor

S40 Magenta drum home 0604-001393 Checks the operation of the magenta drum motor
sensor

S41 Cyan drum home sensor 0604-001393 Checks the operation of the cyan drum motor

S42 Black drum home sensor 0604-001393 Checks the operation of the black drum motor

112 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-85 Detail view of the developer and drum

Table 3-51 Developer and drum callouts

Callout Part name Part number Description

U39 Yellow drum unit W9078-67001 Receives yellow toner from the developer unit and
creates the image

U40 Magenta drum unit W9078-67001 Receives magenta toner from the developer unit and
creates the image

U41 Cyan drum unit W9078-67001 Receives cyan toner from the developer unit and creates
the image

U42 Black drum unit W9077-67001 Receives black toner from the developer unit and
creates the image

U43 Yellow developer unit 5PN73-67002 Mixes and charges the yellow toner with the carrier, and
delivers them to the drum unit

U44 Magenta developer unit 5PN74-67002 Mixes and charges the magenta toner with the carrier,
and delivers them to the drum unit

U45 Cyan developer unit 5PN75-67002 Mixes and charges the cyan toner with the carrier, and
delivers them to the drum unit

U46 Black developer unit 5PN72-67002 Mixes and charges the black toner with the carrier, and
delivers them to the drum unit

S43 Yellow toner concentration SNA Measures toner concentration in the yellow developer
sensor unit to control the amount of supplying toner

S44 Magenta toner SNA Measures toner concentration in the magenta developer
concentration sensor unit to control the amount of supplying toner

S45 Cyan toner concentration SNA Measures toner concentration in the cyan developer unit
sensor to control the amount of supplying toner

S46 Black toner concentration SNA Measures toner concentration in the black developer
sensor unit to control the amount of supplying toner

Developer and drum unit overview 113

 Figure 3-86 Detail view of the developers and drums, side view

Table 3-52 Developers and drums, side view callouts

Callout Part name Part number Description

M21 Yellow drum motor JC31-00123C Drives the yellow drum

M22 Magenta drum motor JC31-00123C Drives the magenta drum

M23 Cyan drum motor JC31-00123C Drives the cyan drum

M24 Black drum motor JC31-00123C Drives the black drum

M25 Yellow, magenta, cyan JC31-00123B Drives the yellow, magenta, cyan developer unit
developer motor

M26 Black developer motor JC31-00123B Drives the black developer unit

1 Left cable guide JC61-08699A Holds the cables

2 Right cable guide JC61-08700A Holds the cables

Developer and drum unit operation

Learn about the developer and drum unit operation.

114 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-87 Developer and drum unit operation

1. The auger (callout 1) mixes the developer and the toner.

2. The toner concentration sensor (callout 2) detects whether the toner in the developer unit is at an
appropriate level to create an image.

3. Toner in auger moves toward to the development roller (callout 3).

4. Drum surface is charged with (-) charge using by a charging roller (callout 4).

5. Toners at the development roller moves to drum roller at the point facing each other (callout 5).

6. When the transfer process is over, the eraser returns the drum surface potential to its original state
(callout 6).

7. The cleaning blade removes the remaining toner from the drum surface (callout 7).

Developer and drum unit driving

Learn about developer and drum unit driving.

Developer and drum unit driving 115

 Figure 3-88 Developer and drum unit driving

1. Developer drive

● K Developer drive: 7 K developer motor > 8 gear > 9 gear and coupler

● C Developer drive: 10 CMY developer motor > 11 gear > 12 gear and coupler

● M Developer drive: 10 CMY developer motor > 13 gear > 14 gear and coupler

● Y Developer drive: 10 CMY developer motor > 13 gear > 15 gear > 16 gear > 17 gear and coupler

2. Drum drive

● K Drum drive: 1 K drum and ITB motor > 4 gear and coupler

● C Drum drive: 5 C drum motor > 6 gear and coupler

● M Drum drive: 18 M drum motor > 19 gear and coupler

● Y Drum drive: 20 Y drum motor > 21 gear and coupler

Image Transfer Belt (ITB)

Learn about the Image Transfer Belt (ITB).

Image Transfer Belt (ITB) overview

Learn about the Image Transfer Belt (ITB).

116 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

The ITB combines the four-color toners to transfer the toner to the paper.

Each color toner image on the four drums is transferred to the Image Transfer Belt (ITB) by the first
transfer roller inside the ITB unit.

The image overlapped by four colors is transferred to the paper by the transfer 2 roller. The remaining
toners are removed by the cleaning blade and transferred to the toner collection unit. This process is
completed with one rotation of the ITB.

The ITB engage motor attaches and detaches the yellow, magenta, cyan and black transfer rollers from
drum unit. At the same time, the ITB engage sensor detects whether the ITB is engaged. This movement
will save color toner and color drum lifespan. The ITB engage sensor checks the position of the color
transfer rollers.

Figure 3-89 Overview of the ITB

Table 3-53 Overview of the ITB

Callout Part name Part number Description

K7 ITB & cleaning unit kit 5PN78-67001 Include image transfer belt and ITB cleaning unit

U48 Image transfer belt (ITB) JC93-01691A Combine and transfer the color toners

S47 ITB engage sensor 0604-001393 Check the position of the color transfer roller

U49 ITB engage motor JC93-01068A

assembly

M27 ITB engage motor JC31-00110B Detach or attach the color transfer roller to the drum unit

Image Transfer Belt (ITB) overview 117

 Figure 3-90 Detail view of the ITB

Table 3-54 Detail view of the ITB

Callout Part name Part number Description

U48 Image transfer belt (ITB) JC93-01691A Combine and transfer the color toners

Figure 3-91 Detail view of the ITB, side view

Table 3-55 Detail view of the ITB, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

M27 ITB engage motor JC31-00110B Detach or attach the color transfer roller to the drum unit

Image Transfer Belt (ITB) operation

Learn about the Image Transfer Belt (ITB) operation.

The toner moves from the drum unit to the ITB (callout 3) by the 4 first transfer rollers (callout 2).
This four-color superimposed image moves to the ITB driving roller (callout 1) and touches the second
transfer roller to transfer the image on the paper. The black drum motor (callout 4) drives the ITB (callout
3) using the ITB driving rollers (callout 2) and gears.

118 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-92 Operation of the ITB

Image Transfer Belt (ITB) driving

Learn about Image Transfer Belt (ITB) driving.

Figure 3-93 ITB driving

T1 engage: 1 T1 engage motor > 2 gear

Image Transfer Belt (ITB) driving 119

 Figure 3-94 ITB driving

● ITB drive: 1 K drum and ITB motor > 2 gear > 3 gear and coupler

Second Transfer (T2) unit

Learn about the Second Transfer (T2) unit.

Second Transfer (T2) unit overview

Learn about the Second Transfer (T2) unit.

The second transfer unit transfers the image formed on the ITB to paper.

The second transfer unit is a roller facing the image transfer belt, and it has the opposite polarity of the
toner by receiving high voltage from the HVPS. At the same time, the roller contacts the ITB and creates
pressure to transfer the toner to the paper, moving the paper from the registration unit to the fuser unit.

120 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-95 Overview of the second transfer unit

Table 3-56 Overview of the second transfer unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U13 Second Transfer (T2) unit 5PN80-67001

R21 Second Transfer (T2) roller NA Create a constant pressure in contact with the ITB to
help the image transfer process, and moves the paper to
the fuser

Figure 3-96 Detail view of the second transfer unit

Table 3-57 Detail view of the second transfer unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U13 Second Transfer (T2) unit 5PN80-67001

R21 Second Transfer (T2) roller NA Create a constant pressure in contact with the ITB to
help the image transfer process, and moves the paper to
the fuser

Second Transfer (T2) unit overview 121

 Second Transfer (T2) unit operation
Learn about the Second Transfer (T2) unit operation.

1. The HVPS transfers a voltage opposite to the toner delivered on the ITB to the second transfer roller.

Figure 3-97 Operation of the Second Transfer (T2) unit

2. The paper aligned with the registration roller enters between the first transfer roller (callout a) and
the second transfer roller (callout b). The image transferred to the ITB (callout c) is moved to the
paper by the pressure between the and rollers.

ITB cleaning unit

Learn about the ITB cleaning unit.

ITB cleaning unit overview

Learn about the ITB cleaning unit.

The ITB cleaning unit removes the toner generated during printing and color registration patterns
generated during the color plane registration process. The removed toner is transferred to the toner
collection unit.

122 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-98 Overview of the ITB cleaning unit

Table 3-58 Overview of the ITB cleaning unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

K7 Image transfer kit 5PN78-67001 Include the image transfer belt and the ITB cleaning unit

U50 ITB cleaning unit 5PN79-67001 Remove the waste toners from the ITB, transfer them to
the toner collection unit

M24 Black drum motor JC31-00123C Drive the black drum, the ITB, and the ITB cleaning unit

Figure 3-99 Detail view of the ITB cleaning unit

ITB cleaning unit overview 123

 Table 3-59 Overview of the ITB cleaning unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U50 ITB cleaning unit 5PN79-67001 Remove the waste toners from the ITB, transfer them to
the toner collection unit

ITB cleaning unit operation

Learn about the ITB cleaning unit operation.

1. The cleaning blade (callout 1) inside the cleaning unit is always in contact with the ITB (callout 2) and
removes the used toner from the belt.

Figure 3-100 Operation of the ITB cleaning unit

2. The removed toner moves toward the toner collection unit by the toner collection auger (callout 3).
The toner collection auger is rotated by the black drum drive motor.

Figure 3-101 Operation of the ITB cleaning unit

Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit

Learn about the Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit.

124 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit overview
Learn about the Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit.

The Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit is the part not only superposing four colors such as cyan,
magenta, yellow and black to express images correctly, but also keeping image density in a proper level.

The CPR unit is located below the ITB and reads yellow, magenta, cyan and black toner level. There is a
shutter to prevent foreign debris from contaminating the CPR sensor. When operating the CPR feature,
the CPR shutter opens with the CPR shutter sensor and the CPR shutter motor. Three CPR sensors are
installed at the left, center, and the right side of the CPR unit which detects the registration condition to
adjust printing positions correctly.

NOTE: Color Plane Registration (CPR) is interchangeably used with Auto Color Registration (ACR).
These are synonymous for related parts or terms.

Figure 3-102 White gap and fuzzy, blurred image

Figure 3-103 Overview of the CPR

Table 3-60 Overview of the CPR

Callout Part name Part number Description

U51 Color plain registration 3SJ19-67001

(CPR)

S48 Front CPR sensor JC32-00014A Detect front side image density

S49 Center CPR sensor JC32-00014A Detect center image density

Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit overview 125

 Table 3-60 Overview of the CPR (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S50 Rear CPR sensor JC32-00014A Detect rear side image density

S51 CPR shutter sensor 0604-001393 Detect the CPR shutter location

M28 CPR shutter motor JC31-00078A Drive the CAM to change the shutter location

Figure 3-104 Detail view of the CPR, view 1

Table 3-61 Detail view of the CPR, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

S48 Front CPR sensor JC32-00014A Detect front side image density

S49 Center CPR sensor JC32-00014A Detect center image density

S50 Rear CPR sensor JC32-00014A Detect rear side image density

Figure 3-105 Detail view of the CPR, view 2

126 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-62 Detail view of the CPR, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

U51 Color plain registration 3SJ19-67001 –

(CPR)

S51 CPR shutter sensor 0604-001393 Detect the CPR shutter location

M28 CPR shutter motor JC31-00078A Drive the CAM to change the shutter location

Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit operation

Learn about the Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit operation.

When the product reaches the specific conditions, color plane registration is performed to form a
correct image on the paper.

1. When the CPR shutter motor is running, the position of the CAM changes.

Figure 3-106 Operation of the CPR, view 1

2. The CPR shutter is moved in the direction of arrow.

3. The CPR sensors are exposed.

Figure 3-107 Operation of the CPR, view 2

Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit operation 127

 4. A CPR test pattern is printed on the ITB, and then the three CPR sensors analyze the image
positions.

Figure 3-108 Operation of the CPR, view 3

Color Toner Density (CTD) operation

Learn about the Color Toner Density (CTD) operation.

The center-located ACR sensor serves as the Color Toner Density (CTD) sensor at the same time. It
emits an LED beam to a patch which is transferred to the ITB belt surface and detects toner density to
optimize printing image quality.

Figure 3-109 Color Toner Density (CTD) operation

Color plane registration shutter driving

Learn about the Color plane registration shutter driving.

128 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-110 Color plane registration shutter driving

CPR shutter driving: 1 CPR shutter motor > 2 gear

Fuser unit
Learn about the fuser unit.

Fuser unit overview

Learn about the fuser unit.

The fuser unit applies heat and pressure to the toner particles to adhere to the paper. The fuser unit is
composed of fuser section and fuser/exit driving section.

Figure 3-111 Overview of the fuser unit

Table 3-63 Overview of the fuser unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U52-1 Fuser unit 100V 5PN53-67001

U52-2 Fuser unit 110V 5PN76-67001

U52-3 Fuser unit 220V 5PN77-67001

M29 Fuser, exit motor JC31-00144G Drives the fuser pressure roller and fuser exit roller

Fuser unit 129

 Table 3-63 Overview of the fuser unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M30 Fuser gap motor JC93-01084A Makes a contact with the fuser belt to transfer heat and
pressure on the paper and toner, and drive the paper
moves to the exit unit

S55 Fuser gap sensor 0604-001393 Moves the paper to the exit unit

U51

Figure 3-112 Detail view of the fuser unit

Table 3-64 Detail view of the fuser unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

R22 Fuser belt NA Receive heat from the halogen lamp and transfer it to the
toner and paper

R23 Fuser pressure roller NA Make a contact with the fuser belt to transfer heat and
pressure on the paper and the toner and drive the paper
moves to the exit unit

R24 Fuser exit roller NA Move the paper to the exit unit

S52 Thermostat NA Cut off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening
the circuit when the fusing belt becomes abnormally hot

S53 Thermistor NA Measure the surface temperature of the fuser belt by 4

non-contact type thermistors

S54 Wrap jam sensor NA Identify whether a wrap jam occurs inside the fuser unit

1 Halogen lamp NA Create heat to the fuser belt to adhere the toner to the
paper

2 Baffle plate NA Prevent a wrap jam and guide the paper move to the
fuser exit roller

3 Fuser out brush NA Remove static electricity from the printed paper

130 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Fuser unit temperature control
Learn about the fuser unit temperature control.

Figure 3-113 Fuser unit temperature control

1. Four thermistors detects the fuser belt surface temperature. In case of narrow width paper printing,
the thermistors effectively identify differences of the surface temperature, and control turning the
halogen lamp off so it will not be overheated.

2. In case of abnormal temperature increment without control, the thermostat shuts off the circuit to
prevent abnormal operation.

Fuser gap sensor operation

Learn about the fuser gap sensor operation.

1. When starting a printing job, fuser gap motor drives to the direction of arrow (callout 1) to make the
pressure between the fuser belt and the fuser pressure roller. The fuser gap sensor installed left
side of the fuser controls location of the fuser belt to press or release with the fuser pressure roller.

Figure 3-114 Fuser gap sensor operation, view 1

2. After finishing a printing job, fuser gap motor rotates to the other side, the fuser belt is released
(callout 2).

Fuser unit temperature control 131

 Figure 3-115 Fuser gap sensor operation, view 2

Fuser wrap jam sensor operation

Learn about the fuser wrap jam sensor operation.

Wrap jam of the fuser unit may cause accidents such as a fire. To prevent this, the wrap jam sensor
safely detects in three methods.

Figure 3-116 Wrap jam in the fuser unit

1. The thermistor detects the sudden temperature change and temperature increasing slope of the
fusing belt to determine if wrap jam has occurred.

2. The reflective type wrap jam sensor identifies an error by immediately detecting the case of
wrapping paper around the fusing belt.

Figure 3-117 Fuser wrap jam sensor operation

132 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 3. The current sensor measures the change in current applied to the fuser motor to check whether a
wrap jam has occurred.

Fuser driving
Learn about fuser driving.

Figure 3-118 Fuser driving

● Fuser driving: 1 fuser motor > 2 gear

● Fuser releasing: 5 fuser gap motor > 6 gear > 7 gear > 8 gear

● Fuser exit driving: 1 fuser > 3 gear & pulley > 4 pulley

Environmental sensor, fan, switch

Learn about the environmental sensor, fan and switch.

Environmental sensor, fan, switch overview

Learn about the environmental sensor, fan and switch overview.

To accurately implement the operation algorithm of the product according to the environment, an
internal temperature sensor, an external temperature sensor, and a humidity sensor are installed inside
the device.

As the product is used, the temperature of the internal main parts or the inner parts of the machine
rises, which can degrade the product's performance. To prevent this, fans are installed to make outside
air enter various areas.

Two switches are equipped to read the opening and closing of the front door and the right door.

Fuser driving 133

 Figure 3-119 Overview of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor

Table 3-65 Overview of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor

Callout Part name Part number Description

S56 Inner temperature sensor 1404-001417 Detect the internal temperature of the printer

F1 LVPS fan JC31-00198A Dissipate heat generated by the LVPS

F2 FDB fan JC31-00154A Dissipate heat generated by the FDB

F3 Front fan JC31-00162A Dissipate heat to the front side of the printer

F4 Fuser fan 5QJ91-80501 Dissipate heat generated by the fuser

F5 Exit fan 1, 2, 3, 4 JC31-00154A Dissipate heat generated by discharging toner fixed

paper

F6 LSU fan JC31-00162A Dissipate heat generated by the LSU

S58 Front door switch JC93-00466A Check whether the front door is open

S59 Right door switch JC93-01467A Check whether the right door is open

134 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-120 Detail view of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor, view 1

Table 3-66 Detail view of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

F1 LVPS fan JC31-00198A Dissipate heat generated by the LVPS

F2 FDB fan JC31-00154A Dissipate heat generated by the FDB

2 LVPS FDB upper cover JC63-06210A –

U56 Fuser fan duct assembly 5QK03-40103 –

F4 Fuser fan 5QJ91-80501 Dissipate heat generated by the fuser

Figure 3-121 Detail view of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor, view 2

Environmental sensor, fan, switch overview 135

 Table 3-67 Detail view of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

U54 Outer temperature, 5QJ90-40002 Detect the external temperature of the printer
humidity sensor assembly

1 Holder outer temperature, JC61-08680A –

humidity sensor

S56 Inner temperature sensor 1404-001417 Detect the internal temperature of the printer

Figure 3-122 Detail view of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor, view 3

Table 3-68 Detail view of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor, view 3

Callout Part name Part number Description

U55 Front fan assembly JC93-01725A –

F3 Front fan JC31-00162A Dissipate heat to the front side of the printer

Figure 3-123 Detail view of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor, view 4

136 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-69 Detail view of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor, view 4

Callout Part name Part number Description

S58 Front door switch JC93-00466A Check whether the front door is open

Figure 3-124 Detail view of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor, view 5

Table 3-70 Detail view of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor, view 5

Callout Part name Part number Description

S59 Right door switch JC93-01467A Checks whether the right door is open

Control panel
Learn about the control panel.

Control panel – 10.1 inch

Learn about the control panel – 10.1 inch.

The control panel consists of the LCD to show UI, touch sensor for user to set the device from UI, and
audio codec/speaker for sound. This control panel uses the 10.1 inch capacitive type touch sensor and
1280x800 WXGA LCD.

● Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm (10.1 in 2nd) part number: 5QK42-60104

NOTE:

● Control panel - 8 inch

– The diagnostic button always works.

● Control panel - 10 inch

– The diagnostic button works when the printer is in Sleep mode or when the control panel is
physically disconnected from the formatter.

Control panel 137

 – When the printer is in Ready mode, pressing the diagnostic button stops control panel
operation. To reactivate the control panel, press the button again (or do nothing for 10
seconds).

Figure 3-125 Overview of the control panel – 10.1 inch

Table 3-71 Overview of the control panel – 10.1 inch

Callout Part name Part number Description

0 Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm (10.1 5QK42-60104

in 2nd)

1 Touch sensor NA OGS (One glass solution) type capacitive touch

sensor

2 LCD NA 10.1 inches 1280x800 WXGA LCD

3 Control panel front cover NA

4 Control panel PCA NA Control panel PCA

5 Control panel rear cover NA

6 Hinge NA

7 Control panel hinge cover NA

138 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-71 Overview of the control panel – 10.1 inch (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

8 Interface PCA NA Interface PCA between formatter and LCD PCA

9 Hinge holder NA

10 Control panel hinge bracket NA

Control panel – 8 inch

Learn about the control panel – 8 inch.

The control panel consists of the LCD to show UI, touch sensor for user to set the device from UI, and
audio codec/speaker for sound. This control panel uses the 8 inch capacitive type touch sensor and
1024x768 XGA LCD.

● Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm (8 in): 3SJ15-60101

Figure 3-126 Overview of the control panel – 8 inch

Control panel – 8 inch 139

 Table 3-72 Overview of the control panel – 8 inch

Callout Part name Part number Description

0 Control-panel assembly 3SJ15-60101

20.3 cm (8 in)

1 Touch sensor NA OGS (One glass solution) type capacitive touch sensor

2 LCD NA 8 inches 1024x768 WGA LCD

3 Control panel front cover NA

4 Control panel PCA NA Control panel PCA

5 Control panel rear cover NA

6 Hinge NA

7 Control panel hinge cover NA

8 Interface PCA NA Interface PCA between formatter and LCD PCA

9 Hinge holder NA

10 Control panel hinge NA

bracket

Hardware configuration
Learn about the hardware configuration.

PCA overview
Learn about the PCAs.

140 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-127 Overview of the PCAs

Table 3-73 Overview of the PCAs

No. Part name Part number Description

P1 Formatter 6CF14-67001 Handles the video controller, engine

controller, and scan controller

P2 Trusted platform module (TPM) 3SJ03-60001 Stores and generates encryption keys that
can be used for device authentication
(not orderable)

P3 Riser card Connects data storage to the formatter

P3-1 Riser card for HDD 3SJ01-60001 Connects the hard disk to the formatter

P3-2 SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit 4XN67-67001 Connects the hard disk to the formatter

P3-3 Riser card for HDD and, two USB 3SJ02-60001 Connects the hard disk and the accelerator
type C, and accelerator board to the formatter

P4 Accelerator 6HN30-67001 Accelerates digital signal processing (DSP)

and optical character recognition (OCR)
performance supporting the z-bundle

P5 Storage 933853-010 (HDD) Stores operating system and machine data

to operate the printer system
733M6-69001 (SSD)

P6 USB hub 3SJ04-60002 Interfaces with the main PCA, USB device,
and HIP2 options

P7 Island of data (IOD) 3SJ06-60001 Stores machine configuration and engine

control data

PCA overview 141

 Table 3-73 Overview of the PCAs (continued)

No. Part name Part number Description

P8 (see Echo (Not orderable) T3U64-60001 (Not Collects internal acoustics information via
Note) orderable) microphone for system diagnosis
For more information, see Note.
For more
information, see
Note.

S32 Toner collection unit full sensor JC92-02471A Detects the waste toner level of the toner
collection unit

P10 High voltage power supply JC44-00240C Generates 15 high-voltage channels, which
(HVPS) include ITHV (4), MHV (4), DEV (4), FUSER,
SAW, 2THV(+/-)

P11 Low voltage power supply (LVPS) (110V) JC44-00149C Supplies electric power to the main board
and other boards. The voltage provided
(220V) JC44-00150C includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V
power input. It has safety protection modes
for over current and overload.

P12 Fuser drive board (FDB) (110V) JC44-00235C Supplies the voltage to fuser AC, heater, and
main PCA
(220V) JC44-00236C

P14-1 Keyboard (fold type) 5QK47-60001 Connects the keypad with the formatter

P14-2 Keyboard (drawer type) 5QK47-60002 Connects the keypad with the formatter

P18-1 Single FAX card 7ZA08-67001 Optional fax kit card

P18-2 Single FAX card - BBU 7ZA09-67001 Optional fax kit card - BBU

P18-3 Dual FAX card 5QK14-67001 Optional fax kit card

P18-4 Dual FAX card - BBU 7ZA07-67001 Optional fax kit card - BBU

U60-1 Keyboard assembly – US English JC93-01742A Physical keyboard

U60-2 Keyboard assembly – UK English JC93-01743A Physical keyboard

U60-3 Keyboard assembly – US English 63C82-67003 Physical keyboard

(drawer type)

U60-4 Keyboard assembly – UK English 63C82-67005 Physical keyboard

(drawer type)

Not Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, RU, 5851-6019 Language specific keyboard overlay
shown DE,ES,UK Kybd)

Not Keyboard overlay kit (FR-CN, ES- 5851-6020 Language specific keyboard overlay
shown LA, ES,US Kybd)

Not Keyboard overlay kit (FR-SW, DE- 5851-6021 Language specific keyboard overlay
shown SW, DA,UK Kybd)

Not Keyboard overlay kit (ZHTW, 5851-6022 Language specific keyboard overlay
shown ZHCN)

Not Keyboard overlay kit (ES, PT) 5851-6023 Language specific keyboard overlay
shown

Not Keyboard overlay kit (JA-KG, JA- 5851-6024 Language specific keyboard overlay
shown KT)

142 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-73 Overview of the PCAs (continued)

No. Part name Part number Description

Not Tray 2 open, paper size sensor JC93-01408A(O) Detects the size of the paper in the tray
shown
(S5)

Not Tray 3 open, paper size sensor JC93-01408A(O) Detects the size of the paper in the tray
shown
(S9)

Not Drum CRUM - Includes an IC chip for drum unit operation

shown and life cycle counting
(P15)

Not Eraser - Erases the negative charges on the surface

shown of the drum after printing
(P16)

Not Fuser CRUM - Includes an IC chip for maintaining the

shown fuser unit life cycle counting, and provides
(P17) a connection interface for the fuser gap
sensor operation

Not Toner cartridge CRUM PCA - Includes an IC chip for toner cartridge
shown operation and life cycle counting
(P19)

NOTE: Echo PCA is removed from printers manufactured after April 2024 due to the design changes
implemented in the printers. The removal of this part does not affect the function of the printer. The
part is not available for purchase (cannot be ordered) and is not be used in printers.

Formatter
Learn about the formatter.

The formatter handles the video controller, engine controller and scan controller. This PCA receives print
data from the host through the network or USB port, and it receives copy data from the Scan Controller.
It takes this information and generates printable video bitmap data. It controls all modules required to
print: LSU, HVPS, FAN, Fuser, etc.

The formatter consists of the main processor, memory (DDR4 6GB), 1G Ethernet PHY, Micom (Power
control), Video/CP/FAX signal interface connection, motor driving IC, Engine signal interface connection,
and power interface.

The main processor (Quad Core 1.6GHz CPU) of the formatter controls video, engine, CP display and
communicates with various devices. The hard disk is connected to the formatter by three types of riser
cards.

● Formatter part number: 6CF14-67001 (P1)

Formatter 143
 Figure 3-128 Formatter

Table 3-74 Formatter connections

CN Connection Type Harness Part number Error when

Number disconnected

Main-J1 Control panel 22pin JC39-02829A No power supply

Power key PCA

Main-J2 Control panel HDMI 19pin 5QK03-50006 Command panel is

HDMI off

Main-J4 USB host 4pin USB 5QK03-50006

Main-J5 HVPS 24pin JC39-02228A 63.00.02

LSU skew adjustment motor

144 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-74 Formatter connections (continued)

CN Connection Type Harness Part number Error when

Number disconnected

Main-J6 LSU shutter motor 36pin JC39-02815A 63.00.2D

LSU shutter sensor 1, 2

LSU shutter motor

LSU shutter sensor 1, 2

LSU LD

Toner collection unit motor

Toner collection unit motor

sensor

Toner collection unit detection

sensor

Toner collection unit full sensor

Main-J7 Fax 20pin Dual Fax 810: 5QK14A

Dual Fax 811: 7ZA07A

Single Fax 800: 7ZA08A

Single Fax 801: 7ZA09A

Main-J8 Unused

Main-J9 Control panel USB host 5QK03-50006 USB not recognized

Main-J10 Unused

Main-J11 Trusted platform module (TPM) 20pin 3SJ03-60001 33.04.01

PCA
(not orderable)

Main-J12 CPU Fan 4pin 1205-1597 (not orderable) 57.10.01

Main-J13 Unused

Main-J14 Unused

Main-J15 Riser-HDD 64pin Riser for HDD: 3SJ01-60001 99.09.66

PCA
SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit:
4XN67-67001

Riser for HDD, USB ports,

Accelerator: 3SJ02-60001

Main-J16 Cyan drum motor 10pin JC39-02842A 59.06.50

Main-J17 Magenta drum home sensor 40pin JC39-02800A 59.08.50

Magenta drum motor

Yellow drum home sensor

Yellow drum motor

Yellow, magenta, cyan developer

motor

Formatter 145
 Table 3-74 Formatter connections (continued)

CN Connection Type Harness Part number Error when

Number disconnected

Main-J18 Unused

Main-J19 Fuser and exit motor 32pin JC39-02195A 50.FF.02

Fuser fan

Right door open switch

Fuser gap motor

Exit fan 1, 2, 3, 4

Main-J20 USB host 9pin USB

Main-J21 Network 12pin

RJ45

Main-J22 Mini USB port 9pin USB

Main-J23 Unused

Main-J24 Unused

Main-J25 Unused

Main-J26 Unused

Main-J28 Finisher 16pin JC39-02194A

Main-J30 Echo PCA 6pin PCA 3SJ11-60108

Main-J31 LSU black, cyan color 60pin 5QK03-50003 63.00.2A

FFC
LSU temperature sensor

Main-J32 LSU magenta, yellow color 50pin 5QK03-50003 63.00.29

FFC

Main-J33 USB host 4pin USB

Main-J34 HVPS 35pin JC39-02252A 63.00.02

FFC

Main-J35 Unused

Main-J37 Tray 2 paper empty sensor 26pin JC39-02234A Tray 2 paper empty,
Tray 3 paper empty
Tray 2 stack height sensor

Tray 2 prefeed sensor

Tray 2 feed motor

Tray 3 paper empty sensor

Tray 3 stack height sensor

Tray 3 prefeed sensor

Tray 3 feed motor

146 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-74 Formatter connections (continued)

CN Connection Type Harness Part number Error when

Number disconnected

Main-J38 Tray 1 solenoid 40pin JC39-02586A 13.B9.FF

Tray 1 paper empty sensor

Feed 2 sensor

Duplex 2 motor

Tray 1 clutch

Loop sensor 1

Loop sensor 2

Duplex jam 2 sensor

Fuser out sensor

Main-J39 Island of data (IOD) 14pin JC39-02823A System down during

PCA initialization process

Main-J40 Front CPR sensor 20pin JC39-02230A

Rear CPR sensor

Center CPR sensor

CPR shutter motor

CPR shutter sensor

Main-J41 Black toner cartridge CRUM 17pin J39-02261A Install Yellow,

Magenta, Cyan,
Cyan toner cartridge CRUM Black cartridge

Magenta toner cartridge CRUM

Yellow toner cartridge CRUM

Main-J42 Black drum CRUM 32pin JC39-02255A Install Yellow,

Magenta, Cyan,
Black eraser Black drum

Cyan drum CRUM

Cyan eraser

Inner temperature sensor

Magenta drum CRUM

Magenta eraser

Yellow drum CRUM

Yellow eraser

Formatter 147
 Table 3-74 Formatter connections (continued)

CN Connection Type Harness Part number Error when

Number disconnected

Main-J43 Center thermistor 24pin JC39-02809A 54.DD.02, Install

fuser unit
Side thermistor

Wrap jam sensor

Fuser CRUM

Center 2 thermistor

Side 2 thermistor

Main-J44 Exit 2 motor 28pin JC39-02836A 13.E1.D1, 13.E7.D1

Duplex 1 motor

Exit 2 sensor

Out bin full 1 sensor

Out bin full 2 sensor(optional)

Return gate solenoid

Duplex jam 1 sensor

Main-J45 ITB engage motor 10pin JC39-02239A 59.00.F0

Registration sensor

Main-J46 Black drum motor 34pin JC39-02840A 59.05.50

Black developer motor

Cyan drum home sensor

Black drum home sensor

Main-J47 Black toner concentration 30pin JC39-02260A 63.00.41

sensor

Cyan toner concentration

sensor

Magenta toner concentration

sensor

Yellow toner concentration

sensor

148 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-74 Formatter connections (continued)

CN Connection Type Harness Part number Error when

Number disconnected

Main-J48 LSU fan 26pin JC39-02844A Close the front door

Outer temperature and humidity

sensor

Toner collection duct unit

detection sensor

Toner collection duct unit motor

sensor

Front door open switch

Front fan

Toner collection duct unit motor

Main-J49 FDB 32pin 5QK03-50008 30.01.44, 63.00.20,

Tray 2 open, Tray 3
LVPS open

Tray 2 open, paper size sensor

Tray 3 open, paper size sensor

LVPS fan

FDB fan

Main-J50 Unused

Main-J52 Unused

Main-J54 Unused

Main-J56 DCF 18pin JC39-02187A DCF, HCI, or sHCI not

recognized
HCI

sHCI

Main-J58 Black toner dispense motor 36pin JC39-02817A 59.13.B0

Black toner dispense motor

sensor

Cyan toner dispense motor

sensor

Magenta toner dispense motor

Yellow toner dispense motor

Yellow toner dispense motor

Magenta toner dispense motor

sensor

Yellow toner dispense motor

sensor

Black, cyan reservoir motor

Magenta, yellow reservoir motor

Formatter 149
 Table 3-74 Formatter connections (continued)

CN Connection Type Harness Part number Error when

Number disconnected

Main-J60 LVPS 22pin JC39-02808A No power supply

Main-J61 Feed motor 11pin JC39-02799A 13.B2.D2

Registration motor

Tray 1 pickup clutch

Main-J62 Black toner residual amount 16pin JC39-02821A

sensor

Cyan toner residual amount

sensor

Magenta toner residual amount

sensor

Yellow toner residual amount

sensor

Main-J63 Unused

Main-J64 SSA-J3 4pin 3SJ11-50006 30.03.20

Platen power outlet

Main-J65 Unused

Main-J95 SSA-J9 50pin 3SJ11-50021 30.03.45

FFC
Platen interface 2

Main-J96 SSA-J4 68pin 3SJ11-50022 30.01.44

FFC
Platen interface 1

Main- CPU
U38

Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

Learn about the Trusted Platform Module (TPM).

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a hardware-based encryption device. It stores and/or generates
encryption keys that can be used for device authentication.

NOTE: When the formatter needs to be replaced, the TPM should be re-installed to the new formatter
after reset password for retain key security credentials.

● Trusted platform module part number: 3SJ03-60001 (P2) (not orderable)

150 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-129 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

Table 3-75 Trusted Platform Module (TPM) connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

TPM-J1 Main-J11 PCA 3SJ03-60001

(not orderable)

Riser card
Learn about the riser card.

The riser card is a connecting board between the formatter and the data storage. There are 3 types of
riser card depending on the storage type and the accelerator installment.

Riser card for HDD

Learn about the riser card for HDD.

● Riser card for HDD part number: 3SJ01-60001 (P3-1)

Figure 3-130 Riser card for HDD

Table 3-76 Riser card for HDD connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Riser1-J1 HDD HDD 500GB hard disk drive

933853-010

Riser1-C1 Main-J15 PCA 3SJ01-60001

Riser card 151

 SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit
Learn about the SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit.

● SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit (4XN67-67001) (P3-2)

Figure 3-131 SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit ports

Table 3-77 SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit port connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Riser2-J1 HDD HDD 500GB hard disk drive

933853-010

Riser2-J4 USB port – –

Riser2-J5 USB port – –

Riser2-J7 NA – –

Riser2-C1 Main-J15 PCA 4XN67-67001

Riser card for HDD, USB ports, and accelerator board

Learn about the riser card for HDD, USB ports, and accelerator board.

● Riser card for HDD, two USB Type C ports, and accelerator board part number: 3SJ02-60001 (P3-3)

152 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-132 Riser card for HDD, two USB Type C ports, and accelerator board

Riser card for HDD, two USB Type C ports, and accelerator board

Table 3-78 Riser card for HDD, two USB Type C ports, and accelerator board connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Riser3-J1 HDD HDD 500GB hard disk drive

933853-010

Riser3-J4 USB port – –

Riser3-J5 USB port – –

Riser3-J7 ACC-C1 PCA 3SJ30-60001

Riser3-C1 Main-J15 PCA 3SJ02-60001

Accelerator
Learn about the accelerator.

The accelerator enhances digital signal processing (DSP) and Optical Character Recognition (OCR)
performance supporting the z-bundle. This module interfaces with the riser card.

● Accelerator part number: 6HN30-67001 (P4)

Accelerator 153
 Figure 3-133 Accelerator

Table 3-79 Accelerator connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Acc-J2 Fan – –

Acc-C1 Riser3-J7 PCA 3SJ02-60001

Storage
Learn about the storage.

Solid-state drive
Learn about the solid-state drive.

Overview
An optional solid-state drive (SSD) is available. The SSD ensure that the printer operates quickly and in a
stable manner.

● Solid-state drive part number: 733M6-69001 (P5)

Figure 3-134 SSD 733M6A / 733M6-69001

154 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Solid-state drive (SSD) kit configuration
Some parts included in the kit are not required to install the SSD.

NOTE: Save unused kit parts to install with other HP kits.

Figure 3-135 SSD kit contents

1 2

4
3

Reference number Description

1 SSD/cradled (used in this kit)

2 Rivets/screws/plate-ground (used in this kit - save screws and plate-ground)

3 PCA for assembly with 4XN67A (not used in this kit - save)

3 PCA for assembly with 6HN30A (not used in this kit - save)

Solid-state drive (SSD) kit installation considerations

The required pars for a SSD installation depend on the specific printer accessories environment/
configuration.

● SSD only

● SSD with USB ports

● SSD with USB ports and an accelerator card

If migrating data from an HDD to an SSD, both the HDD and SSD should be installed on the riser card.
The data automatically transfers when the product is turned on.

After completing the migration the HDD can be removed. However, if an accelerator board isalso
installed, the data must first be backed up through the following process.

1. Install HDD and SSD at the sheath adapter, and then execute booting for data migration.

2. After data migration process is done, remove the HDD. Install the SSD and accelerator card on the
scabbard adapter.

Solid-state drive 155

 Solid-state drive (SSD) configurations
The following figures show the SSD configurations for auto-data migration.

Figure 3-136 HDD auto-data migration configuration

3
1

Reference number Description

1 M.2 SSD + Support (included with the SDD kit)

2 HDD

3 Porthos riser card (included with the SDD kit)

Figure 3-137 HDD / USB expansion port auto-data migration configuration

3
1

Reference number Description

1 M.2 SSD + Sheath adapter (included with the SDD kit)

2 HDD

3 Athos riser card (included with the USB expansion kit accessory)

The following figure shows the SSD configurations requiring manual data migration (for more
information, see Solid-state drive (SSD) kit installation considerations).

For this configuration, use the follow steps for data migration.

1. Install HDD and SSD at the sheath adapter, and then execute booting for data migration.

156 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 2. After data migration process is done, remove the HDD. Install the SSD and accelerator card on the
scabbard adapter.

Figure 3-138 HDD / USB expansion port / Accelerator data migration configuration

Reference number Description

1 M.2 SSD + Scabbard adapter (included with the SDD kit)

2 Accelerator

3 Aramis riser card (included with Accelerator kit accessory)

Hard-disk drive
Learn about the hard-disk drive.

A 500GB hard-disk drive is initially installed in the machine to save operating system and machine data
which operates the printer system.

● Hard-disk drive part number: 933853-010 (P5)

Hard-disk drive 157

 Figure 3-139 Hard-disk drive, 933853-010 (Toshiba)

Table 3-80 Hard disk connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Hard-disk drive Riser1-J1

Riser2-J1

Riser3-J1

USB hub PCA

Learn about the USB hub PCA.

USB Hub PCA is used to interface with the formatter, walkup USB port, HIP2 and keyboard options. It
interfaces through USB2.0 communication.

● USB hub PCA part number: 3SJ04-60002 (P6)

Figure 3-140 Hub Board PCA

Table 3-81 USB hub PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

USB-J1 Main-J4 (MX3/4) USB2.0 Type-B JC39-02780A (MX3)

Main-J9 (MX7) 5QJ94-50002 (MX4)

5QK03-50006 (MX7)

USB-J2 HIP2 (MX4) USB2.0 Mini-B

158 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-81 USB hub PCA connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

USB-J3 Walkup USB port USB2.0 Type-A

USB-J4 HIP2 (MX7) USB2.0 Mini-B

USB-J5 Keyboard-J1 USB2.0 Type-A 5QK03-50017

Island of data (IOD)

Learn about the island of data (IOD).

The IOD PCA has two EEPROMs and one RTC battery.

One EEPROM stores the machine configuration data and the engine control data. These data are used
for all system operation (system parameter, device status, tech information, and service information).

The RTC battery supplies power to store time information even when the machine power is turned off.
The RTC battery (CR2032) needs to be replaced when the time information of the machine is not saved.

● Island of data (IOD) part number: 3SJ06-60001 (P7)

NOTE: If IOD is removed from Formatter by replacing IOD or Formatter, the date and time of the
product stored in Formatter will be deleted. In this case, be sure to set the date and time again after
restarting the product.

Figure 3-141 Island of data (IOD)

Table 3-82 Island of data (IOD) connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

IOD-J1 Main-J39 8pin JC39-02823A

IOD-B1 Battery CR2032 –

Echo PCA
Learn about the echo PCA.

Island of data (IOD) 159

 The echo PCA is used for Smart Device Service (SDS). This PCA collects internal acoustics information
via microphone for the system diagnosis.

NOTE: Echo PCA, Rivet echo, and Echo-J1: These parts are no longer orderable and removed from
printers manufactured after April 2024. The removal of these parts is due to the design change
implemented in the printer. This change does not affect the function of the printer.

● Echo PCA

● Rivet echo PCA (Callout 1)

Figure 3-142 Echo PCA

Table 3-83 Echo PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Echo-J1 Main-J30 6pin 3SJ11-60108 (Not orderable)

Power key PCA

Learn about the power key PCA.

The power key PCA is used to implement the soft-power switch.

● Power key PCA part number: 3SJ33-60007 (P13)

Figure 3-143 Power key PCA

160 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-84 Power key PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Power-CN1 Main-J1 5pin JC39-02829A

Power-SW1 – Switch –

Keyboard PCA
Learn about the keyboard PCA.

The keyboard PCA an optional part which is used to connect with the keyboard assembly and the printer.
It interfaces with the USB hub PCA through USB mini communication.

NOTE: Both types of keyboards (folding/drawer) will be found in the field due to a manufacturing
overlap.

● Keyboard (fold type) PCA part number: 5QK47-60001 (P14-1)

● Keyboard (drawer type) PCA part number: 5QK47-60002 (P14-2)

● Keyboard (fold type) assembly – US English: JC93-01742A (U60-1)

● Keyboard (drawer type) assembly – UK English: JC93-01743A (U60-2)

● Keyboard (fold type) assembly – US English: 63C82-67003 (U60-3)

● Keyboard (drawer type) assembly – UK English: 63C82-67005 (U60-4)

Figure 3-144 Keyboard (fold and drawer type) PCAs

Fold type

Drawer type

J3
J2

Table 3-85 Keyboard PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

Key-J1 USB-J4 11 pin 5QK03-50010

Key-J2 Keypad 26 pin (FFC) 5851-6603 (Keypad-US)

5851-6604 (Keypad-UK)

Key-J3 USB hub PCA USB2.0 Type-A 5QK03-50017

Keyboard PCA 161

 Figure 3-145 Keyboard assembly

Fold type Drawer type

U60

Toner Collection Unit full sensor PCA

Learn about the Toner Collection Unit full sensor PCA.

The Toner Collection Unit full sensor PCA detects the waste toner level of the toner collection unit.

● TCU full sensor PCA part number: JC92-02471A (S32)

Figure 3-146 TCU full sensor PCA

Table 3-86 TCU full sensor PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

TCU-CN1 Main-J6 4pin JC39-02815A

Paper size sensor PCA

Learn about the Paper size sensor PCA.

The paper size sensor PCA is used to detect the size of the paper in the tray.

● Paper size sensor PCA part number: JC92-02622A

162 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-147 Paper size sensor PCA

Table 3-87 Paper size sensor PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Paper-CN3 Main-J49 4pin 5QK03-50008

Drum CRUM PCA

Learn about the drum CRUM PCA.

The drum CRUM PCA includes an IC chip for drum unit operation and life cycle counting.

● Drum CRUM PCA part number: 3SJ07-60001 (P15)

Figure 3-148 Drum CRUM PCA

Table 3-88 Drum CRUM PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

DCRUM-J1 Main-J42 4pin JC39-02256A

Toner cartridge CRUM PCA

Learn about the toner cartridge CRUM PCA.

The toner cartridge CRUM PCA includes an IC chip for toner cartridge operation and cycle counting.

Drum CRUM PCA 163

 ● Toner cartridge CRUM PCA part number: 3SJ07-60002

Figure 3-149 Toner cartridge CRUM PCA

Table 3-89 Toner cartridge CRUM PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

DCRUM-J1 Main-J41 4pin JC39-02261A

Eraser PCA
Learn about the eraser PCA.

The eraser PCA has one LED. The LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the
drum after printing.

● Eraser PCA part number: JC92-02744A (P16)

Figure 3-150 Eraser PCA

Table 3-90 Eraser PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Eraser-J1 Main-J42 4pin J39-02256A

Fuser CRUM PCA

Learn about the fuser CRUM PCA.

The fuser CRUM PCA includes an IC chip for maintaining the fuser unit life cycle counting. It also
provides a connection interface for the fuser gap sensor.

164 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 ● Fuser CRUM PCA part number: 6CF14-60001

Figure 3-151 Fuser CRUM PCA

Table 3-91 Fuser CRUM PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Fuser-CN1 Fuser EEPROM, fuser gap sensor 5pin NA

interface

Fuser-CN2 Fuser gap sensor 3pin NA

Control panel PCA

Learn about the control panel PCA.

The control panel PCA manages the control panel operation communicating with the formatter.

● Control panel base PCA part number: 3SJ15-60001

● Control panel – 10.1 inch PCA part number: 5QK42-60001

● Control panel – 8 inch PCA part number: 3SJ15-60002

Control panel base PCA

Learn about the control panel base PCA.

Figure 3-152 Control panel base PCA

Control panel PCA 165

 Table 3-92 Control panel base PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

CP-J1 Main-J1 14pin 1254-3368

CP-J2 Main-J2 19pin 1254-4067

CP-J3 Micom (STM32) 10pin 0960-3860

CP-J4 RFID CP10.1-J1 3pin 1253-8237

CP-J5 CP8-J1 50pin 1254-4496

Control panel PCA – 10.1 inch

Learn about the control panel PCA – 10.1 inch.

Figure 3-153 Control panel PCA – 10.1 inch

Table 3-93 Control panel PCA connections – 10.1 inch

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

CP10.1-J1 CP-J5 50pin 1254-4496

CP10.1-J2 LCD 40pin 1254-3213

CP10.1-J3 Touch IC 10pin 1253-7348

CP10.1-J4/J5 Touch screen panel 50pin 1254-4496

CP10.1-J6 Speaker 2pin 1254-1607

Control panel PCA – 8 inch

Learn about the control panel PCA – 8 inch.

166 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-154 Control panel PCA – 8 inch

Table 3-94 Control panel PCA connections – 8 inch

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

CP8-J1 CP-J5 50pin 1254-4496

CP8-J2 LCD 40pin 1254-0737

CP8-J3 Touch IC 10pin 1253-7348

CP8-J4 TSP 80pin 1254-4475

CP8-J5 Speaker 2pin 1254-1607

High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)

Learn about the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS).

The High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) PCA generates 15 high-voltage channels, which include ITHV(4),
MHV(4), DEV(4), FUSER, SAW, 2THV(+/-).

● High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) part number: JC44-00240C

High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) 167

 Figure 3-155 High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)

Table 3-95 HVPS PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number Error when disconnected

HVPS-CN1 Main-J34 35pin, JC39-02252A Print out blank page

FFC

HVPS-CN2 Main-J5 12pin JC39-02228A 63.00.01

HVPS-CN3 Yellow, magenta, cyan ITB 3pin JC39-02801A Print out light black and
white image

HVPS-CN4 Fuser bias, saw plate 2pin JC39-02224A

HVPS-CN5 Black ITB 2pin JC39-02801A Print out light black and
white image

HVPS-2TH Second transfer 1pin JC39-02227A

V(+/-)

HVPS- Yellow drum 2 wires JC39-02225A

OUT101

HVPS- Magenta drum 2 wires JC39-02225A

OUT201

HVPS- Cyan drum 2 wires JC39-02225A

OUT301

HVPS- Black drum 2 wires JC39-02225A

OUT401

168 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-95 HVPS PCA connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number Error when disconnected

HVPS- Yellow developer 2 wires JC39-02223A

OUT501

HVPS- Magenta developer 2 wires JC39-02223A

OUT601

HVPS- Cyan developer 2 wires JC39-02223A

OUT701

HVPS- Black developer 2 wires JC39-02223A

OUT801

Lower Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)

Learn about the Lower Voltage Power Supply (LVPS).

The Lower Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) board supplies the electric power to the main board and other
boards. The voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety
protection modes for over current and overload.

● Lower voltage power supply(LVPS) part number: (110V) JC44-00149C, (220V) JC44-00150C

Figure 3-156 Lower Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)

Lower Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) 169

 Table 3-96 LVPS type6 PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number Error when disconnected

LVPS-CN1 FDB-CN7 2pin JC39-02193A No power supply

LVPS-CN2 Main-J60 9pin JC39-02808A No power supply

LVPS-CN3 Main-J60 3pin JC39-02808A 30.01.44, 63.00.20

LVPS-CN102 Main-J49 13pin JC39-02845A 30.01.44, 63.00.20

Fuser Drive Board (FDB)

Learn about the Fuser Drive Board (FDB).

The Fuser Drive Board (FDB) supplies voltage to the fuser AC, the heater, and the formatter.

● Fuser Drive Board (FDB) part number: (110V) JC44-00235C, (220V) JC44-00236C

Figure 3-157 Fuser Drive Board (FDB)

Table 3-97 Fuser Drive Board (FDB) PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number Error Code when

disconnected

FDB-CN1 AC inlet 2pin JC39-02803A No power supply

FDB-CN2 Base printer tray heater 3pin JC39-02196A

FDB-CN3 DCF, HCI tray heater 3pin JC39-02187A

FDB-CN6 Fuser heating lamp 3pin JC39-02809A 50.FF.01

FDB-CN7 LVPS-CN1 2pin JC39-02818A No power supply

FDB-CN9 Main-J49 10pin JC39-02845A 50.FF.0E

FDB-CN10 Tray heater switch 4pin JC39-02197A

FDB-CN11 Reactor 2pin

170 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-97 Fuser Drive Board (FDB) PCA connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number Error Code when

disconnected

FDB-CN12 Reactor 2pin

Integrated Scan Asset

You will learn more about the integrated scan asset (ISA).

Integrated scan asset (ISA) is a device that scans a user's document and allows it to be saved to a file
or printed. This machine consists of an Auto Document Feeder (ADF) that can scan a large batch of
documents automatically, and a Platen that scans documents one by one from the flatbed.

Automatic document feeder system: 300sh Flow ADF

You will learn more about Automatic document feeder system: 300sh Flow ADF.

ADF cover
Learn about the ADF cover.

Figure 3-158 ADF cover

Table 3-98 ADF cover

Callout Part name Part number

C501 ADF front cover 5QJ90-40049

C502 ADF rear cover 5QJ90-40041

C503 ADF top cover 5QJ90-40054

C504 ADF input tray Z9Y05-60031

C505 ADF CMF panel 5QJ90-40056

ADF unit
Learn about the ADF unit.

Integrated Scan Asset 171

 Figure 3-159 ADF unit, view 1

Table 3-99 ADF unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number

U501 300 sheet flow ADF 5QJ90-61042

U502 ADF tray upper assembly Z9Y05-60032

K501 ADF roller kit 5RC00-67001

Figure 3-160 ADF unit, view 2

Table 3-100 ADF unit, view 2

Callout Part name Part number

K502 SVC-Hinge Kit (right, middle, left) 5QK08-67003

1 ADF hinge damper module Z9Y05-60016

K503 ADF white backing kit 5QK08-67005

172 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

ADF system overview
You will learn more about ADF system overview.

300-sheet ADF workflow

Learn about the ADF workflow.

Figure 3-161 ADF workflow

Table 3-101 ADF workflow

Callout Unit name Description

1 Lift plate Moves an original document upward so that it is on the pickup

paper path

2 Pickup Picks up an original document to the deskew unit inside the ADF

3 Deskew Adjusts the skew of the original document

4 Scan Scans an original document

5 Exit Discards scanned documents to the ADF output bin

ADF sensors
Learn about the ADF sensors.

ADF system overview 173

 Figure 3-162 ADF sensors, view 1

Table 3-102 ADF sensors, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

S501 ADF paper long size NA Checks the length size of paper
sensor

S502 ADF paper short size NA Checks the length size of paper
sensor

S503 ADF paper width sensor NA Checks the width size of paper

S504 ADF lift sensor NA Checks the pickup ready position of the paper

S505 ADF paper present sensor NA Checks whether there is no paper on lift plate

S506 ADF pick lift sensor NA Checks the position of the pickup roller

S507 ADF multi feed sensor NA Checks the multi feeding of paper

S508 ADF pick success sensor NA Check the paper location between the forward roller and
the deskew roller

S509 ADF deskew sensor NA Checks the paper arrival at the deskew roller and sets
the time to start the deskew roller

S510 ADF top of page sensor NA Checks whether the paper is arrived at the sensor. Then
determines the starting point of the document scanning.

S511 ADF image scanner NA Scans the back side of the paper

S512 ADF cover sensor NA Checks whether the ADF cover is open or closed

174 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-163 ADF sensors, view 2

Table 3-103 ADF sensors, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

S501 ADF paper long size NA Checks the length size of paper
sensor

S502 ADF paper short size NA Checks the length size of paper
sensor

S503 ADF paper width sensor NA Checks the width size of paper

S504 ADF lift sensor NA Checks the pickup ready position of the paper

S505 ADF paper present sensor NA Checks whether there is paper on the lift plate

S506 ADF pick lift sensor NA Checks the position of the pickup roller

S508 ADF pick success sensor NA Checks the paper location between the forward roller
and the deskew roller

S509 ADF deskew sensor NA Checks the paper arrival at the deskew roller and sets
the time to start the deskew roller

S510 ADF top of page sensor NA Checks whether the paper is arrived at the sensor. Then
determines the starting point of the document scanning.

S511 ADF image scanner NA Scans the back side of the paper

S512 ADF cover sensor NA Checks whether the ADF cover is open or closed

ADF system motor / solenoid / roller

Learn about the ADF system motor / solenoid / roller.

ADF system motor / solenoid / roller 175

 Figure 3-164 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 1

Table 3-104 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

M501 ADF lift plate motor NA Moves the lift plate up and down

M502 ADF retard motor NA Drives the separation roller

R501 ADF separation roller NA Prevents multiple pages from feeding in contact with the
forward roller

CL502 ADF pickup up/down clutch NA Moves the pickup roller down to contact with paper

M503 ADF deskew motor NA Drives the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the
deskew roller

CL501 ADF pickup clutch NA Connects the driving force from the feed motor to the
pickup roller and the forward roller

R502 ADF pickup roller NA Picks up paper

R503 ADF forward roller NA Moves paper out of the pickup roller to the inside of the
ADF

CL503 ADF deskew clutch NA Connects driving force from the deskew motor to the
deskew roller

R504 ADF deskew roller NA Aligns the leading edge straight, moves the paper to the
scan area

M504 ADF feed motor NA Drives the scan roller

R505 ADF scan roller NA Sends paper from the deskew roller to the exit roller

M505 ADF exit motor NA Drives the exit roller

R506 ADF exit roller NA Discharges the paper

176 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-165 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 2

Table 3-105 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

M501 ADF lift plate motor NA Moves the lift plate up and down

M502 ADF retard motor NA Drives the separation roller

R501 ADF separation roller NA Prevents multiple papers from feeding in contact with the
forward roller

CL502 ADF pickup up/down clutch NA Moves the pickup roller down to contact with paper

M503 ADF deskew motor NA Drives the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the
deskew roller

CL501 ADF pickup clutch NA Connects the driving force from the feed motor to the
pickup roller and the forward roller

R502 ADF pickup roller NA Picks up paper

R503 ADF forward roller NA Moves paper from the pickup roller to the inside of the
ADF

CL503 ADF deskew clutch NA Connects driving force from the deskew motor to the
deskew roller

R504 ADF deskew roller NA Aligns the leading edge straight, moves the paper to the
scan area

M504 ADF feed motor NA Drives the scan roller

R505 ADF scan roller NA Sends the paper from the deskew roller to the exit roller

M505 ADF exit motor NA Drives the exit roller

R506 ADF exit roller NA Discharges the paper

K501 ADF roller kit 5RC00-67001 Includes pickup, forward, and separation rollers

Lift plate unit

Learn about the lift plate unit.

Lift plate unit 177

 Figure 3-166 Overview of lift plate unit

Table 3-106 Overview of lift plate unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

S501 ADF paper long size NA Checks the size of paper in length
sensor

S502 ADF paper short size NA Checks the size of paper in length
sensor

S503 ADF paper width sensor NA Checks the size of paper in width

S504 ADF lift sensor NA Checks the pickup ready position of the paper

S505 ADF paper present sensor NA Checks whether there is no paper on the lift plate

M501 ADF lift plate motor NA Moves the lift plate up and down

S512 ADF cover sensor NA Checks whether the ADF cover is open or closed

Figure 3-167 Detail view of lift plate unit

178 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-107 Detail view of lift plate unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

S501 ADF paper long size NAa Checks the size of paper in length
sensor

S502 ADF paper short size NA Checks the size of paper in length
sensor

S503 ADF paper width NA Checks the size of paper in width

sensor

S504 ADF lift sensor NA Checks the pickup ready position of the paper

S505 ADF paper present NA Checks whether there is no paper on the lift plate
sensor

M501 ADF lift plate motor NA Moves the lift plate up and down

Pickup unit
Learn about the pickup unit.

The pickup unit takes a paper out of the lift plate and moves it to the deskew roller.

The pickup down clutch moves the pickup roller downward. The paper rises by the movement of the
lift plate, and for a certain period, the pickup roller moves upward so as not to touch the paper. The
lift sensor detects where the pickup roller is located, then the lift plate stops. The pickup roller and the
forward roller rotate by the deskew motor and the pickup clutch, and make the paper is moved forward
between the forward roller and the separation roller. The forward roller and the separation roller rotate
in the opposite directions to each other to prevent from multi-feeding. The separation roller is rotated by
the retard motor.

The paper moves through the pick success sensor and the multi feed sensor to the deskew roller. During
this process, the pick success sensor detects whether the paper position is correct, and then the multi
feed sensor detects whether a multiple page of paper come from the pickup unit. If a multi-feeding error
comes up, it returns to the lift plate to be picked up again.

Pickup unit 179

 Figure 3-168 Overview of pickup unit

Table 3-108 Overview of pickup unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

K501 ADF roller kit 5RC00-67001 Includes in the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the
separation roller

CL501 ADF pickup up, down clutch NA Makes the pickup roller go down to contact with paper

M503 ADF deskew motor NA Drives the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the
deskew roller

CL502 ADF pickup clutch NA Connects the driving force from the feed motor to the
pickup roller and the forward roller

R502 ADF pickup roller NA Picks up paper

R503 ADF forward roller NA Moves paper from the pickup roller to the ADF inside

M502 ADF retard motor NA Drives the separation roller

R501 ADF separation roller NA Prevents multiple pages from feeding in contact with the
forward roller

S506 ADF pick lift sensor NA Checks the position of the pickup roller

S507 ADF multi feed sensor NA Checks the multi-feeding of paper

S508 ADF pick success sensor NA Checks the paper location between the forward roller
and the deskew the roller

180 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-169 Detail view of pickup unit, view 1

Table 3-109 Detail view of pickup unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

M503 ADF deskew motor NA Drives the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the
deskew roller

R502 ADF pickup roller NA Picks up paper

R503 ADF forward roller NA Moves paper from the pickup roller to the ADF inside

R501 ADF separation roller NA Prevents multiple pages from feeding in contact with the
forward roller

S506 ADF pick lift sensor NA Checks the position of the pickup roller

S507 ADF multi feed sensor NA Checks the multi-feeding of paper

S508 ADF pick success sensor NA Checks the paper location between the forward roller
and the deskew the roller

Figure 3-170 Detail view of pickup unit, view 2

Pickup unit 181

 Table 3-110 Detail view of pickup unit, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

M503 ADF deskew motor NA Drives the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the
deskew roller

Figure 3-171 Detail view of pickup unit, view 3

Table 3-111 Detail view of pickup unit, view 3

Callout Part name Part number Description

CL501 ADF pickup up, down clutch NA Makes the pickup roller go down to contact with paper

CL502 ADF pickup clutch NA Connects the driving force from the feed motor to the
pickup roller and the forward roller

Deskew unit
Learn about the deskew unit.

The deskew unit receives a paper that has passed through the multi-feeding sensor, aligns the paper in
the width direction and sends it to the scan roller. When a paper enters the deskew sensor, the deskew
roller rotates after a certain period. The leading edge of the paper is aligned by the deskew roller since
the forward roller sorts the paper with the stuck roller. During this process, the deskew motor and the
deskew clutch rotate the deskew roller.

182 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-172 Overview of deskew unit

Table 3-112 Overview of deskew unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

M503 ADF deskew motor NA Drives the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the
deskew roller

CL503 ADF deskew clutch NA Connects driving force from the deskew motor to the
deskew roller

R504 ADF deskew roller NA Aligns the leading edge straight and move the paper to
the scan area.

S509 ADF deskew sensor NA Checks the paper arrival at the deskew roller. And it sets
the time to start the deskew roller

Figure 3-173 Detail view of deskew unit

Deskew unit 183

 Table 3-113 Detail view of deskew unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

M503 ADF deskew motor NA Drives the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the
deskew roller

CL503 ADF deskew clutch NA Connects driving force from the deskew motor to the
deskew roller

R504 ADF deskew roller NA Aligns the leading edge straight and moves the paper to
the scan area.

S509 ADF deskew sensor NA Checks the paper arrival at the deskew roller. And it sets
the time to start the deskew roller

Scan and exit unit

Learn about the scan and exit unit.

The scan and exit unit receives a paper from the deskew roller, and then scans the image from the paper
and discharges it to the out-bin.

A paper passes through the scan roller rotated by the feed motor. The top of page sensor detects
whether the paper is correctly located and determines the starting point of the scanning. After the
scanning process, the paper is discharged by the exit roller which rotates by the exit motor.

Figure 3-174 Overview of scan and exit unit

Table 3-114 Overview of scan and exit unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

M504 ADF feed motor NA Drives the scan roller

R505 ADF scan roller NA Sends a paper from the deskew roller to the exit roller

S510 ADF top of page sensor NA Checks whether paper arrived at the sensor, and then
decides to start scanning

M505 ADF exit motor NA Drives the exit roller

184 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-114 Overview of scan and exit unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

R506 ADF exit motor NA Discharges the paper to the output bin

Figure 3-175 Detail view of scan and exit unit

Table 3-115 Detail view of scan and exit unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

M504 ADF feed motor NA Drives the scan roller

R505 ADF scan roller NA Sends paper from the deskew roller to the exit roller

S510 ADF top of page sensor NA Checks whether paper arrived at the sensor, and then
decides to start scanning

M505 ADF exit motor NA Drives the exit roller

R506 ADF exit motor NA Discharges paper to the output bin

Document feeder simplex operation

Learn about the document feeder simplex operation.

The following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder job.

1. The ADF cover sensor (callout S512) detects when the cover door is in the closed position.

Document feeder simplex operation 185

 Figure 3-176 Document feeder simplex operation, view 1

2. The ADF paper present sensor (callout 2) activates when paper is loaded onto the input tray. Then
the paper length sensors (callout 4) and the paper width guide (callout 3) identify the paper size.

Figure 3-177 Document feeder simplex operation, view 2

3. The ADF lift plate motor rotates to raise the lift plate and the pickup roller starts to pick up the
loaded paper.

Figure 3-178 Document feeder simplex operation, view 3

186 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

4. The ADF multi feed (ultrasonic) sensor is activated when the leading edge of the media is driven
past the sensor.

Figure 3-179 Document feeder simplex operation, view 4

5. The ADF deskew sensor activates when the leading edge of the paper passes it.

6. The leading edge of the paper drives into the nip point of the deskew drive roller and the deskew
pinch rollers. This creates a curl at the leading edge of the paper (callout 5).

Figure 3-180 Document feeder simplex operation, view 5

7. The deskew motor rotates the deskew roller to pull the paper into the scan roller.

8. The pickup clutch stops the turning and allows both the pickup and forward roller to turn freely while
the paper is pulled in by the deskew roller.

9. The feed motor drives the leading edge of the paper into the top of page sensor (callout 6). The
scanner begins the scanning and the data retrieval process (callout 7).

Figure 3-181 Document feeder simplex operation, view 6

Document feeder simplex operation 187

 10. The ADF multi feeding (ultrasonic) sensor is deactivated when the trailing edge of the paper passes
the sensor.

11. The exit motor rotates the exit roller. Paper is discharged to the output bin. The scanner ends the
scanning and data retrieval process.

12. If the copy job is completed, the ADF paper present sensor is deactivated. The ADF pickup up down
clutch raises the pick roller or if the copy job is not completed, the ADF paper present sensor still
operates. The printer firmware detects additional pages in the input tray and the process repeats.

Deskew operation
Learn about the deskew operation.

Sliding side guides on the input tray make sure that the paper stack is correctly aligned at the center of
the input tray when the paper is loaded in the tray. The correct position of the loaded paper is parallel
with the direction of travel into the document feeder paper path.

The document feeder further reduces paper skew due to an improper loading of the paper in the input
tray by buckling the paper to create a paper buffer.

The document feeder aligns with the leading edge of the paper, parallel with the deskew drive rollers
before it is driven further into the document feeder paper path.

Figure 3-182 Deskew operation

Document feeder hinges operation

Learn about the document feeder hinges operation.

NOTE: The left and the right document feeder hinges are different parts. During repairs, they must be
clearly identified and installed in the correct orientation. The parts are essential so they should not be
installed in the wrong position.

The document feeder hinges allow positioning the assembly vertically above the scanner glass to
accommodate the placement of books and other objects up to 25 mm (1.0 in) in height on the scanner
glass. The document feeder still closes (the bottom of the document feeder is kept parallel to the
scanner glass) and allows the printer to operate.

The document feeder hinges provide the height adjustment of 25 mm (1.0 in) when a maximum
downward force of 4.5 kg (10 lb) is applied at the front edge of the assembly, with the fulcrum (such
as the spine of a book) centered on the scanner glass and parallel to its long axis.

The document feeder will withstand a downward force of at least 4.5 kg (10 lb) applied at the front
edge center of the assembly—when the fulcrum (such as the spine of a book) is located anywhere on
the scanner glass and parallel to its long axis—without breaking, deforming, detaching or experiencing
performance degradation.

188 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 The document feeder hinges support the assembly in the open position and prevent the document
feeder from suddenly closing with a damaging or in a loud manner.

The hinges can hold the document feeder static in all positions higher than 100 mm (3.93 in); measured
at the front of the assembly. Less than 2.3 kg (5 lb) of force is required to open or close the document
feeder.

The hinges allow the document feeder to open to a maximum angle of 65° from the horizontal position
(this angle will not allow the printer to tip over).

Figure 3-183 Document feeder open (book mode)

Figure 3-184 Document feeder open (maximum 65°)

ADF image scanner cleaning

Learn about cleaning the ADF image scanner.

Wipe the image scanner area with a soft cloth or microfiber. To maintain optimal document scanning
performance without scanning image quality problems, the image scanner area should be cleaned
periodically.

ADF image scanner cleaning 189

 Figure 3-185 ADF image scanner cleaning

ADF PCA
Learn about the ADF PCA.

● 300sh Flow ADF part number: Z9Y05-60004 (P501)

Figure 3-186 ADF PCA connections

Table 3-116 ADF PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

ADFv-J1 Power inlet 4pin Z9Y05-50003

ADFv-J2 Connecting with the platen FFC 30pin Z9Y05-50002

ADFv-J3 ADF top of page sensor FFC 4pin Z9Y05-50016

ADFv-J4 ADF pickup sensor FFC 10pin Z9Y05-50013

ADF deskew sensor

ADFv-J5 ADF pick clutch 4pin Z9Y05-50022

ADF deskew clutch

190 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-116 ADF PCA connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

ADFv-J6 ADF feed motor 18pin Z9Y05-50019

ADF deskew motor

ADF exit motor

ADFv-J7 ADF lift motor 6pin Z9Y05-50009

ADFv-J8 ADF retard motor 6pin Z9Y05-50021

ADFv-J9 ADF paper long length sensor 6pin Z9Y05-50010

ADF paper short length sensor

ADFv-J10 ADF fan 3pin –

ADFv-J11 ADF pick lift sensor 5pin Z9Y05-50023

ADFv-J12 ADF USM transmitter 2pin

ADFv-J13 ADF USM receiver 10pin Z9Y05-50004

ADF lift sensor

ADFv-J14 ADF cover sensor 6pin Z9Y05-50011

Automatic document feeder system: 200sh Flow ADF, 200sh ADF

You will learn more about Automatic document feeder system: 200sh Flow ADF, 200sh ADF.

NOTE: The 200sh Flow ADF is only for the E7xxxx series printers. The E826/E877 series printers do not
support the 200sh Flow ADF.

The E826/E877 series printers use the 300sh Flow ADF to support flow features.

ADF cover
Learn about the ADF cover.

Figure 3-187 ADF cover

Automatic document feeder system: 200sh Flow ADF, 200sh ADF 191
 Table 3-117 ADF cover

Callout Part name Part number

C601 ADF front cover NA

C602 ADF rear cover NA

C603 ADF top cover NA

C604 ADF input tray NA

C605 ADF CMF panel 5QJ90-40056

ADF unit
Learn about the ADF unit.

Figure 3-188 ADF unit, view 1

Table 3-118 ADF unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number

U602 200-sheet ADF2 5QJ90-67011

Figure 3-189 ADF unit, view 2

192 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-119 ADF unit, view 2

Callout Part name Part number

K602 ADF hinge kit 5QJ90-67004

1 ADF hinge damper module 5QJ90-67006

K603 ADF white backing kit 5QJ90-67005

NOTE: The 200- sheet Flow ADF1 and 200-sheet ADF2 are all the same except for the ADF multi-
feeding sensor installation.
1200-sheet flow ADF: ADF multi-feeding sensor is installed

2200-sheet ADF: ADF multi-feeding sensor is not installed

ADF system overview

You will learn more about ADF system overview.

200-sheet ADF workflow

Learn about the ADF workflow.

Figure 3-190 ADF workflow

Table 3-120 ADF workflow

Callout Unit name Description

1 Lift plate Moves an original document upward so that it is on the pickup

paper path

2 Pickup Picks up an original document to the deskew unit inside the ADF

3 Deskew Adjusts the skew of the original document

4 Scan Scan an original document

5 Exit Discard scanned documents to the ADF out-bin

ADF sensors
Learn about the ADF sensors.

ADF system overview 193

 Figure 3-191 ADF sensors

Table 3-121 ADF sensors

Callout Part name Part number Description

S601 ADF paper long size NA Checks the size of a paper in length
sensor

S602 ADF paper short size NA Checks the size of a paper in length
sensor

S603 ADF paper width sensor NA Checks the size of a paper in width

S604 ADF lift sensor NA Checks the pickup ready position of a paper

S605 ADF paper present sensor NA Checks whether there is paper on lift plate

S606 ADF multi feed sensor NA Checks the multi feeding of paper

S607 ADF deskew sensor NA Checks the paper arrival at the deskew roller and sets
the time to start the deskew roller

S608 ADF top of page sensor NA Checks whether the paper arrived at the sensor. Then
determines the starting point of the document scanning

S609 ADF image scanner NA Scans the back side of the paper

S610 ADF cover sensor NA Checks whether the ADF cover is open or closed

ADF system motor / solenoid / roller

Learn about the ADF system motor / solenoid / roller.

194 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-192 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 1

Table 3-122 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

M601 ADF lift plate motor NA Moves the lift plate up and down

M602 ADF feed motor NA Drives the pickup roller, the forward roller, the separation
roller, the scan roller, and the exit roller

M606 NA

Figure 3-193 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 2

Table 3-123 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

K601 ADF roller kit 5851-7202 Pickup, forward, and separation roller

ADF system motor / solenoid / roller 195

 Table 3-123 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 2 (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

R601 ADF pickup roller NA Pick up a paper

R602 ADF forward roller NA Move a paper out of the pickup roller to the inside of the
ADF

R603 ADF separation roller NA Prevent multiple papers from feeding in contact with the
forward roller

R604 ADF deskew roller NA Align the leading edge straight, move the paper to the
scan area

R605 ADF scan roller NA Send the paper out of the deskew roller to the exit roller

R606 ADF exit roller NA Discharge the paper

Lift plate unit

Learn about the lift plate unit.

The lift plate unit is the place to store the original documents and lifts a paper up to touch the pickup
roller.

When original documents are stacked on the tray, at first the paper present sensor checks whether
there is no paper. Then the paper short size sensor, the paper long size sensor and the paper width
sensor detects what size of paper is loaded on the tray. As scanning continues, the feed motor moves
the lift plate up to ensure that the paper is picked up stably. When all of the paper runs out, the tray
returns to the initial position.

Figure 3-194 Detail view of lift plate unit

Table 3-124 Detail view of lift plate unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

S601 ADF paper long size NA Checks the size of paper in length
sensor

S602 ADF paper short size NA Checks the size of paper in length
sensor

S603 ADF paper width sensor NA Checks the size of paper in width

S605 ADF paper present sensor NA Checks whether there is paper on the lift plate

196 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-124 Detail view of lift plate unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M501 ADF feed motor NA Moves the lift plate up and down

S610 ADF cover sensor NA Checks whether the ADF cover is open or closed

Pickup unit
Learn about the pickup unit.

The pickup unit takes a paper out of the lift plate and moves it to the deskew roller.

The pick-up down clutch moves the pickup roller downward. The paper rises by the movement of the
lift plate, and for a certain period, the pickup roller moves upward so as not to touch the paper. The lift
sensor detects where the pickup roller is located, then the lift plate stops. The pickup roller, the forward
roller,and the separation roller are rotated by the feed motor and make the paper to move forward. At
this moment, the forward roller and the separation roller rotate in the opposite directions of each other
to prevent from multi-feeding.

The paper moves through the multi feed sensor to the deskew roller. During this process, the multi feed
sensor detects whether a multiple page of paper come from the pickup unit. If a multi-feeding error
comes up, it returns to the lift plate to be picked up again.

Figure 3-195 Detail view of pickup unit, view 1

Table 3-125 Detail view of pickup unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

K601 ADF roller kit 5851-7202 Includes the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the
separation roller

R601 ADF pickup roller NA Picks up paper

R602 ADF forward roller NA Moves paper from the pickup roller to the ADF inside

R603 ADF NA Prevents multiple pages from feeding in contact with the
forward roller

M602 ADF feed motor NA Drives the separation roller

S606 ADF multi feed sensor NA Checks the multi-feeding of paper

(only for 200sh flow ADF)

Pickup unit 197

 Figure 3-196 Detail view of pickup unit, view 2

Table 3-126 Detail view of pickup unit, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

M602 ADF feed motor NA Drives the separation roller

Figure 3-197 Detail view of pickup unit, view 3

Table 3-127 Detail view of pickup unit, view 3

Callout Part name Part number Description

CL501 ADF pickup up, down clutch NA Makes the pickup roller go down to contact with paper

CL502 ADF pickup clutch NA Connects the driving force from the feed motor to the
pickup roller and the forward roller

Deskew unit
Learn about the deskew unit.

The deskew unit receives a page that has passed through the multi-feeding sensor, aligns the page in
the width direction and sends it to the scan roller. When paper enters the deskew sensor, the deskew
roller rotates after a certain period. The leading edge of the paper is aligned by the deskew roller since

198 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

the forward roller sorts the paper with the stuck roller. During this process, the deskew motor and the
deskew clutch rotate the deskew roller.

Figure 3-198 Detail view of deskew unit, view 1

Table 3-128 Detail view of deskew unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

M603 ADF deskew motor NA Drives the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the
deskew roller

Figure 3-199 Detail view of deskew unit, view 2

Table 3-129 Detail view of deskew unit, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

CL603 ADF deskew clutch NA Connects driving force from the deskew motor to the
deskew roller

R604 ADF deskew roller NA Aligns the leading edge straight and move the paper to
the scan area.

S607 ADF deskew sensor NA Checks the paper arrival at the deskew roller. And it sets
the time to start the deskew roller.

Deskew unit 199

 Scan and exit unit
Learn about the scan and exit unit.

The scan and exit unit receives a page from the deskew roller, and then scans the image from the paper
and discharges it to the out-bin.

Paper passes through the scan roller rotated by the feed motor. The top of page sensor detects whether
the paper is correctly located and determines the starting point of the scanning. After the scanning
process, the paper is discharged by the exit roller which is rotated by the exit motor.

Figure 3-200 Detail view of scan and exit unit

Table 3-130 Detail view of scan and exit unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

M602 ADF feed motor NA Drives the scan roller and the exit roller

R605 ADF scan motor NA Sends paper from the deskew roller to the exit roller

S608 ADP top of page sensor NA Checks whether the paper arrived at the sensor, and
then decides to start scanning

S609 ADF image scanner NA Scans the back side of the paper

R606 ADF exit roller NA Discharges the paper to the output bin

Document feeder simplex operation

Learn about the document feeder simplex operation.

The following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder job.

1. The ADF cover sensor (callout 1) detects when the cover door is in the closed position.

200 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-201 Document feeder simplex operation, view 1

2. The ADF paper present sensor (callout 2) activates when paper is loaded onto the input tray. Then
the paper length sensors (callout 4) and the paper width guide (callout 3) identify the paper size.

Figure 3-202 Document feeder simplex operation, view 2

3. The ADF lift plate motor rotates to raise the lift plate, and the pickup roller starts to pick up the
loaded paper.

Figure 3-203 Document feeder simplex operation, view 3

4. The ADF multi feed (ultrasonic) sensor is activated when the leading edge of the media is driven
past the sensor.

Document feeder simplex operation 201

 Figure 3-204 Document feeder simplex operation, view 4

5. The ADF deskew sensor activates when the leading edge of the paper passes it.

6. The leading edge of the paper drives into the nip point of the deskew drive roller and the deskew
pinch rollers. This creates a curl at the leading edge of the paper (callout 5).

Figure 3-205 Document feeder simplex operation, view 5

7. The deskew motor rotates the deskew roller to pull the paper into the scan roller.

8. The pickup clutch stops the turning and allows both the pickup and forward roller to turn freely while
the paper is pulled in by the deskew roller.

9. The feed motor drives the leading edge of the paper into the top of page sensor (callout 6). The
scanner begins the scanning and the data retrieval process (callout 7).

10. The ADF multi feeding (ultrasonic) sensor is deactivated when the trailing edge of the paper passes
the sensor.

11. Paper is discharged to the output bin. The scanner ends the scanning and the data retrieval
process.

12. If the copy job is completed, the ADF paper present sensor is deactivated. The ADF pickup clutch
raises the pick roller or if the copy job is not completed, the ADF paper present sensor still operates.
The printer firmware detects additional pages in the input tray and the process repeats.

202 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Deskew operation
Learn about the deskew operation.

Sliding side guides on the input tray make sure that the paper stack is correctly aligned at the center of
the input tray when the paper is loaded in the tray. The correct position of the loaded paper is parallel
with the direction of travel into the document feeder paper path.

The document feeder further reduces paper skew due to an improper loading of the paper in the input
tray by buckling the paper to create a paper buffer.

The document feeder aligns with the leading edge of the paper, parallel with the deskew drive rollers
before it is driven further into the document feeder paper path.

Figure 3-206 Deskew operation

Document feeder hinges operation

Learn about the document feeder hinges operation.

NOTE: The left and the right document feeder hinges are different parts. During repairs, they must be
clearly identified and installed in the correct orientation. The parts are essential so they should not be
installed in the wrong position.

The document feeder hinges allow positioning the assembly vertically above the scanner glass to
accommodate the placement of books and other objects up to 25 mm (1.0 in) in height on the scanner
glass. The document feeder still closes (the bottom of the document feeder is kept parallel to the
scanner glass) and allows the printer to operate.

The document feeder hinges provide the height adjustment of 25 mm (1.0 in) when a maximum
downward force of 4.5 kg (10 lb) is applied at the front edge of the assembly, with the fulcrum (such
as the spine of a book) centered on the scanner glass and parallel to its long axis.

The document feeder will withstand a downward force of at least 4.5 kg (10 lb) applied at the front
edge center of the assembly—when the fulcrum (such as the spine of a book) is located anywhere on
the scanner glass and parallel to its long axis—without breaking, deforming, detaching or experiencing
performance degradation.

The document feeder hinges support the assembly in the open position and prevent the document
feeder from suddenly closing with a damaging or in a loud manner.

The hinges can hold the document feeder static in all positions higher than 100 mm (3.93 in); measured
at the front of the assembly. Less than 2.3 kg (5 lb) of force is required to open or close the document
feeder.

The hinges allow the document feeder to open to an angle of between 60° and 80° from the horizontal
position (this angle will not allow the printer to tip over).

Deskew operation 203

 Figure 3-207 Document feeder open (book mode)

Figure 3-208 Document feeder open (60° to 80°)

ADF image scanner cleaning

Learn about cleaning the ADF image scanner.

Wipe the image scanner area with a soft cloth or microfiber. To maintain optimal document scanning
performance without scanning image quality problems, the image scanner area should be cleaned
periodically.

Figure 3-209 ADF image scanner cleaning

ADF PCA
Learn about the ADF PCA.

204 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 ● 200sh Flow ADF PCA part number: 5QJ90-67008

● 200sh ADF PCA part number: 5QJ90-67013

Figure 3-210 ADF PCA connections

Table 3-131 ADF PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

ADFg-J1 ADF lift plate motor FFC 6pin NA

ADFg-J2 ADF top of page sensor FFC 4pin NA

ADFg-J3 ADF deskew sensor FFC 4pin NA

ADFg-J4 ADF paper width sensor 3pin NA

ADFg-J5 ADF cover open sensor 9pin NA

ADF multi feed sensor – receiver

ADF lift sensor

ADFg-J6 ADF paper long size sensor 6pin NA

ADF paper short size sensor

ADFg-J7 ADF multi feed sensor - transmitter 5pin NA

ADF paper present sensor

ADFg-J8 ADF feed motor 6pin NA

ADFg-J9 ADF deskew motor 6pin NA

ADFg-J10 ADF power inlet 4pin NA

ADFg-J11 Connecting with the platen FFC 30pin NA

Scanner system: Tarot high speed (HS) platen

You will learn more about the Tarot high speed (HS) platen.

Tarot high speed platen workflow

Learn about the Tarot high speed platen workflow.

Scanner system: Tarot high speed (HS) platen 205

 The scanner converts an original document image into data. To scan an original document, the scanner
uses a CIS image sensor which stores and transfers the converted image data to the storage space or
transfers it to the printer engine for copy.

Figure 3-211 Tarot high speed (HS) platen workflow

Table 3-132 Tarot high speed (HS) platen workflow

Callout Unit name Part number Description

U801 Tarot HS platen 3SJ32-60103 Converts an original document image into data

1 Flat-bed glass NA The glass on which the original document is placed when
performing single-sided scanning

2 Size sensing NA Detects the original document size

3 Driving NA Moves the image scanner to scan the original document

4 Image scanner NA Scans the original image and converts it to data

5 PCA 3SJ32-60104 Interfaces with the formatter and the ADF

Tarot high speed platen covers

Learn about the Tarot high speed platen covers.

Figure 3-212 Tarot high speed (HS) platen covers

206 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-133 Tarot high speed (HS) platen covers

Callout Unit name Part number

C801 Tarot HS platen front cover NA

C802 Tarot HS platen rear cover 3SJ11-40008

C803 Tarot HS platen left cover NA

C804 Tarot HS platen right cover NA

C805 Tarot HS platen upper cover NA

Tarot high speed platen sensors, motor

Learn about the Tarot high speed platen sensors and motor.

Figure 3-213 Tarot high speed (HS) platen sensors, motor

Table 3-134 Tarot high speed (HS) platen sensors, motor

Callout Unit name Part number Description

M801 Tarot HS motor NA Moves the image scanner to scan the original document

S801 Paper size detection NA Detects the original document size

sensor

S802 Image scanner NA Scans the original image and converts it to data

S803 ADF open sensor NA Detects whether the ADF is open

Image scanner and flat-bed glass cleaning

Learn about cleaning the Tarot high speed (HS) platen image scanner and flat-bed glass.

Wipe the image scanner area with a soft cloth or microfiber. To maintain optimal document scanning
performance without scanning image quality problems, the image scanner area should be cleaned
periodically.

Tarot high speed platen sensors, motor 207

 Figure 3-214 Image scanner and flat-bed glass cleaning

Tarot high speed (HS) platen PCA

Learn about the Tarot high speed (HS) platen PCA.

● Tarot HS platen PCA part number: 3SJ32-60104 (P801)

Figure 3-215 Tarot HS platen PCA connections

Table 3-135 Tarot HS platen PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

SSAh-J1 Tarot HS motor, paper size detection – 3SJ11-50023

sensor 1, 2, ADF open sensor

SSAh-J3 Power inlet 4pin 3SJ11-50006

SSAh-J4 Formatter interface 1 68pin FFC 3SJ11-50022

SSAh-J5 Image scanner 68pin FFC 3SJ32-50002

SSAh-J6 Power outlet to ADF – NA

SSAh-J7 ADF interface – NA

SSAh-J8 ADF scanner – NA

SSAh-J9 Formatter interface 2 50pin FFC 3SJ11-50021

Input devices
Learn about the input devices that are available for these printers.

208 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Department stand
Learn about the department stand.

Figure 3-216 Department stand, view 1

Table 3-136 Department stand, view 1

Callout Part name Part number

1 Stand 6GW53A

C100 Stand CMF panel NA

2 Caster wheel 6109-001138

K101 Holder wheel kit 6GW46-40011

NOTE: When installing a stand, there is an empty space between the base printer and the stand.
Additional spare part is in operation to prevent rodents from entering inside the product.

● Cover side lower blocker Part number: X3A76-40003

Empty space between the base printer and the stand and cover side lower blocker (callout 3).

Figure 3-217 Department stand, view 2

Department stand 209

 Table 3-137 Department stand, view 2

Callout Part name Part number

3 Cover side lower blocker X3A76-40003

Department Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5)

The Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF) is optional, and provides additional paper capacity for the printer.

DCF (Tray 4, 5) covers

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) covers.

Figure 3-218 DCF (Tray 4, 5) covers

Table 3-138 DCF (Tray 4, 5) covers

Callout Part name Part number

C101 DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover 5QK08-40006

C102 DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover 5QK08-40007

C103 DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover 5QK08-40008

C104 DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door 5QK08-61004

C105 Tray 4 CMF panel 5QK08-40011

C106 Tray 5 CMF panel 5QK08-40012

1 Caster wheel 6109-001138

K101 Holder wheel kit 6GW46-40011

210 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow
Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow.

Figure 3-219 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow

Figure 3-220 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow

Table 3-139 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow

Callout Part name Description

1 Tray 4 Stores paper

2 Tray 4 pickup unit Picks up paper to the DCF feed roller

3 Tray 5 Stores paper

4 Tray 5 pickup unit Picks up paper to the DCF feed roller

5 Tray 4, 5 feed unit Moves paper to the base printer

DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow 211

 DCF (Tray 4, 5) unit
Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) unit.

Figure 3-221 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) unit

Table 3-140 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U101 DCF (Tray4, 5) unit 6GW47-67001 –

U102 Tray 4 cassette 5QK08-61007 Stores paper

U103 Tray 5 cassette 5QK08-61005 Stores paper

U104 Tray 4 pickup assembly 5QK08-61009 –

U105 Tray 5 pickup assembly 5QK08-61010 –

DCF (Tray 4, 5) rollers

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rollers.

212 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-222 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) rollers

Table 3-141 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) rollers

Callout Part name Part number Description

K101 DCF roller kit 5PN66-67001 –

R101 Tray 4 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper from Tray 4

R102 Tray 4 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the Tray 4 feed roller

R103 Tray 4 reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevents multi paper feeding

K101 DCF roller kit 5PN66-67001 –

R104 Tray 5 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper from Tray 5

R105 Tray 5 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the Tray 5 feed roller

R106 Tray 5 reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevents multi paper feeding

R107 Tray 4 feed roller NA Moves paper to the Tray 4 trans roller

R108 Tray 5 feed roller NA Moves paper to the Tray 5 trans roller

R109 Tray 4 trans roller NA Moves paper to the base printer feeding system

DCF (Tray 4, 5) rollers 213

 Figure 3-223 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) rollers, view 1

Table 3-142 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) rollers, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

R101 Tray 4 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper from Tray 4

R104 Tray 5 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper from Tray 5

Figure 3-224 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) rollers, view 2

Table 3-143 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) rollers, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

R102 Tray 4 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the Tray 4 feed roller

R105 Tray 5 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the Tray 5 feed roller

R107 Tray 4 feed roller NA Moves paper to the Tray 4 trans roller

R108 Tray 5 feed roller NA Moves paper to the Tray 5 trans roller

R109 Tray 4 trans roller NA Moves paper to the base printer feeding system

214 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors
Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors.

Figure 3-225 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors

Table 3-144 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors

Callout Part name Part number Description

S101 Prefeed 4 sensor 0604-001381 Keeps the proper distance between papers on the paper
path

S102 Tray 4 paper empty sensor 0604-001393 Checks whether the tray has paper

S103 Tray 4 stack height sensor 0604-001393 Sets the proper height of paper to make contact with the
pickup roller

S104 Pre feed 5 sensor 0604-001381 Keeps the proper distance between papers on the paper
path

S105 Tray 5 paper empty sensor 0604-001393 Checks whether the tray has paper

S106 Tray 5 stack height sensor 0604-001393 Sets the proper height of paper to make contact with the
pickup roller

S107 Tray 4 feed sensor 0604-001490 Checks the paper path out of Tray4, 5

S108 Tray 4 paper size sensor JC93-01408A Checks the opening and closing of the tray and then
sends signals to identify the paper size

S109 Tray 5 paper size sensor JC93-01408A Checks the opening and closing of the tray and then
sends signals to identify the paper size

S110 DCF (Tray4, 5) right door JC90-01385A Checks whether the tray 4, 5 right door is open
open switch

U7 Tray heater 110V Y1G22-67901 Dries damp paper with heating pipe

U8 Tray heater 220V Y1G22-67902 Dries damp paper with heating pipe

DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors 215

 Figure 3-226 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors, view 1

Table 3-145 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

S101 Prefeed 4 sensor 0604-001381 Keeps the proper distance between papers on the paper
path

S104 Prefeed 5 sensor 0604-001381 Keeps the proper distance between papers on the paper
path

S107 Tray 4 feed sensor 0604-001490 Checks the paper path out of Tray4, 5

Figure 3-227 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors, view 2

Table 3-146 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

S102 Tray 4 paper empty sensor 0604-001393 Checks whether the tray has paper

S103 Tray 4 stack height sensor 0604-001393 Sets the proper height of paper to make contact with the
pickup roller

S105 Tray 5 paper empty sensor 0604-001393 Checks whether the tray has paper

S106 Tray 5 stack height sensor 0604-001393 Sets the proper height of paper to make contact with the
pickup roller

216 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-146 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors, view 2 (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S108 Tray 4 paper size sensor JC93-01408A Checks the opening and closing of the tray and then
sends signals to identify the paper size

S109 Tray 5 paper size sensor JC93-01408A Checks the opening and closing of the tray and then
sends signals to identify the paper size

1 Tray heater connector NA Connects to the tray heater

DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors.

Figure 3-228 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors

Table 3-147 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors

Callout Part name Part number Description

M101 DCF (Tray 4) pickup motor JC93-01083A Drives the Tray 4 pickup, forward, and reverse rollers or
knock-up plate

M102 DCF (Tray 5) pickup motor JC93-01083A Drives the Tray 5 pickup, forward, and reverse rollers or
knock-up plate

M103 DCF (Tray 4, 5) feed motor JC31-00177A Drives the Tray 4, 5 feed roller and Tray 4 trans roller

DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors 217

 Figure 3-229 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors

Table 3-148 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors

Callout Part name Part number Description

U106 DCF pickup drive assembly JC93-01663A –

M101 DCF (Tray 4) pickup motor JC93-01083A Drives the Tray 4 pickup, forward, and reverse rollers or
knock-up plate

M102 DCF (Tray 5) pickup motor JC93-01083A Drives the Tray 5 pickup, forward, and reverse rollers or
knock-up plate

U107 DCF (Tray 4, 5) feed drive JC93-01135A –

assembly

M103 DCF (Tray 4, 5) feed motor JC31-00177A Drives the Tray 4, 5 feed roller and Tray 4 trans roller

DCF (Tray 4, 5) operation

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) operation.

1. When the tray is closed, tray input lever is pushed.

2. The pickup roller moves down to contact with the surface of the paper, and the reverse roller moves
upward to make a contact with the forward roller.

Figure 3-230 DCF (Tray 4, 5) operation, view 1

218 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 3. Tray motor drives the knock-up plate to move paper upward to the pickup roller.

Figure 3-231 DCF (Tray 4, 5) operation, view 2

4. The pickup roller moves the paper forward. The forward roller makes paper move into the feed roller.
The reverse roller prevents the printer from multi-feeding.

Figure 3-232 DCF (Tray 4, 5) operation, view 3

5. The feed roller sends the paper to the trans roller.

DCF (Tray 4, 5) motor operation

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) motor operation.

DCF (Tray 4, 5) motor operation 219

 Figure 3-233 DCF (Tray 4, 5) motor operation, view 1

● Pickup: Tray 4, 5 pickup motor > clockwise rotation > 1 gear > 2 gear (pickup roller, forward roller)

● Tray lift: Tray 4, 5 pickup motor > counterclockwise rotation > 1 gear > 3 gear > 4 gear > 5 gear > 6
gear & coupler (knock-up plate)

Figure 3-234 DCF (Tray 4, 5) motor operation, view 2

● DCF feed driving: 1 DCF feed motor > 2 pulley and gear > 3 gear & coupler (feed roller, trans roller)

DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA.

DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA connects to the formatter to control the DCF operation.

● DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA part number: 6GW47-60001 (P101)

220 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-235 DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA

Table 3-149 DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number CN Number

Error Code
when
disconnected

DCF-CN301 Main-J56 18pin JC39-02606A DCF not

recognized

DCF-CN302 sHCI-CN301 18pin JC39-02603A -

DCF-CN501 Tray 5 paper empty sensor 9pin JC39-02269A, Load tray 5

JC39-02270A
Tray 5 stack height sensor

Tray 5 stack feed sensor

DCF-CN502 Tray 4 paper empty sensor 14pin JC39-02271A, Load tray 4

JC39-02272A
Tray 4 stack height sensor

Tray 4 feed sensor

Prefeed 4 sensor

DCF-CN601 Tray 4 pickup motor 10pin JC39-02268A Close the tray

4 right door
Tray 4, 5 feed motor

Tray 4, 5 right door open switch

DCF-CN801 Tray 5 pickup motor 4pin JC39-02274A 13.A7.D5

DCF-CN802 Tray 4 paper size sensor 8pin JC39-02275A Tray 4 open,

Tray 5 open
Tray 5 paper size sensor

DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA 221

 Department High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4)
Learn more about Department High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4).

The High Capacity Input (HCI) device is optional. It provides additional paper capacity for the printer. The
HCI consists of the shift tray that stores excess paper, the lift tray that supplies paper to the pickup, and
the feeding system that supplies paper to the base printer.

HCI (Tray 4) covers

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) covers.

Figure 3-236 HCI (Tray 4) covers

Table 3-150 HCI (Tray 4) covers

Callout Part name Part number

C201 HCI (Tray 4) right cover 5QK08-40006

C202 HCI (Tray 4) rear cover 5QK08-40007

C203 HCI (Tray 4) left cover 5QK08-40008

C204 HCI (Tray 4) right door 5QK08-61023

C205 HCI (Tray 4) front CMF panel 5QK08-40016

1 Caster wheel 6109-001138

K201 Holder wheel kit 6GW46-40011

HCI (Tray 4) workflow

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) workflow.

222 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-237 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) workflow

Figure 3-238 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) workflow

Table 3-151 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) workflow

Callout Part name Description

1 Shift tray Loads an excess number of papers for printing, and

when the lift tray runs out of paper, it moves the paper to
the lift tray

1-1 Shift gate Arranges the paper and opens the gate to move the
paper to the lift tray during the shifting process

2 Lift tray Stores paper for printing

HCI (Tray 4) unit

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) unit.

HCI (Tray 4) unit 223

 Figure 3-239 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) unit

Table 3-152 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U201 HCI (Tray 4) unit 6GW57-67001 –

U202 HCI (Tray 4) cassette 5QK08-61014 Stores paper

U203 HCI (Tray 4) pickup 5QK08-61013 –

assembly

HCI (Tray 4) rollers

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) rollers.

Figure 3-240 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) rollers

Table 3-153 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) rollers

Callout Part name Part number Description

K201 HCI (Tray 4) roller kit 5PN66-67001 –

R201 HCI (Tray 4) pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper from the lift tray

224 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-153 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) rollers (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

R202 HCI (Tray 4) forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the Tray 4 feed roller

R203 HCI (Tray 4) reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevents multi paper feeding

R204 HCI (Tray 4) feed roller NA Moves paper to the Tray 4 trans roller

R205 HCI (Tray 4) trans roller NA Moves paper to the base printer feeding system

Figure 3-241 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) rollers

Table 3-154 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) rollers

Callout Part name Part number Description

R201 HCI (Tray 4) pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper from the lift tray

R202 HCI (Tray 4) forward roller JC93-01726A Moves paper to the Tray 4 feed roller

R203 HCI (Tray 4) reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevents multi paper feeding

R204 HCI (Tray 4) feed roller NA Moves paper to the Tray 4 trans roller

R205 HCI (Tray 4) trans roller NA Moves paper to the base printer feeding system

HCI (Tray 4) sensors

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) sensors.

Figure 3-242 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) sensors (1 of 2)

HCI (Tray 4) sensors 225

 Figure 3-243 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) sensors (2 of 2)

Table 3-155 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) sensors

Callout Part name Part number Description

S201 HCI(Tray 4) feed sensor 0604-001490 Checks whether paper is ready to move to the base
printer

S202 HCI(Tray 4) paper empty 0604-001393 Checks whether the tray has paper
sensor

S203 HCI (Tray 4) stack height 0604-001393 Sets the proper height of the paper to make contact with
sensor the pickup roller

S204 HCI(Tray 4) knock-up home 0604-001393 Detects the home location of the knock-up plate
sensor

S205 HCI(Tray 4) shift tray home 0604-001393 Detects the home location of the shift tray
sensor

S206 HCI(Tray 4) shift tray end 0604-001393 Detects the end location of the shift tray
sensor

S207 HCI(Tray 4) shift tray level 0604-001393 Detects the amount of paper on the shift tray
sensor 1

S208 HCI(Tray 4) shift tray level 0604-001393 Detects the amount of paper on the shift tray
sensor 2

S209 HCI(Tray 4) shift tray empty 0604-001393 Checks whether paper is loaded on the shift tray
sensor

S210 HCI(Tray 4) tray open 0604-001393 Checks whether the tray is open
sensor

S211 HCI(Tray 4) shift gate 0604-001393 Detects whether the shift gate is closed
solenoid home sensor

S212 HCI(Tray 4) right door open JC90-01385A Checks whether the right door is open
sensor

HCI (Tray 4) motors

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) motors.

226 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-244 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) motors

Table 3-156 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) motors

Callout Part name Part number Description

M201 HCI (Tray 4) paper shift JC31-00125A Moves the shift tray to the lift tray
motor

M202 HCI (Tray 4) tray lift motor JC31-00109A Moves the lift tray upward so that paper is picked up

M203 HCI (Tray 4) feed motor JC93-01114A Drives the HCI (Tray 4) feed and trans roller

M204 HCI (Tray 4) pickup motor JC93-01115A Picks up paper

SL201 HCI (Tray 4) shift gate JC33-00031B Drives the shift gate
solenoid

Figure 3-245 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) motors, view 1

Table 3-157 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) motors, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

M201 HCI (Tray 4) paper shift JC31-00125A Moves the shift tray to the lift tray
motor

HCI (Tray 4) motors 227

 Table 3-157 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) motors, view 1 (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M202 HCI (Tray 4) tray lift motor JC31-00109A Moves the lift tray upward so that paper is picked up

M203 HCI (Tray 4) feed motor JC93-01114A Drives the HCI (Tray 4) feed and trans roller

M204 HCI (Tray 4) pickup motor JC93-01115A Picks up paper

Figure 3-246 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) motors, view 2

Table 3-158 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) motors, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

SL201 HCI (Tray 4) shift gate JC33-00031B Drives the shift gate
solenoid

Figure 3-247 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) motors, view 3

Table 3-159 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) motors, view 3

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Shift plate JC81-07481B –

2 Paper gate JC81-07478B –

228 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-159 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) motors, view 3 (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

U204 Knock-up plate assembly 6GW48-60003 –

HCI (Tray 4) operation

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) operation.

1. When a paper on the lift tray runs out, the paper on the shift unit moves to the lift tray. The HCI (Tray
4) shift gate solenoid moves so that the shift gate opens to make paper move to the lift tray.

Figure 3-248 HCI (Tray 4) operation, view 1

2. The HCI (Tray 4) shift motor operates, moving the shift tray to the lift tray side. The HCI (Tray 4) shift
tray home and end sensor control how much the shift motor is operating. After the tray shifting
process, the shift tray moves back to the original position and the shift gate solenoid turns back to
the initial location.

3. If the HCI (Tray 4) tray is closed by the HCI (Tray 4) tray open sensor, knock-up plate moves upward
until paper reaches the HCI (Tray 4) stack height sensor.

Figure 3-249 HCI (Tray 4) operation, view 2

HCI (Tray 4) motor operation

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) motor operation.

HCI (Tray 4) operation 229

 Figure 3-250 HCI (Tray 4) motor operation, view 1

● HCI (Tray 4) pickup driving: 1 HCI (Tray 4) pickup motor > 2 gear (pickup roller, reverse roller)

Figure 3-251 HCI (Tray 4) motor operation, view 2

● HCI (Tray 4) feed driving: 1 HCI (Tray 4) feed motor > 2 pulley & gear (feed roller) > 3 gear & coupler
(trans roller)

230 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-252 HCI (Tray 4) motor operation, view 3

● HCI (Tray 4) paper shift driving: 1 HCI (Tray 4) paper shift motor > 2 coupler (shift plate)

● HCI (Tray 4) tray lift motor: 1 HCI (Tray 4) tray lift motor > 2 coupler (knock-up plate)

HCI (Tray 4) PCA

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) PCA.

HCI (Tray 4) PCA connects to the formatter to control the HCI operation.

● HCI (Tray 4) PCA part number: 6GW57-60001 (P201)

Figure 3-253 HCI (Tray 4) PCA

HCI (Tray 4) PCA 231

 Table 3-160 HCI (Tray 4) PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number Cn Number

Error code
when
disconnected

HCI-CN301 Main-J56 18pin JC39-02605A Tray 4 not

recognized

HCI-CN302 sHCI-CN301 18pin JC39-02604A -

HCI-CN502 Tray 4 paper empty sensor – JC39-02280A, Tray 4 empty

JC39-02281A
Tray 4 stack height sensor

Prefeed 4 sensor

Tray 4 feed sensor

HCI-CN601 Tray 4 pickup motor 10pin JC39-02279A Close the tray

4 right door
Tray 4 feed motor

Tray 4 right door open sensor

HCI-CN901 HCIsub-CN5 17pin JC39-02286A -

HCI tray open sensor

HCI-CN902 Tray 4 lift motor 6pin JC39-02282A -

Tray 4 shift motor

HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA.

The HCI sub PCA is a joint board to communicate with the sensors inside the shift tray and the HCI PCA.

● HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA part number: JC92-02792A (P202)

Figure 3-254 HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA

232 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-161 HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

HCIsub-CN1 Tray 4 shift tray level sensor 1 6pin JC39-02351A

Tray 4 shift tray level sensor 2

HCIsub-CN2 Tray 4 shift tray home sensor 6pin 5QK03-50013

Tray 4 shift tray end sensor

HCIsub-CN3 Tray 4 shift tray empty sensor 7pin 5QK03-50013

Tray 4 knock-up home sensor

HCIsub-CN4 Tray 4 shift tray solenoid home sensor 9pin JC39-02355A

HCIsub-CN5 HCI-CN302 14pin JC39-02356A

HCIsub-CN6 Tray 4 shift gate solenoid 3pin –

Department Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI, Tray 5 or 6)

Learn more about Department Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI, Tray 5 or 6).

The Side High Capacity Input (sHCI) device is an optional input tray which can be installed on the right
side of the DCF or HCI to provide additional paper capacity for in the printer. The sHCI consists of a lift
tray that supplies papers to the pickup, and the feeding system that supplies papers to the base printer.

NOTE: The Side High Capacity Input (sHCI) device becomes Tray 5 or Tray 6 depending on the tray
type installed at the base printer.

● HCI Tray 4 installed > sHCI Tray 5

● DCF Tray 4, Tray 5 installed > sHCI Tray 6

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) covers

Learn about the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) cover.

Department Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI, Tray 5 or 6) 233

 Figure 3-255 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) covers

Table 3-162 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) covers

Callout Part name Part number

C301 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) right cover 5QK08-40020

C302 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) rear cover 5QK08-40025

C303 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) harness right cover 5QK08-40018

C304 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) rear top cover 5QK08-40024

C305 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup cover 5QK08-40019

C306 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) top cover 5QK08-61018

C307 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) front cover 5QK08-40026

C308 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) front top cover 5QK08-40027

C309 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) left cover 5QK08-40028

234 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-256 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) front links

Table 3-163 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) front links

Callout Part name Part number

1 Link door 1st front JC66-04279A

2 Link door 2nd front JC66-04277A

3 Link holder front JC61-06567A

Figure 3-257 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) rear links

Table 3-164 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) rear links

Callout Part name Part number

4 Link door 1st rear JC66-04279A

5 Link door 2nd rear JC66-04278A

6 Link holder rear JC61-06568A

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feeding system workflow

Learn about the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feeding system workflow.

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feeding system workflow 235

 Figure 3-258 Overview of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feeding system workflow

Table 3-165 Overview of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feeding system workflow

Callout Part name Part number

1 Lift tray Stores paper for printing

2 Feeding system Picks up and transfers paper to the base

printer feeding system

Figure 3-259 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feeding system workflow

Table 3-166 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feeding system workflow

Callout Part name Part number

1 Lift tray Stores paper for printing

236 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-166 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feeding system workflow (continued)

Callout Part name Part number

2 Feeding system Picks up and transfers paper to the base

printer feeding system

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) unit

Learn about the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) unit.

Figure 3-260 Overview of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) unit

Table 3-167 Overview of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U301 sHCI unit 6GW56-67001 –

U302 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup 5QJ98-60014 –

assembly

U303 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) top cover JC93-01123A Locks the pickup cover and the top cover and checks
open switch assembly whether covers are open

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) unit 237

 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) roller
Learn about the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) rollers.

Figure 3-261 Overview of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) rollers

Table 3-168 Overview of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) rollers

Callout Part name Part number Description

U303 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup 5QJ98-60014 –

unit

K301 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) roller kit 5PN66-67001 –

R301 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper

roller

R302 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) forward JC93-01726A Moves paper to the Tray 5 feed roller
roller

R303 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) reverse JC93-01726A Prevents multi-feeding

roller

R304 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feed JC66-04606A Moves paper to the base printer feeding system
roller

238 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-262 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) rollers

Table 3-169 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) rollers

Callout Part name Part number Description

R301 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup 5QJ90-60128 Picks up paper

roller

R302 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) forward JC93-01726A Moves paper to the Tray 5 feed roller
roller

R303 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) reverse JC93-01726A Prevents multi-feeding

roller

R304 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feed JC66-04606A Moves paper to the base printer feeding system
roller

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) sensors

Learn about the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) sensors.

Figure 3-263 Overview of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) sensors

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) sensors 239

 Table 3-170 Overview of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) sensors

Callout Part name Part number Description

S301 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) detection 0604-001393 Checks the installation of the sHCI to the base printer
sensor 1

S302 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) detection 0604-001393 Checks the installation of the sHCI to the base printer
sensor 2

U303 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) top cover JC93-01123A –

open switch assembly

S303 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) door JC39-02346A Checks whether the sHCI top cover is open
open switch

S304 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) paper 0604-001393 Checks the paper level on the tray
level sensor 1

S305 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) paper 0604-001393 Checks the paper level on the tray
level sensor 2

S306 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) stack 0604-001393 Sets the proper height of the paper to make contact with
height sensor the pickup roller

S307 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) paper 0604-001393 Checks whether the tray has paper
empty sensor

S308 Prefeed 5 sensor 0604-001490 Checks whether paper is properly picked up

Figure 3-264 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) sensors, view 1

Table 3-171 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) sensors, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

S301 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) detection 0604-001393 Checks the installation of the sHCI to the base printer
sensor 1

240 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-171 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) sensors, view 1 (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S302 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) detection 0604-001393 Checks the installation of the sHCI to the base printer
sensor 2

S303 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) door JC39-02346A Checks whether the sHCI top cover is open
open switch

S304 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) paper 0604-001393 Checks the paper level on the tray
level sensor 1

S305 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) paper 0604-001393 Checks the paper level on the tray
level sensor 2

Figure 3-265 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) sensors, view 2

Table 3-172 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) sensors, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

S306 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) stack 0604-001393 Sets the proper height of the paper to make contact with
height sensor the pickup roller

S307 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) paper 0604-001393 Checks whether the tray has paper
empty sensor

S308 Prefeed 5 sensor 0604-001490 Checks whether paper is properly picked up

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motors

Learn about the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motors.

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motors 241

 Figure 3-266 Overview of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motors

Table 3-173 Overview of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motors

Callout Part name Part number Description

M301 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup JC93-01083A Picks up paper

motor

M302 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feed JC31-00163A Drives the Tray 5 feed roller
motor

M303 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) tray lift JC31-00109A Moves the tray upward so that paper is picked up
motor

242 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-267 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motors, view 1

Table 3-174 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motors, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

U304 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup, JC93-01112A –

feed drive assembly

M301 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup JC93-01083A Picks up paper

motor

M302 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feed JC31-00163A Drives the Tray 5 feed roller
motor

U305 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) lift drive JC93-01127A –

assembly

M303 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) tray lift JC31-00109A Moves the tray upward so that paper is picked up
motor

Figure 3-268 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motors, view 2

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motors 243

 Table 3-175 Detail view of sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motors, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Knock-up plate JC93-01129A –

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) operation

Learn about the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) operation.

1. When placing paper on the knock-up plate, it goes down by its own weight.

Figure 3-269 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) operation, view 1

2. The amount of paper stored in the tray is detected with two sHCI paper level sensors (callout b, c)

Figure 3-270 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) operation, view 2

3. When the printing starts, the sHCI tray lift motor (callout a) operates to move the steel wire, and
the tray connected to it moves upwards to the point where the signal of sHCI stack height sensor
changes.

244 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 4. After ready to print, the paper moves by the pickup, forward, and reverse rollers and the prefeed 5
sensor confirms that the paper has been picked up normally.

5. The paper exiting sHCI goes to the base printer.

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motor operation

Learn about the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motor operation.

Figure 3-271 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motor operation, view 1

● sHCI pickup driving: 1 sHCI pickup motor > > 2 pulley and gear (pickup roller)

● sHCI feed driving: 1 sHCI feed motor > 2 gear and gear (feed roller)

Figure 3-272 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motor operation, view 2

● sHCI lift driving: 1 sHCI tray lift motor > 2 coupler (knock-up plate)

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) PCA

Learn about the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) PCA.

sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) motor operation 245

 Figure 3-273 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) PCA

Table 3-176 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number CN Number

Error Code
when
disconnected

sHCI-CN301 Main-J56 18pin JC39-02294A sHCI not

recognized

sHCI-CN501 sHCI paper level sensor 1 9pin JC39-02288A -

sHCI paper level sensor 2

sHCI-CN502 sHCI paper empty sensor 14pin JC39-02289A, Tray 5 empty

JC39-02290A
sHCI stack height sensor

Prefeed 5 sensor

sHCI-CN601 sHCI pickup motor 10pin JC39-02287A 13.A8.D5

sHCI feed motor

sHCI-CN701 sHCI tray lift motor 8pin JC39-02291A Reattach

sHCI detection sensor 1

sHCI detection sensor 2

sHCI-CN1001 sHCI door open switch 3pin JC39-02346A Close the tray
5 cover

Output devices
You will learn more about output devices.

246 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker
You will learn more about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker.

Detailed Specifications
Learn about the detailed specifications of the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker.

Stapler-stacker finisher
Table 3-177 Stapler-stacker finisher detailed specifications

Item Stapler-stacker finisher Booklet maker

Speed PPM 18.3~70,(70ppm) 18.3~70,(70ppm)

Stack Capacity Main 3,000 sheets 2,000 sheets

(A4/Letter 80gsm)
Top 250 sheets 250 sheets

Paper Size Main Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457 Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457

Top 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200) 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200)

Paper Weight Main 52 ~ 350 gsm 52 ~ 350 gsm

Top 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm

Offset (Non Staple) 15mm(minimum) 15mm(minimum)

※Exception SRA3 and larger size.

Staple Clinching position ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat) ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat)

● Dual ● Dual

Paper weight 52~256 gsm 52~256 gsm

Capacity 65 sheets (90gsm) 65 sheets (90gsm)

Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge 5,000 clinching/cartridge

Offline Yes Yes

Hole Punch Paper weight 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm

available unit (Auto NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish

change)

Booklet maker
Table 3-178 Booklet maker specifications

Item Description

Set Speed PPM 18.3~70(70ppm)

See Footnote: 1

Paper size B5 SEF ~ 12'' x 18''

Paper weight 60 ~ 120 gsm

Staple + Fold Capacity(80gsm) 25 sheets

Fold Capacity(80gsm) 5 sheets

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker 247

 Table 3-178 Booklet maker specifications (continued)

Item Description

Tray Capacity 5 sets / 25 sheets

Staple Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge

C - Folding 3 sheets

Letter SEF, A4 SEF (52~90gsm)

1 The output speed of booklet making is the same as the device's printing speed, which varies depending on paper size, printing
mode, etc. Depending on specific usage conditions, such as the paper size used and the number of copies, the output speed
may decrease by up to 90% of the product's maximum output speed.

Physical
Table 3-179 Physical

Module Option Size Module Weight Packed Weight

(Reference) W X D X H [mm] [Kg] [Kg]

Stapler-stacker 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 40 62

Booklet maker 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 62 84.5

Hole punch 80 x 485 x 235 2.8 4.1

Paper size
Table 3-180 Paper size specification

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

A5 210 8.3X5. LEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O X X

X14 8
8

State 216 8.5X5. LEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O X X

ment X14 5
0

Letter 279 11X8.5 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

X21
6

A4 297 8.3X11. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

X21 7
0

B5(JIS) 257 10.1×7.2 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O X X

X18
2

248 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-180 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

B5(ISO 250 9.8×6.9 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O X X

) X17
6

Execut 267 10.5X7. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

ive X18 3
4

No 9 98X 3.9X8. SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

Env 225 9

Monar 98.4 3.9×7.5 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

ch Env ×19
0.5

Postca 101. 4.0×6.0 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

rd 6×1
52.4
4x6

A6 105 4.1X5.8 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

X14
8

No 10 105 4.1×9.5 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

Env ×241

DL Env 110× 4.3×8.7 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

220

C6 Env 114× 4.5×6.4 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

162

B6 128 5.0x7.2 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

x18
2

State 140 5.5X8. SEF O X O X X X O X O X O X X

ment X21 5
6

A5 148 5.8X8. SEF O X O X X X O X O X O X X

X21 3
0

C5 Env 162 6.4×9.0 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×22
9

B5(ISO 176× 6.9×9.8 SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O X X

) 250

B5(JIS) 182 7.2X10.1 SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O O X

X25
7

Detailed Specifications 249

 Table 3-180 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

Execut 184 7.3X10. SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O O X

ive X26 5
7

16k 195 7.7X10. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X27 6
0

A4 210 8.3X11. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O O

X29 7
7

Legal 216 8.5X14 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X35
6

Letter 216 8.5X11 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O O

X27
9

Folio 216 8.5X13 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X33
0

Oficio 215. 8.5×13. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

9×3 5
42.9

C4 Env 229 9.1X12. SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×32 8
4

Tabloid 254 10 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O O X

X37 X14.7
4

B4 257 10X14. SEF O O O F/R X O O O X O O O X

X36 3
4

8K 270 10.6X1 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X39 5.4
0

Ledger 279 11X17 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X43
2

A3 297 11.7X16. SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X42 5
0

Tabloid 304. 12×18 SEF O X O X X X X X X X X O X

8×4
Extra 57.2

250 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-180 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

SRA3 320 12.6×17. SEF O X O X X X X X X X X X X

×45 7
0

13"x19. 330 13x19.2 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

2" x48
7

Custo W9 W3.86- - X NA O NA NA NA N N N N NA NA NA
m 8-32 12.59 A A A A
0
L5.5-18
L13
9.7-
457.
2

* “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.

Media performance
Table 3-181 Media performance

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM

Cover Content C-Fold

Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 O O O O O X X

g/m²)

Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 O O O O O X X

g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 O O X O O X X

g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 O X X X X X X

g/m2)

Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O X X X X X

Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Detailed Specifications 251

 Table 3-181 Media performance (continued)

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM

Cover Content C-Fold

Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Bond O O O O O O X

Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O O O X

Letterhead O O O O O O X

Pre-Punched O O O X X X X

Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O X X X

Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X X X X

Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X X X X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 O O X X X X X

g/m²)

Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 O X X X X X X

g/m2)

Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X O X X

Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O O O X O X X

Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X X X X

Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) X O X X X X X

Transparency (138~146 gsm) O O X X X X X

Labels (120~150 gsm) X O X X X X X

Tab O O X O X X X

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker covers

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker covers.

252 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-274 Front-left view of the stapler-stacker finisher

Table 3-182 Front-left view of the stapler-stacker finisher

Callout Part name Part number

C901 Front doors 5QK09-60106

C902 Caster cover JC63-04985B

C903 Left lower cover (stapler-stacker) 5QK09-40041

C904 Left upper cover 5QK09-40040

Figure 3-275 Front-left view of the bookler maker

Table 3-183 Front-left view of the booklet maker

Callout Part name Part number

C903-1 Left lower cover (booklet maker) 8GS05-60124

C905 Booklet maker output tray 8GS05-60126

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker covers 253

 Figure 3-276 Rear-right view of the bookler maker

Table 3-184 Rear right view of the booklet maker

Callout Part name Part number

C906 Top output tray 5QK09-40027, 5QK09-40029

C907 Main output tray 5QK09-40028, 5QK09-40029

C908 Rear cover 5QK09-40021

C909 Top cover 5QK09-60108

C910

Figure 3-277 Front view of the bookler maker

Table 3-185 Front view of the booklet maker

Callout Part name Part number

C911 Right uppercover 5QK09-60109

254 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-185 Front view of the booklet maker (continued)

Callout Part name Part number

C912 Front cover 5QK09-40019

C913 Front lower cover L 5QK09-40021

C914 Booklet front cover 5QK09-60105

C915 Front lower cover R 5QK09-40022

C916 Front lower cover 5QK09-40020

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker unit overview

You will learn more about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker unit overview.

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker workflow

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker workflow.

Figure 3-278 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker workflow

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker unit overview 255

 Table 3-186 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker workflow

Item Unit Description

1 Bridge unit Moves paper from the printer to the finisher

2 Entrance unit Allows the paper to move into the finisher

3 Punch unit (optional) Makes the holes in a specific location on the paper

4 Tray diverter unit Changes the paper direction to the main output tray or top output
tray

5 Top exit unit Moves the paper from the diverter to the top output tray

6 Top output tray unit Loads paper that has completed its printing job

7 Main exit unit Move sthe paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit with
forward direction or to the buffer unit with backward direction

8 Paddle unit Pushes to the end fence to be aligned towards top and bottom of
the paper

9 End fence unit Sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top
and bottom of the paper

10 Tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side

11 Stapler unit Staples a bundle of an aligned documents

12 Ejector unit Transfers the stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the
output bin

13 Main output tray unit Loads paper that has completed its printing job

14 Paper holding unit Keeps the paper stable when ejecting to the output bin and
controls the output bin movement

15 Buffer unit Maintains the paper inside the unit for a while or moves it to the
booklet maker

16 Booklet entrance unit Moves paper into the booklet maker

17 Booklet paddle unit Moves paper to the booklet end fence

18 Booklet end fence unit Moves paper to the designated position for folding and stapling

19 Booklet presser unit Presses the paper that enters to the booklet tamper unit to prevent
paper being shuffled

20 Booklet tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side to make a booklet

21 Booklet stapler unit Staples a bundle of aligned documents to make a booklet

22 Booklet fold unit Folds a bundle of aligned documents as a booklet

23 Booklet diverter unit Changes the paper direction to the booklet exit unit or the location
to make a C-fold

24 Booklet exit unit Moves paper to the booklet output bin

25 Booklet output tray unit Loads a bundle of booklets

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors.

256 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-279 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors, view 1

Table 3-187 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors, view 1

No Name Part number Type Description

S901 Bridge entrance JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes to the bridge
sensor entrance unit

S902 Bridge door 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the bridge door is open
sensor

S903 Bridge 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether paper comes to the bridge
exitsensor exit unit

S904 Tray diverter 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the tray diverter sets at the
home sensor home position

S905 Main exit CAM 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checkss whether the main exit CAM sets at
home sensor the home position

S906 Front 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the front tamper sets at the
tamperhome home position
sensor

S907 End fence home 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the end fence sets at the
sensor home position

S908 Paddle 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the paddle sets at the home
homesensor position

S909 Rear 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the rear tamper sets at the
tamperhome home position
sensor

S910 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes to the main exit
unit

S911 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether paper comes to the top exit
unit

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors 257

 Table 3-187 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors, view 1 (continued)

No Name Part number Type Description

S912 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes to the entrance
unit

Figure 3-280 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors, view 2

Table 3-188 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors, view 2

No Name Part number Type Description

S913 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether paper exits the buffer unit

S914 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether paper is on the ejector or not

S915 Top output tray JC82-01039A LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether the top output tray is full or
paper full sensor not

S916 Buffer home 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the buffer roller and the idle
sensor roller are attached or detached

S917 Front paper 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks the location of the paper holding
holding sensor actuator for controlling the position of the main
output tray

S918 Front door JC39-02309A Switch Checks whether the front door is open
switch

258 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-188 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors, view 2 (continued)

No Name Part number Type Description

S919 Manual staple 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether paper comes to the manual
sensor staple position

S920 Main output tray JC82-01039A LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether the main output tray reaches
top of stack the top of stack
sensor

S921 Stapler front 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Places the stapler in the manual stapling
sensor position

S922 Paper holding 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the paper holding actuator
home sensor sets at the home position

S923 Ejector 2 motor 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector 2 motor is
sensor operational

S924 Stapler mid front 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Places the stapler at the exact stapling
sensor position

S925 Stapler mid rear 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Places the stapler at the exact stapling
sensor position

S926 Main output tray 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the output tray is full
lower limit
sensor

S927 Ejector1 motor 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector1 motor is
sensor operational

S928 Ejector1 end 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector1 sets at the end
sensor position

S929 Ejector1 home 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector1 sets at the home
sensor position

S930 Stapler rear 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the stapler sets at the home
sensor (rear) position

S931 Rear paper 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks the location of the paper holding
holding sensor actuator for controlling the position of the main
output tray

S932 Ejector2 home 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector2 sets at the home
sensor position

S933 Main output tray 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the main output tray motor is
motor sensor operational

S934 Main output tray JC39-02316A Switch Checks whether the main output tray reaches
top of stack at the top of stack
switch

S935 Top door switch JC39-02310A Switch Checks whether the top door is open

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors 259

 Figure 3-281 Booklet maker sensors

Table 3-189 Booklet maker sensors

No Name Part number Type Description

S936 Booklet entrance 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the paper comes to the bridge
sensor entrance unit

S937 Booklet presser 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet presser sets at
home sensor the home position

S938 Booklet tamper 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet tamper sets at the
home sensor home position

S939 Booklet C-fold 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet C-fold blade sets
blade home at the home position
sensor

S940 Booklet diverter 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet diverter sets at
home sensor the home position

S941 Booklet paddle 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet paddle sets at the
home sensor home position

S942 Booklet end 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet end fence sets at
fence home the home position
sensor

S943 Booklet output JC82-01039A LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether the paper goes to the booklet
tray sensor output bin

S944 Booklet exit JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether the paper goes to the booklet
sensor exit unit

260 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-189 Booklet maker sensors (continued)

No Name Part number Type Description

S945 Booklet blade 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet blade sets at the
home sensor home position

S946 Booklet tamper JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether the paper comes to the
sensor booklet tamper unit

Figure 3-282 Paper path sensors

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids.

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids 261

 Figure 3-283 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids

Table 3-190 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids

No Name Part number Type Description

M901 Paddle motor JC93-01001A Stepping motor Rotates the paddle and moves the paddle
pusher up and downward at the same time

M902 Main exit cam JC93-01155A Stepping motor Rotates the main exit cam to detach the exit
motor roller from the exit idle roller

M903 End fence motor JC93-01001A Stepping motor Moves the front and rear end fence depending
on paper size (width) so that paper is correctly
arranged at the end fence

M904 Front tamper JC93-01001A Stepping motor Moves the front tamper unit
motor

M905 Ejector 2 motor JC93-01168A DC motor Moves the ejector 2 and grabs paper

M906 Ejector 1 motor JC93-01168A DC motor Moves the ejector 1 forward and backward

M907 Paper holding 8GS05-60104 Stepping motor Moves paper holding actuator up when paper
motor goes out to the output bin

M908 Stapler position JC31-00163A Hybrid Stepping Moves the stapler

motor motor

M909 Rear tamper JC93-01001A Stepping motor Moves the rear tamper unit
motor

SL901 Buffer solenoid JC33-00038A Solenoid Holds paper so that it does not to fall out to the
booklet maker during the buffering task

M910 Buffer motor JC93-01152A Stepping motor Moves paper to the buffer space or the booklet
maker

M911 Main output tray JC31-00178B DC motor Moves the main output bin up and down
motor

262 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-190 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids (continued)

No Name Part number Type Description

M912 Entrance motor 3SJ19-80501 Hybrid Stepping Operates the entrance roller, middle roller,
motor and top middle roller when driving forward
and moves the diverter cam when driving
backward

M913 Exit motor 3SJ19-80501 Hybrid Stepping Rotates the main exit roller and the top exit
motor roller

M914 Bridge motor 3SJ19-80501 Hybrid Stepping Rotates the bridge entrance roller, the bridge
motor middle roller, and the bridge exit roller

Figure 3-284 Booklet maker motors and solenoids

Table 3-191 Booklet maker motors and solenoids

No Name Part number Type Description

M915 Booklet entrance JC93-01152A Stepping moto Rotates the booklet entrance roller
motor

M916 Booklet presser JC93-01155A Stepping moto Operates the booklet presser
motor

M917 Booklet C-fold JC93-01154A Stepping moto Drives the booklet C-fold blade and the moving
blade motor guide

M918 Booklet diverter JC93-01153A Stepping moto Drives the booklet diverter
motor

M919 Booklet paddle JC93-01001A Stepping moto Rotates the booklet paddle
motor

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids 263

 Table 3-191 Booklet maker motors and solenoids (continued)

No Name Part number Type Description

M920 Booklet end JC93-01155A Stepping moto Moves the booklet end fence up and down
fence motor

M921 Booklet fold JC31-00144A BLDC motor Rotates the booklet fold roller, the booklet C-
motor fold roller, and the booklet exit roller

M922 Booklet blade JC31-00144A BLDC motor Drives the booklet blade
motor

M923 Booklet tamper JC93-01155A Stepping motor Moves the booklet tamper unit
motor

SL902 Booklet end JC33-00038A Solenoid Operates the gripper of the booklet end fence
fence solenoid to grip paper that comes to the booklet end
fence

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker rollers

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker roller.

Figure 3-285 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker rollers

Table 3-192 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker rollers

No Name Part number Description

R901 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A Moves paper from the machine to the bridge unit

R902 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A Moves paper from the machine to the bridge unit

R903 Bridge entrance roller JC66-04733A Movese paper from the machine to the bridge unit

R904 Entrance roller JC66-04722A Moves paper from the machine to the exit unit

R905 Middle roller JC66-04724A Moves paper from the machine to the exit unit

R906 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Moves paper to the booklet maker and makes the gap
between the buffer roller and the idle roller so that the
paper remains there for the buffering process

R907 Main exit roller JC66-04726A Moves paper to the ejector unit or the buffer unit and
makes the gap between the main exit roller and the
idle roller so that paper remains there for the buffering
process

R908 Top middle roller JC66-04725A Moves paper to the top output bin

264 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-192 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker rollers (continued)

No Name Part number Description

R909 Top exit roller JC66-04727A Moves paper to the top output bin

Figure 3-286 Booklet maker rollers

Table 3-193 Booklet maker rollers

No Name Part number Description

R910 Booklet entrance roller JC66-04717A Moves paper from the machine to the bridge unit

R911 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Presses a stack of paper to fold completely

R912 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A In case of C-fold, presses a stack of paper to fold
completely

R913 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A Moves paper to the booklet output tray unit

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCAs

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCAs.

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCAs 265

 Figure 3-287 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCAs

Table 3-194 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCAs

No Name Part number Description

P901 Manual staple PCA JC92-02789B Shows the manual stapling condition and accepts the
button input for manual staple

P902 Booklet maker PCA 6GW51-60001 Controls the booklet maker module and consists of the
micro-controller and driver ICs

P903 Finisher main PCA 6GW55-60001 Controls the finisher modules and consists of the micro-
controller and driver ICs

Not Hole punch PCA – Controls the hole punch module and consists of the
shown micro-controller and driver ICs

Bridge unit
You will learn more about the bridge unit.

Bridge unit overview

Learn about the bridge unit.

The bridge unit is the unit that transfers paper from the base printer to the finisher.

The bridge entrance sensor detects whether a paper enters into the bridge unit from the base printer.
In the same way, the bridge exit sensor checks whether the paper leaves from the bridge unit to the
finisher inside. The bridge motor drives the bridge entrance roller, bridge middle roller, and bridge exit
roller. It makes the paper moves through the bridge unit. The jam removal door locating at the front side
of the unit helps user to remove the jammed paper.

266 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-288 Overview of the bridge unit

Table 3-195 Overview of the bridge unit

No Part name Part number Description

S902 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 Detects if the bridge door is open

S901 Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A Checks whether paper comes to the bridge entrance
unit

S903 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 Checks whether paper moves out of the bridge unit

M914 Bridge motor 3SJ19-80501 Rotates the bridge entrance roller, the bridge middle
roller, and the bridge exit roller

R903 Bridge entrance roller JC66-04733A Moves paper from the printer to the bridge unit

R902 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A Move paper from the printer to the bridge unit

R901 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A Moves paper from the printer to the finisher entrance
unit

Bridge unit overview 267

 Figure 3-289 Detail view of the bridge unit

Table 3-196 Detail view of the bridge unit

No Part name Part number Description

U901 Bridge unit 5QK09-60110 Moves paper from the printer to the finisher

S902 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 Detects if the bridge door is open

S901 Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A Checks whether paper comes to the bridge entrance
unit

S903 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 Checks whether paper moves out of the bridge unit

M914 Bridge motor 3SJ19-80501 Rotates the bridge entrance roller, the bridge middle
roller, and the bridge exit roller

R903 Bridge entrance roller JC66-04733A Moves paper from the printer to the bridge unit

R902 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A Moves paper from the printer to the bridge unit

R901 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A Moves paper from the printer to the finisher entrance
unit

Stapler-stacker finisher
You will learn more about the stapler-stacker finisher.

Entrance unit
You will learn more about the entrance unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Entrance unit overview

Learn about the entrance unit overview.

Entrance unit moves a paper from the bridge unit to the finisher inside. The entrance sensor installed at
the right side of the unit senses whether the paper enters into the finisher. The entrance motor rotates
forward to drive the entrance roller and the middle roller to move the paper from the entrance unit to the
exit area.

268 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-290 Overview of the entrance unit

Table 3-197 Overview of the entrance unit

No Part name Part number Description

S912 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A Detects whether paper enters at the entrance unit

M912 Entrance motor 3SJ19-80501 Operates the entrance roller and middle roller when
driving forward

R904 Entrance roller JC66-04722A Moves paper from the entrance unit to the exit unit

R905 Middle roller JC66-04724A Moves paper from the entrance unit to the exit unit

Figure 3-291 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 1

Table 3-198 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

R904 Entrance roller JC66-04722A Moves paper from the entrance unit to the exit unit

R905 Middle roller JC66-04724A Moves paper from the entrance unit to the exit unit

Entrance unit overview 269

 Figure 3-292 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 2

Table 3-199 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

M912 Entrance motor 3SJ19-80501 Operates the entrance roller and middle roller when
driving forward

Figure 3-293 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 3

Table 3-200 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 3

No Part name Part number Description

S912 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A Detects whether paper enters at the entrance unit

Punch unit (optional)

You will learn more about the punch unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Punch unit overview

Learn about the punch unit overview.

The punch unit is an optional device that punches the holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper.
The punch unit is positioned right after the entrance unit.

In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
forward, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make the
holes on the paper. When making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the backward direction and the inner gear

270 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

rotates to the left to drill two holes. The travel distance and position of the hole-punches are detected
and controlled by the 3 punch position sensors.

NOTE: Puncher types are various depending on the country.

Figure 3-294 Overview of the punch unit

Table 3-201 Overview of the punch unit

No Part name Part number Description

U902-1 2-3 hole punch unit Y1G10-67901 –

U902-2 2-4 hole punch unit Y1G11-67901 –

U902-3 Swedish hole punch unit Y1G12-67901 –

Figure 3-295 Detail view of the punch unit

Table 3-202 Detail view of the punch unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Punch scan home sensor NA Detects the home position of the punch unit

2 Punch scan motor NA Transmits the force to move the punch unit in the
horizontal direction

Punch unit overview 271

 Table 3-202 Detail view of the punch unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

3 Punch scan edge sensor NA Checks the paper width to make hole on the right
position of paper

4 Punch position sensor NA Detects the travel distance and position of the hole-
punches

5 Punch motor sensor NA Checks whether the punch motor is operational

6 Punch motor NA Transmits the force to make holes on the paper

Punch unit operation

Learn about the punch unit operation.

1. A paper comes into the punch unit, and it is aligned to drill holes. The motor rotates forward or
backward (callout 1), then the punch rail in the punch unit moves in order to move the punch hole
makers.

Figure 3-296 Punch unit operation, view 1

2. The punch position sensors determine the punch rail location (callout 2). It drives the punch hole
makers up and down to make holes (callout 3).

Figure 3-297 Punch unit operation, view 2

272 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-298 Punch unit operation, view 3

3. In some paper sizes, paper might be jammed in a place where punch hole maker is
located.Therefore, the punch unit moves left and right (callout 4).

Figure 3-299 Punch unit operation, view 4

Tray diverter unit

You will learn more about the tray diverter unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Tray diverter unit overview

Learn about the tray diverter unit overview.

The tray diverter unit is responsible for determining the paper feed direction so that paper can be
ejected to the main output tray or top output tray

The entrance motor rotates this unit. When the entrance motor rotates backward, the phase of the
divertor CAM changes so that the paper path direction changes. The tray diverter home sensor (S4)
checks whether the tray diverter is located at the home position or not.

Tray diverter unit 273

 Figure 3-300 Overview of the tray diverter unit

Table 3-203 Overview of the tray diverter unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Tray diverter JC61-07205A Selects the paper path of either the main output tray or
the top output tray

S904 Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 Checks whether home position of the tray diverter

M912 Entrance motor 3SJ19-80501 Operates the tray diverter cam when driving in the
backward direction

Figure 3-301 Detail view of the tray diverter unit, view 1

Table 3-204 Detail view of the tray diverter unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Tray diverter JC61-07205A Selects the paper path of either the main output tray or
the top output tray

2 Tray diverter cam JC66-04560A Changes the paper path

274 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-302 Detail view of the tray diverter unit, view 2

Table 3-205 Detail view of the tray diverter unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S904 Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 Checks whether home position of the tray diverter

Tray diverter unit operation

Learn about the tray diverter unit operation.

1. When printing out the document to the main output tray, the entrance motor rotates (callout 1) so
that the tray diverter moves downwards to move the paper out to the main output tray.

Figure 3-303 Tray diverter unit operation, view 1

2. In case of top output tray, the diverter cam moves. The tray diverter moves upwards (callout 2) so
that the paper moves out to the top output tray.

Tray diverter unit operation 275

 Figure 3-304 Tray diverter unit operation, view 2

Top exit unit

You will learn more about the top exit unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Top exit unit overview

Learn about the top exit unit overview.

The top exit unit sends paper from the tray diverter unit to the top output tray unit.

The top exit sensor detects paper entry into the top exit unit. The entrance motor drives the top middle
roller, and the exit motor transmit the force to rotate the top exit roller so that paper moves to the top
output tray unit.

Figure 3-305 Overview of the top exit unit

Table 3-206 Overview of the top exit unit

No Part name Part number Description

S911 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper has entered at the top exit unit

M912 Entrance motor 3SJ19-80501 Rotate the top middle roller when driving in the forward
direction

276 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-206 Overview of the top exit unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M913 Exit motor 3SJ19-80501 Rotate the top exit roller

R908 Top middle roller JC66-04725A Move the paper to the top output tray

R909 Top exit roller JC66-04725A Move the paper to the top output tray

Figure 3-306 Detail view of the top exit unit

Table 3-207 Detail view of the top exit unit

No Part name Part number Description

S911 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper has entered at the top exit unit

R909 Top exit roller JC66-04725A Move the paper to the top output tray

Top output tray unit

You will learn more about the top output tray unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Top output tray unit overview

Learn about the top output tray unit overview.

The top output tray unit loads discharged paper from the finisher. It has the paper pull sensor to detect
whether the tray is full with the paper.

Top output tray unit 277

 Figure 3-307 Overview of the top output tray unit

Table 3-208 Overview of the top output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Top output tray 5QK09-40027 Load the ejected paper

5QK09-40029

S915 Top output tray paper full JC82-01039A Detect whether the tray is full
sensor

Figure 3-308 Detail view of the top output tray unit

Table 3-209 Detail view of the top output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Top output tray 5QK09-40027 Load the ejected paper

5QK09-40029

278 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-209 Detail view of the top output tray unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

S915 Top output tray paper full JC82-01039A Detect whether the tray is full
sensor

Main exit unit

You will learn more about the main exit unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Main exit unit overview

Learn about the main exit unit overview.

The main exit unit delivers paper from the tray diverter unit to the ejector unit or buffer unit.

The main exit sensor detects whether paper comes in from main exit unit. The exit motor drives the main
exit roller to send the paper to the ejector unit or buffer unit.

Figure 3-309 Overview of the main exit unit

Table 3-210 Overview of the main exit unit

No Part name Part number Description

S910 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A Detect whether the paper entered at the main exit unit

M913 Exit motor 3SJ19-80501 Rotate the main exit roller

R907 Main exit roller JC66-04726A Move the paper to the ejector unit or the buffer unit

1 Main exit cam – Adjust the gap between the main exit roller and the idle
roller for the buffering

S905 Main exit cam home 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the main exit cam
sensor

M902 Main exit cam motor JC93-01155A Rotate the main exit cam

Main exit unit 279

 Figure 3-310 Detail view of the main exit unit, view 1

Table 3-211 Detail view of the main exit unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

M913 Exit motor 3SJ19-80501 Rotate the main exit roller

R907 Main exit roller JC66-04726A Move the paper to the ejector unit or the buffer unit

Figure 3-311 Detail view of the main exit unit, view 2

Table 3-212 Detail view of the main exit unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S905 Main exit cam home 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the main exit cam
sensor

M902 Main exit cam motor JC93-01155A Rotate the main exit cam

Main exit unit operation

Learn about the main exit unit operation.

1. The exit motor drives forward so that paper will moves towards the ejector unit.

280 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-312 Main exit unit operation, view 1

2. If the exit motor rotates backwards paper moves towards the buffer unit.

Figure 3-313 Main exit unit operation, view 2

Paddle unit
You will learn more about the paddle unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Paddle unit overview

Learn about the paddle unit overview.

The paddle unit rotates the rubber paddles mounted on the shaft to move paper to the end fence unit,
allowing paper to be arranged well for the next job. The paddle presser is mounted behind the rubber
paddles and presses the end of paper to help paper be stacked well at the end fence unit. The paddle
home sensor checks the home position to drive the paddles. And the paddle motor drives the paddle
and paddle presser.

Paddle unit 281

 Figure 3-314 Overview of the paddle unit

Table 3-213 Overview of the paddle unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Paddle JC90-01480A Moves paper into the end fence unit

2 Paddle presser JC61-07206A Presses the end of bent paper helps paper to be loaded
well at the end fence unit

S908 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the paddle

M901 Paddle motor JC93-01001A Rotates the paddle, and moves the paddle presser up
and downward at the same time

Figure 3-315 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 1

Table 3-214 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S908 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the paddle

282 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-214 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 1 (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M901 Paddle motor JC93-01001A Rotates the paddle, and moves the paddle presser up
and downward at the same time

Figure 3-316 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 2

Table 3-215 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

1 Paddle JC90-01480A Moves paper into the end fence unit

2 Paddle presser JC61-07206A Presses the end of bent paper helps paper to be loaded
well at the end fence unit

Paddle unit operation

Learn about the paddle unit operation.

1. A paper falls downward through the exit unit. The paddles rotate to make the paper moves into the
end fence unit.

Figure 3-317 Paddle unit operation, view 1

2. The paddle presser pushes the end of the paper so as not to be scattered around the paddle unit.

Paddle unit operation 283

 Figure 3-318 Paddle unit operation, view 2

End fence unit

You will learn more about the end fence unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

End fence unit overview

Learn about the end fence unit overview.

The end fence unit sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the
paper. End fence motor operates the two end fences and adjust width of them to stack a bunch of paper
correctly. The end fence home sensor detects the home position of the end fence.

Figure 3-319 Overview of the end fence unit

Table 3-216 Overview of the end fence unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 End fence NA Aligns top and bottom side of paper

S907 End fence home sensor 0604-001393 Detects the home position of the end fence

M903 End fence motor JC93-01001A Moves front and rear end fence depending on paper size
(width) so that paper sits correctly at the end fence

284 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-320 Detail view of the end fence unit, view 1

Table 3-217 Detail view of the end fence unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

M903 End fence motor JC93-01001A Moves front and rear end fence depending on paper size
(width) so that paper arranged well at the end fence

Figure 3-321 Detail view of the end fence unit, view 2

Table 3-218 Detail view of the end fence unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

1 End fence NA Aligns top and bottom side of paper

S907 End fence home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the end fence

End fence unit operation

Learn about the end fence unit operation.

1. The end fence motor moves the front and rear end fences in the arrow direction (callout 1)
depending on paper width.

End fence unit operation 285

 Figure 3-322 End fence unit operation, view 1

2. A paper goes into the end fence unit by the paddle unit (callout 2). At the same time the end fence
unit aligns the paper to the direction of blue line (callout 3).

Figure 3-323 End fence unit operation, view 2

Tamper unit
You will learn more about the tamper unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Tamper unit overview

Learn about the tamper unit overview.

The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper. When a certain amount
of paper is collected after printing, the tamper unit hits the left and right ends of the paper to align
the paper correctly. Each tamper has a motor on the back side that delivers driving force to move.
The tamper home sensors are mounted on the back side of the unit to check the home position of the
tamper unit.

286 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-324 Overview of the tamper unit

Table 3-219 Overview of the tamper unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00901A Align left and right side of the paper

S906 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the tamper unit

M904 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A Move the front tamper unit

2 Rear tamper JC82-00898A Align left and right side of the paper

S909 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the tamper unit

M909 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A Move the front tamper unit

Figure 3-325 Detail view of the tamper unit, view 1

Tamper unit overview 287

 Table 3-220 Detail view of the tamper unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00901A Align left and right side of the paper

2 Rear tamper JC82-00898A Align left and right side of the paper

Figure 3-326 Detail view of the tamper unit, view 2

Table 3-221 Detail view of the tamper unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00901A Align left and right side of the paper

S906 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the tamper unit

M904 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A Move the front tamper unit

2 Rear tamper JC82-00898A Align left and right side of the paper

S909 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the tamper unit

M909 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A Move the front tamper unit

Tamper unit operation

Learn about the tamper unit operation.

1. A stack of paper is arranged at the end fence unit though end fence unit operation. Then the left and
right tampers arrange both side of the paper.

288 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-327 Tamper unit operation, view 1

2. In case of offset printing, the tamper unit moves slightly different from the previous bundles location
so that the next bunch of paper could be shifted.

Figure 3-328 Tamper unit operation, view 2

Stapler unit
You will learn more about the stapler unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Stapler unit overview

Learn about the stapler unit overview.

The stapler units a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents.
Documents are collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then stapler
assembly staples the bundle. There are six options to make a bundle.

Figure 3-329 Stapling options

Stapler unit 289

 The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor installed inside. The one home sensor and two position
sensors are mounted so that the stapler can be positioned in the exact stapling position whether it is
stapled on the left, the right, or at the center of the document. Stapling is done by the motor inside the
stapler assembly.

In addition, manual staple feature is available on the front-upper side of the finisher. The manual staple
sensor detects whether a stack of paper comes into the manual staple location or not. The front sensor
makes the stapler moves at the manual staple location.

Figure 3-330 Overview of the stapler unit

Table 3-222 Overview of the stapler unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Stapler unit 8GS05-60116 Staple a bundle of paper

S921 Stapler front sensor 0604-001393 Detect the stapler at the manual stapling position

S924 Stapler mid-front 0604-001393 Detect the stapler location

S925 Stapler mid-rear sensor 0604-001393 Detect the stapler location

S930 Stapler rear sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the stapler

S919 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 Detect paper when manual stapling

M908 Stapler position motor JC31-00163A Move the stapler

290 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-331 Detail view of the stapler unit, view 1

Table 3-223 Detail view of the stapler unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Stapler unit 8GS05-60116 Staple a bundle of paper

2 Staple cartridge JC81-09882A Staple cartridge

S919 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 Detect paper when manual stapling

Figure 3-332 Detail view of the stapler unit, view 2

Table 3-224 Detail view of the stapler unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S921 Stapler front sensor 0604-001393 Detect the stapler at the manual stapling position

S924 Stapler mid-front 0604-001393 Detect the stapler location

S925 Stapler mid-rear sensor 0604-001393 Detect the stapler location

S930 Stapler rear sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the stapler

M908 Stapler position motor JC31-00163A Move the stapler

Staple and staple cartridge

Learn about the staple and staple cartridge.

1. Staple cartridge: JC81-09882B. Initial staples included.

Staple and staple cartridge 291

 Figure 3-333 Staple cartridge for stapler unit

NOTE: Staple handle color may vary (blue or green color).

2. Staple: Y1G14-67901. 3 EA in 1 box.

Figure 3-334 Staple for stapler unit

Stapler unit operation

Learn about the stapler unit operation.

1. The stapler position motor drives the stapler assembly to direction 1. During this process the stapler
assembly moves through the rail using three stapler position sensors (callout 2) and staples a stack
of paper.

Figure 3-335 Stapler unit operation, view 1

2. In case of staple cartridge replacement, the stapler moves to direction 3. During manual stapling,
the stapler moves in direction 4.

292 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-336 Stapler unit operation, view 2

Ejector unit
You will learn more about the ejector unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Ejector unit overview

Learn about the ejector unit overview.

The ejector unit ejects a bundle of paper out to the main output tray which consists of the ejector 1 and
the ejector 2. The ejector 1 moves a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector 2 unit.
During this process, the ejector 1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector1 unit. And ejector 1
motor sensor checks the ejector 1 motor operation. And the ejector 1 home sensor detects the home
position of the ejector 1. The ejector 1 end sensor detects the end position of the ejector 1. When the
paper arrives at the ejector 2 unit, the ejector 2 grabs a stack of paper and ejects it onto the main output
tray. The ejector 2 motor is responsible for this process, and the ejector 2 motor sensor helps it to be
controlled correctly. In addition, the ejector2 home sensor checks the location of the ejector 2.

Figure 3-337 Overview of the ejector unit

Table 3-225 Overview of the ejector unit

No Part name Part number Description

– Ejector unit JC90-01824A

S14 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A Detects whether the paper is on the ejector or not

1 Ejector 1 Moves the stack of paper from the end fence to the
ejector 2

Ejector unit 293

 Table 3-225 Overview of the ejector unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

S927 Ejector 1 motor sensor 0604-001415 Detects whether the ejector1 motor rotates

M906 Ejector 1 motor JC93-01168A Moves the ejector 1 forward and backward

2 Ejector 2 Moves the paper from the ejector 1 to the main output
tray

S932 Ejector 2 home sensor 0604-001415 Detects the home position of the ejector 2

S923 Ejector 2 motor sensor 0604-001415 Detects the ejector 2 motor rotation

M905 Ejector 2 motor JC93-01168A Moves the ejector 2 and grabs the paper

Figure 3-338 Detail view of the ejector unit, view 1

Table 3-226 Detail view of the ejector unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Ejector 1 Moves the stack of paper from the end fence to the
ejector 2

2 Ejector 2 Moves the paper from the ejector 1 to the main output
tray

Figure 3-339 Detail view of the ejector unit, view 2

294 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-227 Detail view of the ejector unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S927 Ejector 1 motor sensor 0604-001415 Detects whether the ejector1 motor rotates

M906 Ejector 1 motor JC93-01168A Moves the ejector 1 forward and backward

S932 Ejector 2 home sensor 0604-001415 Detects the home position of the ejector 2

S923 Ejector 2 motor sensor 0604-001415 Detects the ejector 2 motor rotation

M905 Ejector 2 motor JC93-01168A Moves the ejector 2 and then grabs the paper

Ejector unit operation

Learn about the ejector unit operation.

1. The ejector 1 (callout 1) pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector 2 unit.

Figure 3-340 Ejector unit operation, view 1

2. The ejector 2 (callout 2) picks up paper, then moves forward to the main output tray direction.

Ejector unit operation 295

 Figure 3-341 Ejector unit operation, view 2

Main output tray unit

You will learn more about the main output tray unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Main output tray unit overview

Learn about the main output tray unit overview.

Printouts are stacked on the main output tray. The main output tray moves up and down along the rails
inside the finisher, and the main output tray motor controls those movements according to the signals
of the front & rear paper holding sensor. Main output tray motor sensor checks whether the main output
tray motor rotates properly.

When main output tray hits the lower limit sensor of the main output tray, the machine detects that
paper tray is full. The main output tray top of stack sensor detects that the main output tray is on the top.

296 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-342 Overview of the main output tray unit

Table 3-228 Overview of the main output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

C907 Main outputtray 5QK09-40028 Stacking plate for ejected paper

S920 Main outputtraytopof JC82-01039A Checks the upper limit of main output tray
stack sensor (receiver, led)

S926 Main output tray lower limit 0604-001415 Detects the lowest position of the output tray

S933 Main output tray motor 0604-001393 Detects whether the main output tray motor rotates

M911 Main output tray motor JC90-01415B Moves the main output tray up and down

S934 Main output tray top of JC39-02316A Checks the upper limit of main output tray so that
stack switch detects abnormal movement of output tray

Main output tray unit overview 297

 Figure 3-343 Detail view of the main output tray unit, view 1

Table 3-229 Detail view of the main output tray unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

C907 Main outputtray 5QK09-40028 Stacking plate for ejected paper

S920 Main outputtraytopof JC82-01039A Checks the upper limit of main output tray
stack sensor (receiver, led)

S926 Main outputtraylower limit 0604-001415 Detects the lowest position of the output tray

Figure 3-344 Detail view of the main output tray unit, view 2

Table 3-230 Detail view of the main output tray unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S933 Main output tray motor 0604-001393 Detects whether the main output tray motor rotates

298 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-230 Detail view of the main output tray unit, view 2 (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M911 Main output tray motor JC90-01415B Moves the main output tray up and down

Paper holding unit

You will learn more about the paper holding unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Paper holding unit overview

Learn about the paper holding unit overview.

The paper holding unit holds printouts on the main output tray. It has a sensor that detects the height of
stacked paper so that the output tray moves up and down to stack paper in a stable manner.

The paper holding motor lifts the paper holding actuator when printouts come out to the main output
tray. The paper holding home sensor detects the location of paper holding actuator at the home
position. The front and rear paper holding sensor checks the volume of printouts on the main output tray
and makes the main output tray move downward.

Figure 3-345 Overview of the paper holding unit

Table 3-231 Overview of the paper holding unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Paper holding actuator – Control the height of the main output tray and hold
printouts so as not to be scattered

S917 Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Detects stacked paper position

S931 Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Detects stacked paper position

S922 Paper holding home 0604-001393 Detects the home position of paper holding actuator
sensor

Paper holding unit 299

 Table 3-231 Overview of the paper holding unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M907 Paper holding motor 8GS05-60104 Lift paper holding actuator up when printouts delivered
to the main output tray

Figure 3-346 Detail view of the paper holding unit, view 1

Table 3-232 Detail view of the paper holding unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Paper holding actuator – Control the height of the main output tray and hold
printouts so as not to be scattered

S917 Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Detects stacked paper position

S931 Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Detects stacked paper position

S922 Paper holding home 0604-001393 Detects the home position of paper holding actuator
sensor

2 Left upper cover 5QK09-40040 –

Figure 3-347 Detail view of the paper holding unit, view 2

300 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-233 Detail view of the paper holding unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

M907 Paper holding motor 8GS05-60104 Lift paper holding actuator up when printouts delivered
to the main output tray

Paper holding unit operation

Learn about the paper holding unit operation.

1. When printouts are delivered to the main output tray, a paper holding motor moves paper holding
actuator upward to create a paper path to prevent jam (callout 1).

Figure 3-348 Paper holding unit operation, view 1

2. When printouts are stacked on top of the main output tray, the paper holding actuator goes down to
hold them (callout 2).

Figure 3-349 Paper holding unit operation, view 2

3. As paper stacks up on the main output tray, the paper holding actuator is lifted by papers. The front
& rear paper holding sensors make the main output tray moves downward to store more printouts
(callout 3).

Paper holding unit operation 301

 Figure 3-350 Paper holding unit operation, view 3

4. As printouts are stacked on the main output tray, the tray goes down. When it reaches at the end of
its moving range (callout 4), the main output tray touches the lower limit sensor. The sensor detects
that the main output tray is full of printouts.

Figure 3-351 Paper holding unit operation, view 4

Buffer unit
You will learn more about the buffer unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Buffer unit overview

Learn about the buffer unit overview.

The buffer unit keeps paper inside the unit or moves them to the booklet maker. The buffer diverter
creates a paper path so that paper can move to the buffer unit, and the buffer sensor detects whether
paper moved out from the buffer unit. The buffer motor controls buffer roller, and buffer home sensors
checks the location of buffer rollers. The buffer solenoid holds papers so that they do not fall into the
booklet maker while buffering.

NOTE: Buffering: It is to maintain print speed when users print multiple copies continuously. The first
page of a print job stays in the buffer unit for a moment while the previous job is being ejected. After
the previous print job was ejected, the first and second page of the job move to the ejector unit
together.

302 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-352 Overview of the buffer unit

Table 3-234 Overview of the buffer unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Buffer diverter JC61-07204A Make the way to the buffer space

S913 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A Detect whether paper has moved out from the buffer
unit

S916 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the buffer roller

M910 Buffer motor JC93-01152A Move the paper to the buffer space or the booklet maker

SL901 Buffer solenoid JC33-00038A Hold the paper to prevent them from falling out to the
booklet maker during buffering

R906 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Move the paper to the booklet maker or makes the gap
so that paper stays in this space

Figure 3-353 Detail view of the buffer unit, view 1

Buffer unit overview 303

 Table 3-235 Detail view of the buffer unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

M910 Buffer motor JC93-01152A Move the paper to the buffer space or the booklet maker

Figure 3-354 Detail view of the buffer unit, view 2

Table 3-236 Detail view of the buffer unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S916 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the buffer roller

R906 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Move the paper to the booklet maker or makes the gap
so that paper stays in this space

Figure 3-355 Detail view of the buffer unit, view 3

Table 3-237 Detail view of the buffer unit, view 3

No Part name Part number Description

SL901 Buffer solenoid JC33-00038A Hold the paper to prevent them from falling out to the
booklet maker during buffering

304 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Buffer unit operation
Learn about the buffer unit operation.

1. When the buffer motor rotates backward to move the cam, the buffer roller makes a gap so that a
paper can stay inside the buffer unit.

a. When the exit motor rotates backward to drive the main exit roller (R907), paper moves to the
buffer unit through the buffer diverter (callout 1).

Figure 3-356 Buffer unit operation, view 1

b. The main exit cam motor moves the main exit cam so that the main exit roller (R907) is
separated with the idle roller to have a gap, and then paper can stay in this place for a while.

Figure 3-357 Buffer unit operation, view 2

c. When the next sheet comes to the main exit unit, the main exit motor turns the man exit cam so
that the main exit roller is attached to the idle roller.

Buffer unit operation 305

 Figure 3-358 Buffer unit operation, view 3

d. The exit motor rotates forward and operates the main exit roller. It makes two paper moves to
the ejector together.

Figure 3-359 Buffer unit operation, view 4

2. In case of booklet making job, the buffer unit moves paper to the booklet maker.

a. The buffer motor rotates, the buffer roller (R906) is attached to the idle roller.

b. When paper arrives at the main exit unit, the exit motor rotates backward and moves the main
exit roller (R907) so that paper moves to the buffer unit through the buffer diverter.

Figure 3-360 Buffer unit operation, view 5

c. The buffer motor rotates the buffer roller to move paper to the booklet maker.

306 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-361 Buffer unit operation, view 6

Booklet maker
You will learn more about the booklet maker.

Booklet entrance unit

You will learn more about the booklet entrance unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet entrance unit overview

Learn about the booklet entrance unit overview.

The booklet entrance unit receives paper into the booklet maker. The entrance sensor detects whether a
paper enters the entrance unit. The entrance motor drives the booklet entrance roller to move the paper.

Figure 3-362 Overview of the booklet entrance unit

Table 3-238 Overview of the booklet entrance unit

No Part name Part number Description

S936 Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 Detects whether paper has come into the booklet
entrance unit

Booklet maker 307

 Table 3-238 Overview of the booklet entrance unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M915 Booklet entrance motor JC93-01152A Drives the booklet entrance roller

R910 Booklet entrance roller JC66-04717A Moves paper into the booklet maker

Figure 3-363 Detail view of the booklet entrance unit

Table 3-239 Detail view of the booklet entrance unit

No Part name Part number Description

S936 Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 Detects whether paper has come into the booklet
entrance unit

M915 Booklet entrance motor JC93-01152A Drives the booklet entrance roller

R910 Booklet entrance roller JC66-04717A Moves paper into the booklet maker

Figure 3-364 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 2

Table 3-240 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

M12 Entrance motor 3SJ19-80501 Operates the entrance roller and middle roller when
driving forward

308 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-365 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 3

Table 3-241 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 3

No Part name Part number Description

S12 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A Detects whether paper enters at the entrance unit

Booklet paddle unit

You will learn more about the booklet paddle unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet paddle unit overview

Learn about the booklet paddle unit overview.

The booklet paddle unit pushes paper to the booklet end fence by rotating the rubber paddles. The
booklet paddle motor rotates two booklet paddles, and the booklet paddle home sensor connected to
the lower booklet paddle checks the home position of the booklet paddle.

Figure 3-366 Overview of the booklet paddle unit

Booklet paddle unit 309

 Table 3-242 Overview of the booklet paddle unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A Moves paper to the booklet end fence unit

1 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A, Moves paper to the booklet end fence unit
JC61-07225A,
JC66-04719A

S941 Booklet paddle home 0604-001393 Check the home position of the booklet paddle
sensor

M919 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A Drives two booklet paddles

Figure 3-367 Detail view of the booklet paddle unit

Table 3-243 Detail view of the booklet paddle unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A Moves paper to the booklet end fence unit

1 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A, Moves paper to the booklet end fence unit
JC61-07225A,
JC66-04719A

S941 Booklet paddle home 0604-001393 Check the home position of the booklet paddle
sensor

M919 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A Drives two booklet paddles

Booklet end fence unit

You will learn more about the booklet end fence unit of the booklet maker.

310 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Booklet end fence unit overview
Learn about the booklet end fence unit overview.

The booklet end fence unit supports paper that enters from the booklet paddle unit, then moves paper
to the designated position for folding and stapling. The booklet end fence motor moves the booklet end
fence up and down. The booklet end fence home sensor checks the home position of the booklet end
fence. The booklet end fence solenoid drives the clamp to hold paper that comes into the booklet end
fence.

Figure 3-368 Overview of the booklet end fence unit

Table 3-244 Overview of the booklet end fence unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet end fence JC90-01432A Supports paper, then moves it to the designated location
to fold or staple

S942 Booklet end fence home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet end
sensor

M920 Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A Moves the booklet end fence up and down

SL902 Booklet end fence solenoid JC33-00038A Drives the clamp to hold paper that comes into the
booklet end fence

Figure 3-369 Detail view of the booklet end fence unit

Booklet end fence unit overview 311

 Table 3-245 Detail view of the booklet end fence unit

No Part name Part number Description

S942 Booklet end fence home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet end
sensor

M920 Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A Moves the booklet end fence up and down

Booklet end fence unit operation

Learn about the booklet end fence unit operation.

1. The booklet end fence is located at the home position (callout1). When the booklet maker starts its
job, the end fence goes to the direction 2.

Figure 3-370 Booklet end fence unit operation, view 1

2. The booklet end fence unit supports paper comes from the booklet paddle unit and holds paper so
as not to be scattered (callout3). Then it moves to the certain location to fold or staple it (callout 4).

Figure 3-371 Booklet end fence unit operation, view 2

Booklet presser unit

You will learn more about the booklet presser unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet presser unit overview

Learn about the booklet presser unit overview.

312 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

The booklet presser unit sort print pages that enter to the booklet maker in order. The Booklet presser
motor moves the booklet presser, and the booklet presser home sensor checks whether the booklet
presser is at the home position.

Figure 3-372 Overview of the booklet presser unit

Table 3-246 Overview of the booklet presser unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet presser JC61-07237A Accumulates paper from the entrance unit not to be
shuffled

S937 Booklet presser home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet presser
sensor

M916 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A Drives the booklet presser

Figure 3-373 Detail view of the booklet presser unit

Booklet presser unit overview 313

 Table 3-247 Detail view of the booklet presser unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet presser JC61-07237A Accumulates paper from the entrance unit not to be
shuffled

S937 Booklet presser home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet presser
sensor

M916 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A Drives the booklet presser

Booklet presser unit operation

Learn about the booklet presser unit operation.

1. Paper comes into the booklet presser unit (callout 1). When the training edge of the paper exits the
booklet entrance unit, the presser hits the paper to be bent to the direction of the arrow (callout 2).

Figure 3-374 Booklet presser unit operation, view 1

2. When a next sheet arrives, the presser turns back to the original position (callout 3) so that the
paper falls on the left side of the previous sheet pushed by the booklet presser (callout 4).

Figure 3-375 Booklet presser unit operation, view 2

Booklet tamper unit

You will learn more about the booklet tamper unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet tamper unit overview

Learn about the booklet tamper unit overview.

314 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

The booklet tamper unit aligns the left and right side of documents for stapling or folding.

The booklet tamper motor adjusts the booklet tampers’ width according to paper size. The booklet
tamper home sensor checks the home position of the booklet tamper.

Figure 3-376 Overview of the booklet tamper unit

Table 3-248 Overview of the booklet tamper unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet tamper JC90-01431A Aligns documents for stapling or folding

S938 Booklet tamper home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet
sensor

M923 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A Drives the booklet tamper

S946 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A –

Figure 3-377 Detail view of the booklet tamper unit, view 1

Table 3-249 Detail view of the booklet tamper unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

M923 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A Drives the booklet tamper

S946 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A –

Booklet tamper unit overview 315

 Figure 3-378 Detail view of the booklet tamper unit, view 2

Table 3-250 Detail view of the booklet tamper unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S938 Booklet tamper home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet
sensor

M923 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A Drives the booklet tamper

Booklet tamper unit operation

Learn about the booklet tamper unit operation.

When a certain amount of paper is collected, the booklet tamper unit hits the left and right sides of the
paper so that it is aligned correctly for the next process such as stapling or folding.

Figure 3-379 Booklet tamper unit operation

Booklet stapler unit

You will learn more about the booklet stapler unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet stapler unit overview

Learn about the booklet stapler unit overview.

Booklet stapler unit is a device installed inside the booklet maker that staples a bundle of aligned
documents as a booklet.

There is only one option to make a bundle. If the user selects the option, this unit staples at the two
location in the middle of stacks.

316 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-380 Overview of the booklet stapler unit

Table 3-251 Overview of the booklet stapler unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet stapler 6GW41-40001

2 Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-09881A

Figure 3-381 Detail view of the booklet stapler unit

Table 3-252 Detail view of the booklet stapler unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet stapler 6GW41-40001

2 Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-09881A

Staple and staple cartridge

Learn about the staple and staple cartridge.

Staple and staple cartridge 317

 1. Staple cartridge: JC81-09881B. Initial staples included.

Figure 3-382 Staple cartridge for the booklet stapler unit

NOTE: Staple handle color may vary (blue or green color).

2. Staple: Y1G13-67901. 3 EA in 1 box.

Figure 3-383 Staple for the booklet stapler unit

Booklet stapler unit operation

Learn about the booklet stapler unit operation.

1. When a stack of sheets is collected in booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence (callout 2)
changes its location to be stapled.

2. The booklet stapler (callout 1) staples at the middle of stacks.

318 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-384 Booklet stapler unit operation

Booklet fold unit

You will learn more about the booklet fold unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet fold unit overview

Learn about the booklet fold unit overview.

The booklet fold unit is a device installed inside the booklet maker that folds a bundle of aligned
documents as a. This unit consists of two types of blades: blade and c-fold blade. It creates two types of
output.

Figure 3-385 Fold options

The booklet blade motor drives the booklet blades and lightly folds the stack of paper. The folded paper
passes through the booklet fold rollers to be fully folded. The booklet blade home sensor checks the
home position of the booklet blade, and the booklet fold motor drives the rollers that enable folding

In case of c-fold, the booklet c-fold blade motor drives the booklet c-fold blade and lightly folds the stack
of paper once more. The folded paper passes through the booklet c-fold roller to be fully folded. The
booklet c-fold blade home sensor checks the home position of the c-fold blade.

Booklet fold unit 319

 Figure 3-386 Overview of the booklet fold unit, view 1

Table 3-253 Overview of the booklet fold unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet blade JC93-01163A Pushes a stack of paper to fold

S945 Booklet blade home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet blade
sensor

M922 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A Drives the booklet blade

M921 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A Drives the booklet roller and c-fold blade

R911 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Presses a stack of paper to be fully folded

Figure 3-387 Overview of the booklet fold unit, view 2

320 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-254 Overview of the booklet fold unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

2 Booklet c-fold blade JC61-07366A Pushes a stack of paper to fold for the c-fold task

S939 Booklet c-fold blade home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet c-fold blade
sensor

M917 Booklet c-fold blade motor JC93-01154A Drives the booklet c-fold blade

R912 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A In case of c-fold, presses a stack of paper to fold
completely

Figure 3-388 Detail view of the booklet fold unit, view 1

Table 3-255 Detail view of the booklet fold unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

M921 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A Drives the booklet roller and c-fold blade

R911 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Presses a stack of paper to be fully folded

Figure 3-389 Detail view of the booklet fold unit, view 2

Booklet fold unit overview 321

 Table 3-256 Detail view of the booklet fold unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet blade JC93-01163A Pushes a stack of paper to fold

S945 Booklet blade home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet blade
sensor

M922 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A Drives the booklet blade

Figure 3-390 Detail view of the booklet fold unit, view 3

Table 3-257 Detail view of the booklet fold unit, view 3

No Part name Part number Description

2 Booklet c-fold blade JC61-07366A Pushes a stack of paper to fold for the c-fold task

M917 Booklet c-fold blade motor JC93-01154A Drives the booklet c-fold blade

Booklet fold unit operation

Learn about the booklet fold unit operation.

1. In case of v-fold.

322 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-391 Booklet fold unit operation, v-fold

a. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence (callout 1)
moves to a designated location.

b. The booklet blade motor (M922) drives the booklet blade (callout 2) to push the center of paper.

c. Paper enters between the booklet fold rollers (R911) by the booklet blade and it is completely
folded between the rollers.

d. d. The folded paper stack is discharged to the booklet output tray via the booklet exit roller
(R913).

2. In case of c-fold.

Booklet fold unit operation 323

 Figure 3-392 Booklet fold unit operation, c-fold

a. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence (callout 1) is
moved to a designated location.

b. The booklet blade motor (M22) drives the booklet blade (callout 2) to push one-third of paper.

c. The paper enters between the booklet fold rollers (R11) by the booklet blade and it is completely
folded between the rollers.

d. The folded sheets move to s location where they will be c-folded by a booklet diverter.

e. The booklet c-fold blade motor(M17) drives the booklet c-fold blade (callout 3), pokes two-thirds
of paper.

f. Paper enters between the booklet c-fold roller (R12) and the booklet fold roller by the booklet
c-fold blade and it is completely folded between the rollers.

Booklet diverter unit

You will learn more about the booklet diverter unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet diverter unit overview

Learn about the booklet diverter unit overview.

The booklet diverter unit determines a paper path to allow the stack of folded paper to exit to the booklet
output tray during the v-fold. In case of c-fold, it makes another paper path so the folded sheets can
move to a location that can be c-folded. The booklet diverter motor drives the booklet diverter, and the
booklet diverter home sensor (S940) checks whether the booklet diverter is at the home position.

324 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-393 Overview of the booklet diverter unit, view 1

Table 3-258 Overview of the booklet diverter unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A Determines the paper path for either the booklet exit unit
or the location for c-fold

S940 Booklet diverter home 0604-001415 Checks the home position of the booklet diverter
sensor

M918 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A Drives the booklet diverter

Figure 3-394 Overview of the booklet diverter unit, view 2

Table 3-259 Overview of the booklet diverter unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A Determines the paper path for either the booklet exit unit
or the location for c-fold

S940 Booklet diverter home 0604-001415 Checks the home position of the booklet diverter
sensor

M918 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A Drives the booklet diverter

Booklet diverter unit overview 325

 Booklet diverter unit operation
Learn about the booklet diverter unit operation.

1. In case of v-fold, the booklet diverter(callout1) determines the paper path so that the folded sheets
exit to the booklet exit unit and into the booklet output tray.

Figure 3-395 Booklet diverter unit operation

2. On the other hand, in c-fold, it makes another paper path to fold it by c-fold blade (callout 2).

Booklet exit unit

You will learn more about the booklet exit unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet exit unit overview

Learn about the booklet exit unit overview.

The booklet exit unit ejects a stack of v-fold paper to the booklet output tray unit. The booklet exit sensor
detects paper entry into the booklet exit unit, and the booklet fold motor drives the booklet exit roller to
discharge paper.

326 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-396 Overview of the booklet exit unit

Table 3-260 Overview of the booklet exit unit

No Part name Part number Description

S944 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A Check whether paper has come into the booklet unit

M921 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A Drives the booklet exit roller

R913 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A Moves paper to the booklet output tray unit

Figure 3-397 Detail view of the booklet exit unit

Table 3-261 Detail view of the booklet exit unit

No Part name Part number Description

S944 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A Check whether paper has come into the booklet unit

R913 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A Moves paper to the booklet output tray unit

Booklet exit unit overview 327

 Booklet output tray unit
You will learn more about the booklet output tray unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet output tray unit overview

Learn about the booklet output tray unit overview.

The booklet output tray unit is the place where the ejected paper is stacked. The booklet output tray
sensor detects whether paper is on the booklet output tray or not.

Figure 3-398 Overview of the booklet output tray unit

Table 3-262 Overview of the booklet output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet output tray 5QK09-40017, Stores paper stacks from the booklet exit unit
5QK09-40015

S943 Booklet output tray sensor JC82-01039A Detects whether paper is on the booklet output tray

328 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-399 Detail view of the booklet output tray unit

Table 3-263 Detail view of the booklet output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet output tray 5QK09-40017, Stores paper stacks from the booklet exit unit
5QK09-40015

S943 Booklet output tray sensor JC82-01039A Detects whether paper is on the booklet output tray

Booklet output tray unit operation: loading a large number of booklets

Learn about the booklet output tray unit operation.

Y1G07A Booklet finisher is support available to print a large number of booklets.

1. Remove the booklet output tray (callout 1).

Booklet output tray unit operation: loading a large number of booklets 329
 Figure 3-400 Booklet output tray unit operation, view 1

2. Install the booklet sub tray at the booklet output (callout 2)

Figure 3-401 Booklet output tray unit operation, view 2

3. Install a box to store printouts (callout 3).

330 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-402 Booklet output tray unit operation, view 3

PCA
You will learn more about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCA.

Finisher main PCA

Learn about the finisher main PCA.

The stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher main PCA controls operation of the finishers by
communicating with the printer main PCA.

● Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher main PCA part number: 6GW55-60001

PCA 331
 Figure 3-403 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker finisher main PCA connectors

Table 3-264 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker finisher main PCA connectors

CN number Connection Type Harness part number Error code when

disconnected

SS-CN1 Mainboard 16pin JC39-02308A

SS-CN2 Door 2pin JC39-02309A

SS-CN3 Cover 4pin JC39-02631A

Buffer sensor

Entrance sensor

Diverter home sensor

SS-CN4 Entrance motor 22pin JC39-02313A

Tray diverter home sensor

Top exit sensor

Main exit sensor

Rear tamper motor

Entrance motor

332 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-264 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker finisher main PCA connectors (continued)

CN number Connection Type Harness part number Error code when

disconnected

SS-SN5 Paddle motor 32pin JC39-02313A

End fence motor

Front tamper home sensor

Paddle home sensor

Top output tray paper full

sensor

Manual staple op board

Rear tamper home sensor

Bridge feed motor

Bridge entrance sensor

SS-CN6 Bridge door sensor 18pin 6GW51-50001

Bridge exit sensor

SS-CN7 Punch option 14pin JC39-02314A

Exit motor

Main output tray motor

SS-CN8 Main output tray motor 12pin JC39-02312A

sensor

Top output tray paper full

sensor

SS-CN9 Main output tray top of 2pin JC39-02316A

stack sensor

Stapler head motor

Stapler position motor

SS-CN10 Stapler mid-rear sensor 22pin JC39-02315A

Stapler front-rear sensor

Stapler rear sensor

Ejector 2 motor

Ejector 1 motor

Ejector 2 motor sensor

Ejector 1 motor sensor

Finisher main PCA 333

 Table 3-264 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker finisher main PCA connectors (continued)

CN number Connection Type Harness part number Error code when

disconnected

SS-CN11 Ejector 2 home sensor 26pin JC39-02317A

Ejector sensor

Ejector 1 end sensor

Ejector 1 home sensor

Front tamper motor

Manual staple sensor

SS-CN12 End fence home sensor 13pin JC39-02318A

Stapler front sensor

Paper holding motor

SS-CN13 Booklet output tray full 11pin JC39-02319A

sensor

Main output tray lower limit

sensor

Main output tray top of

stack sensor (LED)

Rear paper holding sensor

SS-CN14 Paper holding home 14pin JC39-02319A

sensor

Front paper holding sensor

Main output tray top of

stack sensor (receiver)

Buffer home sensor

SS-CN17 Buffer motor 10pin JC39-02575A

Buffer solenoid

Booklet maker PCA

Learn about the booklet maker PCA.

The booklet maker PCA controls operation of the booklet maker by communicating with the booklet
maker finisher main PCA.

● Booklet maker PCA part number: 6GW51-60001

334 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-404 Booklet maker PCA connectors

Table 3-265 Booklet maker PCA connectors

CN number Connection Type Harness part number Error code when

disconnected

BM-CN1 Finisher main PCA 16pin JC39-02296A

BM-CN3 Log 4pin

BM-CN4 Stapler 13pin JC39-02301A

BM-CN5 Feed 11pin JC39-02298A

BM-SN6 Tamp 13pin JC39-02298A

BM-CN7 Paddle 14pin JC39-02304A

BM-CN8 Guide 10pin JC39-02304A

BM-CN9 Stopper 9pin JC39-02305A

BM-CN10 BLDC 20pin JC39-02305A

Manual staple PCA

Learn about the manual staple PCA.

The manual staple PCA communicates with the finisher main PCA

Figure 3-405 Manual staple PCA connectors

Manual staple PCA 335

 Table 3-266 Manual staple PCA connectors

CN number Connection Type Harness part number Error code when

disconnected

MS-CN1 Finisher main PCA 4pin JC39-02345A

Inner finisher
You will learn more about the inner finisher.

Detailed specifications
Learn about the detailed specifications of the inner finisher.

Table 3-267 General specifications

Item Description

Capacity 550 Sheets (Main 500, Top 50) @ 80gsm

Sensing Paper Jam/Tray Sensing/Stapler/Cover Open

Media Sizes ● Main: 98mm - 320mm x 139.7mm - 457.2mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.5in - 18in)

● Top: 98mm - 320mm x 148.0mm - 430.0mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.83in - 16.93in)

Media types Plain/Thick/Heavy weight/Thin/Cotton/Colored/Recycled/Bond/Archive/Pre-Punched/Cardstock/

Glossy/Envelope

Media Weight ● Main: 52-256 gsm (13.9-68.3 lb.)

● Top: 52-325 gsm (13.9-86.7 lb.)

Number of Bin 2 (Main/Top)

Dimension (W X D X H) 458 x 491 x 173 mm (18.0 X 19.3 X 6.8 inch)

Weight Net weight: 15 kg (33 lb.)

Packing weight: 18.39 kg (40.53 lb.)

Tray 1 Finishing 50 Sheets @ 80gsm

Capacity

Tray 1 Finishing Mode Stapling (Left, Right, Dual)/Punch (2/3, 2/4, Swedish)

Tray 2 Finishing 500 Sheets @ 80 gsm

Capacity

Table 3-268 Paper Size Specification

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF O O O X F/R1 O

Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF O O O X F/R1 O

Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

336 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-268 Paper Size Specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

B5(JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

B5(ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X O X X X

Monarch Env 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X O X X X

PostCard 4X6 101.6 x 152.4 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X O X X X

A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X O X X X

No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X O X X X

DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X O X X X

C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X O X X X

B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X O X X X

Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X O X X X

A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X X X

C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X 0 X X X

B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

342.9

C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X O X X X

Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF O X X X X X

457.2

Detailed specifications 337

 Table 3-268 Paper Size Specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF O X X X X X

Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ — O X O X X X

L 140-1200 L 5.5-47.2 (W 98-297 ~

L 140-1200)
1 “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.

Table 3-269 Punch specifications

Name Paper size Orientation Punch

mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish

2H 3H 2H 4H 4H

A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF 0 X O X O

Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF 0 X O X O

Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O O O

A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O O O

B5 (JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O X O

B5 (ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O X O

Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O O O

No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X X X X

Monarch 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X X X X

Env

PostCard 101.6 x 152.4 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X X X X

4X6

A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X X X X

No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X X X X

DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X X X X

C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X X X X

B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X X X X

Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X X X X

A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X O

C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X X X X

B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O

B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O

Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O X O X O

338 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-269 Punch specifications (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Punch

mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish

2H 3H 2H 4H 4H

16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O X O X O

A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O X O X O

Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O X O X O

Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O X O X O

Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O X O X O

Oficio 215.9 x 342.9 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O X O X O

C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X X X X

Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O X O

B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O X O

8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O O

Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O O O

A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O O O

Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 457.2 12 x 18 SEF X X X X X

SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF X X X X X

Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ — X X X X X

L 140-1200 L 5.5-47

Table 3-270 Media performance

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch

Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O

Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O

Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 g/m²) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 g/m2) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 g/m2) X O X X

Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 g/m2) X O X X

Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O

Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Detailed specifications 339

 Table 3-270 Media performance (continued)

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch

Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O

Bond O O O O

Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O

LetterHead O O O O

Pre-Punched O O O X

Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O

Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X

Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 g/m²) X O X X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 g/m2) X O X X

Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O

Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X

Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O X X X

Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X

Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) O X X X

Tab O X X O

Cover
Learn about the front view and rear view of the inner finisher.

Figure 3-406 Front view of the inner finisher

340 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-271 Front view of the inner finisher

Callout Part name Part number

C951 Front cover 5QK09-60123

C952 Top cover 5QK09-60124

C953 Middle cover 5QK09-60125

C954 Punch cover 8GS05-60114

C955 Output tray 5QK09-60118

C956 PCA tray 5QK09-40004

1 Lock release handle JC66-04233A

Not shown Exit bin full JC90-01546A

Figure 3-407 Rear view of the inner finisher

Table 3-272 Rear view of the inner finisher

Callout Part name Part number

C957 Left cover 8GS05-60113

C958 Rear cover 5QK09-40037

C959 Low cover 5QK09-40018

2 Main interface harness JC39-02169A

Not shown Exit bin full JC90-01546A

NOTE: An exit bin full is included in the product box. This assembly is used for only E877 and E826
series which should be installed at the second exit unit output area.

Cover 341
 Figure 3-408 Exit bin full

Inner finisher overview

You will learn more about the inner finisher overview.

Inner finisher workflow

Learn about the inner finisher workflow.

Figure 3-409 Inner finisher workflow

Table 3-273 Inner finisher workflow

Item Unit Description

1 Punch unit Make holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper

2 Entrance unit Allow a paper to move into the finisher

3 Diverter unit Hold the paper so that the newly printed paper can stay out for
seconds while the stapled bundle of paper moves to the output
tray

4 Exit unit Move the paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit

5 Paper support unit Prevent the paper from being fell down or bent when the long
length paper such as A3 is ejected from the exit unit

6 Main paddle unit Move the paper to the sub paddle

7 Sub paddle unit Move the paper to the end fence

8 End fence unit Set the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top
and bottom of the paper

342 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-273 Inner finisher workflow (continued)

Item Unit Description

9 Tamper unit Align the paper on the right and left side of the paper

10 Stapler unit Perform stapling to a bundle of aligned documents

11 Ejector 1 unit Transfer the stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the
ejector 2 unit

12 Ejector 2 unit Grip a stack of paper up and ejects it onto the output tray

13 Output tray unit Stack the job ended paper

14 Paper holding unit Control the output tray movement

Inner finisher sensor

Learn about the inner finisher sensor.

Figure 3-410 Inner finisher sensor

Table 3-274 Inner finisher sensor

No Name Part number Type Description

S951 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 Photo interrupter Check a paper comes into the entrance unit
(reflect)

Inner finisher sensor 343

 Table 3-274 Inner finisher sensor (continued)

No Name Part number Type Description

S952 Stapler position 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Make the stapler be positioned in the exact
sensor (sensing) stapling position

S953 Front cover JC39-01610A Switch Check whether the front cover is closed or
switch opened

S954 Main paddle 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the main paddle locates at the home
home sensor (sensing) position

S955 Front tamper 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the front tamper locates at the home
home sensor (sensing) position

S956 Output tray 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the output tray motor is operational
motor sensor (sensing)

S957 Output tray JC90-01320A Switch Check the lower limit (=Output tray is full) of the
lower limit switch output tray

S958 Output tray top 0603-001309 Photo TR Check the upper limit of output tray
of stack sensor
(receiver)

S959 Paper holding 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the location of the paper holding
sensor (sensing) actuator

S960 Ejector 2 home 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the ejector 2 locates at the home
sensor (sensing) position

S961 Ejector 2 motor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the ejector 2 motor is operational
sensor (sensing)

S962 Paper support 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the paper support locates at the home
home sensor (sensing) position

S963 Output tray top 0601-003440 LED IR Check the upper limit of output tray
of stack sensor
(transmitter)

S964 Rear tamper 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the rear tamper locates at the home
home sensor (sensing) position

S965 Top cover switch JC39-01610A Switch Check whether the top cover is closed or
opened

S966 Ejector 1 home 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the ejector 1 locates at the home
sensor (sensing) position

S967 End fence 0604-001381 Photo interrupter Check paper comes into the end fence unit
sensor (reflect)

S968 Punch waste box 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Detect the punch waste box is installed
sensor (sensing)

S969 Punch waste full 0604-001381 Photo interrupter Check the punch waste box is full
sensor (reflect)

S970 Finisher docking 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the finisher is installed
sensor (sensing)

S971 Exit sensor 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Check paper comes into the exit unit
(reflect)

344 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Inner finisher motor and solenoid
Learn about the inner finisher motor and solenoid.

Figure 3-411 Inner finisher motor and solenoid

Table 3-275 Inner finisher motor and solenoid

No Name Part number Type Description

M951 Stapler position JC93-00999A Stepping motor Drive the stapler unit
motor

M952 Exit motor JC31-00169B Stepping motor Drive the exit roller and the sub paddle unit

M953 Main paddle JC93-01001A Stepping motor Drive the main paddle unit
motor

M954 Output tray JC90-01334B DC motor Drive the output tray unit
motor

M955 Rear tamper JC93-01001A Stepping motor Drive the rear tamper unit
motor assembly

M956 Ejector 2 motor JC93-01168A DC motor Drive the ejector 2 unit

M957 Ejector 1 motor JC93-00998A Stepping motor Drive the ejector 1 unit

M958 Paper support JC93-00802B Stepping motor Drive paper support unit
motor

M959 Front tamper JC93-01001A Stepping motor Drive the front tamper unit
motor

M960 Entrance motor JC31-00169B Stepping motor Drive the entrance roller

SL951 Paper holding JC33-00037A Solenoid Move the paper holding actuator
solenoid

Inner finisher motor and solenoid 345

 Inner finisher roller
Learn about the inner finisher roller.

Figure 3-412 Inner finisher roller

Table 3-276 Inner finisher roller

No Name Part number Description

R951 Entrance roller JC66-04243A Move the paper to the finisher inside

R952 Middle roller JC66-04243A Move the paper to the exit unit

R953 Exit roller JC66-04244A Move the paper to the out bin tray

Inner finisher PCA

Learn about the inner finisher PCA.

346 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-413 Inner finisher PCA

Table 3-277 Inner finisher PCA

No Name Part number Description

P951 Finisher main PCA 6GW49-60001 –

P952 Rear joint PCA JC92-02780A Joint PCA between main PCA and several parts such as
punch, stapler, entrance, and front door switch

Punch unit (optional)

You will learn more about the punch unit of the inner finisher.

Punch unit overview

Learn about the punch unit overview.

The punch unit is a device that punches holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper. The punch unit is
located immediately before the entrance unit and punches holes in a paper.

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Punch: 155P7-67001

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4 Punch: 155P8-67001

Punch unit (optional) 347

 ● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Punch: 155P9-67001

NOTE: Puncher types are vary depending on the country or region.

In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
clockwise, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make holes.
When making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the inner gear rotates to
the left to drill two holes. The travel distance and position of the motor are detected and controlled by the
hole punch home sensor and the hole punch motor sensor.

Figure 3-414 Punch unit overview, view 1

For more information, go to the HP WISE support portal and search for HP LaserJet Managed MFP - How
to use the hole punch (c05450959).
Figure 3-415 Punch unit overview, view 2

Table 3-278 Punch unit overview, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

U952-1 2/3 hole punch unit 155P7-67001 –

U952-2 2/4 hole punch unit 155P8-67001 –

348 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-278 Punch unit overview, view 2 (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

U952-3 Swedish punch 155P9-67001 –

M961 Punch motor NA Drive the entrance roller connected by a belt

S972 Punch motor sensor NA Detect whether the punch motor moves correctly

S973 Punch home sensor NA Detect home position of the punch head

P953-1 2/3 hole punch PCA JC92-02773A –

P953-2 2/4 hole punch PCA JC92-02773B –

P953-3 Swedish hole punch PCA 155P9-67001 –

U953 Punch cover assembly 8GS05-60114 Dummy cover instead of the punch unit

S Punch waste full sensor 0604-001381 Detect whether the punch waste box is full

Figure 3-416 Punch unit overview, view 3

Table 3-279 Punch unit overview, view 3

No Part name Part number Description

U952-1 2/3 hole punch unit 155P7-67001 –

U952-2 2/4 hole punch unit 155P8-67001 –

U952-3 Swedish punch 155P9-67001 –

M961 Punch motor NA Drive the entrance roller connected by a belt

S972 Punch motor sensor NA Detect whether the punch motor moves correctly

S973 Punch home sensor NA Detect home position of the punch head

P953-1 2/3 hole punch PCA JC92-02773A –

P953-2 2/4 hole punch PCA JC92-02773B –

P953-3 Swedish hole punch PCA 155P9-67001 –

U953 Punch cover assembly 8GS05-60114 Dummy cover instead of the punch unit

S Punch waste full sensor 0604-001381 Detect whether the punch waste box is full

Punch unit overview 349

 Punch unit operation
Learn about the punch unit operation.

The punch unit is driven by a punch motor and two associated sensors which are the punch motor
sensor and the punch home sensor. When the motor rotates clockwise (callout 1), the 3 punch hole
heads move and punch 3 holes in the paper. Conversely, when the motor runs counterclockwise (callout
2), the two punch hole reds move and punch two holes in the paper.

Figure 3-417 Punch unit operation, view 1

Entrance unit
You will learn more about the entrance unit of the inner finisher.

Entrance unit overview

Learn about the entrance unit overview.

The entrance unit is located right after the punch unit. This unit is driven by entrance motor which is
installed on the rear of the finisher. This motor is connected to the entrance roller by a belt to transfer
driving force to move paper from the base printer exit unit to the finisher inside. If an error such as paper
jam occurs in the entrance unit, the entrance sensor detects the error and generates an event code
(13.60.xx).

350 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-418 Entrance unit overview, view 1

Table 3-280 Entrance unit overview, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S951 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 Detect a paper whether it comes from the base printer
exit unit correctly

M960 Entrance motor 5QK09-60128 Drive the entrance roller to make the paper moved to the
finisher inside

R951 Entrance roller JC66-04243A Move the paper to the finisher exit unit

Figure 3-419 Entrance unit overview, view 2

Table 3-281 Entrance unit overview, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S951 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 Detect a paper whether it comes from the base printer
exit unit correctly

Entrance unit overview 351

 Table 3-281 Entrance unit overview, view 1 (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M960 Entrance motor 5QK09-60128 Drive the entrance roller to make the paper moved to the
finisher inside

R951 Entrance roller JC66-04243A Move the paper to the finisher exit unit

Diverter unit
You will learn more about the diverter unit of the inner finisher.

Diverter unit overview

Learn about the diverter unit overview.

Figure 3-420 Diverter unit overview, view 1

Table 3-282 Diverter unit overview, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

M960 Entrance motor 5QK09-60128 Drive the feed roller connected by a belt

R952 Middle roller JC66-04243A Drive the paper forward installed in front of the diverter

1 Diverter JC61-06392A Change paper path when a paper goes backward

352 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-421 Diverter unit overview, view 2

Table 3-283 Diverter unit overview, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

M960 Entrance motor 5QK09-60128 Drive the feed roller connected by a belt

R952 Middle roller JC66-04243A Drive the paper forward installed in front of the diverter

Diverter unit operation

Learn about the diverter unit operation.

1. The paper goes forward to the output tray, then the exit roller stops.

Figure 3-422 Diverter unit operation, view 1

2. The paper turns towards the diverter unit, then comes down. It waits for a while until the stapling
operation is finished.

Diverter unit operation 353

 Figure 3-423 Diverter unit overview, view 2

3. The paper goes out to the output bin with the stapled paper at the same time.

Exit unit
You will learn more about the exit unit of the inner finisher.

Exit unit overview

Learn about the exit unit overview.

The exit unit is the part that moves the paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit. The exit unit
is powered by an exit motor installed on the front of the finisher. The motor and the exit roller are
connected by a single belt. The exit motor rotates counterclockwise so that the paper moves forwards.
The exit sensor is installed right in front of exit roller, it detects whether the paper comes from the
entrance unit correctly.

Figure 3-424 Exit unit overview, view 1

354 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-284 Exit unit overview, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S971 Exit sensor 0604-001415 Check whether the passes through the exit unit

M952 Exit motor JC90-01331A Drive the exit roller connected by a belt

R953 Exit roller JC66-04244A Move the paper to the ejector unit

1-1 Rear compile guide JC61-07450A Guide to help paper move through the paper path

1-2 Front compile guide JC61-07449A Guide to help paper move through the paper path

Figure 3-425 Exit unit overview, view 2

Table 3-285 Exit unit overview, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S971 Exit sensor 0604-001415 Check whether the passes through the exit unit

1-1 Rear compile guide JC61-07450A Guide to help paper move through the paper path

1-2 Front compile guide JC61-07449A Guide to help paper move through the paper path

Figure 3-426 Exit unit overview, view 3

Exit unit overview 355

 Table 3-286 Exit unit overview, view 3

No Part name Part number Description

M952 Exit motor JC90-01331A Drive the exit roller connected by a belt

R953 Exit roller JC66-04244A Move the paper to the ejector unit

Paper support unit

You will learn more about the paper support unit of the inner finisher.

Paper support unit overview

Learn about the paper support unit overview.

Figure 3-427 Paper support unit overview, view 1

Table 3-287 Paper support unit overview, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S962 Paper support home 0604-001393 Detect the paper support guides locate at the home
sensor

M958 Paper support motor JC93-00802B Detect the paper support guides locate at the home

1 Front paper support JC90-01310A Support the paper not to be bended downwards

2 Rear paper support JC90-01311A Support the paper not to be bended downwards

356 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-428 Paper support unit overview, view 2

Table 3-288 Paper support unit overview, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S962 Paper support home 0604-001393 Detect the paper support guides locate at the home
sensor

M958 Paper support motor JC93-00802B Detect the paper support guides locate at the home

1 Front paper support JC90-01310A Support the paper not to be bended downwards

2 Rear paper support JC90-01311A Support the paper not to be bended downwards

Paper support unit operation

Learn about the paper support unit operation.

1. When a paper goes out to the output tray direction, the paper might be bent to downwards (callout 1)
if the paper is longer than the paper guide.

Figure 3-429 Paper support unit operation, view 1

2. In order to properly eject the paper without disturbing the already stacked paper, two guides extend
in the direction of the arrow (callout 2). As a result, the long paper can be stacked stably without
being pushed toward the tray.

Paper support unit operation 357

 Figure 3-430 Paper support unit operation, view 2

Paddle unit
You will learn more about the paddle unit of the inner finisher.

Paddle unit overview

Learn about the paddle unit overview.

Figure 3-431 Overview of the paddle unit, view 1

Table 3-289 Overview of the paddle unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S954 Main paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the main paddle

M953 Main paddlemotor JC90-01331A Drive the main paddle unit connected by a belt

1 Main paddle JC90-01327A Move the paper to the sub paddle unit

358 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-432 Overview of the paddle unit, view 2

Table 3-290 Overview of the paddle unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

M952 Exit motor JC31-00169B Drive the sub paddle unit connected by a belt

2 Sub paddle JC90-01336A Get the paper move to the end fence and arrange them
to be stapled correctly

Figure 3-433 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 1

Table 3-291 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S954 Main paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the main paddle

M953 Main paddlemotor JC90-01331A Drive the main paddle unit connected by a belt

Paddle unit overview 359

 Table 3-291 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 1 (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M952 Exit motor JC31-00169B Drive the sub paddle unit connected by a belt

Figure 3-434 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 2

Table 3-292 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

1 Main paddle JC90-01327A Move the paper to the sub paddle unit

2 Sub paddle JC90-01336A Get the paper move to the end fence and arrange them
to be stapled correctly

Paddle unit operation

Learn about the paddle unit operation.

1. A paper drops down from the exit unit, then it moves inside the sub paddle unit by the main paddle
unit which is rotated by the main paddle motor.

Figure 3-435 Paddle unit operation, view 1

360 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 2. The sub paddle rotates so that the paper goes into the end fence unit. Repeat this process to collect
a certain amount of paper and store it inside the end fence unit.

Figure 3-436 Paddle unit operation, view 2

End fence unit

You will learn more about the end fence unit of the inner finisher.

End fence unit overview

Learn about the end fence unit overview.

Figure 3-437 Overview of the end fence unit

Table 3-293 Overview of the end fence unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 End fence JC61-06428A Align a paper toward top and bottom direction

End fence unit 361

 Table 3-293 Overview of the end fence unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

S967 End fence sensor 0604-001381 Check the paper is properly loaded into the end fence
unit for paper alignment.

Figure 3-438 Detail view of the end fence unit

Table 3-294 Overview of the end fence unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 End fence JC61-06428A Align a paper toward top and bottom direction

S967 End fence sensor 0604-001381 Check the paper is properly loaded into the end fence
unit for paper alignment.

End fence unit operation

Learn about the end fence unit operation.

1. A paper goes into the end fence unit through the main paddle unit and sub paddle unit. At the same
time the end fence unit is aligned the paper to the direction of line (callout 1).

Figure 3-439 End fence unit operation, view 1

2. The end fence sensor is checking whether the paper goes into the end fence sensor properly.

362 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-440 End fence unit operation, view 2

Tamper unit
You will learn more about the tamper unit of the inner finisher.

Tamper unit overview

Learn about the tamper unit overview.

The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper in order to staple it to the
correct position. When a certain amount of paper for stapling is collected after printing, the tamper unit
hits the left and right ends of the paper to align the paper correctly. Each tamper has a motor on the
back side that delivers driving force to move. The tamper unit sensors are mounted on the back side of
the unit, to check the position of the tamper unit.

Figure 3-441 Overview of the tamper unit

Tamper unit 363

 Table 3-295 Overview of the tamper unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00899A Align left and right side of paper

2 Rear tamper JC82-00900A Align left and right side of paper

M955 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A Drive the rear temper unit

S964 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the reference position of the tamper unit

M959 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A Drive the front tamper unit
assembly

S955 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the reference position of the tamper unit

Figure 3-442 Detail view of the tamper unit

Table 3-296 Overview of the tamper unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00899A Align left and right side of paper

2 Rear tamper JC82-00900A Align left and right side of paper

M955 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A Drive the rear temper unit

S964 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the reference position of the tamper unit

M959 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A Drive the front tamper unit
assembly

S955 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the reference position of the tamper unit

Tamper unit operation

Learn about the tamper unit operation.

1. The paper is arranged at the end of the end fence unit, then front and rear tamper arrange both left
and right side of the paper.

364 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-443 Tamper unit operation, view 1

2. In case of offset printing, move the tamping position to the left or right rather than the center of the
output tray. Due to this, the stacking position of the paper is different for each copy.

Figure 3-444 Tamper unit operation, view 2

Stapler unit
You will learn more about the stapler unit of the inner finisher.

Stapler unit overview

Learn about the stapler unit overview.

Stapler unit is a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents.
Documents are collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then
stapler assembly staples the bundle. There are six options to make a bundle.

Figure 3-445 Staplling location

Stapler unit 365

 The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor installed inside. The four stapler position sensors are
mounted so that the stapler can be positioned in the exact stapling position whether it is stapled on
the left, the right, or at the center of the document. Stapling is done by the motor inside the stapler
assembly.

Figure 3-446 Overview of the stapler unit, view 1

Table 3-297 Overview of the stapler unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Stapler assembly 6GW49-40001 Staple a bundle of paper

S952 Stapler position sensor 0604-001393 Detect and moves the staple assembly position to make
a bundle of paper at the exact location

M951 Stapler position motor JC93-00999A Get the staple assembly move toward top and down
direction of paper

Figure 3-447 Detail view of the stapler unit, view 1

366 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-298 Overview of the stapler unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Stapler assembly 6GW49-60003 Staple a bundle of paper

2 Staple cartridge 6GW49-40001 Staple cartridge

Figure 3-448 Detail view of the stapler unit, view 2

Table 3-299 Overview of the stapler unit

No Part name Part number Description

S952 Stapler position sensor 0604-001393 Detect and moves the staple assembly position to make
a bundle of paper at the exact location

M951 Stapler position motor JC93-00999A Get the staple assembly move toward top and down
direction of paper

Staple and staple cartridge

Learn about the stapler and staple cartridge.

1. Staple cartridge: JC81-07408B. Initial staples included

Figure 3-449 Staple cartridge for stapler unit

NOTE: Staple handle color may vary (blue or green color).

2. Staple: Y1G13-67901. 3 EA in 1 box.

Staple and staple cartridge 367

 Figure 3-450 Staple for stapler unit

Stapler unit operation

Learn about the stapler unit operation.

1. The stapler position motor delivers the stapler assembly (callout 1) to the horizontal direction.

Figure 3-451 Stapler unit operation, view 1

2. The stapler assembly checks front and rear home position and moves where the stapler position
sensors are located depending on stapling types.

368 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-452 Stapler unit operation, view 2

Ejector unit
You will learn more about the ejector unit of the inner finisher.

Ejector unit overview

Learn about the ejector unit overview.

The ejector unit moves a bundle of stapled paper out to the output tray direction. The ejector unit
consists of ejector 1 and ejector 2. The ejector 1 transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to
the ejector 2 unit. During this process, the ejector 1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector 1 unit.
And the ejector 1 home position sensor controls the movement of the ejector 1. When the paper arrives
at the ejector 2 unit, the ejector 2 grabs a stack of paper and ejects it onto the output tray. The ejector 2
motor is responsible for this process, and the ejector2 motor sensor helps it to be controlled correctly. In
addition, the ejector 2 home position sensor is mounted to check the location of the ejector 2.

Figure 3-453 Overview of the ejector unit

Ejector unit 369

 Table 3-300 Overview of the ejector unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Ejector SS456-61001

2 Ejector 1 NA Moves the stack of paper from the end fence to the
ejector 2

3 Ejector 2 NA Moves the paper from the ejector 1 to the output tray

S960 Ejector 2 home sensor 0604-001393 Detects the home position of the ejector 2

S966 Ejector 1 home sensor 0604-001393 Detects the home position of the ejector 1

M956 Ejector 2 motor JC93-01168A Moves the ejector 2 forward and backward

S961 Ejector 2 motor sensor 0604-001393 Detects the ejector 2 motor rotation

M957 Ejector1 motor JC93-00998A Grabs a stack of paper, then moves it to the output tray

Figure 3-454 Detail view of the ejector unit

Table 3-301 Detail view of the ejector unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Ejector SS456-61001

2 Ejector 1 NA Moves the stack of paper from the end fence to the
ejector 2

3 Ejector 2 NA Moves the paper from the ejector 1 to the output tray

S960 Ejector 2 home sensor 0604-001393 Detects the home position of the ejector 2

370 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-455 Parts information of the ejector unit

Table 3-302 Parts information of the ejector unit

No Part name Part number Description

S960 Ejector 2 home sensor 0604-001393 Detects the home position of the ejector 2

S966 Ejector 1 home sensor 0604-001393 Detects the home position of the ejector 1

4 Ejector motor assembly JC90-01309A Moves the ejector 1 and ejector 2

M956 Ejector 2 motor JC93-01168A Moves the ejector 2 forward and backward

S961 Ejector 2 motor sensor 0604-001393 Detects the ejector 2 motor rotation

M957 Ejector1 motor JC93-00998A Grabs a stack of paper, then moves it to the output tray

Ejector unit operation

Learn about the ejector unit operation.

1. The ejector 1 pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector 2 unit.

Figure 3-456 Ejector unit operation, view 1

2. The ejector 2 grabs paper, then moves forward to the output tray unit direction, then drops the paper
on the output tray.

Ejector unit operation 371

 Figure 3-457 Ejector unit operation, view 2

Output tray and paper holding unit

You will learn more about the output tray and paper holding unit of the inner finisher.

Output tray and paper holding unit overview

Learn about the output tray and paper holding unit overview.

The output tray moves up and down along the rails inside the finisher, and the output tray motor controls
those movement according to the signals sent from the paper holding sensor. As paper stacks up on
the output tray, the paper holding unit is lifted by papers. When the paper holding sensor is touched, the
output tray moves downward.

The machine detects when the output tray is full as the output tray hits the lower limit switch. The output
tray top of stack sensor is mounted on both left and right sides for the case that the paper holding
sensor breaks down.

The paper holding solenoid lifts the paper holding actuator up when a new bundle of paper come to the
output tray.

Figure 3-458 Overview of the output tray unit

372 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-303 Overview of the output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Output tray 5QK09-60118 Stores paper

M954 Output tray motor JC90-01334B Move the output tray up and down
assembly

S956 Output tray motor sensor 0604-001393 Detect whether the output tray motor is operational

S957 Output tray lower limit JC90-01320A Detects the lowest position of the output tray
switch

2 Output tray top of stack JC82-01039A Detect abnormal movement of output tray (output tray
sensor kit top of stack sensor receiver + led)

S958 Output tray top of stack NA –

sensor receiver

S963 Output tray top of stack NA –

sensor transmitter

Figure 3-459 Detail view of the output tray unit

Table 3-304 Detail view of the output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Output tray 5QK09-60118 Stores paper

M954 Output tray motor JC90-01334B Move the output tray up and down
assembly

S956 Output tray motor sensor 0604-001393 Detect whether the output tray motor is operational

S957 Output tray lower limit JC90-01320A Detects the lowest position of the output tray
switch

2 Output tray top of stack JC82-01039A Detect abnormal movement of output tray (output tray
sensor kit top of stack sensor receiver + led)

S958 Output tray top of stack NA –

sensor receiver

S963 Output tray top of stack NA –

sensor transmitter

Output tray and paper holding unit overview 373

 Figure 3-460 Overview of the paper holding unit

Table 3-305 Overview of the paper holding unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Paper holding actuator JC90-01313A Control the output tray height, and grabs stacked paper
not to be scattered

SL951 Paper holding solenoid JC33-00037A Move paper holding actuator up when paper goes out to
the output tray

S959 Paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Detect stacked paper position

Figure 3-461 Detail view of the paper holding unit

374 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-306 Detail view of the paper holding unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Paper holding actuator JC90-01313A Control the output tray height, and grabs stacked paper
not to be scattered

SL951 Paper holding solenoid JC33-00037A Move paper holding actuator up when paper goes out to
the output tray

S959 Paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Detect stacked paper position

Output tray and paper holding unit operation

Learn about the output tray and paper holding unit operation.

1. The paper holding actuator helps the paper stay stable on the output tray by pushing the paper
(callout 1). When ejecting the paper, it moves to the inside of the left cover so that the paper properly
stacks on the output tray (callout 2).

Figure 3-462 Output tray and paper holding unit operation, view 1

2. As the paper piles up on the tray, it touches the paper holding actuator to upwards (callout 3) and
changes the paper holding sensor signal.

Figure 3-463 Output tray and paper holding unit operation, view 2

3. Recognizing this, the output tray motor lowers the position of the output tray to the bottom (callout
4), allowing more paper to be stacked.

Output tray and paper holding unit operation 375

 Figure 3-464 Output tray and paper holding unit operation, view 3

4. When it reaches the end of the moving range, the output tray lower limit switch is pressed (callout 5),
and the finishing job stops with the output tray full message.

Figure 3-465 Output tray and paper holding unit operation, view 4

5. In the event of an abnormal loading of paper, for example overflow due to a very severe curl, the
signal from the top of stack sensor is changed by being obscured by the paper. Recognizing this, the
machine forcibly terminates printing and displays an error message.

PCA
You will learn more about the inner finisher PCA.

Inner finisher main PCA

Learn about the inner finisher main PCA.

The inner finisher main PCA controls operation of the inner finisher as well as communicate with the
main PCA.

● Inner finisher main PCA part number: 6GW49-60001 (P951)

376 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-466 Inner finisher main PCA

Table 3-307 Inner finisher main PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

IF-CN1 Punch wastebox sensor 12pin JC31-02174A

Finisher docking sensor

IF-CN2 Rear tamper home sensor 26pin JC39-02176A

Output tray top of stack sensor

Exit sensor

end fence sensor

Paper support home sensor

Rear tamper motor

Paper support motor

IF-CN3 Stapler low sensor 40pin JC39-02173A

Stapler ready sensor

Stapler home sensor

Stapler motor

Stapler position motor

Entrance motor

Front cover switch

Punch motor

Stapler position sensor (front home)

Stapler position sensor (rear home)

Punch waste full sensor

Punch motor sensor

Punch home sensor

Inner finisher main PCA 377

 Table 3-307 Inner finisher main PCA (continued)

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

IF-CN4 Ejector 2 motor 15pin JC39-02165A

Ejector 1 motor

Ejector 2 motor sensor

Ejector 2 home sensor

Ejector 1 home sensor

IF-CN5 Main PCA 16pin JC39-02169A

IF-CN6 Output tray lower limit switch 3pin JC39-02178A

IF-CN7 Exit motor 28pin JC39-02168A

Main paddle motor

Output tray motor

Front tamper motor

Output tray motor sensor

Main paddle home sensor

Front tamper home sensor

Paper holding sensor

Output tray top of stack sensor

IF-CN9 Paper holding solenoid 2pin –

IF-CN10 Stapler position sensor (mid front) 6pin JC39-02173A

Stapler position sensor (mid rear)

Inner finisher rear joint PCA

Learn about the inner finisher rear joint PCA.

Inner finisher rear joint PCA locates inside the inner finisher so that it communicates with the inner
finisher mainPCA and transfer signals and commands to the stapler motor, sensor, top door switch, and
the entrance motor.

● Inner finisher rear joint PCA part number: JC92-02780A (P952)

378 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-467 Inner finisher rear joint PCA

Table 3-308 Inner finisher rear joint PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

IFsub-CN2 IF-CN3 22pin JC39-02173A

IFsub-CN3 Stapler assembly 20Pin FFC JC39-02164, JC39-02177A

IFsub-CN4 Stapler position motor 18pin JC39-02172A

Front stapler position sensor

Rear stapler position sensor

Top door switch

Entrance moto

Print Quality Diagnostics

Learn about the HP Print Quality Diagnostics.

HP Print Quality Diagnostics is a tool for remotely diagnosing print quality operated by Smart Device
Services (SDS). Through this industry-leading technology, the printer is remotely monitored for print
quality health and can receive proactive detailed service diagnostics which reduce overall service costs
and improve customer up-time.

The following conditions must exist to use the Print Quality Diagnostic.

● Optional for the E877 and E786 series printers

NOTE: The Print Quality Diagnostic requires printer firmware version 5.6 or later. Check the
printer firmware version. if necessary, upgrade the printer firmware.

● Powered by the HP Smart Device Service (SDS)

● Enabled by the HP Print Quality Diagnostic Inline Scan Bar

● Printer configuration required

Print Quality Diagnostics 379

 Figure 3-468 Print Quality Diagnostic printer configuration

1 1

4
3 2

Reference number Description

1 Inline Scanner Bridge Unit with Print Quality Diagnostics

2 Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics

3 Stapler/Stacker finisher with Print Quality Diagnostics or Booklet finisher with Print
Quality Diagnostics

4 For the E786 printers, a second exit unit must be ordered and installed.

For the E877 printers, the second exit unit is factory installed.

Print Quality Diagnostic overview

Learn more about the Print Quality Diagnostic function..

Print Quality Diagnostic workflow

Learn about the Print Quality Diagnostic workflow.

Figure 3-469 Print Quality Diagnostic workflow with stacker

380 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-470 Print Quality Diagnostic workflow with Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher

Table 3-309 Print Quality Diagnostic workflow

Item Unit Description

1 Entrance unit Allows a piece of paper to move into the bridge unit.

2 Inline Scan Bar Scans the test pattern and sends the information for quality
diagnosis and improvement.

3 Feed Allows a piece of paper to move from the entrance unit to the exit
unit.

4 Exit unit Move the page to the output unit.

5 Output tray Receives the pages that have completed the print job.

Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics

Learn about the bridge unit.

Overview
The bridge unit with Printer Quality Diagnostics is a diagnostic device which includes an inline scanning
bar. The inline scan bar scans and then analyzes the printing on the pages at regular intervals to keep
the printer output in optimal condition.

This unit is an essential item for using the Print Quality Diagnostics feature. When this device is installed
on the base printer, it can be connected to a Stacker unit, Stapler/Stacker finisher, or Booklet finisher for
paper stacking.

Detailed specification

NOTE: For general printing, all items supported by the base printer are equally supported.

Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 381

 Table 3-310 Paper specifications of Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics

Item Description

Size for diagnostic LTR (297mm x 216mm), A4 (297mm x 210mm)

Long-edge feed (LEF)

Weight for diagnostic Plain type (71-90gsm)

Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics sensors, motor, rollers, PCAs
Figure 3-471 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostic sensors

2 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A Checks that a page came into the
entrance.

2 Scan in sensor JC32-00020A Checks that a page came into the scan
bar.

3 Bridge cover sensor 0604-001393 Checks that the cover is closed or open.

4 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 Checks that a page came into bridge exit
roller.

382 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-472 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostic motor and rollers

4
3

1 2

Callout Part name Part number Type Description

1 Bridge driving 3SJ19-80501 Stepping motor Drives the bridge unit rollers.
motor

2 ILSB gate JC33-00031B Solenoid Moves the scanning unit gate open and closed.
solenoid

3 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A Moves the page from the machine to the
stacker unit or finisher.

4 Bridge middle JC66-04732A Moves the page from the machine to the
roller stacker unit or finisher.

5 Bridge entrance JC66-04733A Moves the page from the machine to the
roller stacker unit or finisher.

Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 383

 Figure 3-473 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostic PCAs

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Inline scan bar PCA NA Controls the inline scan bar and sends
scan data to the formatter.

2 Interconnection PCA NA Communicates between the inline scan

bar PCA and the inline scan bar.

Figure 3-474 Inline scan bar PCA connections

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

J2 Formatter - Stapler/Stacker or 8 pin 63C80-50001

Booklet finisher

J4 Fan 4 pin

J6 Interconnection PCA 19 pin 63C80-50002

384 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-475 Interconnection PCA connections

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

J3 Inline scan bar 20 pin 63C80-50003

J2 Inline scan bar PCA 19 pin 63C80-50003

J3 Inline scan bar trigger sensor 3 pin 5QK03-50015

Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics

Learn about the stacker unit.

Overview
The stacker unit with Printer Quality Diagnostics is a diagnostic device used as a paper support for
general paper stacking. The stacker is installed when a Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher is not
used. Pages feed through the bridge unit (that includes this diagnostic tool) and into the stacker.

Detailed specification

NOTE: For general printing, all items supported by the base printer are equally supported.

Table 3-311 General specifications of Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics

Item Description

Capacity 500 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per square meter)

Sensing Paper Jam/Stacking full/Cover open/Scanning trigger

Media sizes 98-320mm x 139.7-457.2mm

Media weight 60-325gsm

Number of bins 1

Dimensions (W x D x H) 412mm x 497mm x 282mm (including the extended sub tray / not
including the bridge unit)

Weigh 11kg

Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 385

 Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics sensors, motor, roller, PCA
Figure 3-476 Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostic sensors

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Stacker full sensor 0604-001393 Checks the output bin for a bin full
condition.

2 Stacker exit sensor 0604-001381 Checks that a page came into the exit
unit.

386 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-477 Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostic motor and roller

1 2

Callout Part name Part number Type Description

1 Stacker exit JC93-00336A Stepping motor Drives the exit roller.

motor

2 Stacker exit roller Moves the page to the output bin.

Figure 3-478 Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostic PCA

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Stacker PCA NA

Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 387

 Figure 3-479 Stacker PCA connections

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

CN1 Formatter 16 pin JC39-02308A

CN2 Bridge unit 13 pin 63C82-50002

CN3 Bridge unit 5 pin

CN4 Stacker exit motor 10 pin 63C82-50001

Stacker exit sensor

Stacker full sensor

Print Quality Diagnostic operation

Learn about the Print Quality Diagnostic operation.

The Print Quality Diagnostics system outputs test pages for diagnosis at regular intervals, and scans
these pages to make sure that the printer maintains optimal image quality.

The test pages are only output when the following conditions are met.

NOTE: If these conditions are not satisfied, the printer does not perform the diagnostic, but continues
to output print jobs without errors.

● Paper size: A4 or LTR

● Feeding direction: Long Edge Feeding (LEF)

● Paper type/weight: plain type/71-90 gsm

● Load paper in at least one tray except for Tray1 paper stored in the tray

388 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-480 Print Quality Diagnostic sample pages

Print Quality Diagnostic operation 389

 4 Problem solving

Learn about problem solving.

General troubleshooting guide

Learn about general troubleshooting.

Troubleshooting process
Learn about the troubleshooting process.

Determine the problem source

When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts
you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible
causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem.
The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems.

● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The
flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the
malfunction.

Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:

● Are supply items within their rated life?

● Are supply items Genuine HP supplies?

● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?

NOTE: The customer or service provider is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies
that are in good condition.

Power subsystem
Learn about the power subsystem.

Power-on checks
The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and
the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this
section to isolate and solve the problem.

If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control-
panel display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.

Power-on troubleshooting overview

If the control panel is blank 1 minute after turning on the printer, check the following items:

During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place
your hand over the vents at the rear of the printer, next to the formatter, or on the on the rear of the

390 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 scanner. If the fan is operating, you will feel air passing out of the printer. You can lean close to the printer
and hear the fan operating.

A fan begins to blow on the right door (fuser), and then the control panel goes through a series of set
up functions. The main motor turns on (unless the left door or cartridge access door is open, a jam
condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly
determine if the main motor is turned on.

If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control panel problems.

1. Make sure that the printer is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip)
that delivers the correct voltage.

2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position, and then verify that the LED is on.

3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.

4. Depress the button on the back of the control panel to test the control panel functionality.

5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected.

6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the printer on again.

Troubleshooting a blank display, black display, no display, or no power situation

Customers usually report that the control-panel display is not showing anything. It is very important to
collect as much information as possible from the customer about the issue to help resolve it.

Following are some printer behaviors the customer might encounter:

● The control panel is completely blank (no LEDs or back light).

● The control panel is blank, but there might be LEDs illuminated.

● The control panel is blank (LEDs are on or flashing) and the back light is on (but no text visible).

Following are some possible causes of a blank control-panel display:

● No power to the printer.

● The control panel contrast setting is not correctly adjusted.

● The formatter connector(s) are not fully seated into the connector(s) on the DC controller, or the
connectors are not fully seated on the formatter.

● A faulty component is installed on the formatter (for example a memory DIMM, fax PCA, network
PCA, USB device, or other component).

● The formatter is defective.

● The control panel connector is not fully seated, or the control panel is defective.

● The DC controller is defective.

Following are some questions to ask the customer:

● Was the printer newly install or has the printer been properly functioning?

– For a new install, investigate to see if there was any shipping damage to the printer.

Troubleshooting a blank display, black display, no display, or no power situation 391

 – Did the customer notice any damage to the shipping box or any visible damage to the printer?

● What happened just prior to the control panel going blank?

– Was the printer serviced recently, a power outage occurred?

– Has a lightning storm recently occurred?

– Did the customer recently add a memory DIMM or install a third-party component?

● Make sure to get a complete description of the failure.

– Is the control-panel display completely blank (might be faint text and no back light)?

– Is the control-panel display back light on?

– Has a print job been sent to the printer? The customer might report that their print jobs seemed
to print but when they go to the printer the control-panel display is blank.

Recommended actions
If the control-panel display is completely blank (no LEDs illuminated or no back light) check to see if the
printer is getting power. Listen for fans or any printer initialization sounds when the power is turned on.

If there are no signs of power, then perform the following:

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip or
interruptible power supply) that delivers the correct voltage.

TIP: Try using a different power cable if possible.

2. Turn the printer power on, and make sure that the fan(s) run briefly (this indicates that the power
supply is operational).

3. Check if the yellow LED on formatter is flashing. If so, there is a communication issue between the
formatter and the control panel.

4. Turn the printer power off.

5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness (and/or flat cable) is properly connected (and
fully seated), and then turn the printer power on again.

6. Check control panel diagnostics by pressing the button on the back of the control panel to run
different diagnostic tests.

7. Verify the status LEDs are illuminated, but the control-panel display is blank. If applicable: Check
if the contrast setting is adjusted to very low. If so, try turning the contrast knob to see if the
control-panel display becomes visible.

8. From a host computer, send a print job to the printer.

NOTE: If the print job correctly prints, then the problem is most likely to a defective control panel.

9. Turn the printer power off, and then make sure that the memory DIMM is installed in the correct slot
and is fully seated.

NOTE: For some printers, there may be more than one memory DIMM installed. Some printers
have third-party solutions/applications or fonts that use memory.

392 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 10. Remove all of the components/accessories installed on the formatter (for example, hard drive,
solid-state drive, memory DIMM(s), fax PCA, network PCA, USB devices, or other devices).

● Make sure that the formatter is fully seated.

IMPORTANT: This is important because the formatter or a component on the formatter might
be defective or shorted, which causes the printer to lose power.

11. Reinstall the formatter. Make sure that it makes a good connection and is fully seated.

Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are correctly connected and fully seated.

12. Turn the printer power on, and then check the control-panel display.

13. If the printer control panel is properly working, replace each removed component (one at a time) to
determine which one is causing the problem.

CAUTION: Turn the printer power off, and then on again, after replacing a component on the
formatter.

14. If the control-panel display is still blank after performing the above troubleshooting steps, and the
control panel diagnostics do not function, replace the control panel. If the control panel diagnostics
are functioning, then replace the formatter.

Control panel checks

Learn about the control panel checks.

Control panel diagnostic flowcharts

Learn about the control panel diagnostic flowcharts.

Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.

● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).

● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.

● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

● No control panel sound.

● Home button is unresponsive.

● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)

Learn about the touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image).

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Control panel checks 393

 Figure 4-1 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)

Black display White display Dim display

(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)

Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.

Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.

Turn the product power off.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?

Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y

Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the comtrol panel.

Turn the product power off. N

Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N

Replace the
control panel.

Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

Learn about how the touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

394 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-2 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone

Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
touch test.

Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?

Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.

Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?

Do not replace the

control panel.

No control panel sound

Learn what to do when there is no control panel sound.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

No control panel sound 395

 Figure 4-3 No control panel sound

Control panel
has no
sound

Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save

Can sounds
be heard?

N
Y

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the sound test.

Can sounds
be heard?
Y

N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?

Home button is unresponsive

Learn what to do when the home button is unresponsive.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

396 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-4 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illuminated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
turn the power off, and
then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the Home
button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?

Turn the product power off,

and then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
Home button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y

Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Learn about when the hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional) 397
 Figure 4-5 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)

Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.

Individual component diagnostics

Learn about individual component diagnostics.

Tools for troubleshooting: LED diagnostics

LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems.

Understand lights on the formatter

Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.

Figure 4-6 LEDs

Table 4-1 LEDs

Item Description

1 Heartbeat LED

2 HP Jetdirect LEDs

398 Chapter 4 Problem solving

HP Jetdirect LEDs
Learn about the HP Jetdirect LEDs.

The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and
the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is
off, a link has failed.

For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link
settings on the embedded print server by using the printer control-panel menus.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Networking

● Ethernet

● Link Speed

3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then select OK.

Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics

The printer contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality,
paper path, noise, assembly, and timing issues.

Defeating interlocks
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the
diagnostic test when the toner cartridge door or right door is open.

Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation (and view the page enter
registration).

WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service
personnel should open and run the diagnostics with a door open. Never touch any of the power
supplies when the printer is turned on.

Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Learn how to defeat the toner cartridge door interlock.

1. Open the toner cartridge door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in)
strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the cartridge door logic switches.

HP Jetdirect LEDs 399

 Figure 4-7 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Defeat the right door interlock

Learn how to defeat the right door interlock.

1. Open the right door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in)
strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the front door logic switches.

Figure 4-8 Defeat the right door interlock

Tools for troubleshooting

Use the procedure below to test various printer mechanical and electromechanical assemblies.

400 Chapter 4 Problem solving

Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test)
Learn about the individual component diagnostics (special-mode test).

This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.

NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Select one of the following tests:

● Continuous Scan

● Run Fax Test

3. Select the component test options for the test.

Tools for troubleshooting

Learn about tools for troubleshooting.

Problem-solving checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the printer.

Step 1: Check that the printer power is on

Learn how to check that the printer power is on.

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged in and turned on. The power button should be lit with a white
light. If it is not, press the power button. If the power button does not light up, check the following
conditions.

● Make sure that the power cable is connected to the printer and the outlet.

● Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet.

2. If the printer motors do not rotate, make sure that the toner cartridges are installed and that the
doors are all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems.

Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages

Learn how to check the control panel for error messages.

The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.

Print a supplies status page to ensure that the supplies are not at or over end of life.

NOTE: HP long-life consumable and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual
individual life or yield during normal use will vary depending on usage, environment, media, and other
factors. Estimated life is not an implied warranty.

Step 3: Test print functionality

Learn how to test print functionality.

Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test) 401

 1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Reports menu, touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu, select the Configuration
Page item, and then touch the Print button to print the report.

3. If the report does not print, make sure that paper is loaded in the tray, and check the control panel
to see if paper is jammed inside the printer.

NOTE: Make sure that the paper in the tray meets specifications for this printer.

Step 4: Test copy functionality

Learn how to test copy functionality.

1. Place the configuration page into the ADF and make a copy. If paper does not feed smoothly
through the ADF, you might need to clean the ADF rollers and separation pad. Make sure that the
paper meets specifications for this printer.

2. Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy.

3. If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small
glass strip.

Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality

Learn how to test the fax sending functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tools menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.

3. Touch the Fax on the printer control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button.

Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality

Learn how to test the fax receiving functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.

2. Touch the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tests menu. Touch the Run Fax
Test button to test the fax functionality.

3. Use another fax machine to send a fax to the printer.

4. Review and reset the printer fax settings.

Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer

Learn how to try sending a print job from a computer.

1. Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the printer.

2. If the job does not print, make sure that you selected the correct printer driver.

3. Uninstall and then reinstall the printer software.

Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality
Learn how to test the plug and print USB drive printing functionality.

402 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 1. Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the USB port near the
control panel.

2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Try printing the document or photo.

3. If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive.

Factors that affect printer performance

Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:

● The software program that you are using and its settings

● The use of special paper (such as heavy paper or custom-size paper)

● Printer processing and download time

● The complexity and size of graphics

● The speed of the computer you are using

● The USB or network connection

● Whether the printer is printing in color or in monochrome

● The type of USB drive, if you are using one

● Environmental factors, such as low temperature or high humidity

Print menu map

Learn how to print the menu map.

To more easily navigate individual settings, print a report of the complete Reports menu.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3. Select the Settings Menu Map option.

4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Print current settings pages

Learn how to print current settings pages.

Printing the current settings page provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful
in the troubleshooting process.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3. Select the Current Settings Page option.

Factors that affect printer performance 403

 4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Additional tools for troubleshooting

Find additional troubleshooting topics.

Use the links below to go to additional troubleshooting tools topics.

● Pre-boot menu options

See Pre-boot menu options.

● Event log (display and print)

See Event Log.

Remote Admin
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The
printer functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any
computer (with telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and
interact with the Pre-boot menu.

IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security
reasons the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This section describes the following Remote Admin items.

Required software and network connection

Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed, and
enabled, on the remote telnet client computer.

NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a
Windows® operating system.

HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows based system, however, there are
other operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and
configuring the telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that
operating system.

Telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet
client function might not be enabled by default.

NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system.
Screens and menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.

404 Chapter 4 Problem solving

1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.

Figure 4-9 Open the Control Panel

2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.

Figure 4-10 Turn Windows features on or off

3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the
box to select it, and then click the OK button.

TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the
Cancel button.

Telnet client 405

 Figure 4-11 Enable the telnet client feature

Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the
printer. The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote
access network security programs.

If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network
(VPN) connection to the network.

Connect a remote connection

Learn how to connect a remote connection using telnet.

Start the telnet server function at the printer

For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present
at the printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.

NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how
the printer is configured.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays, touch
the middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.

406 Chapter 4 Problem solving

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-12 Select the +3:Administrator item

4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-13 Select the +A:Remote Admin item

5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-14 Select the 1:Start Telnet item

6. Do one of the following

● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7.

Figure 4-15 Telnet connecting message

● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

Start the telnet server function at the printer 407

 Figure 4-16 Telnet error message

a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.

b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.

○ The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use
DHCP instead.

○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.

c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.

7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the
information on this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.

NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.

● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.

● Port: The standard telnet port (23).

● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

Figure 4-17 Telnet server function initialized

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer

The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.

408 Chapter 4 Problem solving

1. From the Start menu click Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then click the
OK button to open a Windows command window.

Figure 4-18 Open a command window

2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 4-19 Start a telnet session

3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.

NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 in Start the
telnet server function at the printer.

TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall
or on a different network that the remote telnet client computer. See Network connection.

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 409

 Figure 4-20 Establish a telnet connection

4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet server function at the printer at the
prompt, and then press the Enter key.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer
terminates the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the
printer. See Start the telnet server function at the printer.

Figure 4-21 Enter the PIN

5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection is
successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see Pre-boot menu options.

NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection,
the following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.

● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.

410 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-22 Remote Admin window

Disconnect a remote connection

Learn how to disconnect a remote connection.

The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet
client computer.

NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote
telnet client computer.

1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 4-23 Access the administrator menu

Disconnect a remote connection 411

 2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press
the Enter key.

Figure 4-24 Access the remote admin menu

3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the
Enter key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer
terminates.

IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present
at the printer do the following:

● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item,
and then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Figure 4-25 Terminate the telnet connection

Clear paper jams

Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper path.

Paper jam locations

Jams can occur in these locations.

412 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 1

2
3

Table 4-2 Jam locations

Item Description

1 Document feeder

2 Output bin

3 Right door and fuser area

4 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

5 Tray 2 and Tray 3

Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams

Learn about printer jam clearing auto-navigation.

The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control
panel.

When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all
steps in the procedure.

Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams 413

 Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?
To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.

View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper
jams

1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.

2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different
package.

3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.

4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten
the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides
so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.

7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed
sheets one at a time.

8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is configured correctly for the
paper type and size.

9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.

31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder

The following information describes how to clear paper jams in the document feeder. When a jam
occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

View a video of how to clear a jam in the document feeder

414 Chapter 4 Problem solving

1. Open the document-feeder cover.

2. Remove any jammed paper.

31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder 415

 3. Close the document-feeder cover.

NOTE: To avoid jams, make sure the guides in the document-feeder input tray are adjusted against
the document, without bending the document. To copy narrow documents, use the flatbed scanner.
Remove all staples and paper clips from original documents.

NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam more frequently than
originals that are printed on plain paper.

13.A1 jam error in tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in Tray 1. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays
an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 1

1. Gently remove the jammed paper.

2. Open and then close the front door to resume printing.

416 Chapter 4 Problem solving

13.A2, 13.A3, 13.A4 jam errors in tray 2, tray 3, or the optional 2 x 520-sheet trays
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2 or Tray 3.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing
the jam.

View a video of how to clear a paper jam in Tray 2, Tray 3, and the optional 2 x 520-sheet trays

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

NOTE: The procedure to clear a paper jam in Tray 3 is the same as for Tray 2. Only Tray 2 is shown
here.

1. Open the right door.

2. Gently remove any jammed paper.

13.A2, 13.A3, 13.A4 jam errors in tray 2, tray 3, or the optional 2 x 520-sheet trays 417
 3. Close the right door.

4. Open the tray.

5. Gently remove any jammed paper.

418 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 6. Close the tray. Printing automatically resumes.

13.E1 jam error in the output bin

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the output bin. When a jam
occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin

■ If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.

13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF jam errors in the right door and fuser area
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the right door and fuser area. When a jam occurs, the
control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area

NOTE: The fuser is hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before clearing jams.

13.E1 jam error in the output bin 419

 1. Open the right door.

2. Gently remove any jammed paper.

3. Close the right door.

HP service and support

Learn about access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners can use the HP Partner Portal or the Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) to
access the HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

Find information about the following topics.

420 Chapter 4 Problem solving

● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories

● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information

● Install, configure, and how to information

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Services & Support item (near the top of the screen).

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)

1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.

3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

HP service and support 421

 ● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

How to search for printer documentation

The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is available on the HP portals.

For HP internal access to WISE, go to WISE.

For HP channel partners access WISE, see Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)
or Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP).

WISE is available to call agents, service technicians, and HP internal users. The level of detail available
depends on your access credentials. To learn how to find support content in WISE, watch the video here.

How to search WISE for printer information and documentation

These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users.

To learn how to find support content in WISE, watch the video here: Finding Error Code and Control Panel
Message Document in WISE.

TIP: The Product Detail Page (PDP) is available from the WISE home page. Enter, and then select a
product name or number in the Go to a Product Detail Page area (callout 1), or select the …or select your
product from a list item (callout 2) on the WISE home page.

Many types of printer documentation and information are available on WISE. This section details
methods for finding error code descriptions and solutions.

TIP: To view a list of control panel message documents (CPMD) per printer, search for the following
topic in WISE: HP LaserJet, OfficeJet, PageWide, ScanJet Enterprise - Control panel message
document (CPMD) list or click the link below.

● HP LaserJet, HP OfficeJet, HP PageWide, HP ScanJet - Control panel messages document (CPMD),

Service manual, and Service cost data list

422 Chapter 4 Problem solving

Use one of the following methods to search for CPMD error code information.

● Method 1: Use the WISE home page Error Code Lookup tool

● Method 2: Search for error codes using the WISE search function

● Method 3: Search for error codes using the Product Detail Page

Method 1: Use the WISE home page Error Code Lookup tool
Use the WISE Error Code Lookup tool to find error code troubleshooting procedures using the following
steps.

1. On the WISE home page, click the Error Code Lookup tool icon.

Figure 4-26 WISE Error Code Lookup tool icon

2. Enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in the Error Code Lookup dialog box.

Figure 4-27 WISE Error Code Lookup tool dialog box

3. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example, HP LaserJet Enterprise
M606 series) in the list.

NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended for the most accurate
search return.

How to search WISE for printer information and documentation 423

 Figure 4-28 WISE Error Code Lookup tool drop-down list

M606

4. Type the error code (for example, 13.b2.d2) in the Error Code Lookup keyword field, and then select
the search icon.

Figure 4-29 WISE Error Code Lookup tool search

5. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results area.

Figure 4-30 WISE Search results

Method 2: Search for error codes using the WISE search function
Use the WISE search function to find error code troubleshooting procedures using the following steps.

1. On the WISE home page, enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in the Search dialog box.

424 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-31 WISE Search dialog box

2. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example, HP LaserJet Enterprise
M606 series) in the list.

NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended for the most accurate
search return.

Figure 4-32 WISE Search drop-down list

3. Type the error code (for example, 13.E1.D3) in the Search keyword field, and then select the search
icon.

Figure 4-33 WISE Search

1 2

4. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results area.

How to search WISE for printer information and documentation 425

 Figure 4-34 WISE Search results

Method 3: Search for error codes using the Product Detail Page
Use the WISE Product Detail Page (PDP) to find error code troubleshooting procedures using the
following steps.

1. On the WISE home page, enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in the Go to a Product
Detail page dialog box.

TIP: To find a PDP from a list of products by product type, select the …or select your product from
a list item just below the dialog box.

Figure 4-35 WISE PDP dialog box

2. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example, HP LaserJet Enterprise
M606 series) in the list.

NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended for the most accurate
search return.

426 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-36 WISE PDP drop-down list

3. Type the error code (for example, 13.E1.D3) in the Error Code Lookup field, and then select the search
icon.

Figure 4-37 WISE PDP search

1 2

4. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results area.

Figure 4-38 WISE PDP search results

How to search WISE for printer information and documentation 427

 Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP)
Learn how to access WISE by accessing the HP Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) if you are an
HP Channel Partner.

IMPORTANT: A Partner Admin must requested access, via the CSDP portal, to create a new user
before you can sign into the CDSP portal.

1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

Figure 4-39 CSDP sign-in page

2. On the CSDP home page, click the Knowledge and Training item.

TIP: Use the Knowledge and Training item at the top of the CSDP home page (callout 1), or the
Knowledge and Training action icon (callout 2).

Figure 4-40 CSDP portal home page

1

428 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 3. Select HP Technical Documentation on the Knowledge and Training page to open the WISE portal
home page.

Figure 4-41 CSDP portal HP Knowledge and Training page

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Figure 4-42 WISE portal home page

Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

Learn how to access WISE by accessing the HP Partner Portal if you are an HP Channel Partner.

NOTE: If this is your first visit to the HP Partner Portal, you will be asked to create an account. Follow
the setup directions using your HP Partner credentials.

View a video of how to access WISE for HP channel partners

1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

Figure 4-43 HP Partner Portal sign-in page

Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal) 429

 2. On the HP Partner Portal home page, click the Services & Support item.

Figure 4-44 HP Partner Portal home page

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

Figure 4-45 HP Partner Portal Service & Support page

430 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

Figure 4-46 HP Partner Portal Technical Support (WISE)page

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Figure 4-47 WISE portal home page

Control panel messages document (CPMD)

Learn about the printer control panel messages document (CPMD).

NOTE: A complete CPMD is not included in this service manual.

Click here to access the complete CPMD for this printer.

Error codes (types and structure)

Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel to indicate the current
printer status or situations that might require action. Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and
have a set structure with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).

Control panel messages document (CPMD) 431

 ● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error.
For example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.

● The remaining four characters (W, X, Y, and Z values) further define the error.

HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control panel message
document (CPMD) for each printer.

The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or
resolve the error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers.

The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error
codes.

Table 4-3 ERROR CODES: The first two characters

Error code System Component System Error Description

10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error.

11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the formatter.

13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.

15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.

17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.

20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering error.

21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a decompression error

when trying to process job.

30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the unit.

31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.

32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification or error.

33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity

(SureStart), or Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
notification or error.

40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or USB

accessory error.

41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general and
misprint or mismatch errors typically involving
(but not limited to) the fuser, the laser scanner,
or the paper path.

42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event Log, Shell,

System Manager, or other component.

44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital sending

component.

45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving the OXPd

Web Kit (communications log).

46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.

47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.

48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management, or job

pipeline error.

49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.

432 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Table 4-3 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)

Error code System Component System Error Description

50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.

51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.

52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.

54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).

55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.

56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory error.

57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.

58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.

59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.

60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.

61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide) Print engine error with the 8–bit data package.

62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.

Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.

63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical, communication,

etc.).

65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.

66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.

67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error

69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.

70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.

76.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) Power supply fluctuations causes formatter and

DC controller communication issue and results
them not to be in synchronization.

80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.

81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.

82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.

90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB, display) or
interconnection error.

98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.

99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware install

(engine or accessory), or disk error.

Image-quality troubleshooting guide (IQTG)

For more information about image-quality troubleshooting, see the following topic.

NOTE: A complete IQTG is not included in this service manual.

Image-quality troubleshooting guide (IQTG) 433

 Click here to see the Image Quality Troubleshooting Guide (IQTG) for this printer.

434 Chapter 4 Problem solving

5 Control panel menus

You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for
more advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or
host name in the address bar of a web browser.

Pre-boot menu options

The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.

CAUTION: The Format Disk option (printers with a hard-disk drive only) performs a disk initialization
for the entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be
completely lost. HP does not recommend this action.

TIP: The Pre-boot menu can be remotely accessed by using a telnet network protocol to establish an
administration connection to the printer. See Remote Admin.

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel

Learn how to open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 5-1 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

Control panel menus 435

 2. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.

Figure 5-2 Pre-boot menu

Table 5-1 Pre-boot screen buttons

Use this button to see more information about a selected item.

Use this button to scroll up through menu items.

Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.

Use this button to scroll down through menu items.

Use this button to go back to the previous menu.

Not used.

Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.

436 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.

4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 5-3 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

2. Use the button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.

3. Use the button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.

4. Use the button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button.

NOTE: The printer will initialize.

NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version
of the printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support
these options.

Table 5-2 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu

and continues the normal boot process.

If a selection is not made in the initial menu within

30 seconds, the printer returns to a normal boot (the
same as selecting Continue).

If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout

does not apply.

Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is

required to open the Pre-boot menu.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 437
 Table 5-2 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.

If authentication is required (and the user is not

already signed in) the Sign In prompt displays. The
user is required to sign in.

Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download

process. A USB Thumbdrive option will work on all
USB FutureSmart printers. USB or Network connections
are not currently supported.
USB
Thumbdrive

Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk
partitions.

CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item

removes all data.

A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

The system is not bootable after this action and

a 99.09.67 error displays on the control panel. A
firmware download must be performed to return
the system to a bootable state.

Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data
except the firmware repository where the master
firmware bundle is downloaded and saved).

CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item

removes all data except the firmware repository. A
delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer

configurations and settings to factory defaults
(customer configurations and settings are lost).

This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing

the firmware image from the active directory
without having to download new firmware code
(printer remains bootable).

Change Select this item to set or change the administrator

Password password.

Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a

password from the Administrator menu. Before the
password is actually cleared, a message will be
shown asking to confirm that the password should
be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm the
action.

When the confirmation prompt displays, press the

OK button to clear the password.

438 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-3 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable using an
external device for job storage. Job storage is
normally enabled only for the Boot device. This will
be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error is displayed.

Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new
secure disk to this printer.

The secure disk already locked to this printer will

remain accessible to this printer. Use this function
to have more than one encrypted disk accessible by
the printer when using them interchangeably.

The data stored on the secure disk locked to this

printer always remains accessible to this printer.

Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure
disk in an unlocked mode for a single service event.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer
will remain accessible to this printer and uses the
old disk's encryption password with the new disk.

The secure disk that is already locked to this printer

remains accessible to this printer.

Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the
non-secure disk and clear the password associated
with the yet-to-be installed secure disk.

CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.

Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-
secure disk for this session only, and then search
for the missing secure disk in future sessions.

Boot Device Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command is a one-pass overwrite, which erases the
entire disk including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all data on the disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The
encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes a non-
encrypted disk.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 439
 Table 5-4 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal
Device device or get a status about the internal device.

Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command erases the entire disk, including firmware.
The disk remains an encrypted disk.

Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow the user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The HP High
Performance Secure Hard Disk is erased.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

External Select the External Device item to erase the

Device external device or get status about the external
device.

Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled.

The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire

disk, including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The encryption key is
erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

Table 5-5 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode The network can be configured to obtain the
[DHCP] network settings from a DHCP server or as static.
NOTE: This
configuration is Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition
only active when from the DHCP server.
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

440 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-5 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

IP Mode Use this item to manually assign the network

[STATIC] addresses.

IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.

Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.

Default Use this item to manually enter the default

Gateway gateway.

Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.

Table 5-6 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options
that can be set for the next time the printer is
turned on and initializes to the Ready state.

Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision

item to allow the printer to initialize and show the
firmware version when the printer reaches the
Ready state.

Once the printer power is turned on the next time,

the Show Revision item is unchecked so that the
firmware revision is not shown.

Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address
and all customer settings. (This item also returns
all settings to factory defaults.)

NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.

Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed
third-party applications.

Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer
calibration for the very next power-initialization
cycle only.

Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock

the Service menu access (both in the Pre-boot
menu and the Device Maintenance menu).

Service personnel must have the administrator

remove the Lock Service setting before they can
open the Service menu.

Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/

ScanVolume during startup.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 441
 Table 5-6 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the

printer to initialize as if it is the first time it has
been turned on.

For example, the user is prompted to configure

first-time settings like date/time, language, and
other settings.

Select this item so that it is enabled for the next

time the printer power is turned on.

When the printer power is turned on the next time,

this item is unchecked so that the pre-configured
settings are used during configuration, and the
first-time setting prompt is not used.

Embedded Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable

Jetdirect Off the embedded HP Jetdirect.

By default this item is unchecked so that

HP Jetdirect is always enabled.

WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the

wireless accessory.

Table 5-7 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are

useful to diagnose
hardware components
and their interface
connections. Use these
items to troubleshoot
specific hardware
components, and the
interface between
them and other
components.

Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run

item to exclude the
Memory diagnostic
when executing
multiple diagnostics.

Short Use the Short item to

select a brief memory
test.

NOTE: This test

requires about four
minutes to execute.

Long Use the Long item

to select an extended
memory test.

NOTE: This test

requires about twenty
minutes to execute.

442 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-7 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run

item to exclude the
Disk diagnostic when
executing multiple
diagnostics.

Short Use the Short item to

select a brief firmware
self-test.

NOTE: This test

requires about two or
three minutes to
execute.

Long Use the Long item

to select an extended
firmware self-test.

NOTE: This test

requires about sixty
minutes to execute.

Optimized Use the Optimized

item to select a test
that checks the active
sectors on the disk.

NOTE: This test

requires about thirty
minutes to execute.

Raw Use the Raw item

to select a test that
checks every sector on
the disk.

NOTE: This test

requires about fifty
minutes to execute.

Smart Use the Smart item

to select a very brief
test that checks the
drive self-monitoring
analysis and reporting
technology (SMART)
status—the drive
detects and reports
reliability indicators
to help anticipate
disk failures (SMART
status).

CPB Use the CPB item to

verify the integrity of
the copy processor
board (CPB) and
the formatter PCA
connections.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 443
 Table 5-7 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Interconnect Use the Interconnect

item to verify the
integrity of the
interconnect PCA (ICB)
and its connections.

Run Selected Select the Run

Selected item to
execute a selected
test.

NOTE: If more than

one test is selected,
they are executed in
sequence.

Table 5-8 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
access to the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to
navigate the menu selections from a remote location.

IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be

initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This person will also need to provide a randomly

generated PIN to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the
Remote Admin function, see Remote Admin.

Stop Telnet

Refresh IP

System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the
diagnostic log feature found in the Troubleshooting
menu is not accessible, then use the System Triage
item to copy the diagnostic logs to a USB flash drive
at the next printer start up.

The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the

problem.

Change Svc Use this item to change the Service menu personal
PWD identification number (PIN).

Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number

(PIN) has been changed. Use this item to reset it to the
original PIN.

Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator
password.

Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these

values.

Developer Tools Netexec

444 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Remote Admin
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The
printer functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any
computer (with telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and
interact with the Pre-boot menu.

IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security
reasons the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This section describes the following Remote Admin items.

Required software and network connection

Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed, and
enabled, on the remote telnet client computer.

NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a
Windows® operating system.

HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows based system, however, there are
other operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and
configuring the telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that
operating system.

Telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet
client function might not be enabled by default.

NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system.
Screens and menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.

1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.

Figure 5-4 Open the Control Panel

Remote Admin 445

 2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.

Figure 5-5 Turn Windows features on or off

3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the
box to select it, and then click the OK button.

TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the
Cancel button.

Figure 5-6 Enable the telnet client feature

Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the
printer. The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote
access network security programs.

446 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network
(VPN) connection to the network.

Connect a remote connection

Learn how to connect a remote connection using telnet.

Start the telnet server function at the printer

For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present
at the printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.

NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how
the printer is configured.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays, touch
the middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 5-7 Select the +3:Administrator item

4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 5-8 Select the +A:Remote Admin item

5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 5-9 Select the 1:Start Telnet item

Connect a remote connection 447

 6. Do one of the following

● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7.

Figure 5-10 Telnet connecting message

● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

Figure 5-11 Telnet error message

a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.

b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.

○ The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use
DHCP instead.

○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.

c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.

7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the
information on this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.

NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.

● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.

● Port: The standard telnet port (23).

● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

Figure 5-12 Telnet server function initialized

448 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer
The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.

1. From the Start menu click Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then click the
OK button to open a Windows command window.

Figure 5-13 Open a command window

2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 5-14 Start a telnet session

3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.

NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 in Start the
telnet server function at the printer.

TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall
or on a different network that the remote telnet client computer. See Network connection.

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 449

 Figure 5-15 Establish a telnet connection

4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet server function at the printer at the
prompt, and then press the Enter key.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer
terminates the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the
printer. See Start the telnet server function at the printer.

Figure 5-16 Enter the PIN

5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection is
successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see Pre-boot menu options.

NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection,
the following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.

● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.

450 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-17 Remote Admin window

Disconnect a remote connection

Learn how to disconnect a remote connection.

The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet
client computer.

NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote
telnet client computer.

1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 5-18 Access the administrator menu

Disconnect a remote connection 451

 2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press
the Enter key.

Figure 5-19 Access the remote admin menu

3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the
Enter key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer
terminates.

IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present
at the printer do the following:

● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item,
and then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Figure 5-20 Terminate the telnet connection

Reports menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select Reports.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

452 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-9 Reports menu

First level Second level Values Description

Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire
control panel system and
View the selected values for each
setting.

Current Settings Page Print Shows a summary of the

current settings for the
View printer. This might be helpful
if you plan to make changes
and need a record of the
present configuration.

Configuration Page Print Shows the printer settings

and installed accessories.
View

HP Flex Build Configuration Print Shows the Flex Buide

Page printer settings and installed
View accessories.

NOTE: 877/826/786/731
printers only.

How to Connect Page Print Shows the network

information typically needed
View to connect the printer to a
network.

Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate

remaining life for the
View supplies; reports statistics
on total number of pages
and jobs processed, serial
number, page counts, and
maintenance information.

HP provides approximations
of the remaining life for
the supplies as a customer
convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels
might be different from the
approximations provided.

Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper

sizes that have passed
View through the printer; lists
whether they were simplex,
duplex, monochrome, or color;
and reports the page count.

File Directory Print Shows the file name and

folder name for files that are
View stored in the printer memory.

Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web

Services for the printer.
View

Color Usage Job Log Print Shows color jobs completed

by the printer.
View

Reports menu 453

 Table 5-9 Reports menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

Fax Reports (MFP fax models Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes
only) that have been sent from or
View received by this printer.

Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes

that have been used for
View outgoing faxes. This report
shows how many sent faxes
were billed to each code.

Blocked Fax List Print A list of phone numbers that

are blocked from sending
View faxes to this printer.

Speed Dial List Print Shows the speed dials that

have been set up for this
View printer.

Fax Call Report Print A detailed report of the last

fax operation, either sent or
View received.

Other Pages Demonstration Page Print Prints a demonstration page

RGB Samples Print Prints color samples for

different RGB values. Use
the samples as a guide for
matching printed colors.

CMYK Samples Print Prints color samples for

different CMYK values. Use
the samples as a guide for
matching printed colors.

PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts.

PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts.

Secure Drum Data Erase Print Prints the secure drum data
erase pattern to overwrite
any residual image data that
might be left on the drum
from the previous print job.

Settings menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-10 Settings menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

General Date/Time Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time
Settings Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date
and time and
YYYY/MMM/DD to configure date/
time settings.

454 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format

that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time, for
example 12-hour
format or 24-hour
format.

Date/Time Date Select the time Select the time

zone from a list. zone, date, and
time that the
printer uses.

Time Select the date

from a pop-up
calendar.

Time Zone Select the time

from a pop-up
keypad.

Energy Sleep Schedule A list of + (Add) Use to configure

Settings scheduled the printer
events Edit to automatically
displays. wake up or go to
Delete sleep at specific
times on specific
days. Using this
feature saves
energy.

NOTE: You must

configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.

New event Event Type Select whether to

add or edit a Wake
event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time
and the days for
the wake or sleep
event.

Time Set the wake or

sleep event time
parameters.

Event Days Select days of the Set the wake or

week from a list. sleep event day
parameters.

Settings menu 455

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Sleep Settings Sleep After Range: 1 to 110 Set the number

Inactivity minutes of minutes after
which the printer
Shut Down Default = 0 enters Sleep or
minutes Auto Off mode.
Touch the existing
number to open
the virtual keypad,
and then increase
or decrease
the number of
minutes.

Display Display Brightness Manual The Manual Use to specify the

Settings setting uses a intensity of the
slider to manually LCD control panel
control the display display.
brightness.

System Sound On* Use to specify

whether you hear
Off a sound when you
touch the screen
or press buttons
on the control
panel.

Language Settings Language Select from a Use to select a

list of languages different language
that the printer for control panel
supports. messages and
specify the default
keyboard layout.
When you select a
new language, the
keyboard layout
automatically
changes to match
the factory default
for the selected
language.

Keyboard Each language has Select the default

Layout a default keyboard keyboard layout
layout. To change that matches the
Flow models it, select from a list language you want
only of layouts. to use.

Information Show connection Use this menu

Screen information* item to display or
hide connection
Hide connection information on the
information Home screen.

DisplayDate and Yes* Select whether to

Time display or hide the
No date and time on
the control panel
Home screen.

456 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Job Status Fewer* Use this feature

Notifications to control how
More many job status
notifications
appear while a job
is proceeding

● If the setting
is Fewer,
there will only
be a
notification to
indicate the
job has been
added to the
job queue
(except Fa,
which always
indicates
success or
failure).

● If the setting
is More, there
will be status
notifications
while the job
is proceeding
including a
completion
notification.

Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 Specifies the

seconds amount of time
that elapses
Default = 60 between any
seconds activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the
default settings.
When the timeout
expires, the control
panel display
returns to the
Home menu, and
any user signed in
to the printer is
signed out.

Settings menu 457

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Clearable On Use this feature

Warnings to set the period
Job* that a clearable
warning displays
on the control
panel. If the
On setting is
selected, clearable
warnings appear
until the Clearable
Warnings button is
pressed. If the Job
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
stay on the display
during the job
that generated
the warning and
disappear from
the display when
the next job starts.

Continuable Auto-continue (10 Use this option

Events seconds)* to configure the
printer behavior
Touch OK to when the printer
continue encounters certain
errors. If the
Auto-continue (10
seconds) option
is selected, the
job will continue
after 10 seconds.
If the Touch OK
to continue option
is selected, the
job will stop and
require the user
to touch the
OK button before
continuing.

Enable Enabled* Use this feature

Device USB to enable or
Disabled disable the USB
port, which allows
connecting to a
computer by using
a USB device.

458 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Jam Auto* This printer

Recovery provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following options:

Auto: The printer

attempts to
reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available. This is
the default setting.

Off: The printer

does not attempt
to reprint jammed
pages. Because no
memory is used
to store the most
recent pages,
performance is
optimal.

NOTE: When
using this option, if
the printer runs
out of paper and
the job is being
printed on both
sides, some pages
can be lost.

On: The printer

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory
is allocated to
store the last few
pages printed. This
might cause a
decrease in overall
performance.

Auto Enabled The printer

Recovery attempts to
Disabled* reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available. This is
the default setting.

Settings menu 459

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Enable Disabled Use the Enable

AutoSend AutoSend menu
Enabled* to enable or
disable the
AutoSned feature.
The AutoSend
feature enables
your product
to periodically
send product
configuration
information
including serial
number, event
logs, page usage
counts, and
supplies status
information to HP
web addresses
(URLs), or
email addresses.
Information sent
to HP is used to
improve products
and services, and
to monitor the
product if you
have a relationship
with HP that
provides you
serives such as
proactive cartidge
replacement,
pay-per-page
contracts, support
agreements, or
usage tracking.

Hold Off Print Enabled* Enable this feature

Job if you want to
Disabled prevent print jobs
from starting while
a user is initiating
a copy job from
the control panel.
Held print jobs
start printing after
the copy job is
finished, provided
that no other copy
job is in the print
queue.

Copy/Print Copy Image Preview Display a preview

Settings of the image
before printing it.

Enable Print Enabled Enables the printer

from USB to open a file from
Drive Disabled* a USB drive.

460 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manage Job Sort Order Job Name* This option

Stored Jobs allows you list
Date the jobs either
alphabetically or
chronologically.

Retain Temporary Do not retain* Sets which

Jobs After Reboot temporary jobs will
Personal jobs only be retained in the
event of a printer
All temporary jobs reboot.

Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored
in the printer
memory.

The Temporary
Job Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.

Temporary Stored Off* Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
3 days number of
temporary jobs
1 week that can be stored
on the printer. The
4 weeks maximum allowed
value is 300.

Standard Stored Off* Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
3 days number of
standard jobs that
1 week can be stored on
the printer. The
4 weeks maximum allowed
value is 300.

Settings menu 461

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Default Print Number of Copies Range: Sets the default

Options 1-32000 number of copies
for a copy
Default = 1 job. This default
applies when the
Copy function or
the Quick Copy
function is initiated
from the printer
Home screen.

Paper Selection Select from a Configures the

list of sizes default paper size
that the used for print jobs.
printer
supports.

Default Custom X Dimension Range: 3-8.5 Configures the

Paper Size inches default paper size
that is used when
Default = 8.5 the user selects
inches Custom as the
paper size for a
print job.

Y Dimension Range: 5-14

inches

Default = 14
inches

Use Inches Enabled*

Disabled

Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

whether the
2-sided original document
is printed on one
or both sides,
and whether the
copies should be
printed on one or
both sides. For
example, select
the 1-sided original,
2-sided output
option when the
original is printed
on one side, but
you want to make
two-sided copies.

Fit to Page (PDF) On Use this feature to

reduce or enlarge
Off* the image/content
of each page to
fit the currently
selected paper
size.

462 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fit to Page (TIFF, On* Use this feature to

BMP, JPG, PNG) reduce or enlarge
Off the image/content
of each page to
fit the currently
selected paper
size.

Quality and Speed Quick View

Normal*

Fine Lines

Settings menu 463

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Edge Control Automatic* The Edge Control

setting determines
Off how edges are
rendered. Edge
Light Control has
two components:
Normal adaptive
halftoning and
Maximum trapping. Adaptive
halftoning
increases edge
sharpness.
Trapping reduces
the effect
of color-plane
misregistration by
overlapping the
edges of adjacent
objects slightly..

● Automatic:
The printer
uses the
default Edge
Control
setting.

● Off: Turns off

both trapping
and adaptive
halftoning.

● Light: Sets
trapping at a
minimal level,
and adaptive
halftoning is
on.

● Normal:
Trapping is at
a medium
level and
adaptive
halftoning is
on.

● Maximum:
Trapping is at
the highest
level, and
adaptive
halftoning is
on.

464 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Halftone Automatic* Use this feature to

control the default
Smooth halftone screen
that the printer
Detail uses for print jobs.

Select from the

following options:

● Automatic:
The halftone
screen
frequency is
picked
automatically
by the printer
to provide the
best print
quality for a
range of
content.

● Smooth: Low
frequency
halftone
screen
optimized for
printing
smooth
gradients and
vector
graphics.

● Detail: High
frequency
halftone
screen
optimized for
printing
detailed
content, such
as
photographs.

Settings menu 465

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Neutral Grays Automatic* Neutral Grays

determine the
Black Only method for
creating gray
CMYK Gray colors in text,
graphics, and
photographs.

● Automatic:
The printer
combines
colors for
each
document
element to
provide high-
quality output
for most
color printing
needs.

● Black Only:
Generates
neutral colors
(black and
shades of
gray) by using
only the black
color. This
guarantees
neutral colors
without a
color cast
(tint of a
particular
color).

● CMYK Gray:
Generates
neutral colors
(black and
shades of
gray) by
combining
the printer
colors. This
method
produces
smoother
gradients and
transitions to
other colors,
and it
produces the
darkest black.

466 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Envelope Off* Use this feature

Rotate to enable rotation
90 Degrees when printing on
envelopes.
180 degrees
Envelopes are
usually loaded
into the printer
as short-edge
feed. However,
if the Envelope
Rotate function is
enabled, you can
load envelopes as
long-edge feed.
The printer rotates
the image to be
printed so that it
appears correctly
on the envelopes.

● Off (default):
Load
envelopes in
short-edge
feed
direciton.

● 90 degrees:
Load
envelopes in
long-edge
feed
direction.

● 180 degrees:
Load
envelopes in
short-edge
feed direction
with the flap
on the bottom
side.

PCL and Suppress Blank Off* When set to On,

PostScript Pages any blank pages
Settings On will not be printed.

Courier Font Regular* Select which

version of the
Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is Regular,
which uses an
average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be
used if a heavier
Courier font is
needed.

Settings menu 467

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature

to select whether
Disabled* a PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer encounters
a PS error.

Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a

PDF error page is
Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters
a PDF error.

Personality Auto* Configures the

default print
PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific
printer language,
the printer does
not automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.

PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font

source for the
Disk resident user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending
on the installed
printer options.

Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the

font number for
Default = 0 the user-soft
default font using
the source that
is specified in
the Font Source
menu. The printer
assigns a number
to each font and
lists it on the PCL
font list. The font
number displays in
the Font # column
of the printout.

468 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source

option and the
Default = 10 Font Number
setting indicate a
contour font, then
use this feature
to select a default
pitch (for a fixed-
spaced font).

PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL

print-command
Default = 60 options. PCL is
a set of printer
commands that
HP developed to
provide access to
printer features.

Use the Form

Length feature
to select the
user-soft default
vertical form
length.

Orientation Portrait* Select the

orientation that is
Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select
the Portrait option
if the short edge is
at the top or select
the Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the top.

Symbol Set Select from a list Select any one of

of symbol sets. several available
symbol sets from
the control panel.
A symbol set
is a unique
grouping of all the
characters in a
font. The factory
default value
for this option
is PC-8. Either
PC-8 or PC-850
are recommended
for line-draw
characters.

Settings menu 469

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Append CR No* Configure whether

to LF a carriage return
Yes (CR) is appended
to each line feed
(LF) encountered
in backwards-
compatible PCL
jobs (pure text, no
job control). Select
Yes to append the
carriage return.
The default setting
is No. Some
environments,
such as UNIX,
indicate a new line
by using only the
line-feed control
code. This option
allows the user
to append the
required carriage
return to each line
feed.

Media Standard* Use to select

Source and maintain input
Mapping Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:

Standard: Tray
numbering is
based on newer
HP LaserJet
models.

Classic: Tray
numbering is
based on
HP LaserJet 4 and
older models.

470 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Print Quality Adjust paper types Select from a list If print quality
of paper types problems occur,
use this menu to
Reset Paper Types adjust the Print
Mode for the
paper type in use.
If a user-defined
type (enabled in
the Embedded
Web Server) has
preprinted content
that makes the
sides of the paper
different, set the
paper type as
Marked Paper.

Customize Colors RGB: Office (sRGB)

NOTE: Color
CMYK: SWOP printers only.

Manage Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the

Trays Tray printer handles
First jobs that have
specified a
specific input tray.
Two options are
available:

Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a different
tray when the user
has indicated that
a specific tray
should be used,
even if that tray is
empty.

First: The printer

pulls from another
tray if the
specified tray
is empty, even
though the
user specifically
indicated a tray for
the job.

Settings menu 471

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manually Feed Always* Indicate whether

Prompt a prompt should
Unless loaded appear when the
type or size for a
job does not match
the specified
tray and the
printer pulls from
the multipurpose
tray instead.
Two options are
available:

Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.

Unless loaded: A
message displays
only if the
multipurpose tray
is empty.

Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether

the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a
tray is closed.
Two options are
available:

Display: Shows the

tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.

Do not display:
Prevents the
tray configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.

472 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Use Another Tray Allow* Use to turn on

or off the control
Do not allow panel prompt to
select another tray
when the specified
tray is empty.
Two options are
available:

Enabled: When
this option is
selected, the user
is prompted either
to add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray.

Disabled: When
this option is
selected, the
user is not
given the option
of selecting a
different tray. The
printer prompts
the user to add
paper to the tray
that was initially
selected.

Alternative Off* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
On preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing
to one side of
the sheet or to
both sides of the
sheet. When this
option is selected,
load the paper
as you would for
printing on both
sides. See the user
documentation
that came with
the printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on both
sides. When this
option is selected,
the printer speed
slows to the
speed required for
printing on both
sides.

Settings menu 473

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Duplex Blank Automatic* Controls how the

Pages printer handles
Always two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:

Auto: Enables
Smart Duplexing,
which instructs
the printer not
to process blank
pages.

Yes: Disables
Smart Duplexing
and forces the
duplexer to flip the
sheet of paper
even if it is
printed on only one
side. This might
be preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as letterhead
or prepunched
paper.

Image Rotation Left to right* The Image

Rotation setting
Right to left allows alternatives
affecting how
Alternate preprinted paper
is loaded into the
tray

NOTE: For
stapled print or
copy jobs, make
sure the Staple/
Collate setting
matches the
Image Rotation
setting as to which
side of paper (left
or right) you want
stapled. If these
setting do not
match each other,
you will need to
change the loading
orientation of the
paper so that the
job is stapled in the
correct spot.

474 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Override A4/Letter Yes* Prints on letter-size

paper when an A4
No job is sent but
no A4-size paper
is loaded in the
printer (or to print
on A4 paper when
a letter-size job
is sent but no
letter-size paper
is loaded). This
option will also
override A3 with
ledger-size paper
and ledger with
A3-size paper.

Unsupported Size Use default size Use this feature

Behavior automatically* to print documents
that are on a
Prompt for user paper size that the
response product does not
support

● Select Use
default size
automatically
to use the
paper size
selected in
Default Print
Options.

● Select
Prompt for
user
response to
be asked to
use the size
selected in
Default Print
Options or to
cancel the
job.

Settings menu 475

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Rotate Offset Automatic Use this feature

to separate each
NOTE: When set Off* copy by rotating
to Automatic, its position in
rotation does not the output bin.
occur if: Two options are
available:
● The tray is
specified in Off: Jobs are
the job and printed normally
the User with separating
Selected Tray each copy.
setting is set
to Exclusively. Automatic: Copies
are rotated
● The specified automatically.
bin in the job
does not
support both
orientations.

● The job is
uncollated.

● The job is
collated, but
only has one
sheet per
copy.

● The job has

mixed paper
size or type.

● The user
selects a
different
paper after
the job has
started.

● A job setting
works only
with a
specific
orientation.

● The Job
Offset setting
is available
and set to On.

Tray Priority Tray 4 You can set the

tray priority. If
Tray 3 first setting is
Tray 1, the printer
Tray 2 automatically
prints from Tray 1
Tray 1 after the current
tray runs out of
paper.

476 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Tray Protection NOTE: You can When this option

select all but one is chosen, the
of the trays. At selected tray will
least one tray be protected. This
must be prevents paper
unselected at all from being fed if
times Use Another Tray
is enabled. If you
Tray 4 select Tray 1, for
example, then Tray
Tray 3 1 is excluded when
using another tray.
Tray 2

Tray 1

Paper Out Action Auto Continue Specify the action

Time-Out the printer will take
when the paper
Auto Continue configured for the
Action print job does not
match the paper
loaded in the input
tray

Scan/Digital Scan+ Image Make optional* Use this menu to

Send Settings Preview configure settings
Require preview that affect scan
apps.
Disable preview

E-mail E-mail Setup Use to configure

Settings settings that
NOTE: Email apply to sending
Settings only documents
through email or
saving documents
to a folder on the
network or on a
USB multi-drive.

The E-mail
Setup Wizard
feature configures
the printer to
send scanned
images as email
attachments. To
open the printer
HP Embedded
Web Server and
set up the email
notification server,
enter the printer IP
address into a Web
browser.

Settings menu 477

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

478 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Network Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Folder job options for
Settings Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Settings menu 479

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

SharePoint Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Settings job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

480 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Scan to USB Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Drive job options for
Settings Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Settings menu 481

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Digital Allow Use of a DSS Disabled Configure how

Sending Server the printer
Software Enabled* interacts with the
Setup Allow Transfer to HP Digital Sending
New DSS server Software (DSS)
server. HP DSS
handles digital
sending tasks,
such as faxing,
emailing, and
sending scanned
documents to a
network folder
or USB storage
device.

Use the Allow Use

of a DSS Server
and Allow Transfer
to New DSS
server options
to configure the
printer to use
HP DSS.

Fax Internal Fax Line 1

Modem
Setup Line 2

Fax Send Image Preview

Settings

Fax Dialing Line Monitor Off These settings

Settings Volume control how the
Low* fax modem dials
the outgoing fax
High number when
faxes are sent.

Dialing Mode Tone*

Pulse

Redial 1-5 Minutes

Interval
Default = 5
minutes

Fax Send Fast*

Speed
Medium

Slow

Dialing Prefix

Detect Dial
Tone

Redial on Range: 0-9

Error
Default = 2

482 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Redial on No Range: 0-2

Answer
Default = 0

Redial on Range: 0-9

Busy
Default = 3

General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature

Settings Confirmation is enabled, you
Disabled* must enter the fax
number twice.

Fax Line Automatic*

Selection
Line 1

Line 2

PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users

who have the
Disabled correct driver
installed to send
faxes through the
printer from their
computers.

Error Line 1* Enabled* When error-

Correction correction mode
Mode Line 2* Disabled is enabled
and an error
occurs during fax
transmission, the
printer sends or
receives the error
portion again.

Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend

or overlay the fax
Overlay header page.

Settings menu 483

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Billing Code Enable Billing Off* When billing codes

Settings Codes are enabled, a
On prompt displays
that asks the
user to enter the
billing code for an
outgoing fax. This
prompt does not
appear if the Allow
users to edit billing
codes check box is
not checked.

You can also

use the billing
codes report in the
Reports menu to
view the list of the
billing codes that
have been used
for faxes that have
been sent from the
printer. The list is
grouped by billing
code and also
shows fax details.
This feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.

Default Specify a default

Billing Code billing code for
faxing. If you
specify a default
billing code, this
code displays in
the Billing Code
field when the
user sends an
outgoing fax. If this
field is blank, no
default billing code
is provided for the
user.

Minimum Range: 1-16 Specify the

Length required length of
Default = 1 the billing code.
Billing codes can
be between 1 and
16 characters long.

Allow users Off

to edit billing
codes On*

Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ring Volume Off Use to configure
Settings settings for
Low* receiving faxes.

High

Rings To Range: 1-6

Answer
Default = 1

484 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fax Receive Fast*

Speed
Medium

Slow

Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have

Schedule concerns about
Always print faxes* the security of
private faxes, use
Use Fax Printing this feature to
Schedule store faxes rather
than having them
automatically
print. Open the Fax
Printing Schedule
sub-menu, and
then you can
choose to always
store faxes, always
print them, or you
can set up a
schedule for each
day of the week.

Schedule + (Add) Print incoming If you are using

faxes a fax printing
Touch this to Edit schedule, use this
set up a fax Store incoming menu to configure
printing Delete (trash faxes when to print
schedule if can) faxes.
you selected Time
the Use Fax
Printing Event Days
Schedule
option.

Settings menu 485

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Blocked Fax Fax Number The blocked fax

Numbers to Block list can contain
up to 30 numbers.
When the printer
receives a call
from one of
the blocked fax
numbers, it deletes
the incoming fax.
It also logs
the blocked fax
in the activity
log along with
job-accounting
information.

Add blocked
numbers: Enter a
fax number into
the Fax Number
to Block field, and
then touch the
arrow button to
add a new number
to the blocked fax
list.

To remove blocked
numbers: Select a
number and touch
the Delete button
to delete it from
the blocked fax list.

To clear all blocked

numbers: Touch
the Delete All
button to clear all
of the numbers
from the blocked
fax list.

You also can use

the Blocked Fax
List report in the
Information menu
to view the list of
the fax numbers
that have been
blocked on this
printer.

486 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Default Job Notification Do not notify* Configure

Options to receive
Notify when job notification about
completes the status of a
sent document.
Notify only if job
fails Do not notify:
Turns off this
feature.

Notify when
job completes:
Select to receive
notification for this
job only.

Notify only
if job fails:
Select to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.

Print E-mail: Select

to receive the
E-mail* notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the
email address for
the notification.

Include NOTE: When

Thumbnail sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail image
of the first page of
the fax in your
notification.

Notification Touch this text

E-mail field, provide the
address email address to
which you want
notifications sent,
and then touch the
OK button.

Stamp On Use this option to

Received add the date, time,
Faxes Off* sender’s phone
number, and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this printer
receives.

Settings menu 487

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fit to Page On* Use to shrink faxes

that are larger
Off than Letter-size or
A4-size so that
they can fit onto
a Letter-size or
A4-size page. If
this feature set
to Disabled, faxes
larger than Letter
or A4 will flow
across multiple
pages.

Paper Tray Automatic*

Select from a list

of the trays.

Out Sides 1-sided* Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
Page flips up select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.

Fax Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward

Forwarding Forwarding received faxes
Enabled to another fax
machine.

Type of Fax All faxes Use to select the

Job to type of fax jobs
Forward Sent faxes that you want
forwarded.
Received faxes*

Fax IP Fax
Forwarding
Method Internal Modem*

Fax Provide the

Forwarding forwarding phone
Number number, and then
touch the OK
button.

Clear Fax Clears all events

Activity Log from the fax
activity log.

488 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manage Low Warning Black 0 %* Set the estimated

Supplies Thresholds Cartridge percentage at
0 %* which the printer
Cyan notifies you when
Cartridge 0 %* a toner cartridge is
very low.
Magenta 0 %*
Cartridge
10 %*
Yellow
Cartridge

Document
feeder kit

Low Warning On Displays a

Threshold message on the
Message Off control panel when
a cartridge is very
low.

Very Low Black Cartridge Stop

Behavior
Color Cartridges Continue

Document Feeder Prompt to continue

Kit

Staples Stop

Prompt to continue

Delay Very Stop Yellow Cartridge 0 After a supply

Low Message pages* reaches the very
Continue low state, the
Magenta warning message
Cartridge 0 pages* can be delayed by
a specified page
Cyan Cartridge 0 count.
pages*

Black Cartridge 0
pages*

Restrict Enable Use this feature

Color Use to enable, restrict,
Disable Color or disable color
printing or copying.
Color if allowed*

Settings menu 489

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Color/Black Auto Instructs the

Mix printer when
Mostly Color to switch
Pages between color
and monochrome
Mostly Black printing modes for
Pages the best overall
performance.

Auto: Uses the

mode that is
appropriate for
the first page
of the job. If
necessary, the
printer switches
modes during the
middle of a job and
then stays in that
mode until the job
is finished.

Mostly Color
Pages: The printer
uses color mode
for all jobs, even if
the job contains no
color pages.

Mostly Black
Pages: The printer
uses monochrome
mode until it
detects a color
page. The printer
switches back
to monochrome
mode when
it detects
a sequence
of several
monochrome
pages.

490 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Store Usage On supplies The Store Usage

Data Data provides
Not on supplies a way to
suppress the toner
cartridges from
storing most of
the information
gathered
exclusively for
the purpose of
understanding the
usage of the
printer. Select
the On supplies
setting to store
the data on the
toner cartridge
memory chip.
Select the Not
on supplies setting
to suppress the
information from
being stored on
the memory chip.

Supply Off* Select to

Protection permanently
Protect Supplies protect cartridges
so that they can
be used only in this
product or fleet of
products.

Cartridge Off* Set Authorized

Policy HP to allow
Authorized HP only genuine HP
cartridges to be
used in this
product.

Reset Document Feeder After replacing a

Supplies Kit supply kit, select it
from the list and
touch "Reset."

Manage Job Offset On

Stapler/
Stacker Off

Developer Use this menu

Options to configure
developer settings
for the product.

Networking Ethernet INFORMATION PRINT YES Yes: Prints a page

SECURITY that contains the
REPORT NO* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.

No: A security
settings page is
not printed.

Settings menu 491

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

TCP/IP HOST NAME Use the arrow An alphanumeric

buttons to edit the string, up to
host name. 32 characters,
used to identify
NPIXXXXXX* the printer. This
name is listed on
the HP Jetdirect
configuration
page. The default
host name is
NPIxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the
last six digits of
the LAN hardware
(MAC) address.

IPV4 CONFIG BOOTP Specifies the

SETTINGS METHOD method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
AUTO IP on the HP Jetdirect
print server.
MANUAL
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a BootP server.

DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a DHCPv4 server.
If selected and
a DHCP lease
exists, the DHCP
Release menu and
the DHCP Renew
menu are available
to set DHCP lease
options.

Auto IP: Use

for automatic
link-local IPv4
addressing. An
address in the
form 169.254.x.x
is assigned
automatically.

If you set this

option to the
Manual setting,
use the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/IPv4
parameters.

DHCP YES
RELEASE
NO*

492 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

DHCP YES
RENEW
NO*

PRIMARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.

Secondary Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

IPV6 ENABLE OFF Use this item to

SETTINGS enable or disable
ON* IPv6 operation on
the print server.

Off: IPv6 is
disabled.

On: IPv6 is
enabled.

ADDRESS MANUAL Use this item

SETTINGS to enable
and manually
ENABLE configure a TCP/
IPv6 address.
ADDRESS

Settings menu 493

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

DHCPV6 ROUTER Router Specified:

POLICY SPECIFIED The stateful
auto-configuration
ROUTER method to be used
UNAVAILABLE* by the print server
is determined by
ALWAYS a router. The
router specifies
whether the print
server obtains
its address,
its configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6 server.

Router
Unavailable: If
a router is
not available,
the print server
should attempt to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

PRIMARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.

SECONDARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

494 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

PROXY Specifies the proxy

SERVER server to be
used by embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree
of Internet security
for those clients.

To specify a
proxy server, enter
its IPv4 address
or fully-qualified
domain name. The
name can be up to
255 octets.

For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.

PROXY PORT DEFAULT = 00080 Enter the port

number used by
the proxy server
for client support.
The port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can
be a value from 0
to 65535.

IDLE DEFAULT = 0270 The time period,

TIMEOUT in seconds, after
which an idle
TCP print data
connection is
closed (default
is 270 seconds,
0 disables the
timeout).

SECURITY SECURE WEB HTTPS REQUIRED*

HTTPS OPTIONAL

IPSEC KEEP

DISABLE*

FIREWALL KEEP

DISABLE*

Settings menu 495

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

802.1X RESET

KEEP*

ANNOUNCE ENABLE*
MENT AGENT
DISABLE

RESET YES
SECURITY
NO*

FIPS KEEP

RESET & REBOOT

DEVICE

LINK SPEED AUTO*

10T HALF

10T FULL

10T AUTO

100TX HALF

100TX FULL

100TX AUTO

1000T FULL

I/O Timeout 15* seconds

Range: 5 to 300

Copy menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Copy menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-11 Copy menu

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Sides Original Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate whether

the original document
2-sided is printed on one or
both sides.

Output Sides 1-sided Use to indicate whether

the copies should be
2-sided printed on one or both
sides.

496 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Color/Black (color Automatically detect* Select how the copy

printers only) should be printed.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Prints color documents
in color, and black and
white documents in
black and white. For
mixed documents, the
printer will determine
whether to print in
color or black and
white.

Color: Prints
documents in color.

Black: Prints
documents in black
and white or grayscale.

Quick Sets and Load

Defaults
Save

Options Sides Original Sides 1-sided

2-sided

Output Sides 1-sided

2-sided

Color/Black (color Automatically detect* Select how the copy

printers only) should be printed.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Prints color documents
in color, and black and
white documents in
black and white. For
mixed documents, the
printer will determine
whether to print in
color or black and
white.

Color: Prints
documents in color.

Black: Prints
documents in black
and white or grayscale.

Copy menu 497

 Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Watermark None* Use this feature to add

a watermark to the
Text document

Secure ● Text: Text is placed

at the center of
the page.

● Secure:
Background text
and pattern that
is barely visible on
the first copy of a
document.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six

preset positions for a
Top Center stamp and configure
the content that will
Top Right be printed there.
Some positions might
Bottom Left require selecting the
stamp from a list of
Bottom Center predefined options.

Bottom Right

498 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Image Overlay Add New Image Use this feature to add

an image to each page
None* of a copy job.

After scanning and

saving the desired
image from the control
panel, this image will
be placed behind the
content on each page
of the copy job.

NOTE: To use this

feature, the images
must be scanned from
the scanner glass.

Follow these steps to

copy using an overlay
image.

1. Touch Image
Overlay, touch
Add New Image,
and then follow
the on-screen
instructions to
scan the desired
image from the
scanner glass.

TIP: For best

results, use the
same paper size
and the same
orientation for the
saved image and
the copy job.

2. Select the saved

image that you
want to add to
each page of the
copy job.

3. Start the copy

job, or select the
Preview option
to preview the
output.

Staple None* Sets the position of the

staple on the page.
Top left angled

Two left

Two to

Top right angled

Two right

Top left or right

Copy menu 499

 Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Hole Punch None*

Three left

Two left

Three top

Two top

Three right

Two right

Two bottom

Four left

Four right

Four left or top

C-fold Max sheets folded Controls the C-fold

together action of the booklet
maker.
Inward fold; opens left
or up

Inward fold; opens right

or down

Outward fold; opens

left or up

Outward fold; opens

right or down

Scan mode Standard Document Book Mode allows the

user to scan pages
Book Mode from a book.

2–sided ID 2–sided ID allows the

user to scan both sides
of an identification
card onto one sheet.

500 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Reduce/Enlarge Automatic* Use to scale the

size of the document
Manual up or down. Select
one of the predefined
● 25% percentages, or select
the Scaling field and
● 50% type a percentage
between 25 and
● 63% (Letter to 400. The Auto option
Statement) automatically scales
the image to fit the
● 64% (11x17 to paper size in the tray.
Letter)
NOTE: To reduce the
● 77% (11x17 to image, select a scaling
Legal) percentage that is less
than 100. To enlarge the
● 78% (Legal to image, select a scaling
Letter) percentage that is
greater than 100.
● 85% (Letter to
Exec)

● 100% (Letter to
Legal)

● 105% (Exec to
Letter)

● 122% (Legal to
11x17)

● 131% (Letter to
11x17)

● 131% (Statement
to Letter)

● 150%

● 200%

● 400%

● Custom1

● Custom2

Image Shift Off* Use this feature to

shift the content of
Automatically center the page. This is useful
for moving the image
Manual away from punched
holes, staples, folds, or
binding edges.

Original Size Select from a list of Describes the page

sizes that the printer size of the original
supports. document.

Copy menu 501

 Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Paper Selection Paper Size For the best color and

image quality, select
Paper Type the appropriate paper
type from the control
Paper Tray panel menu or from the
print driver.

Booklet Booklet Format (Checkbox) Use to copy two or

more pages onto one
sheet of paper so you
can fold the sheets
in the center to form
a booklet. The printer
arranges the pages
in the correct order.
For example, if the
original document has
eight pages, the printer
prints pages 1 and 8 on
the same sheet.

Content Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you
Landscape must specify the way
the content of the
original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In
the Orientation area,
select whether the
original document has
a portrait or landscape
orientation.

Pages per Sheet One (1) Copies multiple pages

onto one sheet of
Two (2) paper.

Four (4) NOTE: Before using

this screen, use the
Content Orientation
screen to describe the
original document
orientation.

Image Adjustment Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing the
sharpness could make
text appear crisper,
but decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

502 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of the
copy.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase or
decrease the amount
of white and black in
the colors.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.

Background Cleanup Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.

Automatic Tone

Auto Paper Color

Removal

Optimize Text/Picture Text Use this setting to

optimize the output for
Mixed* a particular type of
content.
Printed picture
Use Text for documents
Photograph that contain mostly
text. This option is
also best suited for
scanning documents
with highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for

documents that
contain a mix of text
and graphics.

Use Printed picture

for line drawings
and preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books. If you
see bands of irregular
intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed
picture to improve the
quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Copy menu 503

 Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Erase Edges Front Side Use this menu item

to remove blemishes,
● Top edge such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
● Bottom edge cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
● Left edge image. In each of
the text boxes enter
● Right edge the measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
Back Side for how much of the top
edge, bottom edge, left
● Top edge edge, and right edge to
clean.
● Bottom edge

● Left edge

● Right edge

Collate Collate on (Sets in If you are making more

page order)* than one copy, select
the Collate on (Sets
Collate off (Pages in page order) option
grouped) to assemble the pages
in the correct order in
each set of copies.

Select the Collate off

(Pages grouped) option
to group the same
pages together. For
example, if you are
making five copies of
an original document
that has two pages,
all five first pages
would be grouped
together and all five
second pages would
be grouped together.

Blank Page Off* When enabled, blank

Suppression pages found in the
Suppress Blank Pages original document are
not included in the
output document.

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning
Automatically to automatically
Straighten on straighten the scanned
image when pages
are skewed during
scanning.

504 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Output Bin Automatically select

Output bin 1

Output bin 2

Alternate bin

Lower booklet bin

Standard bin

Upper bin

Middle bin

Scan menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Scan menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Scan menu 505

 Table 5-12 Scan menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan to Email File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
● PDF* file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
● PDF/A sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
● JPEG

● TIFF

● MTIFF

● XPS

Resolution

● 600 dpi

● 400 dpi

● 200 dpi*

● 150 dpi

● 75 dpi

Quality and File Size

● Very Low (smaller file)

● Low

● Medium*

● High

● Very High (larger file)

Original 1-sided* Use this feature to describe

Sides the layout for each side of the
2-sided original document

Pages Flip Up Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.

Color

Black/Gray

Black

506 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Watermark None* Use this feature to add a

watermark to the document
Text
Text: Text is placed at the
center of the page.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.

Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.

Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Original Size Select from a list of sizes that Describes the page size of
the printer supports. the original document.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

Scan menu 507

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic Tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

508 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed Picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed Picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Content option to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.

Scan menu 509

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum Pages Per File output into multiple files.

Blank Page Separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Barcode Page Separator Maximum Pages Per File field.
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z
bundles only) When a file type that does
not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum six of
the email also interacts with
this feature. In this case, the
more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do Not Notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.

Notify Only If Job Fails ● SelectDo Not Notify to

turn off this feature

● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.

● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully

Signing and Signing A digitally signed email

Encryption ensures the recipient that you
Encrypt sent this email. An encrypted
message can be opened only
by the recipient.

510 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan to Folder Paths

Network
Folder

File Name

Quick Sets
and Defaults

Options File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

PDF Encryption

Original 1-sided* Use this feature to describe

Sides the layout for each side of the
2-sided original document

Pages Flip Up Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.

Color: Scans documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.

Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.

Scan menu 511

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard document* Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output

● Prompt for additional Use Standard document to

pages scan regular documents
using the default scan
settings.

Use Prompt for additional

pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Content Orientation Portrait* For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Landscape the way the content of
the original document is
placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of
the page is along the top.
In the Orientation area,
select whether the original
document has a portrait or
landscape orientation.

512 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

to increase or decrease
the difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.

Background Adjust the Background

Cleanup Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a faint
image.

Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Automatic The printer automatically

Tone adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
Cleanup settings to the most
appropriate for the scanned
document.

Auto Paper
Color
Removal
(Flow models
only)

Default Select this to make the

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.

Scan menu 513

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Text Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Mixed* type of content.

Printed picture Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Photograph option is also best suited
for scanning documents with
highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to remove

blemishes, such as dark
Back side erase borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
Front side erase of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.

Cropping Do not crop Use this menu item to

Options automatically crop the scan
Crop to content for digital sending. Use the
Crop to content option to
Crop to paper scan the smallest possible
area that has detectable
content.

Blank Page Off* Use to prevent blank pages

Suppression in the original document from
Suppress Blank being included in the output
document.

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)

514 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

● White page Touch the Create Multiple

Files checkbox. Enter the
● Red/pink page maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
● Green page Maximum pages per file field.

● Yellow page When a file type that does

not support multiple pages
● Any color page is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the status
Notify when job completes of a sent document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.

Notify when job completes:

Select to receive notification
for this job only.

Notify only if job fails: Select

to receive notification only
if the job is not sent
successfully.

Scan to USB Folder Path

Drive

File Name

Quick Set
Defaults

Options File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

PDF Encryption

Scan menu 515

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the layout

for each side of the
2-sided original document. First
select whether the original
document is printed on one
side or both sides. Then touch
the Orientation setting to
indicate whether the original
has portrait or landscape
orientation. If it is printed on
both sides, also select the
2-sided format that matches
the original document.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.

Color: Scans documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.

Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of
the page is along the top.
In the Orientation area,
select whether the original
document has a portrait or
landscape orientation.

Use Automatically Detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically Detect setting.
Using Automatically Detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

516 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Darkness Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

to increase or decrease
the difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.

Background Adjust the Background

Cleanup Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a faint
image.

Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Scan menu 517

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automatic The printer automatically

Tone adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
Cleanup settings to the most
appropriate for the scanned
document.

Auto Paper
Color
Removal
(Flow models
only)

Default Select this to make the

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.

Optimize Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the output for

Text/Picture a particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the output
for text, printed pictures, or a
Printed picture mixture.

Photograph Manually Adjust: Use to

manually optimize the setting
for text or for pictures.

Text: Use to optimize the text

portion of the copy when text
and/or pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture: Use for

line drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books.

Photograph: Best suited for

making copies of printed
pictures.

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to remove

blemishes, such as dark
Back side erase borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
Front side erase of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.

Cropping Do not crop Use this menu item to

Options automatically crop the scan
Crop to content for digital sending. Use the
Crop to content option to
Crop to paper scan the smallest possible
area that has detectable
content.

518 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Blank Page Off* Use to prevent blank pages

Suppression in the original document from
Suppress Blank Pages being included in the output
document.

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically retry
(E877, E826 z bundles
only)

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

Blank page separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
● White page Maximum pages per file field.

● Red/pink page When a file type that does

not support multiple pages
● Green page is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
● Yellow page ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
● Any color page are generated per original
document.
Barcode page separator
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z When scanning to email,
bundles only) the configuration option that
specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the status
Notify when job completes of a sent document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.

Notify when job completes:

Select to receive notification
for this job only.

Notify only if job fails: Select

to receive notification only
if the job is not sent
successfully.

Scan menu 519

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Include Select Include Thumbnail to

Thumbnail receive a thumbnail image of
the first page of the job in
your notification.

Scan to Job Sides Original Sides

Storage
● 1-sided

● 2-sided

Output Sides

● 1-sided

● 2-sided

Color/Black Automatically detect Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color*
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.

Color: Scans documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.

Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.

Scan Mode Standard document*

Book

2-sided ID

Reduce/ Automatic*
Enlarge
Manual

Image Shift Off*

Automatically center

Manual

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Paper Paper Size

Selection
Paper Type

Paper Tray

Booklet Booklet Format

520 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

Pages per One

Sheet
Two

Four (right, then down)

Four (down, then right)

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjust Sharpness to clarify

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Scan menu 521

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed picture option is also best suited
for scanning documents with
Photograph highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Collate Collate*

Collate off

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten on straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

522 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)

Scan to Save Use this feature to save

Sharepoint Settings the current settings as the
default settings for an app or
to create a new Quick Set.
First configure the desired
options. Then touch Save
and choose to either save
the current settings as the
default settings for the app or
as a new Quick Set.

File Type and File Type Select File Type and

Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

PDF Encryption

Original Auto (keep sides with content) Use this feature to describe
Sides the layout for each side of the
1-sided* original document

2-sided Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
Pages Flip Up page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.

Color

Black/Gray

Black

Scan menu 523

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.

Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.

Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

524 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

Scan menu 525

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Content option to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.

526 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

Blank page separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Barcode page separator Maximum Pages Per File field.
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z
bundles only) When a file type that does
not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum six of
the email also interacts with
this feature. In this case, the
more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do not notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.

Notify Only If Job Fails ● Select Do not notify to

turn off this feature

● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.

● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully

Remote Scan Use the Remote Scan

Request Request app to scan and
send documents requested
by a remote computer.

Remote scans are initiated on

a computer with applications
such as TWAIN Software
or other AirPrint Compatible
devices

Scan menu 527

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan+ Common Scan Redact and Sign Scan Shortcuts can be used
Shortcuts to quickly set up a job for
OCR specialty tasks.

Document Separation

Barcode Separation

Sticky Notes and Envelopes

2-sided ID

Auto Sense Fastest Scan Speeds Auto Sense Presets make it

Preset easy to optimize a scan job
Best Productivity for fastest scan speeds or
(Recommended) best productivity.

● Fastest Scan Speeds

disables some
automatic features,
which requires less
image processing and
allows scanning at
the fastest speeds
available.

● Best Productivity
enables several
automatic features,
including automatic
sides, automatic content
orientation, automatic
image straightening,
and automatic image
optimization.

NOTE: Unlike Quick Sets,

Auto Sense Preset presets do
not affect destinations and
recipients.

Watermark None* Use this feature to add a

watermark to the document
Text
● Text: Text is placed at the
center of the page.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

528 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Notification Do not notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.

Notify Only If Job Fails ● Select Do not notify to

turn off this feature

● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.

● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully

Scan Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.

Color

Black/Gray

Black

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

Blank page separator Touch the Create Multiple

Files check box. Enter the
Barcode page separator maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Maximum Pages Per File field.

When a file type that does

not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Signing and Signing A digitally signed email

Encryption ensures the recipient that you
Encrypt sent this email. An encrypted
message can be opened only
by the recipient.

Scan menu 529

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Contentoption to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.

Copy Number of Copies (1 to 9999) Use this feature to set the

Copies number of printed copies.

Output Sides 1-sided* Use this feature to set the

layout and format for the
2-sided output.

Pages flip-up Select from the following

options:

● Use 1-sided for originals

that are printed on one
side of the page.

● Use 2-sided for originals

that are printed on both
sides of the page.

● Select Pages flip-up for

originals othat flip on the
top/bottom edge of the
page, such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Automatically detect: Prints

color documents in color, and
Color black and white documents
in black and white. For mixed
Black/Gray documents, the product will
determine whether to print in
color or black and white.

Color: Prints documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Prints documents

in grayscale.

530 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Paper Paper Size Use this feature to select the

Selection paper for the job.
Paper Type
Use Paper Size or Paper
Paper Tray Type to enable the printer
to automatically find the
selected paper size or type.

Use Paper Tray to select a

source tray. Depending on the
administrator's setting, the
product will either print from
that tray first, or it will limit
printing from that tray.

Fax Resolution Standard (100 x 200dpi) Select the resolution for

outgoing faxes. If you
Fine (200 x 200dpi) increase the resolution, faxes
might be clearer but they
Superfine (300 x 300dpi) could transmit more slowly.

Auto Sense Original Auto (keep sides with content) Use this feature to describe
Sides the layout for each side of the
1-sided* original document

2-sided Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
Pages Flip Up page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

Scan menu 531

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic Tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

532 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Advanced File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

DF EncryptionP

Scan menu 533

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.

Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.

Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed)

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Fax menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-13 Fax menu (fax models only)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Dialing Prefix

Fax Recipients

Quick Sets and

Defaults

534 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-13 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Options Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First select
whether the original
document is printed
on one side or both
sides. Then touch the
Orientation setting to
indicate whether the
original has portrait or
landscape orientation.
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

Watermark None* Use this feature to add

a watermark to the
Text document.

● Watermark Text ● Text: Text is placed

at the center of
● Text Font the page.

● Text Size NOTE: Flow models

only.
● Text Color

Stamps None* Select up to six

preset positions for a
Top Left stamp and configure
the content that will
Top Center be printed there.
Some positions might
Top Right require selecting the
stamp from a list of
Bottom Left predefined options.

Bottom Center NOTE: Flow models

only.
Bottom Right

Resolution Standard (100 x Select the resolution

200dpi)* for outgoing faxes.
If you increase the
Fine (200 x 200dpi) resolution, faxes might
be clearer but they
Superfine (300 x could transmit more
300dpi) slowly. Some file types,
for example a file that
will be processed with
OCR, require a specific
resolution. When these
file types are selected,
the Resolution setting
might be automatically
changed to a valid
value.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

sizes that the printer page size of the
supports. original document.

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed) 535

 Table 5-13 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you
Landscape must specify the way
the content of the
original document is
placed on the page.

Portrait: This setting

means the short edge
of the page is along the
top.

Landscape: This
setting means the long
edge of the page is
along the top.

Image Adjustment Sharpness Use to improve the

overall quality of
Darkness the copy. Adjust
the darkness and
Contrast sharpness, and you
can use the
Background Cleanup Background Cleanup
setting to remove
Automatic tone faint images from
the background or
Auto Paper Color to remove a light
Removal background color.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase or
decrease the amount
of white and black in
the colors.

Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.

Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.

Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

536 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-13 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output

for a particular type
Automatically detect Text of content. You can
optimize the output for
NOTE: Flow models Mixed text, printed pictures, or
only. a mixture.
Printed picture
Manually Adjust: Use to
Photograph manually optimize the
setting for text or for
pictures.

Text: Use to optimize

the text portion of the
copy where text and/or
pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture: Use

for line drawings
and preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.

Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.

Fax Line Selection Automatic* HP MFP Analog Dual

Fax 810 Accessory
Line 1 needs to be installed

Line 2

Blank Page Disabled* Prevents blank pages

Suppression in the original
Enabled document from being
included in the output
document.

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning to
Automatically automically straighten
Straighten* the scanned image
when pages are
skewed during
scanning.

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed) 537

 Table 5-13 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Notification Do not notify* Use to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.

Notify only if job fails Do Not Notify: Turns off

this feature.

Notify When Job

Completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.

Notify Only If Job

Fails: Select to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.

Print menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Print menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-14 Print Options menu

First level Second level Values Description

Print from Job Storage Stored Job to Print Untitled Print a job stored on the
printer.
Stored Faxes

Print from USB Drive USB File to Print Choose file to print on USB Print a job stored on a USB
drive. drive.

Fax Polling Fax Polling Number Use the Fax Polling app to
print faxes sent to another fax
machine.

Supplies menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Supplies menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-15 Supplies menu

First level Values Description

Supplies Summary

538 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Table 5-15 Supplies menu (continued)

First level Values Description

Black Cartridge Status

Cyan Cartridge Order HP Part

Magenta Cartridge Pages Printed

Yellow Cartridge Approximate Pages Remaining

Toner Collection Unit Status

Document Feeder Kit Order HP Part

Stapler 1

Trays menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Trays menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-16 Trays menu

First level Second level Values Description

Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list Choose the paper size for the
of supported sizes. tray
Tray 2–x

Type Select paper type from a list Choose the paper type for
of supported types. the tray.

Support Tools menu

The menus under the Support Tools menu contain the options for maintaining the printer and
troubleshooting printer problems. Learn about these menus and settings.

Service menu
Use this menu to access features for diagnosing, maintaining, and repairing the product. You might be
required to sign in to gain access to the Service menu.

● Service Access Code: 03087722

Table 5-17 Service menu

First level Second level Third level

Event Log

Counts

Coverage Report

Scanner Settings

Serial Number

Trays menu 539

 Table 5-17 Service menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level

Service ID

Cold Reset Paper

MPS Settings Low Alerts

MPS Settings Reset Supplies Level

MPS Settings Consumables Access Control

Advanced Service Software Version

Advanced Service Service Reports

Advanced Service ACS ACS Page Adjustment

Advanced Service Adjustment Print Adjustment

Advanced Service Adjustment Buckle Adjustment

Advanced Service Adjustment Finisher Adjustment

Advanced Service *Calibration/Cleaning

NOTE: Refer to the Maintenance menu

map.

Advanced Service Advanced Diagnostics Reset Engine NVM

Advanced Service Advanced Diagnostics Engine NVM Read/Write

Advanced Service Advanced Diagnostics Sensors

Advanced Service Advanced Diagnostics Component Tests

Advanced Service Service Functions TR Control Mode

Advanced Service Service Functions Drain

Advanced Service Service Functions Low-temperature Idling Mode

Advanced Service Service Functions Altitude Adjustment

Advanced Service Service Functions Humidity

Advanced Service Service Functions Footer

Advanced Service Service Functions Low Volume Print Mode

PTT Test Mode

Test Support

Part Replacement Count

Reset Supplies

Fax V.29 Speed

Event Log
Use this menu to view or print a list of the most recent 50 events in the Event Log. For each event, the log
shows the event code, cycle (approximate page count), and description.

540 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Counts
Use this menu to see the total number of pages that have been printed to-date by various product
components. Typically, this is only required when a new formatter is installed.

Before replacing the formatter, print a configuration page to obtain the current counts.

● Service Count: Total sum of Mono Service Count added to Color Service Count.

● Mono Service Count: This count tracks all media picked from all media sources on the device. For
jobs with blank sides or interpreted as mono at the time of media pickup, this count will increment +1
(simplex) or +2 (duplex).

● Color Service Count: This count tracks all media picked from all media sources on the device. For
jobs interpreted as color at the time of media pickup this count will increment +1 (simplex) or +2
(duplex).

● Refurbish Count: Use this item to record the page count when the printer was refurbished.

● Document Feeder Kit Count: Total number of pages since the document feeder kit was replaced.

● Document Feeder Kit Interval: Use this item to set the interval that causes the printer to prompt the
customer to replace document feeder kit.

● Clean Rollers Count: Total number of pages since the document feeder rollers were cleaned.

Counts 541
 ● Clean Rollers Interval: Use this item to set the interval that causes the printer to prompt the
customer to clean the document feeder rollers and separation pad.

● ADF Count: Total pages fed through the document feeder.

● Flatbed Count: Total pages scanned form the flatbed.

● ADF Simplex Count: Total single-sided pages fed through the document feeder.

● ADF Duplex Count: Total two-sided pages fed through the document feeder.

● Copy Scan Count: Total copy pages that have been scanned.

● Send Scan Count: Number of scanned pages sent to email.

● Fax Scan Count: Number of scanned pages that have been faxed.

● Copy Pages Count: Number of scanned pages that have been printed.

Coverage Report
Use this menu to print coverage reports based on print, copy, and fax jobs. The Reset button restores all
estimation of coverages to default.

● All: This will print all average coverage values for a print, copy, and fax job.

● Print: This will print the last page coverage and average coverage values for a print job.

● Copy: This will print the last page coverage and average coverage values for copy job.

Scanner Settings
Use this menu to adjust Scanner setting value manually when a scanned area is inappropriate.

The Clear All button restores all scanner setting values to default.

NOTE: Select the adjustable items on the control panel and adjust the values accordingly.

● Glass – Left edge: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -20 to +20.

● Glass – Rear edge: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -25 to +25.

● ADF – Leading front edge: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -200 to +200.

● ADF – Leading back edge: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -200 to +200.

● ADF – Trailing front edge: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -200 to +200.

● ADF – Trailing back edge: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -200 to +200.

● ADF – Left side front: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -120 to +120.

● ADF – Left side back: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -120 to +120.

NOTE: Negative values crop the edge less and positive values crop the edge more.

542 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-21 Examples of scanner settings

● ADF – Feed direction magnification: Default is 100%. It can be adjusted from 97% to 103%.

Figure 5-22 Examples of Feed direction magnification settings

Serial Number
Use this menu to set the product serial number.

IMPORTANT: Modify the serial number only after replacing the formatter.

Service ID
Use this menu to display the date that the product was first used.

Serial Number 543

 The Service ID menu eliminates the need to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty.

Cold Reset Paper

Use this menu to reset the default paper size after the replacement of a formatter board in a location
using a different standard paper size.

NOTE: The product will restart automatically when this setting changes.

Low Alerts
Use this menu to enable or disable the Supplies Low message.

The Supplies Low message can be enabled or disabled in these locations:

● Control panel

● SNMP alerts

● Remote monitoring tools, such as the Embedded Web Server

Disabling low alerts has the following effects:

● Supplies Low messages are suppressed.

● Supplies Very Low messages still appear.

● The supplies status levels are visible in all locations.

● The control panel menu options for configuring the Low Message and the Low Threshold Settings
are available, but they have no effect.

Reset Supplies Level

Use this menu to reset customized settings for Supplies Low and Supplies Very Low messages and
alerts.

IMPORTANT: Use this menu for products that are under a service agreement with HP.

● Reset to Level 1: When this option is selected, standard menus for Supplies Very Low are available,
and the Supplies Low Threshold is set to 0%. The Supplies Low messages are enabled and Low
Alerts are enabled. Customer can modify the Supplies Low Threshold and the Low message
behavior.

● Reset to Level 2: When this option is selected, standard menus for Supplies Very Low are available,
and the Supplies Low Threshold is set to 0%. The Supplies Low messages are off and Low Alerts are
enabled. Customer can modify the Supplies Low Threshold and the Low message behavior.

● Reset to Level 3: When this option is selected, standard menus for Supplies Very Low are available,
and the Supplies Low Threshold is set to 0%. The Supplies Low messages are off and Low Alerts are
disabled. Customer can modify the Supplies Low Threshold and Low Message settings are set to
standard values for a product that is not under a service agreement with HP.

● Set to non-HP managed mode: When this option is selected, the menu for Supplies Very Low is
removed. The Supplies Low Threshold and Low Message settings are set to standard values for a
product that is not under a service agreement with HP.

544 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Consumables Access Control
Use this menu to lock toner cartridges into the product to help prevent early replacement.

Each cartridge will automatically unlock when it reaches the replacement threshold or encounters an
error. Signing in with Admin or Service credentials will also unlock all cartridges for the duration of the
session.

The settings are as follows:

● Unchecked: Disables this function. The Eject button is always selectable.

● Checked: Enables this function. If a toner cartridge is in the locked state, the Eject button is not
selectable.

Software Version
Use this menu to see the following software versions.

● Engine Firmware Version

● Tray 2 Version

● Tray 3 Version

● Tray 4 Version (*Optional)

● Tray 5 Version (*Optional)

● Finisher Version (*Optional)

● Booklet Version (*Optional)

● Punch Version (*Optional)

● EP Version

● Toner Version

● TR Version

● Fuser Version

Consumables Access Control 545

 Service Reports
Use this menu to print the following reports.

● Supplies Information Report

● Auto Color Registration

● Full Auto Color Registration

● Auto Toning History

ACS Page Adjustment

The ACS (Auto Color Sensing) is a functionality that sets color or mono mode based on original images.

Use this menu to set color or mono mode to save the color toner based on how many mono pages
(default is 5 pages) are continuously printed in a print or copy job.

Print Adjustment
Use this menu to adjust the image position manually and perform the Print Margin Test when the printed
area is inappropriate, or the printed image is skewed to one side.

● Image Position

– Select Tray: Select the tray that needs to be adjusted.

– Front-side Horizontal Shift: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -4 to +4.

+: The printed image will be shifted to the right.

-: The printed image will be shifted to the left.

– Front-side Vertical Shift: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -4 to +4.

+: The printed image will be shifted downward.

-: The printed image will be shifted upward.

– Back-side Horizontal Shift: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -4 to +4.

+: The printed image will be shifted to the right.

-: The printed image will be shifted to the left.

– Back-side Vertical Shift: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -4 to +4.

+: The printed image will be shifted downward.

-: The printed image will be shifted upward.

– Apply to all Trays: If it is checked, all trays will be affected.

546 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-23 Examples of image position shifts

● Print Margin Test

– A3 Skew Pattern: If this option is selected, the printer will print the A3 skew pattern.

– A4 Skew Pattern: If this option is selected, the printer will print the A4 skew pattern.

– 11x17 Skew Pattern: If this option is selected, the printer will print the 11x17 skew pattern.

– Letter Skew Pattern: If this option is selected, the printer will print the Letter skew pattern.

Buckle Adjustment
Use this menu to adjust the Registration Curl value when a printed image has a skew.

IMPORTANT: Check the paper guide on the tray before performing the Buckle Adjustment.

● Process Speed: Default is Full. Select the appropriate speed for the paper type.

● Fast Feed: Default is Off. If On is selected, the printer will feed paper faster.

● Print Side: Default is Simplex. Select the appropriate print side.

● Paper Source: Default is Tray 1. Select the appropriate tray.

● Registration Curl: Default is 0. It can be adjusted form -5 to +5.

Buckle Adjustment 547

 Figure 5-24 Typical faulty image

Finisher Adjustment
Use this menu to adjust settings related to the finisher, such as staple position, folding position, punch
hole position, tamper position, and eject level.

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a finisher is installed.

● Staple position: Use this menu adjust the staple position on the paper.

– Single Front Corner STS: Use this feature to adjust the front corner staple position on the paper.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Figure 5-25 Front corner staple position

548 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

– Single Rear Corner STS: Use this feature to adjust the rear corner staple position on the paper.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Figure 5-26 Rear corner staple position

– Single Front Flat STS: Use this feature to adjust the front flat staple position on the paper.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Figure 5-27 Front flat staple position

Finisher Adjustment 549

 – Single Rear Flat STS: Use this feature to adjust the rear flat staple position on the paper.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Figure 5-28 Rear flat staple position

– Dual Front STS: Use this feature to adjust the front staple position of the dual staple on the
paper

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a booklet finisher or stapler/stacker finisher is
installed.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

550 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-29 Dual front staple position

– Dual Rear STS: Use this feature to adjust the rear staple position of the dual staple on the paper

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a booklet finisher or stapler/stacker finisher is
installed.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Figure 5-30 Dual rear staple position

– Dual All STS: Use this feature to adjust the dual staple position on the paper.

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when an inner finisher is installed

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Finisher Adjustment 551

 Figure 5-31 Dual staple position

● Punch Hole position: Use this menu to adjust the position of punch holes on the paper.

– STS: Use this feature to adjust the STS position of punched holes on the paper.

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a booklet finisher or staple/stacker finisher is
installed with a punch unit.

+: Move the position of punched holes towards the front of the device.

-: Move the position of punched holes towards the rear of the device.

Figure 5-32 Punched holes position (up/down)

– DOF: Use this feature to adjust the DOF position of punched holes on the paper.

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a booklet finisher, stapler/stacker finisher, or inner
finisher is installed with a punch unit.

552 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 +: Move the position of punched holes towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the position of punched holes towards the edge of the paper.

Figure 5-33 Punched holes position (left/right)

● Enable Punch Scan: Use this feature to enable the detection of leading edge of the paper when the
punch is operating.

– On (default): Detect the leading edge of the paper for every page.

– Off: Detect the leading edge of the paper for the first page of the job.

● Tamper Position: Use this menu to adjust the tamper position.

– Front: Use this feature to adjust the front tamper position.

– Rear: Use this feature to adjust the rear tamper position.

+: Move toward the compile center (away from the tamper home).

-: Move away from the compile center (toward the tamper home).

Finisher Adjustment 553

 Figure 5-34 Tamper position

● Finisher Eject Level: Use this feature to adjust the eject level to reduce scattering.

+: Higher level (increased feed time).

-: Lower level (decreased feed time).

● Disable Buffering Option: Use this feature to align paper for stapling in staple jobs.

Off (default): The buffering function is enabled.

On: The buffering function is disabled. This will try to align the paper for stapling, but the job speed
will be slower.

● Manual Staple Position: Use this feature to adjust the manual staple position.

NOTE: This menu item will only be shown when a booklet finisher or stapler/stacker finisher is
installed.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

554 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-35 Manual staple position

● Booklet Staple Position: Use this menu to adjust the staple position of printed booklets for
supported paper sizes.

NOTE: This menu item will only be shown when a booklet finisher is installed.

IMPORTANT: Select paper size you want to use in the menu.

+: Move the staple position towards the leading edge of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the trailing edge of the paper.

Figure 5-36 Booklet staple position

● Booklet Folding Position: User this menu to adjust the folding position of printed booklets for
supported paper sizes.

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a booklet finisher is installed.

IMPORTANT: Select paper size you want to use in the menu.

+: Move the folding position towards the leading edge of the paper.

-: Move the folding position towards the trailing edge of the paper.

Finisher Adjustment 555

 Figure 5-37 Booklet fold position

● Booklet C-Folding Position: User this menu to adjust the c-folding of printed pages for supported
paper sizes.

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a booklet finisher is installed.

IMPORTANT: Select paper size you want to use in the menu.

+: Move the folding position towards the leading edge of the paper.

-: Move the folding position towards the trailing edge of the paper.

Figure 5-38 Booklet C-fold position

Reset Engine NVM

Use this menu to initialize the engine NVM (Non-Volatile Memory) read/write values to the default.

556 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Engine NVM Read/Write
Use this menu to adjust the NVM configuration value for the printing engine operation.

Table 5-18 Engine NVM Read/Write values

Code Name Type Default

107-0260 Period of ITB Band (Page) Read/Write 200

109-0200 StandBy Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0201 StandBy Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0205 Warmup Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0206 Warmup Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0255 Light 60-74g Center Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0256 Light 60-74g Side Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0265 Plain Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0266 Plain Side Temperature offset Read/Write 10

109-0275 Heavy 111-130g Center Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0276 Heavy 111-130g Side Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0280 Extra Heavy 131-175g Center Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0281 Extra Heavy 131-175g Side Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0290 Cardstock Center Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0291 Cardstock Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0300 Envelope Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0301 Envelope Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0305 Labels Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0306 Labels Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0310 Mid-Weight 96-110g Center Read/Write 10

Temperature Offset

109-0311 Mid-Weight 96-110g Side Read/Write 10

Temperature Offset

Engine NVM Read/Write 557

 Table 5-18 Engine NVM Read/Write values (continued)

Code Name Type Default

109-0315 Recycled Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0316 Recycled Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0320 Special Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0321 Special Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0325 1200 dpi_light 60-74g Center Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0326 1200 dpi_light 60-74g Side Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0330 1200 dpi_plain Center Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0331 1200 dpi_plain Side Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0335 1200 dpi_mid-weight 96-110g Read/Write 10

Center Temperature offset

109-0336 1200 dpi_mid-weight 96-110g Read/Write 10

Side Temperature offset

109-0350 Paperboard Center Read/Write 10

Temperature Offset

109-0351 Paperboard Side Read/Write 10

Temperature Offset

109-0360 Color Transparency Center Read/Write 10

Temperature Offset

109-0361 Color Transparency Side Read/Write 10

Temperature Offset

112-0120 Manual Color Regi X-offset Read/Write 100

Yellow

112-0130 Manual Color Regi X-offset Read/Write 100

Magenta

112-0140 Manual Color Regi X-offset Read/Write 100

Cyan

112-0150 Manual Color Regi X-offset Read/Write 100

Black

112-0160 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Read/Write 200

Yellow

112-0170 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Read/Write 200

Magenta

112-0180 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Read/Write 200

Cyan

112-0190 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Read/Write 200

Black

558 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Table 5-18 Engine NVM Read/Write values (continued)

Code Name Type Default

112-0240 Manual Color Regi Left Width Read/Write 500

Yellow

112-0250 Manual Color Regi Right Read/Write 500

Width Yellow

112-0260 Manual Color Regi Left Width Read/Write 500

Magenta

112-0270 Manual Color Regi Right Read/Write 500

Width Magenta

112-0280 Manual Color Regi Left Width Read/Write 500

Cyan

112-0290 Manual Color Regi Right Read/Write 500

Width Cyan

112-0300 Manual Color Regi Left Width Read/Write 500

Black

112-0310 Manual Color Regi Right Read/Write 500

Width Black

112-0320 Color Regi LSU Skew Yellow Read 200

112-0330 Color Regi LSU Skew Read 200

Magenta

112-0340 Color Regi LSU Skew Cyan Read 200

Sensors
Use this menu to check the status of sensors using each sensor’s callout on the control panel.

Select the callout to display the status of the sensor.

NOTE: This image may differ from your control panel display.

IMPORTANT: Include this information when escalating related issues to the GBU engineer.

Sensors 559
 Table 5-19 Sensor types

Name Reference table

Document Feeder Document Feeder sensors

Flatbed Flatbed sensors

ACR/CTD ACR/CTD sensors

Finisher (Option) Finisher (Option) sensors

Covers Cover sensors

Developer Developer sensors

Drum Drum sensors

Environment Environmental sensors

Fuser Fuser sensors

LSU LSU sensors

Paper Path Paper Path sensors

Power Supply Power Supply sensors

TCU TCU sensors

Toner Collection Duct Unit (TCDU) Toner Collection Duct Unit (TCDU)

Toner Toner sensors

Toner Residual Amount Toner Residual Amount sensors

Transfer Transfer sensors

Tray Tray sensors

Stacker Stacker sensors

Table 5-20 Document Feeder sensors

Name Type Status

ADF Top of Form Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Paper Path Deskew Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Paper Present Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Width Sensor Input Numeric

ADF Y Length (Short) Input High/Low

ADF Y Length (Long) Input High/Low

ADF Jam Cover Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Paper Path Pick Height Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Ultrasonic Input Numeric

ADF Pick Success Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Top of Form Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Paper Path Deskew Sensor Input High/Low

560 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-20 Document Feeder sensors (continued)

Name Type Status

ADF Paper Present Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Width Sensor Input Numeric

Table 5-21 Flatbed sensors

Name Type Status

Flatbed Cover Sensor Input High/Low

Flatbed Y (length) short Sensor Input High/Low

Flatbed Y (length) long Sensor Input High/Low

Flatbed Cover Sensor Input High/Low

Table 5-22 ACR/CTD sensors

Code Name Type Status

112-0210 ACR Shutter Sensor Input High/Low

112-0211 ACR Shutter Sensor (through Input High/Low

motor running)

112-0300 Front ID Sensor - P Wave Input Numeric

Value

112-0310 Front ID Sensor - S Wave Input Numeric

Value

112-0320 Rear ID Sensor - P Wave Input Numeric

Value

112-0330 Rear ID Sensor - S Wave Input Numeric

Value

112-0340 Center ID Sensor - P Wave Input Numeric

Value

112-0350 Center ID Sensor - S Wave Input Numeric

Value

112-0210 ACR Shutter Sensor Input High/Low

112-0211 ACR Shutter Sensor (through Input High/Low

motor running)

Table 5-23 Finisher (Option) sensors

Item Code Name Type Status

Booklet End Fence 113-3000 Booklet End Fence Input High/Low

Home Sensor

Booklet Entrance 113-3100 Booklet Entrance Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Exit 113-3120 Booklet Exit Sensor Input High/Low

Sensors 561
 Table 5-23 Finisher (Option) sensors (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Booklet Fold 113-2202 Booklet Maker Input Installed/Not installed

Detection

Booklet Fold 113-3040 Booklet Blade Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Output Tray 113-2150 Booklet Output Tray Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Paddle 113-3050 Booklet C-Fold Blade Input High/Low

Home Sensor

Booklet Paddle 113-3060 Booklet Diverter Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Paddle 113-3090 Booklet Paddle Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Paddle 113-3130 Booklet Presser Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Stapler 113-3010 Booklet Stapler Head Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Stapler 113-3020 Booklet Front Stapler Input High/Low

Cartridge Level Sensor

Booklet Stapler 113-3030 Booklet Rear Stapler Input High/Low

Cartridge Level Sensor

Booklet Tamper 113-3080 Booklet Tamper Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Tamper 113-3110 Booklet Tamper Sensor Input High/Low

Covers 113-0410 Front Cover Sensor Input High/Low

Covers 113-0420 Top Cover Sensor Input High/Low

Ejector 113-0461 Ejector1 Home Sensor Input High/Low

Ejector 113-0462 Ejector2 Home Sensor Input High/Low

Ejector 113-0463 Ejector2 Motor Sensor Input High/Low

End Fence 113-0361 End Fence Sensor Input High/Low

Entrance 113-0350 Entrance Sensor Input High/Low

Exit 113-0360 Exit Sensor Input High/Low

Finisher Connection 113-0351 Finisher Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Sensor

Output Tray 113-0470 Paper Holding Sensor Input High/Low

Output Tray 113-0471 Output Tray Top of Input High/Low

Stack Sensor

Output Tray 113-0472 Output Tray Lower Limit Input High/Low

Sensor

Output Tray 113-0473 Output Tray Motor Input High/Low

Sensor

Paddle 113-0370 Paddle Home Sensor Input High/Low

562 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-23 Finisher (Option) sensors (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Paper Support 113-0481 Paper Support Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Punch 113-0610 Punch Motor Sensor Input High/Low

Punch 113-0612 Punch Home Sensor Input High/Low

Punch 113-0620 Punch Waste Box Input Installed/Not Installed

Sensor

Punch 113-0621 Punch Waste Full Input High/Low

Sensor

Stapler 113-0430 Stapler Head Sensor Input High/Low

Stapler 113-0440 Stapler Cartridge Level Input High/Low

Sensor

Stapler 113-0451 Stapler Cartridge Input High/Low

Detection Sensor

Stapler 113-0491 Stapler Front Sensor Input High/Low

Stapler 113-0492 Stapler Rear Sensor Input High/Low

Stapler 113-0493 Stapler Front Pos Input High/Low

Sensor

Stapler 113-0494 Stapler Rear Pos Input High/Low

Sensor

Tamper 113-0380 Rear Tamper Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Tamper 113-0390 Front Tamper Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Bridge 113-2070 Bridge Entrance Input High/Low

Sensor

Bridge 113-2071 Bridge Exit Sensor Input High/Low

Bridge 113-2180 Bridge Door Sensor Input Closed/Open

Bridge 113-2200 Bridge Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Buffer 113-2100 Buffer Sensor Input High/Low

Buffer 113-2210 Buffer Home Sensor Input High/Low

Manual Stapler 113-2160 Manual Staple Sensor Input High/Low

Manual Stapler 113-2161 Manual Staple Button Input High/Low

Sensor

Punch Detection 113-2201 Punch Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Punch Detection 113-4000 Punch Scan Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Punch Detection 113-4060 Punch Type Detection1 Input High/Low

Punch Detection 113-4061 Punch Type Detection2 Input High/Low

SCU (Set Clam Unit) 113-2010 Paper Holding Home Input High/Low
Sensor

Sensors 563
 Table 5-23 Finisher (Option) sensors (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

SCU (Set Clam Unit) 113-2141 Front Paper Holding Input High/Low
Sensor

SCU (Set Clam Unit) 113-2142 Rear Paper Holding Input High/Low
Sensor

Table 5-24 Cover sensors

Code Name Type Status

102-0352 DCF Feed Cover Open Input Closed/Open

102-0435 Front Cover Sensor Input Closed/Open

102-0436 Side Cover Sensor Input Closed/Open

Table 5-25 Developer sensors

Code Name Type Status

111-0040 Yellow Toner Concentration Input Numeric

Sensor

111-0050 Magenta Toner Input Numeric

Concentration Sensor

111-0060 Cyan Toner Concentration Input Numeric

Sensor

111-0070 Black Toner Concentration Input Numeric

Sensor

Table 5-26 Drum sensors

Code Name Type Status

112-0100 Yellow Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

112-0101 Yellow Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

(through motor running)

112-0110 Magenta Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

112-0111 Magenta Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

(through motor running)

112-0120 Cyan Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

112-0121 Cyan Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

(through motor running)

112-0130 Black Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

112-0131 Black Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

(through motor running)

564 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-27 Environmental sensors

Code Name Type Status

109-0012 Inner Temperature Sensor Input Numeric

109-0013 Outer Temperature Sensor Input Numeric

109-0014 Humidity Sensor Input Numeric

Table 5-28 Fuser sensors

Code Name Type Status

109-0000 Fuser Temperature A Sensor Input Numeric

109-0010 Fuser Temperature B Sensor Input Numeric

109-0016 Fuser Temperature C Sensor Input Numeric

109-0017 Fuser Temperature D Sensor Input Numeric

109-0400 Wrap Jam Sensor Input Numeric

109-0140 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Input High/Low

109-0141 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Input High/Low

(through motor running)

109-0300 Fuser Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Table 5-29 LSU sensors

Code Name Type Status

110-0140 LSU HSync1 Sensor Input High/Low

110-0150 LSU HSync2 Sensor Input High/Low

110-0160 LSU HSync3 Sensor Input High/Low

110-0170 LSU HSync4 Sensor Input High/Low

110-0200 LSU Detection Input High/Low

109-0011 LSU Temperature Sensor Input Numeric

Table 5-30 Paper Path sensors

Item Code Name Type Status

Feed 102-0293 Feed2 Sensor Input High/Low

Feed 102-0361 Fuser Out Sensor Input High/Low

Feed Registration 102-0360 Regi. Sensor Input High/Low

Output 101-0190 Out-Bin Full Sensor Input High/Low

Output 101-0191 Out-Bin2 Full Sensor Input High/Low

(Option)

Output Exit 102-0371 Exit2 Sensor Input High/Low

Sensors 565
 Table 5-30 Paper Path sensors (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Duplex Jam 1 102-0380 Duplex Jam1 Sensor Input High/Low

Duplex Jam 2 102-0390 Duplex Jam2 Sensor Input High/Low

Table 5-31 Power Supply sensors

Code Name Type Status

109-0200 Fuser Relay Sensor Input High/Low

109-0210 Zero Cross Period Input Numeric

101-1000 Power 24V Input Numeric

106-0200 HVPS Detection Input High/Low

Table 5-32 TCU sensors

Code Name Type Status

100-0250 Waste Toner Full Sensor Input Numeric

104-0000 Waste Toner Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Sensor

104-0210 Waste Toner Motor Sensor Input High/Low

104-0211 Waste Toner Motor Sensor Input High/Low

(through motor running)

Table 5-33 Toner Collection Duct Unit sensors

Code Name Type Status

104-0100 Toner Collection Duct Unit Input High/Low

Auger Sensor (through motor
running)

104-0110 Toner Collection Duct Unit Input High/Low

Detection Sensor

Table 5-34 Toner sensors

Code Name Type Status

111-0200 Yellow Toner Dispense Motor Input High/Low

Sensor

111-0201 Yellow Toner Dispense Motor Input High/Low

Sensor (through motor
running)

111-0210 Magenta Toner Dispense Input High/Low

Motor Sensor

566 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-34 Toner sensors (continued)

Code Name Type Status

111-0211 Magenta Toner Dispense Input High/Low

Motor Sensor (through motor
running)

111-0220 Cyan Toner Dispense Motor Input High/Low

Sensor

111-0221 Cyan Toner Dispense Motor Input High/Low

Sensor (through motor
running)

111-0230 Black Toner Dispense Motor Input High/Low

Sensor

111-0231 Black Toner Dispense Motor Input High/Low

Sensor (through motor
running)

Table 5-35 Toner Residual Amount sensors

Code Name Type Status

111-0045 Yellow Toner Residual Amount Input Numeric

Sensor

111-0055 Magenta Toner Residual Input Numeric

Amount Sensor

111-0065 Cyan Toner Residual Amount Input Numeric

Sensor

111-0075 Black Toner Residual Amount Input Numeric

Sensor

Table 5-36 Transfer sensors

Code Name Type Status

100-0090 ITB Engage Sensor Input High/Low

Table 5-37 Tray sensors

Item Code Name Type Status

Tray 1 102-0280 Tray 1 Paper Empty Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 2 102-0000 Tray 2 Open Sensor Input Closed/Open

Tray 2 102-0010 Tray 2 Paper Empty Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 2 102-0041 Tray 2 Paper Size Input Numeric

Sensor

Tray 2 102-0050 Tray 2 Stack Height Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 2 102-0292 Pre Feed2 Sensor Input High/Low

Sensors 567
 Table 5-37 Tray sensors (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Tray 3 102-0070 Tray 3 Open Sensor Input Closed/Open

Tray 3 102-0080 Tray 3 Paper Empty Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 3 102-0111 Tray 3 Paper Size Input Numeric

Sensor

Tray 3 102-0120 Tray 3 Stack Height Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 3 102-0301 Pre Feed3 Sensor Input High/Low

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0730 Tray 4 Knock Up Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0731 Tray 4 Shift Tray Paper Input High/Low

Empty Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0732 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Input High/Low

Sensor1

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0733 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Input High/Low

Sensor2

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0734 Tray 4 Shift Plate Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0735 Tray 4 Shift Plate End Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0736 Tray 4 Gate Solenoid Input High/Low

Home Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0140 Tray 4 Open Sensor Input Closed/Open

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0150 Tray 4 Paper Empty Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0181 Tray 4 Paper Size Input Numeric 3 digits

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0190 Tray 4 Stack Height Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0321 Pre Feed4 Sensor Input High/Low

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0330 Tray 4 Door Open Input Closed/Open

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0320 Tray 4 Feed Sensor Input High/Low

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0210 Tray 5 Open Sensor Input Closed/Open

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0220 Tray 5 Paper Empty Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0251 Tray 5 Paper Size Input Numeric

Sensor

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0260 Tray 5 Stack Height Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0271 Tray 5 Level Sensor1 Input High/Low

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0272 Tray 5 Level Sensor2 Input High/Low

568 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Table 5-37 Tray sensors (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0273 Tray 5 Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Sensor1

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0274 Tray 5 Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Sensor2

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0343 Pre Feed5 Sensor Input High/Low

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0350 Tray 5 Door Open Input Closed/Open

Sensor

Tray 6 (Option) 102-0480 Tray 6 Paper Empty Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 6 (Option) 102-0520 Tray 6 Stack Height Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 6 (Option) 102-0531 Tray 6 Level Sensor1 Input High/Low

Tray 6 (Option) 102-0532 Tray 6 Level Sensor2 Input High/Low

Tray 6 (Option) 102-0533 Tray 6 Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Sensor1

Tray 6 (Option) 102-0534 Tray 6 Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Sensor2

Tray 6 (Option) 102-0353 Pre Feed6 Sensor Input High/Low

Tray 6 (Option) 102-0351 Tray 6 Door Open Input Closed/Open

Sensor

Table 5-38 Stacker sensors

Item Code Name Type Status

Stacker 113-1910 Bridge Entrance Input High/Low

Sensor

Stacker 113-1920 Bridge Exit Sensor Input High/Low

Stacker 113-1930 Stack Exit Sensor Input High/Low

Stacker 113-1940 Bridge Door Sensor Input Closed/Open

Stacker 113-1950 Stack Full Sensor Input High/Low

Component tests
Use this menu to test components such as a motor, clutch, solenoid, fan, or bias, by selecting each
component’s callout on the control panel.

Select the callout and touch the Start button to run the component test.

Component tests 569

 NOTE: This image may differ from your control panel display.

IMPORTANT: Include this information when escalating related issues to the GBU engineer.

Table 5-39 Component types

Name Reference table

Document Feeder Motors Document Feeder Motor component tests

Scanner Motors Scanner Motor component tests

ACR/CTD ACR/CTD component tests

Finisher (Option) Finisher (Option)

Developer Developer component tests

Drum Drum component tests

Duct/Reservoir Duct/Reservoir component tests

Fan Fan component tests

Fuser Fuser component tests

LSU LSU component tests

Paper Path Paper Path component tests

Power Supply Power Supply component tests

TCU TCU component tests

Toner Toner component tests

Transfer Transfer component tests

Trays Tray component testsTray component tests

Stacker Stacker component tests

570 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-40 Document Feeder Motor component tests

Name Type Status

ADF Tray Lift Motor Output Start/Stop

ADF Feed Motor Output Start/Stop

ADF Deskew Motor Output Start/Stop

ADF Pickup Clutch Output Start/Stop

ADF Deskew Clutch Output Start/Stop

ADF Pick Roller Up/Down Output Start/Stop

ADF Retard Motor Output Start/Stop

ADF Exit Motor Output Start/Stop

Table 5-41 Scanner Motor component tests

Name Type Status

Scanner Motor Output Start/Stop

Table 5-42 ACR/CTD component tests

Code Name Type Status

112-0200 ACR Shutter Motor Output On/Off

112-0220 ACR Shutter Open Output On/Off

112-0230 ACR Shutter Close Output On/Off

Table 5-43 Finisher (Option) component tests

Item Code Name Type Status

Booklet End Fence 113-3510 Booklet Fold Motor Output On/Off

Booklet End Fence 113-3520 Booklet End Fence Output On/Off

Solenoid

Booklet End Fence 113-3530 Booklet End Fence Output On/Off

Motor

Booklet Entrance 113-3500 Booklet Entrance Output On/Off

Motor

Booklet Entrance 113-3510 Booklet Fold Motor Output On/Off

Booklet Entrance 113-3520 Booklet End Fence Output On/Off

Solenoid

Booklet Entrance 113-3530 Booklet End Fence Output On/Off

Motor

Booklet Fold 113-3590 Booklet C-Fold Blade Output On/Off

Motor

Booklet Paddle 113-3560 Booklet Diverter Motor Output On/Off

Component tests 571

 Table 5-43 Finisher (Option) component tests (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Booklet Paddle 113-3570 Booklet Presser Motor Output On/Off

Booklet Paddle 113-3580 Booklet Paddle Motor Output On/Off

Booklet Stapler 113-3600 Booklet Stapler Head Output On/Off

Motor

Booklet Tamper 113-3540 Booklet Tamper Motor Output On/Off

Booklet Tamper 113-3550 Booklet Blade Motor Output On/Off

Ejector 113-2530 Pre Ejector Motor Output On/Off

Ejector 113-2540 Post Ejector Motor Output On/Off

Entrance 113-2510 Paper Holding Motor Output On/Off

Entrance 113-2520 Entrance Motor - Output On/Off

Diverter

Entrance 113-2570 Entrance Motor - Output On/Off

Entrance

Exit 113-2500 Main Exit Cam Motor Output On/Off

Exit 113-2580 Exit Motor Output On/Off

Output Tray 113-2610 Main Output Tray Output On/Off

Motor

Paddle 113-2600 Paddle Motor Output On/Off

Paper Support 113-0571 Paper Support Motor Output On/Off

Punch 113-0610 Punch Motor Sensor Input High/Low

Punch 113-0600 Punch Motor Output On/Off

Punch 113-4500 Punch Scan Motor Output On/Off

Stapler 113-0550 Stapler Head Motor Output On/Off

Stapler 113-0581 Stapler Position Motor Output On/Off

Stapler 113-2620 Stapler Position Motor Output On/Off

Stapler 113-2621 Stapler Head Motor Output On/Off

Tamper 113-0520 Rear Tamper Motor Output On/Off

Tamper 113-0530 Front Tamper Motor Output On/Off

Tamper 113-2630 Front Tamper Motor Output On/Off

Tamper 113-2640 Rear Tamper Motor Output On/Off

Bridge 113-2550 Scan Gate Solenoid Output On/Off

Bridge 113-2560 Bridge Motor Output On/Off

Buffer 113-2660 Buffer Motor Output On/Off

Buffer 113-2670 Buffer Solenoid Output On/Off

Covers 113-2650 Top Cover LED - Blue Output On/Off

Covers 113-2651 Top Cover LED - Red Output On/Off

572 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-43 Finisher (Option) component tests (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

End Fence 113-2590 End Fence Motor Output On/Off

Table 5-44 Developer component tests

Code Name Type Status

111-0110 Yellow Toner Control Voltage Output On/Off

111-0120 Magenta Toner Control Output On/Off

Voltage

111-0130 Cyan Toner Control Voltage Output On/Off

111-0140 Black Toner Control Voltage Output On/Off

100-0070 YMC Deve Motor Input High/Low

100-0071 Black Deve Motor Input High/Low

Table 5-45 Drum component tests

Code Name Type Status

100-0046 Yellow Drum Motor Input High/Low

100-0047 Magenta Drum Motor Input High/Low

100-0048 Cyan Drum Motor Input High/Low

100-0049 Black Drum Motor Input High/Low

107-0166 Yellow Eraser Input High/Low

107-0167 Magenta Eraser Input High/Low

107-0168 Cyan Eraser Input High/Low

107-0169 Black Eraser Input High/Low

Table 5-46 Duct/Reservoir component tests

Code Name Type Status

111-0300 Yellow Toner Duct/Reservoir Output On/Off

Motor

111-0310 Magenta Toner Duct/ Output On/Off

Reservoir Motor

111-0320 Cyan Toner Duct/Reservoir Output On/Off

Motor

111-0330 Black Toner Duct/Reservoir Output On/Off

Motor

Component tests 573

 Table 5-47 Fan component tests

Code Name Type Status

100-0270 SMPS Fan Input High/Low

100-0271 SMPS Fan2 Input High/Low

109-0045 Front Fan Input High/Low

109-0020 Fuser Fan Input High/Low

109-0047 Exit Fan Input High/Low

109-0022 Exit Fan2 Input High/Low

109-0024 Exit Fan3 Input High/Low

109-0026 Exit Fan4 Input High/Low

110-0020 LSU Fan1 Input High/Low

Table 5-48 Fuser component tests

Code Name Type Status

109-0034 Fuser Motor - Forward Input High/Low

109-0130 Fuser Gap Motor Output On/Off

Table 5-49 LSU component tests

Code Name Type Status

110-0000 LSU Motor1 Input High/Low

110-0320 LSU Shutter Open Output On/Off

110-0330 LSU Shutter Close Output On/Off

Table 5-50 Paper Path component tests

Item Code Name Type Status

Feed 100-0420 Tray 1 Feed Motor Output On/Off

Feed 101-0120 Tray 2 Feed Motor Output On/Off

Feed 101-0130 Tray 3 Feed Motor Output On/Off

Feed 100-0410 Registration Motor Output On/Off

Feed 101-0140 Tray 4 Feed Motor Output On/Off

(Option)

Feed 101-0150 Tray 5 Feed Motor Output On/Off

(Option)

Feed 101-0160 Tray 6 Feed Motor Output On/Off

(Option)

Output 100-0430 Exit2 Motor - Forward Output On/Off

Output 100-0440 Exit2 Motor - Backward Output On/Off

574 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-50 Paper Path component tests (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Duplex 100-0140 Duplex Motor Output On/Off

Duplex 101-0280 Return Gate Solenoid Output On/Off

Duplex 100-0490 Duplex2 Motor Output On/Off

Table 5-51 Power Supply component tests

Item Code Name Type Status

Transfer 107-0033 THV(-) Bias Output On/Off

Transfer 107-0034 THV CC Bias Output On/Off

Transfer 107-0035 THV CV Bias Output On/Off

Transfer 107-0201 Yellow ITHV Bias Output On/Off

Transfer 107-0202 Magenta ITHV Bias Output On/Off

Transfer 107-0203 Cyan ITHV Bias Output On/Off

Transfer 107-0204 Black ITHV Bias Output On/Off

Drum 105-0000 Yellow MHV Bias Output On/Off

Drum 105-0010 Magenta MHV Bias Output On/Off

Drum 105-0020 Cyan MHV Bias Output On/Off

Drum 105-0030 Black MHV Bias Output On/Off

Developer 106-0000 Yellow Developer Bias Output On/Off

Developer 106-0010 Magenta Developer Output On/Off

Bias

Developer 106-0020 Cyan Developer Bias Output On/Off

Developer 106-0030 Black Developer Bias Output On/Off

Developer 106-0031 Black Developer AC Output On/Off

Bias

Developer 106-0032 Cyan Developer AC Output On/Off

Bias

Developer 106-0033 Magenta Developer AC Output On/Off

Bias

Developer 106-0034 Yellow Developer AC Output On/Off

Bias

Table 5-52 TCU component tests

Code Name Type Status

100-0240 Waste Toner Motor Output On/Off

100-0241 Waste Toner LED Output On/Off

Component tests 575

 Table 5-52 TCU component tests (continued)

Code Name Type Status

104-0200 Toner Collection Duct Unit Output On/Off

Motor

Table 5-53 Toner component tests

Code Name Type Status

111-0000 Yellow Toner Dispense Motor Output On/Off

111-0010 Magenta Toner Dispense Output On/Off

Motor

111-0020 Cyan Toner Dispense Motor Output On/Off

111-0030 Black Toner Dispense Motor Output On/Off

111-0400 Yellow Toner Unlock Motor Output On/Off

111-0410 Magenta Toner Unlock Motor Output On/Off

111-0420 Cyan Toner Unlock Motor Output On/Off

111-0430 Black Toner Unlock Motor Output On/Off

Table 5-54 Transfer component tests

Code Name Type Status

100-0080 ITB Engage Motor Output On/Off

Table 5-55 Tray component tests

Item Code Name Type Status

Tray 1 Clutch 101-0270 Tray 1 Clutch Output On/Off

Tray 1 101-0271 Tray 1 Solenoid Output On/Off

Tray 1 101-0272 Tray 1 Pickup Clutch Output On/Off

Tray 2 100-0200 Tray 2 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Lift

Tray 2 100-0370 Tray 2 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Pickup

Tray 3 100-0210 Tray 3 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Lift

Tray 3 100-0380 Tray 3 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Pickup

Tray 4 (Option) 100-0220 Tray 4 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Lift

Tray 4 (Option) 100-0390 Tray 4 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Pickup

576 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Table 5-55 Tray component tests (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Tray 4 (Option) 101-0101 Tray 4 Shift Gate Output On/Off

Solenoid

Tray 4 (Option) 100-0232 Tray 4 Shift Motor Output On/Off

Tray 5 (Option) 100-0230 Tray 5 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Lift

Tray 5 (Option) 100-0400 Tray 5 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Pickup

Tray 6 (Option) 100-0231 Tray 6 Elevating Motor Output On/Off

Tray 6 (Option) 100-0700 Tray 6 Pickup Motor Output On/Off

Table 5-56 Stacker component tests

Item Code Name Type Status

Stacker 113-1910 Bridge Entrance Input High/Low

Sensor

Stacker 113-1920 Bridge Exit Sensor Input High/Low

Stacker 113-1930 Bridge Door Sensor Input High/Low

Stacker 113-1940 Stack Full Sensor Input High/Low

Stacker 113-1960 Scan Gate Solenoid Output On/Off

Stacker 113-1970 Bridge Motor Output On/Off

Stacker 113-1980 Stacker Motor Output On/Off

TR Control Mode
Use this menu to correct transfer related problems. This menu can be used to change the transfer value
to optimize image quality for a certain type of paper.

TR Control Mode 577

 Figure 5-39 Typical faulty images

● T1 Control Mode

– Process Speed: Default is Full. Select the appropriate speed for the paper type.

– T1 PWM: Default is 0. Each color can be adjusted from -20 to +20. For example:

○ Gray Spot: Increase T1 PWM value of the issued color.

○ Non-Cyclic White Line: Decrease T1 PWM value of the issued color.

○ OPC-Cyclic Ghost: Decrease T1 PWM value of the issued color.

● T2 Control Mode

– T2 PWM: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -20 to +20. For example:

○ Blur: Increase T2 PWM value.

○ Poor Transfer: Increase T2 PWM value.

○ Re-Transfer: Decrease T2 PWM value.

○ White Spot: Decrease T2 PWM value.

○ OPC Cyclic Ghost: Decrease T2 PWM value.

578 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Drain
Use this menu to forcibly purge stressed toner from a development unit into the toner collection unit and
supply new toner to the development unit.

IMPORTANT: Use this feature to improve image problems, such as low density, that occur when many
low-coverage images are printed.

Figure 5-40 Typical faulty images

● Off (default): Disable this function.

● On: Drain level will be set automatically.

● Level: As the level increases, the amount of toner drained will be increased.

Low-temperature Idling Mode

Use this menu to improve print quality in low temperatures (below 7°C/ (44.6 °F)). Environment quality
issues include rib marks (duplex), blisters in the printed image, or poor fusing, as show below.

Drain 579
 Figure 5-41 Typical faulty images

● Off (default): Disable this function.

● On: The printer will perform this function.

NOTE: When this function is enabled, the printer will perform the fuser idle for 4 to 10 minutes before
printing, depending on the outside temperature (below 7°C/ (44.6 °F)). Printing speed is therefore slower
than when this function is off.

Altitude Adjustment
Use this menu to choose the altitude of the place where the printer is located. The print quality is
affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level.

Figure 5-42 Typical faulty images

● Normal (default): 0 ~ 1,000 m (3,280 ft)

● High 1: 1,000 m (3,280 ft) ~ 2,000 m (6,561 ft)

● High 2: 2,000 m (6,561 ft) ~ 3,000 m (9,842 ft)

● High 3: 3,000 m (9,842 ft) ~ 4,000 m (13,123 ft)

580 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 ● High 4: 4,000 m (13,123 ft) ~ 5,000 m (16,404 ft)

Humidity
Use this menu to troubleshoot print quality issues such as paper curl, dog ears, and poor paper stacking
in the stacker output bins.

Increase the Humidity level from High 1 to High 3 until the print quality issues are resolved.

NOTE: Printing speed will be slow when the Humidity level is set to High 3.

Figure 5-43 Typical faulty images

● Normal (default)

● High 1: Preheating Idling for 13 seconds before the first job and increased gap for paper transfer (150
mm (6 in), Simplex only)

● High 2: Preheating Idling for 18 seconds before the first job and increased gap for paper transfer
(200 mm (7.9 in), Simplex only)

● High 3: Preheating Idling for 20 seconds before the first job, increased gap for paper transfer (65 mm
(2.5 in), Simplex only), and 50% process speed slow-down

Vapor Mode
Use this menu to prevent moisture on paper from affecting the print quality, including print-quality
defects such as Dropouts or Background scatter.

Humidity 581
 Figure 5-44 Typical faulty images

● Off (default): Disables this function.

● On: Slows the printing speed by 50% and lowers the temperature of the fusing device when printing.

● Auto: Detects the temperature and humidity in the machine and adjusts the settings accordingly.

Footer
Use this menu to add printing information at the bottom of the printed page.

● Off (default): Disables this function.

● On: The printer performs this function.

PTT Test Mode

Use this menu to determine whether a fax transmission meets local standards.

Test Support
Use this menu to test the items listed below.

● Continuous Scan

● Continuous Copy

● Raw Scan

● Continuous Print From USB

● Automatic Calibrations

● Runtime Configuration

Part Replacement Count

Use this menu to display the number of parts replaced.

582 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Table 5-57 Part Replacement Count items

Item

Black Cartridge

Cyan Cartridge

Magenta Cartridge

Yellow Cartridge

Black Drum

Cyan Drum

Magenta Drum

Yellow Drum

Black Developer Unit

Cyan Developer Unit

Magenta Developer Unit

Yellow Developer Unit

Fuser Kit

Transfer Belt

Transfer Cleaning Unit

Transfer Roller

Tray 1 Roller Kit

Tray 2 Roller Kit

Tray 3 Roller Kit

Tray 4 Roller Kit (Option)

Tray 5 Roller Kit (Option)

Tray 6 Roller Kit (Option)

Reset Supplies
Use this menu to reset the supplies counters.

IMPORTANT: After replacing a supply kit, use this function.

Table 5-58 Reset Supplies items

Item

Black Developer Unit

Cyan Developer Unit

Magenta Developer Unit

Yellow Developer Unit

Transfer Belt

Reset Supplies 583

 Table 5-58 Reset Supplies items (continued)

Item

Transfer Cleaning Unit

Transfer Roller

Tray 1 Roller Kit

Tray 2 Roller Kit

Tray 3 Roller Kit

Tray 4 Roller Kit (Option)

Tray 5 Roller Kit (Option)

Tray 6 Roller Kit (Option)

Fax V.29 Speed

Use this menu to select Line 1 or 2 of V.29, which will transmit at 9600 bps for faxes over VoIP when the
VoIP connection is failing.

Maintenance menu
Use this menu to access features for maintaining the printer.

Table 5-59 Maintenance menu

First level Second level Third level

Backup/Restore

Import/Export

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support ACR Reference Adjustment

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support Auto Color Registration

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support Full Auto Color Registration

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support Custom Color

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support Auto Tone Adjustment

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support CTD Sensor Cleaning

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support Setting Standard Tone

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support Manual Tone Adjustment

Calibration/Cleaning Color Calibration

Calibration/Cleaning Calibrate Scanner

USB Firmware Upgrade

Enhanced 1200 DPI Print Quality

License Management

584 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Backup/Restore
Use this menu to create a backup copy of the product configuration and settings. Use the backup copy
to restore settings when configuration recovery is necessary.

Import/Export
Use this menu to export files that can be used to configure other devices. Select which settings,
contacts, or user accounts to include in the export. The files can be imported to other devices including
those with different capabilities. Any imported settings that are not available on the target device will be
ignored.

Cleaning Page
Use this menu to prevent contamination of the fuser pressure roller. The cleaning page is printed duplex
with a cleaning pattern.

NOTE: You can select Start to manually perform this operation when the printer prints images such
as those shown below.

● Off: Disable this function.

● On: The printer will perform this function regularly (every 100 to 10,0000 pages, Default: 6,000).

● Auto (default): The printer will perform this function within calculated periods based on the usage
pattern.

● Start: The printer performs this function now.

ACR Reference Adjustment

Use this menu to correct the color registration of the LSU unit when the LSU unit is replaced or
reinstalled.

● Start: The printer performs this function now.

● Set to Default: The correction value for color misalignment caused by the LSU unit is cleared and
reset to the initial state

Backup/Restore 585
 Auto Color Registration
Use this menu to correct the color registration automatically when color misalignment occurs.

NOTE: You can select Start to manually perform this operation when the printer prints images such
as those shown below.

Figure 5-45 Color registration errors

● Off: Disable this function.

● On (default): The printer will perform this function within the determined conditions. After selecting
“On”, you can select the condition(s) for the Automatic Color Registration.

– Page Condition: The printer will perform ACR based on the count of printed pages since the last
ACR. (Printed Pages:100 to 5000, Default: 500)

– LSU Temperature: The printer will perform ACR when the LSU temperature of the device
increases or decreases by the configured value since the last ACR. (Temperature increment:
1° to 10° C 33.8° to 50° F, Default: 3° C 37.4 F).

● Start: The printer performs this function now.

Full Auto Color Registration

Use this menu to the correct color registration of the printer automatically when color misalignment
occurs. This function is an enhanced version of the Auto Color Registration, and takes a few minutes to
complete.

NOTE: You can select Start to manually perform this operation when the printer prints images such
as those shown below.

586 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-46 Color registration errors

● Off: Disables this function.

● On (default): The printer will perform this function during boot up.

● Start: The printer performs this function immediately (after first selecting On).

Custom Color
Use this menu to adjust the color density manually in order to meet the customer's needs.

● Yellow: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -10 to +10.

● Magenta: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -10 to +10.

● Cyan: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -10 to +10.

● Black: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -10 to +10.

Auto Tone Adjustment

Use this menu to adjust color tone automatically.

● Off: Disables this function.

● On (Default): The printer will perform this function when the following determined conditions have
been met.

– After Pages Printed: The printer will perform this function based on the count of printed pages
since the last execution.

– After Period of Inactivity (Minutes): The printer will perform this function when the printer returns
from a power save mode and the rest time exceed the configured value.

– Adaptive: Unchecked as a default.

Custom Color 587

 ● Start: The printer performs this function now.

NOTE: Select Start to manually perform this operation when the control panel displays sensor failure
errors such as “CTD sensor calibration failure,” or when imaging parts such as the OPC drum,
development unit, or ITB unit are replaced or reinstalled.

CTD Sensor Cleaning

Use this menu to calibrate the CTD sensor after cleaning the CTD and ACR sensor, when the control
panel displays sensor errors such as “CTD sensor calibration failure” or “ACR sensor calibration failure.”

● Start: The printer performs this function immediately, and the sensor failure error message is
cleared from the control panel.

Setting Standard Tone

Use this menu to adjust the color tone to the standard tone set by the factory.

This function must be executed when the printer is first installed.

● Start: Perform this function by completing the following the steps.

1. Load A4 or Letter-size paper in a short-edge feeding (SEF) tray. Select Next to continue.

2. Confirm that the scanned ID chart is correct. Select Next to continue.

3. Load the scanned ID chart on the flatbed as indicated. After the page is loaded, select Next
continue.

4. After calibrating the scanner, confirm the results of the calibration. Select Finish to complete.

588 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 5. After completion, start the Auto Tone Adjustment so that the Standard Tone can be applied
immediately.

● Set to Default: Restores the Standard Tone setting to default values.

NOTE: Select Start to manually perform this operation after replacing the ITB unit or cleaning the
CTD sensor.

NOTE: When a problem occurs with the scanned ID chart, an error message displays. Check the
following items:

● Check the scanned ID chart for correct placement.

● Make sure that the chart direction is horizontal.

● Retry the Setting Standard Tone procedure.

Manual Tone Adjustment

Use this menu to adjust the color tone manually.

This function can adjust Highlights, Midtones, and Shadows.

● Yellow: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -5 to +5.

● Magenta: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -5 to +5.

● Cyan: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -5 to +5.

● Black: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -5 to +5.

Color Calibration
Use this menu to perform a color calibration manually. This process is very similar to the Auto Color
Registration process.

● Start: The printer performs this function immediately.

Manual Tone Adjustment 589

 Calibrate Scanner
Use this menu when messages on the control panel direct you to run the calibration process.

● Start: The printer performs this function immediately.

USB Firmware Upgrade

Use this menu to perform a firmware upgrade using a USB flash drive.

Insert the USB flash drive that contains a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and then follow the
on-screen instructions.

● Install: Executes the firmware upgrade.

Enhanced 1200 DPI Print Quality

Use this menu to control printed image quality and performance when printing with 1200 dpi.

● Off (default): Printing speed is improved, but the image quality is lower than when the Enhanced 1200
DPI Printer Quality option is enabled.

● On: Image quality is improved, but the printing speed is slower than when the Enhanced 1200 DPI
Printer Quality option is disabled.

License Management
Use this menu to install a speed license, which will configure the engine to print at an upgraded speed.

Use one of the following procedures to install the speed license.

● Install a speed license from the HP Cloud using the control panel.

IMPORTANT: When an inner finisher is installed, the printer cannot exceed 60 pages-per minute
(ppm). Do not install a speed license higher than 60 ppm for a printer with an inner finisher
installed.

1. Connect a network cable to the printer.

2. Turn the printer power on, and wait for it to initialize to the Ready state.

3. Verify that the printer has a valid IP address and a working internet connection.

NOTE: A proxy server might need to be configured now using the Embedded Web Server
(EWS) or manually at the control panel.

4. At the printer Home screen, scroll to and then touch the Support Tools button.

5. Select the License Management menu in the left-side navigation pane.

6. Select License from HP Cloud under Upload and Install License.

IMPORTANT: A redemption code must be obtained from the HP Printer License Activation
and Management website. https://activation.jamangement.hp.com.

7. Type in the redemption code obtained from the HP Printer License Activation and Management
website.

590 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 8. Select the Register and Install button.

NOTE: The printer restarts as part of the installation process. Wait at least a few minutes
after the printer initializes to the Ready state to allow the speed license installation process to
finish completely.

● Install a speed license offline manually using the HP Printer License Activation and Management
web site.

IMPORTANT: When an inner finisher is installed, the printer cannot exceed 60 pages-per minute
(ppm). Do not install a speed license higher than 60 ppm for a printer with an inner finisher
installed.

1. Download the speed license file to the PC from the HP Cloud Server.

a. Open a browser and go to the HP Printer License Activation and Management website:
https://activation.jamanagement.hp.com.

b. Select the country/region and SIGN IN on the HP Partner Portal.

c. Select Activation speed for new HP LaserJets or select Product Number.

d. Type the printer serial number in the Device Serial Number field.

e. Use the drop-down menu to select the Device Product Number.

f. Type in the redemption code in the Redemption Code field.

NOTE: A redemption code must be obtained from the HP Printer License Activation and
Management website. https://activation.jamanagement.hp.com.

License Management 591

 g. Click the Register button.

h. When the registration is complete, download the speed license file to the computer, and
then transfer it to a USB storage device.

CAUTION: The license file must be saved in the root directory of the USB device. Do not
change the license file name.

2. Use the steps below to manually install the speed license.

a. Turn the printer power on, and wait for it to initialize to the Ready state.

b. Insert the USB into the USB port on the printer.

c. At the printer Home screen, scroll to and then touch the Support Tools button.

d. Select License from the USB under Upload and Install License.

e. Touch the Register and Install button.

IMPORTANT: The printer installs the highest speed license among the license files on the
USB device. Remove any license files for speeds above 60 ppm for a printer with an inner
finisher installed. Speed upgrades cannot be downgraded.

NOTE: If the USB device is not detected, remove the USB device and turn the printer
power off. Reinsert the USB device, and then turn the printer power on.

592 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Troubleshooting menu
Use this menu to access features for troubleshooting the printer.

Table 5-60 Troubleshooting menu

First level Second level

Reports Configuration/Status Pages

Reports Fax Reports

Reports Other Pages

Fax Tools Fax T.30 Trace Report

Fax Tools Fax V.34

Fax Tools JBIG Compression

Fax Tools Fax Speaker Mode

Fax Tools Fax Service Log

Fax Tools IP Fax Trace Report

Fax Tools IP Fax Log Level

Fax Tools IP Fax Multitasking

Print Quality Pages PQ Troubleshooting Pages

Print Quality Pages Color Band Test

Print Quality Pages Advanced Print Quality Pages

Event Log

Paper Path Page

Diagnostic Tests Run Fax Test

Retrieve Diagnostic Data

Retrieve Fax Diagnostic Data

Troubleshooting menu 593

 Configuration/Status Pages
Use this menu to display ( ) or print ( ) the information listed below.

NOTE: For more information on these reports, see Reports menu.

● Settings Menu Map

● Current Settings Page

● Configuration Page

● How to Connect Page

● Supplies Status Page

● Usage Page

● File Directory Page

● Web Services Status Page

● Color Usage Job Log

● HP Flex Build Configuration Page

● Event Log

● Paper Path Page

Fax Reports
Use this menu to display ( ) or print ( ) the information listed below.

● Fax Activity Log

● Billing Codes Report

● Blocked Fax List

● Fax Call Report

Other Pages
Use this menu to print ( ) the information listed below.

● Demonstration Page

● RGB Samples

● CMYK Sample

● PCL Font List

● PS Font List

● Secure Drum Data Erase

594 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Fax T.30 Trace Report
Use this menu to print the Fax trace reports with the selected conditions on each Line 1 or Line 2.

The T.30 trace is a printed report which produces a record of all the communications between the
sending and receiving fax machines for the last fax transmission or reception. The report has many
technical details which are usually beyond the scope of most users. However, the report contains
detailed error codes and other information that might be useful in troubleshooting a particular problem
related to sending or receiving a fax. The report contents might be requested by an HP service
representative when trying to determine the cause of a problem and will help to determine the
appropriate action.

● Never automatically print: The printer does not print the fax trace report.

● Print after every fax: The printer will print the fax trace report after every fax job.

● Print only after fax send jobs: The printer will print the fax trace report after sending a fax job.

● Print only after received faxes: The printer will print the fax trace report after receiving a fax job.

● Print only after fax send errors: The printer will print the fax trace report when a fax sending error
occurs.

● Print only after fax receive errors: The printer will print the fax trace report when a fax receiving error
occurs.

● Print only after any fax error: The printer will print the fax trace report when any fax error occurs.

● Print Now: The printer prints the fax trace report immediately.

Fax V.34
Use this menu to resolve a fax sending or receiving problem on each Line 1 or Line 2.

The V.34 setting is the modem protocol that the printer uses to send faxes. It is the worldwide standard
for full-duplex modems that send and receive data across telephone lines at up to 33,600 bits per
second (bps). The factory-set default for the V.34 setting is On.

You should change the V.34 setting only if you are having trouble sending a fax to or receiving a fax from
a particular device. Turning off the setting might be useful when you are trying to send a fax overseas, or
receive one from overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.

● Enable (default): The Fax V.34 is activated.

● Disable: The Fax V.34 is not activated.

JBIG Compression
Use this menu to resolve a fax sending problem when another receiving fax device cannot support it.

JBIG compression can reduce fax transmission times significantly when enabled. When enabled,
documents will be JBIG encoded when sending and receiving with another JBIG capable fax device.
When a fax is sent to or received from a non-JBIG capable device, other compression algorithms will be
used.

● On: JBIG compression is enabled.

● Off (default): JBIG compression is disabled.

Fax T.30 Trace Report 595

 Fax Speaker Mode
Use this menu to enable or disable the fax speaker mode.

● Normal (default): The fax modem speaker is turned on during dialing through the initial connection
and then shuts off.

● Diagnostic: The speaker is turned on and remains on for all fax communications until the setting is
returned to Normal mode.

Fax Service Log

Use this menu to print the detailed fax service log.

● Print: The printer prints the detailed fax service log.

PQ Troubleshooting Pages
Use this menu to check the print quality with a printed test page.

● Print: The printer prints the PQ troubleshooting pages.

The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the PQ troubleshooting pages. Review the PQ
troubleshooting pages, and perform the corresponding troubleshooting procedure below.

NOTE: The images below are only examples and may not exactly match your output. Black toner is
being used for clarity.

Toner smear
As shown below, the issue may vary in location and appearance.

Description

A portion of the image is smeared in the feed (horizontal) direction. The section that is smeared may be a
narrow or wide streak, and may extend across the entire page.

Most likely causes

596 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

● An internal part of the intermediate-transfer belt (ITB) unit is out of place and is smearing the black
toner over the surface of the ITB unit.

● Smears occur more commonly after a paper jam, or during the first daily printing in a high-
temperature, high-humidity environment.

● Torn edges of media caught in the ITB unit cleaning blade and not cleared after a paper jam can also
cause toner smear.

Troubleshooting and suggestions

1. If the smear was first observed after a paper jam, check the ITB unit for torn pieces of paper. Then
go to the next step.

2. Print approximately 10 pages to see if the smear clears. If the toner smear still can be observed, go
to the next step.

3. Replace the ITB unit.

4. After replacing the ITB unit, print another set of PQ troubleshooting pages.

5. Look at the new set of PQ troubleshooting test pages. If the issue is not resolved, contact HP.

ITB cleaning blade streak

As shown below, the issue may vary in location and appearance.

Description

The page has one or more dark or brown streaks in the feed (horizontal) direction that extend across the
entire page (outside the printable area).

Most likely causes

● The cleaning blade in the intermediate-transfer belt (ITB) unit may be nicked or deformed.

Troubleshooting and suggestions

1. 1. Print 10-30 PQ troubleshooting pages to see if the streaks clear.

2. If the streaks continue, replace the ITB unit.

PQ Troubleshooting Pages 597

 3. After replacing the ITB unit, print another set of PQ troubleshooting pages.

4. Look at the new set of PQ troubleshooting test pages. If the issue is not resolved, contact HP.

Sharp banding repeating

As shown below, the issue may vary in location and appearance.

Description

Pages print with sharp, narrow, dark bands repeating.

Most likely causes

● The developer roller in the black image drum.

Troubleshooting and suggestions

1. Replace the black image drum.

2. After replacing the black image drum, print another set of PQ troubleshooting pages.

3. Look at the new set of test pages. If the issue is not resolved, contact HP.

Partial Missing color plane

As shown below, the issue may vary in location and appearance.

598 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Description

The background color of the black test page is missing toner. The boundary between where the toner is
present and not present creates a wavy pattern.

Most likely causes

● One of the transfer rollers in the intermediate-transfer belt unit does not have even pressure across
the belt.

● Toner level is low in the black image drum and there is a problem replenishing the toner from the
black toner cartridge.

Troubleshooting and suggestions

1. Check the ITB unit to see whether the bushings are correctly positioned.

2. Print another set of PQ troubleshooting pages.

3. Look at the new set of test pages. If the issue is not resolved, then check the printer toner cartridge.

4. Print and examine another set of PQ troubleshooting pages.

5. If the issue is not resolved by the black image drum test procedure, contact HP.

Color Band Test

Use this menu to print a color band test page.

● Copies: 1 to 30 (default:1)

● Print: The printer prints the color band test pages.

Advanced Print Quality Pages

Use this menu to print test pages with the selected test page type.

● Print: The printer prints the selected quality test pages

– EP Calibration Pattern2 Halftone

Color Band Test 599

 – Tone Curve Int Calibration YM Pattern

– Tone Curve Int Calibration CK Pattern

– Tone Curve Ext Measurement Page

– Black Mechanical Banding Page

– Cyan Mechanical Banding Page

– Magenta Mechanical Banding Page

– Color Registration Check for Motion

Event Log
Use this menu to display and print event logs such as an event code, date/time, cycles and repetitions on
the printer.

● Print ( ): The printer prints the event logs.

Paper Path Page

Use this menu to display and print a paper path usage on the printer.

● Print: The printer prints the paper path usage report.

Run Fax Test

Use this menu to perform tests on specific components within the product to determine whether the
components are functioning correctly.

The printer prints a fax test report. The report contains the following possible results.

● Pass: The report contains all of the current fax settings. The printer is ready to send and receive
faxes.

● Fail: The report indicates the nature of the error and contains information on how to resolve the
issue.

Retrieve Diagnostic Data

Use this feature to generate debug data and to retrieve that diagnostic data from the product.

Select from the following options:

● Create zipped debug information file: This option creates a .zip file that can be saved only to a USB
device.

● Create device data file: This option creates a device data file. By default it is sent to a USB drive.
Select Send to Email to send the file as an email instead.

Retrieve Fax Diagnostic Data

Use this menu to export Fax diagnostic data from the printer using a USB drive.

Insert a USB drive into the USB port. Click the Save button.

600 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

6 Remove and replace

You will learn more about remove and replace.

Before servicing
Learn about ordering parts, using part lists. electrostatic precautions, and the HP service approch.

Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 6-1 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.

How to use parts lists and diagrams

Learn how to use the parts lists and diagrams.

The figures in this chapter show the major sub-assemblies in the printer and their component parts.
A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. The table lists the item number, the
associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a
field replacement unit (FRU).

NOTE: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical parts, pay
careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the part description. Doing so will make sure that the
selected part number is for the correct printer model.

Remove and replace 601

 NOTE: The abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as
a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and
sensors.

ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If
an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground
before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Service approach
Learn more about the service approach.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when assembling and disassembling

● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage,
and current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the
machine, circuit overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause
the printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This
printer contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short
circuit or electric shock.

● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is
disassembled, dust might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There
are no serviceable parts inside the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCAs

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

602 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 – Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when
releasing them. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is
latched.

Before performing service

Learn what to do before performing service.

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Remove any finishing devices and the side HCI, if they are installed.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an
ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the toner cartridges, if needed.

After performing service

Learn what to do after performing service.

● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new
issues.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Before performing service 603

 Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.

1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print
quality defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Copy-quality test
Learn about the copy-quality test.

1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder, print a copy job, and then verify the results.

2. Place the configuration page on the flatbed glass, print a copy job, and then verify the results

Fax-quality test
Learn about the fax-quality test.

1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder.

2. Type a valid fax number, and send the fax job.

3. Verify that the send quality and the receive quality meet expectations.

Parts removal order

For procedures and/or steps that require identifying the right, left, or rear side of the printer, face the
front of the printer for correct orientation.

Essential adjustments when replacing or reinstalling the

supplies or LLCs
Adjustments required when replacing or reinstalling specific parts.

When replacing or disassembling-reinstalling the following major LLC parts that can affect print quality
among the parts installed in the device, essential processes must be performed to maintain optimal
printing quality.

Please be careful as registration problems or low-quality images may be output if the required elements
are not performed. Different processes may be required for each product or part.

604 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Applicable items
The following parts require essential adjustments when replaced.

LSU, Developer unit, ITB unit, Drum unit, Drum and developer drive assembly(or single drum motor), and
CPR assembly

LSU

● How to perform the ACR Reference Adjustment

● How to perform Auto Color Registration

● How to perform Auto Tone Adjustment, recommended to proceed 2 or 3 times

● How to set Standard Tone, optional

Developer unit or ITB

● How to perform Auto Color Registration

● How to perform Auto Tone Adjustment, recommended to proceed 2 or 3 times

● How to set Standard Tone, optional

● How to Reset Supplies

Drum unit, Drum and developer drive assembly, or CPR assembly

● How to perform Auto Color Registration

● How to perform Auto Tone Adjustment, recommended to proceed 2 or 3 times

● How to set Standard Tone, optional

● Reset Supplies

NOTE: HP provides not only the drum and developer drive assembly, but also the motor within this
part for service. When replacing this single motor, you must follow the same recommended process
above to operate the product in optimal condition.

How to perform the ACR Reference Adjustment

Use the following to adjust the ACR reference.

A pattern is printed out to determine the linearity characteristics of the main laser scanning direction,
and detailed laser scanning unit correction is performed by scanning this pattern. This function must be
performed after LSU replacement or LSU reinstalling.

1. Open the following menus:

● Service Tools

● Service - Access Code

● Advanced Service

● Calibration/Cleaning

● ACR Reference Adjustment

How to perform the ACR Reference Adjustment 605

 2. Follow the guidance on the screen and perform the calibration process.

a. Select the “Start” button.

b. Load A4 size blank paper in Tray 3 LEF (long edge feeding) direction. Then touch Next.

606 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

c. A test pattern will print out, check the arrow direction on the printed image then touch Next.

d. Load the printed page on the flatbed as indicated, be sure to set the direction with arrow
direction. Then touch Next.

How to perform the ACR Reference Adjustment 607

 e. Calibration will be processed, then check whether the process has correctly finished.

NOTE: If the calibration process failed, the device will show an error message ( ).

● (0) - Success

● (1) (2) (3) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (ff) - pattern identification, engine, scanning error during the
process.

In this case, do the adjustment process again and check the hardware installment
condition again.

How to perform Auto Color Registration

Use this procedure to run the auto color registration.

Use this menu to correct the color registration automatically when color misalignment occurs.

Figure 6-1 Color registration errors

608 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Open the following menus:

● Service Tools

● Service - Access Code

● Advanced Service

● Calibration/Cleaning

● Full Auto Color Registration (E786 /E877 series) or Auto Color Registration (E785 series)

2. Select the Start button to perform the calibration process immediately. It may take several minutes.

How to perform Auto Tone Adjustment

Use the following to adjust the auto tone.

If the tone (density) of the printed image is not appropriate, use this function to adjust it for correct
expression.

It is recommended to perform this function when parts related to image output have been replaced or
reinstalled.

When this function is performed, a test pattern is drawn on the ITB, and the CPR sensor recognizes it
and automatically adjusts the concentration to produce optimal printing results.

1. Open the following menus:

● Service Tools

● Service - Access Code

● Advanced Service

● Calibration/Cleaning

● Auto Tone Adjustment

How to perform Auto Tone Adjustment 609

 2. Select the Start button to perform the calibration process immediately. It might take several
minutes.

3. It is recommended to perform 2 or 3 times.

How to set Standard Tone

Use the following process when setting standard tone.

If the tone (density) of the printed image is not appropriate, use this function to adjust it for correct
expression. It is recommended to perform this function when parts are related to the image.

This is an Optional procedure.

1. Open the following menus:

● Service Tools

● Service - Access Code

● Advanced Service

● Calibration/Cleaning

● Setting Standard Tone

610 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Select the Start button to perform the calibration process immediately.

a. Load new paper into Tray3 in the same orientation short edge first (SEF) as shown in the
picture then press the Next button.

How to set Standard Tone 611

 b. One sheet of test pattern is printed. Check if output page is printed correctly. Then touch Next.

c. Place the printed test pattern on the flatbed scanner. Make sure the arrow on the printout is
located in the upper left corner as shown in the picture. Touch Next to continue.

612 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 d. The Calibration procedure will be processed. Check whether the procedure completed
successfully.

NOTE: If the calibration process failed, the device will show an error message ( ).

● (0) - Success

● (1) (2) (3) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (ff) - pattern identification, engine, scanning error during the
process.

In this case, do the adjustment process again and check the hardware installment
condition again.

How to Reset Supplies

Use the following procedure to reset the supplies.

When replacing a supply that does not store usage-related data, you must access Service Tools to
initialize usage information. If you do not go through this process, you may not be able to use the product
properly for its entire life.

1. Open the following menus:

● Service Tools

● Service - Access Code

● Reset Supplies

2. Check the supply kit that needs to be reset and then press the Reset button.

NOTE: Selectable supply kits may vary depending on the product.

How to Reset Supplies 613

 Base printer
Learn about base printer parts removal and replacement.

Covers
Learn about base printer cover replacement.

Base covers
Review the base cover removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the rear upper cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the rear upper cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

614 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-2 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40008 Rear upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-2 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the controller cover 615

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-3 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-4 Remove the screw caps

616 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-5 Remove the cover

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 617

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover

Learn about removing and replacing the rear lower cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the rear lower cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-3 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40019 Rear lower cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

618 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-6 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-7 Remove the cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the rear lower cover 619

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Controller cover

Learn about removing and replacing the controller cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the controller cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

620 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-4 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-61005 Controller cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-8 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the controller cover 621

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the exit rear cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the exit rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

622 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-5 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40028 Exit rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

●
Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-9 Remove two screws

Remove the middle left cover 623

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-10 Remove the cover

2. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-11 Remove the cover

3. Remove the exit rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit rear cover.

624 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-12 Remove the cover

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 625

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left top cover

Learn about removing and replacing the left top cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the left top cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-6 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04862B Left top cover

Required tools
● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

626 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-13 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 627

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the left upper cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the left upper cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-7 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40027 Left upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

628 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-14 Remove the cover

2. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-15 Remove eight screws

Remove the left cover 629

 3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-16 Cover hook locations

4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-17 Remove the cover

3. Remove the left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

630 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-18 Remove the cover

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 631

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the left cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the left cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-8 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40049 Left cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

632 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-19 Remove the cover

2. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-20 Remove eight screws

Remove the left cover 633

 3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-21 Cover hook locations

4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-22 Remove the cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

634 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Middle upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the middle upper cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the middle upper cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-9 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40026 Middle upper cover

Removal and replacement: Middle upper cover 635

 Required tools
● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle upper cover.

1. Rotate the control panel into the upright position.

Figure 6-23 Raise the control panel

2. Use a pair of tweezers to release the cover, and then remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

636 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-24 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 637

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door sHCI dummy cover

Learn about removing and replacing the right door sHCI dummy cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the right door sHCI dummy cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-10 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04918B Right door sHCI dummy cover

Required tools
● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right door sHCI dummy cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door sHCI dummy cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to release the cover. Remove the cover.

TIP: Position the tweezers as shown below.

638 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-25 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 639

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the right upper cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the right upper cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-11 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40021 Right upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

640 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-26 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-27 Remove the cover

2. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 641

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-28 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-29 Remove one screw

642 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-30 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-31 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 643

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-32 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-33 Remove the keyboard

3. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

644 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-34 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-35 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 645

 Figure 6-36 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-37 Remove the cover assembly

4. Remove the right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right upper cover.

646 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-38 Remove five screws

2. Remove one screw (circled), and then carefully slide the cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-39 Remove the cover

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 647

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the right rear cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the right rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-12 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-61003 Right rear cover

648 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-40 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 649

 Figure 6-41 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

650 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right front cover

Learn about removing and replacing the right front cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the right front cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-13 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40005 Right front cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

Removal and replacement: Right front cover 651

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-42 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door, remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-43 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

652 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right middle cover assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the right middle cover assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the right middle cover assembly.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-14 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-61006 Right middle cover assembly

Removal and replacement: Right middle cover assembly 653

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-44 Remove two screws

654 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-45 Remove the cover

2. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-46 Remove one screw cap

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 655

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-47 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-48 Remove the cover

656 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-49 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-50 Remove four screws

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 657

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-51 Remove the keyboard

3. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-52 Remove two screws

658 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-53 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-54 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 659

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-55 Remove the cover assembly

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

660 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right middle cover

Learn about removing and replacing the right middle cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the right middle cover.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-15 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40025 Right middle cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

Removal and replacement: Right middle cover 661

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-56 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-57 Remove the cover

2. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

662 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-58 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-59 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 663

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-60 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-61 Disconnect one connector

664 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-62 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-63 Remove the keyboard

3. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 665

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-64 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-65 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

666 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-66 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-67 Remove the cover assembly

4. Remove the right middle cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover.

Remove the right middle cover 667

 ■ Remove two screws, and then remove the right middle cover.

Figure 6-68 Remove the cover

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

668 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Power key

Learn about removing and replacing the power key.

View a video of removing and replacing the power key.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-16 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40029 Power key

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

Removal and replacement: Power key 669

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-69 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-70 Remove the cover

2. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

670 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-71 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-72 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 671

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-73 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-74 Disconnect one connector

672 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-75 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-76 Remove the keyboard

3. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 673

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-77 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-78 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

674 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-79 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-80 Remove the cover assembly

4. Remove the right middle cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover.

Remove the right middle cover 675

 ■ Remove two screws, and then remove the right middle cover.

Figure 6-81 Remove the cover

5. Remove the power key

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-82 Remove one screw

676 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect the power key PCA, remove two screws, and then remove the power key (callout 1).

Figure 6-83 Remove the power key

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 677

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Hardware integration pocket (HIP) cover

Learn about removing and replacing the HIP cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the HIP cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-17 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40032 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HIP cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HIP cover.

678 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Use a pair of tweezers to release the cover. Remove the cover.

TIP: Position the tweezers as shown below.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-84 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 679

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Middle left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the middle left cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the middle left cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-18 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40036 Middle left cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

680 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-85 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-86 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 681

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit cover stacker

Learn about removing and replacing the exit cover stacker.

View a video of removing and replacing the exit cover stacker.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-19 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-61004 Exit cover stacker

682 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-87 Remove two screws

Remove the middle left cover 683

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-88 Remove the cover

2. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-89 Remove the cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

684 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Inner cover

Learn about removing and replacing the inner cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the inner cover.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

NOTE: Before turning the printer power off, use the control panel method to remove the tomer
cartridges. See the instructions in this section.

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Inner cover 685

 Table 6-20 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40048 Inner cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

686 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-90 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-91 Locate the paper dust holder

Remove the paper dust holder 687

 2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-92 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-93 Remove two screws

688 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-94 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-95 Remove one screw cap

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 689

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-96 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-97 Remove the cover

690 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-98 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-99 Remove four screws

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 691

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-100 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-101 Remove two screws

692 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-102 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-103 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 693

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-104 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-105 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

694 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-106 Remove the unit

8. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-107 Remove two screws

Remove the front cover 695

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-108 Remove the cover

9. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-109 Remove the TCU

696 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

10. Remove the inner cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-110 Remove six screws

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Remove the inner cover 697

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tie stoppers

Learn about removing and replacing the tie stoppers.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

○ None

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-21 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-04626A Tie stoppers (front cover restraint - requires 2 tie stoppers)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

○ None

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the tie stopper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the tie stopper.

698 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Open the front cover, remove four screws, and the remove the tie stopper.

Figure 6-111 Remove the tie stopper

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 699

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front lower cover

Learn about removing and replacing the front lower cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the front lower cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-22 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40030 Front lower cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

700 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-112 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door, remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-113 Remove the cover

2. Remove the front lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front lower cover.

1. If Tray 2 and Tray 3 are installed, remove them now.

Remove the front lower cover 701

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-114 Remove the cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

702 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front cover assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the front cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the front cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-23 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-61001 Front cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

Removal and replacement: Front cover assembly 703

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-115 Remove two screws

2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-116 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

704 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front cover assembly - CMF panel

Learn about removing and replacing the front cover CMF panel.

View a video of removing and replacing the front cover CMF panel.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-24 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40003 Front cover - CMF panel (color panel)

Removal and replacement: Front cover assembly - CMF panel 705

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-117 Remove two screws

706 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-118 Remove the cover

2. Remove the front cover - CMF panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover CMF panel.

1. Turn the cover over, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-119 Remove one screw

Remove the front cover - CMF panel 707

 2. With the panel face up, grasp the panel corners, and then push it up to remove it.

Figure 6-120 Remove the panel

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

708 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: TCU cover assembly and TCU CMF panel
Learn about removing and replacing the TCU cover and CMF panel.

View a video of removing and replacing the TCU cover and CMF panel.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-25 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40050 TCU cover assembly

5QK03-40044 CMF panel

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

Removal and replacement: TCU cover assembly and TCU CMF panel 709
 ■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-121 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the TCU cover and CMF panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU cover and CMF panel.

1. Push in on the hook (callout 1), and then slide the TCU cover to the right (callout 2) to partially
release it.

Figure 6-122 Release the TCU cover

710 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the TCU cover, grasp the retainer arm (callout1), and then pull the retainer arm straight out
to remove the cover and retainer arm together.

Figure 6-123 Remove the TCU cover

3. Optional step: Release the CMF panel tab, and then slide the panel as shown below to remove it.

NOTE: If the TCU cover was removed to gain access to another assembly, skip this step.

Figure 6-124 Release the panel

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 711

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 color panel

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 color panel.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 color panel.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

712 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-26 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK03-40027 Tray 2 color panel

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 2 color panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 color panel.

1. Remove the Tray 2 cassette from the printer.

2. Push in on the hook, and then slide the panel as shown below to release it. Remove the color panel.

Figure 6-125 Remove the panel

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the Tray 2 color panel 713

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 color panel

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 3 color panel.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 color panel.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

714 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-27 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40058 Tray 3 color panel

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 3 color panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 color panel.

1. Remove the Tray 3 cassette from the printer.

2. Push in on the hook, and then slide the panel as shown below to release it. Remove the color panel.

Figure 6-126 Remove the panel

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the Tray 3 color panel 715

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Feeding system
Learn about feeding system parts removal and replacement.

Right door assembly

Learn about feeding system right door parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Right door assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the right door.

View a video of removing and replacing the right door.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

716 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-28 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02247A Right door assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 717

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-127 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-128 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

718 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-129 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-130 Release the hinge

Remove the right door assembly 719

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-131 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-132 Remove the door

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

720 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door front link

Learn about removing and replacing the right door front link.

View a video of removing and replacing the right door front link.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Right door front link 721

 Table 6-29 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04398A Right door front link

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-133 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

722 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-134 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-135 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Remove the right door assembly 723

 Figure 6-136 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-137 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

724 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-138 Remove the door

3. Remove the right door front link

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door front link.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the right door front link.

Figure 6-139 Remove the door link

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the right door front link 725

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door front damper

Learn about removing and replacing the right door front damper.

View a video of removing and replacing the right door front damper.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-30 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-01425A Right door front damper

726 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-140 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 727

 Figure 6-141 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-142 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

728 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-143 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-144 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 729

 Figure 6-145 Remove the door

3. Remove the right door front damper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door front damper.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the right door front damper.

Figure 6-146 Remove the door damper

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

730 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door front damper bracket

Learn about removing and replacing the right door front damper bracket.

View a video of removing and replacing the right door front damper bracket.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-31 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-08935A Right door front damper bracket

Removal and replacement: Right door front damper bracket 731

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-147 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

732 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-148 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-149 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Remove the right door assembly 733

 Figure 6-150 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-151 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

734 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-152 Remove the door

3. Remove the right door front damper bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door front damper bracket.

■ Remove two screws, remove the right door front damper, and then separate the damper from the
bracket.

Figure 6-153 Remove the door damper bracket

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the right door front damper bracket 735

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Tray 1 unit
Learn about feeding system Tray 1 unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 unit

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 1 unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 unit.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-32 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01844A Tray 1 unit

736 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-154 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 737

 Figure 6-155 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-156 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

738 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-157 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-158 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 739

 Figure 6-159 Remove the door

3. Remove the right door take-away assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door take-away assembly.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-160 Remove four screws

740 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-161 Remove two screws

3. Remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 6-162 Remove the cover

Remove the right door take-away assembly 741

 4. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-163 Remove two screws

5. Remove one screw (on the other side of the door).

Figure 6-164 Remove one screw

742 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

6. Remove the feed guide take-away lower.

Figure 6-165 Remove the take-away lower

7. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-166 Remove one screw

Remove the right door take-away assembly 743

 8. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-167 Remove one screw

9. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-168 Remove one screw

10. Do the following:

a. Lift up the feed guide take-away upper to slightly separate it from the door (callout 1).

b. Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

c. Remove the take-away assembly from the door (callout 3).

744 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-169 Remove the take-away assembly

4. Remove the Tray 1 unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 1 unit.

1. Hold the right door upright. Open Tray 1, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).

Figure 6-170 Release the hinge arm

Remove the Tray 1 unit 745

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).

Figure 6-171 Remove the bushing cover

3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 6-172 Remove one e-ring and bushing

746 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1; on the other side).

Figure 6-173 Remove one e-ring and bushing

5. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-174 Remove one screw

Remove the Tray 1 unit 747

 6. Release the hinge.

Figure 6-175 Release the hinge

7. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-176 Release one retainer

748 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

8. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 6-177 Remove one screw

9. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 6-178 Release the feed roller assembly

10. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the feed roller assembly. It is still attached to the
right door.

Remove the Tray 1 unit 749

 Figure 6-179 Move the feed roller assembly

11. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-180 Remove three screws

750 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

12. Remove the duplex lower guide.

Figure 6-181 Remove the duplex lower guide

13. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 6-182 Remove one screw

Remove the Tray 1 unit 751

 14. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-183 Remove two screws

15. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and the remove two screws
(callout 3).

Figure 6-184 Remove two screws

752 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 16. Release the Tray 1 unit form the right door.

Figure 6-185 Release the Tray 1 unit

17. Remove the Tray 1 unit.

Figure 6-186 Remove the Tray 1 unit

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 753

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 empty sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 1 empty sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 empty sensor.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-33 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-01490 Photo interrupter (Tray 1 empty sensor)

754 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-187 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 755

 Figure 6-188 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-189 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

756 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-190 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-191 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 757

 Figure 6-192 Remove the door

3. Remove the right door take-away assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door take-away assembly.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-193 Remove four screws

758 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-194 Remove two screws

3. Remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 6-195 Remove the cover

Remove the right door take-away assembly 759

 4. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-196 Remove two screws

5. Remove one screw (on the other side of the door).

Figure 6-197 Remove one screw

760 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

6. Remove the feed guide take-away lower.

Figure 6-198 Remove the take-away lower

7. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-199 Remove one screw

Remove the right door take-away assembly 761

 8. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-200 Remove one screw

9. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-201 Remove one screw

10. Do the following:

a. Lift up the feed guide take-away upper to slightly separate it from the door (callout 1).

b. Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

c. Remove the take-away assembly from the door (callout 3).

762 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-202 Remove the take-away assembly

4. Remove the Tray 1 unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 1 unit.

1. Hold the right door upright. Open Tray 1, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).

Figure 6-203 Release the hinge arm

Remove the Tray 1 unit 763

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).

Figure 6-204 Remove the bushing cover

3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 6-205 Remove one e-ring and bushing

764 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1; on the other side).

Figure 6-206 Remove one e-ring and bushing

5. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-207 Remove one screw

Remove the Tray 1 unit 765

 6. Release the hinge.

Figure 6-208 Release the hinge

7. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-209 Release one retainer

766 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

8. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 6-210 Remove one screw

9. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 6-211 Release the feed roller assembly

10. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the feed roller assembly. It is still attached to the
right door.

Remove the Tray 1 unit 767

 Figure 6-212 Move the feed roller assembly

11. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-213 Remove three screws

768 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

12. Remove the duplex lower guide.

Figure 6-214 Remove the duplex lower guide

13. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 6-215 Remove one screw

Remove the Tray 1 unit 769

 14. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-216 Remove two screws

15. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and the remove two screws
(callout 3).

Figure 6-217 Remove two screws

770 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 16. Release the Tray 1 unit form the right door.

Figure 6-218 Release the Tray 1 unit

17. Remove the Tray 1 unit.

Figure 6-219 Remove the Tray 1 unit

5. Remove the Tray 1 paper empty sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 1 paper empty sensor.

Remove the Tray 1 paper empty sensor 771

 1. Locate the Tray 1 paper empty sensor.

Figure 6-220 Locate the sensor

2. Use a pair of tweezers to release two tabs, and then remove sensor.

Figure 6-221 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

772 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 clutch

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 1 clutch.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 clutch.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-34 Part information

Part number Part description

JC47-00037A Tray 1 clutch

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 clutch 773

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-222 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

774 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-223 Remove the cover

3. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-224 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

Remove the right rear cover 775

 c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-225 Remove the cover

4. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-226 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

776 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-227 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-228 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 777

 Figure 6-229 Remove the door

5. Remove the feed drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the feed drive assembly.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-230 Remove one screw

778 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Release one hook, and then remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-231 Remove the gear cover

3. Release three retainers.

Figure 6-232 Release three retainers

Remove the feed drive assembly 779

 4. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-233 Disconnect two connectors

5. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive assembly

Figure 6-234 Remove the feed drive assembly

6. Remove the Tray 1 clutch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 1 clutch.

780 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-235 Remove one screw

2. Remove the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-236 Remove the cover

Remove the Tray 1 clutch 781

 3. Remove the clutch.

Figure 6-237 Remove the clutch

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

782 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 1 roller kit.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 roller kit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-35 Part information

Part number Part description

5RC03-67001 Tray 1 roller kit

NOTE: This kit includes the pickup, forward, and reverse rollers.

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 1 roller kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 1 roller kit.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse) 783

 1. Release the right- and left side tabs, and then remove the Tray 1 roller cover.

Figure 6-238 Remove the cover

2. Release one tab, and then remove the sensor cover.

Figure 6-239 Remove the cover

3. Use a pair of tweezers to release the locking tab, and then slide the roller off the shaft to remove it.

● Pickup roller: callout 1

● Reverse roller: callout 2

784 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Forward roller: callout 3

Figure 6-240 Remove the rollers

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 785

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Tray 2-3 units

Learn about feeding system Tray 2-3 units parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 or Tray 3

Learn about removing and replacing Tray 2 or Tray 3.

View a video of removing and replacing Tray 2.

View a video of removing and replacing Tray 3.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-36 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01853A Tray 2

5QK09-60121 Tray 3

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

786 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-241 Remove the tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3 787

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup assembly.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-37 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01694A Tray 2 pickup assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

788 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-242 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 789

 Figure 6-243 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-244 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

790 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-245 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-246 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 791

 Figure 6-247 Remove the door

3. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-248 Remove the tray

4. Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup assembly.

792 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-249 Remove the cover

2. Release one hook.

Figure 6-250 Release the hook

Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly 793

 3. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-251 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Figure 6-252 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

794 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-253 Remove the assembly

Reinstallation tip: When installing the assembly, insert and align the right side first.

Figure 6-254 Install the assembly

5. Remove the Tray 2 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 pickup assembly.

Remove the Tray 2 pickup assembly 795

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-255 Remove three screws

2. Rotate the left side of the pickup assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Figure 6-256 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

796 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-257 Remove the assembly

Reinstallation tip: When installing the assembly, insert and align the right side first.

Figure 6-258 Install the assembly

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 797

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2, 3 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2/3 roller kit.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 roller kit.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 roller kit.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

798 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-38 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN66-67001 Tray 2/3 roller kit

NOTE: This kit includes the pickup, forward, and reverse rollers.

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-259 Remove the tray

2. Remove the Tray 2/3 roller kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2/3 roller kit.

Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3 799

 1. Locate the return guide inside the tray opening, and then slide the guide toward the front of the
printer until it stops.

Reinstallation tip: After installing replacement rollers, make sure to fully slide the return guide
towards the rear of the printer to prevent paper jams.

Figure 6-260 Slide the return guide

2. Use a pair of tweezers to release the locking tab, and then slide the roller off the shaft to remove it.

● Pickup roller: callout 1

● Forward roller: callout 2

● Reverse roller: callout 3

Figure 6-261 Remove the rollers

800 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. When the rollers are removed, be careful not to dislodge the couplers. If the couplers are dislodged,
install them on the shafts as shown below.

NOTE: The figure below shows the pickup assembly removed to more clearly show the rollers and
couplers.

Figure 6-262 Rollers and couplers installed

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 801

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 empty and stack height sensors

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 empty and stack height sensors.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 empty sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 stack height sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-39 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 2 empty sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 2 stack height sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

802 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the right rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-263 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-264 Remove the cover

Remove the right rear cover 803

 2. Remove the right door assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-265 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-266 Release the hinge

804 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-267 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-268 Remove the door

3. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3 805

 ■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-269 Remove the tray

4. Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-270 Remove the cover

806 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Release one hook.

Figure 6-271 Release the hook

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-272 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly 807

 Figure 6-273 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

5. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-274 Remove the assembly

Reinstallation tip: When installing the assembly, insert and align the right side first.

808 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-275 Install the assembly

5. Remove the Tray 2 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 pickup assembly.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-276 Remove three screws

2. Rotate the left side of the pickup assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Remove the Tray 2 pickup assembly 809

 Figure 6-277 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-278 Remove the assembly

Reinstallation tip: When installing the assembly, insert and align the right side first.

810 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-279 Install the assembly

6. Remove the Tray 2 empty and stack height sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 empty and stack height sensors.

Remove the Tray 2 empty and stack height sensors 811

 1. Locate the Tray 2 empty (callout 1) and stack height (callout 2) sensors, connectors, and locking tabs
on the pickup assembly.

Figure 6-280 Locate the sensors

2. Do the following:

NOTE: The black ESD insulator sheet does not need to be removed.

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 3) to release it.

812 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-281 Release the sensors

3. Disconnect the connector and remove the sensor assembly.

Figure 6-282 Remove the sensors

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 813

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 prefeed sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 prefeed sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 prefeed sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-40 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-01490 Photo interrupter (Tray 2 prefeed sensor)

814 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-283 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 815

 Figure 6-284 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-285 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

816 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-286 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-287 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 817

 Figure 6-288 Remove the door

3. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-289 Remove the tray

4. Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup assembly.

818 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-290 Remove the cover

2. Release one hook.

Figure 6-291 Release the hook

Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly 819

 3. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-292 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Figure 6-293 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

820 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-294 Remove the assembly

Reinstallation tip: When installing the assembly, insert and align the right side first.

Figure 6-295 Install the assembly

5. Remove the Tray 2 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 pickup assembly.

Remove the Tray 2 pickup assembly 821

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-296 Remove three screws

2. Rotate the left side of the pickup assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Figure 6-297 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

822 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-298 Remove the assembly

Reinstallation tip: When installing the assembly, insert and align the right side first.

Figure 6-299 Install the assembly

6. Remove the Tray 2 prefeed sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 prefeed sensor.

Remove the Tray 2 prefeed sensor 823

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-300 Remove four screws

2. Tightly grasp the sensor guide, and then remove it.

CAUTION: The sheet-metal edges are sharp. Be careful when removing the guide to avoid
personal injury.

NOTE: It might take some force to remove the guide form the rail.

Figure 6-301 Remove the sensor guide

824 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the Tray 2 prefeed sensor.

Figure 6-302 Remove the sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 825

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 open and paper size sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 open and paper size sensor.

NOTE: This procedure removes the front door for better access to the sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 open and paper size sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-41 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01408A Tray 2 open and paper size sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

826 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-303 Remove two screws

2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-304 Remove the cover

2. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3 827

 ■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-305 Remove the tray

3. Remove the Tray 2 open and paper size sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 open and paper size sensor.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-306 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the sensor assembly.

NOTE: The sensor assembly is located far back in the tray cavity. Hold the sensor as shown below
to easily disconnect (and reconnect at installation) the connector.

828 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-307 Remove the sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 829

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-42 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01663A Tray 2 pickup drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

830 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-308 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-309 Remove the cover

3. Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS FDB fan assembly.

Remove the rear lower cover 831

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-310 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-311 Remove four screws

832 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release one tab, and then remove the LVP FDB fan assembly.

Figure 6-312 Remove the LVP FDB fan assembly

4. Remove the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the fuser drive board, and then release the wire harnesses
form the restraints (callout 1).

NOTE: Some of the connectors have a locking tab must be pressed to remove them.

Figure 6-313 Release the wire harnesses

Remove the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly 833

 2. Remove three screws, rotate the top of the sheet-metal cage out and away from the printer, and
then remove the PCAs and cage together.

Figure 6-314 Remove the PCAs and cage

3. Do the following:

a. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

b. Remove three screws (callout 2).

c. Remove the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly.

Figure 6-315 Remove the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

834 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup motor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup motor.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup motor 835

 Table 6-43 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01083A Drive-motor, step (Tray 2 pickup motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-316 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

836 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-317 Remove the cover

3. Remove the Tray 2 pickup motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 pickup motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-318 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the Tray 2 pickup motor 837

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 3 pickup drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 pickup drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

838 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-44 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01663A Tray 3 pickup drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-319 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the controller cover 839

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-320 Remove the cover

3. Remove the Tray 3 pickup drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the drive assembly.

Figure 6-321 Remove the drive assembly

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

840 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup motor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 3 pickup motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 pickup motor.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup motor 841

 Table 6-45 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01083A Drive-motor step (Tray 3 pickup motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-322 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

842 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-323 Remove the cover

3. Remove the Tray 3 pickup motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-324 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the Tray 3 pickup motor 843

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the tray 3 pickup assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the tray 3 pickup assembly.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

844 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-46 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01695A Tray 3 pickup assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-325 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

Remove the right rear cover 845

 c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-326 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-327 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

846 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-328 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-329 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 847

 Figure 6-330 Remove the door

3. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-331 Remove the tray

4. Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup assembly.

848 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-332 Remove the cover

2. Release one hook.

Figure 6-333 Release the hook

Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly 849

 3. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-334 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Figure 6-335 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

850 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-336 Remove the assembly

Reinstallation tip: When installing the assembly, insert and align the right side first.

Figure 6-337 Install the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 851

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2, 3 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2/3 roller kit.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 roller kit.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 roller kit.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

852 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-47 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN66-67001 Tray 2/3 roller kit

NOTE: This kit includes the pickup, forward, and reverse rollers.

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-338 Remove the tray

2. Remove the Tray 2/3 roller kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2/3 roller kit.

Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3 853

 1. Locate the return guide inside the tray opening, and then slide the guide toward the front of the
printer until it stops.

Reinstallation tip: After installing replacement rollers, make sure to fully slide the return guide
towards the rear of the printer to prevent paper jams.

Figure 6-339 Slide the return guide

2. Use a pair of tweezers to release the locking tab, and then slide the roller off the shaft to remove it.

● Pickup roller: callout 1

● Forward roller: callout 2

● Reverse roller: callout 3

Figure 6-340 Remove the rollers

854 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. When the rollers are removed, be careful not to dislodge the couplers. If the couplers are dislodged,
install them on the shafts as shown below.

NOTE: The figure below shows the pickup assembly removed to more clearly show the rollers and
couplers.

Figure 6-341 Rollers and couplers installed

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 855

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 empty sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 stack height sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-48 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 3 empty sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 3 stack height sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

856 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the right rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-342 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-343 Remove the cover

Remove the right rear cover 857

 2. Remove the right door assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-344 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-345 Release the hinge

858 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-346 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-347 Remove the door

3. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3 859

 ■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-348 Remove the tray

4. Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-349 Remove the cover

860 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Release one hook.

Figure 6-350 Release the hook

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-351 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly 861

 Figure 6-352 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

5. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-353 Remove the assembly

Reinstallation tip: When installing the assembly, insert and align the right side first.

862 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-354 Install the assembly

5. Remove the Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors.

Remove the Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors 863

 1. Locate the Tray 3 empty (callout 1) and stack height (callout 2) sensors, connectors, and locking tabs
on the pickup assembly.

Figure 6-355 Locate the sensors

2. Do the following:

NOTE: The black ESD insulator sheet does not need to be removed.

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 3) to release it.

864 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-356 Release the sensors

3. Disconnect the connector and remove the sensor assembly.

Figure 6-357 Remove the sensors

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 865

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 prefeed sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 3 prefeed sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 prefeed sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-49 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Tray 3 prefeed sensor)

866 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-358 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 867

 Figure 6-359 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-360 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

868 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-361 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-362 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 869

 Figure 6-363 Remove the door

3. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-364 Remove the tray

4. Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup assembly.

870 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-365 Remove the cover

2. Release one hook.

Figure 6-366 Release the hook

Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly 871

 3. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-367 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Figure 6-368 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

872 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-369 Remove the assembly

Reinstallation tip: When installing the assembly, insert and align the right side first.

Figure 6-370 Install the assembly

5. Remove the Tray 3 prefeed sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 prefeed sensor.

Remove the Tray 3 prefeed sensor 873

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then open the pickup guide (callout 2).

Figure 6-371 Open the pickup guide

2. Locate the sensor on the pickup assembly, and then do the following:

● Disconnect one connector.

● Remove one screw.

● Release the Tray 3 prefeed sensor.

874 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-372 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Unpack the replacement assembly 875

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 open and paper size sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 3 open and paper size sensor.

NOTE: This procedure removes the front door for better access to the sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 open and paper size sensor.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-50 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01408A Tray 3 open and paper size sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

876 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-373 Remove two screws

2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-374 Remove the cover

Remove the front cover 877

 2. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3
Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-375 Remove the tray

3. Remove the Tray 3 open and paper size sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 open and paper size sensor.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-376 Remove two screws

878 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the sensor assembly.

NOTE: The figure below shows the Tray 2 sensor being removed. Removing the Tray 3 sensor
(lower) is identical to Tray 2.

TIP: The sensor assembly is located far back in the tray cavity. Hold the sensor as shown below to
easily disconnect (and reconnect at installation) the connector.

Figure 6-377 Remove the sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Unpack the replacement assembly 879

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray heater (accessory)

Learn about removing and replacing the tray heaters.

View a video of removing and replacing the tray heaters.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-51 Part information

Part number Part description

Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V

Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

880 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-378 Remove the tray

2. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3 881

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-379 Remove one screw

2. Do the following:

● Slightly lift up on the front of the heater, and pull it toward the front of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the heater. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire-harness connector.

● Disconnect one connector, and then remove the heater.

Figure 6-380 Remove the heater

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

882 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the feed drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the feed drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly 883

 Table 6-52 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01664A Feed drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-381 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

884 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-382 Remove the cover

3. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-383 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

Remove the right rear cover 885

 c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-384 Remove the cover

4. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-385 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

886 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-386 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-387 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 887

 Figure 6-388 Remove the door

5. Remove the feed drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the feed drive assembly.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-389 Remove one screw

888 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Release one hook, and then remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-390 Remove the gear cover

3. Release three retainers.

Figure 6-391 Release three retainers

Remove the feed drive assembly 889

 4. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-392 Disconnect two connectors

5. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive assembly

Figure 6-393 Remove the feed drive assembly

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

890 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feed motor

Learn about removing and replacing the feed motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the feed motor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-53 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00189A Drive-motor step (Feed motor)

Removal and replacement: Feed motor 891

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-394 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

892 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-395 Remove the cover

3. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-396 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

Remove the right rear cover 893

 c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-397 Remove the cover

4. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-398 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

894 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-399 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-400 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 895

 Figure 6-401 Remove the door

5. Remove the feed drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the feed drive assembly.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-402 Remove one screw

896 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Release one hook, and then remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-403 Remove the gear cover

3. Release three retainers.

Figure 6-404 Release three retainers

Remove the feed drive assembly 897

 4. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-405 Disconnect two connectors

5. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive assembly

Figure 6-406 Remove the feed drive assembly

6. Remove the Tray 1 clutch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 1 clutch.

898 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-407 Remove one screw

2. Remove the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-408 Remove the cover

Remove the Tray 1 clutch 899

 3. Remove the clutch.

Figure 6-409 Remove the clutch

7. Remove the feed motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the feed motor.

1. Remove two gears.

Figure 6-410 Remove two gears

900 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-411 Remove the motor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 901

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feed 2 sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the feed 2 sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the feed 2 sensor.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-54 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-01490 Photo interrupter (Feed 2 sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

902 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-412 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-413 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

Remove the right door assembly 903

 1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-414 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-415 Release the hinge

904 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-416 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-417 Remove the door

3. Remove the right door take-away assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door take-away assembly.

Remove the right door take-away assembly 905

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-418 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-419 Remove two screws

906 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 6-420 Remove the cover

4. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-421 Remove two screws

Remove the right door take-away assembly 907

 5. Remove one screw (on the other side of the door).

Figure 6-422 Remove one screw

6. Remove the feed guide take-away lower.

Figure 6-423 Remove the take-away lower

908 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

7. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-424 Remove one screw

8. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-425 Remove one screw

Remove the right door take-away assembly 909

 9. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-426 Remove one screw

10. Do the following:

a. Lift up the feed guide take-away upper to slightly separate it from the door (callout 1).

b. Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

c. Remove the take-away assembly from the door (callout 3).

Figure 6-427 Remove the take-away assembly

4. Remove the feed 2 sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the feed 2 sensor.

910 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the senor form the feed guide take away upper.

Figure 6-428 Remove the sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

Unpack the replacement assembly 911

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Registration unit and loop sensing unit

Learn about registration unit and loop sensing unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Registration unit

Learn about removing and replacing the registration unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the registration unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-55 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60128 Registration unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

912 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-429 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 913

 Figure 6-430 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-431 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

914 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-432 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-433 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 915

 Figure 6-434 Remove the door

3. Remove the registration unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration unit.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the paper path guide (callout 1).

Figure 6-435 Remove the guide

916 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Release one tab and remove the gear cover (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout
2).

Figure 6-436 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-437 Remove two screws

Remove the registration unit 917

 4. Release the left side of the registration unit, and then rotate it away form the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-438 Remove the unit

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

918 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Registration sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the registration sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the registration sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-56 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (registration sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Registration sensor 919

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-439 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-440 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

920 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-441 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-442 Release the hinge

Remove the right door assembly 921

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-443 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-444 Remove the door

3. Remove the registration unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration unit.

922 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the paper path guide (callout 1).

Figure 6-445 Remove the guide

2. Release one tab and remove the gear cover (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout
2).

Figure 6-446 Disconnect one connector

Remove the registration unit 923

 3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-447 Remove two screws

4. Release the left side of the registration unit, and then rotate it away form the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-448 Remove the unit

4. Remove the registration sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration sensor.

924 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the sensor cover (callout 2).

Figure 6-449 Remove the cover

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-450 Remove one screw

Remove the registration sensor 925

 3. Turn the registration unit over, release the retainer and wire harness (callout 1), and then remove the
sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-451 Remove the sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

926 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the registration drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the registration drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-57 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01665A Registration drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly 927

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-452 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-453 Remove the cover

3. Remove the developer unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer unit.

928 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Before proceeding, take note of the open and closed position of the developer unit locking lever.

● Callout 1: Closed position.

● Callout 2: Open position (ready for printing).

Figure 6-454 Developer lever positions

2. Remove two screws, and then rotate the locking lever down to the closed position.

NOTE: The indicator arrow moves to the shutter closed position (callout 1).

Figure 6-455 Rotate the locking lever

Remove the developer unit 929

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then pull the developer unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-456 Remove the unit

4. Remove the developer unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer unit.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the open and closed position of the developer unit locking lever.

● Callout 1: Closed position.

● Callout 2: Open position (ready for printing).

Figure 6-457 Developer lever positions

2. Remove two screws, and then rotate the locking lever down to the closed position.

NOTE: The indicator arrow moves to the shutter closed position (callout 1).

930 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-458 Rotate the locking lever

3. Disconnect one connector, and then pull the developer unit out of the printer.

NOTE: If the developer unit is empty, use the steps included in this topic to fill it with developer
powder.

Figure 6-459 Remove the unit

5. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from retainers as needed.

Remove the drum and developer drive assembly 931

 Figure 6-460 Disconnect three connectors

2. Do the following:

a. Disconnect the upper FFC (pull it straight out of the connector; callout 1).

b. Unlock the connector clip as shown below (callout 2), and then disconnect the middle FFC.

c. Unlock the connector clip as shown below (callout 3), and then disconnect the lower FFC.

NOTE: After disconnecting the FFCs, remove them from the guide.

Figure 6-461 Disconnect three FFCs

932 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive assembly.

Figure 6-462 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the registration drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the registration drive assembly.

Figure 6-463 Remove the assembly

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the registration drive assembly 933

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Registration motor

Learn about removing and replacing the registration motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the registration motor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

934 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-58 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00189A Drive-motor step (registration motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-464 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the controller cover 935

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-465 Remove the cover

3. Remove the drum unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum unit.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 6-466 Open the front door

936 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Rotate the locking lever down, and then pull the drum unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-467 Remove the unit

4. Remove the developer unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer unit.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the open and closed position of the developer unit locking lever.

● Callout 1: Closed position.

● Callout 2: Open position (ready for printing).

Figure 6-468 Developer lever positions

2. Remove two screws, and then rotate the locking lever down to the closed position.

NOTE: The indicator arrow moves to the shutter closed position (callout 1).

Remove the developer unit 937

 Figure 6-469 Rotate the locking lever

3. Disconnect one connector, and then pull the developer unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-470 Remove the unit

5. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from retainers as needed.

938 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-471 Disconnect three connectors

2. Do the following:

a. Disconnect the upper FFC (pull it straight out of the connector; callout 1).

b. Unlock the connector clip as shown below (callout 2), and then disconnect the middle FFC.

c. Unlock the connector clip as shown below (callout 3), and then disconnect the lower FFC.

NOTE: After disconnecting the FFCs, remove them from the guide.

Figure 6-472 Disconnect three FFCs

Remove the drum and developer drive assembly 939

 3. Remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive assembly.

Figure 6-473 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the registration drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the registration drive assembly.

Figure 6-474 Remove the assembly

7. Remove the registration motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration motor.

940 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws (callout 1), disengage the drive belt (callout 2), and then remove the registration
motor.

Figure 6-475 Remove the motor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 941

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer (T2) unit

Learn about removing and replacing the secondary transfer (T2) unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the T2 unit.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-59 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN80-67001 Secondary transfer (T2) unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

942 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-476 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-477 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

Remove the right door assembly 943

 1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-478 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-479 Release the hinge

944 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-480 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-481 Remove the door

3. Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the T2 unit.

Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit 945

 1. Remove two screws (on the right door).

Figure 6-482 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector on the back side of the T2 unit, and then remove the unit.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the wire harness is correctly routed and that the springs are
correctly positioned when the T2 unit is installed.

Figure 6-483 Remove the T2 unit

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

946 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Loop sensor 1

Learn about removing and replacing the loop sensor 1.

View a video of removing and replacing the loop sensor 1.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Loop sensor 1 947

 Table 6-60 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (loop sensor 1)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-484 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

948 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-485 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-486 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Remove the right door assembly 949

 Figure 6-487 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-488 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

950 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-489 Remove the door

3. Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the T2 unit.

1. Remove two screws (on the right door).

Figure 6-490 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector on the back side of the T2 unit, and then remove the unit.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the wire harness is correctly routed and that the springs are
correctly positioned when the T2 unit is installed.

Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit 951

 Figure 6-491 Remove the T2 unit

4. Remove the loop sensor 1

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the loop sensor 1.

1. Release a clip on the left side of the guide. and then remove the guide.

Figure 6-492 Remove the guide

952 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-493 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-494 Remove four screws

Remove the loop sensor 1 953

 4. Remove the loop sensor.

Figure 6-495 Remove the sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

954 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Loop sensor 2

Learn about removing and replacing the loop sensor 2.

View a video of removing and replacing the loop sensor 2.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-61 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (loop sensor 2)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Loop sensor 2 955

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-496 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-497 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

956 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-498 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-499 Release the hinge

Remove the right door assembly 957

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-500 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-501 Remove the door

3. Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the T2 unit.

958 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws (on the right door).

Figure 6-502 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector on the back side of the T2 unit, and then remove the unit.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the wire harness is correctly routed and that the springs are
correctly positioned when the T2 unit is installed.

Figure 6-503 Remove the T2 unit

4. Remove the loop sensor 2

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the loop sensor 2.

Remove the loop sensor 2 959

 1. Release a clip on the left side of the guide. and then remove the guide.

Figure 6-504 Remove the guide

2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-505 Disconnect one connector

960 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-506 Remove four screws

4. Remove the loop sensor.

Figure 6-507 Remove the sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 961

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Loop actuator

Learn about removing and replacing the loop actuator.

View a video of removing and replacing the loop actuator.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-62 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04423A Loop actuator

962 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-508 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 963

 Figure 6-509 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-510 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

964 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-511 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-512 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 965

 Figure 6-513 Remove the door

3. Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the T2 unit.

1. Remove two screws (on the right door).

Figure 6-514 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector on the back side of the T2 unit, and then remove the unit.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the wire harness is correctly routed and that the springs are
correctly positioned when the T2 unit is installed.

966 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-515 Remove the T2 unit

4. Remove the loop actuator

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the loop actuator.

1. Release a clip on the left side of the guide. and then remove the guide.

Figure 6-516 Remove the guide

Remove the loop actuator 967

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-517 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-518 Remove four screws

968 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove the loop actuator.

Figure 6-519 Remove the actuator

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 969

 Removal and replacement: Right door exit assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the right door exit assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the right door exit assembly.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-63 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02249A Right door exit assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right door exit assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door exit assembly.

1. Open the right door.

970 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws and the white-plastic molded parts.

Figure 6-520 Remove the guide

3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right door exit assembly.

Figure 6-521 Remove the unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 971

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser out sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser out sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-64 Part information

Part number Part description

0960-5271 Photo interrupter (fuser out sensor)

972 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right door exit assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door exit assembly.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove two screws and the white-plastic molded parts.

Figure 6-522 Remove the guide

Remove the right door exit assembly 973

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right door exit assembly.

Figure 6-523 Remove the unit

2. Remove the fuser out sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser out sensor.

1. Remove two screws and release the wire harness.

Figure 6-524 Remove two screws

974 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the fuser out sensor.

Figure 6-525 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 975

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor harness

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser out sensor harness.

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser out sensor harness.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-65 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK03-50001 Fuser out sensor harness

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right door exit assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door exit assembly.

1. Open the right door.

976 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws and the white-plastic molded parts.

Figure 6-526 Remove the guide

3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right door exit assembly.

Figure 6-527 Remove the unit

2. Remove the fuser out sensor harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser out sensor harness.

Remove the fuser out sensor harness 977

 1. Remove two screws and release the wire harness.

Figure 6-528 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the fuser out sensor wire harness.

Figure 6-529 Remove the wire harness

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

978 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper dust holder assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the paper dust holder.

View a video of removing and replacing the paper dust holder.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-66 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01026B Paper dust holder assembly

Removal and replacement: Paper dust holder assembly 979

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-530 Remove the unit

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

980 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-531 Locate the paper dust holder

2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-532 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 981

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Exit unit
Learn about exit unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Exit unit

Learn about removing and replacing the exit unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the exit unit.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-67 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01856A Exit unit

982 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the fuser assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser assembly.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-533 Remove four screws

Remove the fuser assembly 983

 3. Pull the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-534 Remove the fuser

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-535 Remove two screws

984 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-536 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-537 Remove one screw cap

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 985

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-538 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-539 Remove the cover

986 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-540 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-541 Remove four screws

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 987

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-542 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-543 Remove two screws

988 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-544 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-545 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 989

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-546 Remove the cover assembly

5. Remove the right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right upper cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-547 Remove five screws

990 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw (circled), and then carefully slide the cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-548 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-549 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 991

 Figure 6-550 Remove the cover

7. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-551 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

992 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-552 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-553 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 993

 Figure 6-554 Remove the door

8. Remove the exit unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit unit.

1. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove four screws.

Figure 6-555 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

994 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the white-plastic coupler (callout 1), and then pull the exit unit straight out to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 6-556 Remove the unit

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 995

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output bin 1 sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the output bin 1 sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the output bin 1 sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-68 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (output bin 1 sensor)

996 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the fuser assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser assembly.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-557 Remove four screws

Remove the fuser assembly 997

 3. Pull the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-558 Remove the fuser

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-559 Remove two screws

998 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-560 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-561 Remove one screw cap

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 999

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-562 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-563 Remove the cover

1000 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-564 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-565 Remove four screws

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1001

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-566 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-567 Remove two screws

1002 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-568 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-569 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1003

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-570 Remove the cover assembly

5. Remove the right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right upper cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-571 Remove five screws

1004 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw (circled), and then carefully slide the cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-572 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-573 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 1005

 Figure 6-574 Remove the cover

7. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-575 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

1006 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-576 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-577 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 1007

 Figure 6-578 Remove the door

8. Remove the exit unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit unit.

1. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove four screws.

Figure 6-579 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

1008 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the white-plastic coupler (callout 1), and then pull the exit unit straight out to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 6-580 Remove the unit

9. Remove the output bin 1 sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the output bin 1 sensor.

Remove the output bin 1 sensor 1009

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-581 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-582 Disconnect one connector

3. Do the following:

NOTE: The black ESD insulator sheet does not need to be removed.

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

1010 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Remove the sensor.

Figure 6-583 Remove the sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1011

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Return gate solenoid

Learn about removing and replacing the return gate solenoid.

View a video of removing and replacing the return gate solenoid.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-69 Part information

Part number Part description

JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting (return gate solenoid)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the fuser assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser assembly.

1. Open the right door.

1012 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-584 Remove four screws

3. Pull the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-585 Remove the fuser

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

Remove the middle left cover 1013

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-586 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-587 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1014 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-588 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-589 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1015

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-590 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-591 Disconnect one connector

1016 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-592 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-593 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1017

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-594 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-595 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

1018 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-596 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-597 Remove the cover assembly

5. Remove the right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right upper cover.

Remove the right upper cover 1019

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-598 Remove five screws

2. Remove one screw (circled), and then carefully slide the cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-599 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1020 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-600 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-601 Remove the cover

7. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

Remove the right door assembly 1021

 1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-602 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-603 Release the hinge

1022 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-604 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-605 Remove the door

8. Remove the exit unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit unit.

Remove the exit unit 1023

 1. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove four screws.

Figure 6-606 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

1024 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the white-plastic coupler (callout 1), and then pull the exit unit straight out to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 6-607 Remove the unit

9. Remove the return gate solenoid

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the return gate solenoid.

Remove the return gate solenoid 1025

 1. Disconnect one connector, and then release the wire harness from the retainer.

Figure 6-608 Disconnect one connector

2. Do the following:

● Remove the black gear (callout 1).

● Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 2), and then remove the white gear (callout
3)/

Figure 6-609 Remove the gears

1026 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-610 Remove two screws

4. Remove the return gate solenoid.

Figure 6-611 Remove the solenoid

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1027

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit 2 motor

Learn about removing and replacing the exit 2 motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the exit 2 motor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-70 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00336A Drive-motor step (exit 2 motor)

1028 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the fuser assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser assembly.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-612 Remove four screws

Remove the fuser assembly 1029

 3. Pull the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-613 Remove the fuser

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-614 Remove two screws

1030 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-615 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-616 Remove one screw cap

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1031

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-617 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-618 Remove the cover

1032 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-619 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-620 Remove four screws

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1033

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-621 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-622 Remove two screws

1034 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-623 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-624 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1035

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-625 Remove the cover assembly

5. Remove the right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right upper cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-626 Remove five screws

1036 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw (circled), and then carefully slide the cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-627 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-628 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 1037

 Figure 6-629 Remove the cover

7. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-630 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

1038 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-631 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-632 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 1039

 Figure 6-633 Remove the door

8. Remove the exit unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit unit.

1. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove four screws.

Figure 6-634 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

1040 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the white-plastic coupler (callout 1), and then pull the exit unit straight out to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 6-635 Remove the unit

9. Remove the exit 2 motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit 2 motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit 2 motor.

CAUTION: Do not damage the wire harness when removing the motor.

Remove the exit 2 motor 1041

 Figure 6-636 Remove the motor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1042 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit 2 sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the exit 2 sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the exit 2 sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-71 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (exit 2 sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the fuser assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser assembly.

1. Open the right door.

Removal and replacement: Exit 2 sensor 1043

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-637 Remove four screws

3. Pull the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-638 Remove the fuser

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1044 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-639 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-640 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1045

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-641 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-642 Remove one screw

1046 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-643 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-644 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1047

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-645 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-646 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1048 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-647 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-648 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1049

 Figure 6-649 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-650 Remove the cover assembly

5. Remove the right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right upper cover.

1050 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-651 Remove five screws

2. Remove one screw (circled), and then carefully slide the cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-652 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 1051

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-653 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-654 Remove the cover

7. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1052 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-655 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-656 Release the hinge

Remove the right door assembly 1053

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-657 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-658 Remove the door

8. Remove the exit unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit unit.

1054 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove four screws.

Figure 6-659 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

Remove the exit unit 1055

 2. Push in on the white-plastic coupler (callout 1), and then pull the exit unit straight out to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 6-660 Remove the unit

9. Remove the exit 2 sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit 2 motor.

1056 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-661 Disconnect one connector

2. Do the following:

NOTE: The black ESD insulator sheet does not need to be removed.

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

● Remove the sensor.

Figure 6-662 Remove the sensor

Remove the exit 2 sensor 1057

 10. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Duplex jam 1 sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the duplex jam 1 sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex jam 1 sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1058 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-72 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (duplex jam 1 sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the fuser assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser assembly.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-663 Remove four screws

Remove the fuser assembly 1059

 3. Pull the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-664 Remove the fuser

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-665 Remove two screws

1060 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-666 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-667 Remove one screw cap

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1061

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-668 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-669 Remove the cover

1062 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-670 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-671 Remove four screws

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1063

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-672 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-673 Remove two screws

1064 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-674 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-675 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1065

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-676 Remove the cover assembly

5. Remove the right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right upper cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-677 Remove five screws

1066 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw (circled), and then carefully slide the cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-678 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-679 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 1067

 Figure 6-680 Remove the cover

7. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-681 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

1068 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-682 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-683 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 1069

 Figure 6-684 Remove the door

8. Remove the exit unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit unit.

1. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove four screws.

Figure 6-685 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

1070 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the white-plastic coupler (callout 1), and then pull the exit unit straight out to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 6-686 Remove the unit

9. Remove the duplex jam 1 sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the duplex jam 1 sensor.

Remove the duplex jam 1 sensor 1071

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-687 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-688 Disconnect one connector

1072 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release three hooks, and then remove the duplex jam 1 sensor.

Figure 6-689 Remove the sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1073

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Duplex 1 motor

Learn about removing and replacing the duplex 1 motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex 1 motor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-73 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00336A Drive-motor step (duplex 1 motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the fuser assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser assembly.

1. Open the right door.

1074 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-690 Remove four screws

3. Pull the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-691 Remove the fuser

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

Remove the middle left cover 1075

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-692 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-693 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1076 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-694 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-695 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1077

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-696 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-697 Disconnect one connector

1078 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-698 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-699 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1079

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-700 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-701 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

1080 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-702 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-703 Remove the cover assembly

5. Remove the right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right upper cover.

Remove the right upper cover 1081

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-704 Remove five screws

2. Remove one screw (circled), and then carefully slide the cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-705 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1082 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-706 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-707 Remove the cover

7. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

Remove the right door assembly 1083

 1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-708 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-709 Release the hinge

1084 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-710 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-711 Remove the door

8. Remove the exit unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit unit.

Remove the exit unit 1085

 1. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove four screws.

Figure 6-712 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

1086 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the white-plastic coupler (callout 1), and then pull the exit unit straight out to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 6-713 Remove the unit

9. Remove the duplex 1 motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the duplex 1 motor.

Remove the duplex 1 motor 1087

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the duplex 1 motor.

Figure 6-714 Remove the motor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1088 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit stack guide

Learn about removing and replacing the exit stack guide.

View a video of removing and replacing the exit stack guide.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-74 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01865A Exit stack guide

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the exit stack guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit stack guide.

Removal and replacement: Exit stack guide 1089

 ■ Slide the exit stack guide to the right to remove it.

Figure 6-715 Remove the guide

Reinstallation tip: Position the guide over the holder, and then push it down to install it.

Figure 6-716 Reinstall the guide

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1090 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Duplex unit
Learn about duplex unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Duplex assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the duplex assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-75 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02250A Duplex assembly

Duplex unit 1091

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-717 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

1092 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-718 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-719 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Remove the right door assembly 1093

 Figure 6-720 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-721 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

1094 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-722 Remove the door

3. Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the T2 unit.

1. Remove two screws (on the right door).

Figure 6-723 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector on the back side of the T2 unit, and then remove the unit.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the wire harness is correctly routed and that the springs are
correctly positioned when the T2 unit is installed.

Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit 1095

 Figure 6-724 Remove the T2 unit

4. Remove the duplex assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the duplex assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-725 Remove the cover

1096 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-726 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove one screw, and then disengage the guide rail.

Figure 6-727 Disengage the guide rail

4. Remove one e-ring, and then slide the shaft to the right to release it.

NOTE: To easily remove the e-ring, slightly slide the shaft away from the assembly to loosen the e-
ring, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove it.

Remove the duplex assembly 1097

 Figure 6-728 Remove the e-reing

5. Remove one screw (on the side of the assembly).

Figure 6-729 Remove one screw

1098 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

6. Remove one screw (on the side of the assembly).

Figure 6-730 Remove one screw

7. Remove three screws (on the right door), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-731 Remove three screws

Remove the duplex assembly 1099

 8. Disconnect one connector, and then lift the duplex assembly up to remove it.

Figure 6-732 Remove the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1100 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Duplex jam 2 sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the duplex jam 2 sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex jam 2 sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-76 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (duplex jam 2 sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Duplex jam 2 sensor 1101

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-733 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-734 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1102 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-735 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-736 Release the hinge

Remove the right door assembly 1103

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-737 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-738 Remove the door

3. Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the T2 unit.

1104 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws (on the right door).

Figure 6-739 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector on the back side of the T2 unit, and then remove the unit.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the wire harness is correctly routed and that the springs are
correctly positioned when the T2 unit is installed.

Figure 6-740 Remove the T2 unit

4. Remove the duplex assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the duplex assembly.

Remove the duplex assembly 1105

 1. Remove one screw, and then disengage the guide rail.

Figure 6-741 Disengage the guide rail

2. Remove one e-ring, and then slide the shaft to the right to release it.

NOTE: To easily remove the e-ring, slightly slide the shaft away from the assembly to loosen the e-
ring, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove it.

Figure 6-742 Remove the e-reing

1106 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw (on the side of the assembly).

Figure 6-743 Remove one screw

4. Remove one screw (on the side of the assembly).

Figure 6-744 Remove one screw

Remove the duplex assembly 1107

 5. Remove three screws (on the right door), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-745 Remove three screws

6. Disconnect one connector, and then lift the duplex assembly up to remove it.

Figure 6-746 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the duplex jam 2 sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the duplex jam 2 sensor.

1108 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-747 Remove two screws

2. Remove the actuator, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-748 Disconnect one connector

3. Turn the duplex assembly over, and then do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the right (callout 2).

● Remove the sensor.

Remove the duplex jam 2 sensor 1109

 Figure 6-749 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1110 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Duplex 2 motor

Learn about removing and replacing the duplex 2 motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex 2 motor.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-77 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01085A Drive-motor step (duplex 2 motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Duplex 2 motor 1111

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-750 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-751 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1112 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-752 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-753 Release the hinge

Remove the right door assembly 1113

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-754 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-755 Remove the door

3. Remove the duplex 2 motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the duplex 2 motor.

1114 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-756 Remove the cover

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-757 Remove one screw

Remove the duplex 2 motor 1115

 3. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-758 Remove the cover

4. Remove two screws, disconnect one connector, and then remove the duplex 2 motor.

Figure 6-759 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1116 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Toner flow
Learn about toner flow parts removal and replacement.

Toner cartridge
Learn about toner cartridge parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Toner flow 1117

 Table 6-78 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01666A Toner dispense and reservoir motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-760 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1118 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-761 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-762 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 1119

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-763 Remove the cover

4. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

NOTE: Some of the figures in this topic might look different than the printer you are servicing.
However, the procedure is correct for the E82XXX and E87XXX model printers.

Always read the instruction carefully to make sure you are performing the correct steps for the printer
being serviced.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-764 Disconnect all connectors

1120 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Do one of the following:

● E82XXX models: Remove four screws (callouts 1-2-3-4).

Figure 6-765 Remove four screws

● E87XXX models: Remove five screws (callouts 1-2-3-4-5).

Figure 6-766 Remove five screws

Remove the formatter and formatter bracket 1121

 3. E82XXX models only: Support the formatter and bracket, remove one screw, and then remove the
formatter and formatter bracket together.

Figure 6-767 Remove the formatter and bracket

4. E87XXX models only: Support the formatter and bracket, remove two screws (callout 10 and then
remove the formatter and formatter bracket together..

Figure 6-768 Remove the formatter and bracket

5. Remove the toner cartridges (disassemble method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

1122 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Rotate four screws (callout 1) clockwise, to mechanically release the toner cartridges. Remove the
toner cartridges from the front side of the printer.

Reinstallation tip: To prevent mechanical interference when installing the cartridges, first rotate the
screws counterclockwise to return them to the home position and then install the cartridges.

Figure 6-769 Remove the cartridges

6. Remove the toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly.

■ Remove seven screws (callout 1), and then remove the dispense and reservoir motor assembly.

NOTE: Disconnect connectors and release wire-harness retainers as needed to remove the
assembly.

Remove the toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly 1123

 Figure 6-770 Remove the assembly

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1124 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner dispense motor

Learn about removing and replacing the toner dispense motors.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense motors.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-79 Part information

Part number Part description

SS216-80501 Drive-motor step (toner dispense motors Y/M/C/K)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Toner dispense motor 1125

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-771 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-772 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1126 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-773 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-774 Remove the cover

4. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

NOTE: Some of the figures in this topic might look different than the printer you are servicing.
However, the procedure is correct for the E82XXX and E87XXX model printers.

Always read the instruction carefully to make sure you are performing the correct steps for the printer
being serviced.

Remove the formatter and formatter bracket 1127

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-775 Disconnect all connectors

2. Do one of the following:

● E82XXX models: Remove four screws (callouts 1-2-3-4).

Figure 6-776 Remove four screws

● E87XXX models: Remove five screws (callouts 1-2-3-4-5).

1128 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-777 Remove five screws

3. E82XXX models only: Support the formatter and bracket, remove one screw, and then remove the
formatter and formatter bracket together.

Figure 6-778 Remove the formatter and bracket

Remove the formatter and formatter bracket 1129

 4. E87XXX models only: Support the formatter and bracket, remove two screws (callout 10 and then
remove the formatter and formatter bracket together..

Figure 6-779 Remove the formatter and bracket

5. Remove the toner dispense motors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense motors.

■ For each motor, do the following:

a. Locate the desired motor.

● Callout 1: K

● Callout 2: C

● Callout 3: M

● Callout 4: Y

b. Disconnect one connector (callout 5).

c. Remove two screws (callout 6), and then remove the motor.

1130 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-780 Remove the motors

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1131

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner dispense motor sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the toner dispense motor sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense motor sensor.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-80 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (toner dispense motor sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

1132 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-781 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-782 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 1133

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-783 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-784 Remove the cover

4. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

NOTE: Some of the figures in this topic might look different than the printer you are servicing.
However, the procedure is correct for the E82XXX and E87XXX model printers.

Always read the instruction carefully to make sure you are performing the correct steps for the printer
being serviced.

1134 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-785 Disconnect all connectors

2. Do one of the following:

● E82XXX models: Remove four screws (callouts 1-2-3-4).

Figure 6-786 Remove four screws

● E87XXX models: Remove five screws (callouts 1-2-3-4-5).

Remove the formatter and formatter bracket 1135

 Figure 6-787 Remove five screws

3. E82XXX models only: Support the formatter and bracket, remove one screw, and then remove the
formatter and formatter bracket together.

Figure 6-788 Remove the formatter and bracket

1136 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. E87XXX models only: Support the formatter and bracket, remove two screws (callout 10 and then
remove the formatter and formatter bracket together..

Figure 6-789 Remove the formatter and bracket

5. Remove the toner cartridges (disassemble method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ Rotate four screws (callout 1) clockwise, to mechanically release the toner cartridges. Remove the
toner cartridges from the front side of the printer.

Reinstallation tip: To prevent mechanical interference when installing the cartridges, first rotate the
screws counterclockwise to return them to the home position and then install the cartridges.

Figure 6-790 Remove the cartridges

Remove the toner cartridges (disassemble method) 1137

 6. Remove the toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly.

■ Remove seven screws (callout 1), and then remove the dispense and reservoir motor assembly.

NOTE: Disconnect connectors and release wire-harness retainers as needed to remove the
assembly.

Figure 6-791 Remove the assembly

7. Remove the toner dispense motors sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense motors sensors.

1. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1), and then remove eight screws to release the cover.

Figure 6-792 Remove eight screws

1138 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Turn the black cover over, and then do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the right (callout 2).

● Remove the sensor (callout 3).

Figure 6-793 Remove the sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

Unpack the replacement assembly 1139

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (control panel method)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner cartridges.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges using the control panel.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

No before performing service procedures required.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-81 Part information

Part number Part description

W9162-67004 Toner cartridge - Y standard yield

W9163-67004 Toner cartridge - M standard yield

W9161-67004 Toner cartridge - C standard yield

W9160-67006 Toner cartridge - K standard yield

W9172-67007 Toner cartridge - Y high yield

W9173-67007 Toner cartridge - M high yield

W9171-67007 Toner cartridge - C high yield

W9170-67007 Toner cartridge - K high yield

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

1140 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-794 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1141

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (disassemble method)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner cartridges.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges by disassembling.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-82 Part information

Part number Part description

W9162-67004 Toner cartridge - Y standard yield

W9163-67004 Toner cartridge - M standard yield

W9161-67004 Toner cartridge - C standard yield

W9160-67006 Toner cartridge - K standard yield

W9172-67007 Toner cartridge - Y high yield

W9173-67007 Toner cartridge - M high yield

W9171-67007 Toner cartridge - C high yield

W9170-67007 Toner cartridge - K high yield

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1142 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-795 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the controller cover 1143

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-796 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-797 Remove the screw caps

1144 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-798 Remove the cover

4. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

NOTE: Some of the figures in this topic might look different than the printer you are servicing.
However, the procedure is correct for the E82XXX and E87XXX model printers.

Always read the instruction carefully to make sure you are performing the correct steps for the printer
being serviced.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-799 Disconnect all connectors

Remove the formatter and formatter bracket 1145

 2. Do one of the following:

● E82XXX models: Remove four screws (callouts 1-2-3-4).

Figure 6-800 Remove four screws

● E87XXX models: Remove five screws (callouts 1-2-3-4-5).

Figure 6-801 Remove five screws

1146 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. E82XXX models only: Support the formatter and bracket, remove one screw, and then remove the
formatter and formatter bracket together.

Figure 6-802 Remove the formatter and bracket

4. E87XXX models only: Support the formatter and bracket, remove two screws (callout 10 and then
remove the formatter and formatter bracket together..

Figure 6-803 Remove the formatter and bracket

5. Remove the toner cartridges (disassemble method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

Remove the toner cartridges (disassemble method) 1147

 ■ Rotate four screws (callout 1) clockwise, to mechanically release the toner cartridges. Remove the
toner cartridges from the front side of the printer.

Reinstallation tip: To prevent mechanical interference when installing the cartridges, first rotate the
screws counterclockwise to return them to the home position and then install the cartridges.

Figure 6-804 Remove the cartridges

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

1148 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner CRUM module assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the toner CRUM module assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner CRUM module assembly.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-83 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01277A Toner CRUM module assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Toner CRUM module assembly 1149

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-805 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-806 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1150 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-807 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-808 Remove the cover

4. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

NOTE: Some of the figures in this topic might look different than the printer you are servicing.
However, the procedure is correct for the E82XXX and E87XXX model printers.

Always read the instruction carefully to make sure you are performing the correct steps for the printer
being serviced.

Remove the formatter and formatter bracket 1151

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-809 Disconnect all connectors

2. Do one of the following:

● E82XXX models: Remove four screws (callouts 1-2-3-4).

Figure 6-810 Remove four screws

● E87XXX models: Remove five screws (callouts 1-2-3-4-5).

1152 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-811 Remove five screws

3. E82XXX models only: Support the formatter and bracket, remove one screw, and then remove the
formatter and formatter bracket together.

Figure 6-812 Remove the formatter and bracket

Remove the formatter and formatter bracket 1153

 4. E87XXX models only: Support the formatter and bracket, remove two screws (callout 10 and then
remove the formatter and formatter bracket together..

Figure 6-813 Remove the formatter and bracket

5. Remove the toner cartridges (disassemble method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ Rotate four screws (callout 1) clockwise, to mechanically release the toner cartridges. Remove the
toner cartridges from the front side of the printer.

Reinstallation tip: To prevent mechanical interference when installing the cartridges, first rotate the
screws counterclockwise to return them to the home position and then install the cartridges.

Figure 6-814 Remove the cartridges

1154 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

6. Remove the toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly.

■ Remove seven screws (callout 1), and then remove the dispense and reservoir motor assembly.

NOTE: Disconnect connectors and release wire-harness retainers as needed to remove the
assembly.

Figure 6-815 Remove the assembly

7. Remove the toner CRUM module assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner CRUM module assembly.

■ For each CRUM module, do the following:

a. Locate the desired module.

● Callout 1: K

● Callout 2: C

● Callout 3: M

● Callout 4: Y

b. Disconnect one inline connector (callout 5).

c. Remove one screw (callout 6), and then use a pair of tweezers to release one tab (callout 7) to
remove the CRUM module assembly.

Remove the toner dispense and reservoir motors assembly 1155

 Figure 6-816 Remove the module

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1156 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Reservoir unit
Learn about reservoir unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Toner reservoir

Learn about removing and replacing the toner reservoir.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner reservoir.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-84 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK03-60130 Toner reservoir (yellow)

5QK03-60130 Toner reservoir (magenta)

5QK03-60130 Toner reservoir (cyan)

5QK03-60129 Toner reservoir (Black)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Reservoir unit 1157

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-817 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

1158 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-818 Locate the paper dust holder

2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-819 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

Remove the middle left cover 1159

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-820 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-821 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1160 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-822 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-823 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1161

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-824 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-825 Disconnect one connector

1162 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-826 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-827 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1163

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-828 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-829 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

1164 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-830 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-831 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

Remove the exit cover stacker 1165

 ■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-832 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-833 Remove the unit

1166 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

8. Remove the front cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-834 Remove two screws

2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-835 Remove the cover

9. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

Remove the front cover 1167

 ■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-836 Remove the TCU

10. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-837 Remove six screws

11. Remove the reservoir unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the reservoir unit.

1168 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws (for each reservoir unit).

Figure 6-838 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Before proceeding, take note of the open and closed position of the developer locking lever.

● Callout 1: Closed position.

● Callout 2: Open position (ready for printing).

Figure 6-839 Developer lever positions

3. Rotate the developer locking lever down (counterclockwise) to the closed position.

NOTE: Rotating the lever down closes the shutter which prevents toner scattering when handling
the assembly.

Remove the reservoir unit 1169

 Figure 6-840 Rotate the locking lever

4. Pull the reservoir unit straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-841 Remove the unit

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1170 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner reservoir motor

Learn about removing and replacing the toner reservoir motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner reservoir motor.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-85 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01659A Drive-motor step (toner reservoir motor)

Removal and replacement: Toner reservoir motor 1171

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-842 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1172 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-843 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-844 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 1173

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-845 Remove the cover

4. Remove the developer unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer unit.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the open and closed position of the developer unit locking lever.

● Callout 1: Closed position.

● Callout 2: Open position (ready for printing).

Figure 6-846 Developer lever positions

2. Remove two screws, and then rotate the locking lever down to the closed position.

NOTE: The indicator arrow moves to the shutter closed position (callout 1).

1174 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-847 Rotate the locking lever

3. Disconnect one connector, and then pull the developer unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-848 Remove the unit

5. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

NOTE: Some of the figures in this topic might look different than the printer you are servicing.
However, the procedure is correct for the E82XXX and E87XXX model printers.

Always read the instruction carefully to make sure you are performing the correct steps for the printer
being serviced.

Remove the formatter and formatter bracket 1175

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-849 Disconnect all connectors

2. Do one of the following:

● E82XXX models: Remove four screws (callouts 1-2-3-4).

Figure 6-850 Remove four screws

● E87XXX models: Remove five screws (callouts 1-2-3-4-5).

1176 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-851 Remove five screws

3. E82XXX models only: Support the formatter and bracket, remove one screw, and then remove the
formatter and formatter bracket together.

Figure 6-852 Remove the formatter and bracket

Remove the formatter and formatter bracket 1177

 4. E87XXX models only: Support the formatter and bracket, remove two screws (callout 10 and then
remove the formatter and formatter bracket together..

Figure 6-853 Remove the formatter and bracket

6. Remove the reservoir motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the reservoir motor.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-854 Remove the cover

2. For each motor, do the following:

a. Locate the desired motor.

● Callout 1: Cyan/black

1178 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Callout 2: yellow/magenta

b. Disconnect one connector (callout 3).

c. Remove two screws (callout 4), and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-855 Remove the motors

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

Unpack the replacement assembly 1179

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Toner collection unit

Learn about toner collection unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Learn about removing and replacing the TCDU.

View a video of removing and replacing the TCDU.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-86 Part information

Part number Part description

JC96-13015A Toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1180 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-856 Remove the unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU) 1181

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection duct unit (TCDU) detection sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the TCDU detection sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the TCDU detection sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-87 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (TCDU detection sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1182 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-857 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) 1183

 1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-858 Locate the paper dust holder

2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-859 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1184 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-860 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-861 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1185

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-862 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-863 Remove one screw

1186 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-864 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-865 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1187

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-866 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-867 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1188 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-868 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-869 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1189

 Figure 6-870 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-871 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

1190 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-872 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-873 Remove the unit

Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU) 1191

 8. Remove the front cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-874 Remove two screws

2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-875 Remove the cover

9. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1192 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-876 Remove the TCU

10. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-877 Remove six screws

11. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

Remove the inner cover 1193

 ■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-878 Remove the cover

12. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-879 Remove eight screws

1194 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-880 Cover hook locations

4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-881 Remove the cover

13. Remove the LSU fan

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LSU fan.

Remove the LSU fan 1195

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the LSU fan.

Figure 6-882 Remove the fan

14. Remove the waste toner detection sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the waste toner detection sensor.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-883 Disconnect one connector

2. Do the following (from the LSU fan side of the printer):

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly up (callout 2).

1196 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 3) to release it.

Figure 6-884 Remove the sensor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1197

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection duct unit (TCDU) drive assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the TCDU drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the TCDU drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-88 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01669A Toner collection duct unit drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

1198 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-885 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

Remove the paper dust holder 1199

 1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-886 Locate the paper dust holder

2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-887 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1200 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-888 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-889 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1201

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-890 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-891 Remove one screw

1202 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-892 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-893 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1203

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-894 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-895 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1204 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-896 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-897 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1205

 Figure 6-898 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-899 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

1206 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-900 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-901 Remove the unit

Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU) 1207

 8. Remove the front cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-902 Remove two screws

2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-903 Remove the cover

9. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1208 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-904 Remove the TCU

10. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-905 Remove six screws

11. Remove the waste toner drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the waste toner drive assembly.

Remove the inner cover 1209

 ■ Disconnect two connectors, remove two screws, and then remove the waste toner drive assembly.

Figure 6-906 Remove the assembly

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1210 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection duct unit (TCDU) motor

Learn about removing and replacing the TCDU motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the TCDU motor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-89 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00110C Motor circuit step (TCDU motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection duct unit (TCDU) motor 1211
 ■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-907 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

1212 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-908 Locate the paper dust holder

2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-909 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

Remove the middle left cover 1213

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-910 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-911 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1214 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-912 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-913 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1215

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-914 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-915 Disconnect one connector

1216 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-916 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-917 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1217

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-918 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-919 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

1218 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-920 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-921 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

Remove the exit cover stacker 1219

 ■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-922 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-923 Remove the unit

1220 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

8. Remove the front cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-924 Remove two screws

2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-925 Remove the cover

9. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

Remove the front cover 1221

 ■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-926 Remove the TCU

10. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-927 Remove six screws

11. Remove the waste toner drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the waste toner drive assembly.

1222 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect two connectors, remove two screws, and then remove the waste toner drive assembly.

Figure 6-928 Remove the assembly

12. Remove the waste toner motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the waste toner motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the waste toner motor.

Figure 6-929 Remove the motor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the waste toner motor 1223

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection duct unit (TCDU) motor sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the TCDU motor sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the TCDU motor sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1224 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-90 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (TCDU motor sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) 1225

 Figure 6-930 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-931 Locate the paper dust holder

1226 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-932 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-933 Remove two screws

Remove the middle left cover 1227

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-934 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-935 Remove one screw cap

1228 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-936 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-937 Remove the cover

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1229

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-938 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-939 Remove four screws

1230 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-940 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-941 Remove two screws

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1231

 2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-942 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-943 Slide the cover

1232 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-944 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-945 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

Remove the exit cover stacker 1233

 2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-946 Remove the unit

8. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-947 Remove two screws

1234 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-948 Remove the cover

9. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-949 Remove the TCU

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1235

 10. Remove the inner cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-950 Remove six screws

11. Remove the waste toner drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the waste toner drive assembly.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove two screws, and then remove the waste toner drive assembly.

Figure 6-951 Remove the assembly

1236 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

12. Remove the waste toner motor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the waste toner motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the waste toner motor.

Figure 6-952 Remove the motor

13. Remove the waste toner motor sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the waste toner motor sensor.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), and then remove the gear (callout 2).

Figure 6-953 Remove the gear

Remove the waste toner motor 1237

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-954 Remove one screw

3. Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly up (callout 2).

● Remove the sensor

Figure 6-955 Remove the sensor

14. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1238 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) 1239

 Table 6-91 Part information

Part number Part description

6SB85-67001 Toner collection unit

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-956 Remove the TCU

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1240 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) detection sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit detection sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit detection sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-92 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (toner collection unit detection sensor)

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) detection sensor 1241
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

1242 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-957 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-958 Locate the paper dust holder

Remove the paper dust holder 1243

 2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-959 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-960 Remove two screws

1244 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-961 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-962 Remove one screw cap

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1245

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-963 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-964 Remove the cover

1246 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-965 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-966 Remove four screws

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1247

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-967 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-968 Remove two screws

1248 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-969 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-970 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1249

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-971 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-972 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

1250 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-973 Remove the unit

8. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-974 Remove two screws

Remove the front cover 1251

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-975 Remove the cover

9. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-976 Remove the TCU

1252 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

10. Remove the inner cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-977 Remove six screws

11. Remove the TCU cover and CMF panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU cover and CMF panel.

Remove the inner cover 1253

 1. Push in on the hook (callout 1), and then slide the TCU cover to the right (callout 2) to partially
release it.

Figure 6-978 Release the TCU cover

2. Support the TCU cover, grasp the retainer arm (callout1), and then pull the retainer arm straight out
to remove the cover and retainer arm together.

Figure 6-979 Remove the TCU cover

3. Optional step: Release the CMF panel tab, and then slide the panel as shown below to remove it.

NOTE: If the TCU cover was removed to gain access to another assembly, skip this step.

1254 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-980 Release the panel

12. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) rail

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU rail.

■ Remove two screws, and then pull the TCU rail straight out to remove it.

Figure 6-981 Remove the TCU rail

13. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) rail 1255

 Figure 6-982 Remove the cover

14. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-983 Remove eight screws

1256 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-984 Cover hook locations

4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-985 Remove the cover

15. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Remove the controller cover 1257

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-986 Remove the cover

16. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-987 Remove the cover

17. Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS FDB fan assembly.

1258 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-988 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-989 Remove four screws

Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly 1259

 3. Release one tab, and then remove the LVP FDB fan assembly.

Figure 6-990 Remove the LVP FDB fan assembly

18. Remove the TCU detection sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU detection sensor.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the panel guide.

Figure 6-991 Remove the guide

2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the fuser drive board, and then release the wire harnesses
from the restraints.

NOTE: Some of the connectors have a locking tab must be pressed to remove them.

1260 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-992 Release the wire harnesses

3. Remove three screws, rotate the top of the sheet-metal cage out and away from the printer, and
then remove the PCAs and cage together.

Figure 6-993 Remove the PCAs and cage

Remove the TCU detection sensor 1261

 4. At the left side of the printer, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-994 Disconnect one connector

5. At the rear of the printer, do the following:

a. Release the hooks (callout 1).

b. Slide the sensor to the right (callout 2).

c. Remove the TCU detection sensor.

Figure 6-995 Remove the sensor

19. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1262 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

NOTE: This procedure requires removing the toner cartridges using the control panel method. Do this
prior to turning the power off. For more information, see Remove the toner cartridges (control panel
method) in this topic.

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) drive assembly 1263
 Table 6-93 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01668A Toner collection unit drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

1264 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-996 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-997 Locate the paper dust holder

Remove the paper dust holder 1265

 2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-998 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-999 Remove two screws

1266 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-1000 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-1001 Remove one screw cap

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1267

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1002 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1003 Remove the cover

1268 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-1004 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1005 Remove four screws

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1269

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-1006 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1007 Remove two screws

1270 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-1008 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-1009 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1271

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-1010 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-1011 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

1272 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-1012 Remove the unit

8. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-1013 Remove the TCU

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1273

 CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-1014 Remove six screws

10. Remove the TCU cover and CMF panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU cover and CMF panel.

1. Push in on the hook (callout 1), and then slide the TCU cover to the right (callout 2) to partially
release it.

Figure 6-1015 Release the TCU cover

1274 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the TCU cover, grasp the retainer arm (callout1), and then pull the retainer arm straight out
to remove the cover and retainer arm together.

Figure 6-1016 Remove the TCU cover

3. Optional step: Release the CMF panel tab, and then slide the panel as shown below to remove it.

NOTE: If the TCU cover was removed to gain access to another assembly, skip this step.

Figure 6-1017 Release the panel

11. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) rail

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU rail.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) rail 1275

 ■ Remove two screws, and then pull the TCU rail straight out to remove it.

Figure 6-1018 Remove the TCU rail

12. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1019 Remove the cover

13. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

1276 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-1020 Remove eight screws

3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-1021 Cover hook locations

Remove the left cover 1277

 4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1022 Remove the cover

14. Remove the TCU drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU drive assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the panel guide.

Figure 6-1023 Remove the guide

1278 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the TCU drive assembly.

Figure 6-1024 Remove the assembly

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1279

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) motor

Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit motor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-94 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00110C Motor circuit step (toner collection unit motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

1280 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-1025 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

Remove the paper dust holder 1281

 1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-1026 Locate the paper dust holder

2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1027 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1282 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1028 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-1029 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1283

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-1030 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1031 Remove one screw

1284 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1032 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-1033 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1285

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1034 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-1035 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1286 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1036 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-1037 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1287

 Figure 6-1038 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-1039 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

1288 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-1040 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-1041 Remove the unit

Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU) 1289

 8. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-1042 Remove the TCU

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-1043 Remove six screws

1290 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

10. Remove the TCU cover and CMF panel
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU cover and CMF panel.

1. Push in on the hook (callout 1), and then slide the TCU cover to the right (callout 2) to partially
release it.

Figure 6-1044 Release the TCU cover

2. Support the TCU cover, grasp the retainer arm (callout1), and then pull the retainer arm straight out
to remove the cover and retainer arm together.

Figure 6-1045 Remove the TCU cover

3. Optional step: Release the CMF panel tab, and then slide the panel as shown below to remove it.

NOTE: If the TCU cover was removed to gain access to another assembly, skip this step.

Remove the TCU cover and CMF panel 1291

 Figure 6-1046 Release the panel

11. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) rail

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU rail.

■ Remove two screws, and then pull the TCU rail straight out to remove it.

Figure 6-1047 Remove the TCU rail

12. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

1292 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1048 Remove the cover

13. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-1049 Remove eight screws

Remove the left cover 1293

 3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-1050 Cover hook locations

4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1051 Remove the cover

14. Remove the TCU drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU drive assembly.

1294 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove one screw, and then remove the panel guide.

Figure 6-1052 Remove the guide

2. Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the TCU drive assembly.

Figure 6-1053 Remove the assembly

15. Remove the TCU motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU motor.

Remove the TCU motor 1295

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 6-1054 Remove the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the gear.

NOTE: The figure below shows the wire harness and connector already removed.

Figure 6-1055 Remove the gear

1296 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove two screws, and then remove the TCU motor.

Figure 6-1056 Remove the motor

16. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1297

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) motor sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit motor sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit motor sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-95 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (toner collection unit motor sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

1298 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-1057 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

Remove the paper dust holder 1299

 1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-1058 Locate the paper dust holder

2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1059 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1300 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1060 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-1061 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1301

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-1062 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1063 Remove one screw

1302 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1064 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-1065 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1303

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1066 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-1067 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1304 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1068 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-1069 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1305

 Figure 6-1070 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-1071 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

1306 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-1072 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-1073 Remove the unit

Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU) 1307

 8. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-1074 Remove the TCU

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-1075 Remove six screws

1308 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

10. Remove the TCU cover and CMF panel
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU cover and CMF panel.

1. Push in on the hook (callout 1), and then slide the TCU cover to the right (callout 2) to partially
release it.

Figure 6-1076 Release the TCU cover

2. Support the TCU cover, grasp the retainer arm (callout1), and then pull the retainer arm straight out
to remove the cover and retainer arm together.

Figure 6-1077 Remove the TCU cover

3. Optional step: Release the CMF panel tab, and then slide the panel as shown below to remove it.

NOTE: If the TCU cover was removed to gain access to another assembly, skip this step.

Remove the TCU cover and CMF panel 1309

 Figure 6-1078 Release the panel

11. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) rail

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU rail.

■ Remove two screws, and then pull the TCU rail straight out to remove it.

Figure 6-1079 Remove the TCU rail

12. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

1310 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1080 Remove the cover

13. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-1081 Remove eight screws

Remove the left cover 1311

 3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-1082 Cover hook locations

4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1083 Remove the cover

14. Remove the TCU drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU drive assembly.

1312 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove one screw, and then remove the panel guide.

Figure 6-1084 Remove the guide

2. Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the TCU drive assembly.

Figure 6-1085 Remove the assembly

15. Remove the TCU motor sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU motor sensor.

Remove the TCU motor sensor 1313

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 6-1086 Remove the cover

2. Remove the gear.

Figure 6-1087 Remove the gear

1314 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1088 Disconnect one connector

4. Do the following:

a. Release the hooks (callout 1).

b. Slide the sensor down (callout 2).

c. Remove the TCU motor sensor.

Figure 6-1089 Remove the sensor

16. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1315

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) full sensor PCA
Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit full sensor PCA.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit full sensor PCA.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

This procedure requires removing the toner cartridges using the control panel method. Do this prior to
turning the power off. For more information, see Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) in
this topic.

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

1316 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-96 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02471A Toner collection full sensor (toner collection unit full sensor PCA)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) 1317

 Figure 6-1090 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-1091 Locate the paper dust holder

1318 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1092 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1093 Remove two screws

Remove the middle left cover 1319

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-1094 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-1095 Remove one screw cap

1320 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1096 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1097 Remove the cover

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1321

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-1098 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1099 Remove four screws

1322 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-1100 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1101 Remove two screws

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1323

 2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-1102 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-1103 Slide the cover

1324 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-1104 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-1105 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

Remove the exit cover stacker 1325

 2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-1106 Remove the unit

8. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-1107 Remove the TCU

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

1326 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-1108 Remove six screws

10. Remove the TCU cover and CMF panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU cover and CMF panel.

1. Push in on the hook (callout 1), and then slide the TCU cover to the right (callout 2) to partially
release it.

Figure 6-1109 Release the TCU cover

Remove the TCU cover and CMF panel 1327

 2. Support the TCU cover, grasp the retainer arm (callout1), and then pull the retainer arm straight out
to remove the cover and retainer arm together.

Figure 6-1110 Remove the TCU cover

3. Optional step: Release the CMF panel tab, and then slide the panel as shown below to remove it.

NOTE: If the TCU cover was removed to gain access to another assembly, skip this step.

Figure 6-1111 Release the panel

11. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) rail

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU rail.

1328 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then pull the TCU rail straight out to remove it.

Figure 6-1112 Remove the TCU rail

12. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1113 Remove the cover

13. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

Remove the left top cover 1329

 2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-1114 Remove eight screws

3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-1115 Cover hook locations

1330 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1116 Remove the cover

14. Remove the TCU drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU drive assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the panel guide.

Figure 6-1117 Remove the guide

Remove the TCU drive assembly 1331

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the TCU drive assembly.

Figure 6-1118 Remove the assembly

15. Remove the TCU full sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU full sensor.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 6-1119 Remove the cover

1332 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the TCU full sensor.

Figure 6-1120 Remove the sensor

16. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1333

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Image creation
Learn about image creation parts removal and replacement.

Laser scanner unit (LSU)

Learn about laser scanner unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Laser scanner unit (LSU)

Learn about removing and replacing the LSU.

View a video of removing and replacing the LSU.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-97 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-05149A Laser scanner unit (LSU)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

1334 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1121 Remove the cover

2. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

Remove the left top cover 1335

 2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-1122 Remove eight screws

3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-1123 Cover hook locations

1336 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1124 Remove the cover

3. Remove the LSU fan

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LSU fan.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the LSU fan.

Figure 6-1125 Remove the fan

4. Remove the HVPS

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HVPS.

Remove the LSU fan 1337

 1. Remove seven screws.

Figure 6-1126 Remove seven screws

2. Release one hook, and then separate the HVPS from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to fully remove the HVPS. Wire harnesses still connect it to the printer.

Figure 6-1127 Release the HVPS

1338 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect six connectors (callout 1), and then remove the HVPS.

Figure 6-1128 Remove the PCA

5. Remove the LSU

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LSU.

1. Do the following:

● Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: The connectors in the figure below are shown already disconnected.

● Remove two screws (callout 2).

● Partially slide the LSU out of the printer (callout 3).

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the LSU. It is still attached to the printer by
three connectors at the rear of the unit.

Remove the LSU 1339

 Figure 6-1129 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

2. With the LSU partially removed, do the following:

● Disconnect two flat-flexible cables (FFCs) (callout 1).

NOTE: One FFC has a locking clip. Release the clip as shown below (callout 2) to disconnect
the FFC.

● Disconnect one connector (callout 3).

● Remove the laser scanner unit.

Figure 6-1130 Remove the unit

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1340 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Developer and drum

Learn about developer and drum parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Drum unit

Learn about removing and replacing the drum unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the drum unit.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Developer and drum 1341

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-98 Part information

Part number Part description

W9078-67001 Drum unit (yellow)

W9078-67001 Drum unit (magenta)

W9078-67001 Drum unit (cyan)

W9077-67001 Drum unit (black)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

1342 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-1131 Remove the unit

2. Remove the drum unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum unit.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 6-1132 Open the front door

Remove the drum unit 1343

 2. Rotate the locking lever down, and then pull the drum unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-1133 Remove the unit

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1344 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer unit

Learn about removing and replacing the developer unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the developer unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-99 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN73-67002 Developer unit (yellow)

5PN74-67002 Developer unit (magenta)

5PN75-67002 Developer unit (cyan)

5PN72-67002 Developer unit (black)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Removal and replacement: Developer unit 1345

 1. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-1134 Remove the unit

2. Remove the drum unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum unit.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 6-1135 Open the front door

1346 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Rotate the locking lever down, and then pull the drum unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-1136 Remove the unit

3. Remove the developer unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer unit.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the open and closed position of the developer unit locking lever.

● Callout 1: Closed position.

● Callout 2: Open position (ready for printing).

Figure 6-1137 Developer lever positions

2. Remove two screws, and then rotate the locking lever down to the closed position.

NOTE: The indicator arrow moves to the shutter closed position (callout 1).

Remove the developer unit 1347

 Figure 6-1138 Rotate the locking lever

3. Disconnect one connector, and then pull the developer unit out of the printer.

NOTE: If the developer unit is empty, use the steps included in this topic to fill it with developer
powder.

Figure 6-1139 Remove the unit

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1348 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

5. Fill a developer unit with developer powder

Use the following procedure to fill a developer unit with developer powder.

TIP: If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot
water sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Fill a developer unit with developer powder 1349

 1. Shake the developer powder bottle.

Figure 6-1140 Shake the bottle

2. Do one of the following:

● To fill a replacement developer unit: Skip this step.

● To fill an in-service developer unit: Remove one cap from the developer unit.

NOTE: Removing the cap might require considerable force.

Figure 6-1141 Install the cap

3. Attach the bottle to the developer unit.

NOTE: Make sure that the bottle firmly hooks onto the developer unit.

1350 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1142 Attach the bottle

4. Slide the shutter on the developer unit to the open position.

Figure 6-1143 Open the shutter

5. Slightly tilt the developer unit, and then carefully squeeze the bottle to start toner flowing into the
developer unit. Continue this process until there is no toner remaining in the bottle.

TIP: To check the level of powder in the bottle, hold it up to a light source.

Fill a developer unit with developer powder 1351

 Figure 6-1144 Open the shutter

6. When the bottle is empty, close the shutter (callout 1) and remove the bottle (callout 2).

Figure 6-1145 Close the shutter

7. Install the cap (supplied in the kit) in the hole on the developer unit.

NOTE: Installing the cap might require considerable force.

1352 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1146 Install the cap

8. Shake the developer unit back and forth to evenly distribute the toner powder.

Figure 6-1147 Distribute the toner powder

Removal and replacement: Developer powder

Learn about how to fill a developer unit with developer powder.

NOTE: Use this procedure to fill an empty developer unit with developer powder.

View a video of how to fill a developer unit with developer powder.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Removal and replacement: Developer powder 1353

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-100 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN73-67001 Developer powder yellow kit

5PN74-67001 Developer powder magenta kit

5PN75-67001 Developer powder cyan kit

5PN72-67001 Developer powder black kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

1354 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-1148 Remove the unit

2. Remove the drum unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum unit.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 6-1149 Open the front door

Remove the drum unit 1355

 2. Rotate the locking lever down, and then pull the drum unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-1150 Remove the unit

3. Remove the developer unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer unit.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the open and closed position of the developer unit locking lever.

● Callout 1: Closed position.

● Callout 2: Open position (ready for printing).

Figure 6-1151 Developer lever positions

2. Remove two screws, and then rotate the locking lever down to the closed position.

NOTE: The indicator arrow moves to the shutter closed position (callout 1).

1356 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1152 Rotate the locking lever

3. Disconnect one connector, and then pull the developer unit out of the printer.

NOTE: If the developer unit is empty, use the steps included in this topic to fill it with developer
powder.

Figure 6-1153 Remove the unit

4. Fill a developer unit with developer powder

Use the following procedure to fill a developer unit with developer powder.

TIP: If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold water. Hot
water sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

Fill a developer unit with developer powder 1357

 1. Shake the developer powder bottle.

Figure 6-1154 Shake the bottle

2. Do one of the following:

● To fill a replacement developer unit: Skip this step.

● To fill an in-service developer unit: Remove one cap from the developer unit.

NOTE: Removing the cap might require considerable force.

Figure 6-1155 Install the cap

3. Attach the bottle to the developer unit.

NOTE: Make sure that the bottle firmly hooks onto the developer unit.

1358 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1156 Attach the bottle

4. Slide the shutter on the developer unit to the open position.

Figure 6-1157 Open the shutter

5. Slightly tilt the developer unit, and then carefully squeeze the bottle to start toner flowing into the
developer unit. Continue this process until there is no toner remaining in the bottle.

TIP: To check the level of powder in the bottle, hold it up to a light source.

Fill a developer unit with developer powder 1359

 Figure 6-1158 Open the shutter

6. When the bottle is empty, close the shutter (callout 1) and remove the bottle (callout 2).

Figure 6-1159 Close the shutter

7. Install the cap (supplied in the kit) in the hole on the developer unit.

NOTE: Installing the cap might require considerable force.

1360 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1160 Install the cap

8. Shake the developer unit back and forth to evenly distribute the toner powder.

Figure 6-1161 Distribute the toner powder

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1361

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Drum and developer drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the drum and developer drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the drum and developer drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-101 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01661A Drum and developer drive assembly

1362 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1162 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the controller cover 1363

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1163 Remove the cover

3. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-1164 Remove the unit

4. Remove the drum unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum unit.

1364 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Open the front door.

Figure 6-1165 Open the front door

2. Rotate the locking lever down, and then pull the drum unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-1166 Remove the unit

5. Remove the developer unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer unit.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the open and closed position of the developer unit locking lever.

● Callout 1: Closed position.

● Callout 2: Open position (ready for printing).

Remove the developer unit 1365

 Figure 6-1167 Developer lever positions

2. Remove two screws, and then rotate the locking lever down to the closed position.

NOTE: The indicator arrow moves to the shutter closed position (callout 1).

Figure 6-1168 Rotate the locking lever

1366 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then pull the developer unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-1169 Remove the unit

6. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from retainers as needed.

Figure 6-1170 Disconnect three connectors

2. Do the following:

a. Disconnect the upper FFC (pull it straight out of the connector; callout 1).

Remove the drum and developer drive assembly 1367

 b. Unlock the connector clip as shown below (callout 2), and then disconnect the middle FFC.

c. Unlock the connector clip as shown below (callout 3), and then disconnect the lower FFC.

NOTE: After disconnecting the FFCs, remove them from the guide.

Figure 6-1171 Disconnect three FFCs

3. Remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive assembly.

Figure 6-1172 Remove the assembly

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1368 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Drum motor (Y/M/C)

Learn about removing and replacing the drum motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the drum motor Y/M/C.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Drum motor (Y/M/C) 1369

 Table 6-102 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00123C Motor BLDC (drum motor Y/M/C)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1173 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1370 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1174 Remove the cover

3. Remove the drum motor Y/M/C

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum motor.

■ For each motor, do the following:

a. Locate the desired motor.

● Callout 1: C

● Callout 2: M

● Callout 3: Y

b. Disconnect one connector (callout 4).

c. Remove four screws (callout 5), and then remove the motor.

Remove the drum motor Y/M/C 1371

 Figure 6-1175 Remove the motors

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1372 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Drum motor (K and ITB)

Learn about removing and replacing the drum motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the drum motor K and ITB.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-103 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00123C Motor BLDC (drum motor K and ITB)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Drum motor (K and ITB) 1373

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1176 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1177 Remove the cover

3. Remove the drum motor K and ITB

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and ITB motor.

1374 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-1178 Remove the motors

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1375

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Drum home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the drum home sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the drum home sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-104 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (drum home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

1376 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1179 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1180 Remove the cover

3. Remove the drum home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum home sensor.

Remove the rear lower cover 1377

 1. Locate the desired sensor.

● Callout 1: K

● Callout 2: C

● Callout 3: M

● Callout 4: Y

Figure 6-1181 Remove the motors

2. Remove the sensor as shown below.

Figure 6-1182 Remove the sensor

1378 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer motor (Y/M/C)

Learn about removing and replacing the developer motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the developer motor Y/M/C.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1379

 Table 6-105 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00123B Motor BLDC (developer motor Y/M/C)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1183 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1380 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1184 Remove the cover

3. Remove the developer motor Y/M/C

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer motor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-1185 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the developer motor Y/M/C 1381

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer motor (K)

Learn about removing and replacing the developer motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the developer motor K.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1382 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-106 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00123B Motor BLDC (developer motor K)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1186 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the controller cover 1383

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1187 Remove the cover

3. Remove the developer motor K

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer motor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-1188 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1384 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left cable guide

Learn about removing and replacing the left cable guide.

View a video of removing and replacing the left cable guide.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Left cable guide 1385

 Table 6-107 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-08699A Left cable guide

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1189 Remove the cover

Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1386 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1190 Remove the cover

Remove the left cable guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cable guide.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the guide (callout
2).

Figure 6-1191 Release the cables

Remove the left cable guide 1387

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the guide.

Figure 6-1192 Remove the guide

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1388 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right cable guide

Learn about removing and replacing the right cable guide.

View a video of removing and replacing the right cable guide.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-108 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-08700A Right cable guide

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Right cable guide 1389

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1193 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1194 Remove the cover

3. Remove the right cable guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right cable guide.

1390 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Do the following:

a. Disconnect the upper FFC (pull it straight out of the connector; callout 1).

b. Unlock the connector clip as shown below (callout 2), and then disconnect the middle FFC.

c. Unlock the connector clip as shown below (callout 3), and then disconnect the lower FFC.

NOTE: After disconnection the FFCs, remove them form the guide.

Figure 6-1195 Disconnect three FFCs

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the guide.

Figure 6-1196 Remove the guide

Remove the right cable guide 1391

 4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Image transfer belt (ITB)

Learn about image transfer belt parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB)

Learn about removing and replacing the ITB.

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

1392 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-109 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01691A Image-transfer belt (ITB)

5PN78-67001 Image Transfer Kit

NOTE: The Image Transfer Kit includes the ITB and ITB cleaning
assemblies. HP recommends ordering and installing this kit at the
prescribed preventative maintenance intervals.

For more information, see PM table (Preventive Maintenance).

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the ITB cleaning unit kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB cleaning unit kit.

Remove the ITB cleaning unit kit 1393

 1. Open the front door, and then remove the toner collection unit duct.

Figure 6-1197 Open the front door

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1198 Remove one screw

1394 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Rotate the lever to the right to release the ITB cleaning unit, and then pull it out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-1199 Remove the unit

2. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1200 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

Remove the right rear cover 1395

 c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-1201 Remove the cover

3. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1202 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

1396 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1203 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-1204 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 1397

 Figure 6-1205 Remove the door

4. Remove the ITB

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1206 Remove two screws

1398 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then pull one lever forward.

Figure 6-1207 Remove one screw and pull lever

3. Pull the ITB straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1208 Remove the ITB

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1399

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) engage motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the ITB engage motor assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB engage motor assembly.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-110 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01068A ITB engage motor assembly

1400 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1209 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the controller cover 1401

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1210 Remove the cover

3. Remove the drum unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum unit.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 6-1211 Open the front door

1402 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Rotate the locking lever down, and then pull the drum unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-1212 Remove the unit

4. Remove the developer unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer unit.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the open and closed position of the developer unit locking lever.

● Callout 1: Closed position.

● Callout 2: Open position (ready for printing).

Figure 6-1213 Developer lever positions

2. Remove two screws, and then rotate the locking lever down to the closed position.

NOTE: The indicator arrow moves to the shutter closed position (callout 1).

Remove the developer unit 1403

 Figure 6-1214 Rotate the locking lever

3. Disconnect one connector, and then pull the developer unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-1215 Remove the unit

5. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from retainers as needed.

1404 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1216 Disconnect three connectors

2. Do the following:

a. Disconnect the upper FFC (pull it straight out of the connector; callout 1).

b. Unlock the connector clip as shown below (callout 2), and then disconnect the middle FFC.

c. Unlock the connector clip as shown below (callout 3), and then disconnect the lower FFC.

NOTE: After disconnecting the FFCs, remove them from the guide.

Figure 6-1217 Disconnect three FFCs

Remove the drum and developer drive assembly 1405

 3. Remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive assembly.

Figure 6-1218 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the ITB engage motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB engage motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the ITB engage
motor assembly.

Figure 6-1219 Remove the motor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1406 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) engage motor

Learn about removing and replacing the ITB engage motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB engage motor.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) engage motor 1407
 Table 6-111 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00110B ITB engage motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1220 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1408 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1221 Remove the cover

3. Remove the drum unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum unit.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 6-1222 Open the front door

Remove the drum unit 1409

 2. Rotate the locking lever down, and then pull the drum unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-1223 Remove the unit

4. Remove the developer unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer unit.

1. Before proceeding, take note of the open and closed position of the developer unit locking lever.

● Callout 1: Closed position.

● Callout 2: Open position (ready for printing).

Figure 6-1224 Developer lever positions

2. Remove two screws, and then rotate the locking lever down to the closed position.

NOTE: The indicator arrow moves to the shutter closed position (callout 1).

1410 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1225 Rotate the locking lever

3. Disconnect one connector, and then pull the developer unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-1226 Remove the unit

5. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from retainers as needed.

Remove the drum and developer drive assembly 1411

 Figure 6-1227 Disconnect three connectors

2. Do the following:

a. Disconnect the upper FFC (pull it straight out of the connector; callout 1).

b. Unlock the connector clip as shown below (callout 2), and then disconnect the middle FFC.

c. Unlock the connector clip as shown below (callout 3), and then disconnect the lower FFC.

NOTE: After disconnecting the FFCs, remove them from the guide.

Figure 6-1228 Disconnect three FFCs

1412 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive assembly.

Figure 6-1229 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the ITB engage motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB engage motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the ITB engage
motor assembly.

Figure 6-1230 Remove the motor

7. Remove the ITB engage motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB engage motor.

Remove the ITB engage motor assembly 1413

 1. Remove one gear.

Figure 6-1231 Remove the gear

2. Remove two screws, and then separate the motor form the sheet-metal mounting bracket to
remove it.

Figure 6-1232 Remove the motor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1414 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

ITB cleaning unit

Learn about ITB cleaning unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) cleaning unit kit
Learn about removing and replacing the ITB cleaning unit kit.

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB cleaning unit kit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-112 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN79-67001 ITB cleaning unit kit

ITB cleaning unit 1415

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the ITB cleaning unit kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB cleaning unit kit.

1. Open the front door, and then remove the toner collection unit duct.

Figure 6-1233 Open the front door

1416 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1234 Remove one screw

3. Rotate the lever to the right to release the ITB cleaning unit, and then pull it out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-1235 Remove the unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1417

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Color plane registration (CPR)

Learn about color plane registration parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Color plane registration (CPR) unit

Learn about removing and replacing the CPR unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-113 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK03-60102 Color plane registration (CPR) unit

1418 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the ITB cleaning unit kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB cleaning unit kit.

1. Open the front door, and then remove the toner collection unit duct.

Figure 6-1236 Open the front door

Remove the ITB cleaning unit kit 1419

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1237 Remove one screw

3. Rotate the lever to the right to release the ITB cleaning unit, and then pull it out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-1238 Remove the unit

2. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1420 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1239 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-1240 Remove the cover

3. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

Remove the right door assembly 1421

 1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1241 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-1242 Release the hinge

1422 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-1243 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-1244 Remove the door

4. Remove the registration unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration unit.

Remove the registration unit 1423

 1. Remove two screws, and then remove the paper path guide (callout 1).

Figure 6-1245 Remove the guide

2. Release one tab and remove the gear cover (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout
2).

Figure 6-1246 Disconnect one connector

1424 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1247 Remove two screws

4. Release the left side of the registration unit, and then rotate it away form the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1248 Remove the unit

5. Remove the ITB

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB.

Remove the ITB 1425

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1249 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, and then pull one lever forward.

Figure 6-1250 Remove one screw and pull lever

1426 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Pull the ITB straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1251 Remove the ITB

6. Remove the CPR unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR unit.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 6-1252 Remove the cover

Remove the CPR unit 1427

 2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 6-1253 Disconnect two connectors

3. Remove five screws, and then remove the CPR unit.

NOTE: Due to shipment security, a service part order might include a base frame. Disassemble
the unit if necessary to install of the parts included with the shipment.

Figure 6-1254 Remove the unit

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1428 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: CPR sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the CPR sensors.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR front sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR center sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR rear sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Removal and replacement: CPR sensor 1429

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-114 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00014A CPR sensor (Front, center, rear CPR sensors)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the ITB cleaning unit kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB cleaning unit kit.

1. Open the front door, and then remove the toner collection unit duct.

Figure 6-1255 Open the front door

1430 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1256 Remove one screw

3. Rotate the lever to the right to release the ITB cleaning unit, and then pull it out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-1257 Remove the unit

2. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 1431

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1258 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-1259 Remove the cover

3. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1432 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1260 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-1261 Release the hinge

Remove the right door assembly 1433

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-1262 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-1263 Remove the door

4. Remove the ITB

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB.

1434 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1264 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, and then pull one lever forward.

Figure 6-1265 Remove one screw and pull lever

Remove the ITB 1435

 3. Pull the ITB straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1266 Remove the ITB

5. Remove the CPR sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR sensor.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 6-1267 Remove the cover

2. Locate the desired sensor to remove.

● Callout 1: Front

● Callout 2: Center

1436 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Callout 3: Rear

Figure 6-1268 Identify the sensors

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1269 Remove two screws

Remove the CPR sensor 1437

 4. Turn the sensor over and disconnect one connector to remove the sensor.

Figure 6-1270 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1438 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: CPR shutter sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the CPR shutter sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR shutter sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-115 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (CPR shutter sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the ITB cleaning unit kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB cleaning unit kit.

Removal and replacement: CPR shutter sensor 1439

 1. Open the front door, and then remove the toner collection unit duct.

Figure 6-1271 Open the front door

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1272 Remove one screw

1440 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Rotate the lever to the right to release the ITB cleaning unit, and then pull it out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-1273 Remove the unit

2. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1274 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

Remove the right rear cover 1441

 c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-1275 Remove the cover

3. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1276 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

1442 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1277 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-1278 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 1443

 Figure 6-1279 Remove the door

4. Remove the registration unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration unit.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the paper path guide (callout 1).

Figure 6-1280 Remove the guide

1444 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Release one tab and remove the gear cover (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout
2).

Figure 6-1281 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1282 Remove two screws

Remove the registration unit 1445

 4. Release the left side of the registration unit, and then rotate it away form the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1283 Remove the unit

5. Remove the ITB

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1284 Remove two screws

1446 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then pull one lever forward.

Figure 6-1285 Remove one screw and pull lever

3. Pull the ITB straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1286 Remove the ITB

6. Remove the CPR unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR unit.

Remove the CPR unit 1447

 1. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 6-1287 Remove the cover

2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 6-1288 Disconnect two connectors

3. Remove five screws, and then remove the CPR unit.

NOTE: Due to shipment security, a service part order might include a base frame. Disassemble
the unit if necessary to install of the parts included with the shipment.

1448 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1289 Remove the unit

7. Remove the CPR shutter sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR shutter sensor.

1. Release one tab, and then remove the following parts:

● Callout 1: Shutter arm

● Callout 2: Motor

● Callout 3: Gear

Figure 6-1290 Remove three parts

Remove the CPR shutter sensor 1449

 2. Locate the toner dispense motor sensor.

Figure 6-1291 Locate the sensor

3. Turn the unit over, and then do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the right (callout 3) to remove it.

Figure 6-1292 Remove the sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1450 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: CPR shutter motor

Learn about removing and replacing the CPR shutter motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR shutter motor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: CPR shutter motor 1451

 Table 6-116 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00078A Motor DC (CPR shutter motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the ITB cleaning unit kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB cleaning unit kit.

1. Open the front door, and then remove the toner collection unit duct.

Figure 6-1293 Open the front door

1452 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1294 Remove one screw

3. Rotate the lever to the right to release the ITB cleaning unit, and then pull it out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-1295 Remove the unit

2. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 1453

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1296 Remove four screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-1297 Remove the cover

3. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1454 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1298 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-1299 Release the hinge

Remove the right door assembly 1455

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-1300 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-1301 Remove the door

4. Remove the registration unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration unit.

1456 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the paper path guide (callout 1).

Figure 6-1302 Remove the guide

2. Release one tab and remove the gear cover (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout
2).

Figure 6-1303 Disconnect one connector

Remove the registration unit 1457

 3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1304 Remove two screws

4. Release the left side of the registration unit, and then rotate it away form the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1305 Remove the unit

5. Remove the ITB

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB.

1458 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1306 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, and then pull one lever forward.

Figure 6-1307 Remove one screw and pull lever

Remove the ITB 1459

 3. Pull the ITB straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1308 Remove the ITB

6. Remove the CPR unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR unit.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 6-1309 Remove the cover

1460 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 6-1310 Disconnect two connectors

3. Remove five screws, and then remove the CPR unit.

NOTE: Due to shipment security, a service part order might include a base frame. Disassemble
the unit if necessary to install of the parts included with the shipment.

Figure 6-1311 Remove the unit

7. Remove the CPR shutter motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR shutter motor.

Remove the CPR shutter motor 1461

 ■ Remove the CPR shutter motor.

NOTE: When the motor is removed, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1312 Remove the motor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1462 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Fuser unit
Learn about fuser unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Fuser unit

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser unit.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-117 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN53-67001 Fuser unit 100V

5PN76-67001 Fuser unit 110V

5PN77-67001 Fuser unit 220V

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Fuser unit 1463

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the fuser assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser assembly.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1313 Remove four screws

3. Pull the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1314 Remove the fuser

1464 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser and exit drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser and exit drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser and exit drive assembly.

NOTE: This video shows the E877 printer. The procedure is similar for the E826 printer.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1465

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-118 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01850A Fuser and exit drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1315 Remove the cover

1466 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove the rear lower cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1316 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1317 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear lower cover 1467

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1318 Remove the cover

4. Remove the fuser fan duct

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1319 Disconnect one connector

1468 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release the wire harnesses from the retainers (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then
remove the fuser fan duct.

Figure 6-1320 Remove the duct

5. Remove the fuser and exit drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser and exit drive assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-1321 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the fuser and exit drive assembly 1469

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the fuser and exit drive unit.

Figure 6-1322 Remove the unit

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1470 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser and exit motor

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser and exit motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser and exit motor.

NOTE: This video shows the E877 printer. The procedure is similar for the E826 printer.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-119 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00144G Motor BLDC (fuser and exit motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Fuser and exit motor 1471

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1323 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1324 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1472 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1325 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1326 Remove the cover

4. Remove the fuser fan duct

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct.

Remove the fuser fan duct 1473

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1327 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the wire harnesses from the retainers (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then
remove the fuser fan duct.

Figure 6-1328 Remove the duct

5. Remove the fuser and exit motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser and exit motor.

1474 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the fuser and
exit motor.

Figure 6-1329 Remove the motor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1475

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser gap motor

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser gap motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser gap motor.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-120 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01084A Drive-motor step (fuser gap motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

1476 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1330 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1331 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 1477

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1332 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1333 Remove the cover

4. Remove the fuser gap motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser gap motor.

1478 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, disconnect one connector, and then remove the fuser gap motor.

Figure 6-1334 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1479

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser gap sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser gap sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser gap sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-121 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (fuser gap sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the fuser assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser assembly.

1. Open the right door.

1480 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1335 Remove four screws

3. Pull the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1336 Remove the fuser

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

Remove the middle left cover 1481

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1337 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-1338 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1482 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-1339 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1340 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1483

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1341 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-1342 Disconnect one connector

1484 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1343 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-1344 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1485

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1345 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-1346 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

1486 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1347 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-1348 Remove the cover assembly

5. Remove the fuser gap sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser gap sensor.

Remove the fuser gap sensor 1487

 1. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then slide the PCA to the left to remove it.

Figure 6-1349 Remove the PCA

2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1350 Disconnect one connector

1488 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release the tabs (callout 1), and then remove the fuser gap sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-1351 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1489

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Environmental sensor, switch, and fan

Learn about environmental sensor, switch, and fan parts removal and replacement.

Base sensor, switch, and fan

Review the base sensor, switch, and fan removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Outer temperature humidity sensor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the outer temperature humidity sensor assembly, sensor, and
holder.

View a video of removing and replacing the outer temperature humidity sensor assembly.

NOTE: These videos show the E877 printer. The procedures are similar for the E826 printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

NOTE: This procedure requires removing the toner cartridges using the control panel method. Do this
prior to turning the power off. For more information, see Remove the toner cartridges (control panel
method) in this topic.

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-122 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-40002 Outer temperature humidity sensor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

1490 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-1352 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) 1491

 1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-1353 Locate the paper dust holder

2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1354 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1492 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1355 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-1356 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1493

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-1357 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1358 Remove one screw

1494 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1359 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-1360 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1495

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1361 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-1362 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1496 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1363 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-1364 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1497

 Figure 6-1365 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-1366 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

1498 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-1367 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-1368 Remove the unit

Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU) 1499

 8. Remove the front cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1369 Remove two screws

2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-1370 Remove the cover

9. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1500 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-1371 Remove the TCU

10. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-1372 Remove six screws

11. Remove the outer temperature humidity sensor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the outer temperature humidity sensor assembly.

Remove the inner cover 1501

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1373 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two hooks (callout 1), and then remove the outer temperature humidity sensor assembly
(callout 2).

Figure 6-1374 Remove the sensor assembly

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1502 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: LVPS fan

Learn about removing and replacing the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) fan.

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS fan (E877).

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS fan (E826).

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-123 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00198A Fan (LVPS fan)

Removal and replacement: LVPS fan 1503

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1375 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1504 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1376 Remove the cover

3. Remove the LVPS fan

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS fan.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the retainers (callout
2).

Figure 6-1377 Disconnect one connector

Remove the LVPS fan 1505

 2. Release two tabs, and then remove the fan.

Figure 6-1378 Remove the fan

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1506 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: FDB fan

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser drive board fan.

View a video of removing and replacing the FDB fan (E877).

View a video of removing and replacing the FDB fan (E826).

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-124 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00154A Fan (FDB fan)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: FDB fan 1507

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1379 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1380 Remove the cover

3. Remove the FDB fan

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the FDB fan.

1508 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the retainers (callout
2).

Figure 6-1381 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs, and then remove the fan.

Figure 6-1382 Remove the fan

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1509

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: LVPS FDB fan assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) fuser drive board (FDB) fan
assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS FDB fan assembly (E877).

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS FDB fan assembly (E826).

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-125 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01795A LVPS FDB fan assembly

1510 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1383 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the controller cover 1511

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1384 Remove the cover

3. Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS FDB fan assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1385 Disconnect one connector

1512 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1386 Remove four screws

3. Release one tab, and then remove the LVP FDB fan assembly.

Figure 6-1387 Remove the LVP FDB fan assembly

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1513

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front fan assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the front fan assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the front fan assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

NOTE: This procedure requires removing the toner cartridges using the control panel method. Do this
prior to turning the power off. For more information, see Remove the toner cartridges (control panel
method) in this topic.

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1514 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-126 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01725A Frame-fan (sub duct) (front fan assembly)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) 1515

 Figure 6-1388 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-1389 Locate the paper dust holder

1516 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1390 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1391 Remove two screws

Remove the middle left cover 1517

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-1392 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-1393 Remove one screw cap

1518 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1394 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1395 Remove the cover

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1519

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-1396 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1397 Remove four screws

1520 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-1398 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1399 Remove two screws

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1521

 2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-1400 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-1401 Slide the cover

1522 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-1402 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-1403 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

Remove the exit cover stacker 1523

 2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-1404 Remove the unit

8. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1405 Remove two screws

1524 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-1406 Remove the cover

9. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-1407 Remove the TCU

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1525

 10. Remove the inner cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-1408 Remove six screws

11. Remove the front fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front fan assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-1409 Disconnect connector and remove screw

1526 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the front fan assembly (callout 2).

Figure 6-1410 Remove the assembly

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1527

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser fan duct

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser fan duct.

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser fan duct.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-127 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK03-40103 Fuser fan duct

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

1528 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1411 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1412 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 1529

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1413 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1414 Remove the cover

4. Remove the fuser fan duct

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct.

1530 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1415 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the wire harnesses from the retainers (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then
remove the fuser fan duct.

Figure 6-1416 Remove the duct

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1531

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: LSU fan

Learn about removing and replacing the laser scanner unit (LSU) fan.

View a video of removing and replacing the LSU fan.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-128 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01019A Frame-fan (LSU fan)

1532 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1417 Remove the cover

2. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

Remove the left top cover 1533

 2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-1418 Remove eight screws

3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-1419 Cover hook locations

1534 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1420 Remove the cover

3. Remove the LSU fan

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LSU fan.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the LSU fan.

Figure 6-1421 Remove the fan

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the LSU fan 1535

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front door switch assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the front door switch.

NOTE: Leave the printer power on until the first step is completed.

View a video of removing and replacing the front door switch.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

NOTE: Leave the printer power on until the first step is completed.

Turn the printer power off

NOTE: This procedure requires removing the toner cartridges using the control panel method. Do this
prior to turning the power off. For more information, see Remove the toner cartridges (control panel
method) in this topic.

1536 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-129 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00466A Front door open switch

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) 1537

 Figure 6-1422 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the ITB cleaning unit kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB cleaning unit kit.

1. Open the front door, and then remove the toner collection unit duct.

Figure 6-1423 Open the front door

1538 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1424 Remove one screw

3. Rotate the lever to the right to release the ITB cleaning unit, and then pull it out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-1425 Remove the unit

3. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Remove the left top cover 1539

 Figure 6-1426 Remove the cover

4. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-1427 Remove eight screws

1540 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-1428 Cover hook locations

4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1429 Remove the cover

5. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

Remove the paper dust holder 1541

 1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-1430 Locate the paper dust holder

2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1431 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1542 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1432 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-1433 Remove the cover

7. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1543

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-1434 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1435 Remove one screw

1544 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1436 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-1437 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1545

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1438 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-1439 Remove the keyboard

8. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1546 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1440 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-1441 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1547

 Figure 6-1442 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-1443 Remove the cover assembly

9. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

1548 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-1444 Remove the cover

10. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-1445 Remove the unit

Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU) 1549

 11. Remove the front cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1446 Remove two screws

2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-1447 Remove the cover

12. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1550 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-1448 Remove the TCU

13. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-1449 Remove six screws

14. Remove the front door switch assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front door switch assembly.

Remove the inner cover 1551

 1. At the left side of the printer, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1450 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the front door switch assembly (callout 2).

Figure 6-1451 Remove the switch

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1552 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door switch assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the right door switch.

View a video of removing and replacing the right door switch.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-130 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01467A Switch (right door switch)

Removal and replacement: Right door switch assembly 1553

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1452 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1554 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1453 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1454 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 1555

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1455 Remove the cover

4. Remove the right door switch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door switch.

1. Open the right door.

2. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the right door switch.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainer.

Figure 6-1456 Remove the switch

1556 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Control panel
Learn about control panel parts removal and replacement.

Base control panel

Review the base control panel removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Control panel

Learn about removing and replacing the control panel.

View a video of removing and replacing the Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm 10.1 in 2nd.

View a video of removing and replacing the Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm 8 in.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Unpack the replacement assembly 1557

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-131 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK42-60104 Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm (10.1 in 2nd)

3SJ15-60101 Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm (8 in)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle upper cover.

1558 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Rotate the control panel into the upright position.

Figure 6-1457 Raise the control panel

2. Use a pair of tweezers to release the cover, and then remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1458 Remove the cover

2. Remove the control panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the control panel.

Remove the control panel 1559

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1459 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the control panel.

Figure 6-1460 Remove the control panel

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1560 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

PCAs
Learn about printed circuit assembly (PCA) parts removal and replacement.

Main PCA
Learn about main printed circuit assembly (PCA) parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Formatter

Learn about removing and replacing the formatter.

View a video of removing and replacing the formatter.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

PCAs 1561
 Table 6-132 Part information

Part number Part description

6CF14-67001 Formatter (main PCA) (Formatter)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1461 Remove the cover

2 Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1562 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1462 Remove the cover

3 Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1463 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 1563

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1464 Remove the cover

4 Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-1465 Remove the rivets

5 Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

1564 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-1466 Remove the HDD

6 Remove the formatter

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-1467 Disconnect all connectors

Remove the formatter 1565

 2. Remove ten screws, and then remove the formatter.

Figure 6-1468 Remove ten screws

3. For replacement formatter installations: The trusted platform module (TPM) is not a replaceable
service part. Remove the TPM from the discarded formatter, and then install it on the replacement
formatter.

Figure 6-1469 Formatter TPM

1566 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Install the replacement formatter by tilting the board and lining it up with the four tabs shown.

Figure 6-1470 Four tabs on the printer housing

Figure 6-1471 Tilting the formatter board and lining up the tabs

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1567

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Riser card and cradle

Learn about removing and replacing the riser card and cradle.

View a video of removing and replacing the riser card and cradle.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-133 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ01-60001 Riser card-EPS2.0 Riser for HDD

5851-7754 Cradle-Riser card

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

1568 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1472 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

Remove the controller cover 1569

 ■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-1473 Remove the rivets

3. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-1474 Remove the HDD

4. Remove the riser card and cradle

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the riser card and cradle.

1570 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Release the clips on both ends of the cradle (callout 1), and then remove the riser card from the
HDD callout 2).

Figure 6-1475 Remove the riser card

2. Release the hook.

Figure 6-1476 Release the hook

Remove the riser card and cradle 1571

 3. Separate the riser card from the cradle.

Figure 6-1477 Remove the riser card and cradle

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1572 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rivet-HDD

Learn about removing and replacing the hard-disk drive rivet.

View a video of removing and replacing the hard-disk drive rivet.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-134 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40035 Rivet-HDD

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

Removal and replacement: Rivet-HDD 1573

 ■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-1478 Remove the rivets

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1574 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Cradle-HDD

Learn about removing and replacing the hard disk cradle.

View a video of removing and replacing the hard disk drive cradle.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-135 Part information

Part number Part description

5851-7753 Cradle-HDD

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Cradle-HDD 1575

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1479 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-1480 Remove the rivets

3. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

1576 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-1481 Remove the HDD

4. Remove the hard disk from the cradle

Use the following procedure to remove the HDD from the cradle.

1. Release the clips on both ends of the cradle (callout 1), and then remove the riser card from the
HDD (callout 2).

Figure 6-1482 Remove the riser card

Remove the hard disk from the cradle 1577

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1483 Remove two screws

3. Separate the HDD from the cradle.

Figure 6-1484 Remove the cradle

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1578 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Hard disk 500GB

Learn about removing and replacing the hard disk.

View a video of removing and replacing the hard disk drive.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-136 Part information

Part number Part description

933853-010 HDD 500G SED

Removal and replacement: Hard disk 500GB 1579

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1485 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

1580 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-1486 Remove the rivets

3. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-1487 Remove the HDD

4. Remove the hard disk from the cradle

Use the following procedure to remove the HDD from the cradle.

Remove the hard disk 1581

 1. Release the clips on both ends of the cradle (callout 1), and then remove the riser card from the
HDD (callout 2).

Figure 6-1488 Remove the riser card

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1489 Remove two screws

1582 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Separate the HDD from the cradle.

Figure 6-1490 Remove the cradle

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1583

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Sub PCAs
Learn about sub printed circuit assembly (PCA) parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Accelerator card (optional)

Learn about removing and replacing the accelerator card.

View a video of removing and replacing the accelerator card.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-137 Part information

Part number Part description

6HN30-67001 Accelerator card

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1584 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the controller cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1491 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-1492 Remove the rivets

Remove the controller cover 1585

 3. Remove the hard disk and accelerator card assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD and accelerator card assembly.

1. Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the assembly, and then remove the hard drive
and accelerator card together (callout 2).

Figure 6-1493 Remove the HDD and accelerator card assembly

2. Release two clips (callout 1), and then separate the accelerator card form the riser card to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 6-1494 Remove the accelerator card

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1586 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: USB hub PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the USB hub PCA.

View a video of removing and replacing the USB hub PCA.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: USB hub PCA 1587

 Table 6-138 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ04-60002 USB hub PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1495 Remove two screws

1588 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-1496 Remove the cover

2. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-1497 Remove one screw cap

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1589

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1498 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1499 Remove the cover

1590 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-1500 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1501 Remove four screws

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1591

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-1502 Remove the keyboard

3. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1503 Remove two screws

1592 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-1504 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-1505 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1593

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-1506 Remove the cover assembly

4. Remove the USB hub PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the USB hub PCA.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the USB hub PCA.

Figure 6-1507 Remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1594 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD)

Learn about removing and replacing the IOD.

View a video of removing and replacing the IOD.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD) 1595

 Table 6-139 Part information

Part number Part description

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1508 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1596 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1509 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1510 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 1597

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1511 Remove the cover

4. Remove the IOD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the IOD.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1512 Disconnect one connector

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one rivet, and then remove the island of data.

CAUTION: Be careful when handling the rivet. Do not drop it into the printer engine.

1598 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1513 Remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1599

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Echo PCA and rivet

Learn about removing and replacing the echo PCA.

View a video of removing and replacing the echo PCA.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-140 Part information

Part number Part description

T3U64-60001 Echo PCA

6ER04-40034 Rivet-Echo PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

1600 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1514 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1515 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 1601

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1516 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1517 Remove the cover

4. Remove the echo PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the echo PCA.

1602 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1518 Disconnect one connector

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one rivet, and then remove the echo PCA.

CAUTION: Be careful when handling the rivet. Do not drop it into the printer engine.

Figure 6-1519 Remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1603

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) full sensor PCA
Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit full sensor PCA.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit full sensor PCA.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

This procedure requires removing the toner cartridges using the control panel method. Do this prior to
turning the power off. For more information, see Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) in
this topic.

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1604 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-141 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02471A Toner collection full sensor (toner collection unit full sensor PCA)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03087722

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) 1605

 Figure 6-1520 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-1521 Locate the paper dust holder

1606 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1522 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1523 Remove two screws

Remove the middle left cover 1607

 2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-1524 Remove the cover

4. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-1525 Remove one screw cap

1608 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1526 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1527 Remove the cover

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1609

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-1528 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1529 Remove four screws

1610 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-1530 Remove the keyboard

5. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1531 Remove two screws

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1611

 2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-1532 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-1533 Slide the cover

1612 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-1534 Remove the cover assembly

6. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-1535 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection duct unit (TCDU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCDU.

1. Open the front door.

Remove the exit cover stacker 1613

 2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-1536 Remove the unit

8. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

■ Open the TCU cover (located to the left of Tray 2), and then remove the TCU.

Figure 6-1537 Remove the TCU

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

1614 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 CAUTION: Make sure that the toner collection unit (TCU) is removed before removing the inner cover
to avoid dislodging the TCU shutter.

■ Remove six screws.

Figure 6-1538 Remove six screws

10. Remove the TCU cover and CMF panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU cover and CMF panel.

1. Push in on the hook (callout 1), and then slide the TCU cover to the right (callout 2) to partially
release it.

Figure 6-1539 Release the TCU cover

Remove the TCU cover and CMF panel 1615

 2. Support the TCU cover, grasp the retainer arm (callout1), and then pull the retainer arm straight out
to remove the cover and retainer arm together.

Figure 6-1540 Remove the TCU cover

3. Optional step: Release the CMF panel tab, and then slide the panel as shown below to remove it.

NOTE: If the TCU cover was removed to gain access to another assembly, skip this step.

Figure 6-1541 Release the panel

11. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) rail

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU rail.

1616 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then pull the TCU rail straight out to remove it.

Figure 6-1542 Remove the TCU rail

12. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1543 Remove the cover

13. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

Remove the left top cover 1617

 2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-1544 Remove eight screws

3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-1545 Cover hook locations

1618 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1546 Remove the cover

14. Remove the TCU drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU drive assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the panel guide.

Figure 6-1547 Remove the guide

Remove the TCU drive assembly 1619

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the TCU drive assembly.

Figure 6-1548 Remove the assembly

15. Remove the TCU full sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU full sensor.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 6-1549 Remove the cover

1620 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the TCU full sensor.

Figure 6-1550 Remove the sensor

16. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1621

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Power key PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the power key PCA.

View a video of removing and replacing the power key PCA.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-142 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ33-60007 Power key PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1622 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1551 Remove two screws

2. Rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

Figure 6-1552 Remove the cover

2. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1623

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-1553 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1554 Remove one screw

1624 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1555 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-1556 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1625

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1557 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-1558 Remove the keyboard

3. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

NOTE: If an optional keyboard is installed, remove it now.

1626 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1559 Remove two screws

2. Open the right door.

Figure 6-1560 Open the right door

3. Move the control panel out of the way, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from
the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1627

 Figure 6-1561 Slide the cover

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-1562 Remove the cover assembly

4. Remove the power key PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the power key PCA.

1628 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1563 Remove one screw

2. Lift the PCA up, disconnect one connector, and then remove the power key PCA.

Figure 6-1564 Remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1629

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Keyboard (Flow models)

Learn about removing and replacing the keyboard.

NOTE: There are two types of physical keyboards (fold type and drawer type). Verify the type of
keyboard that requires service, and then follow the appropriate instructions in this topic.

View a video of removing and replacing the keyboard (fold type).

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes (folding type)10 minutes (drawer type)

Service level: Medium (folding type and drawer type)

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-143 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01742A Keyboard Assy-US English

1630 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-143 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

JC93-01743A Keyboard Assy-UK English

63C82-67003 E8 Keyboard (Drawer type) Assy-US English

63C82-67005 E8 Keyboard (Drawer type) Assy-UK English

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

1. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1631

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-1565 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1566 Remove one screw

1632 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1567 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-1568 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1633

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1569 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-1570 Remove the keyboard

2. Remove the keyboard (drawer type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (drawer type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a fold type keyboard, skip this step.

1634 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Do the following:

● Rotate the control panel into the upright position (callout 1).

● Use a pair of tweezers to release the cover (callout 2), and then remove the top cover (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1571 Remove the cover

2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2, and then remove the control
panel (callout 3).

NOTE: Lift the control panel straight up to remove it.

Remove the keyboard (drawer type) 1635

 Figure 6-1572 Remove the control panel

3. Disconnect one connector.

IMPORTANT: The control panel mount bracket and the keyboard must be removed together. They
are attached to each other by a film cable.

Figure 6-1573 Disconnect one connector

1636 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1574 Remove four screws

5. Pull the mount bracket and keyboard assembly straight out and away from the printer to release it.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
two hooks.

Figure 6-1575 Release the assembly

Remove the keyboard (drawer type) 1637

 6. Look up under the mount bracket and keyboard assembly to locate two hooks. Press in on each
hook, and then pull the assembly away form the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1576 Remove the assembly

7. Special instruction for a replacement keyboard

a. Dispose of the defective part. See

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement parts supplied in the service kit.

IMPORTANT: Only the control panel mount and keyboard assembly (callout 2) are required to
be installed.

Save the additional service kit parts (callouts 1/3/4) for other applications.

Figure 6-1577 Service kit parts

CP mount &
2 Keyboard 3
USB HUB PCA

1
Keyboard
rail
4 HIP cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1638 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fax card (optional)

Learn about removing and replacing the fax card.

View a video of removing and replacing the fax card.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

NOTE: Fax card part numbers can vary by country/region. Check with your genuine HP parts supplier
if you are unsure of the correct fax card part number for your country/region.

Removal and replacement: Fax card (optional) 1639

 Table 6-144 Part information

Part number Part description

7ZA08-67001 Single Fax 800 Accessory

5QK14-67001 Dual Fax 810 Accessory

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1578 Remove the cover

2. Remove the fax card assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fax card.

1640 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-1579 Release the fax card

2. Slightly rotate the fax card away from the formatter PCA (callout 1), and then slide it as shown
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 6-1580 Remove the fax card

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1641

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Power supply PCAs

Learn about power supply printed circuit assembly (PCA) parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS)

Learn about removing and replacing the HVPS.

View a video of removing and replacing the HVPS.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1642 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-145 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00240C High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the left top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1581 Remove the cover

2. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

Remove the left top cover 1643

 1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-1582 Remove eight screws

3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-1583 Cover hook locations

1644 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Release the cover from the right- to left side. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-1584 Remove the cover

3. Remove the HVPS

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HVPS.

1. Remove seven screws.

Figure 6-1585 Remove seven screws

2. Release one hook, and then separate the HVPS from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to fully remove the HVPS. Wire harnesses still connect it to the printer.

Remove the HVPS 1645

 Figure 6-1586 Release the HVPS

3. Disconnect six connectors (callout 1), and then remove the HVPS.

Figure 6-1587 Remove the PCA

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1646 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Learn about removing and replacing the LVPS.

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-146 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00149C Low-Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 110V

JC44-00150C Low-Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 220V

Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1647

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1588 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1648 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1589 Remove the cover

3. Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS FDB fan assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1590 Disconnect one connector

Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly 1649

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1591 Remove four screws

3. Release one tab, and then remove the LVP FDB fan assembly.

Figure 6-1592 Remove the LVP FDB fan assembly

4. Remove the LVPS

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect all of the connectors on the LVPS.

● Remove seven screws.

1650 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Remove the LVPS.

Figure 6-1593 Remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1651

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser-drive board (FDB)

Learn about removing and replacing the FDB.

View a video of removing and replacing the FDB.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-147 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00235C Fuser-drive board (FDB), 110V

JC44-00236C Fuser-drive board (FDB), 220V

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

1652 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1594 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1595 Remove the cover

3. Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS FDB fan assembly.

Remove the rear lower cover 1653

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1596 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1597 Remove four screws

1654 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release one tab, and then remove the LVP FDB fan assembly.

Figure 6-1598 Remove the LVP FDB fan assembly

4. Remove the FDB

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the FDB.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect all of the connectors and wire harness retainers on the FDB.

● Remove four screws.

● Remove the FDB.

Figure 6-1599 Remove the PCA

Remove the FDB 1655

 5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Integrated scanner asset (ISA)

Learn about ISA parts removal and replacement.

Whole unit
You will learn more about the ISA whole unit replacement.

300-Sheet ISA for z bundle

Learn about ISA removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner for Flow z bundle (5QK39A for Flex-build)
Learn about removing and replacing the ISA.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

1656 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Service level: Medium

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit including the white backing.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-148 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ32-60101 HP LaserJet 300ipm 300-sheet Flow DADF high speed scanner (z

bundle)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the flatbed glass to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1657

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1600 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1601 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the ISA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ISA.

1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: For the zero-force insertion (ZIF) flat-flexible cable (FFC) connectors, raise the locking clip
to release the cable.

1658 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1602 Disconnect three connectors

2. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1603 Remove two screws

3. Slide the ISA towards the front of the printer until it stops to release it.

NOTE: Sliding the ISA might require considerable force to release the mounting locks.

Remove the ISA 1659

 Figure 6-1604 Slide the ISA

4. Lift the ISA up and off of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: The ISA is heavy. Always use safe lifting practices. HP recommends more than one
person lift the ISA.

Figure 6-1605 Remove the ISA

5. When reinstalling the FFCs into the connectors, make sure to push down on the locking clip so that
the connector firmly grasps the cable film.

● Callout 1: Unlocked

● Callout 2: Locked

1660 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1606 Lock the FFC connector clip

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1661

 200-Sheet ISA for dn bundle
Learn about ISA removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner for dn bundle (5QK38A for Flex-build)
Learn about removing and replacing the ISA.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit including the white backing.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-149 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK38-67001 HP LaserJet 180ipm 200-sheet DADF high speed scanner (dn bundle)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the flatbed glass to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1662 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1607 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1608 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the ISA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ISA.

1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: For the zero-force insertion (ZIF) flat-flexible cable (FFC) connectors, raise the locking clip
to release the cable.

Remove the ISA 1663

 Figure 6-1609 Disconnect three connectors

2. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1610 Remove two screws

3. Slide the ISA towards the front of the printer until it stops to release it.

NOTE: Sliding the ISA might require considerable force to release the mounting locks.

1664 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1611 Slide the ISA

4. Lift the ISA up and off of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: The ISA is heavy. Always use safe lifting practices. HP recommends more than one
person lift the ISA.

Figure 6-1612 Remove the ISA

5. When reinstalling the FFCs into the connectors, make sure to push down on the locking clip so that
the connector firmly grasps the cable film.

● Callout 1: Unlocked

● Callout 2: Locked

Remove the ISA 1665

 Figure 6-1613 Lock the FFC connector clip

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1666 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

ADF (Automatic document feeder)
Learn about ADF parts removal and replacement.

300-Sheet ADF for z bundle

Learn about ADF parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: ADF (300sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder.

IMPORTANT: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit (including the white backing
plate).

Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the installation
instructions.

Instruction for installing a replacement white backing plate are also included.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-150 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-61042 300-sheet Flow Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

NOTE: The white backing plate is not included.

Order 5QK08-67005 (Qty 1) and J8J63-60135 (Qty 9) to receive the

SVC-A3 White Backing Kit and White backing suspension (combined
into SVC-A3 White Backing Kit PN:5QK08-67005) clips.

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

ADF (Automatic document feeder) 1667

 ○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1614 Remove two screw caps

1668 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1615 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit (including the white backing plate).

To install a replacement document feeder only: The following parts are required:

● SVC-A3 White Backing Kit; 5QK08-67005 (QTY 1)

● White backing suspension (combined into SVC-A3 White Backing Kit PN:5QK08-67005);
J8J63-60135 (Qty 9)

NOTE: Nine are required. Make sure the order quantity is nine.

Remove the document feeder 1669

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1616 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector and two flat-flexible cables FFCs (callout 1).

CAUTION: Disconnecting one of the FFCs requires opening a retaining clip (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Use the special installation instructions in this topic to avoid damaging the
FFCs.

Figure 6-1617 Disconnect three connectors

1670 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1618 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1671

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

4. Special installation instructions: Document feeder

Use the following instructions to install the document feeder.

NOTE: To avoid damage to the document feeder, reverse the removal steps and follow these special
instructions.

1. The flat-flexible cable (FFC) connectors are a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) type that uses a hinged
retainer clip to secure the FFC.

CAUTION: Do not force the FFC into or out of the connector if the hinged retainer is in the locked
position.

Forcing the FFC into or out of a locked connector can damage the FFC and cause the document
feeder to be in operable.

● Callout 1: FFC missing pin

● Callout 2: FFC pin pealed back

Figure 6-1619 Damaged FFC

2. Verify that the ZIF connector hinged retainer (callout 1) is unlocked. The image below shows a
locked connector.

● Callout 2: Unlock the hinged retainer

1672 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Callout 3: Lock the hinged retainer

Figure 6-1620 ZIF connector hinged retainer

5. Special installation instructions: White backing plate

Use the following instructions to install the white backing plate

1. If the spring and suspension clip have become separated during shipping, install the spring on the
clip as shown below.

Figure 6-1621 Spring installed on the suspension clip

Special installation instructions: White backing plate 1673

 2. Position a suspension clip near the mounting feature on the document feeder, and then push it
straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1622 Install the suspension clip

3. Remove the protective film from the double-sided tape on the suspension clip.

Figure 6-1623 Expose the double-sided tape

1674 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Repeat these steps for the remaining eight suspension clips.

Figure 6-1624 Install the remaining suspension clips

5. Place the white backing plate on the flatbed glass.

NOTE: One corner of the white backing plate has an arrow embossed on it. Place that corner
towards the rear left corner of the flatbed glass.

Figure 6-1625 Place the white backing plate

6. Position the white backing plate so that the corner with the embossed arrow fits tightly up against
the flatbed glass frame.

NOTE: Make sure that the rear and left edges of the plate are firmly against the flatbed frame.

Special installation instructions: White backing plate 1675

 Figure 6-1626 Register the white backing plate against the frame

7. Fully close the document feeder to install the white backing plate.

NOTE: Open the document feeder and make sure the white backing plate is firmly attached.

Figure 6-1627 Close the document feeder

Removal and replacement: ADF front cover (300sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder front cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

1676 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-151 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-40049 ADF front cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder color panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder color panel.

1. Open the document feeder.

Remove the document feeder color panel 1677

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1), release four tabs, and then remove the document feeder color
panel (callout 2).

Figure 6-1628 Remove the color panel

2. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1629 Remove two screw caps

1678 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1630 Remove two screws and the cover

3. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit (including the white backing plate).

To install a replacement document feeder only: The following parts are required:

● SVC-A3 White Backing Kit; 5QK08-67005 (QTY 1)

● White backing suspension (combined into SVC-A3 White Backing Kit PN:5QK08-67005);
J8J63-60135 (Qty 9)

NOTE: Nine are required. Make sure the order quantity is nine.

Remove the document feeder 1679

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1631 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector and two flat-flexible cables FFCs (callout 1).

CAUTION: Disconnecting one of the FFCs requires opening a retaining clip (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Use the special installation instructions in this topic to avoid damaging the
FFCs.

Figure 6-1632 Disconnect three connectors

1680 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1633 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

4. Remove the document feeder front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder front cover.

1. Open the ADF top cover, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-1634 Remove two screws

Remove the document feeder front cover 1681

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to release three hooks, and then remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 6-1635 Remove the cover

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1682 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF CMF panel

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder color panel.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-152 Part information

Part number Part description

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder color panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder color panel.

1. Open the document feeder.

Removal and replacement: ADF CMF panel 1683

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1), release four tabs, and then remove the document feeder color
panel (callout 2).

Figure 6-1636 Remove the color panel

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1684 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF rear cover (300sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-153 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-40041 ADF rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

Removal and replacement: ADF rear cover (300sh) 1685

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1637 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1638 Remove two screws and the cover

Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit (including the white backing plate).

To install a replacement document feeder only: The following parts are required:

● SVC-A3 White Backing Kit; 5QK08-67005 (QTY 1)

1686 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

● White backing suspension (combined into SVC-A3 White Backing Kit PN:5QK08-67005);
J8J63-60135 (Qty 9)

NOTE: Nine are required. Make sure the order quantity is nine.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1639 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector and two flat-flexible cables FFCs (callout 1).

CAUTION: Disconnecting one of the FFCs requires opening a retaining clip (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Use the special installation instructions in this topic to avoid damaging the
FFCs.

Figure 6-1640 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the document feeder 1687

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1641 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1642 Remove two screws

1688 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove two screws, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1643 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1689

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF top cover (300sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder top cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-154 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-40054 ADF top cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder top cover.

1. Open the ADF top cover.

1690 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove eight screws, and then remove the ADF top cover.

Figure 6-1644 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1691

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing kit (300sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder white backing.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-155 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-67005 SVC-A3 White Backing Kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder.

1692 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect nine hooks, and then remove the white backing.

Figure 6-1645 Remove the white backing

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1693

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Special installation instructions: White backing plate

Use the following instructions to install the white backing plate

1. If the spring and suspension clip have become separated during shipping, install the spring on the
clip as shown below.

Figure 6-1646 Spring installed on the suspension clip

1694 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Position a suspension clip near the mounting feature on the document feeder, and then push it
straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1647 Install the suspension clip

3. Remove the protective film from the double-sided tape on the suspension clip.

Figure 6-1648 Expose the double-sided tape

Special installation instructions: White backing plate 1695

 4. Repeat these steps for the remaining eight suspension clips.

Figure 6-1649 Install the remaining suspension clips

5. Place the white backing plate on the flatbed glass.

NOTE: One corner of the white backing plate has an arrow embossed on it. Place that corner
towards the rear left corner of the flatbed glass.

Figure 6-1650 Place the white backing plate

6. Position the white backing plate so that the corner with the embossed arrow fits tightly up against
the flatbed glass frame.

NOTE: Make sure that the rear and left edges of the plate are firmly against the flatbed frame.

1696 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1651 Register the white backing plate against the frame

7. Fully close the document feeder to install the white backing plate.

NOTE: Open the document feeder and make sure the white backing plate is firmly attached.

Figure 6-1652 Close the document feeder

Removal and replacement: ADF input tray (300sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder input tray.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Removal and replacement: ADF input tray (300sh) 1697

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-156 Part information

Part number Part description

Z9Y05-60032 ADF input tray

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder input tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder input tray.

1. Disconnect two hooks (callout 1), and then separate the tray from the ADF.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the tray. It is still connected to the ADF by wire
harnesses.

1698 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1653 Disconnect two hooks

2. Turn the tray over, disconnect three connectors (release wire harnesses), and then remove the tray.

Figure 6-1654 Remove the tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1699

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (300sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder pickup roller kit.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-157 Part information

Part number Part description

5RC00-67001 ADF roller kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1700 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder pickup roller kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder pickup roller kit.

1. Open the ADF top cover.

2. Remove the roller cover.

Figure 6-1655 Remove the roller cover

Remove the document feeder pickup roller kit 1701

 3. Remove the roller assembly.

Figure 6-1656 Remove the roller assembly

4. Open the separation roller cover.

Figure 6-1657 Open the cover

1702 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove the separation roller.

Figure 6-1658 Remove the separation roller

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1703

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF PCA (300sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder printed circuit assembly (PCA).

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-158 Part information

Part number Part description

Z9Y05-60004 300sh ADF PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1704 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1659 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1660 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit (including the white backing plate).

To install a replacement document feeder only: The following parts are required:

● SVC-A3 White Backing Kit; 5QK08-67005 (QTY 1)

Remove the document feeder 1705

 ● White backing suspension (combined into SVC-A3 White Backing Kit PN:5QK08-67005);
J8J63-60135 (Qty 9)

NOTE: Nine are required. Make sure the order quantity is nine.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1661 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector and two flat-flexible cables FFCs (callout 1).

CAUTION: Disconnecting one of the FFCs requires opening a retaining clip (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Use the special installation instructions in this topic to avoid damaging the
FFCs.

Figure 6-1662 Disconnect three connectors

1706 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1663 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

3. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1664 Remove two screws

Remove the document feeder rear cover 1707

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove two screws, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1665 Remove the cover

4. Remove the document feeder PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder PCA.

■ Disconnect all of the connectors (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the PCA.

Figure 6-1666 Remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1708 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF flat-flexible cable (300sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder flat-flexible cable (FFC) to SSA.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-159 Part information

Part number Part description

Z9Y05-50002 ADF FFC cable to SSA

Removal and replacement: ADF flat-flexible cable (300sh) 1709

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1667 Remove two screw caps

1710 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1668 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit (including the white backing plate).

To install a replacement document feeder only: The following parts are required:

● SVC-A3 White Backing Kit; 5QK08-67005 (QTY 1)

● White backing suspension (combined into SVC-A3 White Backing Kit PN:5QK08-67005);
J8J63-60135 (Qty 9)

NOTE: Nine are required. Make sure the order quantity is nine.

Remove the document feeder 1711

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1669 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector and two flat-flexible cables FFCs (callout 1).

CAUTION: Disconnecting one of the FFCs requires opening a retaining clip (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Use the special installation instructions in this topic to avoid damaging the
FFCs.

Figure 6-1670 Disconnect three connectors

1712 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1671 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

3. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1672 Remove two screws

Remove the document feeder rear cover 1713

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove two screws, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1673 Remove the cover

4. Remove the document feeder FFC to SSA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder FFC to SSA.

■ Disconnect the flat-flexible cable (FFC) to SSA, and then remove the FFC.

NOTE: The FFC is located at the bottom left corner of the ADF PCA.

Figure 6-1674 Remove the FFC

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1714 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF power cable (300sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder power cable.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-160 Part information

Part number Part description

Z9Y05-50003 ADF power cable

Removal and replacement: ADF power cable (300sh) 1715

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1675 Remove two screw caps

1716 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1676 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit (including the white backing plate).

To install a replacement document feeder only: The following parts are required:

● SVC-A3 White Backing Kit; 5QK08-67005 (QTY 1)

● White backing suspension (combined into SVC-A3 White Backing Kit PN:5QK08-67005);
J8J63-60135 (Qty 9)

NOTE: Nine are required. Make sure the order quantity is nine.

Remove the document feeder 1717

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1677 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector and two flat-flexible cables FFCs (callout 1).

CAUTION: Disconnecting one of the FFCs requires opening a retaining clip (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Use the special installation instructions in this topic to avoid damaging the
FFCs.

Figure 6-1678 Disconnect three connectors

1718 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1679 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

3. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1680 Remove two screws

Remove the document feeder rear cover 1719

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove two screws, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1681 Remove the cover

4. Remove the document feeder power cable

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder power cable.

■ Disconnect the power cable, and then remove the cable.

NOTE: The power cable is located near the bottom left corner of the ADF PCA.

Figure 6-1682 Remove the power cable

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1720 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF hinge kit (300sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder hinge kit.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-161 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-67003 SVC-Hinge Kit (right, middle, left)

Removal and replacement: ADF hinge kit (300sh) 1721

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder.

2. Disconnect nine hooks, and then remove the white backing.

Figure 6-1683 Remove the white backing

2. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1722 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1684 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1685 Remove two screws and the cover

3. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit (including the white backing plate).

To install a replacement document feeder only: The following parts are required:

● SVC-A3 White Backing Kit; 5QK08-67005 (QTY 1)

Remove the document feeder 1723

 ● White backing suspension (combined into SVC-A3 White Backing Kit PN:5QK08-67005);
J8J63-60135 (Qty 9)

NOTE: Nine are required. Make sure the order quantity is nine.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1686 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector and two flat-flexible cables FFCs (callout 1).

CAUTION: Disconnecting one of the FFCs requires opening a retaining clip (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Use the special installation instructions in this topic to avoid damaging the
FFCs.

Figure 6-1687 Disconnect three connectors

1724 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1688 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

4. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1689 Remove two screws

Remove the document feeder rear cover 1725

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove two screws, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1690 Remove the cover

5. Remove the document feeder hinge damper module

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder hinge damper module.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the hinge damper module.

Figure 6-1691 Remove the hinge damper module

6. Remove the document feeder hinge kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder hinge kit.

1726 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove seven screws, and then remove the hinge.

Figure 6-1692 Remove the hinge

2. Remove five screw caps.

Figure 6-1693 Remove five screw caps

Remove the document feeder hinge kit 1727

 3. Remove eleven screws, and then remove the hinges.

Figure 6-1694 Remove the hinges

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1728 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF hinge damper module 300sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder damper module.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-162 Part information

Part number Part description

Z9Y05-60016 ADF hinge damper module

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder.

Removal and replacement: ADF hinge damper module 300sh) 1729

 2. Disconnect nine hooks, and then remove the white backing.

Figure 6-1695 Remove the white backing

2. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1696 Remove two screw caps

1730 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1697 Remove two screws and the cover

3. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit (including the white backing plate).

To install a replacement document feeder only: The following parts are required:

● SVC-A3 White Backing Kit; 5QK08-67005 (QTY 1)

● White backing suspension (combined into SVC-A3 White Backing Kit PN:5QK08-67005);
J8J63-60135 (Qty 9)

NOTE: Nine are required. Make sure the order quantity is nine.

Remove the document feeder 1731

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1698 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector and two flat-flexible cables FFCs (callout 1).

CAUTION: Disconnecting one of the FFCs requires opening a retaining clip (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Use the special installation instructions in this topic to avoid damaging the
FFCs.

Figure 6-1699 Disconnect three connectors

1732 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1700 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

4. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1701 Remove two screws

Remove the document feeder rear cover 1733

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove two screws, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1702 Remove the cover

5. Remove the document feeder hinge damper module

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder hinge damper module.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the hinge damper module.

Figure 6-1703 Remove the hinge damper module

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1734 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

200-Sheet ADF for dn bundle

Learn about ADF parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: ADF (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder.

IMPORTANT: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit (including the white backing
plate).

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit including the white backing.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

200-Sheet ADF for dn bundle 1735

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

NOTE: The whole unit replacement parts below include the Kit - white backing A3 (5QJ90-67005).

Table 6-163 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67011 Automatic document feeder (ADF) (Growler + ENT)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1736 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1704 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1705 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

Remove the document feeder 1737

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1706 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

Figure 6-1707 Remove the document feeder

1738 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1708 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1739

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

4. Special installation instructions: White backing plate

Use the following instructions to install the white backing plate

1. If the spring and suspension clip have become separated during shipping, install the spring on the
clip as shown below.

Figure 6-1709 Spring installed on the suspension clip

1740 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Position a suspension clip near the mounting feature on the document feeder, and then push it
straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1710 Install the suspension clip

3. Remove the protective film from the double-sided tape on the suspension clip.

Figure 6-1711 Expose the double-sided tape

Special installation instructions: White backing plate 1741

 4. Repeat these steps for the remaining eight suspension clips.

Figure 6-1712 Install the remaining suspension clips

5. Place the white backing plate on the flatbed glass.

NOTE: One corner of the white backing plate has an arrow embossed on it. Place that corner
towards the rear left corner of the flatbed glass.

Figure 6-1713 Place the white backing plate

6. Position the white backing plate so that the corner with the embossed arrow fits tightly up against
the flatbed glass frame.

NOTE: Make sure that the rear and left edges of the plate are firmly against the flatbed frame.

1742 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1714 Register the white backing plate against the frame

7. Fully close the document feeder to install the white backing plate.

NOTE: Open the document feeder and make sure the white backing plate is firmly attached.

Figure 6-1715 Close the document feeder

Removal and replacement: ADF CMF panel

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder color panel.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Removal and replacement: ADF CMF panel 1743

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-164 Part information

Part number Part description

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder color panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder color panel.

1. Open the document feeder.

1744 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1), release four tabs, and then remove the document feeder color
panel (callout 2).

Figure 6-1716 Remove the color panel

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1745

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing kit (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder white backing plate.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-165 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67005 Kit - white backing A3

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder.

1746 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect nine hooks, and then remove the white backing.

Figure 6-1717 Remove the white backing

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1747

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Special installation instructions: White backing plate

Use the following instructions to install the white backing plate

1. If the spring and suspension clip have become separated during shipping, install the spring on the
clip as shown below.

Figure 6-1718 Spring installed on the suspension clip

1748 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Position a suspension clip near the mounting feature on the document feeder, and then push it
straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1719 Install the suspension clip

3. Remove the protective film from the double-sided tape on the suspension clip.

Figure 6-1720 Expose the double-sided tape

Special installation instructions: White backing plate 1749

 4. Repeat these steps for the remaining eight suspension clips.

Figure 6-1721 Install the remaining suspension clips

5. Place the white backing plate on the flatbed glass.

NOTE: One corner of the white backing plate has an arrow embossed on it. Place that corner
towards the rear left corner of the flatbed glass.

Figure 6-1722 Place the white backing plate

6. Position the white backing plate so that the corner with the embossed arrow fits tightly up against
the flatbed glass frame.

NOTE: Make sure that the rear and left edges of the plate are firmly against the flatbed frame.

1750 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1723 Register the white backing plate against the frame

7. Fully close the document feeder to install the white backing plate.

NOTE: Open the document feeder and make sure the white backing plate is firmly attached.

Figure 6-1724 Close the document feeder

Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder pickup roller kit.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (200sh) 1751

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-166 Part information

Part number Part description

5851-7202 ADF roller kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder pickup roller kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder pickup roller kit.

1752 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Release the latch, and then open the ADF top door.

Figure 6-1725 Opne the cover

2. Rotate the blue locking lever down.

Figure 6-1726 Rotate the lever

Remove the document feeder pickup roller kit 1753

 3. Slide the locking lever toward the front of the printer (callout 1), and then remove the pick roller
assembly (callout 2).

Figure 6-1727 Remove the roller assembly

4. Open the separation roller cover.

Figure 6-1728 Open the cover

1754 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove the separation roller.

Figure 6-1729 Remove the roller

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1755

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF PCA (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder printed circuit assembly (PCA).

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-167 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67013 ADF PCA_ENT EASE board

5QJ90-67008 ADF PCA_WF EASE board (for flow)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1756 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1730 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1731 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

Remove the document feeder 1757

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1732 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

Figure 6-1733 Remove the document feeder

1758 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1734 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

3. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1735 Remove three screws

Remove the document feeder rear cover 1759

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove one screw, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1736 Remove the cover

4. Remove the document feeder PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder PCA.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors.

NOTE: One flat-flexible cable (FFC; callout 1) is connected to the PCA with a zero-insertion force
(ZIF) connector. Release the connector locking clip to remove the FFC.

Figure 6-1737 Disconnect connectors

1760 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA

Figure 6-1738 Remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1761

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF flat-flexible cable (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder flat-flexible cable (FFC).

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-168 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67009 ADF flat-flexible cable

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1762 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1739 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1740 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

Remove the document feeder 1763

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1741 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

Figure 6-1742 Remove the document feeder

1764 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1743 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

3. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1744 Remove three screws

Remove the document feeder rear cover 1765

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove one screw, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1745 Remove the cover

4. Remove the document feeder FFC

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder FFC.

1. Disconnect the FFC.

NOTE: The FFC (callout 1) is connected to the PCA with a zero-insertion force (ZIF) connector.
Release the connector locking clip to remove the FFC.

Figure 6-1746 Disconnect the FFC

1766 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove the FFC.

Figure 6-1747 Remove the FFC

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1767

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF power cable (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder power cable.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-169 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67010 ADF power cable

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1768 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1748 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1749 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

Remove the document feeder 1769

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1750 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

Figure 6-1751 Remove the document feeder

1770 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1752 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

3. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1753 Remove three screws

Remove the document feeder rear cover 1771

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove one screw, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1754 Remove the cover

4. Remove the document feeder power cable

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder power cable.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1755 Disconnect one connector

1772 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cable.

Figure 6-1756 Remove the cable

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1773

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF hinge kit (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder hinge kit.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-170 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67004 ADF hinge kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder.

1774 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the white backing mounting clips.

Figure 6-1757 Locate the clips

3. Disconnect nine clips, and then remove the white backing.

Figure 6-1758 Remove the white backing

2. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1775

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1759 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1760 Remove two screws and the cover

3. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

1776 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1761 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

Figure 6-1762 Remove the document feeder

Remove the document feeder 1777

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1763 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

4. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1764 Remove three screws

1778 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove one screw, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1765 Remove the cover

5. Remove the document feeder hinge kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder hinge kit.

1. Remove five screw caps.

Figure 6-1766 Remove five screw caps

Remove the document feeder hinge kit 1779

 2. Remove six screws, and then remove the hinge.

Figure 6-1767 Remove the hinge

3. Remove nine screws, and then remove the hinges.

Figure 6-1768 Remove the hinges

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1780 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF hinge damper module (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder damper module.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-171 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67006 Damper module

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: ADF hinge damper module (200sh) 1781

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder.

2. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the white backing mounting clips.

Figure 6-1769 Locate the clips

1782 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect nine clips, and then remove the white backing.

Figure 6-1770 Remove the white backing

2. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1771 Remove two screw caps

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1783

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1772 Remove two screws and the cover

3. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1773 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

1784 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1774 Remove the document feeder

3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1775 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

4. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

Remove the document feeder rear cover 1785

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1776 Remove three screws

2. Open the ADF top cover, remove one screw, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1777 Remove the cover

5. Remove the document feeder hinge damper module

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder hinge damper module.

1786 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1778 Remove two screws

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the hinge damper module.

Figure 6-1779 Remove the hinge damper module

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1787

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Flatbed Scanner (Tarot HS)

Learn about flatbed scanner parts removal and replacement.

Whole unit
Learn about the flatbed scanner whole unit replacement.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner whole unit

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed whole unit.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1788 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-172 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ32-60103 Flatbed scanner (Tarot HS)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1780 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the controller cover 1789

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1781 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1782 Remove the screw caps

1790 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1783 Remove the cover

4. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1784 Remove two screw caps

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1791

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1785 Remove two screws and the cover

5. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1786 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector and two flat-flexible cables FFCs (callout 1).

CAUTION: Disconnecting one of the FFCs requires opening a retaining clip (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Use the special installation instructions in this topic to avoid damaging the
FFCs.

1792 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1787 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1788 Remove the document feeder assembly

6. Remove the flatbed scanner whole unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed scanner.

Remove the flatbed scanner whole unit 1793

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1789 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors.

Figure 6-1790 Disconnect three connectors

1794 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Push the flatbed towards the front of the printer to release it, and then remove the flatbed scanner
whole unit.

Figure 6-1791 Remove the whole unit

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1795

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Covers
Learn about the flatbed scanner covers replacement.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-173 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ11-40008 Rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

1796 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1792 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1793 Remove two screws and the cover

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1797

 2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

PCA, harness, and sensor

Learn about the flatbed scanner PCA, harness, and sensor replacement.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner PCA assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed PCA.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

1798 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-174 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ32-60104 Flatbed PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1794 Remove two screw caps

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1799

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1795 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the flatbed PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed PCA.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors.

Figure 6-1796 Disconnect all connectors

1800 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1797 Remove two screws

3. Remove the flatbed scanner PCA and bracket assembly.

Figure 6-1798 Remove the PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1801

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 50 pin

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed FFC 50 pin.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-175 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ11-50021 Flatbed FFC 50 pin

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1802 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1799 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the controller cover 1803

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1800 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1801 Remove the screw caps

1804 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1802 Remove the cover

4. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1803 Remove two screw caps

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1805

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1804 Remove two screws and the cover

5. Remove the flatbed FFC 50 pin

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed FFC 50 pin.

■ Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the flatbed FFC 50 pin..

Figure 6-1805 Remove the FFC

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1806 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 68 pin

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed FFC 68 pin.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-176 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ11-50022 Flatbed FFC 68 pin

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 68 pin 1807

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1806 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1808 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1807 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1808 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 1809

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1809 Remove the cover

4. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1810 Remove two screw caps

1810 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1811 Remove two screws and the cover

5. Remove the flatbed FFC 68 pin

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed FFC 68 pin.

■ Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the flatbed FFC 68 pin.

Figure 6-1812 Remove the FFC

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the flatbed FFC 68 pin 1811

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner discrete power cable

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed power cable.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-177 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ11-50006 Flatbed discrete power cable

1812 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1813 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the controller cover 1813

 ■ Remove nine screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1814 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1815 Remove the screw caps

1814 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1816 Remove the cover

4. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1817 Remove two screw caps

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1815

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1818 Remove two screws and the cover

5. Remove the flatbed power cable

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed power cable.

■ Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the flatbed power cable.

Figure 6-1819 Remove the cable

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1816 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner flatbed open sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed open sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-178 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (flatbed open sensor)

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner flatbed open sensor 1817

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1820 Remove two screw caps

1818 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1821 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the flatbed power cable

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed power cable.

■ Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Separate the sensor from the flatbed (callout 2).

● Disconnect one connector (callout 3), and then remove the flatbed open sensor.

Figure 6-1822 Remove the sensor

Remove the flatbed power cable 1819

 3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Input device (department)

Learn about input device (department) parts removal and replacement.

sHCI (department)
Learn about side high capacity input (department) parts removal and replacement.

Covers
Review the sHCI cover removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: sHCI right cover

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) right cover.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

1820 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-179 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40020 sHCI right cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

Remove the sHCI right cover 1821

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1823 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

1822 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-180 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-61019 sHCI rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

Removal and replacement: sHCI rear cover 1823

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1824 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1825 Remove the cover

1824 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI harness cover

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) harness cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1825

 Table 6-181 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40018 sHCI harness cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

● Small flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI harness cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI harness cover.

■ Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the harness cover, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1826 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1826 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI rear top cover

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) rear top cover.

Mean time to repair: 6 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-182 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40024 sHCI rear top cover

Removal and replacement: sHCI rear top cover 1827

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1827 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

1828 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1828 Remove the cover

3. Remove the sHCI right top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right top cover.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the right top cover.

Figure 6-1829 Remove the cover

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the sHCI right top cover 1829

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI pickup cover

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) pickup cover.

Mean time to repair: 6 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-183 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40019 sHCI pickup cover

1830 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI pickup cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI pickup cover.

1. Remove three screw caps, and then remove three screws.

Figure 6-1830 Remove three screws

Remove the sHCI pickup cover 1831

 2. Remove the pickup cover.

Figure 6-1831 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1832 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI top cover

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) top cover.

Mean time to repair: 6 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-184 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-61018 sHCI top cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

Removal and replacement: sHCI top cover 1833

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1832 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1833 Remove the cover

1834 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the sHCI link door 1st front and rear
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI door links.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1834 Remove one screw

3. Slightly close the door, release the boss on the door from the link, and then remove the link
assembly.

NOTE: Repeat these steps to remove the remaining door link if necessary.

Figure 6-1835 Remove the assembly

Remove the sHCI link door 1st front and rear 1835
 4. Optional step: Align the pin on one link with the slot on the other link, and then separate the two link
arms.

Figure 6-1836 Separate the link arms

4. Remove the sHCI top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI top cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring and then remove wire and holder.

Figure 6-1837 Remove the e-ring and wire

1836 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1838 Remove one screw

3. Slide the top cover to the right to remove it.

Figure 6-1839 Remove the cover

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1837

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI front cover

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) front cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-185 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40026 sHCI front cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1838 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1840 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front cover.

Remove the sHCI right cover 1839

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1841 Remove the cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1840 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI front top cover

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) front top cover.

Mean time to repair: 6 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-186 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40027 sHCI front top cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI pickup cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI pickup cover.

Removal and replacement: sHCI front top cover 1841

 1. Remove three screw caps, and then remove three screws.

Figure 6-1842 Remove three screws

2. Remove the pickup cover.

Figure 6-1843 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

1842 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1844 Remove the cover

3. Remove the sHCI front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1845 Remove the cover

Remove the sHCI front cover 1843

 4. Remove the sHCI front top cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front top cover.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the front top cover.

Figure 6-1846 Remove the cover

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1844 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI link door 1st front and rear
Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) door links.

NOTE: The steps to remove the door link 1st front are identical to removing the door link 1st rear.

TIP:

● Link door 1st front removal only: Remove the right and front covers.

● Link door 1st rear removal only: Remove the right and rear covers.

● Link door 1st front and rear: Remove the right and front and rear covers.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-187 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04279A Link door 1st front

JC66-04279A Link door 1st rear

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: sHCI link door 1st front and rear 1845
 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1847 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front cover.

1846 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1848 Remove the cover

3. Remove the sHCI rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1849 Remove the cover

4. Remove the sHCI link door 1st front and rear

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI door links.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

Remove the sHCI rear cover 1847

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1850 Remove one screw

3. Slightly close the door, release the boss on the door from the link, and then remove the link
assembly.

NOTE: Repeat these steps to remove the remaining door link if necessary.

Figure 6-1851 Remove the assembly

1848 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Optional step: Align the pin on one link with the slot on the other link, and then separate the two link
arms.

Figure 6-1852 Separate the link arms

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1849

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI link door 2nd front and rear
Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) door links.

NOTE: The steps to remove the door link 2nd front are identical to removing the door link 2nd rear.

TIP:

● Link door 2nd front removal only: Remove the right and front covers.

● Link door 2nd rear removal only: Remove the right and rear covers.

● Link door 2nd front and rear: Remove the right and front and rear covers.

View a video of removing and replacing the sHCI door links.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-188 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04278A Link door 2nd front

JC66-04277A Link door 2nd rear

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

1850 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1853 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front cover.

Remove the sHCI right cover 1851

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1854 Remove the cover

3. Remove the sHCI rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1855 Remove the cover

4. Remove the sHCI link door 2nd front and rear

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI door links.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

1852 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1856 Remove one screw

3. Slightly close the door, release the boss on the door from the link, and then remove the link
assembly.

NOTE: Repeat these steps to remove the remaining door link if necessary.

Figure 6-1857 Remove the assembly

Remove the sHCI link door 2nd front and rear 1853
 4. Optional step: Align the pin on one link with the slot on the other link, and then separate the two link
arms.

Figure 6-1858 Separate the link arms

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1854 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI link holder front and rear

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) link holders.

NOTE: The steps to remove the link holder front are identical to removing the link holder rear.

TIP:

● Link holder front removal only: Remove the right and front covers.

● Link holder rear removal only: Remove the right and rear covers.

● Link holder front and rear: Remove the right and front and rear covers.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-189 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-06567A Link holder front

JC61-06568A Link holder rear

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: sHCI link holder front and rear 1855
 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1859 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front cover.

1856 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1860 Remove the cover

3. Remove the sHCI rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1861 Remove the cover

4. Remove the sHCI link holder front and rear

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI link holders.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

Remove the sHCI rear cover 1857

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1862 Remove one screw

3. Use a small screwdriver to release one pin.

Figure 6-1863 Release the assembly

4. Lift up on the holder to remove it.

NOTE: Repeat these steps to remove the remaining link holder if necessary.

Reinstallation tip: Position the holder on the sHCI chassis, and then push straight down to install it.

1858 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1864 Remove the holder

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1859

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unit
Review the sHCI unit parts removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) pickup assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) pickup assembly.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-190 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ98-60014 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI pickup cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI pickup cover.

1860 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screw caps, and then remove three screws.

Figure 6-1865 Remove three screws

2. Remove the pickup cover.

Figure 6-1866 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

Remove the sHCI right cover 1861

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1867 Remove the cover

3. Remove the sHCI front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1868 Remove the cover

1862 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Remove the sHCI rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1869 Remove the cover

5. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI pickup assembly.

1. Open the top cover.

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

Figure 6-1870 Remove one e-ring

Remove the sHCI rear cover 1863

 3. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1871 Remove three screws

4. Before proceeding, take note of the spring positions. Do not loose the springs when removing the
assembly.

Figure 6-1872 Spring positions

1864 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the pickup assembly.

Figure 6-1873 Remove the assembly

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1865

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) top cover open switch assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) top cover open switch assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-191 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01123A sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) top cover open switch assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

1866 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1874 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1875 Remove the cover

Remove the sHCI front cover 1867

 3. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) top cover open switch assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI top cover open switch assembly.

1. Open the top cover.

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove three e-rings, and then remove the lever handle.

Figure 6-1876 Remove the lever handle

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover open switch assembly.

Figure 6-1877 Remove the assembly

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1868 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Roller
Review the sHCI roller removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) tray roller kit

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) tray roller kit.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Roller 1869
 Table 6-192 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN66-67001 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) tray roller kit

5QJ90-60128 sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup roller

JC93-01726A sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) forward roller

JC93-01726A sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) reverse roller

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) tray roller kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI tray roller kit.

1. Open the pickup assembly.

2. Open the retard guide.

Reinstallation tip: After installing replacement rollers, make sure to firmly push the return guide
towards the rear of the sHCI to prevent paper jams.

1870 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1878 Open the guide

3. Use a pair of tweezers to release the locking tab, and then slide the roller off the shaft to remove it.

● Pickup roller: callout 1

● Forward roller: callout 2

● Reverse roller: callout 3

NOTE: Hold the guide open to remove the reverse roller.

Figure 6-1879 Remove the rollers

Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) tray roller kit 1871

 2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Motor
Review the sHCI motor removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) pickup, feed drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) pickup, feed drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the sHCI Tray 5 or 6 pickup, feed drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

1872 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-193 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01112A sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup, feed drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

Remove the sHCI right cover 1873

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1880 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1881 Remove the cover

1874 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup, feed drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI pickup, feed drive assembly.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the sHCI pickup, feed drive
assembly.

Figure 6-1882 Remove the assembly

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup, feed drive assembly 1875

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) pickup motor

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) pickup motor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-194 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01083A Drive-motor step (sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

1876 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1883 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1884 Remove the cover

Remove the sHCI rear cover 1877

 3. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup motor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI pickup motor.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

2. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the sHCI pickup motor.

Figure 6-1885 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

1878 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) feed motor

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) feed motor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-195 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163A Motor, step (sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feed motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) feed motor 1879

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1886 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1887 Remove the cover

1880 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup, feed drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI pickup, feed drive assembly.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the sHCI pickup, feed drive
assembly.

Figure 6-1888 Remove the assembly

4. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) feed motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI feed motor.

1. Locate the sHCI feed motor (callout 1) on the pickup feed drive assembly.

Figure 6-1889 Locate the motor

Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) pickup, feed drive assembly 1881

 2. Do the following:

a. Turn the pickup feed drive assembly over.

b. Remove one belt (callout 1).

c. Remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the feed motor.

Figure 6-1890 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

1882 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) lift drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) lift drive.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-196 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01127A sHCI(Tray5 or 6) lift drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) lift drive assembly 1883

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1891 Remove the cover

Remove the sHCI rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1892 Remove the cover

1884 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) lift drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI lift drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the lift drive assembly.

Figure 6-1893 Remove the assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) lift drive assembly 1885

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) lift motor

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) lift motor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-197 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00109A Motor, geared (sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) lift motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

1886 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1894 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1895 Remove the cover

Remove the sHCI rear cover 1887

 3. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) lift motor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI lift motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the lift motor.

Figure 6-1896 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1888 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Sensor
Review the sHCI sensor removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) detection sensor 1

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) detection sensor 1.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-198 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) detection sensor 1)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

Sensor 1889
 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1897 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1898 Remove the cover

1890 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) detection sensor 1
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI detection sensor 1.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1899 Remove one screw

3. Separate the mounting bracket assembly from the sHCI chassis, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-1900 Remove two screws

4. Do the following:

NOTE: The black ESD insulator sheet does not need to be removed.

Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) detection sensor 1 1891

 ● Locate the sensor on the backside of the sensor bracket.

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 3) to remove it.

Figure 6-1901 Remove the sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

1892 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) detection sensor 2

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) detection sensor 2.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-199 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) detection sensor 2)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) detection sensor 2 1893

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1902 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1903 Remove the cover

1894 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) detection sensor 2
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI detection sensor 2.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

2. Do the following:

NOTE: The black ESD insulator sheet does not need to be removed.

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 4) to remove it.

Figure 6-1904 Remove the sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) detection sensor 2 1895

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) door open sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) door open sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-200 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02346A Interlock switch (sHCI [Tray 5 or 6] door open sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1896 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1905 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front cover.

Remove the sHCI right cover 1897

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1906 Remove the cover

3. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) door open sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI door open sensor.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

2. Release two tabs, and then remove the door open sensor.

Figure 6-1907 Remove the sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1898 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) paper level sensors

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) paper level sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-201 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) paper level sensor 1)

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) paper level sensors 1899

 Table 6-201 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) paper level sensor 2)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1908 Remove the cover

1900 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove the sHCI front cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1909 Remove the cover

3. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) detection sensor 2paper level sesnor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI paper level sensor.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

2. Do the following:

NOTE: The black ESD insulator sheet does not need to be removed.

● Callout 1: Paper level sensor 1

● Callout 2: Paper level sensor 2

● Disconnect one connector (callout 3).

● Release the hooks (callout 4).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 5).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 6) to remove it.

Remove the sHCI front cover 1901

 Figure 6-1910 Remove the sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1902 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) stack height and paper empty sensors
Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) stack height and paper empty
sensors.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-202 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) stack height sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) paper empty sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI pickup cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI pickup cover.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) stack height and paper empty sensors 1903
 1. Remove three screw caps, and then remove three screws.

Figure 6-1911 Remove three screws

2. Remove the pickup cover.

Figure 6-1912 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

1904 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1913 Remove the cover

3. Remove the sHCI front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI front cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1914 Remove the cover

Remove the sHCI front cover 1905

 4. Remove the sHCI rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1915 Remove the cover

5. Remove the sHCI (Tray 5 or 6) paper level sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI paper level sensor.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

2. Do the following:

NOTE: The black ESD insulator sheet does not need to be removed.

● Callout 1: Stack height sensor

● Callout 2: Paper empty sensor

● Disconnect one connector (callout 3).

● Release the hooks (callout 4).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 5).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 6) to remove it.

1906 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1916 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1907

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: sHCI prefeed 5 sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) prefeed 5 sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-203 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-01490 Photo interrupter (sHCI prefeed 5 sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI pickup cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI pickup cover.

1908 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screw caps, and then remove three screws.

Figure 6-1917 Remove three screws

2. Remove the pickup cover.

Figure 6-1918 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI prefeed 5 sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI prefeed 5 sensor.

Remove the sHCI prefeed 5 sensor 1909

 1. Open the top cover.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the guide upper cover.

Figure 6-1919 Remove the cover

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the guide takeaway upper cover.

Figure 6-1920 Remove the cover

1910 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1921 Remove the assembly

5. Do the following:

TIP: It might be easier to remove the sensor by first removing one screw (callout 1), and then
turning the senor/bracket assembly over to access the sensor mounting features.

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 4) to remove it.

Figure 6-1922 Remove the sensor

Remove the sHCI prefeed 5 sensor 1911

 3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

PCA
Review the sHCI PCA removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: sHCI (Tray5 or 6) PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the side high capacity input (sHCI) PCA.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

1912 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-204 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW56-60001 sHCI PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the sHCI right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI right cover.

Remove the sHCI right cover 1913

 ■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1923 Remove the cover

2. Remove the sHCI PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the sHCI PCA.

1. Open the top cover and the pickup cover.

1914 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the PCA.

Figure 6-1924 Disconnect all connectors

3. Remove three screws, and then remove the sHCI PCA.

Figure 6-1925 Remove the PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1915

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

DCF (department)
Learn about dual cassette feeder (department) parts removal and replacement.

Covers
Review the DCF cover removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1916 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-205 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40006 DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1926 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover 1917

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-206 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40007 DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

1918 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1927 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover 1919

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) left cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-207 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40008 DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1920 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-1928 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover 1921

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-208 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-61004 DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1922 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

■ Push down on the hook (callout 1), slide the pin (callout 2) as shown below, and then remove the right
door.

Figure 6-1929 Remove the door

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door 1923

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4, 5 CMF panels

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4, 5 color panel.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-209 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40011 Tray 4 CMF panel

5QK08-40012 Tray 5 CMF panel

1924 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 CMF panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4, 5 CMF panel.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

2. Push the hook to release it.

Figure 6-1930 Release the hook

Remove the Tray 4, 5 CMF panel 1925

 3. Slide the panel to the left to remove the tray CMF panel.

Figure 6-1931 Remove the panel

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1926 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster wheel

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) caster wheel.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-210 Part information

Part number Part description

6109-001138 Caster wheel

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the caster wheel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF caster wheel.

1. Remove the DCF from the printer.

Removal and replacement: Caster wheel 1927

 2. Do the following:

a. Remove two screws (callout 1).

b. Rotate the caster wheel (callout 2) out of the way, and then remove two screws (callout 3).

c. Remove the caster wheel.

Figure 6-1932 Remove the caster

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

1928 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Holder wheel kit - guide adjust

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) holder wheel kit.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-211 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-04871A Guide - adjust DCF

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the holder wheel kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF holder wheel kit.

1. Remove the DCF from the printer.

Removal and replacement: Holder wheel kit - guide adjust 1929

 2. Turn the holder wheel counterclockwise to remove it.

Figure 6-1933 Remove the holder wheel

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the holder wheel mounting bracket.

Figure 6-1934 Remove the bracket

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1930 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unit
Review the DCF unit parts removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4, 5 cassettes

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4, 5 cassette.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-212 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ08-61007 Tray 4 cassette

5QJ08-61005 Tray 5 cassette

Unit 1931
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1935 Remove the cassette

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1932 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Roller
Review the DCF roller removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: DCF roller kit

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4, 5 rollers.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-213 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN66-67001 DCF roller kit Tray 4

5PN66-67001 DCF roller kit Tray 5

Roller 1933
 Required tools
● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1936 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the Tray 4, 5 rollers

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray rollers.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the rollers is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

1. Inside the tray cavity, slide the return guide toward the front of the printer until it stops.

Reinstallation tip: To prevent jams, make sure to slide the guide toward the rear of the printer after
installing replacement rollers.

1934 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1937 Move the guide

2. Use a pair of tweezers to release the locking tab, and then slide the roller off the shaft to remove it.

● Pickup roller: callout 1

● Forward roller: callout 2

● Reverse roller: callout 3

Figure 6-1938 Remove the rollers

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1935

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Motor
Review the DCF motor removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: DCF pickup drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup drive assembly.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

1936 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-214 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01663A DCF pickup drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1939 Remove the cover

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover 1937

 2. Remove the DCF pickup drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF pickup drive assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the Tray 4 pickup drive
assembly.

Figure 6-1940 Remove the assembly (Tray 4)

2. Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the Tray 5 pickup drive
assembly.

Figure 6-1941 Remove the assembly (Tray 5)

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1938 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 pickup motor

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4 pickup motor.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 pickup motor 1939

 Table 6-215 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01083A Drive-motor step (Tray 4 pickup motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1942 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF Tray 4 pickup motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup motor.

1940 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the Tray 4 pickup motor.

Figure 6-1943 Remove the motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1941

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 5 pickup motor

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 5 pickup motor.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-216 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01083A Drive-motor step (Tray 5 pickup motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

1942 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1944 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF Tray 5 pickup motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 5 pickup motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the Tray 5 pickup motor.

Figure 6-1945 Remove the motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the DCF Tray 5 pickup motor 1943

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF feed drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) feed drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-217 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01135A DCF feed drive assembly

1944 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1946 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF feed drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF feed drive assembly.

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover 1945

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive assembly.

Figure 6-1947 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1946 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) feed motor

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) feed motor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-218 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00177A Motor, step (DCF Tray 4, 5 feed motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) feed motor 1947

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1948 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF feed drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF feed drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive assembly.

Figure 6-1949 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the DCF feed motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF feed motor.

1948 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove the belt (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the feed motor (callout 3).

Figure 6-1950 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1949

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Sensor
Review the DCF sensor removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4, 5 paper size sensors

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4, 5 paper size sensors.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-219 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00018B Autosize sensor (Paper size Tray 4)

JC93-00018B Autosize sensor (Paper size Tray 5)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

1950 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1951 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the Tray 4, 5 paper size sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray paper size sensors.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the paper size sensors is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the paper size
sensor.

● Callout 3: Tray 4 paper size sensor

● Callout 4: Tray 5 paper size sensor

Remove the Tray 4, 5 paper size sensors 1951

 Figure 6-1952 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1952 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 pickup assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4 pickup assembly.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-220 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-61009 Tray 4 pickup assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 pickup assembly 1953

 ■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1953 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1954 Remove the cover

3. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

1954 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Push down on the hook (callout 1), slide the pin (callout 2) as shown below, and then remove the right
door.

Figure 6-1955 Remove the door

4. Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-1956 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly 1955

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1957 Remove four screws

3. Rotate the pickup assembly up (callout 1), and then out of the DCF (callout 2).

Figure 6-1958 Remove the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1956 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 paper empty and stack height sensors
Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4 paper empty and stack height
sensors.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-221 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 4 paper empty sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 4 paper stack height sensor)

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 paper empty and stack height sensors 1957
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1959 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the Tray 4, 5 paper empty and stack height sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray paper empty and stack height sensors.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the paper empty sensor or the paper stack height sensor is the
same for both sensors.

1. Locate the desired sensor to remove (on the Tray 4 pickup assembly).

● Callout 1: Tray 4, 5 paper stack height sensor

1958 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Callout 2: Tray 4, 5 paper empty sensor

Figure 6-1960 Locate the sensor

2. Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

● Release the sensor.

Figure 6-1961 Release the sensor

Remove the Tray 4, 5 paper empty and stack height sensors 1959
 3. Disconnect one connector to remove the sensor.

Figure 6-1962 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1960 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 prefeed sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4 prefeed sensor.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-222 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Tray 4 prefeed sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 prefeed sensor 1961

 ■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1963 Remove the cassette

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1964 Remove the cover

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

1962 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Push down on the hook (callout 1), slide the pin (callout 2) as shown below, and then remove the right
door.

Figure 6-1965 Remove the door

Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-1966 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly 1963

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1967 Remove four screws

3. Rotate the pickup assembly up (callout 1), and then out of the DCF (callout 2).

Figure 6-1968 Remove the assembly

Remove the Tray 4 prefeed sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 prefeed sensor.

1964 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1969 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2) to remove the Tray 4
prefeed sensor.

Figure 6-1970 Remove the sensor

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1965

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 5 pickup assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 5 pickup assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-223 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-61010 Tray 5 pickup assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1966 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1971 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette 1967

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1972 Remove the cover

3. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

■ Push down on the hook (callout 1), slide the pin (callout 2) as shown below, and then remove the right
door.

Figure 6-1973 Remove the door

4. Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly.

1968 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-1974 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1975 Remove four screws

Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly 1969

 3. Rotate the pickup assembly up (callout 1), and then out of the DCF (callout 2).

Figure 6-1976 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the Tray 5 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 5 pickup assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the Tray 5 pickup assembly.

Figure 6-1977 Remove the assembly

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1970 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 5 paper empty and stack height sensors
Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 5 paper empty and stack height
sensors.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Tray 5 paper empty and stack height sensors 1971
 Table 6-224 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 5 paper empty sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 5 paper stack height sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1978 Remove the cassette

1972 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove the Tray 4, 5 paper empty and stack height sensors
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray paper empty and stack height sensors.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the paper empty sensor or the paper stack height sensor is the
same for both sensors.

1. Locate the desired sensor to remove (on the Tray 4 pickup assembly).

● Callout 1: Tray 4, 5 paper stack height sensor

● Callout 2: Tray 4, 5 paper empty sensor

Figure 6-1979 Locate the sensor

2. Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

● Release the sensor.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 paper empty and stack height sensors 1973
 Figure 6-1980 Release the sensor

3. Disconnect one connector to remove the sensor.

Figure 6-1981 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1974 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 5 prefeed sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 5 prefeed sensor.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-225 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Tray 5 prefeed sensor)

Removal and replacement: Tray 5 prefeed sensor 1975

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1982 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

1976 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1983 Remove the cover

3. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

■ Push down on the hook (callout 1), slide the pin (callout 2) as shown below, and then remove the right
door.

Figure 6-1984 Remove the door

4. Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly.

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door 1977

 1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-1985 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1986 Remove four screws

1978 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Rotate the pickup assembly up (callout 1), and then out of the DCF (callout 2).

Figure 6-1987 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the Tray 5 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 5 pickup assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the Tray 5 pickup assembly.

Figure 6-1988 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the Tray 5 prefeed sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 5 prefeed sensor.

Remove the Tray 5 pickup assembly 1979

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1989 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2) to remove the Tray 5
prefeed sensor.

Figure 6-1990 Remove the sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1980 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF feed sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) feed sensor.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-226 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-01490 Photo interrupter (DCF feed sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: DCF feed sensor 1981

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1991 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

1982 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1992 Remove the cover

3. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

■ Push down on the hook (callout 1), slide the pin (callout 2) as shown below, and then remove the right
door.

Figure 6-1993 Remove the door

4. Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly.

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door 1983

 1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-1994 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1995 Remove four screws

1984 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Rotate the pickup assembly up (callout 1), and then out of the DCF (callout 2).

Figure 6-1996 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the DCF feed sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF feed sensor.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1997 Remove two screws

Remove the DCF feed sensor 1985

 2. Turn the assembly over, disconnect one connector, and then remove the DCF feed sensor.

Figure 6-1998 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1986 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

PCA and harness

Review the DCF PCA and harness removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Tray heater

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF tray heaters.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-227 Part information

Part number Part description

Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V

Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

PCA and harness 1987

 NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1999 Remove the cassette

2. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-2000 Remove one screw

1988 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Do the following:

● Slightly lift up on the front of the heater, and pull it toward the front of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the heater. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire-harness connector.

● Disconnect one connector, and then remove the heater.

Figure 6-2001 Remove the heater

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1989

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF PCA.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-228 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW47-60001 DCF (Tray4, 5) PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1990 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2002 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF PCA.

■ Disconnect all of the connectors (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the
DCF PCA.

Figure 6-2003 Remove the PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the DCF PCA 1991

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door open switch holder assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the DCF right door open switch holder.

NOTE: This procedure describes replacing only the switch holder. To replace the right door open
switch, remove and replace the DCF Dpt door open switch and harness (JC39-02268A).

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1992 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-229 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01385A DCF (Tray4, 5) right door open switch holder

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2004 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF right door open switch holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF right door open switch holder.

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover 1993

 1. Open the right door.

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2005 Remove two screws

3. Remove one screw and then pull the switch and holder out.

TIP: Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and release the wire harness from retainers as needed
to create enough wire harness slack to pull the switch-holder assembly out.

Figure 6-2006 Pull out the switch and holder

4. Release two tabs (callout 1) and then remove the switch from the holder to remove it (callout 2).

NOTE: This step is required to replace the switch holder. To replace the right door open switch,
remove the DCF Dpt door open switch and harness (JC39-02268A).

1994 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2007 Remove the holder

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1995

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF IF harness

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF IF harness.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-230 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02606A DCF IF harness

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

1996 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2008 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF IF harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF IF harness.

1. Disconnect one connector on the DCF PCA.

Figure 6-2009 Disconnect one connector

Remove the DCF IF harness 1997

 2. Disconnect two connectors, release retainers as needed, and then remove the DCF IF harness.

Figure 6-2010 Remove the harness

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1998 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF door open switch sensor and harness
Learn about removing and replacing the DCF door open switch and harness.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-231 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02268A DCF door open switch and harness

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

Removal and replacement: DCF door open switch sensor and harness 1999
 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2011 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF right door open switch holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF right door open switch holder.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2012 Remove two screws

3. Remove one screw and then pull the switch and holder out.

TIP: Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and release the wire harness from retainers as needed
to create enough wire harness slack to pull the switch-holder assembly out.

2000 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2013 Pull out the switch and holder

4. Release two tabs (callout 1) and then remove the switch from the holder to remove it (callout 2).

NOTE: This step is required to replace the switch holder. To replace the right door open switch,
remove the DCF Dpt door open switch and harness (JC39-02268A).

Figure 6-2014 Remove the holder

3. Remove the door open switch and harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF door open switch and harness.

Remove the door open switch and harness 2001

 ■ Disconnect three connectors, release retainers as needed, and then remove the DCF door open
switch and harness.

Figure 6-2015 Remove the harness

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2002 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF motor harness 2nd

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF motor harness 2nd.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-232 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02268A DCF motor harness 2nd

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

Removal and replacement: DCF motor harness 2nd 2003

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2016 Remove the cover

2. Remove the motor harness 2nd

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF motor harness 2nd.

■ Disconnect two connectors, release retainers as needed, and then remove the DCF motor harness
2nd.

Figure 6-2017 Remove the harness

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2004 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF sensor harness 1st

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF sensor harness 1st.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: DCF sensor harness 1st 2005

 Table 6-233 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02271A DCF sensor harness 1st

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2018 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

2006 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-2019 Remove the cover

3. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

■ Push down on the hook (callout 1), slide the pin (callout 2) as shown below, and then remove the right
door.

Figure 6-2020 Remove the door

4. Remove the sensor harness 1st

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF sensor harness 1st.

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door 2007

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2021 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect one connector, release retainers as needed, and then remove the DCF sensor harness
1st.

Figure 6-2022 Remove the harness

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2008 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF sensor harness 2nd

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF sensor harness 2nd.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-234 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02269A DCF sensor harness 2nd

Removal and replacement: DCF sensor harness 2nd 2009

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2023 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

2010 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-2024 Remove the cover

3. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

■ Push down on the hook (callout 1), slide the pin (callout 2) as shown below, and then remove the right
door.

Figure 6-2025 Remove the door

4. Remove the sensor harness 2nd

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF sensor harness 2nd.

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door 2011

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2026 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect one connector, release retainers as needed, and then remove the DCF sensor harness
2nd.

Figure 6-2027 Remove the harness

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2012 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF size harness

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF size harness.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-235 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02275A DCF size harness

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: DCF size harness 2013

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-2028 Remove the cassette

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

2014 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2029 Remove the cover

Remove the size harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF size harness.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2030 Disconnect one connector

Remove the size harness 2015

 2. Disconnect two connectors (inside the tray cavity), release retainers as needed, and then remove
the DCF size harness (from the rear of the DCF).

Figure 6-2031 Remove the harness

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2016 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

HCI (department)
Learn about high capacity input (department) parts removal and replacement.

Covers
Review the HCI cover removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) right cover

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) right cover.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-236 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40006 HCI (Tray 4) right cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

HCI (department) 2017

 1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-2032 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2018 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-237 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40007 HCI (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) rear cover 2019

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2033 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2020 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) left cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-238 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40008 HCI (Tray 4, 5) left cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI left cover.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) left cover 2021

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-2034 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2022 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) right door

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) right door.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-239 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-61023 HCI (Tray 4) right door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right door.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) right door 2023

 ■ Push down on the hook (callout 1), slide the pin (callout 2) as shown below, and then remove the right
door.

Figure 6-2035 Remove the door

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2024 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) front CMF panel

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) front CMF panel.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-240 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-40016 HCI (Tray 4) front CMF panel

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) front CMF panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI CMF panel.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) front CMF panel 2025

 ■ Release one tab (callout 1), slide the panel to the left (callout 2), and then remove the front CMF panel

Figure 6-2036 Remove the panel

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2026 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster wheel

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) caster wheel.

NOTE: Remove the HCI from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-241 Part information

Part number Part description

6109-001138 Caster wheel

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the caster wheel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI caster wheel.

1. Remove the HCI from the printer.

Removal and replacement: Caster wheel 2027

 2. Do the following:

a. Remove two screws (callout 1).

b. Rotate the caster wheel (callout 2) out of the way, and then remove two screws (callout 3).

c. Remove the caster wheel.

Figure 6-2037 Remove the caster

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

2028 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Holder wheel kit - guide adjust

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) holder wheel kit.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-242 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-04871A Guide - adjust HCI

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the holder wheel kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI holder wheel kit.

1. Remove the HCI from the printer.

Removal and replacement: Holder wheel kit - guide adjust 2029

 2. Turn the holder wheel counterclockwise to remove it.

Figure 6-2038 Remove the holder wheel

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the holder wheel mounting bracket.

Figure 6-2039 Remove the bracket

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2030 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unit
Review the HCI unit parts removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) unit

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) unit.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-243 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW57-67001 HCI (Tray 4) unit

NOTE: This is the whole unit replacement (WUR) part number.

Unit 2031
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-2040 Remove the tray

2. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI Tray 4 unit.

2032 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two thumbscrews.

Figure 6-2041 Remove two thumbscrews

2. Lift the printer off of the HCI unit, and then use the install guide included with the replacement HCI
to install it.

WARNING! The printer is heavy. HP recommends that four people lift the printer off of the HCI.

Figure 6-2042 Remove the HCI

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2033

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) cassette

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) cassette.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-244 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-61014 HCI (Tray 4) cassette

2034 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2043 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the HCI cassette 2035

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) pickup assembly.

NOTE: Remove the HCI from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-245 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK08-61013 HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly

2036 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-2044 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right door.

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover 2037

 ■ Push down on the hook (callout 1), slide the pin (callout 2) as shown below, and then remove the right
door.

Figure 6-2045 Remove the door

3. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI Tray 4 pickup assembly.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4 pickup assembly. The
removal steps for the HCI Tray 4 pickup assembly are identical to the DCF pickup assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-2046 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2038 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2047 Remove four screws

3. Rotate the pickup assembly up (callout 1), and then out of the HCI (callout 2).

Figure 6-2048 Remove the assembly

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2039

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Roller
Review the HCI roller removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) roller kit

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) Tray 4 rollers.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-246 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN66-67001 HCI Tray 4 roller kit

2040 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2049 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the Tray 4, 5 rollers

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray rollers.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the rollers is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

Remove the HCI cassette 2041

 1. Inside the tray cavity, slide the return guide toward the front of the printer until it stops.

Reinstallation tip: To prevent jams, make sure to slide the guide toward the rear of the printer after
installing replacement rollers.

Figure 6-2050 Move the guide

2. Use a pair of tweezers to release the locking tab, and then slide the roller off the shaft to remove it.

● Pickup roller: callout 1

● Forward roller: callout 2

● Reverse roller: callout 3

2042 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2051 Remove the rollers

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2043

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Motor
Review the HCI motor removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift and lift motors

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) shift lift motors.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-247 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00125A Motor, geared (HCI (Tray4) shift motor)

JC31-00109A Motor, geared (HCI (Tray4) lift motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

2044 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2052 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI shift and lift motors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI shift and lift motor.

1. Remove six screws, and then remove the spring assembly (callout 1).

Figure 6-2053 Remove six screws

Remove the HCI shift and lift motors 2045

 2. Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws,and then remove the motors and mounting plate.

Figure 6-2054 Remove the motors

3. Locate the desired motor.

● Callout 1: HCI (Tray 4) shift motor

● Callout 2: HCI (Tray 4) lift motor (Tray 4 elevating motor)

Figure 6-2055 Locate the motor

2046 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-2056 Remove the motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2047

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Shift plate

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) shift plate.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-248 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-07481B Shift plate

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

2048 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2057 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI shift plate

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI shift plate.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2058 Remove three screws

Remove the HCI shift plate 2049

 2. Turn the tray over, remove two screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2059 Remove two screws

3. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2060 Remove four screws

2050 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the knockup plate.

Figure 6-2061 Remove the plate

5. Remove three screws, and then remove the shift tray.

Figure 6-2062 Remove the shift tray

Remove the HCI shift plate 2051

 6. Remove four screws, and then remove the shift plate.

Figure 6-2063 Remove the plate

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2052 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Knockup plate assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) knockup plate.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-249 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW48-60003 Knockup plate

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

Removal and replacement: Knockup plate assembly 2053

 ● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2064 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI knockup plate assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI knockup plate.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2065 Remove three screws

2054 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Turn the tray over, remove two screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2066 Remove two screws

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the knockup plate.

Figure 6-2067 Remove four screws

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2055

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper gate

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) paper gate.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-250 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-07478B Paper gate

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

2056 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2068 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI paper gate

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI paper gate.

Remove the HCI cassette 2057

 1. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then pull the assembly up to gain access to it.

Figure 6-2069 Access the assembly

2. Remove one spring, and then remove the paper gate.

Figure 6-2070 Remove the paper gate

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2058 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) feed motor drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) feed motor drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-251 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01114A HCI (Tray 4) feed motor drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) feed motor drive assembly 2059
 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2071 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI feed motor drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI feed motor drive assembly.

2060 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the feed motor drive assembly.

Figure 6-2072 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2061

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) pickup motor drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) pickup motor drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-252 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01115A HCI (Tray 4) pickup motor drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

2062 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2073 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI pickup motor drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI pickup motor drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the pickup motor drive assembly.

Figure 6-2074 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the HCI pickup motor drive assembly 2063

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift gate solenoid

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) shift gate solenoid.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-253 Part information

Part number Part description

JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting (HCI (Tray 4) shift gate solenoid)

2064 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2075 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

Remove the HCI shift gate solenoid

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI shift gate solenoid.

Remove the HCI cassette 2065

 1. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then pull the assembly up to gain access to it.

Figure 6-2076 Access the assembly

2. Remove two screws, release two hooks, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-2077 Remove the cover

2066 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2078 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove two screws, and then remove the shift gate solenoid (behind the panel).

NOTE: Release the solenoid wire harness as needed.

Figure 6-2079 Remove the solenoid

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2067

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Sensor
Review the HCI sensor removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Prefeed 4 sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) prefeed 4 sensor.

NOTE: Remove the HCI from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

2068 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-254 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (prefeed 4 sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2080 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right cover.

Remove the HCI cassette 2069

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-2081 Remove the cover

3. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right door.

■ Push down on the hook (callout 1), slide the pin (callout 2) as shown below, and then remove the right
door.

Figure 6-2082 Remove the door

4. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI Tray 4 pickup assembly.

2070 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

NOTE: The figures in this topic show the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4 pickup assembly. The
removal steps for the HCI Tray 4 pickup assembly are identical to the DCF pickup assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-2083 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2084 Remove four screws

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly 2071

 3. Rotate the pickup assembly up (callout 1), and then out of the HCI (callout 2).

Figure 6-2085 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the Tray 4 prefeed sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI Tray 4 prefeed sensor.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-2086 Remove one screw

2072 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2) to remove the Tray 4
prefeed sensor.

Figure 6-2087 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2073

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) feed sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) feed sensor.

NOTE: Remove the HCI from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-255 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-01490 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) feed sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

2074 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2088 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-2089 Remove the cover

3. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right door.

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover 2075

 ■ Push down on the hook (callout 1), slide the pin (callout 2) as shown below, and then remove the right
door.

Figure 6-2090 Remove the door

4. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI Tray 4 pickup assembly.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4 pickup assembly. The
removal steps for the HCI Tray 4 pickup assembly are identical to the DCF pickup assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-2091 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2076 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2092 Remove four screws

3. Rotate the pickup assembly up (callout 1), and then out of the HCI (callout 2).

Figure 6-2093 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the HCI feed sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI feed sensor.

Remove the HCI feed sensor 2077

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2094 Remove two screws

2. Turn the assembly over, disconnect one connector, and then remove the HCI feed sensor.

Figure 6-2095 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2078 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) paper empty and stack height sensors
Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) Tray 4 paper empty and stack height
sensors.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-256 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI Tray 4 paper empty sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI Tray 4 paper stack height sensor)

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) paper empty and stack height sensors 2079
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2096 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the Tray 4 paper empty and stack height sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI tray paper empty and stack height sensors.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the paper empty sensor or the paper stack height sensor is the
same for both sensors.

1. Locate the desired sensor to remove (on the Tray 4 pickup assembly).

● Callout 1: Tray 4 paper stack height sensor

2080 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Callout 2: Tray 4 paper empty sensor

Figure 6-2097 Locate the sensor

2. Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

● Release the sensor.

Figure 6-2098 Release the sensor

Remove the Tray 4 paper empty and stack height sensors 2081
 3. Disconnect one connector to remove the sensor.

Figure 6-2099 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2082 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) knockup home and shift tray end sensors
Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) knockup home sensor.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-257 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) knockup home sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) shift tray end sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) knockup home and shift tray end sensors 2083
 ■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2100 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI knockup home and shift tray end sensors
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI knockup home and shift tray end sensors.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2101 Remove three screws

2084 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Turn the tray over, remove two screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2102 Remove two screws

3. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2103 Remove four screws

Remove the HCI knockup home and shift tray end sensors 2085
 4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the knockup plate.

Figure 6-2104 Remove the plate

5. Remove three screws, and then remove the shift tray.

Figure 6-2105 Remove the shift tray

6. Locate the desired sensor to remove.

● Callout 1: HCI shift tray end sensor

● Callout 2: HCI knockup home sensor

2086 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2106 Locate the sensor

7. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the sensor
(callout 3).

Figure 6-2107 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2087

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray level sensor 1 and 2
Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) shift tray level sensor 1 and 2.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-258 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) shift tray level sensor 1)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) shift tray level sensor 2)

2088 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2108 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI shift tray level sensor 1 and 2

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI shift tray level sensor 1 and 2.

Remove the HCI cassette 2089

 1. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then pull the assembly up to gain access to it..

Figure 6-2109 Access the assembly

2. Remove two screws, release two hooks, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-2110 Remove the cover

3. Locate the desired sensor to remove.

● Callout 1: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray level sensor 1

● Callout 2: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray level sensor 1r

2090 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2111 Locate the sensor

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the shift tray level sensor (callout 2).

NOTE: Removing the shift tray level sensor 1 is shown below.

Figure 6-2112 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2091

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray empty and home sensors
Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) shift tray empty sensor.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-259 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) shift tray empty sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) shift tray home sensor)

2092 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2113 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI shift tray empty and home sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI shift tray empty and home sensors.

Remove the HCI cassette 2093

 1. Remove one sheet-metal plate (callout 1).

Figure 6-2114 Remove the plate

2. Locate the sensor.

● Callout 1: Shift tray empty sensor

● Callout 2: Shift tray home sensor

Figure 6-2115 Locate the sensor

3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the shift tray empty sensor (callout 2).

Repeat this step for the shift tray home sensor if necessary.

2094 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2116 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2095

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) tray open sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) tray open sensor.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-260 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) tray open sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

2096 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2117 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI tray open sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI tray open sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the tray open sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-2118 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the HCI tray open sensor 2097

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) gate solenoid home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) gate solenoid home sensor.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-261 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) gate solenoid home sensor)

2098 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2119 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI gate solenoid home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI gate solenoid home sensor.

Remove the HCI cassette 2099

 1. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then pull the assembly up to gain access to it.

Figure 6-2120 Access the assembly

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the gate solenoid home sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-2121 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2100 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) gate solenoid home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) gate solenoid home sensor.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-262 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) gate solenoid home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) gate solenoid home sensor 2101
 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2122 Remove the cover

Remove the HCI right door open switch holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right door open switch holder.

2102 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-2123 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2124 Remove two screws

Remove the HCI right door open switch holder 2103

 3. Remove one screw and then pull the switch and holder out.

Figure 6-2125 Pull out the switch and holder

4. Release two tabs (callout 1) and then remove the switch from the holder to remove it (callout 2).

Figure 6-2126 Remove the holder

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2104 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

PCA and harness

Review the HCI PCA and harness removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) PCA.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-263 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW57-60001 HCI (Tray 4) PCA

PCA and harness 2105

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2127 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI PCA.

2106 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors.

Figure 6-2128 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the PCA.

Figure 6-2129 Remove the PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2107

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) sub PCA.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-264 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02792A HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

2108 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2130 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI sub PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI sub PCA.

Remove the HCI cassette 2109

 1. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then pull the assembly up to gain access to it.

Figure 6-2131 Access the assembly

2. Remove two screws, release two hooks, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-2132 Remove the cover

2110 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect all of the connectors.

Figure 6-2133 Disconnect all connectors

4. Remove two screws, and then remove the sub PCA.

Figure 6-2134 Remove the PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2111

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI main IF harness

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) main IF harness.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-265 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02605A HCI main IF harness

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

2112 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2135 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI main IF harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI main IF harness.

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover 2113

 ■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), release the harness from the retainers (callout 2), and then
remove the main IF harness.

Figure 6-2136 Remove the harness

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2114 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI sub tray IF harness

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) inner tray IF harness.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-266 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02604A HCI sub tray IF harness

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

fter performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

Removal and replacement: HCI sub tray IF harness 2115

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2137 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI sub tray IF harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI inner tray IF harness.

■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), release the harness from the retainers (callout 2), and then
remove the inner tray IF harness.

Figure 6-2138 Remove the harness

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2116 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI DC motor IF (lift and shift)

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) DC motor IF.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-267 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02282A HCI DC motor IF

Removal and replacement: HCI DC motor IF (lift and shift) 2117

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2139 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI DC motor IF (lift and shift)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI DC motor IF.

■ Disconnect three connectors, and then remove the DC motor IF.

NOTE: Release retainers as needed.

2118 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2140 Remove the DC motor IF

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2119

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI motor IF (pick and feed)

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) motor IF.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-268 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02279A HCI motor IF

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

2120 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2141 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI right door open switch holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right door open switch holder.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-2142 Remove two screws

Remove the HCI right door open switch holder 2121

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2143 Remove two screws

3. Remove one screw and then pull the switch and holder out.

Figure 6-2144 Pull out the switch and holder

2122 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Release two tabs (callout 1) and then remove the switch from the holder to remove it (callout 2).

Figure 6-2145 Remove the holder

3. Remove the HCI motor IF (pick and feed)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI motor IF.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the motor IF.

NOTE: Release retainers as needed.

Figure 6-2146 Remove the motor IF

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the HCI motor IF (pick and feed) 2123

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI inner drawer IF

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) inner drawer IF.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-269 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02286A HCI inner drawer IF

2124 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-2147 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI inner drawer IF

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI inner drawer IF.

Remove the HCI cassette 2125

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2148 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the HCI inner drawer IF.

Figure 6-2149 Remove the inner drawer IF

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2126 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Output device
Learn about output device parts removal and replacement.

Stapler/stacker and (or) Booklet finisher

Learn about external finisher stapler/stacker or booklet finishers parts removal and replacement.

Cover
Review the external finisher cover removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Front door

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front door.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Output device 2127

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-270 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60106 Front door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2150 Remove the hinge pin

2128 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2151 Remove the door

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2129

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher caster cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-271 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-40018 Caster cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

2130 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-2152 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2131

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left lower cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher left lower cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-272 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60106 Left lower cover (stacker)

8GS05-60124 Left lower cover (booklet)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2132 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2153 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2154 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2133

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2155 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2156 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2134 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2157 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2158 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2135

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2159 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2160 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2136 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2161 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-2162 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher caster cover 2137

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2163 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2164 Release the cover

2138 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2165 Remove the cover

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2139

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher left upper cover.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-273 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60118 Left upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2140 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2166 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2167 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2141

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2168 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2169 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2142 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2170 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2171 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2143

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2172 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2173 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2144 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2174 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-2175 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher caster cover 2145

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2176 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2177 Release the cover

2146 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2178 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2179 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2147

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2180 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2181 Release the cover

2148 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2182 Remove the cover

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2149

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher booklet output tray.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-274 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60126 Booklet output tray

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher booklet output tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet output tray.

2150 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Rotate the tray up.

Figure 6-2183 Rotate the tray

2. Pull the booklet output tray out and away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2184 Remove the tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2151

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top output tray

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top output tray.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-275 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40027 Top output tray

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

2152 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher top output tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top output tray.

1. Rotate the tray up.

Figure 6-2185 Rotate the tray

Remove the external finisher top output tray 2153

 2. Pull the top output tray out and away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2186 Remove the tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2154 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-276 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40028 Main output tray

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher main output tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray 2155

 ■ Release four tabs, and then remove the main output tray.

Figure 6-2187 Remove the tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2156 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-277 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60118 Rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover 2157

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2188 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2189 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

2158 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-278 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40019 Front cover

Removal and replacement: Front cover 2159

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2190 Remove the hinge pin

2160 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2191 Remove the door

Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2192 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 2161

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2193 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2194 Remove the knob

2162 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2195 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2163

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Punch cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher punch cover.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-279 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40030 Punch cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher punch cover.

2164 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then remove the punch cover.

Figure 6-2196 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2165

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-280 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60108 Top cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2166 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2197 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2198 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2167

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top door

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top door.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-281 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60107 Top door

2168 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2199 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 2169

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2200 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher top door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top door.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one screw from the bracket.

Figure 6-2201 Remove one screw

2170 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Slide the top door as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2202 Remove the door

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2171

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher right upper cover.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-282 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60109 Right upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2172 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2203 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2204 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher right upper cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher right upper cover 2173

 2. Remove six screws, and then remove the right upper cover.

Figure 6-2205 Remove the cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2174 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front lower left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front lower left cover.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-283 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40047 Front lower left cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Front lower left cover 2175

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2206 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2207 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2176 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2208 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2209 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2177

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2210 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2211 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2178 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2212 Remove the cover

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2179

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front lower right cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front lower right cover.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-284 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40048 Front lower right cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front lower right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower right cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2180 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower right cover.

Figure 6-2213 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2181

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Shaft hinge - door

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher shaft hinge - door.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-285 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60107 Shaft hinge - door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher shaft hinge - door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher shaft hinge - door.

CAUTION: If both the upper and lower shaft hinges are removed the front door will not be attached to
the finisher.

2182 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Upper shaft hinge - door removal: Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

CAUTION: When the upper shaft hinge is removed the top of the front door is not attached to the
finisher. To avoid damage to the door, do not let the top of the door separate from the finisher.

Figure 6-2214 Remove the hinge pin

2. Lower shaft hinge - door removalSupport the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and
then remove the front door

CAUTION: When the lower shaft hinge is removed the bottom of the front door is not attached to
the finisher. To avoid damage to the door, do not let the bottom of the door separate from the
finisher.

Figure 6-2215 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher shaft hinge - door 2183

 2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher caster.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

2184 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-286 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07452A Caster

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-2216 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

Remove the external finisher caster cover 2185

 WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Figure 6-2217 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2218 Remove the caster

2186 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster fix nut

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher caster fix nut.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2187

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-287 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07444A Caster fix nut

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-2219 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher caster fix nut

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster fix nut.

2188 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as needed.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Figure 6-2220 Remove the nut

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

Unpack the replacement assembly 2189

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet front cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher booklet front cover.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-288 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01478B Booklet front covert

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

2190 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2221 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2191

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Bridge unit (or) Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics

Review the external finisher bridge unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Bridge unit (or) Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher bridge unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-289 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60110 Bridge unit

63C80-60109 Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

2192 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher bridge unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge unit.

1. Open the finisher front door.

Figure 6-2222 Open the door

2. Pull the lock straight out of the finisher to release it.

Figure 6-2223 Release the lock

Remove the external finisher bridge unit 2193

 3. Slightly separate the finisher and printer, and then disconnect two connectors (or) three
connectors in case of Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics.

Figure 6-2224 Disconnect two connectors on front side

Figure 6-2225 For Bridge with PQ Diagnostics, disconnect one connector on formatter.

2194 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove 1 screw.

NOTE: Bridge unit with PQ diagnostics shown. Standard bridge unit will only have one cable on left
side.

5. Slide the bridge unit off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-2226 Remove the unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2195

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge door sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher bridge door sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-290 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Bridge door sensor)

2196 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher bridge unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge unit.

1. Open the finisher front door.

Figure 6-2227 Open the door

Remove the external finisher bridge unit 2197

 2. Pull the lock straight out of the finisher to release it.

Figure 6-2228 Release the lock

3. Slightly separate the finisher and printer, and then disconnect two connectors (or) three
connectors in case of Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics.

Figure 6-2229 Disconnect two connectors on front side

2198 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2230 For Bridge with PQ Diagnostics, disconnect one connector on formatter.

4. Remove 1 screw.

NOTE: Bridge unit with PQ diagnostics shown. Standard bridge unit will only have one cable on left
side.

Remove the external finisher bridge unit 2199

 5. Slide the bridge unit off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-2231 Remove the unit

2. Remove the external finisher bridge door sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge door sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 4) to remove it.

2200 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2232 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2201

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge entrance sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher bridge entrance sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-291 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Sensor-RP (Bridge entrance sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher bridge unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge unit.

2202 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the finisher front door.

Figure 6-2233 Open the door

2. Pull the lock straight out of the finisher to release it.

Figure 6-2234 Release the lock

Remove the external finisher bridge unit 2203

 3. Slightly separate the finisher and printer, and then disconnect two connectors (or) three
connectors in case of Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics.

Figure 6-2235 Disconnect two connectors on front side

Figure 6-2236 For Bridge with PQ Diagnostics, disconnect one connector on formatter.

2204 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove 1 screw.

NOTE: Bridge unit with PQ diagnostics shown. Standard bridge unit will only have one cable on left
side.

5. Slide the bridge unit off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-2237 Remove the unit

2. Remove the external finisher bridge entrance sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge entrance sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

Remove the external finisher bridge entrance sensor 2205

 ● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 4) to remove it.

Figure 6-2238 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2206 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge exit sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher bridge exit sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-292 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Bridge exit sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher bridge unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge unit.

Removal and replacement: Bridge exit sensor 2207

 1. Open the finisher front door.

Figure 6-2239 Open the door

2. Pull the lock straight out of the finisher to release it.

Figure 6-2240 Release the lock

2208 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Slightly separate the finisher and printer, and then disconnect two connectors (or) three
connectors in case of Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics.

Figure 6-2241 Disconnect two connectors on front side

Figure 6-2242 For Bridge with PQ Diagnostics, disconnect one connector on formatter.

Remove the external finisher bridge unit 2209

 4. Remove 1 screw.

NOTE: Bridge unit with PQ diagnostics shown. Standard bridge unit will only have one cable on left
side.

5. Slide the bridge unit off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-2243 Remove the unit

2. Remove the external finisher bridge exit sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge exit sensor.

2210 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2244 Remove the cover

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the sheet-metal holder (callout 1).

Figure 6-2245 Remove the holder

Remove the external finisher bridge exit sensor 2211

 3. Open the bridge door.

Figure 6-2246 Open the door

4. Remove thirteen screws, and then remove the inner cover.

Figure 6-2247 Remove the cover

2212 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Disconnect one connector, release one tab, and then remove the bridge exit sensor.

Figure 6-2248 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2213

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher bridge motor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-293 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ19-80501 Bridge motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher bridge unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge unit.

2214 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the finisher front door.

Figure 6-2249 Open the door

2. Pull the lock straight out of the finisher to release it.

Figure 6-2250 Release the lock

Remove the external finisher bridge unit 2215

 3. Slightly separate the finisher and printer, and then disconnect two connectors (or) three
connectors in case of Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics.

Figure 6-2251 Disconnect two connectors on front side

Figure 6-2252 For Bridge with PQ Diagnostics, disconnect one connector on formatter.

2216 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove 1 screw.

NOTE: Bridge unit with PQ diagnostics shown. Standard bridge unit will only have one cable on left
side.

5. Slide the bridge unit off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-2253 Remove the unit

2. Remove the external finisher bridge motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge motor.

Remove the external finisher bridge motor 2217

 1. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-2254 Remove the cover

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2255 Remove two screws

2218 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the bridge motor..

Figure 6-2256 Remove the motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2219

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Entrance unit
Review the external finisher entrance unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher entrance sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-294 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Sensor-RP (Entrance sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

2220 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the external finisher front door
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2257 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2258 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher front door 2221

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2259 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2260 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2222 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2261 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2262 Remove the cover

4. Remove the front lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front lower cover.

1. If Tray 2 and Tray 3 are installed, remove them now.

Remove the front lower cover 2223

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-2263 Remove the cover

5. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-2264 Remove the screw caps

2224 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-2265 Remove the cover

6. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-2266 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

Remove the rear lower cover 2225

 WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Figure 6-2267 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2268 Remove the caster

2226 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

8. Remove the external finisher left lower cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2269 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2270 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2227

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2271 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2272 Lower the tray

2228 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2273 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2274 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2229

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2275 Remove the cover

10. Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2276 Release the tamper

2230 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-2277 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2278 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2231

 4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-2279 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-2280 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

2232 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2281 Remove the unit

11. Remove the external finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper.

■ Disconnect three connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the front tamper.

NOTE: If the tamper unit is removed after the ejector unit to gain access to another assembly, the
screws have already been removed.

Figure 6-2282 Remove the tamper

12. Remove the external finisher entrance sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher entrance sensor.

Remove the external finisher front tamper 2233

 1. Disconnect the connector

Figure 6-2283 Disconnect the connector

2. Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release two hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the entrance sensor.

Figure 6-2284 Remove the sensor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2234 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher entrance motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor assembly 2235

 Table 6-295 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60104 Entrance motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2285 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

2236 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2286 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher entrance motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher entrance motor assemnbly.

1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-2287 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the external finisher entrance motor assembly 2237

 2. Slightly separate the entrance motor assembly from the finisher chassis, remove the belt (callout 1),
and then remove the entrance motor assembly.

Figure 6-2288 Remove the assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2238 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher entrance motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-296 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ19-80501 Entrance motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor 2239

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2289 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2290 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher entrance motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher entrance motor assemnbly.

2240 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-2291 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Slightly separate the entrance motor assembly from the finisher chassis, remove the belt (callout 1),
and then remove the entrance motor assembly.

Figure 6-2292 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher entrance motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher entrance motor.

Remove the external finisher entrance motor 2241

 ■ Remove two screws, and then remove the entrance motor.

Figure 6-2293 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2242 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Punch unit
Review the external finisher punch unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Punch unit

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher punch unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-297 Part information

Part number Part description

Y1G10-67901 Punch unit (2-3 hole)

Y1G11-67901 Punch unit (2-4 hole)

Y1G12-67901 Punch unit (Swedish hole)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Punch unit 2243

 1. Remove the external finisher punch unit
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher punch unit.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove one screw, and then remove the punch unit.

Figure 6-2294 Remove the unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2244 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Tray diverter unit

Review the external finisher tray diverter unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Top jam cover assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-298 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Tray diverter unit 2245

 1. Remove the external finisher rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2295 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2296 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

2246 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-2297 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2298 Remove two screws

Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly 2247

 2. Pull the top jam cover assembly out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2299 Remove the assembly

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2248 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher tray diverter.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-299 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07205A Tray diverter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter 2249

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2300 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2301 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

2250 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-2302 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2303 Remove two screws

Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly 2251

 2. Pull the top jam cover assembly out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2304 Remove the assembly

4. Remove the external finisher tray diverter

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher tray diverter.

■ Carefully separate the tray diverter from the top jam cover assembly to remove it.

Figure 6-2305 Remove the diverter

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2252 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top door open switch

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top door open switch.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-300 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02631A Top door open switch

Removal and replacement: Top door open switch 2253

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2306 Remove three screws

2254 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2307 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher top door open switch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top door open switch.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-2308 Remove one screw

Remove the external finisher top door open switch 2255

 2. Separate the top door open switch from the finisher, and then disconnect three connectors to
remove it.

Figure 6-2309 Remove the switch

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2256 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter cam

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher tray diverter cam.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-301 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01458A Tray diverter cam

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter cam 2257

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2310 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2311 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher entrance motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher entrance motor.

2258 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then remove the entrance motor.

Figure 6-2312 Remove the motor

3. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2313 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 2259

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2314 Remove the door

4. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2315 Remove three screws

2260 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2316 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2317 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 2261

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2318 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher tray diverter home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher tray diverter home sensor.

1. Remove the green handle.

Figure 6-2319 Remove the handle

2262 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), and then remove the gear and belt (callout 2).

Figure 6-2320 Remove the gear and belt

3. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the sensor and bracket.

NOTE: If the tray diverter home sensor assembly is being removed to gain access to another part,
stop now.

Figure 6-2321 Remove the sensor and bracket

4. Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

● Remove the tray diverter home position sensor from the bracket.

Remove the external finisher tray diverter home sensor 2263

 Figure 6-2322 Remove the sensor

7. Remove the external finisher tray diverter cam

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher tray diverter cam

■ Carefully slide the tray diverter cam off of the shaft to remove it.

Figure 6-2323 Remove the cam

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

2264 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher tray diverter home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-302 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Tray diverter home sensor)

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter home sensor 2265

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2324 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

2266 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2325 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2326 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 2267

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2327 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2328 Remove three screws

2268 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2329 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2330 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 2269

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2331 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher tray diverter home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher tray diverter home sensor.

1. Remove the green handle.

Figure 6-2332 Remove the handle

2270 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), and then remove the gear and belt (callout 2).

Figure 6-2333 Remove the gear and belt

3. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the sensor and bracket.

NOTE: If the tray diverter home sensor assembly is being removed to gain access to another part,
stop now.

Figure 6-2334 Remove the sensor and bracket

4. Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

● Remove the tray diverter home position sensor from the bracket.

Remove the external finisher tray diverter home sensor 2271

 Figure 6-2335 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2272 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Top exit unit

Review the external finisher top exit unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Top exit sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top exit sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-303 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Top exit sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Top exit unit 2273

 1. Remove the external finisher rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2336 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2337 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

2274 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-2338 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2339 Remove two screws

Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly 2275

 2. Pull the top jam cover assembly out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2340 Remove the assembly

4. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2341 Remove the hinge pin

2276 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2342 Remove the door

5. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2343 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 2277

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2344 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2345 Remove the knob

2278 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2346 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly.

■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the main exit
cam motor assembly.

Figure 6-2347 Remove the assembly

8. Remove the external finisher top lower feed assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top lower feed assembly.

Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly 2279
 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-2348 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2349 Remove three screws

2280 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Pull the top lower feed assembly straight up and out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2350 Remove the assembly

9. Remove the external finisher top exit sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top exit sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the top exit sensor (callout 4).

Remove the external finisher top exit sensor 2281

 Figure 6-2351 Remove the sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2282 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher exit motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-304 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor assembly 2283

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2352 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2353 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

2284 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-2354 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2285

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher exit motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-305 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ19-80501 Exit motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2286 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2355 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2356 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly 2287

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-2357 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher exit motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor.

Figure 6-2358 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2288 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Top output tray unit

Review the external finisher top output tray unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Top lower feed assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top lower feed assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Top output tray unit 2289

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-306 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2359 Remove five screws

2290 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2360 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-2361 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly 2291

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2362 Remove two screws

2. Pull the top jam cover assembly out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2363 Remove the assembly

4. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2292 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2364 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2365 Remove the door

5. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2293

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2366 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2367 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2294 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2368 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2369 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly.

Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly 2295
 ■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the main exit
cam motor assembly.

Figure 6-2370 Remove the assembly

8. Remove the external finisher top lower feed assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top lower feed assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-2371 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2296 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2372 Remove three screws

3. Pull the top lower feed assembly straight up and out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2373 Remove the assembly

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2297

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray extension

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher tray extension.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-307 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40029 Tray extension

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

2298 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher top output tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top output tray.

1. Rotate the tray up.

Figure 6-2374 Rotate the tray

Remove the external finisher top output tray 2299

 2. Pull the top output tray out and away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2375 Remove the tray

2. Remove the external finisher tray extension

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher tray extension.

■ Release two hooks, and then slide the tray extension away from the top output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-2376 Remove the tray extension

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2300 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top output tray paper full sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top output tray paper full sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-308 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Tray sensor kit (Top output tray paper full sensor)

Removal and replacement: Top output tray paper full sensor 2301
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2377 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

2302 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2378 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2379 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 2303

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2380 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2381 Remove three screws

2304 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2382 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2383 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 2305

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2384 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray motor drive
assembly.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws, and then remove the main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Figure 6-2385 Remove the sensor

6. Remove the external finisher top output tray paper full sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top output tray paper full
sensor.

2306 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-2386 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-2387 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2307

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Main exit unit

Review the external finisher main exit unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Main exit sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main exit sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-309 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Sensor-RP (Main exit sensor)

2308 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2388 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2309

 Figure 6-2389 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-2390 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

2310 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2391 Remove two screws

2. Pull the top jam cover assembly out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2392 Remove the assembly

4. Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly.

Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly 2311
 ■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the main exit
cam motor assembly.

Figure 6-2393 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the external finisher top lower feed assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top lower feed assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-2394 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2312 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2395 Remove three screws

3. Pull the top lower feed assembly straight up and out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2396 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the external finisher main exit sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit sensor.

Remove the external finisher main exit sensor 2313

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the main exit sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-2397 Remove the sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2314 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-310 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor assembly 2315

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2398 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2399 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2316 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2400 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2401 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2317

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2402 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2403 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly.

2318 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the main exit
cam motor assembly.

Figure 6-2404 Remove the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2319

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main exit cam home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-311 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Main exit cam home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2320 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2405 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2406 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2321

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2407 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2408 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2322 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2409 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2410 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly.

Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly 2323
 ■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the main exit
cam motor assembly.

Figure 6-2411 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the external finisher main exit cam home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam home sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

● Remove the main exit cam home sensor from the bracket (callout 3).

Figure 6-2412 Remove the sensor

2324 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main exit cam motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2325

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-312 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60117 Main exit cam motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2413 Remove the hinge pin

2326 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2414 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2415 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 2327

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2416 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2417 Remove the knob

2328 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2418 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam motor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the main exit
cam motor.

Figure 6-2419 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor 2329

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front door switch

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front door switch.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

2330 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-313 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02309A Front door switch

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2420 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 2331

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2421 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2422 Remove three screws

2332 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2423 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2424 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 2333

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2425 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front door switch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door switch.

1. Remove one screw, and then separate the switch and holder form the finisher.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the switch. It is still attached by cables to the
finisher.

Figure 6-2426 Separate the switch and holder form the finisher

2334 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Separate the switch from the holder, and then disconnect two connectors to remove the front door
switch.

Figure 6-2427 Remove the switch

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2335

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Paddle unit
Review the external finisher paddle unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Paddle

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher paddle.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-314 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01480A Paddle

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

2336 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2428 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2429 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2337

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2430 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2431 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2338 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2432 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2433 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2339

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2434 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2435 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2340 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2436 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-2437 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher caster cover 2341

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2438 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2439 Release the cover

2342 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2440 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2441 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2343

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2442 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2443 Release the cover

2344 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2444 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher paddle

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle.

■ Pull the paddle straight out to remove it.

Figure 6-2445 Remove the paddle

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher paddle 2345

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paddle motor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher paddle motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

2346 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-315 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2446 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 2347

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2447 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2448 Remove three screws

2348 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2449 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2450 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 2349

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2451 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle motor assembly.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

b. Remove two screws (callout 2).

c. Release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 3), and then remove the paddle motor
assembly.

Figure 6-2452 Remove the assembly

2350 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paddle home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher paddle home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2351

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-316 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Paddle home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2453 Remove the hinge pin

2352 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2454 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2455 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 2353

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2456 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2457 Remove the knob

2354 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2458 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle motor assembly.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

b. Remove two screws (callout 2).

c. Release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 3), and then remove the paddle motor
assembly.

Figure 6-2459 Remove the assembly

Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly 2355

 5. Remove the external finisher paddle home sensory
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle home sensor.

■ Do the following:

a. Release the hooks (callout 1).

b. Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

c. Remove the paddle home sensor from the bracket (callout 3).

Figure 6-2460 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

2356 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paddle motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher paddle motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-317 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Paddle motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: Paddle motor 2357

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2461 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2462 Remove the door

2358 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove the external finisher top cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2463 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2464 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2359

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2465 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2466 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher paddle motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle motor.

2360 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the paddle motor.

Figure 6-2467 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2361

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2362 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

End fence unit
Review the external finisher end fence unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: End fence home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher end fence home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-318 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (End fence sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

End fence unit 2363

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2468 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2469 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2364 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2470 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2471 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2365

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2472 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2473 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2366 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2474 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2475 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2367

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2476 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-2477 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

2368 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2478 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2479 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2369

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2480 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2481 Lower the tray

2370 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2482 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2483 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2371

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2484 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2485 Release the tamper

2372 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-2486 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2487 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2373

 4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-2488 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-2489 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

2374 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2490 Remove the unit

10. Remove the external finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper.

■ Disconnect three connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the front tamper.

NOTE: If the tamper unit is removed after the ejector unit to gain access to another assembly, the
screws have already been removed.

Figure 6-2491 Remove the tamper

11. Remove the external finisher end fence home sensory

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher end fence home sensor.

Remove the external finisher front tamper 2375

 ■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the end fence home sensor.

Figure 6-2492 Remove the sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2376 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: End fence motor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher end fence motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-319 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01467A End fence motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: End fence motor assembly 2377

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2493 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2494 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2378 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2495 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2496 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2379

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2497 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2498 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher end fence motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher end fence motor assembly.

2380 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the end fence motor assembly.

Figure 6-2499 Remove the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2381

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: End fence motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher end fence motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-320 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (End fence motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2382 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2500 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2501 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2383

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2502 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2503 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2384 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2504 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2505 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher end fence motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher end fence motor.

Remove the external finisher end fence motor 2385

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the end fence motor.

Figure 6-2506 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2386 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2387

 Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch guide
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch guide.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-321 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-40019 Main output tray top of stack switch guide

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2388 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2507 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2508 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2389

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2509 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2510 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2390 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2511 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2512 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2391

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2513 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2514 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray motor drive
assembly.

2392 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws, and then remove the main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Figure 6-2515 Remove the sensor

6 Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle motor assembly.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

b. Remove two screws (callout 2).

c. Release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 3), and then remove the paddle motor
assembly.

Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly 2393

 Figure 6-2516 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch guide
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray top of stack
switch guide.

1. Remove four screws, and then remove the frame cover.

Figure 6-2517 Remove the cover

2394 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the top output tray.

Figure 6-2518 Remove the tray

3. Release two hooks.

Figure 6-2519 Release two hooks

Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch guide 2395
 4. Remove the main output tray top of stack switch guide.

Figure 6-2520 Remove the guide

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2396 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2397

 Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch lower guide
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch lower
guide.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-322 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-40020 Main output tray top of stack switch lower guide

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2398 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2521 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2522 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2399

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2523 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2524 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2400 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2525 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2526 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2401

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2527 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2528 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray motor drive
assembly.

2402 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws, and then remove the main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Figure 6-2529 Remove the sensor

6 Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle motor assembly.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

b. Remove two screws (callout 2).

c. Release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 3), and then remove the paddle motor
assembly.

Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly 2403

 Figure 6-2530 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch lower guide
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray top of stack
switch lower guide.

1. Remove four screws, and then remove the frame cover.

Figure 6-2531 Remove the cover

2404 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the top output tray.

Figure 6-2532 Remove the tray

3. Release two hooks.

Figure 6-2533 Release two hooks

Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch lower guide 2405
 4. Remove the main output tray top of stack switch guide.

Figure 6-2534 Remove the guide

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2406 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Tamper unit
Review the external finisher tamper unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front tamper.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-323 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00901A Front tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Tamper unit 2407

 1. Remove the external finisher rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2535 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2536 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2408 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2537 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2538 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2409

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2539 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2540 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2410 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2541 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2542 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2411

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2543 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

2412 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2544 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2545 Remove the caster

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2413

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2546 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2547 Release the cover

2414 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2548 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2549 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2415

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2550 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2551 Release the cover

2416 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2552 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper.

■ Disconnect three connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the front tamper.

NOTE: If the tamper unit is removed after the ejector unit to gain access to another assembly, the
screws have already been removed.

Figure 6-2553 Remove the tamper

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher front tamper 2417

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front tamper home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

2418 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-324 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Front tamper home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2554 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2419

 Figure 6-2555 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2556 Remove the hinge pin

2420 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2557 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2558 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 2421

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2559 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2560 Remove the knob

2422 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2561 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2562 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2423

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2563 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2564 Release the cover

2424 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2565 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2566 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2425

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2567 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2568 Release the cover

2426 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2569 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper.

■ Disconnect three connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the front tamper.

NOTE: If the tamper unit is removed after the ejector unit to gain access to another assembly, the
screws have already been removed.

Figure 6-2570 Remove the tamper

9. Remove the external finisher front tamper home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper home sensor.

Remove the external finisher front tamper 2427

 1. Remove one screw, and then remove the tamper.

Figure 6-2571 Remove the tamper

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 6-2572 Remove the bracket

3. Do the following:

a. Release the hooks (callout 1).

b. Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

c. Remove the tamper home sensor from the bracket.

2428 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2573 Remove the sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2429

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front tamper motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-325 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Front tamper motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2430 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2574 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2575 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2431

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2576 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2577 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2432 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2578 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2579 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2433

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2580 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2581 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2434 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2582 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2583 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2435

 Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2584 Release the cover

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2585 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

2436 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2586 Lower the tray

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2587 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2437

 Figure 6-2588 Release the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2589 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper.

■ Disconnect three connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the front tamper.

NOTE: If the tamper unit is removed after the ejector unit to gain access to another assembly, the
screws have already been removed.

2438 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2590 Remove the tamper

9. Remove the external finisher front tamper motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the front tamper motor.

Figure 6-2591 Remove the motor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the external finisher front tamper motor 2439

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher rear tamper.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-326 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00898A Rear tamper

2440 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2592 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2441

 Figure 6-2593 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2594 Remove the hinge pin

2442 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2595 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2596 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 2443

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2597 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2598 Remove the knob

2444 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2599 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2600 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2445

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2601 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2602 Release the cover

2446 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2603 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2604 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2447

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2605 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2606 Release the cover

2448 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2607 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear tamper.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-2608 Remove the tamper

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher rear tamper 2449

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher rear tamper home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

2450 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-327 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Rear tamper home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2609 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2451

 Figure 6-2610 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2611 Remove the hinge pin

2452 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2612 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2613 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 2453

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2614 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2615 Remove the knob

2454 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2616 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2617 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2455

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2618 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2619 Release the cover

2456 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2620 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2621 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2457

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2622 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2623 Release the cover

2458 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2624 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher front tamper home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper home sensor.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the tamper.

Figure 6-2625 Remove the tamper

Remove the external finisher front tamper home sensor 2459

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 6-2626 Remove the bracket

3. Do the following:

a. Release the hooks (callout 1).

b. Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

c. Remove the tamper home sensor from the bracket.

Figure 6-2627 Remove the sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2460 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher rear tamper motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor 2461

 Table 6-328 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Rear tamper motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2628 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

2462 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2629 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2630 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 2463

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2631 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2632 Remove three screws

2464 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2633 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2634 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 2465

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2635 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2636 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

2466 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Figure 6-2637 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2638 Remove the caster

Remove the external finisher caster 2467

 7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2639 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2640 Release the cover

2468 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2641 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2642 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2469

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2643 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2644 Release the cover

2470 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2645 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear tamper.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-2646 Remove the tamper

10. Remove the external finisher front tamper motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper motor.

Remove the external finisher rear tamper 2471

 ■ Remove two screws, and then remove the front tamper motor.

Figure 6-2647 Remove the motor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2472 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Stapler unit
Review the external finisher stapler unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Stapler unit

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher stapler unit.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-329 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00894A Stapler unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Stapler unit 2473

 1. Remove the external finisher rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2648 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2649 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2474 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2650 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2651 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2475

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2652 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2653 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2476 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2654 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2655 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher stapler unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler unit.

Remove the external finisher stapler unit 2477

 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-2656 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the stapler
unit.

Figure 6-2657 Remove the unit

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2478 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Staple cartridge

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher staple cartridge.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-330 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-09882B Staple cartridge

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Staple cartridge 2479

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher staple unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher staple unit.

■ Grasp the blue handle, and then pull the staple cartridge straight out of the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2658 Remove the cartridge

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2480 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler front sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher stapler front sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-331 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Stapler front sensor)

Removal and replacement: Stapler front sensor 2481

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2659 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

2482 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2660 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2661 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 2483

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2662 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2663 Remove three screws

2484 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2664 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2665 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 2485

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2666 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher stapler unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler unit.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-2667 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2486 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the stapler
unit.

Figure 6-2668 Remove the unit

6. Remove the external finisher stapler front sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler front sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the stapler front sensor.

Remove the external finisher stapler front sensor 2487

 Figure 6-2669 Remove the sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2488 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-front and mid-rear sensors

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher stapler mid-front and mid-rear sensors.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-332 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Stapler mid-front sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Stapler mid-rear sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-front and mid-rear sensors 2489

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2670 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2671 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2490 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2672 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2673 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2491

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2674 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2675 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2492 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2676 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2677 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher stapler unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler unit.

Remove the external finisher stapler unit 2493

 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-2678 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the stapler
unit.

Figure 6-2679 Remove the unit

6. Remove the external finisher stapler mid-front and mid-rear sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler mid-front and mid-rear
sensors.

1. Locate the desired sensor.

● Callout 1: Mid-front sensor

2494 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Callout 2: Mid-rear sensor

Figure 6-2680 Locate the sensors

2. Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the stapler mid-front sensor.

NOTE: Repeat this step to remove the stapler mid-rear sensor if necessary.

Figure 6-2681 Remove the sensor

Remove the external finisher stapler mid-front and mid-rear sensors 2495
 7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Manual staple sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher manual staple sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

2496 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-333 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Stapler manual staple sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2682 Remove five screws

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2497

 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2683 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2684 Remove the hinge pin

2498 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2685 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2686 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 2499

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2687 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2688 Remove the knob

2500 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2689 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher manual staple sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher manual staple sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the manual staple sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-2690 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher manual staple sensor 2501

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher stapler position motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

2502 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-334 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163A Motor, step (Stapler position motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2691 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2503

 Figure 6-2692 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2693 Remove the hinge pin

2504 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2694 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2695 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 2505

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2696 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2697 Remove the knob

2506 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2698 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher stapler unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler unit.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-2699 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the external finisher stapler unit 2507

 2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the stapler
unit.

Figure 6-2700 Remove the unit

6. Remove the external finisher stapler position motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler position motor.

■ Remove two screws (callout 1), release the belt (callout 2), and then remove the stapler position
motor.

Figure 6-2701 Remove the motor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2508 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2509

 Ejector unit
Review the external finisher ejector unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Ejector unit

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher ejector unit.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-335 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01802A Ejector unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2510 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2702 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2703 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2511

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2704 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2705 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2512 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2706 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2707 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2513

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2708 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2709 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2514 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2710 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Remove the external finisher caster 2515

 Figure 6-2711 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2712 Remove the caster

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

2516 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2713 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2714 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2517

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2715 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2716 Lower the tray

2518 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2717 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2718 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2519

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2719 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2720 Release the tamper

2520 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-2721 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2722 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2521

 4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-2723 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-2724 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

2522 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2725 Remove the unit

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2523

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher ejector sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-336 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Sensor-RP (Ejector sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2524 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2726 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2727 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2525

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2728 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2729 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2526 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2730 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2731 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2527

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2732 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2733 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2528 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2734 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Remove the external finisher caster 2529

 Figure 6-2735 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2736 Remove the caster

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

2530 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2737 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2738 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2531

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2739 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2740 Lower the tray

2532 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2741 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2742 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2533

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2743 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2744 Release the tamper

2534 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-2745 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2746 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2535

 4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-2747 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-2748 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

2536 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2749 Remove the unit

10. Remove the external finisher ejector sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector sensor.

1. Remove the ejector sensor cover.

Figure 6-2750 Release the cover

2. Carefully separate the ejector sensor from the ejector unit.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the sensor. It is still attached to the ejector unit
by a wire harness.

Remove the external finisher ejector sensor 2537

 Figure 6-2751 Release the sensor

3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the ejector sensor.

Figure 6-2752 Remove the sensor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2538 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2539

 Removal and replacement: Ejector 1 home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher ejector 1 home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-337 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Ejector 1 home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2540 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2753 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2754 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2541

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2755 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2756 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2542 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2757 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2758 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2543

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2759 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2760 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2544 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2761 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Remove the external finisher caster 2545

 Figure 6-2762 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2763 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

2546 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2764 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2765 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2547

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2766 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2767 Lower the tray

2548 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2768 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2769 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2549

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2770 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2771 Release the tamper

2550 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-2772 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2773 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2551

 4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-2774 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-2775 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

2552 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2776 Remove the unit

10 Remove the external finisher ejector 1 home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector 1 home sensor.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

b. Release the hook (callout 2).

c. Remove the ejector 1 home sensor (callout 3).

Figure 6-2777 Remove the sensor

Remove the external finisher ejector 1 home sensor 2553

 11 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2554 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Ejector 1 motor sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher ejector 1 motor sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-338 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Ejector 1 motor sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Ejector 1 motor sensor 2555

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2778 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2779 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2556 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2780 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2781 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2557

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2782 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2783 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2558 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2784 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2785 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2559

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2786 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

2560 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2787 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2788 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2561

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2789 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2790 Release the cover

2562 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2791 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2792 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2563

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2793 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2794 Release the cover

2564 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2795 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2796 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2565

 2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-2797 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2798 Release the tamper

2566 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-2799 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-2800 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2567

 Figure 6-2801 Remove the unit

10 Remove the external finisher ejector 1 motor sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector 1 motor sensor.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

b. Release the hooks (callout 2).

c. Slide the senor as shown below (callout 3)

d. Remove the ejector 1 motor sensor.

Figure 6-2802 Remove the sensor

2568 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

11 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2569

 Removal and replacement: Ejector 2 motor sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher ejector 2 motor sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-339 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Ejector 2 motor sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2570 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2803 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2804 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2571

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2805 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2806 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2572 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2807 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2808 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2573

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2809 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2810 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2574 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2811 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Remove the external finisher caster 2575

 Figure 6-2812 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2813 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

2576 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2814 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2815 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2577

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2816 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2817 Lower the tray

2578 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2818 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2819 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2579

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2820 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2821 Release the tamper

2580 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-2822 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2823 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2581

 4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-2824 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-2825 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

2582 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2826 Remove the unit

10 Remove the external finisher ejector 2 motor sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector 2 motor sensor.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

b. Release the hooks (callout 2).

c. Slide the senor as shown below (callout 3)

d. Remove the ejector 2 motor sensor.

Figure 6-2827 Remove the sensor

Remove the external finisher ejector 2 motor sensor 2583

 11 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2584 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Main output tray unit
Review the external finisher main output tray unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-340 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40028 Main output tray

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher main output tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray.

Main output tray unit 2585

 ■ Release four hooks, and then remove the main output tray.

Figure 6-2828 Remove the tray

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2586 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2587

 Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray top of stack sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-341 Part information

Part number Part description

1404-001417 Tray sensor kit (Main output tray top of stack sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2588 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2829 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2830 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2589

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2831 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2832 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2590 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2833 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2834 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2591

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2835 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2836 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2592 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2837 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Remove the external finisher caster 2593

 Figure 6-2838 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2839 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

2594 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2840 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2841 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2595

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2842 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2843 Lower the tray

2596 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2844 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2845 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2597

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2846 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray top of stack
sensor.

■ Release two hooks, and then remove the main output tray top of stack sensor.

Figure 6-2847 Remove the sensor

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2598 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2599

 Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray lower limit sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-342 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Main output tray lower limit sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2600 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2848 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2849 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2601

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2850 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2851 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2602 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2852 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2853 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2603

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2854 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2855 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2604 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2856 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Remove the external finisher caster 2605

 Figure 6-2857 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2858 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

2606 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2859 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2860 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2607

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2861 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2862 Lower the tray

2608 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2863 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2864 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2609

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2865 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher main output tray lower limit sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray lower limit
sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one hook, and then remove the main output tray lower
limit sensor.

Figure 6-2866 Remove the sensor

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2610 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2611

 Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray motor sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-343 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Main output tray motor sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2612 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2867 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2868 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher main output tray motor sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray motor sensor.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher main output tray motor sensor 2613
 b. Release the hooks (callout 2).

c. Slide the senor as shown below (callout 3)

d. Remove the main output tray motor sensor (callout 4).

Figure 6-2869 Remove the sensor

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

2614 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2615

 Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor drive assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-344 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01415B Main output tray motor drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2616 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2870 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2871 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly 2617
 ■ Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws, and then remove the main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Figure 6-2872 Remove the sensor

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2618 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2619

 Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-345 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Tray sensor kit (Main output tray top of stack switch)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2620 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2873 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2874 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2621

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2875 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2876 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2622 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2877 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2878 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2623

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2879 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2880 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray motor drive
assembly.

2624 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws, and then remove the main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Figure 6-2881 Remove the sensor

6 Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle motor assembly.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

b. Remove two screws (callout 2).

c. Release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 3), and then remove the paddle motor
assembly.

Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly 2625

 Figure 6-2882 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray top of stack
switch.

1. Remove four screws, and then remove the frame cover.

Figure 6-2883 Remove the cover

2626 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the top output tray.

Figure 6-2884 Remove the tray

3. Release two hooks.

Figure 6-2885 Release two hooks

4. Release one hook, and then separate the senor from the assembly.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the switch. It is still attached to the finisher by a
wire harness and connector.

Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch 2627
 Figure 6-2886 Release the sensor

5. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the main output tray top of stack switch.

NOTE: Release the switch wire harness from the retainers as needed to remove the switch.

Figure 6-2887 Remove the switch

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2628 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2629

 Paper holding unit
Review the external finisher paper holding unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Front and rear paper holding sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front and rear paper holding sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-346 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Front paper holding sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Rear paper holding sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2630 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2888 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2889 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2631

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2890 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2891 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2632 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2892 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2893 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2633

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2894 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2895 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2634 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2896 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Remove the external finisher caster 2635

 Figure 6-2897 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2898 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

2636 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2899 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2900 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2637

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2901 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2902 Lower the tray

2638 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2903 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2904 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2639

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2905 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher front and rear paper holding sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front and rear paper holding
sensor.

1. Locate the desired sensor.

● Callout 1: Front paper holding sensor

● Callout 1: Rear paper holding sensor

Figure 6-2906 Locate the sensor

2640 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release two hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the front paper holding sensor.

NOTE: Repeat this step to remove the rear paper holding sensor if necessary

Figure 6-2907 Remove the sensor

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2641

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2642 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Paper holding home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher paper holding home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-347 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Paper holding home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding home sensor 2643

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2908 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2909 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2644 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2910 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2911 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2645

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2912 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2913 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2646 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2914 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2915 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2647

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2916 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

2648 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2917 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2918 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2649

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2919 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2920 Release the cover

2650 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2921 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2922 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2651

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2923 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2924 Release the cover

2652 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2925 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher paper holding home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paper holding home sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release two hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the paper holding home sensor.

Remove the external finisher paper holding home sensor 2653

 Figure 6-2926 Remove the sensor

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2654 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2655

 Removal and replacement: Paper holding motor drive assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher paper holding motor drive assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-348 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01414A Paper holding motor drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2656 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2927 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2928 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2657

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2929 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2930 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2658 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2931 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2932 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2659

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2933 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2934 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2660 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2935 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Remove the external finisher caster 2661

 Figure 6-2936 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2937 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

2662 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2938 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2939 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2663

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2940 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2941 Lower the tray

2664 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2942 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2943 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2665

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2944 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher paper holding motor drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paper holding motor drive
assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2945 Remove two screws

2666 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, release the wire harness from the retainer. and then remove the paper
holding motor drive assembly.

Figure 6-2946 Remove the assembly

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2667

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2668 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Buffer unit
Review the external finisher buffer unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Buffer solenoid assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher buffer solenoid assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-349 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Buffer unit 2669

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2947 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2948 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher right upper cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2670 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove six screws, and then remove the right upper cover.

Figure 6-2949 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2950 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2671

 Figure 6-2951 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-2952 Remove the assembly

5 Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

2672 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2953 Remove two screws

2. Pull the top jam cover assembly out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2954 Remove the assembly

6 Remove the external finisher buffer solenoid assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher buffer solenoid assembly.

Remove the external finisher buffer solenoid assembly 2673

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2955 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the buffer solenoid assembly.

NOTE: Release the wire harness as necessary to remove the solenoid assembly.

Figure 6-2956 Remove the assembly

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

2674 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2675

 Removal and replacement: Buffer motor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher buffer motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-350 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01152A Drive-motor step (Buffer motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2676 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2957 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2958 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2677

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2959 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2960 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher buffer motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher buffer motor.

2678 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2961 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the buffer motor.

Figure 6-2962 Remove the motor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2679

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet finisher (only)

Learn about booklet finisher (only) parts removal and replacement.

2680 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Booklet maker
Review the booklet finisher booklet maker removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet maker

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-351 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00905A Booklet maker

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Booklet maker 2681

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2963 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2964 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2682 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2965 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2966 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2683

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2967 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2968 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2684 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2969 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2970 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2685

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2971 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2972 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2686 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2973 Remove the booklet maker

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2687

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

5 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2974 Position the hooks on the rail

2688 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2975 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2976 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2689

 Figure 6-2977 Attach the rail

2690 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Harness guide
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher harness guide.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-352 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01477A Harness guide

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Harness guide 2691

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2978 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2979 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2692 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2980 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2981 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2693

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2982 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2983 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2694 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2984 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2985 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2695

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2986 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2987 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2696 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2988 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the booklet finisher PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher PCA.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2989 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher PCA 2697

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 6-2990 Remove one screw

3. Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet
finisher PCA.

Figure 6-2991 Remove the PCA

5 Remove the booklet finisher harness guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher harness guide.

2698 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2992 Remove four screws

2. Release twelve retainers, and then remove the harness guide.

Figure 6-2993 Remove the guide

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2699

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

2700 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2994 Position the hooks on the rail

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2995 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2701

 3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2996 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Figure 6-2997 Attach the rail

2702 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Booklet entrance unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet entrance unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance unit

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher entrance unit.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-353 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW51-60102 Booklet entrance unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Booklet entrance unit 2703

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2998 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2999 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2704 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3000 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3001 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2705

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3002 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3003 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2706 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3004 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3005 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2707

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3006 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3007 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2708 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-3008 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3009 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2709

 5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance unit
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher entrance unit.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3010 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3011 Remove two screws

2710 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3012 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove the booklet entrance unit.

CAUTION: The spring and holder on the entrance unit are not captive. Do not lose them when
handling the unit.

Figure 6-3013 Remove the unit

Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance unit 2711

 5. Reinstall step: Make sure that the spring on the unit is correctly positioned on the chassis of the
booklet maker.

Figure 6-3014 Reinstall the unit

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2712 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3015 Position the hooks on the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2713

 2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3016 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3017 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

2714 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Figure 6-3018 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2715

 Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher entrance sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-354 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Booklet entrance sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2716 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3019 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3020 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2717

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3021 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3022 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2718 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3023 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3024 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2719

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3025 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3026 Release the alignment pin

2720 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3027 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3028 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2721

 Figure 6-3029 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3030 Remove the cover

2722 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance unit
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher entrance unit.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3031 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3032 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance unit 2723

 3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3033 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove the booklet entrance unit.

CAUTION: The spring and holder on the entrance unit are not captive. Do not lose them when
handling the unit.

Figure 6-3034 Remove the unit

2724 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Reinstall step: Make sure that the spring on the unit is correctly positioned on the chassis of the
booklet maker.

Figure 6-3035 Reinstall the unit

6 Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher entrance sensor.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the entrance actuator cover.

Figure 6-3036 Remove the cover

Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance sensor 2725

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
entrance sensor (callout 3).

Figure 6-3037 Remove the sensor

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2726 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

8 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3038 Position the hooks on the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2727

 2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3039 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3040 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

2728 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Figure 6-3041 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2729

 Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher entrance-presser motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-355 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01425A Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2730 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3042 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3043 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2731

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3044 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance-presser motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher entrance-presser motor
assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the booklet entrance-presser
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3045 Remove the assembly

2732 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2733

 Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher entrance motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-356 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01152A Drive-motor step (Booklet entrance motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2734 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3046 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3047 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2735

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3048 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3049 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2736 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3050 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3051 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2737

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3052 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3053 Release the alignment pin

2738 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3054 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3055 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2739

 Figure 6-3056 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3057 Remove the cover

2740 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance motor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher entrance motor.

■ Disconnect one connector. remove two screws, and then remove the entrance motor.

Figure 6-3058 Remove the motor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance motor 2741

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3059 Position the hooks on the rail

2742 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3060 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3061 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2743

 Figure 6-3062 Attach the rail

2744 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Booklet paddle unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet paddle unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher paddle home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-357 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Booklet paddle home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

Booklet paddle unit 2745

 2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3063 Remove the cover

2 Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher paddle home sensor.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3064 Disconnect one connector

2746 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the booklet paddle home sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-3065 Remove the sensor

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2747

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2748 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher paddle motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-358 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01430A Booklet paddle motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor assembly 2749

 c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3066 Remove the cover

2 Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher paddle motor assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-3067 Disconnect two connectors

2750 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

Figure 6-3068 Remove the e-ring

3. Remove the belt and gear.

Figure 6-3069 Remove the belt and gear

Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle motor assembly 2751

 4. Remove four screws, and then remove the booklet paddle motor assembly.

Figure 6-3070 Remove the assembly

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2752 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2753

 Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher paddle motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-359 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Booklet paddle motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

2754 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3071 Remove the cover

2 Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher paddle motor assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-3072 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle motor assembly 2755

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

Figure 6-3073 Remove the e-ring

3. Remove the belt and gear.

Figure 6-3074 Remove the belt and gear

2756 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove four screws, and then remove the booklet paddle motor assembly.

Figure 6-3075 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher paddle motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the booklet paddle motor.

Figure 6-3076 Remove the motor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle motor 2757

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2758 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Booklet end fence unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet end fence unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher end fence home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-360 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Booklet end fence home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Booklet end fence unit 2759

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3077 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3078 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2760 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3079 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3080 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2761

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3081 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3082 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2762 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3083 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3084 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2763

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3085 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3086 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2764 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-3087 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3088 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2765

 5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet end fence home sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher end fence home sensor.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3089 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the shield-r lower.

Figure 6-3090 Remove the shield

2766 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Move the upper jam guide out of the way.

Figure 6-3091 Move the guide

4. Lift up the booklet end fence.

Figure 6-3092 Lift the fence

Remove the booklet finisher booklet end fence home sensor 2767
 5. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the booklet end fence home sensor (callout
2).

Figure 6-3093 Remove the sensor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2768 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3094 Position the hooks on the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2769

 2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3095 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3096 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

2770 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Figure 6-3097 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2771

 Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher end fence motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-361 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01155A Drive-motor step (Booklet end fence motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2772 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3098 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3099 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2773

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3100 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3101 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2774 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3102 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3103 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2775

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3104 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3105 Release the alignment pin

2776 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3106 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3107 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2777

 Figure 6-3108 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3109 Remove the cover

2778 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet end fence motor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher end fence motor.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3110 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the shield-r lower.

Figure 6-3111 Remove the shield

Remove the booklet finisher booklet end fence motor 2779

 3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
end fence motor.

Figure 6-3112 Remove the motor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2780 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3113 Position the hooks on the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2781

 2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3114 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3115 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

2782 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Figure 6-3116 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2783

 Booklet presser unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet presser unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher presser home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-362 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Booklet presser home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2784 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3117 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3118 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2785

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3119 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance-presser motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher entrance-presser motor
assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the booklet entrance-presser
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3120 Remove the assembly

2786 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4 Remove the booklet finisher booklet presser home sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher presser home sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the booklet presser home sensor from the bracket.

Figure 6-3121 Remove the sensor

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet presser home sensor 2787

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2788 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher tamper.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-363 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01431A Booklet tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper 2789

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3122 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3123 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2790 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3124 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3125 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2791

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3126 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3127 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2792 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3128 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3129 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2793

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3130 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3131 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2794 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-3132 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3133 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2795

 5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher tamper.

1. Remove four screws and the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 6-3134 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3135 Remove two screws

2796 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3136 Remove two screws

4. Remove three screws and the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-3137 Remove three screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper 2797

 5. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3138 Remove two screws

6. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3139 Disconnect one connector

2798 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

7. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3140 Disconnect one connector

8. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3141 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper 2799

 9. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3142 Remove three screws

10. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3143 Remove two screws

2800 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

11. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3144 Remove two screws

12. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3145 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper 2801

 13. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-3146 Disconnect connector and remove screws

14. Remove the booklet tamper.

Figure 6-3147 Remove the tamper

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2802 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2803

 1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3148 Position the hooks on the rail

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3149 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

2804 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3150 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Figure 6-3151 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2805

 Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher tamper home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-364 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Booklet tamper home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2806 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3152 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3153 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2807

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3154 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3155 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2808 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3156 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3157 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2809

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3158 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3159 Release the alignment pin

2810 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3160 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3161 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2811

 Figure 6-3162 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3163 Remove the cover

2812 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper home sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher tamper home sensor.

1. Remove four screws and the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 6-3164 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3165 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper home sensor 2813

 3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3166 Remove two screws

4. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3167 Remove two screws

2814 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Remove three screws and the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-3168 Remove three screws

6. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3169 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper home sensor 2815

 7. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3170 Disconnect one connector

8. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3171 Disconnect one connector

2816 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

9. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3172 Remove two screws

10. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3173 Remove three screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper home sensor 2817

 11. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3174 Remove two screws

12. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3175 Remove two screws

2818 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

13. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3176 Disconnect one connector

14. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-3177 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper home sensor 2819

 15. Remove four screws (callout 1), remove the cover, and then remove the booklet tamper home
sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-3178 Remove the sensor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2820 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3179 Position the hooks on the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2821

 2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3180 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3181 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

2822 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Figure 6-3182 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2823

 Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher tamper motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-365 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-40126 Booklet tamper motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2824 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3183 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3184 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2825

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3185 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3186 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2826 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3187 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3188 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2827

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3189 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3190 Release the alignment pin

2828 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3191 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3192 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2829

 Figure 6-3193 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3194 Remove the cover

2830 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper motor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher tamper motor.

1. Remove four screws and the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 6-3195 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3196 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper motor 2831

 3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3197 Remove two screws

4. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3198 Remove two screws

2832 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Remove three screws and the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-3199 Remove three screws

6. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3200 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper motor 2833

 7. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3201 Disconnect one connector

8. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3202 Disconnect one connector

2834 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

9. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3203 Remove two screws

10. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3204 Remove three screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper motor 2835

 11. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3205 Remove two screws

12. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3206 Remove two screws

2836 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

13. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3207 Disconnect one connector

14. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-3208 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper motor 2837

 15. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
tamper motor.

Figure 6-3209 Remove the motor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2838 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3210 Position the hooks on the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2839

 2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3211 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3212 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

2840 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Figure 6-3213 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2841

 Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher tamper sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-366 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Sensor-RP (Booklet tamper sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2842 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3214 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3215 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2843

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3216 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3217 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2844 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3218 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3219 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2845

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3220 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3221 Release the alignment pin

2846 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3222 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3223 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2847

 Figure 6-3224 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3225 Remove the cover

2848 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher tamper sensor.

1. Remove four screws and the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 6-3226 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3227 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor 2849

 3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3228 Remove two screws

4. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3229 Remove two screws

2850 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Remove three screws and the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-3230 Remove three screws

6. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3231 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor 2851

 7. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3232 Disconnect one connector

8. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3233 Disconnect one connector

2852 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

9. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3234 Remove two screws

10. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3235 Remove three screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor 2853

 11. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3236 Remove two screws

12. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3237 Remove two screws

2854 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

13. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3238 Disconnect one connector

14. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-3239 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor 2855

 15. Remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-3240 Remove the cover

16. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
tamper sensor (callout 3).

Figure 6-3241 Remove the sensor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2856 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2857

 1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3242 Position the hooks on the rail

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3243 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

2858 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3244 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Figure 6-3245 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2859

 Booklet stapler unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet stapler unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet stapler

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher stapler.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-367 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW51-40001 Booklet stapler

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2860 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3246 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3247 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2861

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3248 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3249 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2862 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3250 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-3251 Remove the cover

4 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2863

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3252 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3253 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2864 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3254 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3255 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2865

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3256 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3257 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2866 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-3258 Remove the booklet maker

5 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3259 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2867

 6 Remove the booklet finisher booklet staple cartridge
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet staple cartridge.

1. Open the front door, and then pull the booklet maker out.

2. Remove the booklet staple cartridge.

NOTE: Repeat this step for the remaining cartridge.

Figure 6-3260 Remove the cartridge

7 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly.

2868 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor assembly.

Figure 6-3261 Remove the assembly

8 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade assembly.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the c-fold blade assembly.

Figure 6-3262 Remove the assembly

9 Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher tamper sensor.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade assembly 2869

 1. Remove four screws and the sheet-metal plate.

NOTE: The c-fold blade assembly is shown installed in the figure below. How ever it was remove in
the previous step.

Figure 6-3263 Remove four screws

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3264 Remove one screw

2870 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the black-plastic cover.

Figure 6-3265 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3266 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor 2871

 5. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3267 Remove five screws

6. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3268 Disconnect one connector

2872 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 7. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-3269 Disconnect two connectors

8. Remove six screws, and then remove the booklet stapler.

Figure 6-3270 Remove the stapler

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2873

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

11 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

2874 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3271 Position the hooks on the rail

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3272 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2875

 3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3273 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Figure 6-3274 Attach the rail

2876 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet staple cartridge
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher staple cartridge.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-368 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-09881B Booklet staple cartridge

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the booklet finisher booklet staple cartridge

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet staple cartridge.

1. Open the front door, and then pull the booklet maker out.

2. Remove the booklet staple cartridge.

NOTE: Repeat this step for the remaining cartridge.

Removal and replacement: Booklet staple cartridge 2877

 Figure 6-3275 Remove the cartridge

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2878 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2879

 Booklet fold unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet fold unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher c-fold blade assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-369 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01438A Booklet c-fold blade assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2880 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3276 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3277 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2881

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3278 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3279 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2882 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3280 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-3281 Remove the cover

4 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2883

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3282 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3283 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2884 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3284 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3285 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2885

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3286 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3287 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2886 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-3288 Remove the booklet maker

5 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3289 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2887

 6 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor assembly.

Figure 6-3290 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade assembly.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the c-fold blade assembly.

Figure 6-3291 Remove the assembly

2888 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

8 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

9 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2889

 1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3292 Position the hooks on the rail

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3293 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

2890 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3294 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Figure 6-3295 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2891

 Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher c-fold blade home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-370 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Booklet c-fold blade home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2892 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3296 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3297 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2893

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3298 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade motor assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-3299 Disconnect two connectors

2894 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-3300 Remove four screws

3. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), remove the gear (callout 2), and then release
the belt (callout 3).

Figure 6-3301 Release the belt

4. Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor assembly.

CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft
might become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet
finisher PCA shield and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor assembly 2895
 Figure 6-3302 Remove the assembly

4 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade home sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the c-fold blade home sensor.

Figure 6-3303 Remove the sensor

2896 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2897

 Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher c-fold blade motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-371 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01396A Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2898 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3304 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3305 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2899

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3306 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade motor assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-3307 Disconnect two connectors

2900 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-3308 Remove four screws

3. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), remove the gear (callout 2), and then release
the belt (callout 3).

Figure 6-3309 Release the belt

4. Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor assembly.

CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft
might become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet
finisher PCA shield and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor assembly 2901
 Figure 6-3310 Remove the assembly

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2902 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2903

 Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher c-fold blade motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-372 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01154A Drive-motor step (Booklet c-fold blade motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2904 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3311 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3312 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2905

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3313 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade motor assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-3314 Disconnect two connectors

2906 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-3315 Remove four screws

3. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), remove the gear (callout 2), and then release
the belt (callout 3).

Figure 6-3316 Release the belt

4. Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor assembly.

CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft
might become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet
finisher PCA shield and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor assembly 2907
 Figure 6-3317 Remove the assembly

4 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the booklet c-fold blade motor.

Figure 6-3318 Remove the motor

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

2908 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2909

 Removal and replacement: Booklet blade home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher blade home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-373 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Booklet booklet blade home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2910 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3319 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3320 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2911

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3321 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3322 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2912 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3323 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3324 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2913

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3325 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3326 Release the alignment pin

2914 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3327 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3328 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2915

 Figure 6-3329 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3330 Remove the cover

2916 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet blade home sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet blade home sensor.

1. Remove four screws and the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 6-3331 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3332 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet blade home sensor 2917

 3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3333 Remove two screws

4. Remove three screws and the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-3334 Remove three screws

2918 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3335 Remove two screws

6. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3336 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher booklet blade home sensor 2919

 7. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3337 Disconnect one connector

8. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3338 Remove two screws

2920 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

9. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3339 Remove three screws

10. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3340 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet blade home sensor 2921

 11. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3341 Remove two screws

12. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3342 Disconnect one connector

2922 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 13. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the booklet blade home sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-3343 Remove the sensor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2923

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3344 Position the hooks on the rail

2924 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3345 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3346 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2925

 Figure 6-3347 Attach the rail

2926 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher blade motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-374 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00144A Motor BLDC (Booklet booklet blade motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade motor 2927

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3348 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3349 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2928 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3350 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet blade motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher blade motor.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3351 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet blade motor 2929

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3352 Remove two screws

3. Remove the right lower plate.

Figure 6-3353 Remove the plate

2930 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
blade motor.

Figure 6-3354 Remove the motor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2931

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2932 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher fold motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-375 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01436A Booklet booklet fold motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor assembly 2933

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3355 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3356 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2934 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3357 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet fold motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher fold motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the booklet fold motor assembly.

Figure 6-3358 Remove the assembly

Remove the booklet finisher booklet fold motor assembly 2935

 4 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2936 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher fold motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-376 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00144A Motor BLDC (Booklet booklet fold motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor 2937

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3359 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3360 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2938 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3361 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet fold motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher fold motor.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet fold motor 2939

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
fold motor.

Figure 6-3362 Remove the motor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2940 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2941

 Booklet diverter unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet diverter unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher diverter.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-377 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01398A Booklet diverter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2942 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3363 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3364 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2943

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3365 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3366 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2944 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3367 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-3368 Remove the cover

4 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2945

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3369 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3370 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2946 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3371 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3372 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2947

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3373 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3374 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2948 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-3375 Remove the booklet maker

5 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3376 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2949

 6 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor assembly.

Figure 6-3377 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade assembly.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the c-fold blade assembly.

Figure 6-3378 Remove the assembly

2950 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

8 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3379 Remove two screws

2. Remove one screw and the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-3380 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter 2951

 3. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3381 Remove one screw

4. Remove the connector cover, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3382 Disconnect one connector

2952 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3383 Remove two screws

6. Remove the white-plastic bushing.

Figure 6-3384 Remove the bushing

Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter 2953

 7. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), and then remove the actuator (callout 2).

Figure 6-3385 Remove the actuator

8. Remove the white-plastic bushing.

Figure 6-3386 Remove the bushing

2954 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 9. Remove the booklet diverter.

Figure 6-3387 Remove the diverter

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2955

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

10 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3388 Position the hooks on the rail

2956 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3389 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3390 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2957

 Figure 6-3391 Attach the rail

2958 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher diverter home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-378 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Booklet booklet diverter home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter home sensor 2959

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3392 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3393 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2960 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3394 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3395 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2961

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3396 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-3397 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

2962 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3398 Remove the cover

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor assembly.

Figure 6-3399 Remove the assembly

6 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter home sensor.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly 2963

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the booklet diverter home sensor.

Figure 6-3400 Remove the sensor

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2964 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2965

 Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher diverter motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-379 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01397A Booklet diverter motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2966 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3401 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3402 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2967

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3403 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3404 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2968 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3405 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-3406 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2969

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3407 Remove the cover

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor assembly.

Figure 6-3408 Remove the assembly

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2970 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2971

 Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher diverter motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-380 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-09881B Booklet diverter motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2972 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3409 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3410 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2973

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3411 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3412 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2974 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3413 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-3414 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2975

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-3415 Remove the cover

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor.

Figure 6-3416 Remove the motor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2976 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2977

 Booklet output tray unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet output tray unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher output tray.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-381 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60126 Booklet output tray

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the booklet finisher booklet output tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet output tray.

2978 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Rotate the front of the tray up, and then pull it away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-3417 Remove the tray

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2979

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2980 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher output tray sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-382 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Tray sensor kit (Booklet output tray sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray sensor 2981

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3418 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3419 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2982 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3420 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-3421 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2983

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3422 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3423 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2984 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-3424 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-3425 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher caster cover 2985

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-3426 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-3427 Release the cover

2986 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-3428 Remove the cover

7 Remove the booklet finisher booklet output tray sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet output tray sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the booklet output tray sensor (callout 2).

NOTE: Repeat this step for the remaining sensor (callout 3) if necessary.

Figure 6-3429 Remove the sensor

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet output tray sensor 2987

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2988 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

PCA
Review the booklet finisher PCA removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Main PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher main PCA.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-383 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW55-60001 Booklet maker main PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

PCA 2989
 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3430 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3431 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2990 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3432 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-3433 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2991

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3434 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3435 Remove the cover

4 Remove the booklet finisher main PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher main PCA.

2992 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet finisher
PCA.

Figure 6-3436 Remove the PCA

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2993

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2994 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: PCA
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher PCA.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-384 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW51-60001 Booklet maker PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: PCA 2995

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-3437 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-3438 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2996 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-3439 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-3440 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2997

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-3441 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-3442 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2998 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-3443 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-3444 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2999

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-3445 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-3446 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

3000 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-3447 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the booklet finisher PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher PCA.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-3448 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher PCA 3001

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 6-3449 Remove one screw

3. Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet
finisher PCA.

Figure 6-3450 Remove the PCA

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

3002 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

6 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 3003

 1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-3451 Position the hooks on the rail

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3452 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3004 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-3453 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Figure 6-3454 Attach the rail

Miscellaneous parts
Review the booklet finisher miscellaneous parts removal procedures.

Miscellaneous parts 3005

 Removal and replacement: Finisher mounting brackets
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher mounting brackets.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-385 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01442A Finisher mount bracket

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher mounting brackets

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher mounting brackets.

3006 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the external finisher mounting brackets.

Figure 6-3455 Remove the brackets

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3007

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Inner finisher
Learn about inner finisher parts removal and replacement.

3008 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Whole unit and rail
Review the inner finisher whole unit and rail removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Inner finisher

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-386 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW49-67002 Inner finisher

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher.

Whole unit and rail 3009

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3456 Disconnect one connector

2. Open the front cover, and then pull the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3457 Pull the handle

3. Do the following:

● Partially slide the inner finisher away from the printer.

● Release two locks on the slide rails.

● Slide the inner finisher completely off of the printer to remove it.

3010 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-3458 Remove the unit

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3011

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3012 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Guide rails
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher guide rails.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-387 Part information

Part number Part description

6102-003354 Guide rail

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher.

Removal and replacement: Guide rails 3013

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3459 Disconnect one connector

2. Open the front cover, and then pull the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3460 Pull the handle

3. Do the following:

● Partially slide the inner finisher away from the printer.

● Release two locks on the slide rails.

● Slide the inner finisher completely off of the printer to remove it.

3014 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-3461 Remove the unit

2 Remove the inner finisher guide rails

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher guide rails.

■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher guide rails.

Figure 6-3462 Remove the guide rails

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the inner finisher guide rails 3015

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3016 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Cover
Review the inner finisher cover removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Front cover assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher front cover assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-388 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60123 Front cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

Cover 3017
 ● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3463 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3464 Remove the handle

3018 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3465 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3466 Remove the cover

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 3019

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3020 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Top cover assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher top cover assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-389 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60125 Top cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Top cover assembly 3021

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3467 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3468 Remove the handle

3022 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3469 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3470 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 3023

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3471 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3472 Remove three screws

3024 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3473 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3474 Remove the cover

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 3025

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3026 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Middle cover assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-390 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60124 Middle cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Middle cover assembly 3027

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3475 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3476 Remove the handle

3028 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3477 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3478 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 3029

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3479 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3480 Remove three screws

3030 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3481 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3482 Remove the cover

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly 3031

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3032 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Punch cover assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-391 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60114 Punch cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Punch cover assembly 3033

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3483 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3484 Rotate the punch

3034 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3485 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3486 Remove the assembly

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 3035

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3036 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Output tray assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher output tray assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-392 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60118 Output tray assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray assembly.

Removal and replacement: Output tray assembly 3037

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-3487 Remove four screws

2. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-3488 Open the cover

3038 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Press the paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-3489 Press the actuator

4. Lift up on the inner finisher output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-3490 Remove the tray

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 3039

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3040 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: PCA cover
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher PCA cover.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-393 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40004 PCA cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher PCA cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher PCA cover.

Removal and replacement: PCA cover 3041

 1. Lift up the inner finisher, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-3491 Remove two screws

2. Remove the inner finisher PCA cover.

Figure 6-3492 Remove the cover

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

3042 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3043

 Removal and replacement: Finisher sub stay assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-394 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60113 Finisher sub stay assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3044 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3493 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3494 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3045

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3495 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3496 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3046 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3497 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3498 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3047

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3499 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray assembly.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-3500 Remove four screws

3048 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-3501 Open the cover

3. Press the paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-3502 Press the actuator

Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly 3049

 4. Lift up on the inner finisher output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-3503 Remove the tray

5 Remove the output tray frame

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray frame.

1. Rotate the output tray gear.

Figure 6-3504 Rotate the gear

3050 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Press the paper holding actuator, and then lift the inner finisher output tray frame up to remove it.

Figure 6-3505 Remove the frame

6 Remove the finisher sub stay assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3506 Remove two screws

Remove the finisher sub stay assembly 3051

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3507 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3508 Remove two screws

3052 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

Figure 6-3509 Remove the assembly

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3053

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3054 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Rear cover - base
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear base cover.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-395 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40018 Rear base cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover - base 3055

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3510 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3511 Remove three screws

3056 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3512 Remove the cover

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3057

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3058 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Rear cover - punch
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear punch cover.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-396 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40037 Rear punch cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover - punch 3059

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3513 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3060 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3061

 Removal and replacement: Lock release handle
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher lock release handle.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-397 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04233A Lock release handle

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

3062 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Open the front door, remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3514 Remove the handle

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3063

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3064 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Main interface harness
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher main interface harness.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-398 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02169A Main interface harness

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Main interface harness 3065

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3515 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3516 Remove the handle

3066 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3517 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3518 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 3067

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3519 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3520 Remove three screws

3068 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3521 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray assembly.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-3522 Remove four screws

Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly 3069

 2. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-3523 Open the cover

3. Press the paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-3524 Press the actuator

3070 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Lift up on the inner finisher output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-3525 Remove the tray

5 Remove the output tray frame

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray frame.

1. Rotate the output tray gear.

Figure 6-3526 Rotate the gear

Remove the output tray frame 3071

 2. Press the paper holding actuator, and then lift the inner finisher output tray frame up to remove it.

Figure 6-3527 Remove the frame

6 Remove the finisher sub stay assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3528 Remove two screws

3072 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3529 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3530 Remove two screws

Remove the finisher sub stay assembly 3073

 4. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

Figure 6-3531 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the main interface harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main interface harness.

■ Remove one screw, disconnect one connector, and then remove the inner finishermain interface
harness.

NOTE: Release wire harness retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-3532 Remove the harness

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

3074 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3075

 Removal and replacement: Exit bin full
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher exit bin full.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-399 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01546A Exit bin full

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher exit bin full

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit bin full.

3076 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-3533 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2. Slide the inner finisher exit bin full as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3534 Remove the assembly

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 3077

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3078 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Punch unit
Review the inner finisher punch unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Hole punch

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher hole punch.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-400 Part information

Part number Part description

155P7-67001 Hole 2/3 punch

8GS05-60133 Hole 2/4 punch

8GS05-60134 Swedish punch

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Punch unit 3079

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3535 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher hole punch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher hole punch.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3536 Disconnect one connector

3080 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the door.

Figure 6-3537 Open the door

3. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3538 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher hole punch 3081

 4. Release the retainer pin.

Figure 6-3539 Release the pin

5. Remove the hinge shaft.

Figure 6-3540 Remove the shaft

3082 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 6. Lift up on the end of the inner finisher hole punch (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 6-3541 Remove the punch

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3083

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3084 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Punch waste full sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher punch waste full.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-401 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Punch waste full sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Punch waste full sensor 3085

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3542 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3543 Remove three screws

3086 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3544 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3545 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 3087

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3546 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3547 Remove the assembly

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3088 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3548 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3549 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3089

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3550 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3551 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

3090 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3552 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3553 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the inner finisher middle roller 3091

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3554 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3555 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher punch waste full sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch waste full sensor.

3092 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove six screws.

Figure 6-3556 Remove six screws

2. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the punch waste full sensor.

Figure 6-3557 Remove the sensor

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 3093

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3094 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Entrance unit
Review the inner finisher entrance unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher entrance sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-402 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Entrance sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Entrance unit 3095

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3558 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3559 Rotate the punch

3096 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3560 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3561 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher entrance sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher entrance sensor.

Remove the inner finisher entrance sensor 3097

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3562 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then separate the inner finisher entrance
sensor from the mounting bracket to remove it.

Figure 6-3563 Remove the sensor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

3098 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3099

 Removal and replacement: Entrance motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher entrance motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-403 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60128 Entrance motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3100 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3564 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3565 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 3101

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3566 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3567 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

3102 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3568 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3569 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3103

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3570 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3571 Remove the handle

3104 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3572 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3573 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly 3105

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3574 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3575 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

3106 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3576 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3577 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide 3107

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-3578 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher entrance motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher entrance motor assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-3579 Disconnect one connector

3108 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove the belt, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher entrance motor assembly.

Figure 6-3580 Remove the assembly

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3109

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3110 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher entrance motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-404 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00169B Motor, step (Entrance motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor 3111

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3581 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3582 Rotate the punch

3112 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3583 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3584 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3113

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3585 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3586 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3114 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3587 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3588 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3115

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3589 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3590 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

3116 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3591 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3592 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the inner finisher middle roller 3117

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3593 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3594 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

3118 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-3595 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher entrance motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher entrance motor.

1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-3596 Disconnect one connector

Remove the inner finisher entrance motor 3119

 2. Remove the belt, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher entrance motor.

Figure 6-3597 Remove the motor

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3120 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3121

 Removal and replacement: Entrance motor timing belt
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher entrance motor timing belt.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-405 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00169B Entrance motor timing belt

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3122 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3598 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3599 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 3123

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3600 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3601 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

3124 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3602 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3603 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher entrance motor timing belt

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher entrance motor timing belt.

■ Remove the inner finisher entrance motor timing belt.

NOTE: To begin, slip the belt off of the lower most gear when removing the belt.

Remove the inner finisher entrance motor timing belt 3125

 Figure 6-3604 Remove the belt

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3126 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3127

 Removal and replacement: Entrance roller
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher entrance roller.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-406 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04243A Entrance roller

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3128 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3605 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3606 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 3129

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3607 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3608 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

3130 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3609 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3610 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3131

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3611 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3612 Remove the handle

3132 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3613 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3614 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly 3133

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3615 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3616 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

3134 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3617 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3618 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide 3135

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-3619 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher entrance roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher entrance roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the gear, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3620 Remove the e-ring, gear, and bushing

3136 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3621 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher entrance roller.

Figure 6-3622 Remove the roller

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 3137

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3138 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Middle roller
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher middle roller.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-407 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04243A Middle roller

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Middle roller 3139

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3623 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3624 Remove three screws

3140 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3625 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3626 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3141

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3627 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3628 Remove three screws

3142 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3629 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3630 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly 3143

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3631 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3632 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3144 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3633 Remove the roller

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3145

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3146 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Exit unit
Review the inner finisher exit unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Exit roller assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher exit roller assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-408 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01330A Exit roller assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

Exit unit 3147

 ● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3634 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3635 Remove the handle

3148 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3636 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3637 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 3149

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3638 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3639 Remove three screws

3150 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3640 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3641 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher sub paddle assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub paddle assembly.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 3151

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3642 Remove one screw

2. Do the following:

● Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

● Remove the gear, belt, and bushing.

● Remove the sub paddle assembly.

Figure 6-3643 Remove the assembly

6 Remove the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly.

3152 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

● Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the inner
finisher main paddle motor assembly.

Figure 6-3644 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the inner finisher exit roller assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit roller assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Release the belt.

● Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

● Remove the gear, and then remove the bushing.

Remove the inner finisher exit roller assembly 3153

 Figure 6-3645 Remove the e-ring, gear, and bushing

2. Remove the inner finisher exit roller assembly.

Figure 6-3646 Remove the roller

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

3154 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3155

 Removal and replacement: Exit sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher exit sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-409 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Exit sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3156 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3647 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3648 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 3157

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3649 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3650 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

3158 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3651 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3652 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3159

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3653 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3654 Remove the handle

3160 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3655 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3656 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly 3161

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3657 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3658 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

3162 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3659 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3660 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher exit sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit sensor.

Remove the inner finisher exit sensor 3163

 1. Remove six screws, and then raise the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-3661 Remove six screws

2. Do the following:

● Remove one screw.

● Disconnect one connector.

● Remove the inner finisher ext sensor.

Figure 6-3662 Remove the sensor

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

3164 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3165

 Removal and replacement: Exit sensor actuator
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher exit sensor actuator.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-410 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04199A Exit sensor actuator

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3166 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3663 Remove the cover

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3664 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 3167

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3665 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3666 Remove the assembly

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

3168 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3667 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3668 Remove the cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3169

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3669 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3670 Remove the handle

3170 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3671 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3672 Remove the cover

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly 3171

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3673 Remove the cover

Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3674 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

3172 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3675 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3676 Remove the roller

Remove the inner finisher exit sensor actuator

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit sensor actuator.

Remove the inner finisher exit sensor actuator 3173

 1. Remove six screws, and then raise the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-3677 Remove six screws

2. Remove the inner finisher exit sensor actuator.

Figure 6-3678 Remove the actuator

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

3174 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3175

 Removal and replacement: Exit motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher exit motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-411 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01331A Exit motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3176 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3679 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3680 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3177

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3681 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3682 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit motor assembly.

1. Open the punch cover.

3178 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher exit motor
assembly.

Figure 6-3683 Remove the motor

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3179

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3180 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Exit motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher exit motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-412 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00169B Motor, step (Exit motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor 3181

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3684 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3685 Remove the handle

3182 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3686 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3687 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit motor assembly.

1. Open the punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher exit motor assembly 3183

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher exit motor
assembly.

Figure 6-3688 Remove the motor

3 Remove the inner finisher exit motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then separate the inner finisher exit motor from the mounting bracket to
remove it.

Figure 6-3689 Remove the motor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

3184 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3185

 Paper support unit
Review the inner finisher paper support unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Rear paper support

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear paper support.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-413 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01310A Rear paper support

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3186 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3690 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3691 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3187

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3692 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3693 Open the punch cover

3188 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3694 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3695 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3189

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3696 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3697 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

3190 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3698 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear paper support

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear paper support.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3699 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear paper support 3191

 2. Disconnect one connector, release three hooks, and then remove the inner finisher rear paper
support.

Figure 6-3700 Remove the support

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3192 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3193

 Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper support home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-414 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Paper support home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3194 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3701 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3702 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3195

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3703 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3704 Open the punch cover

3196 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3705 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3706 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3197

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3707 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3708 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

3198 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3709 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear paper support

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear paper support.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3710 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear paper support 3199

 2. Disconnect one connector, release three hooks, and then remove the inner finisher rear paper
support.

Figure 6-3711 Remove the support

7 Remove the inner finisher paper support home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper support home sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the inner finisher paper support home sensor.

Figure 6-3712 Remove the sensor

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

3200 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3201

 Removal and replacement: Paper support motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper support motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-415 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01312A Paper support motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3202 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3713 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3714 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3203

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3715 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3716 Open the punch cover

3204 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3717 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3718 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3205

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3719 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3720 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

3206 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3721 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear paper support

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear paper support.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3722 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear paper support 3207

 2. Disconnect one connector, release three hooks, and then remove the inner finisher rear paper
support.

Figure 6-3723 Remove the support

7 Remove the inner finisher paper support motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper support motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher paper support
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3724 Remove the assembly

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

3208 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3209

 Removal and replacement: Paper support motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper support motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-416 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00802B Drive sub-motor step (Paper support motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3210 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3725 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3726 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3211

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3727 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3728 Open the punch cover

3212 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3729 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3730 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3213

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3731 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3732 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

3214 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3733 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear paper support

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear paper support.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3734 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear paper support 3215

 2. Disconnect one connector, release three hooks, and then remove the inner finisher rear paper
support.

Figure 6-3735 Remove the support

7 Remove the inner finisher paper support motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper support motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher paper support
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3736 Remove the assembly

8 Remove the inner finisher paper support motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper support motor.

3216 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher paper support
motor.

Figure 6-3737 Remove the motor

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3217

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3218 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Front paper support
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher front paper support.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-417 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01310A Front paper support

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Front paper support 3219

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3738 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3739 Remove three screws

3220 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3740 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3741 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3221

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3742 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3743 Remove three screws

3222 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3744 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3745 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 3223

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3746 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher front paper support

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front paper support.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher front paper support..

Figure 6-3747 Remove the support

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

3224 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3225

 Paddle unit
Review the inner finisher paddle unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher main paddle assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-418 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01327A Main paddle assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3226 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3748 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3749 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3227

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3750 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3751 Open the punch cover

3228 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3752 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3753 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3229

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3754 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

● Open the punch cover.

3230 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the inner
finisher main paddle motor assembly.

Figure 6-3755 Remove the assembly

5 Remove the inner finisher main paddle home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle home sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher main paddle home
sensor.

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainer as necessary.

Figure 6-3756 Remove the sensor

Remove the inner finisher main paddle home sensor 3231

 6 Remove the inner finisher main paddle assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle assembly.

1. Remove four paddles.

Figure 6-3757 Remove four paddles

2. Do the following:

● Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

● Remove the main paddle cam and bushing.

3232 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-3758 Remove the e-ring, cam, and bushing

3. Release the belt.

Figure 6-3759 Release the belt

Remove the inner finisher main paddle assembly 3233

 4. Remove the main paddle shaft.

Figure 6-3760 Remove the shaft

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3234 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3235

 Removal and replacement: Sub paddle assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher sub paddle assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-419 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01336A Sub paddle assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3236 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3761 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3762 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3237

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3763 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3764 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3238 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3765 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3766 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3239

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3767 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3768 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher sub paddle assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub paddle assembly.

3240 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3769 Remove one screw

2. Do the following:

● Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

● Remove the gear, belt, and bushing.

● Remove the sub paddle assembly.

Figure 6-3770 Remove the assembly

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3241

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3242 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Main paddle home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher main paddle home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-420 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Main paddle home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle home sensor 3243

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3771 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3772 Remove three screws

3244 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3773 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3774 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3245

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3775 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3776 Remove three screws

3246 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3777 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

● Open the punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly 3247

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the inner
finisher main paddle motor assembly.

Figure 6-3778 Remove the assembly

5 Remove the inner finisher main paddle home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle home sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher main paddle home
sensor.

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainer as necessary.

Figure 6-3779 Remove the sensor

3248 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

6 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3249

 Removal and replacement: Main paddle motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-421 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01331A Main paddle motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3250 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3780 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3781 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3251

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3782 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3783 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3252 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the inner
finisher main paddle motor assembly.

Figure 6-3784 Remove the assembly

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3253

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

End fence unit

Review the inner finisher end fence unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: End fence sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher end fence sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-422 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (End fence sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

3254 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3785 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3786 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3255

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3787 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3788 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3256 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3789 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3790 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 3257

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3791 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3792 Remove the assembly

4 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

3258 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3793 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3794 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 3259

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3795 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher sub paddle assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub paddle assembly.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3796 Remove one screw

2. Do the following:

● Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

● Remove the gear, belt, and bushing.

3260 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Remove the sub paddle assembly.

Figure 6-3797 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the inner finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit motor assembly.

1. Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher exit motor
assembly.

Figure 6-3798 Remove the motor

8 Remove the inner finisher bracket support guide and stay

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher bracket support guide and stay.

Remove the inner finisher exit motor assembly 3261

 1. Remove three screws, and then remove the bracket support guide.

Figure 6-3799 Remove the guide

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3800 Remove two screws

3262 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the bracket stay.

Figure 6-3801 Remove the stay

9 Remove the inner finisher end fence sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher end fence sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher end fence sensor.

Figure 6-3802 Remove the sensor

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher end fence sensor 3263

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3264 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Tamper unit
Review the inner finisher tamper unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher front tamper.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-423 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00899A Front tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Tamper unit 3265

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3803 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3804 Remove three screws

3266 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3805 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3806 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3267

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3807 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3808 Remove three screws

3268 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3809 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3810 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front tamper.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 3269

 1. Disconnect two connectors, and then release two hooks.

Figure 6-3811 Disconnect connectors and release hooks

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher front tamper.

Figure 6-3812 Remove the tamper

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

3270 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3271

 Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher front tamper motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-424 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Front tamper motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3272 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3813 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3814 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3273

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3815 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3816 Open the punch cover

3274 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3817 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3818 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3275

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3819 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3820 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front tamper.

3276 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect two connectors, and then release two hooks.

Figure 6-3821 Disconnect connectors and release hooks

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher front tamper.

Figure 6-3822 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher front tamper motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front tamper motor.

Remove the inner finisher front tamper motor 3277

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher front tamper
motor.

Figure 6-3823 Remove the motor

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3278 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3279

 Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher front tamper home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-425 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Front tamper home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3280 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3824 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3825 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3281

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3826 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3827 Open the punch cover

3282 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3828 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3829 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3283

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3830 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3831 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front tamper.

3284 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect two connectors, and then release two hooks.

Figure 6-3832 Disconnect connectors and release hooks

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher front tamper.

Figure 6-3833 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher front tamper home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front tamper home sensor.

Remove the inner finisher front tamper home sensor 3285

 ■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the inner finisher front tamper home sensor.

Figure 6-3834 Remove the sensor

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3286 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3287

 Removal and replacement: Rear tamper
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear tamper.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-426 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00900A Rear tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3288 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3835 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3836 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3289

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3837 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3838 Open the punch cover

3290 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3839 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3840 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3291

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3841 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3842 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

3292 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3843 Remove the tamper

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3293

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3294 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear tamper motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-427 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Rear tamper motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor 3295

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3844 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3845 Remove three screws

3296 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3846 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3847 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3297

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3848 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3849 Remove three screws

3298 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3850 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3851 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 3299

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3852 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper
motor.

Figure 6-3853 Remove the motor

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

3300 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3301

 Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear tamper home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-428 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Rear tamper home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3302 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3854 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3855 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3303

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3856 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3857 Open the punch cover

3304 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3858 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3859 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3305

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3860 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3861 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

3306 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3862 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper home sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper home sensor.

Figure 6-3863 Remove the sensor

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher rear tamper home sensor 3307

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3308 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Stapler unit
Review the inner finisher stapler unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Stapler assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher stapler assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-429 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW49-60003 Stapler assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

Stapler unit 3309

 ● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3864 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3865 Remove the handle

3310 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3866 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3867 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher stapler assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher stapler assembly.

Remove the inner finisher stapler assembly 3311

 ■ Disconnect two connectors, remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher stapler assembly.

Figure 6-3868 Remove the assembly

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3312 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3313

 Removal and replacement: Staple cartridge
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher staple cartridge.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-430 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW49-40001 Staple cartridge

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher staple cartridge

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher staple cartridge.

3314 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Open the front cover, and then pull the inner finisher staple cartridge out to remove it.

Figure 6-3869 Remove the cartridge

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3315

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3316 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Stapler position sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher stapler position sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-431 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Stapler position sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position sensor 3317

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3870 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3871 Rotate the punch

3318 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3872 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3873 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3319

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3874 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3875 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3320 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3876 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3877 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3321

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3878 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3879 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

3322 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3880 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3881 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the inner finisher middle roller 3323

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3882 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3883 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

3324 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-3884 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher stapler position sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher stapler position sensor.

1. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the guide.

Figure 6-3885 Remove the guide

Remove the inner finisher stapler position sensor 3325

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3886 Remove one screw

3. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3887 Remove one screw

3326 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Disconnect four connectors.

Figure 6-3888 Disconnect four connectors

5. Remove the inner finisher staple position sensor.

● Callout 1: Front stapler position sensor

● Callout 2: Middle stapler position sensor

● Callout 3: Middle stapler position sensor

● Callout 4: Rear stapler position sensor

Figure 6-3889 Remove the sensor

Remove the inner finisher stapler position sensor 3327

 9 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3328 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher stapler position motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-432 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00999A Drive-motor step (Stapler position motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor 3329

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3890 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3891 Rotate the punch

3330 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3892 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3893 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3331

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3894 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3895 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3332 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3896 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3897 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3333

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3898 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3899 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

3334 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3900 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3901 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the inner finisher middle roller 3335

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3902 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3903 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

3336 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-3904 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher stapler position motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher stapler position motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher stapler position
motor.

Figure 6-3905 Remove the motor

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher stapler position motor 3337

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Ejector unit
Review the inner finisher ejector unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Ejector

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher ejector.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

3338 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-433 Part information

Part number Part description

SS456-61001 Ejector

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3906 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 3339

 1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3907 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3908 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

3340 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3909 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3910 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3341

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3911 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3912 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

3342 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3913 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3914 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear paper support

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear paper support.

Remove the inner finisher rear tamper 3343

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3915 Remove three screws

2. Disconnect one connector, release three hooks, and then remove the inner finisher rear paper
support.

Figure 6-3916 Remove the support

7 Remove the inner finisher ejector

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher ejector.

3344 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove the inner finisher ejector.

Figure 6-3917 Remove the ejector

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3345

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3346 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Output tray and paper holding unit
Review the inner finisher output tray and paper holding unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-434 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

Output tray and paper holding unit 3347

 ■ Open the front door, remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3918 Remove the handle

2 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3919 Open the punch cover

3348 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3920 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3921 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3349

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3922 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher cable guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher cable guide.

■ Remove three screws, and remove the inner finisher cable guide.

NOTE: Remove the wire harness as necessary.

Figure 6-3923 Remove the guide

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

3350 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3924 Remove the assembly

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3351

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3352 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher output tray motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-435 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00178B JC31-00144G (Output tray motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor 3353

 ■ Open the front door, remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3925 Remove the handle

2 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3926 Open the punch cover

3354 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3927 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3928 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3355

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3929 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher cable guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher cable guide.

■ Remove three screws, and remove the inner finisher cable guide.

NOTE: Remove the wire harness as necessary.

Figure 6-3930 Remove the guide

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

3356 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3931 Remove the assembly

5 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor.

■ Do the following:

● Release the belt (callout 1).

● Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

● Remove two screws (callout 3)

● Remove the inner finisher output tray motor.

Remove the inner finisher output tray motor 3357

 Figure 6-3932 Remove the motor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3358 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3359

 Removal and replacement: Output tray motor sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher output tray motor sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-436 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Output tray motor sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

3360 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Open the front door, remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3933 Remove the handle

2 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3934 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3361

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3935 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3936 Remove three screws

3362 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3937 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher cable guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher cable guide.

■ Remove three screws, and remove the inner finisher cable guide.

NOTE: Remove the wire harness as necessary.

Figure 6-3938 Remove the guide

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

Remove the inner finisher cable guide 3363

 1. Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3939 Remove the assembly

5 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor sensor.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the gear.

Figure 6-3940 Remove the gear

3364 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove the inner finisher output tray motor sensor.

Figure 6-3941 Remove the sensor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3365

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3366 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Output tray lower limit switch assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-437 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01320A Finisher sub-tray, lower limit (Output tray lower limit switch assembly)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

Removal and replacement: Output tray lower limit switch assembly 3367
 ■ Open the front door, remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3942 Remove the handle

2 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3943 Open the punch cover

3368 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3944 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3945 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3369

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3946 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher PCA cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher PCA cover.

1. Lift up the inner finisher, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-3947 Remove two screws

3370 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove the inner finisher PCA cover.

Figure 6-3948 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch
assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-3949 Disconnect one connector

Remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly 3371
 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly.

Figure 6-3950 Remove the switch

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3372 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3373

 Removal and replacement: Output tray top of stack sensor kit
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher output tray top of stack sensor kit.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-438 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Tray sensor kit (Output tray top of stack sensor kit)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3374 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3951 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3952 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3375

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3953 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3954 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3376 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3955 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3956 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3377

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3957 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray assembly.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-3958 Remove four screws

3378 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-3959 Open the cover

3. Press the paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-3960 Press the actuator

Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly 3379

 4. Lift up on the inner finisher output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-3961 Remove the tray

5 Remove the output tray frame

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray frame.

1. Rotate the output tray gear.

Figure 6-3962 Rotate the gear

3380 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Press the paper holding actuator, and then lift the inner finisher output tray frame up to remove it.

Figure 6-3963 Remove the frame

6 Remove the finisher sub stay assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3964 Remove two screws

Remove the finisher sub stay assembly 3381

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3965 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3966 Remove two screws

3382 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

Figure 6-3967 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the inner finisher output tray top of tray sensor kit
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray top of tray sensor kit.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray top of stack sensors.

Figure 6-3968 Remove the sensors

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher output tray top of tray sensor kit 3383
 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3384 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Paper holding actuator
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-439 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding actuator 3385

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3969 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3970 Remove the handle

3386 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3971 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3972 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 3387

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3973 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3974 Remove three screws

3388 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3975 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3976 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher cable guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher cable guide.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 3389

 ■ Remove three screws, and remove the inner finisher cable guide.

NOTE: Remove the wire harness as necessary.

Figure 6-3977 Remove the guide

6 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

1. Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3978 Remove the assembly

3390 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

7 Remove the inner finisher PCA cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher PCA cover.

1. Lift up the inner finisher, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-3979 Remove two screws

2. Remove the inner finisher PCA cover.

Figure 6-3980 Remove the cover

8 Remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch
assembly.

Remove the inner finisher PCA cover 3391

 1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-3981 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly.

Figure 6-3982 Remove the switch

9 Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

3392 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove one spring.

Figure 6-3983 Remove one spring

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove two e-rings, and then remove the pin and bushing.

Figure 6-3984 Remove the e-rings, pin, and bushing

Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator 3393

 3. Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-3985 Remove the actuator

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3394 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3395

 Removal and replacement: Paper holding kit
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper holding kit.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-440 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01314A Paper holding kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3396 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3986 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3987 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3397

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3988 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3989 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3398 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3990 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3991 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3399

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3992 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3993 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

1. Open the punch cover.

3400 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3994 Remove the assembly

6 Remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch
assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-3995 Disconnect one connector

Remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly 3401
 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly.

Figure 6-3996 Remove the switch

7 Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

1. Remove one spring.

Figure 6-3997 Remove one spring

3402 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove two e-rings, and then remove the pin and bushing.

Figure 6-3998 Remove the e-rings, pin, and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-3999 Remove the actuator

8 Remove the inner finisher paper holding kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding kit.

Remove the inner finisher paper holding kit 3403

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-4000 Remove two screws

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-4001 Remove one screw

3404 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove the inner finisher paper holding kit.

Figure 6-4002 Remove the kit

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3405

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3406 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Paper holding solenoid
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper holding solenoid.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-441 Part information

Part number Part description

JC33-00037A Solenoid, TDS (Paper holding solenoid)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding solenoid 3407

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-4003 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-4004 Remove the handle

3408 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-4005 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-4006 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 3409

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-4007 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-4008 Remove three screws

3410 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-4009 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-4010 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

1. Open the punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 3411

 2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray
motor assembly.

Figure 6-4011 Remove the assembly

6 Remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch
assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-4012 Disconnect one connector

3412 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly.

Figure 6-4013 Remove the switch

7 Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

1. Remove one spring.

Figure 6-4014 Remove one spring

Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator 3413

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove two e-rings, and then remove the pin and bushing.

Figure 6-4015 Remove the e-rings, pin, and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-4016 Remove the actuator

8 Remove the inner finisher paper holding kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding kit.

3414 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-4017 Remove two screws

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-4018 Remove one screw

Remove the inner finisher paper holding kit 3415

 3. Remove the inner finisher paper holding kit.

Figure 6-4019 Remove the kit

9 Remove the inner finisher paper holding solenoid

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding solenoid.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher paper holding solenoid.

Figure 6-4020 Remove the solenoid

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

3416 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3417

 Removal and replacement: Paper holding sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper holding sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-442 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Paper holding sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3418 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-4021 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-4022 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3419

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-4023 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-4024 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3420 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-4025 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-4026 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3421

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-4027 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray assembly.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-4028 Remove four screws

3422 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-4029 Open the cover

3. Press the paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-4030 Press the actuator

Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly 3423

 4. Lift up on the inner finisher output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-4031 Remove the tray

5 Remove the output tray frame

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray frame.

1. Rotate the output tray gear.

Figure 6-4032 Rotate the gear

3424 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Press the paper holding actuator, and then lift the inner finisher output tray frame up to remove it.

Figure 6-4033 Remove the frame

6 Remove the finisher sub stay assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-4034 Remove two screws

Remove the finisher sub stay assembly 3425

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-4035 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-4036 Remove two screws

3426 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

Figure 6-4037 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the inner finisher paper holding sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the inner finisher paper holding sensor.

Figure 6-4038 Remove the sensor

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher paper holding sensor 3427

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3428 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

PCA and switch
Review the inner finisher PCA and switch removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher PCA.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-443 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW49-60001 Inner finisher PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

PCA and switch 3429

 ● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-4039 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-4040 Remove the handle

3430 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-4041 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-4042 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 3431

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-4043 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-4044 Remove three screws

3432 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-4045 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray assembly.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-4046 Remove four screws

Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly 3433

 2. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-4047 Open the cover

3. Press the paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-4048 Press the actuator

3434 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Lift up on the inner finisher output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-4049 Remove the tray

5 Remove the output tray frame

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray frame.

1. Rotate the output tray gear.

Figure 6-4050 Rotate the gear

Remove the output tray frame 3435

 2. Press the paper holding actuator, and then lift the inner finisher output tray frame up to remove it.

Figure 6-4051 Remove the frame

6 Remove the finisher sub stay assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-4052 Remove two screws

3436 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-4053 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-4054 Remove two screws

Remove the finisher sub stay assembly 3437

 4. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

Figure 6-4055 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the inner finisher PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher PCA.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors.

Figure 6-4056 Disconnect all connectors

3438 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher PCA.

Figure 6-4057 Remove the PCA

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3439

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3440 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Rear joint PCA
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear joint PCA.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-444 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02780A Inner finisher rear joint PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Rear joint PCA 3441

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-4058 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-4059 Rotate the punch

3442 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-4060 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-4061 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3443

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-4062 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-4063 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3444 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-4064 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-4065 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3445

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-4066 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-4067 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

3446 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-4068 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-4069 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the inner finisher middle roller 3447

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-4070 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-4071 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

3448 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-4072 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher rear joint PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear joint PCA.

■ Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the inner
finisher rear joint PCA.

Figure 6-4073 Remove the PCA

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher rear joint PCA 3449

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3450 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Front cover switch
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher front cover switch.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-445 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-01610A Harness - cover open (Front cover switch)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Front cover switch 3451

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-4074 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-4075 Remove three screws

3452 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-4076 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-4077 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 3453

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-4078 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-4079 Remove the assembly

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

3454 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-4080 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-4081 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 3455

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-4082 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-4083 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

3456 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-4084 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-4085 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the inner finisher middle roller 3457

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-4086 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-4087 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

3458 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-4088 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher bracket support guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher bracket support guide.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the bracket support guide.

Figure 6-4089 Remove the guide

9 Remove the inner finisher front cover switch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover switch.

Remove the inner finisher bracket support guide 3459

 1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-4090 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher front cover switch.

Figure 6-4091 Remove the switch

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

3460 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3461

 Removal and replacement: Top cover switch
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher top cover switch.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-446 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-01610A Harness - cover open (Top cover switch)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

3462 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-4092 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-4093 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 3463

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-4094 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher top cover switch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover switch.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-4095 Remove one screw

3464 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the inner finisher top cover switch.

Figure 6-4096 Remove the switch

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3465

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3466 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Docking sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher docking sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-447 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-01610A Harness - cover open (Docking sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Docking sensor 3467

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-4097 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-4098 Rotate the punch

3468 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-4099 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-4100 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher docking sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher docking sensor.

Remove the inner finisher docking sensor 3469

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the inner finisher docking sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-4101 Remove the sensor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3470 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Stacker or bridge unit with print quality diagnostics

Learn about output device parts removal and replacement.

Stacker assembly with print quality diagnostics

Learn about stacker with print quality diagnostics parts removal and replacement.

HP LaserJet Managed E826, E82650, E82660, E82670, HP Color LaserJet Managed E877, E87740, E87750, E87760,
E87770 - Removal and replacement: Stacker Unit with PQ diagnostics
Learn about removing and replacing the Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics whole unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-448 Part information

Part number Part description

63C82-60117 Stacker unit

63C80-67001 SVC - Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Stacker or bridge unit with print quality diagnostics 3471

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the stacker unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the output tray.

1. Remove the output tray.

a. Locate the output tray.

b. Lift the tray up, then remove the output tray.

2. Remove the stacker unit.

3472 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

a. Remove 3 screws.

b. Remove 1 screw.

Remove the stacker unit 3473

 c. Remove the cable cover while parting the unit from the engine slightly.

d. Unplug 3 cables.

3474 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 e. Remove the stacker unit by pulling it out.

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3475

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Bridge unit with print quality diagnostics

Learn about the bridge unit with print quality diagnostics parts removal and replacement.

HP LaserJet Managed E826, E82650, E82660, E82670, HP Color LaserJet Managed E877, E87740, E87750, E87760,
E87770 - Removal and replacement: Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics
Learn about removing and replacing the Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics whole unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-449 Part information

Part number Part description

63C80-60109 Bridge Unit with PQ Diagnostics

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

3476 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Remove the stacker unit
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the output tray.

1. Remove the output tray.

a. Locate the output tray.

b. Lift the tray up, then remove the output tray.

2. Remove the stacker unit.

Remove the stacker unit 3477

 a. Remove 3 screws.

b. Remove 1 screw.

3478 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

c. Remove the cable cover while parting the unit from the engine slightly.

d. Unplug 3 cables.

Remove the stacker unit 3479

 e. Remove the stacker unit by pulling it out.

Remove the bridge unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the bridge unit.

1. Remove mount bracket.

a. Release the cable stay clamp to free the cables.

3480 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 b. Remove 4 machine screws.

c. Remove the mount bracket by pulling it out away from the printer.

NOTE: To avoid damaging or interference of cables, arrange the cables through the hole.

2. Remove the bridge unit with PQ diagnostics.

Remove the bridge unit 3481

 a. Remove 1 screw.

b. Remove the bridge unit with PQ diagnostics by pulling it out from the printer.

c.

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

3482 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3483

 7 Parts and diagrams

Printer parts information including exploded assembly diagrams and part number lists.

Base printer
Learn about the printer engine parts and assemblies.

Covers
Learn about base printer cover service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Covers

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer covers.

3484 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Figure 7-1 Covers
20
3
1

4 8

6
7
5

2
11
27

19

25
21
26

12
23 9
14 13

24 22
18

28
17 10

16
15

32

30

29
31

Table 7-1 Covers

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, C1 6ER04-40008 Rear upper cover 1

2, C2 6ER04-40019 Rear lower cover 1

3, C3 6ER04-61005 Controller cover 1

Parts and diagrams: Covers 3485

 Table 7-1 Covers (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

4, C4 6ER04-40028 Exit rear cover 1

5, C5 JC63-04862B Left top cover 1

6, C6 6ER04-40027 Left upper cover 1

7, C7 6ER04-40049 Left cover 1

8, C9 6ER04-40026 Middle upper cover 1

9, U1 JC95-02247A Right door assembly 1

10, C10 JC63-04918B Right door sHCI dummy cover 1

11, C11 6ER04-40021 Right upper cover 1

12, C12 6ER04-61003 Right rear cover 1

13, C13 6ER04-40005 Right front cover 1

14, C14 6ER04-61006 Right middle cover assembly 1

15 6ER04-40025 Right middle cover 1

16 6EQ94-40029 Power key 1

17, P13 3SJ33-60007 PCA -power key 1

18, C15 6EQ94-40032 HIP cover 1

19, C16 6ER04-40036 Middle left cover 1

20, C17 6ER04-61004 Exit cover stacker 1

21, C18 6ER04-40048 Inner cover 1

22, C19 6ER04-40030 Front lower cover 1

23, C20 6ER04-61001 Front cover assembly 1

24 6ER04-40003 Front cover - Blue CMF Panel 1

24 6ER04-40054 Front cover - Gray CMF Panel 1

24 6ER04-40055 Front cover - Red CMF Panel 1

24 6ER04-40056 Front cover - Green CMF Panel 1

24 6ER04-40057 Front cover - Yellow CMF Panel 1

24 6ER04-40058 Front cover - Purple CMF Panel 1

25 JC61-04626A Tie stopper 1

26, C21 6ER04-40050 TCU cover assembly 1

27 5QK03-40044 TCU cover - Blue CMF Panel 1

27 6ER04-40059 TCU cover - Gray CMF Panel 1

27 6ER04-40060 TCU cover - Red CMF Panel 1

27 6ER04-40061 TCU cover - Green CMF Panel 1

27 6ER04-40062 TCU cover - Yellow CMF Panel 1

3486 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

 Table 7-1 Covers (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

27 6ER04-40063 TCU cover - Purple CMF Panel 1

28, U3 JC90-01853A Tray 2 1

29, C22 5QK03-40027 Tray 2 cover - Blue CMF panel 1

29, C22 5QK03-40088 Tray 2 cover - Gray CMF panel 1

29, C22 5QK03-40073 Tray 2 cover - Red CMF panel 1

29, C22 5QK03-40074 Tray 2 cover - Green CMF panel 1

29, C22 5QK03-40075 Tray 2 cover - Yellow CMF panel 1

29, C22 5QK03-40076 Tray 2 cover - Purple CMF panel 1

30, U4 5QK09-60121 Tray 3 1

31, C23 5QK09-40058 Tray 3 cover - Blue CMF panel 1

31, C23 5QK09-40071 Tray 3 cover - Gray CMF panel 1

31, C23 5QK09-40073 Tray 3 cover - Red CMF panel 1

31, C23 5QK09-40075 Tray 3 cover - Green CMF panel 1

31, C23 5QK09-40077 Tray 3 cover - Yellow CMF panel 1

31, C23 5QK09-40079 Tray 3 cover - Purple CMF panel 1

32 63C82-67029 Card reader rotation adapter kit 1

Not Shown X3A92-67924 Kit-Screws c-clips e-clips kit 1

Feeding system
Learn about base printer feeding system service parts.

Tray 1
Learn about base printer Tray 1 service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Tray 1

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer Tray 1.

Feeding system 3487

 Figure 7-2 Tray 1

3
1

10 9

8 6

Table 7-2 Tray 1

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U7 JC93-01664A Feed drive assembly 1

2, M1 JC31-00189A Drive-motor step (Feed motor) 1

3, CL1 JC47-00037A Electric clutch (Tray 1 clutch) 1

4, U1 JC95-02247A Right door assembly 1

5, U2 JC90-01844A Tray 1 unit 1

6, S1 0604-01490 Photo interrupter (Tray 1 paper empty sensor) 1

7, K1 5RC03-67001 Tray 1 roller kit 1

8 JC66-04398A Right door front link 1

9 JC66-01425A Right door front damper 1

10 JC61-08935A Right door front damper bracket 1

3488 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Tray 2, 3
Learn about base printer Tray 2, 3 service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Tray 2, 3

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer Tray 2, 3.

Figure 7-3 Tray 2, 3

10

6
5
2
1

18 19 7

9
8
3

11 4

12 5

15
14
14 15
17
16

13
13

Table 7-3 Tray 2, 3

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U3 JC90-01853A Tray 2 1

2, U4 5QK09-60121 Tray 3 1

3, U9 JC93-01663A Tray 2 pickup drive assembly 1

4, U9 JC93-01663A Tray 3 pickup drive assembly 1

5, M2 JC93-01083A Drive-motor step (Pickup motor) 2

6, S5 JC93-01408A Frame sub-sensor paper size RU (Tray 2 tray 1

open, paper size sensor)

7, S5 JC93-01408A Frame sub-sensor paper size RU (Tray 3 tray 1

open, paper size sensor)

8, S1 0604-01490 Photo interrupter (Tray 2 feed sensor) 1

9, 0 JC93-01664A Feed drive assembly 1

Tray 2, 3 3489
 Table 7-3 Tray 2, 3 (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

10, M1 JC31-00189A Drive-motor step (Feed motor) 1

11, U5 JC93-01694A Tray 2 pickup assembly 1

12 JC93-01695A Tray 3 pickup assembly 1

13, K2 5PN66-67001 Tray 2, 3 roller kit 1

14, O0 3SJ00-60110 Photo interrupter (Tray 2, 3 paper empty 1

sensor)

15, O0 3SJ00-60110 Photo interrupter (Tray 2, 3 stack height 1

sensor)

16, S1 0604-01490 Photo interrupter (Tray 2 prefeed sensor) 1

17, S8 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Tray 3 prefeed sensor) 1

18, U61 Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V 1

18, U61 Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V 1

19 JC93-01370A Tray sub-auto closing unit

Registration and loop sensors

Learn about base printer registration and loop sensors service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Registration and loop sensors

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer registration and loop sensors.

3490 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Figure 7-4 Registration and loop sensors
11

1
3

4
5

10

8 7 7

Table 7-4 Registration and loop sensors

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U11 8GS05-60128 Registration unit 1

2, S8 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Registration sensor) 1

3, U12 JC93-01665A Registration drive assembly 1

4, M1 JC31-00189A Drive-motor step (Registration motor) 1

5, U1 JC95-02247A Right door assembly 1

6, U13 5PN80-67001 Second transfer(T2) assembly 1

7, S12 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Loop sensor 1, 2) 1

8 JC66-04423A Loop actuator 1

Parts and diagrams: Registration and loop sensors 3491

 Table 7-4 Registration and loop sensors (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

9, U14 JC95-02249A Right door exit assembly 1

10, S14 0960-5271 Paper sensor (Fuser out sensor) 1

11, U15 JC93-01026B Paper dust holder assembly 1

Exit unit
Learn about base printer exit unit service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Exit unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer exit unit.

Figure 7-5 Exit unit

2
1

10 11

6 12
8 9
5

Table 7-5 Exit unit

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U16 JC90-01856A Exit unit 1

2, U53 JC93-01850A Fuser and exit drive assembly 1

3, M29 JC31-00144G Motor BLDC (Fuser and exit motor) 1

4, S15 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Out bin 1 full sensor) 1

5, SL2 JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting (Return gate solenoid) 1

3492 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

 Table 7-5 Exit unit (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

6, M5 JC93-00336A Drive-motor step (Exit 2 motor) 1

7, S17 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Exit 2 sensor) 1

8, S18 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Duplex jam 1 sensor) 1

9, M5 JC93-00336A Drive-motor step (Duplex 1 motor) 1

10, U18 JC90-01865A Exit stack guide 1

11, U17 5QK03-61008 Job separator (Optional) 1

12, S16 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Out bin full 2 sensor 1

[Optional])

Duplex
Learn about base printer duplex service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Duplex

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer duplex).

Duplex 3493
 Figure 7-6 Duplex

1
2

Table 7-6 Duplex

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U1 JC95-02247A Right door assembly 1

2, U19 JC95-02250A Duplex assembly 1

3, S19 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Duplex jam 2 sensor 1

4, M7 JC93-01085A Drive-motor step (Duplex 2 motor) 1

Toner flow
Learn about base printer toner flow service parts.

Toner cartridge
Learn about base printer toner cartridge service parts.

3494 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Toner
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer toner.

Figure 7-7 Toner

10
11
12
13

14 1

14
14
14

3
4
5

Table 7-7 Toner

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U20 JC93-01666A Toner and reservoir drive assembly 1

2, M8 SS216-80501 Yellow toner dispense motor 1

3, M8 SS216-80501 Magenta toner dispense motor 1

4, M8 SS216-80501 Cyan toner dispense motor 1

5, M8 SS216-80501 Black toner dispense motor 1

6, S20 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Yellow toner dispense 1

motor sensor)

7, S21 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Magenta toner dispense 1

motor sensor)

8, S22 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Cyan toner dispense motor 1

sensor)

9, S23 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Black toner dispense motor 1

sensor)

Parts and diagrams: Toner 3495

 Table 7-7 Toner (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

10, U21 W9162-67004 Yellow toner cartridge -Standard yield 1

10, U25 W9172-67007 Yellow toner cartridge -High yield 1

11, U22 W9163-67004 Magenta toner cartridge -Standard yield 1

11, U26 W9173-67007 Magenta toner cartridge -High yield 1

12, U23 W9161-67004 Cyan toner cartridge -Standard yield 1

12, U27 W9171-67007 Cyan toner cartridge -High yield 1

13, U24 W9160-67006 Black toner cartridge -Standard yield 1

13, U28 W9170-67007 Black toner cartridge -High yield 1

14, U29 JC93-01277A Toner cartridge CRUM module assembly 4

Reservoir
Learn about base printer reservoir service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Reservoir

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer reservoir.

3496 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Figure 7-8 Reservoir

1
2
3
4
5
8

6
7

Table 7-8 Reservoir

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U30 5QK03-60130 Yellow reservoir unit 1

2, U31 5QK03-60130 Magenta reservoir unit 1

3, U30 5QK03-60130 Cyan reservoir unit 1

4, U33 5QK03-60129 Black reservoir unit 1

5, U20 JC93-01666A Toner and reservoir drive assembly 1

6, M12 JC93-01659A Drive-motor step (Yellow, magenta toner 1

reservoir motor)

7, M12 JC93-01659A Drive-motor step (Cyan, black toner reservoir 1

motor)

8 Not orderable (order reservoir unit) Toner residual amount sensor 1

Parts and diagrams: Reservoir 3497

 Toner collection unit (TCU)
Learn about base printer TCU service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Toner collection unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer toner collection unit.

Figure 7-9 Toner collection unit

2
7
8

11

9
10

Table 7-9 Toner collection unit

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U34 JC96-13015A Toner collection duct unit 1

2, S28 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (toner collection duct unit 1

detection sensor)

3, U35 JC93-01669A Toner collection duct unit drive assembly 1

4, M15 JC31-00110C Motor circuit step (toner collection duct unit 1

motor)

3498 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

 Table 7-9 Toner collection unit (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

5, S29 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (toner collection duct unit 1

motor sensor)

6, U36 6SB85-67001 Toner collection unit 1

7, S30 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Toner collection unit 1

detection sensor)

8, U37 JC93-01668A Toner collection unit drive assembly 1

9, M15 JC31-00110C Motor circuit step (Toner collection unit motor) 1

10, S31 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Toner collection unit motor 1

sensor)

11, S32 JC92-02471A Toner collection unit full sensor 1

Image creation
Learn about base printer image creation service parts.

Laser scanner unit (LSU)

Learn about base printer LSU service parts.

Parts and diagrams: laser scanner unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer laser scanner unit.

Image creation 3499

 Figure 7-10 Laser scanner unit

Table 7-10 Laser scanner unit

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U38 JC97-05149A Laser scanner unit (LSU) 1

Developer
Learn about base printer developer service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Developer

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer developer.

3500 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Figure 7-11 Developer
1
2
3
4
8

6
7

Table 7-11 Developer

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U43 5PN73-67002 Yellow developer unit 1

2, U44 5PN74-67002 Magenta developer unit 1

3, U45 5PN75-67002 Cyan developer unit 1

4, U46 5PN72-67002 Black developer unit 1

5, U47 JC93-01661A Drum and developer drive assembly 1

6, M25 JC31-00123B Motor BLDC (Yellow, magenta, cyan developer 1

motor)

7, M25 JC31-00123B Motor BLDC (Black developer motor) 1

8 JC93-01024A Rear HV frame assembly 1

Not shown, 5PN73-67001 Yellow developer powder kit 1

K4

Not shown, 5PN74-67001 Magenta developer powder kit 1

K5

Not shown, 5PN75-67001 Cyan developer powder kit 1

K6

Parts and diagrams: Developer 3501

 Table 7-11 Developer (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

Not shown, 5PN72-67001 Black developer powder kit 1

K7

Drum
Learn about base printer drum service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Drum

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer drum.

Figure 7-12 Drum

1
2

17 17

17 5
17

8 7 6

10

11
16
12
15 13
9

Table 7-12 Drum

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U39 W9078-67001 Yellow drum unit 1

2, U40 W9078-67001 Magenta drum unit 1

3, U41 W9078-67001 Cyan drum unit 1

3502 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

 Table 7-12 Drum (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

4, U42 W9077-67001 Black drum unit 1

5, U47 JC93-01661A Drum and developer drive assembly 1

6, M21 JC31-00123C Motor BLDC (Yellow drum motor) 1

7, M22 JC31-00123C Motor BLDC (Magenta drum motor) 1

8, M23 JC31-00123C Motor BLDC (Cyan drum motor) 1

9, M24 JC31-00123C Motor BLDC (Black drum and ITB motor) 1

10, S39 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Yellow drum home sensor) 1

11, S40 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Magenta drum home 1

sensor)

12, S41 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Cyan drum home sensor) 1

13, S42 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Black drum home sensor) 1

15 JC61-08699A Left cable guide 1

16 JC61-08700A Right cable guide 1

17 JC93-01275A OPC CRUM module assembly 4

ITB
Learn about base printer ITB service parts.

Parts and diagrams: ITB

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer ITB.

ITB 3503
 Figure 7-13 ITB
1

4 6

Table 7-13 ITB

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, K7 5PN78-67001 ITB and ITB cleaning unit kit 1

2, U48 JC93-01691A ITB 1

3, U50 5PN79-67001 ITB cleaning unit 1

4, U49 JC93-01068A ITB engage motor assembly 1

5, M27 JC31-00110B ITB engage motor 1

6, U47 JC93-01661A Drum and developer drive assembly 1

7, M21 JC31-00123C Motor BLDC (Black drum and ITB motor) 1

8, S42 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Black drum home sensor) 1

9 5QK03-64004 Guide rail HV frame assembly 1

3504 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

CPR
Learn about base printer CPR service parts.

Parts and diagrams: CPR

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer color plane registration.

Figure 7-14 CPR

5
4

Table 7-14 CPR

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, - 5QK03-60102 CPR unit 1

2, S48 JC32-00014A CPR sensor (Front CPR sensor) 1

3, S49 JC32-00014A CPR sensor (Center CPR sensor) 1

4 JC32-00014A CPR sensor (Rear CPR sensor) 1

5, S51 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (CPR shutter sensor) 1

6, M28 JC31-00078A Motor DC (CPR shutter motor) 1

CPR 3505
 Fuser
Learn about base printer fuser service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Fuser

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer fuser.

Figure 7-15 fuser

3
4

Table 7-15 fuser

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U52-1 5PN53-67001 Fuser unit -100V 1

1, U52-2 5PN76-67001 Fuser unit -110V 1

1, U52-3 5PN77-67001 Fuser unit -220V 1

2 JC93-01850A Fuser and exit drive assembly 1

3, M29 JC31-00144G Motor BLDC (Fuser and exit motor) 1

4, M30 JC93-01084A Drive-motor step (Fuser gap motor) 1

5, S55 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Fuser gap sensor) 1

Sensor and fan

Learn about base printer sensor and fan service parts.

3506 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Sensor and fan
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer sensor and fan.

Figure 7-16 Sensor and fan

11

10
1

3
6

5 8
4

Table 7-16 Sensor and fan

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, S56 1404-001417 Thermistor (Inner temperature sensor) 1

2, U54 5QJ90-40002 Outer environment sensor assembly 1

3 JC93-01795A LVPS FDB fan assembly 1

4, F1 JC31-00198A Fan (LVPS fan) 1

5, F2 JC31-00154A Fan (FDB fan) 1

6, U55 JC93-01725A Front fan assembly 1

7, U56 5QK03-40103 Fuser fan duct assembly 1

8, U57 JC93-01019A LSU fan assembly 1

9, S58 JC93-00466A Front door open switch 1

10, S59 JC93-01467A Switch (Right door switch assembly) 1

11 JC31-00154A Exit fan1, 2, 3, 4 4

Parts and diagrams: Sensor and fan 3507

 PCA
Learn about base printer PCA service parts.

Parts and diagrams: PCA

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer covers.

Figure 7-17 PCA

16
11 12
10
11
17
18
5

14 13

1
6

7 3
2

15

19 9

15.1

Table 7-17 PCA

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U59 3SJ15-60101 Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm (8 in) 1

1, U58 5QK42-60104 Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm (10.1 in 2nd) 1

2, P11-1 JC44-00150C Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 220V 1

2, P11-2 JC44-00149C Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 110V 1

3, P12-1 JC44-00236C Fuser drive board (FDB), 220V 1

3, P12-2 JC44-00235C Fuser drive board (FDB), 110V 1

3508 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-17 PCA (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

4, P10 JC44-00240C High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) 1

5, P1 6CF14-67001 Main PCA (Formatter) 1

6, P7 3SJ06-60001 Island of Data (IOD) PCA 1

7, P8 T3U64-60001 (Not orderable and Echo PCA (Not orderable and not used in printer.) 1
not used in printer.)

8 6ER04-40034 (Not orderable and Rivet-Echo PCA (Not orderable and not used in 1
not used in printer.) printer.)

9, P6 3SJ04-60002 USB Hub PCA 1

10, P5 933853-010 Hard disk 500GB SED 1

10, P5 733M6-69001 Solid-state drive 256GB 1

11 6ER04-40035 Rivet-HDD 1

12 5851-7753 Cradle-HDD 1

13 5851-7754 Cradle-Riser Card 1

14, P3-1 3SJ01-60001 Riser for HDD 1

14, P3-2 4XN67-67001 SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit 1

14, P3-3 3SJ02-60001 Riser for HDD, USB ports, Accelerator 1

15, U60-1 JC93-01742A Keyboard (fold type) Assy-US English 1

15, U60-2 JC93-01743A Keyboard (fold type) Assy-UK English 1

15.1, U60-3 63C82-67003 Keyboard (drawer type) Assy – E8 series US English 1

15.1, U60-4 63C82-67005 Keyboard (drawer type) Assy – E8 series UK English 1

Not shown 5851-6019 Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, RU, DE,ES,UK Kybd) 1

Not shown 5851-6020 Keyboard overlay kit (FR-CN, ES-LA, ES,US Kybd) 1

Not shown 5851-6021 Keyboard overlay kit (FR-SW, DE-SW, DA,UK Kybd) 1

Not shown 5851-6022 Keyboard overlay kit (ZHTW, ZHCN) 1

Not shown 5851-6023 Keyboard overlay kit (ES, PT) 1

Not shown 5851-6024 Keyboard overlay kit (JA-KG, JA-KT) 1

16, P4 6HN30-67001 Accelerator(Optional) 1

17, P18-1 7ZA08-67001 Single Fax Card (WW)(Optional) 1

17, P18-2 7ZA09-67001 Single Fax Card (BBU)(Optional) 1

17, P18-3 5QK14-67001 Dual Fax Card (WW)(Optional) 1

17, P18-4 7ZA07-67001 Dual Fax Card (BBU)(Optional) 1

18 3SJ03-60001(Not Orderable) TPM 1

19, P13 3SJ33-60007 PCA -power key 1

Parts and diagrams: PCA 3509

 ADF / Image scanner assembly
Learn about the ADF and sub-scanner parts and assemblies.

Image scanner assembly (ISA)

Learn about the integrated-scanner assembly parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: Image scanner assembly (ISA)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer ISA.

Figure 7-18 ISA

3 2
1

Table 7-18 ISA

Ref No, Part number Description Qty

Callout

1 3SJ11-40008 Cover Rear 1

2 3SJ32-60101 HP LaserJet 300ipm 300 sheet Flow DADF 1

high speed Scanner

2 3SJ32-60102 HP LaserJet 180ipm 200 sheet DADF high 1

speed Scanner

3510 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-18 ISA (continued)

Ref No, Part number Description Qty

Callout

3, U501 5QJ90-61042 300sh flow ADF (does not include white 1

backing or suspension clips)

3, U602 5QJ90-67011 200sh ADF 1

4, U801 3SJ32-60103 Tarot HS platen 1

Parts and diagrams: Image scanner assembly (ISA) 3511

 300sh flow ADF
Learn about the 300sh flow ADF parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer ADF.

Figure 7-19 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2)

Table 7-19 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2)

Ref No, Part number Description Qty

Callout

1, C501 5QJ90-40049 ADF front cover 1

2, C502 5QJ90-40041 ADF rear cover 1

3, C503 5QJ90-40054 ADF top cover 1

4, C505 5QJ90-40056 ADF Blue CMF panel 1

4, C505 5QJ90-40108 ADF Gray CMF panel 1

4, C505 5QJ90-40109 ADF Red CMF panel 1

4, C505 5QJ90-40110 ADF Green CMF panel 1

4, C505 5QJ90-40111 ADF Yellow CMF panel 1

4, C505 5QJ90-40112 ADF Purple CMF panel 1

3512 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer ADF.

Figure 7-20 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2)

1

6
10
4
2

11

Table 7-20 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2)

Ref No, Part number Description Qty

Callout

1, C504 Z9Y05-60032 ADF input tray 1

2, K501 5RC00-67001 ADF roller kit 1

4, P501 Z9Y05-60004 300sh ADF PCA 1

5 Z9Y05-50002 ADF FFC cable to SSA 1

6 Z9Y05-50003 ADF Power cable 1

7 5QK08-67003 SVC-Hinge Kit (right, middle, left) 1

10 Z9Y05-60016 Damper module 1

11 5QK08-67005 SVC-A3 White Backing Kit 1

Parts and diagrams: 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) 3513

3514 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
200sh ADF
Learn about the 200sh ADF parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (1 of 2)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer ADF.

Figure 7-21 200sh ADF (1 of 2)

Table 7-21 200sh ADF (1 of 2)

Ref No, Part number Description Qty

Callout

1, C605 5QJ90-40056 ADF Blue CMF panel 1

1, C605 5QJ90-40108 ADF Gray CMF panel 1

1, C605 5QJ90-40109 ADF Red CMF panel 1

1, C605 5QJ90-40110 ADF Green CMF panel 1

1, C605 5QJ90-40111 ADF Yellow CMF panel 1

1, C605 5QJ90-40112 ADF Purple CMF panel 1

200sh ADF 3515

 Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (2 of 2)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer ADF.

Figure 7-22 200sh ADF (2 of 2)

5
7
3
1

Table 7-22 200sh ADF (2 of 2)

Ref No, Part number Description Qty

Callout

1, K601 5851-7202 ADF roller kit 1

3, P601-1 5QJ90-67013 200sh ENT ADF PCA 1

4 5QJ90-67009 ADF FFC cable to SSA 1

5 5QJ90-67010 ADF Power cable 1

6, K602 5QJ90-67004 Hinge Kit 1

7 5QJ90-67006 Damper module 1

8, K603 5QK08-67005 A3 White Backing Kit 1

Tarot HS platen
Learn about the tarot HS platen parts and assemblies.

3516 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Tarot HS platen
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer tarot HS platen.

Figure 7-23 Tarot HS platen

3
2
1

Table 7-23 Tarot HS platen

Ref No, Part number Description Qty

Callout

1, S803 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (ADF open sensor) 1

2, S801 3SJ32-60104 Tarot HS platen PCA 1

3 3SJ11-50006 Discrete power cable 1

4 5QK08-67011 SVC-Flat Cable, Tarot SCB 50pin 1

5 5QK08-67012 SVC-Flat Cable, Tarot SCB 68pin 1

Input devices
Learn about input device parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: Tarot HS platen 3517

3518 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Department Dual cassette feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5)
Learn about the DCF parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: DCF (1 of 2)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer DCF.

Figure 7-24 DCF (1 of 2)

11

2
4

10
9

9
6 9 10
1
9

Table 7-24 DCF (1 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

0 6GW47-67001 DCF 1

1 5QK08-40006 DCF right cover 1

2 5QK08-40007 DCF rear cover 1

3 5QK08-40008 DCF left cover 1

4 5QK08-61004 DCF right door 1

5 5QK08-61007 Tray 4 cassette 1

6 5QK08-40011 Tray 4 Blue CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40027 Tray 4 Gray CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40030 Tray 4 Red CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40031 Tray 4 Green CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40032 Tray 4 Yellow CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40033 Tray 4 Purple CMF panel 1

7 5QK08-61005 Tray 5 cassette 1

8 5QK08-40012 Tray 5 Blue CMF panel 1

Department Dual cassette feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5) 3519

 Table 7-24 DCF (1 of 2) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

8 8GR90-40028 Tray 5 Gray CMF panel 1

8 8GR90-40034 Tray 5 Red CMF panel 1

8 8GR90-40035 Tray 5 Green CMF panel 1

8 8GR90-40036 Tray 5 Yellow CMF panel 1

8 8GR90-40037 Tray 5 Purple CMF panel 1

9 6109-001138 Caster wheel 1

10 JC61-04871A Guide - adjust 1

11 JC90-01677A Tray sub-auto closing unit 2

3520 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: DCF (2 of 2)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer DCF.

Figure 7-25 DCF (2 of 2)

6
7 5

2
19
1 3
18
8 4
17
10
5
11 9

16

12 12

13 14
13 15
14 15

Table 7-25 DCF (2 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QK08-61007 Tray 4 cassette 1

2 5QK08-61005 Tray 5 cassette 1

3 JC93-01663A Tray 4 pickup drive assembly 1

4 JC93-01663A Tray 5 pickup drive assembly 1

5 JC93-01083A Drive-motor step (Tray 4, 5 pickup motor) 1

6 JC93-01408A Frame sub-sensor paper size RU (Tray 4 tray 1

open, paper size sensor)

7 JC93-01408A Frame sub-sensor paper size RU (Tray 5 tray 1

open, paper size sensor)

8 JC93-01135A DCF feed drive assembly 1

9 JC31-00177A Motor, step (DCF feed motor) 1

10 5QK08-61009 Tray 4 pickup assembly 1

Parts and diagrams: DCF (2 of 2) 3521

 Table 7-25 DCF (2 of 2) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

11 5QK08-61010 Tray 5 pickup assembly 1

12 5PN66-67001 Tray 4, 5 roller kit 1

13 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Prefeed 4, 5 sensor) 1

14 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (DCF paper empty sensor) 1

15 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (DCF stack height sensor) 1

16 0604-01490 Photo interrupter (feed sensor) 1

17 JC90-01385A Right door open switch holder assy 1

17 JC39-02268A DCF Dpt_Door open switch sensor and 1

harness

18 6GW47-60001 PCA-DCF Department 1

19 Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V 1

19 Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V 1

3522 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Department High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4)
Learn about the HCI parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: HCI (1 of 2)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer HCI.

Figure 7-26 HCI (1 of 2)

6 3

4 7
8

7
1 7 8

Table 7-26 HCI (1 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

0 6GW57-67001 HCI 1

1 5QK08-40006 HCI right cover 1

2 5QK08-40007 HCI rear cover 1

3 5QK08-40008 HCI left cover 1

4 5QK08-61023 HCI right door 1

5 5QK08-61014 HCI cassette 1

6 5QK08-40016 HCI front Blue CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40029 HCI front Gray CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40038 HCI front Red CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40039 HCI front Green CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40040 HCI front Yellow CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40041 HCI front Purple CMF panel 1

7 6109-001138 Caster wheel 1

Department High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4) 3523

 Table 7-26 HCI (1 of 2) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

8 JC61-04871A Guide - adjust 1

9 JC93-01382A Tray sub-auto closing unit 2

3524 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: HCI (2 of 2)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer HCI.

Figure 7-27 HCI (2 of 2)

13

12
8
11 9
10

4 1
24 25

26
20
3 5

2 28
7
14
21 27
17 22 23

15
16
18 19

Table 7-27 HCI (2 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QK08-61014 HCI cassette 1

2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI knock-up home sensor) 1

3 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI shift tray end sensor) 1

4 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI shift tray home sensor) 1

5 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI shift tray empty sensor) 1

6 JC81-07481B HCI shift plate 1

7 6GW48-60003 Knock-up plate assembly 1

8 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI shift tray level sensor 1) 1

9 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI shift tray level sensor 2) 1

10 JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting (HCI shift gate solenoid) 1

Parts and diagrams: HCI (2 of 2) 3525

 Table 7-27 HCI (2 of 2) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

11 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI shift gate solenoid 1

home sensor)

12 JC81-07478B Paper gate 1

13 JC92-02792A PBA-Shift tray level 1

14 5QK08-61013 HCI pickup assembly 1

15 5PN66-67001 HCI roller kit 1

16 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Prefeed 4 sensor) 1

17 0604-01490 Photo interrupter (HCI feed sensor) 1

18 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI paper empty sensor) 1

19 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI stack height sensor) 1

20 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI tray open sensor) 1

21 JC90-01385A Right door open switch holder assy 1

21 JC39-02279A HCI Dpt_Dooropen switch sensor and 1

harness

22 JC93-01115A HCI pickup motor 1

23 JC93-01114A HCI feed motor 1

24 JC31-00109A (HCI tray lift motor)Motor, geared 1

25 JC31-00125A Motor, geared (HCI paper shift motor) 1

26 6GW57-60001 PCA-HCI Department 1

27 JC93-01118A HCI Lift Drive Assy (Shift) 1

28 Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V 1

28 Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V 1

3526 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Department Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI, Tray 5 or 6)
Learn about the sHCI parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: sHCI (1 of 2)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer sHCI.

Figure 7-28 sHCI (1 of 2)

14
15
10 13 3

12

11

4
2

5
16
1

7
0

Table 7-28 sHCI (1 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

0 6GW56-67001 sHCI 1

1 5QK08-40020 sHCI right cover 1

2 5QK08-40025 sHCI rear cover 1

3 5QK08-40018 sHCI harness cover 1

4 5QK08-40024 sHCI rear top cover 1

5 5QK08-40019 sHCI pickup cover 1

6 5QK08-61018 sHCI top cover 1

7 5QK08-40026 sHCI front cover 1

Department Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI, Tray 5 or 6) 3527

 Table 7-28 sHCI (1 of 2) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

8 5QK08-40027 sHCI front top cover 1

9 5QK08-40028 sHCI left cover 1

10 JC66-04279A Link door 1st front 1

11 JC66-04278A Link door 2nd front 1

12 JC61-06567A Link holder front 1

13 JC66-04279A Link door 1st rear 1

14 JC66-04277A Link door 2nd rear 1

15 JC61-06568A Link holder rear 1

16 5QK08-61019 sHCI rear cover assembly 1

3528 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: sHCI (2 of 2)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer sHCI.

Figure 7-29 sHCI (2 of 2)

9 12
10

2
3
4
8
11
17

14

7 6

13
15
16

Table 7-29 sHCI (2 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QJ98-60014 sHCI pickup assembly

2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sHCI stack height sensor) 1

3 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sHCI paper empty sensor) 1

4 0604-01490 Photo interrupter (Prefeed 5 sensor) 1

5 JC93-01726A Reverse roller 1

6 JC93-01123A sHCI top cover open switch assembly 1

7 JC39-02346A sHCI door open sensor 1

8 JC93-01112A sHCI pickup/feed drive assembly 1

9 JC93-01083A Drive-motor step (sHCI pickup motor) 1

10 JC31-00163A Motor, step (sHCI feed motor) 1

11 JC93-01127A sHCI lift drive assembly 1

12 JC31-00109A Motor, geared (sHCI lift motor) 1

13 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sHCI detection sensor 1, 1

front)

Parts and diagrams: sHCI (2 of 2) 3529

 Table 7-29 sHCI (2 of 2) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

14 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sHCI detection sensor 2, 1

rear)

15 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sHCI paper level sensor 1) 1

16 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sHCI paper level sensor 2) 1

17 6GW56-60001 PCA-sHCI Department 1

Output device
Learn about output device parts and assemblies.

3530 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Inner finisher
Learn about the inner finisher parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (1 of 5)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer inner finisher.

Figure 7-30 Inner finisher (1 of 5)

2
2

Table 7-30 Inner finisher (1 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 6GW49-67002 Inner Finisher 1

2 6102-003354 Guide rail 1

3 JC90-01546A Exit bin full 1

Inner finisher 3531

 Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (2 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer inner finisher.

Figure 7-31 Inner finisher (2 of 5)

5
4

7 6

3 1
2

8
13

10
12
9
11

Table 7-31 Inner finisher (2 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QK09-60123 Front cover assy 1

2 5QK09-60125 Top cover assy 1

3 5QK09-60124 Middle cover assy 1

4 8GS05-60114 Punch cover assembly 1

5 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Entrance sensor) 1

6 155P7-67001 Hole 2/3 punch (optional) 1

3532 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-31 Inner finisher (2 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

6 155P8-67001 Hole 2/4 punch (optional) 1

6 155P9-67001 Swedish punch (optional) 1

7 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Entrance sensor) 1

8 5QK09-60118 Output tray assy 1

9 5QK09-40004 PCA cover 1

10 8GS05-60113 Left cover assy 1

11 5QK09-40018 Rear cover -base 1

12 5QK09-40037 Rear cover -punch 1

13 JC66-04233A Lock release handle 1

Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (2 of 5) 3533

 Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (3 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer inner finisher.

Figure 7-32 Inner finisher (3 of 5)

7 9

10
16

20
18 8

15
6 11

5
14
1 2
3

4 17
13

12
19

Table 7-32 Inner finisher (3 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Exit sensor) 1

2 JC66-04199A Exit sensor actuator 1

3 5QK09-60128 Entrance motor assy 1

4 JC31-00169B Motor, step (Entrance motor) 1

5 6602-003644 Entrance motor timing belt 1

6 JC66-04243A Entrance roller 1

7 JC66-04243A Middle roller 1

8 JC90-01334B Output tray motor assy 1

9 JC31-00178B Motor DC (Output tray motor) 1

10 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Output tray motor sensor) 1

3534 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-32 Inner finisher (3 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

11 JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch assy 1

12 JC82-01039A Output tray top of stack sensor kit 1

13 JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator 1

14 JC90-01314A Paper holding kit 1

15 JC33-00037A Electric clutch (Paper holding solenoid) 1

16 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Paper holding sensor) 1

17 6GW49-60001 Inner finisher PCA 1

18 JC92-02780A Rear joint PCA 1

19 JC39-01610A Harness - cover open (Front cover switch) 1

20 JC39-01610A Harness - cover open (Top cover switch) 1

Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (3 of 5) 3535

 Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (4 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer inner finisher.

Figure 7-33 Inner finisher (4 of 5)

8 11
10

7
4

4 4
4 1 2
9 6

3
15
13
14
12
16

17

18

11

Table 7-33 Inner finisher (4 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 6GW49-60003 Stapler assembly 1

2 6GW49-40001 Staple cartridge 1

3 JC93-00999A Drive-motor step (Stapler position motor) 1

4 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Stapler position sensor) 1

5 JC90-01330A Exit roller assy 1

6 JC90-01331A Exit motor assy 1

7 JC31-00169B Motor, step (Exit motor) 1

8 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (End fence sensor) 1

9 JC90-01327A Main paddle 1

3536 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-33 Inner finisher (4 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

10 JC82-01038A Main paddle kit 1

11 JC90-01336A Sub paddle assy 1

12 JC66-04218A Gear rack pinion 1

13 JC66-04201A Actuator home paddle 1

14 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Main paddle home sensor) 1

15 JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Main paddle motor) 1

16 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Punch waste full sensor) 1

17 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (finisher docking sensor) 1

18 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (punch waste box sensor) 1

Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (4 of 5) 3537

 Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (5 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer inner finisher.

Figure 7-34 Inner finisher (5 of 5)

10

11
1
3

13

12
2
4

7
5

Table 7-34 Inner finisher (5 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 SS456-61001 Ejector 1

3538 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-34 Inner finisher (5 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Ejector1 home sensor) 1

3 JC90-01310A Front paper support 1

4 JC90-01311A Rear paper support 1

5 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Paper support home 1

sensor)

6 JC90-01312A Paper support motor assy 1

7 JC93-00802B Drive sub-motor step (Paper support motor) 1

8 JC82-00899A Front tamper 1

9 JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Front tamper motor) 1

10 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Front tamper home sensor) 1

11 JC82-00900A Rear tamper 1

12 JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Rear tamper motor) 1

13 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Rear tamper home sensor) 1

Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (5 of 5) 3539

 Stapler/Stacker finisher
Learn about the stapler/stacker parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

Parts diagram and parts list for the stapler/stacker finisher.

Figure 7-35 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

17
0

16

18

23 23

19
13 11

22

12
13 2
24
21
24 20
6 25
4
9
23
7 8
23 7
23
23
5 10

3540 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-35 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

0 6GW55-67001 Stapler/Stacker finisher 1

1 JC90-01442A Finisher mount bracket 1

2 5QK09-60106 Front door 1

3 8GS05-40018 Caster cover 1

4 8GS05-60122 Left lower cover 1

5 0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor 1

6 8GS05-60118 Left upper cover 1

7 JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor 1

8 0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor 1

9 0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor 1

10 0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor 1

11 5QK09-40027 Top output tray 1

12 5QK09-40028 Main output tray 1

14 5QK09-40029 Tray extension 1

14 5QK09-40021 Rear cover 1

15 5QK09-40030 Punch cover 1

16 5QK09-60108 Top cover 1

17 5QK09-60107 Top door 1

18 5QK09-60109 Right upper cover 1

19 5QK09-40019 Front cover 1

20 5QK09-40020 Front lower cover 1

21 5QK09-40047 Front lower left cover 1

22 5QK09-40048 Front lower right cover 1

23 JC61-07452A Caster 1

24 JC61-07444A Caster fix nut 1

25 JC66-04767A Shaft hinge - door 1

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4) 3541

 Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)
Parts diagram and parts list for the stapler/stacker finisher.

Figure 7-36 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

11

10

43 22

47
42 9

17
18
46
45

48

18 19

12 13

44

23 20
25
36

24 21

Table 7-36 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

9 8GS05-60104 Entrance motor assembly 1

10 Y1G10-67901 Punch unit 2-3 hole 1

10 Y1G11-67901 Punch unit 2-4 hole 1

10 Y1G12-67901 Punch unit Swedish hole 1

11 JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly 1

12 JC90-01458A Tray diverter cam 1

13 0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor 1

17 8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly 1

3542 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-36 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

18 JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor 1

19 JC39-02309A Front door switch 1

20 JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly 1

21 0604-001393 Main exit cam home sensor 1

22 JC90-01480A Paddle 1

23 JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly 1

24 0604-001393 Paddle home sensor 1

25 JC90-01467A End fence motor assembly 1

36 0604-001415 Manual staple senor 1

42 JC90-01415B Main output tray motor drive assembly 1

43 0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor 1

44 JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch 1

45 JC90-01414A Paper holding motor drive assembly 1

46 JC93-01152A Buffer motor 1

47 JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid assembly 1

48 6GW55-60001 Main PCA 1

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4) 3543

 Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)
Parts diagram and parts list for the stapler/stacker finisher.

Figure 7-37 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

15
2
3
5

16

14 1

Table 7-37 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QK09-60110 Bridge unit 1

2 0604-001393 Bridge door sensor 1

3 JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor 1

4 0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor 1

5 3SJ19-80501 Bridge motor 1

14 JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly 1

15 JC32-00020A Main exit sensor 1

16 0604-001393 Top exit sensor 1

17 8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly 1

3544 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)
Parts diagram and parts list for the stapler/stacker finisher.

Figure 7-38 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

29

27 26

28 6
37 34
44
33
30
32

39 38 7 35
31

8
40
41

Table 7-38 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

6 JC82-00901A Front tamper 1

7 0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor 1

8 JC93-01001A Front tamper motor 1

26 JC82-00898A Rear tamper 1

27 0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor 1

28 JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor 1

29 JC82-00894A Staple unit 1

30 JC81-09882B Staple cartridge 1

31 0604-001393 Staple front sensor 1

32 0604-001393 Staple mid-front sensor 1

33 0604-001393 Staple mid-rear sensor 1

34 0604-001393 Staple rear sensor 1

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4) 3545

 Table 7-38 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

35 JC31-00163A Staple position motor 1

37 JC90-01802A Ejector unit 1

38 JC32-00020A Ejector sensor 1

39 0604-001415 Ejector1 home sensor 1

40 0604-001415 Ejector1 motor sensor 1

41 0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor 1

3546 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Booklet finisher
Learn about the booklet finisher parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (1 of 5)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer booklet finisher.

Figure 7-39 Booklet finisher (1 of 5)

1

18

17
0
16

19
15
25
12 25 20

14

13 25
23
21
25
2
14
24 22 26
7 24
24
24
3
5

6 28 8 10
28
9
4 8

11
27

Table 7-39 Booklet finisher (1 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

0 6GW51-67001 Booklet finisher 1

1 JC90-01442A Finisher mount bracket 1

2 5QK09-60104 Booklet maker unit 1

3 5QK09-60106 Front door 1

4 8GS05-40018 Caster cover 1

5 8GS05-60124 Left lower cover (Booklet) 1

6 0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor 1

Booklet finisher 3547

 Table 7-39 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

7 8GS05-60118 Left upper cover 1

8 JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor 1

9 0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor 1

10 0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor 1

11 0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor 1

12 5QK09-40027 Top output tray 1

13 5QK09-40028 Main output tray 1

14 5QK09-40029 Tray extension 1

15 5QK09-40021 Rear cover 1

16 5QK09-40030 Punch cover 1

17 5QK09-60108 Top cover 1

18 5QK09-60107 Top door 1

19 5QK09-60109 Right upper cover 1

20 5QK09-40019 Front cover 1

21 5QK09-40020 Front lower cover 1

22 5QK09-40047 Front lower left cover 1

23 5QK09-40048 Front lower right cover 1

24 JC61-07452A Caster 1

25 JC61-07444A Caster fix nut 1

26 JC66-04767A Shaft hinge - door 1

27 8GS05-60126 Booklet output tray 1

28 JC82-01039A Booklet output tray sensor 1

3548 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (2 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer booklet finisher.

Figure 7-40 Booklet finisher (2 of 5)

11

1
12

10

17
9

13
15
14 14
26

18
16

2
25
19
23 20 27

3
4

24

5 8

7
21

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (2 of 5) 3549

 Table 7-40 Booklet finisher (2 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 0604-001415 Booklet entrance sensor 1

2 JC90-01425A Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly 1

3 0604-001393 Booklet paddle home sensor 1

4 JC90-01430A Booklet paddle motor assembly 1

5 JC90-01432A Booklet end fence 1

6 0604-001393 Booklet end fence home sensor 1

7 JC93-01155A Booklet end fence motor 1

8 0604-001393 Booklet presser home sensor 1

9 JC90-01431A Booklet tamper 1

10 0604-001393 Booklet tamper home sensor 1

11 JC93-01155A Booklet tamper motor 1

12 JC32-00020A Booklet tamper sensor 1

13 8GS05-60126 Booklet stapler 1

14 JC81-08274A Booklet stapler cartridge 1

15 JC93-01163A Booklet blade 1

16 0604-001393 Booklet blade home sensor 1

17 JC90-01435A Booklet blade motor assembly 1

18 JC90-01436A Booklet fold motor assembly 1

19 JC61-07366A Booklet c-fold blade 1

20 JC90-01396A Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly 1

21 0604-001393 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor 1

22 JC90-01398A Booklet diverter 1

23 JC90-01397A Booklet diverter motor assembly 1

24 0604-001415 Booklet diverter home sensor 1

25 JC32-00020A Booklet exit sensor 1

26 6GW51-60001 Booklet maker PCA 1

27 JC90-01478B Booklet front cover 1

3550 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (3 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer booklet finisher.

Figure 7-41 Booklet finisher (3 of 5)

11

10

43 22

47
42 9

17
18
46
45

48

18 19

12 13

44

23 20
25
36

24 21

Table 7-41 Booklet finisher (3 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

9 8GS05-60104 Entrance motor assembly 1

10 Y1G10-67901 Punch unit 2-3 hole 1

10 Y1G11-67901 Punch unit 2-4 hole 1

10 Y1G12-67901 Punch unit Swedish hole 1

11 JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly 1

12 JC90-01458A Tray diverter cam 1

13 0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor 1

17 8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly 1

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (3 of 5) 3551

 Table 7-41 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

18 JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor 1

19 JC39-02309A Front door switch 1

20 JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly 1

21 0604-001393 Main exit cam home sensor 1

22 JC90-01480A Paddle 1

23 JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly 1

24 0604-001393 Paddle home sensor 1

25 JC90-01467A End fence motor assembly 1

36 0604-001415 Manual staple senor 1

42 JC90-01415B Main output tray motor drive assembly 1

43 0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor 1

44 JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch 1

45 JC90-01414A Paper holding motor drive assembly 1

46 JC93-01152A Buffer motor 1

47 JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid assembly 1

48 6GW55-60001 Main PCA 1

3552 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (4 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer booklet finisher.

Figure 7-42 Booklet finisher (4 of 5)

15
2
3
5

16

14 1

Table 7-42 Booklet finisher (4 of 4)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QK09-60110 Bridge unit 1

2 0604-001393 Bridge door sensor 1

3 JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor 1

4 0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor 1

5 3SJ19-80501 Bridge motor 1

14 JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly 1

15 JC32-00020A Main exit sensor 1

16 0604-001393 Top exit sensor 1

17 8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly 1

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (4 of 5) 3553

 Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (5 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer booklet finisher.

Figure 7-43 Booklet finisher (5 of 5)

29

27 26

28 6
37 34
44
33
30
32

39 38 7 35
31

8
40
41

Table 7-43 Booklet finisher (5 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

6 JC82-00901A Front tamper 1

7 0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor 1

8 JC93-01001A Front tamper motor 1

26 JC82-00898A Rear tamper 1

27 0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor 1

28 JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor 1

29 JC82-00894A Staple unit 1

30 JC81-09882B Staple cartridge 1

31 0604-001393 Staple front sensor 1

32 0604-001393 Staple mid-front sensor 1

33 0604-001393 Staple mid-rear sensor 1

34 0604-001393 Staple rear sensor 1

3554 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-43 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

35 JC31-00163A Staple position motor 1

37 JC90-01802A Ejector unit 1

38 JC32-00020A Ejector sensor 1

39 0604-001415 Ejector1 home sensor 1

40 0604-001415 Ejector1 motor sensor 1

41 0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor 1

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (5 of 5) 3555

 Print Quality Diagnostics output devices
Learn about the Print Quality Diagnostics finisher parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher with Print Quality Diagnostics
Parts diagram and parts list for the Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher with Print Quality
Diagnostics.

Figure 7-44 Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics
3

1 2

Table 7-44 Print Quality Diagnostics

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 63C82-70001 Stapler/Stacker finisher with Print Quality 1

Diagnostic

2 63C81-70001 Booklet finisher with Print Quality Diagnostic 1

3 63C80-60109 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 1

3556 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer Print Quality Diagnostics.

Figure 7-45 Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics

Table 7-45 Print Quality Diagnostics

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 63C82-67027 Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics 1

2 63C80-60109 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 1

3 63C82-60117 Exit Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 1

Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics 3557

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Tray 2 pickup drive assembly JC93-01663A Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

200sh ADF 5QJ90-67011 ISA on page 3510

200sh ENT ADF PCA 5QJ90-67013 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

300sh ADF PCA Z9Y05-60004 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

3513

300sh flow ADF (does not include white backing or suspension 5QJ90-61042 ISA on page 3510
clips)

A3 White Backing Kit 5QK08-67005 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

ADF Blue CMF panel 5QJ90-40056 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

ADF Blue CMF panel 5QJ90-40056 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3515

ADF FFC cable to SSA 5QJ90-67009 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

ADF FFC cable to SSA Z9Y05-50002 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

3513

ADF Gray CMF panel 5QJ90-40108 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

ADF Gray CMF panel 5QJ90-40108 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3515

ADF Green CMF panel 5QJ90-40110 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

ADF Green CMF panel 5QJ90-40110 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3515

ADF Power cable 5QJ90-67010 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

ADF Power cable Z9Y05-50003 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

3513

ADF Purple CMF panel 5QJ90-40112 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

ADF Purple CMF panel 5QJ90-40112 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3515

ADF Red CMF panel 5QJ90-40109 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

ADF Red CMF panel 5QJ90-40109 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3515

ADF Yellow CMF panel 5QJ90-40111 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

ADF Yellow CMF panel 5QJ90-40111 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3515

ADF front cover 5QJ90-40049 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

ADF input tray Z9Y05-60032 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

3513

3558 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

ADF rear cover 5QJ90-40041 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

ADF roller kit 5851-7202 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

ADF roller kit 5RC00-67001 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

3513

ADF top cover 5QJ90-40054 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

Accelerator(Optional) 6HN30-67001 PCA on page 3508

Actuator home paddle JC66-04201A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Black developer powder kit 5PN72-67001 Developer on page 3501

Black developer unit 5PN72-67002 Developer on page 3501

Black drum unit W9077-67001 Drum on page 3502

Black reservoir unit 5QK03-60129 Reservoir on page 3497

Black toner dispense motor SS216-80501 Toner on page 3495

Booklet blade JC93-01163A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet blade home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet blade motor assembly JC90-01435A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet c-fold blade JC61-07366A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet c-fold blade home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly JC90-01396A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet diverter JC90-01398A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet diverter home sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet diverter motor assembly JC90-01397A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet end fence JC90-01432A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet end fence home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Alphabetical parts list 3559

 Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly JC90-01425A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet finisher 6GW51-67001 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Booklet finisher with Print Quality Diagnostic 63C81-70001 Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3556

Booklet fold motor assembly JC90-01436A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet front cover JC90-01478B Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet maker PCA 6GW51-60001 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet maker unit 5QK09-60104 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Booklet output tray 8GS05-60126 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Booklet output tray sensor JC82-01039A Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Booklet paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet paddle motor assembly JC90-01430A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet presser home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet stapler 8GS05-60126 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-08274A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet tamper JC90-01431A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

3560 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

Bridge motor 3SJ19-80501 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

Bridge motor 3SJ19-80501 Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

Bridge unit 5QK09-60110 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

Bridge unit 5QK09-60110 Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 63C80-60109 Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3556

Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 63C80-60109 Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3557

Buffer motor JC93-01152A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Buffer motor JC93-01152A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Buffer solenoid assembly JC90-01675A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Buffer solenoid assembly JC90-01675A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

CPR sensor JC32-00014A CPR on page 3505

CPR sensor JC32-00014A CPR on page 3505

CPR sensor JC32-00014A CPR on page 3505

CPR unit 5QK03-60102 CPR on page 3505

Card reader rotation adapter kit 63C82-67029 Covers on page 3485

Caster JC61-07452A Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Caster JC61-07452A Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Caster cover 8GS05-40018 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Caster cover 8GS05-40018 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Caster fix nut JC61-07444A Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Caster fix nut JC61-07444A Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Alphabetical parts list 3561

 Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Caster wheel 6109-001138 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Caster wheel 6109-001138 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm 8 in 3SJ15-60101 PCA on page 3508

Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm 10.1 in 2nd 5QK42-60104 PCA on page 3508

Controller cover 6ER04-61005 Covers on page 3485

Cover Rear 3SJ11-40008 ISA on page 3510

Cradle-HDD 5851-7753 PCA on page 3508

Cradle-Riser Card 5851-7754 PCA on page 3508

Cyan developer powder kit 5PN75-67001 Developer on page 3501

Cyan developer unit 5PN75-67002 Developer on page 3501

Cyan drum unit W9078-67001 Drum on page 3502

Cyan reservoir unit 5QK03-60130 Reservoir on page 3497

Cyan toner cartridge -Standard yield W9161-67004 Toner on page 3495

Cyan toner dispense motor SS216-80501 Toner on page 3495

DCF 6GW47-67001 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

DCF Dpt_Door open switch sensor and harness JC39-02268A DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

DCF feed drive assembly JC93-01135A DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

DCF left cover 5QK08-40008 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

DCF rear cover 5QK08-40007 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

DCF right cover 5QK08-40006 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

DCF right door 5QK08-61004 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Damper module 5QJ90-67006 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

Damper module Z9Y05-60016 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

3513

Discrete power cable 3SJ11-50006 Tarot HS platen on page 3517

Drive sub-motor step JC93-00802B Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Drive-motor step JC31-00189A Tray 1 on page 3488

Drive-motor step JC31-00189A Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Drive-motor step JC31-00189A Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

Drive-motor step JC93-00336A Exit unit on page 3492

Drive-motor step JC93-00336A Exit unit on page 3492

Drive-motor step JC93-00999A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

3562 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Drive-motor step JC93-01001A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Drive-motor step JC93-01001A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Drive-motor step JC93-01001A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Drive-motor step JC93-01083A Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Drive-motor step JC93-01083A DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Drive-motor step JC93-01083A sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

Drive-motor step JC93-01084A fuser on page 3506

Drive-motor step JC93-01085A Duplex on page 3494

Drive-motor step JC93-01659A Reservoir on page 3497

Drive-motor step JC93-01659A Reservoir on page 3497

Drum and developer drive assembly JC93-01661A Developer on page 3501

Drum and developer drive assembly JC93-01661A Drum on page 3502

Drum and developer drive assembly JC93-01661A ITB on page 3504

Dual Fax Card (BBU)(Optional) 7ZA07-67001 PCA on page 3508

Dual Fax Card (WW)(Optional) 5QK14-67001 PCA on page 3508

Duplex assembly JC95-02250A Duplex on page 3494

Echo PCA (Not orderable and not used in printer.) T3U64-60001 (Not PCA on page 3508
orderable and not used in
printer.)

Ejector SS456-61001 Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Ejector sensor JC32-00020A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Ejector sensor JC32-00020A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Ejector unit JC90-01802A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Ejector unit JC90-01802A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001415 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Ejector1 motor sensor 0604-001415 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Ejector1 motor sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Alphabetical parts list 3563

 Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001415 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Electric clutch JC33-00037A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Electric clutch JC47-00037A Tray 1 on page 3488

End fence motor assembly JC90-01467A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

End fence motor assembly JC90-01467A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Entrance motor assembly 8GS05-60104 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Entrance motor assembly 8GS05-60104 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Entrance motor assy 5QK09-60128 Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Entrance motor timing belt 6602-003644 Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Entrance roller JC66-04243A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Exit Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 63C82-60117 Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3557

Exit bin full JC90-01546A Inner finisher (1 of 5) on page

3531

Exit cover stacker 6ER04-61004 Covers on page 3485

Exit fan1, 2, 3, 4 JC31-00154A Sensor and fan on page 3507

Exit motor assembly 8GS05-60106 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Exit motor assembly 8GS05-60106 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

Exit motor assembly 8GS05-60106 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Exit motor assembly 8GS05-60106 Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

Exit motor assy JC90-01331A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Exit rear cover 6ER04-40028 Covers on page 3485

Exit roller assy JC90-01330A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Exit sensor actuator JC66-04199A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Exit stack guide JC90-01865A Exit unit on page 3492

3564 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Exit unit JC90-01856A Exit unit on page 3492

Fan JC31-00154A Sensor and fan on page 3507

Fan JC31-00198A Sensor and fan on page 3507

Feed drive assembly JC93-01664A Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Finisher mount bracket JC90-01442A Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Finisher mount bracket JC90-01442A Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Frame sub-sensor paper size RU JC93-01408A Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Frame sub-sensor paper size RU JC93-01408A Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Frame sub-sensor paper size RU JC93-01408A DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Frame sub-sensor paper size RU JC93-01408A DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Front cover 5QK09-40019 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Front cover 5QK09-40019 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Front cover - Blue CMF Panel 6ER04-40003 Covers on page 3485

Front cover - Gray CMF Panel 6ER04-40054 Covers on page 3485

Front cover - Green CMF Panel 6ER04-40056 Covers on page 3485

Front cover - Purple CMF Panel 6ER04-40058 Covers on page 3485

Front cover - Red CMF Panel 6ER04-40055 Covers on page 3485

Front cover - Yellow CMF Panel 6ER04-40057 Covers on page 3485

Front cover assembly 6ER04-61001 Covers on page 3485

Front cover assy 5QK09-60123 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Front door 5QK09-60106 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Front door 5QK09-60106 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Front door open switch JC93-00466A Sensor and fan on page 3507

Front door switch JC39-02309A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Front door switch JC39-02309A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Front fan assembly JC93-01725A Sensor and fan on page 3507

Front lower cover 5QK09-40020 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Front lower cover 5QK09-40020 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Alphabetical parts list 3565

 Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Front lower cover 6ER04-40030 Covers on page 3485

Front lower left cover 5QK09-40047 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Front lower left cover 5QK09-40047 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Front lower right cover 5QK09-40048 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Front lower right cover 5QK09-40048 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Front paper support JC90-01310A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Front tamper JC82-00899A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Front tamper JC82-00901A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Front tamper JC82-00901A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Front tamper motor JC93-01001A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Front tamper motor JC93-01001A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Fuser and exit drive assembly JC93-01850A Exit unit on page 3492

Fuser and exit drive assembly JC93-01850A fuser on page 3506

Fuser drive board (FDB), 220V JC44-00236C PCA on page 3508

Fuser fan duct assembly 5QK03-40103 Sensor and fan on page 3507

Fuser unit -100V 5PN53-67001 fuser on page 3506

Fuser unit -110V 5PN76-67001 fuser on page 3506

Fuser unit -220V 5PN77-67001 fuser on page 3506

Gear rack pinion JC66-04218A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Guide - adjust JC61-04871A DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Guide - adjust JC61-04871A HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

Guide rail 6102-003354 Inner finisher (1 of 5) on page

3531

3566 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Guide rail HV frame assembly 5QK03-64004 ITB on page 3504

HCI 6GW57-67001 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

HCI Dpt_Dooropen switch sensor and harness JC39-02279A HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

HCI cassette 5QK08-61014 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

HCI cassette 5QK08-61014 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

HCI feed motor JC93-01114A HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

HCI front Blue CMF panel 5QK08-40016 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

HCI front Gray CMF panel 8GR90-40029 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

HCI front Green CMF panel 8GR90-40039 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

HCI front Purple CMF panel 8GR90-40041 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

HCI front Red CMF panel 8GR90-40038 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

HCI front Yellow CMF panel 8GR90-40040 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

HCI left cover 5QK08-40008 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

HCI pickup assembly 5QK08-61013 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

HCI pickup motor JC93-01115A HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

HCI rear cover 5QK08-40007 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

HCI right cover 5QK08-40006 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

HCI right door 5QK08-61023 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

HCI roller kit 5PN66-67001 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

HCI shift plate JC81-07481B HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

HIP cover 6EQ94-40032 Covers on page 3485

HP LaserJet 180ipm 200 sheet DADF high speed Scanner 3SJ32-60102 ISA on page 3510

HP LaserJet 300ipm 300 sheet Flow DADF high speed Scanner 3SJ32-60101 ISA on page 3510

Hard disk 500GB SED 933853-010 PCA on page 3508

Harness - cover open JC39-01610A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Harness - cover open JC39-01610A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) JC44-00240C PCA on page 3508

Hinge Kit 5QJ90-67004 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

Hole 2/3 punch (optional) 155P7-67001 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Hole 2/4 punch (optional) 155P8-67001 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

ITB JC93-01691A ITB on page 3504

Alphabetical parts list 3567

 Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

ITB and ITB cleaning unit kit 5PN78-67001 ITB on page 3504

ITB cleaning unit 5PN79-67001 ITB on page 3504

ITB engage motor JC31-00110B ITB on page 3504

ITB engage motor assembly JC93-01068A ITB on page 3504

Inner Finisher 6GW49-67002 Inner finisher (1 of 5) on page

3531

Inner cover 6ER04-40048 Covers on page 3485

Inner finisher PCA 6GW49-60001 Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Island of Data (IOD) PCA 3SJ06-60001 PCA on page 3508

Job separator (Optional) 5QK03-61008 Exit unit on page 3492

Keyboard (drawer type) Assy – E8 series UK English 63C82-67005 PCA on page 3508

Keyboard (drawer type) Assy – E8 series US English 63C82-67003 PCA on page 3508

Keyboard (fold type) Assy-UK English JC93-01743A PCA on page 3508

Keyboard (fold type) Assy-US English JC93-01742A PCA on page 3508

Keyboard overlay kit (ES, PT) 5851-6023 PCA on page 3508

Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, RU, DE,ES,UK Kybd) 5851-6019 PCA on page 3508

Keyboard overlay kit (FR-CN, ES-LA, ES,US Kybd) 5851-6020 PCA on page 3508

Keyboard overlay kit (FR-SW, DE-SW, DA,UK Kybd) 5851-6021 PCA on page 3508

Keyboard overlay kit (JA-KG, JA-KT) 5851-6024 PCA on page 3508

Keyboard overlay kit (ZHTW, ZHCN) 5851-6022 PCA on page 3508

Kit-Screws c-clips e-clips kit X3A92-67924 Covers on page 3485

Knock-up plate assembly 6GW48-60003 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

LSU fan assembly JC93-01019A Sensor and fan on page 3507

LVPS FDB fan assembly JC93-01795A Sensor and fan on page 3507

Laser scanner unit (LSU) JC97-05149A Laser scanner unit on page

3500

Left cable guide JC61-08699A Drum on page 3502

Left cover 6ER04-40049 Covers on page 3485

Left cover assy 8GS05-60113 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Left lower cover 8GS05-60122 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Left lower cover (Booklet) 8GS05-60124 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Left top cover JC63-04862B Covers on page 3485

3568 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Left upper cover 8GS05-60118 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Left upper cover 8GS05-60118 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Link door 1st front JC66-04279A sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

Link door 1st rear JC66-04279A sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

Link door 2nd front JC66-04278A sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

Link door 2nd rear JC66-04277A sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

Link holder front JC61-06567A sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

Link holder rear JC61-06568A sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

Lock release handle JC66-04233A Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Loop actuator JC66-04423A Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 110V JC44-00149C PCA on page 3508

Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 220V JC44-00150C PCA on page 3508

Magenta developer powder kit 5PN74-67001 Developer on page 3501

Magenta developer unit 5PN74-67002 Developer on page 3501

Magenta drum unit W9078-67001 Drum on page 3502

Magenta reservoir unit 5QK03-60130 Reservoir on page 3497

Magenta toner cartridge -High yield W9173-67007 Toner on page 3495

Magenta toner cartridge -Standard yield W9163-67004 Toner on page 3495

Magenta toner dispense motor SS216-80501 Toner on page 3495

Main PCA 6GW55-60001 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Main PCA 6GW55-60001 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Main PCA (Formatter) 6CF14-67001 PCA on page 3508

Main exit cam home sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Main exit cam home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Main exit cam motor assembly JC90-01453A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Main exit cam motor assembly JC90-01453A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Main exit sensor JC32-00020A Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

Main exit sensor JC32-00020A Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

Alphabetical parts list 3569

 Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Main output tray 5QK09-40028 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Main output tray 5QK09-40028 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Main output tray lower limit sensor 0604-001415 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Main output tray lower limit sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page
3547

Main output tray motor drive assembly JC90-01415B Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Main output tray motor drive assembly JC90-01415B Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page
3551

Main output tray motor sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Main output tray motor sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Main output tray top of stack sensor JC82-01039A Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Main output tray top of stack sensor JC82-01039A Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page
3547

Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page
3551

Main paddle JC90-01327A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Main paddle kit JC82-01038A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Manual staple senor 0604-001415 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Manual staple senor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Middle cover assy 5QK09-60124 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Middle left cover 6ER04-40036 Covers on page 3485

Middle roller JC66-04243A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Middle upper cover 6ER04-40026 Covers on page 3485

Motor BLDC JC31-00123B Developer on page 3501

Motor BLDC JC31-00123B Developer on page 3501

Motor BLDC JC31-00123C Drum on page 3502

Motor BLDC JC31-00123C Drum on page 3502

Motor BLDC JC31-00123C Drum on page 3502

3570 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Motor BLDC JC31-00123C Drum on page 3502

Motor BLDC JC31-00123C ITB on page 3504

Motor BLDC JC31-00144G Exit unit on page 3492

Motor BLDC JC31-00144G fuser on page 3506

Motor DC JC31-00078A CPR on page 3505

Motor DC JC31-00178B Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Motor circuit step JC31-00110C Toner collection unit on page

3498

Motor circuit step JC31-00110C Toner collection unit on page

3498

Motor, geared JC31-00109A HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Motor, geared JC31-00109A sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

Motor, geared JC31-00125A HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Motor, step JC31-00163A sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

Motor, step JC31-00169B Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Motor, step JC31-00169B Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Motor, step JC31-00177A DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

OPC CRUM module assembly JC93-01275A Drum on page 3502

Outer environment sensor assembly 5QJ90-40002 Sensor and fan on page 3507

Output tray assy 5QK09-60118 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Output tray lower limit switch assy JC90-01320A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page
3534

Output tray motor assy JC90-01334B Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Output tray top of stack sensor kit JC82-01039A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page
3534

PBA-Shift tray level JC92-02792A HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

PCA -power key 3SJ33-60007 Covers on page 3485

PCA -power key 3SJ33-60007 PCA on page 3508

PCA cover 5QK09-40004 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

PCA-DCF Department 6GW47-60001 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

PCA-HCI Department 6GW57-60001 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

PCA-sHCI Department 6GW56-60001 sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

Alphabetical parts list 3571

 Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Paddle JC90-01480A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Paddle JC90-01480A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Paper dust holder assembly JC93-01026B Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

Paper gate JC81-07478B HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Paper holding actuator JC90-01313A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Paper holding home sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Paper holding home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Paper holding kit JC90-01314A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Paper holding motor drive assembly JC90-01414A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Paper holding motor drive assembly JC90-01414A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Paper sensor 0960-5271 Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

Paper support motor assy JC90-01312A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

3572 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Exit unit on page 3492

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Exit unit on page 3492

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Exit unit on page 3492

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Exit unit on page 3492

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Duplex on page 3494

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Toner on page 3495

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Toner on page 3495

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Toner on page 3495

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Toner on page 3495

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Toner collection unit on page

3498

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Toner collection unit on page

3498

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Toner collection unit on page

3498

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Toner collection unit on page

3498

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Drum on page 3502

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Drum on page 3502

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Drum on page 3502

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Drum on page 3502

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 ITB on page 3504

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 CPR on page 3505

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 fuser on page 3506

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Tarot HS platen on page 3517

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Alphabetical parts list 3573

 Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Photo interrupter 0604-001415 Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Photo interrupter 0604-01490 Tray 1 on page 3488

Photo interrupter 0604-01490 Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Photo interrupter 0604-01490 Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Photo interrupter 0604-01490 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Photo interrupter 0604-01490 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Photo interrupter 0604-01490 sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

Photo interrupter 3SJ00-60110 Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

3574 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Photo interrupter 3SJ00-60110 Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Power key 6EQ94-40029 Covers on page 3485

Punch cover 5QK09-40030 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Punch cover 5QK09-40030 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Punch cover assembly 8GS05-60114 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Punch unit 2-3 hole Y1G10-67901 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Punch unit 2-3 hole Y1G10-67901 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Punch unit 2-4 hole Y1G11-67901 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Punch unit 2-4 hole Y1G11-67901 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Punch unit Swedish hole Y1G12-67901 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Punch unit Swedish hole Y1G12-67901 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Rear HV frame assembly JC93-01024A Developer on page 3501

Rear cover 5QK09-40021 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Rear cover 5QK09-40021 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Rear cover -base 5QK09-40018 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Rear cover -punch 5QK09-40037 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Rear joint PCA JC92-02780A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

Rear lower cover 6ER04-40019 Covers on page 3485

Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Rear paper support JC90-01311A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Rear tamper JC82-00898A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Rear tamper JC82-00898A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Alphabetical parts list 3575

 Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Rear tamper JC82-00900A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Rear upper cover 6ER04-40008 Covers on page 3485

Registration drive assembly JC93-01665A Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

Registration unit 8GS05-60128 Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

Reverse roller JC93-01726A sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

Right cable guide JC61-08700A Drum on page 3502

Right door assembly JC95-02247A Covers on page 3485

Right door assembly JC95-02247A Tray 1 on page 3488

Right door assembly JC95-02247A Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

Right door assembly JC95-02247A Duplex on page 3494

Right door exit assembly JC95-02249A Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

Right door front damper JC66-01425A Tray 1 on page 3488

Right door front damper bracket JC61-08935A Tray 1 on page 3488

Right door front link JC66-04398A Tray 1 on page 3488

Right door open switch holder assy JC90-01385A DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Right door open switch holder assy JC90-01385A HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Right door sHCI dummy cover JC63-04918B Covers on page 3485

Right front cover 6ER04-40005 Covers on page 3485

Right middle cover 6ER04-40025 Covers on page 3485

Right middle cover assembly 6ER04-61006 Covers on page 3485

Right rear cover 6ER04-61003 Covers on page 3485

Right upper cover 5QK09-60109 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Right upper cover 5QK09-60109 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Right upper cover 6ER04-40021 Covers on page 3485

3576 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Riser for HDD 3SJ01-60001 PCA on page 3508

Riser for HDD, USB ports, Accelerator 3SJ02-60001 PCA on page 3508

Rivet-Echo PCA (Not orderable and not used in printer.) 6ER04-40034 (Not PCA on page 3508
orderable and not used in
printer.)

Rivet-HDD 6ER04-40035 PCA on page 3508

SVC-A3 White Backing Kit 5QK08-67005SVC-A3 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

White Backing Kit 3513

SVC-Flat Cable, Tarot SCB 50pin 5QK08-67011 Tarot HS platen on page 3517

SVC-Flat Cable, Tarot SCB 68pin 5QK08-67012 Tarot HS platen on page 3517

SVC-Hinge Kit (right, middle, left) 5QK08-67003 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page
3513

SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit 4XN67-67001 PCA on page 3508

Shaft hinge - door JC66-04767A Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Shaft hinge - door JC66-04767A Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Single Fax Card (BBU)(Optional) 7ZA09-67001 PCA on page 3508

Single Fax Card (WW)(Optional) 7ZA08-67001 PCA on page 3508

Solenoid, lifting JC33-00031B Exit unit on page 3492

Solenoid, lifting JC33-00031B HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics 63C82-67027 Print Quality Diagnostics on

page 3557

Staple cartridge 6GW49-40001 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Staple cartridge JC81-09882B Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Staple cartridge JC81-09882B Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Staple front sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Staple front sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Staple mid-front sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Staple mid-front sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Staple mid-rear sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Staple mid-rear sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Alphabetical parts list 3577

 Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Staple position motor JC31-00163A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Staple position motor JC31-00163A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Staple rear sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Staple rear sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Staple unit JC82-00894A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Staple unit JC82-00894A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Stapler assembly 6GW49-60003 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Stapler/Stacker finisher 6GW55-67001 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Stapler/Stacker finisher with Print Quality Diagnostic 63C82-70001 Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3556

Sub paddle assy JC90-01336A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

Swedish punch (optional) 155P9-67001 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Switch JC93-01467A Sensor and fan on page 3507

TCU cover - Blue CMF Panel 5QK03-40044 Covers on page 3485

TCU cover - Gray CMF Panel 6ER04-40059 Covers on page 3485

TCU cover - Green CMF Panel 6ER04-40061 Covers on page 3485

TCU cover - Purple CMF Panel 6ER04-40063 Covers on page 3485

TCU cover - Red CMF Panel 6ER04-40060 Covers on page 3485

TCU cover - Yellow CMF Panel 6ER04-40062 Covers on page 3485

TCU cover assembly 6ER04-40050 Covers on page 3485

TPM 3SJ03-60001(Not PCA on page 3508

Orderable)

Tarot HS platen 3SJ32-60103 ISA on page 3510

Tarot HS platen PCA 3SJ32-60104 Tarot HS platen on page 3517

Thermistor 1404-001417 Sensor and fan on page 3507

Tie stopper JC61-04626A Covers on page 3485

Toner and reservoir drive assembly JC93-01666A Toner on page 3495

Toner and reservoir drive assembly JC93-01666A Reservoir on page 3497

Toner collection duct unit JC96-13015A Toner collection unit on page

3498

3578 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Toner collection duct unit drive assembly JC93-01669A Toner collection unit on page
3498

Toner collection unit 6SB85-67001 Toner collection unit on page

3498

Toner collection unit drive assembly JC93-01668A Toner collection unit on page
3498

Toner collection unit full sensor JC92-02471A Toner collection unit on page
3498

Top cover 5QK09-60108 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Top cover 5QK09-60108 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Top cover assy 5QK09-60125 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

Top door 5QK09-60107 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Top door 5QK09-60107 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Top exit sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

Top exit sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

Top output tray 5QK09-40027 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Top output tray 5QK09-40027 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Top output tray paper full sensor JC82-01039A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Top output tray paper full sensor JC82-01039A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page
3551

Tray 1 roller kit 5RC03-67001 Tray 1 on page 3488

Tray 1 unit JC90-01844A Tray 1 on page 3488

Tray 2 JC90-01853A Covers on page 3485

Tray 2 JC90-01853A Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Tray 2 cover - Blue CMF panel 5QK03-40027 Covers on page 3485

Alphabetical parts list 3579

 Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Tray 2 cover - Gray CMF panel 5QK03-40088 Covers on page 3485

Tray 2 cover - Green CMF panel 5QK03-40074 Covers on page 3485

Tray 2 cover - Purple CMF panel 5QK03-40076 Covers on page 3485

Tray 2 cover - Red CMF panel 5QK03-40073 Covers on page 3485

Tray 2 cover - Yellow CMF panel 5QK03-40075 Covers on page 3485

Tray 2 pickup assembly JC93-01694A Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Tray 2, 3 roller kit 5PN66-67001 Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Tray 3 5QK09-60121 Covers on page 3485

Tray 3 5QK09-60121 Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Tray 3 cover - Blue CMF panel 5QK09-40058 Covers on page 3485

Tray 3 cover - Gray CMF panel 5QK09-40071 Covers on page 3485

Tray 3 cover - Green CMF panel 5QK09-40075 Covers on page 3485

Tray 3 cover - Purple CMF panel 5QK09-40079 Covers on page 3485

Tray 3 cover - Red CMF panel 5QK09-40073 Covers on page 3485

Tray 3 cover - Yellow CMF panel 5QK09-40077 Covers on page 3485

Tray 3 pickup assembly JC93-01695A Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Tray 3 pickup drive assembly JC93-01663A Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Tray 4 Blue CMF panel 5QK08-40011 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 4 Gray CMF panel 8GR90-40027 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 4 Green CMF panel 8GR90-40031 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 4 Purple CMF panel 8GR90-40033 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 4 Red CMF panel 8GR90-40030 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 4 Yellow CMF panel 8GR90-40032 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 4 cassette 5QK08-61007 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 4 cassette 5QK08-61007 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Tray 4 pickup assembly 5QK08-61009 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Tray 4 pickup drive assembly JC93-01663A DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Tray 4, 5 roller kit 5PN66-67001 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Tray 5 Blue CMF panel 5QK08-40012 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 5 Gray CMF panel 8GR90-40028 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 5 Green CMF panel 8GR90-40035 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 5 Purple CMF panel 8GR90-40037 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 5 Red CMF panel 8GR90-40034 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 5 Yellow CMF panel 8GR90-40036 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

3580 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Tray 5 cassette 5QK08-61005 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray 5 cassette 5QK08-61005 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Tray 5 pickup assembly 5QK08-61010 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Tray 5 pickup drive assembly JC93-01663A DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Tray extension 5QK09-40029 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

Tray extension 5QK09-40029 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Tray heater 110V Y1G22-67901 Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Tray heater 110V Y1G22-67901 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Tray heater 110V Y1G22-67901 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Tray heater 220V Y1G22-67902 Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Tray heater 220V Y1G22-67902 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Tray heater 220V Y1G22-67902 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Tray sub-auto closing unit JC90-01677A DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Tray sub-auto closing unit JC93-01370A Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Tray sub-auto closing unit JC93-01382A HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

USB Hub PCA 3SJ04-60002 PCA on page 3508

Yellow developer powder kit 5PN73-67001 Developer on page 3501

Yellow developer unit 5PN73-67002 Developer on page 3501

Yellow drum unit W9078-67001 Drum on page 3502

Yellow reservoir unit 5QK03-60130 Reservoir on page 3497

Yellow toner cartridge -High yield W9172-67007 Toner on page 3495

Yellow toner cartridge -Standard yield W9162-67004 Toner on page 3495

Yellow toner dispense motor SS216-80501 Toner on page 3495

sHCI 6GW56-67001 sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

sHCI door open sensor JC39-02346A sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

sHCI front cover 5QK08-40026 sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

sHCI front top cover 5QK08-40027 sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

Alphabetical parts list 3581

 Table 7-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

sHCI harness cover 5QK08-40018 sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

sHCI left cover 5QK08-40028 sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

sHCI lift drive assembly sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

sHCI pickup assembly 5QJ98-60014 sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

sHCI pickup cover 5QK08-40019 sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

sHCI pickup/feed drive assembly JC93-01112A sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

sHCI rear cover 5QK08-40025 sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

sHCI rear top cover 5QK08-40024 sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

sHCI right cover 5QK08-40020 sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

sHCI top cover 5QK08-61018 sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

sHCI top cover open switch assembly JC93-01123A sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

3582 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Numerical parts list
Table 7-47 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

sHCI lift drive assembly sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

0604-001381 Photo interrupter DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

0604-001381 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

0604-001393 Booklet blade home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

0604-001393 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

0604-001393 Booklet end fence home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

0604-001393 Booklet paddle home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

0604-001393 Booklet presser home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

0604-001393 Booklet tamper home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

0604-001393 Bridge door sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

0604-001393 Bridge door sensor Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

Numerical parts list 3583

 Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

0604-001393 Main exit cam home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

0604-001393 Main exit cam home sensor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

0604-001393 Paddle home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

0604-001393 Paddle home sensor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Exit unit on page 3492

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Exit unit on page 3492

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Exit unit on page 3492

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Exit unit on page 3492

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Duplex on page 3494

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Toner on page 3495

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Toner on page 3495

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Toner on page 3495

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Toner on page 3495

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Toner collection unit on page

3498

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Toner collection unit on page

3498

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Toner collection unit on page

3498

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Toner collection unit on page

3498

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Drum on page 3502

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Drum on page 3502

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Drum on page 3502

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Drum on page 3502

3584 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter ITB on page 3504

0604-001393 Photo interrupter CPR on page 3505

0604-001393 Photo interrupter fuser on page 3506

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Tarot HS platen on page 3517

0604-001393 Photo interrupter DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

0604-001393 Photo interrupter DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

0604-001393 Photo interrupter sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

0604-001393 Photo interrupter sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

0604-001393 Photo interrupter sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

0604-001393 Photo interrupter sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

0604-001393 Photo interrupter sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

0604-001393 Photo interrupter sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

Numerical parts list 3585

 Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

0604-001393 Staple front sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

0604-001393 Staple front sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

0604-001393 Staple mid-front sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

0604-001393 Staple mid-front sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

0604-001393 Staple mid-rear sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

0604-001393 Staple mid-rear sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

0604-001393 Staple rear sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

0604-001393 Staple rear sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

0604-001393 Top exit sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

0604-001393 Top exit sensor Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

0604-001415 Booklet diverter home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

0604-001415 Booklet entrance sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

0604-001415 Ejector1 home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

0604-001415 Ejector1 home sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

0604-001415 Ejector1 motor sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

0604-001415 Ejector1 motor sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

3586 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page
3547

0604-001415 Manual staple senor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

0604-001415 Manual staple senor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

0604-001415 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

0604-01490 Photo interrupter Tray 1 on page 3488

0604-01490 Photo interrupter Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

0604-01490 Photo interrupter Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

0604-01490 Photo interrupter DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

0604-01490 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

0604-01490 Photo interrupter sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

0960-5271 Paper sensor Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

1404-001417 Thermistor Sensor and fan on page 3507

155P7-67001 Hole 2/3 punch (optional) Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

155P8-67001 Hole 2/4 punch (optional) Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

155P9-67001 Swedish punch (optional) Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

3SJ00-60110 Photo interrupter Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

3SJ00-60110 Photo interrupter Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

3SJ01-60001 Riser for HDD PCA on page 3508

3SJ02-60001 Riser for HDD, USB ports, Accelerator PCA on page 3508

3SJ03-60001(Not TPM PCA on page 3508

Orderable)

3SJ04-60002 USB Hub PCA PCA on page 3508

3SJ06-60001 Island of Data (IOD) PCA PCA on page 3508

Numerical parts list 3587

 Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

3SJ11-40008 Cover Rear ISA on page 3510

3SJ11-50006 Discrete power cable Tarot HS platen on page 3517

3SJ15-60101 Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm 8 in PCA on page 3508

3SJ19-80501 Bridge motor Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

3SJ19-80501 Bridge motor Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

3SJ32-60101 HP LaserJet 300ipm 300 sheet Flow DADF high speed Scanner ISA on page 3510

3SJ32-60102 HP LaserJet 180ipm 200 sheet DADF high speed Scanner ISA on page 3510

3SJ32-60103 Tarot HS platen ISA on page 3510

3SJ32-60104 Tarot HS platen PCA Tarot HS platen on page 3517

3SJ33-60007 PCA -power key Covers on page 3485

3SJ33-60007 PCA -power key PCA on page 3508

4XN67-67001 SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit PCA on page 3508

5851-6019 Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, RU, DE,ES,UK Kybd) PCA on page 3508

5851-6020 Keyboard overlay kit (FR-CN, ES-LA, ES,US Kybd) PCA on page 3508

5851-6021 Keyboard overlay kit (FR-SW, DE-SW, DA,UK Kybd) PCA on page 3508

5851-6022 Keyboard overlay kit (ZHTW, ZHCN) PCA on page 3508

5851-6023 Keyboard overlay kit (ES, PT) PCA on page 3508

5851-6024 Keyboard overlay kit (JA-KG, JA-KT) PCA on page 3508

5851-7202 ADF roller kit 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

5851-7753 Cradle-HDD PCA on page 3508

5851-7754 Cradle-Riser Card PCA on page 3508

5PN53-67001 Fuser unit -100V fuser on page 3506

5PN66-67001 HCI roller kit HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

5PN66-67001 Tray 2, 3 roller kit Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

5PN66-67001 Tray 4, 5 roller kit DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

5PN72-67001 Black developer powder kit Developer on page 3501

5PN72-67002 Black developer unit Developer on page 3501

5PN73-67001 Yellow developer powder kit Developer on page 3501

5PN73-67002 Yellow developer unit Developer on page 3501

5PN74-67001 Magenta developer powder kit Developer on page 3501

5PN74-67002 Magenta developer unit Developer on page 3501

5PN75-67001 Cyan developer powder kit Developer on page 3501

3588 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

5PN75-67002 Cyan developer unit Developer on page 3501

5PN76-67001 Fuser unit -110V fuser on page 3506

5PN77-67001 Fuser unit -220V fuser on page 3506

5PN78-67001 ITB and ITB cleaning unit kit ITB on page 3504

5PN79-67001 ITB cleaning unit ITB on page 3504

5QJ90-40002 Outer environment sensor assembly Sensor and fan on page 3507

5QJ90-40041 ADF rear cover 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

5QJ90-40049 ADF front cover 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

5QJ90-40054 ADF top cover 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

5QJ90-40056 ADF Blue CMF panel 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

5QJ90-40056 ADF Blue CMF panel 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3515

5QJ90-40108 ADF Gray CMF panel 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

5QJ90-40108 ADF Gray CMF panel 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3515

5QJ90-40109 ADF Red CMF panel 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

5QJ90-40109 ADF Red CMF panel 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3515

5QJ90-40110 ADF Green CMF panel 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

5QJ90-40110 ADF Green CMF panel 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3515

5QJ90-40111 ADF Yellow CMF panel 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

5QJ90-40111 ADF Yellow CMF panel 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3515

5QJ90-40112 ADF Purple CMF panel 300sh flow ADF (1 of 2) on page

3512

5QJ90-40112 ADF Purple CMF panel 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3515

5QJ90-61042 300sh flow ADF (does not include white backing or suspension ISA on page 3510
clips)

5QJ90-67004 Hinge Kit 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

5QJ90-67006 Damper module 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

5QJ90-67009 ADF FFC cable to SSA 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

5QJ90-67010 ADF Power cable 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

5QJ90-67011 200sh ADF ISA on page 3510

Numerical parts list 3589

 Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

5QJ90-67013 200sh ENT ADF PCA 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

5QJ98-60014 sHCI pickup assembly sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

5QK03-40027 Tray 2 cover - Blue CMF panel Covers on page 3485

5QK03-40044 TCU cover - Blue CMF Panel Covers on page 3485

5QK03-40073 Tray 2 cover - Red CMF panel Covers on page 3485

5QK03-40074 Tray 2 cover - Green CMF panel Covers on page 3485

5QK03-40075 Tray 2 cover - Yellow CMF panel Covers on page 3485

5QK03-40076 Tray 2 cover - Purple CMF panel Covers on page 3485

5QK03-40088 Tray 2 cover - Gray CMF panel Covers on page 3485

5QK03-40103 Fuser fan duct assembly Sensor and fan on page 3507

5QK03-60102 CPR unit CPR on page 3505

5QK03-60129 Black reservoir unit Reservoir on page 3497

5QK03-60130 Cyan reservoir unit Reservoir on page 3497

5QK03-60130 Magenta reservoir unit Reservoir on page 3497

5QK03-60130 Yellow reservoir unit Reservoir on page 3497

5QK03-61008 Job separator (Optional) Exit unit on page 3492

5QK03-64004 Guide rail HV frame assembly ITB on page 3504

5QK08-40006 DCF right cover DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

5QK08-40006 HCI right cover HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

5QK08-40007 DCF rear cover DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

5QK08-40007 HCI rear cover HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

5QK08-40008 DCF left cover DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

5QK08-40008 HCI left cover HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

5QK08-40011 Tray 4 Blue CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

5QK08-40012 Tray 5 Blue CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

5QK08-40016 HCI front Blue CMF panel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

5QK08-40018 sHCI harness cover sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

5QK08-40019 sHCI pickup cover sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

5QK08-40020 sHCI right cover sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

5QK08-40024 sHCI rear top cover sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

5QK08-40025 sHCI rear cover sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

5QK08-40026 sHCI front cover sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

5QK08-40027 sHCI front top cover sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

5QK08-40028 sHCI left cover sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

3590 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

5QK08-61004 DCF right door DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

5QK08-61005 Tray 5 cassette DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

5QK08-61005 Tray 5 cassette DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

5QK08-61007 Tray 4 cassette DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

5QK08-61007 Tray 4 cassette DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

5QK08-61009 Tray 4 pickup assembly DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

5QK08-61010 Tray 5 pickup assembly DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

5QK08-61013 HCI pickup assembly HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

5QK08-61014 HCI cassette HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

5QK08-61014 HCI cassette HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

5QK08-61018 sHCI top cover sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

5QK08-61023 HCI right door HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

5QK08-67003 SVC-Hinge Kit (right, middle, left) 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page
3513

5QK08-67005 A3 White Backing Kit 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3516

5QK08-67005SVC-A3 SVC-A3 White Backing Kit 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

White Backing Kit 3513

5QK08-67011 SVC-Flat Cable, Tarot SCB 50pin Tarot HS platen on page 3517

5QK08-67012 SVC-Flat Cable, Tarot SCB 68pin Tarot HS platen on page 3517

5QK09-40004 PCA cover Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

5QK09-40018 Rear cover -base Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

5QK09-40019 Front cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-40019 Front cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

5QK09-40020 Front lower cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-40020 Front lower cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

5QK09-40021 Rear cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-40021 Rear cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

5QK09-40027 Top output tray Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-40027 Top output tray Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

Numerical parts list 3591

 Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

5QK09-40028 Main output tray Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-40028 Main output tray Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

5QK09-40029 Tray extension Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-40029 Tray extension Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

5QK09-40030 Punch cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-40030 Punch cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

5QK09-40037 Rear cover -punch Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

5QK09-40047 Front lower left cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-40047 Front lower left cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

5QK09-40048 Front lower right cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-40048 Front lower right cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

5QK09-40058 Tray 3 cover - Blue CMF panel Covers on page 3485

5QK09-40071 Tray 3 cover - Gray CMF panel Covers on page 3485

5QK09-40073 Tray 3 cover - Red CMF panel Covers on page 3485

5QK09-40075 Tray 3 cover - Green CMF panel Covers on page 3485

5QK09-40077 Tray 3 cover - Yellow CMF panel Covers on page 3485

5QK09-40079 Tray 3 cover - Purple CMF panel Covers on page 3485

5QK09-60104 Booklet maker unit Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

5QK09-60106 Front door Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-60106 Front door Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

5QK09-60107 Top door Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-60107 Top door Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

5QK09-60108 Top cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-60108 Top cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

3592 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

5QK09-60109 Right upper cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

5QK09-60109 Right upper cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

5QK09-60110 Bridge unit Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

5QK09-60110 Bridge unit Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

5QK09-60118 Output tray assy Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

5QK09-60121 Tray 3 Covers on page 3485

5QK09-60121 Tray 3 Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

5QK09-60123 Front cover assy Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

5QK09-60124 Middle cover assy Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

5QK09-60125 Top cover assy Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

5QK09-60128 Entrance motor assy Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

5QK14-67001 Dual Fax Card (WW)(Optional) PCA on page 3508

5QK42-60104 Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm 10.1 in 2nd PCA on page 3508

5RC00-67001 ADF roller kit 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

3513

5RC03-67001 Tray 1 roller kit Tray 1 on page 3488

6102-003354 Guide rail Inner finisher (1 of 5) on page

3531

6109-001138 Caster wheel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

6109-001138 Caster wheel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

63C80-60109 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3556

63C80-60109 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3557

63C81-70001 Booklet finisher with Print Quality Diagnostic Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3556

63C82-60117 Exit Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3557

63C82-67003 Keyboard (drawer type) Assy – E8 series US English PCA on page 3508

63C82-67005 Keyboard (drawer type) Assy – E8 series UK English PCA on page 3508

63C82-67027 Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics Print Quality Diagnostics on

page 3557

63C82-67029 Card reader rotation adapter kit Covers on page 3485

Numerical parts list 3593

 Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

63C82-70001 Stapler/Stacker finisher with Print Quality Diagnostic Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3556

6602-003644 Entrance motor timing belt Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

6CF14-67001 Main PCA (Formatter) PCA on page 3508

6EQ94-40029 Power key Covers on page 3485

6EQ94-40032 HIP cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40003 Front cover - Blue CMF Panel Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40005 Right front cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40008 Rear upper cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40019 Rear lower cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40021 Right upper cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40025 Right middle cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40026 Middle upper cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40028 Exit rear cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40030 Front lower cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40034 (Not Rivet-Echo PCA (Not orderable and not used in printer.) PCA on page 3508
orderable and not used in
printer.)

6ER04-40035 Rivet-HDD PCA on page 3508

6ER04-40036 Middle left cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40048 Inner cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40049 Left cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40050 TCU cover assembly Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40054 Front cover - Gray CMF Panel Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40055 Front cover - Red CMF Panel Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40056 Front cover - Green CMF Panel Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40057 Front cover - Yellow CMF Panel Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40058 Front cover - Purple CMF Panel Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40059 TCU cover - Gray CMF Panel Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40060 TCU cover - Red CMF Panel Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40061 TCU cover - Green CMF Panel Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40062 TCU cover - Yellow CMF Panel Covers on page 3485

6ER04-40063 TCU cover - Purple CMF Panel Covers on page 3485

6ER04-61001 Front cover assembly Covers on page 3485

6ER04-61003 Right rear cover Covers on page 3485

3594 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

6ER04-61004 Exit cover stacker Covers on page 3485

6ER04-61005 Controller cover Covers on page 3485

6ER04-61006 Right middle cover assembly Covers on page 3485

6GW47-60001 PCA-DCF Department DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

6GW47-67001 DCF DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

6GW48-60003 Knock-up plate assembly HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

6GW49-40001 Staple cartridge Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

6GW49-60001 Inner finisher PCA Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

6GW49-60003 Stapler assembly Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

6GW49-67002 Inner Finisher Inner finisher (1 of 5) on page

3531

6GW51-60001 Booklet maker PCA Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

6GW51-67001 Booklet finisher Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

6GW55-60001 Main PCA Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

6GW55-60001 Main PCA Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

6GW55-67001 Stapler/Stacker finisher Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

6GW56-60001 PCA-sHCI Department sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

6GW56-67001 sHCI sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

6GW57-60001 PCA-HCI Department HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

6GW57-67001 HCI HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

6HN30-67001 Accelerator(Optional) PCA on page 3508

6SB85-67001 Toner collection unit Toner collection unit on page

3498

7ZA07-67001 Dual Fax Card (BBU)(Optional) PCA on page 3508

7ZA08-67001 Single Fax Card (WW)(Optional) PCA on page 3508

7ZA09-67001 Single Fax Card (BBU)(Optional) PCA on page 3508

8GR90-40027 Tray 4 Gray CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

8GR90-40028 Tray 5 Gray CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

8GR90-40029 HCI front Gray CMF panel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

8GR90-40030 Tray 4 Red CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

8GR90-40031 Tray 4 Green CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

Numerical parts list 3595

 Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

8GR90-40032 Tray 4 Yellow CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

8GR90-40033 Tray 4 Purple CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

8GR90-40034 Tray 5 Red CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

8GR90-40035 Tray 5 Green CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

8GR90-40036 Tray 5 Yellow CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

8GR90-40037 Tray 5 Purple CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

8GR90-40038 HCI front Red CMF panel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

8GR90-40039 HCI front Green CMF panel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

8GR90-40040 HCI front Yellow CMF panel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

8GR90-40041 HCI front Purple CMF panel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

8GS05-40018 Caster cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

8GS05-40018 Caster cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

8GS05-60104 Entrance motor assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

8GS05-60104 Entrance motor assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

8GS05-60113 Left cover assy Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

8GS05-60114 Punch cover assembly Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

8GS05-60118 Left upper cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

8GS05-60118 Left upper cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

8GS05-60122 Left lower cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

8GS05-60124 Left lower cover (Booklet) Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

8GS05-60126 Booklet output tray Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

8GS05-60126 Booklet stapler Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

3596 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

8GS05-60128 Registration unit Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

933853-010 Hard disk 500GB SED PCA on page 3508

JC31-00078A Motor DC CPR on page 3505

JC31-00109A Motor, geared HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

JC31-00109A Motor, geared sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

JC31-00110B ITB engage motor ITB on page 3504

JC31-00110C Motor circuit step Toner collection unit on page

3498

JC31-00110C Motor circuit step Toner collection unit on page

3498

JC31-00123B Motor BLDC Developer on page 3501

JC31-00123B Motor BLDC Developer on page 3501

JC31-00123C Motor BLDC Drum on page 3502

JC31-00123C Motor BLDC Drum on page 3502

JC31-00123C Motor BLDC Drum on page 3502

JC31-00123C Motor BLDC Drum on page 3502

JC31-00123C Motor BLDC ITB on page 3504

JC31-00125A Motor, geared HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

JC31-00144G Motor BLDC Exit unit on page 3492

JC31-00144G Motor BLDC fuser on page 3506

JC31-00154A Exit fan1, 2, 3, 4 Sensor and fan on page 3507

JC31-00154A Fan Sensor and fan on page 3507

JC31-00163A Motor, step sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

JC31-00163A Staple position motor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

JC31-00163A Staple position motor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

JC31-00169B Motor, step Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

JC31-00169B Motor, step Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

JC31-00177A Motor, step DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

JC31-00178B Motor DC Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

JC31-00189A Drive-motor step Tray 1 on page 3488

JC31-00189A Drive-motor step Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Numerical parts list 3597

 Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC31-00189A Drive-motor step Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

JC31-00198A Fan Sensor and fan on page 3507

JC32-00014A CPR sensor CPR on page 3505

JC32-00014A CPR sensor CPR on page 3505

JC32-00014A CPR sensor CPR on page 3505

JC32-00020A Booklet exit sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC32-00020A Booklet tamper sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

JC32-00020A Ejector sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

JC32-00020A Ejector sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

JC32-00020A Main exit sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

JC32-00020A Main exit sensor Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting Exit unit on page 3492

JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

JC33-00037A Electric clutch Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

JC39-01610A Harness - cover open Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

JC39-01610A Harness - cover open Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

JC39-02268A DCF Dpt_Door open switch sensor and harness DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

JC39-02279A HCI Dpt_Dooropen switch sensor and harness HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

JC39-02309A Front door switch Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC39-02309A Front door switch Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page
3551

JC39-02346A sHCI door open sensor sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

JC44-00149C Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 110V PCA on page 3508

3598 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC44-00150C Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 220V PCA on page 3508

JC44-00236C Fuser drive board (FDB), 220V PCA on page 3508

JC44-00240C High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) PCA on page 3508

JC47-00037A Electric clutch Tray 1 on page 3488

JC61-04626A Tie stopper Covers on page 3485

JC61-04871A Guide - adjust DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

JC61-04871A Guide - adjust HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

JC61-06567A Link holder front sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

JC61-06568A Link holder rear sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

JC61-07366A Booklet c-fold blade Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC61-07444A Caster fix nut Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

JC61-07444A Caster fix nut Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

JC61-07452A Caster Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

JC61-07452A Caster Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

JC61-08699A Left cable guide Drum on page 3502

JC61-08700A Right cable guide Drum on page 3502

JC61-08935A Right door front damper bracket Tray 1 on page 3488

JC63-04862B Left top cover Covers on page 3485

JC63-04918B Right door sHCI dummy cover Covers on page 3485

JC66-01425A Right door front damper Tray 1 on page 3488

JC66-04199A Exit sensor actuator Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

JC66-04201A Actuator home paddle Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

JC66-04218A Gear rack pinion Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

JC66-04233A Lock release handle Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3532

JC66-04243A Entrance roller Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

JC66-04243A Middle roller Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

JC66-04277A Link door 2nd rear sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

JC66-04278A Link door 2nd front sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

Numerical parts list 3599

 Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC66-04279A Link door 1st front sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

JC66-04279A Link door 1st rear sHCI (1 of 2) on page 3527

JC66-04398A Right door front link Tray 1 on page 3488

JC66-04423A Loop actuator Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

JC66-04767A Shaft hinge - door Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

JC66-04767A Shaft hinge - door Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

JC81-07478B Paper gate HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

JC81-07481B HCI shift plate HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

JC81-08274A Booklet stapler cartridge Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC81-09882B Staple cartridge Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

JC81-09882B Staple cartridge Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

JC82-00894A Staple unit Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

JC82-00894A Staple unit Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

JC82-00898A Rear tamper Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

JC82-00898A Rear tamper Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

JC82-00899A Front tamper Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

JC82-00900A Rear tamper Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

JC82-00901A Front tamper Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

JC82-00901A Front tamper Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

JC82-01038A Main paddle kit Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

JC82-01039A Booklet output tray sensor Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page
3547

JC82-01039A Output tray top of stack sensor kit Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page
3534

3600 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page
3551

JC90-01310A Front paper support Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

JC90-01311A Rear paper support Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

JC90-01312A Paper support motor assy Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

JC90-01314A Paper holding kit Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch assy Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page
3534

JC90-01327A Main paddle Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

JC90-01330A Exit roller assy Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

JC90-01331A Exit motor assy Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

JC90-01334B Output tray motor assy Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

JC90-01336A Sub paddle assy Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

JC90-01385A Right door open switch holder assy DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

JC90-01385A Right door open switch holder assy HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

JC90-01396A Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC90-01397A Booklet diverter motor assembly Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC90-01398A Booklet diverter Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC90-01414A Paper holding motor drive assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC90-01414A Paper holding motor drive assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

JC90-01415B Main output tray motor drive assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC90-01415B Main output tray motor drive assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page
3551

JC90-01425A Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

Numerical parts list 3601

 Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC90-01430A Booklet paddle motor assembly Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC90-01431A Booklet tamper Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC90-01432A Booklet end fence Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC90-01435A Booklet blade motor assembly Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC90-01436A Booklet fold motor assembly Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC90-01442A Finisher mount bracket Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3541

JC90-01442A Finisher mount bracket Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3547

JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3544

JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3553

JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

JC90-01458A Tray diverter cam Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC90-01458A Tray diverter cam Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

JC90-01467A End fence motor assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC90-01467A End fence motor assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

JC90-01478B Booklet front cover Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC90-01480A Paddle Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC90-01480A Paddle Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

3602 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC90-01546A Exit bin full Inner finisher (1 of 5) on page

3531

JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

JC90-01677A Tray sub-auto closing unit DCF (1 of 2) on page 3519

JC90-01802A Ejector unit Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

JC90-01802A Ejector unit Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

JC90-01844A Tray 1 unit Tray 1 on page 3488

JC90-01853A Tray 2 Covers on page 3485

JC90-01853A Tray 2 Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

JC90-01856A Exit unit Exit unit on page 3492

JC90-01865A Exit stack guide Exit unit on page 3492

JC92-02471A Toner collection unit full sensor Toner collection unit on page
3498

JC92-02780A Rear joint PCA Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3534

JC92-02792A PBA-Shift tray level HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

JC93-00336A Drive-motor step Exit unit on page 3492

JC93-00336A Drive-motor step Exit unit on page 3492

JC93-00466A Front door open switch Sensor and fan on page 3507

JC93-00802B Drive sub-motor step Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

JC93-00999A Drive-motor step Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3536

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

JC93-01001A Front tamper motor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

JC93-01001A Front tamper motor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3545

JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3554

Numerical parts list 3603

 Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC93-01019A LSU fan assembly Sensor and fan on page 3507

JC93-01024A Rear HV frame assembly Developer on page 3501

JC93-01026B Paper dust holder assembly Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

JC93-01068A ITB engage motor assembly ITB on page 3504

JC93-01083A Drive-motor step Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

JC93-01083A Drive-motor step DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

JC93-01083A Drive-motor step sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

JC93-01084A Drive-motor step fuser on page 3506

JC93-01085A Drive-motor step Duplex on page 3494

JC93-01112A sHCI pickup/feed drive assembly sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

JC93-01114A HCI feed motor HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

JC93-01115A HCI pickup motor HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

JC93-01123A sHCI top cover open switch assembly sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

JC93-01135A DCF feed drive assembly DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

JC93-01152A Buffer motor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

JC93-01152A Buffer motor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

JC93-01155A Booklet end fence motor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC93-01155A Booklet tamper motor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC93-01163A Booklet blade Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3550

JC93-01275A OPC CRUM module assembly Drum on page 3502

JC93-01370A Tray sub-auto closing unit Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

JC93-01382A Tray sub-auto closing unit HCI (1 of 2) on page 3523

JC93-01408A Frame sub-sensor paper size RU Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

JC93-01408A Frame sub-sensor paper size RU Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

JC93-01408A Frame sub-sensor paper size RU DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

JC93-01408A Frame sub-sensor paper size RU DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

JC93-01467A Switch Sensor and fan on page 3507

JC93-01659A Drive-motor step Reservoir on page 3497

JC93-01659A Drive-motor step Reservoir on page 3497

JC93-01661A Drum and developer drive assembly Developer on page 3501

JC93-01661A Drum and developer drive assembly Drum on page 3502

3604 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC93-01661A Drum and developer drive assembly ITB on page 3504

JC93-01663A Tray 2 pickup drive assembly Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

JC93-01663A Tray 3 pickup drive assembly Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

JC93-01663A Tray 4 pickup drive assembly DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

JC93-01663A Tray 5 pickup drive assembly DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

JC93-01664A Feed drive assembly Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

JC93-01665A Registration drive assembly Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

JC93-01666A Toner and reservoir drive assembly Toner on page 3495

JC93-01666A Toner and reservoir drive assembly Reservoir on page 3497

JC93-01668A Toner collection unit drive assembly Toner collection unit on page
3498

JC93-01669A Toner collection duct unit drive assembly Toner collection unit on page
3498

JC93-01691A ITB ITB on page 3504

JC93-01694A Tray 2 pickup assembly Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

JC93-01695A Tray 3 pickup assembly Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

JC93-01725A Front fan assembly Sensor and fan on page 3507

JC93-01726A Reverse roller sHCI (2 of 2) on page 3529

JC93-01742A Keyboard (fold type) Assy-US English PCA on page 3508

JC93-01743A Keyboard (fold type) Assy-UK English PCA on page 3508

JC93-01795A LVPS FDB fan assembly Sensor and fan on page 3507

JC93-01850A Fuser and exit drive assembly Exit unit on page 3492

JC93-01850A Fuser and exit drive assembly fuser on page 3506

JC95-02247A Right door assembly Covers on page 3485

JC95-02247A Right door assembly Tray 1 on page 3488

JC95-02247A Right door assembly Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

JC95-02247A Right door assembly Duplex on page 3494

JC95-02249A Right door exit assembly Registration and loop sensors

on page 3491

JC95-02250A Duplex assembly Duplex on page 3494

JC96-13015A Toner collection duct unit Toner collection unit on page

3498

JC97-05149A Laser scanner unit (LSU) Laser scanner unit on page

3500

SS216-80501 Black toner dispense motor Toner on page 3495

Numerical parts list 3605

 Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SS216-80501 Cyan toner dispense motor Toner on page 3495

SS216-80501 Magenta toner dispense motor Toner on page 3495

SS216-80501 Yellow toner dispense motor Toner on page 3495

SS456-61001 Ejector Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3538

T3U64-60001 (Not Echo PCA (Not orderable and not used in printer.) PCA on page 3508
orderable and not used in
printer.)

W9077-67001 Black drum unit Drum on page 3502

W9078-67001 Cyan drum unit Drum on page 3502

W9078-67001 Magenta drum unit Drum on page 3502

W9078-67001 Yellow drum unit Drum on page 3502

W9161-67004 Cyan toner cartridge -Standard yield Toner on page 3495

W9162-67004 Yellow toner cartridge -Standard yield Toner on page 3495

W9163-67004 Magenta toner cartridge -Standard yield Toner on page 3495

W9172-67007 Yellow toner cartridge -High yield Toner on page 3495

W9173-67007 Magenta toner cartridge -High yield Toner on page 3495

X3A92-67924 Kit-Screws c-clips e-clips kit Covers on page 3485

Y1G10-67901 Punch unit 2-3 hole Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Y1G10-67901 Punch unit 2-3 hole Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Y1G11-67901 Punch unit 2-4 hole Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Y1G11-67901 Punch unit 2-4 hole Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Y1G12-67901 Punch unit Swedish hole Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3542

Y1G12-67901 Punch unit Swedish hole Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3551

Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V Tray 2, 3 on page 3489

Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V DCF (2 of 2) on page 3521

Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V HCI (2 of 2) on page 3525

Z9Y05-50002 ADF FFC cable to SSA 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

3513

3606 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-47 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

Z9Y05-50003 ADF Power cable 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

3513

Z9Y05-60004 300sh ADF PCA 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

3513

Z9Y05-60016 Damper module 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

3513

Z9Y05-60032 ADF input tray 300sh flow ADF (2 of 2) on page

3513

Numerical parts list 3607

 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR)
diagrams

Learn more about electrical mechanical relationships diagrams.

Base printer
Learn about base printer electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Tray 1

Learn about the Tray 1 electrical mechanical relationships.

3608 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-1 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram Tray 1

Feed motor
JC31-00189A

Tray 1 clutch
JC47-00037A
(CL1)

JC39-02807A

Tray 1 solenoid
JC33-00029B JC39-02804A
(SL1)

JC39-02586A

Tray 1 pickup
JC39-02799A clutch
Z9Y05-60012

Tray 1 empty
sensor

JC39-02806A

EMR diagrams: Tray 2/3

Learn about the Tray 2/3 electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Tray 2/3 3609

 Figure 8-2 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram Tray 2/3 (1 of 2)

Feed Motor
JC31-00189A
(M1)

Tray 2 pickup
motor
JC93-01083A
Tray 2 paper size (M2) JC39-02799A
sensor
JC93-01408A (S5)

Tray 3 paper size Tray 3 pickup

sensor motor
JC93-01408A (S9) JC93-01083A
(M3)
JC39-02234A

5QK03-50008

3610 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-3 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram Tray 2/3 (2 of 2)

JC39-02208A JC39-02804A JC39-02586A

Feed 2 sensor
0604-001490 (S10)

Tray 2 paper empty sensor

0604-001393 (S2)

Tray 2 stack height

sensor
0604-001393 (S3)

Tray 2 prefeed sensor

0604-001490 (S4)

JC39-02201A
JC39-02234A
JC39-02202A

Tray 3 paper empty

sensor
0604-001393 (S6)
Tray 3 stack
height sensor
0604-001393 (S7)

Tray 3 prefeed sensor

0604-001381 (S8)

EMR diagrams: Registration and loop sensors

Learn about the registration and loop sensors electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Registration and loop sensors 3611

 Figure 8-4 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram registration and loop sensors

Fuser out sensor

0960-5271 (S14)

JC39-02586A JC39-02804A
5QK03-50001

JC39-02240A

Loop sensor 2
0604-001393
JC39-02338A
(S13)

Loop sensor 1
0604-001393
(S12)

Registration
sensor
0604-001381
(S11)

JC39-02239A

Registration
motor
JC31-00189A
(M4)

JC39-02799A

EMR diagrams: Exit unit

Learn about the exit unit electrical mechanical relationships.

3612 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-5 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram exit unit

Exit 2 sensor
0604-001393 (S17)

Out bin full 1 sensor

0604-001393 (S15)

Exit 2 motor
JC93-00336A (M5)
Return gate solenoid
JC33-00031B (SL2)

Duplex jam 1
sensor Duplex 1 motor
0604-001393 (S18) JC93-00336A (M6)

JC39-02847A JC39-02836A

JC39-02190A
Job separator (Optional)

Out bin 2 full

sensor
0604-001393 (S16)

EMR diagrams: Duplex

Learn about the duplex electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Duplex 3613

 Figure 8-6 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram duplex

Duplex 2 motor
JC93-01085A (M7)

JC39-02804A JC39-02586A

5QK03-50001

Duplex jam 2
sensor
0604-001393 (S19)

EMR diagrams: Toner cartridge

Learn about the toner cartridge electrical mechanical relationships.

3614 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-7 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram toner cartridge

Yellow toner dispense motor

sensor
0604-001393 (S20)
Magenta toner dispense motor
sensor
0604-001393 (S21)
Cyan toner dispense motor
sensor
0604-001393 (S22)
Black toner dispense motor
sensor
0604-001393 (S23)

JC39-02817A
Yellow toner dispense motor
SS216-80501 (M8)

Magenta toner dispense motor

SS216-80501 (M9)

Cyan toner dispense motor

SS216-80501 (M10)

Black toner dispense motor

SS216-80501 (M11)

EMR diagrams: Reservoir

Learn about the reservoir electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Reservoir 3615

 Figure 8-8 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram reservoir
Yellow toner residual amount sensor
JC32-00024 (S24)

Magenta toner residual amount sensor

JC32-00024 (S25)

Cyan toner residual amount sensor

JC32-00024 (S26)

Black toner residual amount sensor

JC32-00024 (S27)

JC39-02813A

JC39-02822A

Yellow, magenta toner reservoir

motor
JC93-01659A (M12)

Black, cyan toner reservoir motor

JC93-01659A (M13)

JC39-02817A

JC39-02821A

EMR diagrams: Toner collection unit

Learn about the toner collection unit electrical mechanical relationships.

3616 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-9 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram toner collection unit

Toner collection duct

unit motor
JC31-00110C (M14)
Toner collection duct unit motor
sensor
0604-001393 (S29)

Toner collection duct unit detection

sensor
0604-001393 (S28)

Toner collection unit detection sensor

0604-001393 (S30)

JC39-02843A JC39-02815A

Toner collection unit motor sensor

0604-001393 (S31)

Toner collection unit full sensor

JC92-02471A (S32)

Toner collection unit motor sensor

0604-001393 (S31)

Toner collection unit motor

JC31-00110C (M15)

JC39-02844A

EMR diagrams: LSU

Learn about the lsu electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: LSU 3617

 Figure 8-10 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram LSU (1 of 2)

LSU Hsync 2 (S38)

LSU LD power (S36)
LSU temperature sensor

LSU
JC97-05149A 5QK03-50003

4
4

JC39-02545A

2
2

LSU shutter motor (M17)

LSU shutter open sensor (S33)
LSU shutter close sensor (S34)
JC39-02815A
LSU motor (M16)

PD_LSU_KC_n

3618 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-11 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram LSU (2 of 2)

LSU Hsync 1 (S37)

LSU LD power (S36)

LSU
JC97-05149A 5QK03-50003

JC39-02228A

LSU skew adjustment motor

(M18, 19, 20)

EMR diagrams: Developer

Learn about the developer electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Developer 3619

 Figure 8-12 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram developer (1 of 2)

Yellow toner concentration sensor

(S43)

Magenta toner concentration sensor

(S44)

Cyan toner concentration sensor

(S45)

Black toner concentration sensor

(S46)

JC39-02259A

5QK03-5001

3620 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-13 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram developer (2 of 2)

JC39-02800A

Yellow magenta cyan developer motor

JC31-00123B (M25)

Black developer motor

JC31-00123B (M26)

JC39-02840A

EMR diagrams: Drum

Learn about the drum electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Drum 3621

 Figure 8-14 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram drum
Yellow drum home
sensor
0604-001393 (S39)
Magenta drum home
sensor
0604-001393 (S40)
Cyan drum home
sensor
0604-001393 (S41)
Black drum home
sensor
0604-001393 (S42)

JC39-02800A

Yellow drum sensor

JC31-00123C (M21)

Magenta drum sensor

JC31-00123C (M22)

Cyan drum sensor

JC31-00123C (M23)

Black drum sensor

JC31-00123C (M24)

JC39-02840A

JC39-02842A

EMR diagrams: ITB

Learn about the ITB electrical mechanical relationships.

3622 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-15 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram ITB

ITB engage motor

JC93-01068A
(M27)
ITB engage
sensor (S47)

JC39-02258A

JC39-02255A

JC39-02239A

EMR diagrams: CPR

Learn about the CPR electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: CPR 3623

 Figure 8-16 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram CPR

CPR shutter motor

JC31-00078A (M28) JC39-02229A

CPR shutter sensor

0604-001393 (S51)

JC39-02230A
Rear CPR sensor
JC32-00014A (S50)
JC39-02229A
Center CPR sensor
JC32-00014A (S49)

Front CPR sensor

JC32-00014A (S48)

EMR diagrams: Fuser

Learn about the fuser electrical mechanical relationships.

3624 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-17 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram fuser (1 of 2)

Fuser gap sensor

0604-001393 (S55)

Fuser
5PN53-67001 (100v)
5PN76-67001 (110v)
5PN77-67001 (220v)

Thermistor (S53)
Wrap jam sensor
(S54)
Fuser CRUM (P17)

JC39-02810A JC39-02809A

JC39-02821A

EMR diagrams: Fuser 3625

 Figure 8-18 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram fuser (2 of 2)

JC39-02195A

Fuser and exit motor Fuser gap motor

JC31-00144G (M29) JC93-01084A (M30)

EMR diagrams: Sensor and fan

Learn about the sensor and fan electrical mechanical relationships.

3626 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-19 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram sensor and fan (1 of 3)

5QK03-50008

FDB fan
JC31-00154A (F2)

LVPS fan
JC31-00198A (F1)

EMR diagrams: Sensor and fan 3627

 Figure 8-20 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram sensor and fan (2 of 3)

Inner temperature
sensor
1404-001417 (S56)
JC39-02255A
Exit fan 1,2,3,4
JC39-02195A JC31-00154A (F5)

Right door switch

JC93-01467A (S59)

Fuser fan
5QK03-40103 (F4)

3628 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-21 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram sensor and fan (3 of 3)

Exit temperature sensor

JC39-02816A (S60) JC39-02836A

JC39-02847A

Front fan assembly

Outer temperature, humidity JC93-01725A (F3)
sensor
JC32-00015A (S57)

Front door switch

JC93-00466A (S58)

LSU fan
JC93-01019A (F6)

JC39-02844A

EMR diagrams: PCA

Learn about the PCA electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: PCA 3629

 Figure 8-22 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (1 of 15)

TPM
3SJ03-60001 (P2)
(not orderable)

3630 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-23 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (2 of 15)

HDD
933853-011 (P5)
Accelerator
6HN30-67001 (P4)

Riser for HDD: 3SJ01-60001 (P3-1)

SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit: 4XN67-67001 (P3-2)
Riser for HDD, USB ports, Accelerator: 3SJ02-60001 (P3-3)

EMR diagrams: PCA 3631

 Figure 8-24 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (3 of 15)

Island of Data (IOD)

3SJ06-60001 (P7)

JC39-02823A

Main-J5

Keyboard PCA
(fold type)
5QK47-60001
USB hub PCA
3SJ04-60002 (P6)

Keyboard PCA
(drawer type)
5QK47-60002

Power key
3SJ33-60007 (P13)

3SJ33-60007

Figure 8-25 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (4 of 15)

IMPORTANT: Echo PCA T3U64-60001 and 3SJ11-60108 Cable-FFC 6-Conductor Echo PCA parts are
not orderable and removed from printers manufactured after April 2024.

3632 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

EMR diagrams: PCA 3633
 Figure 8-26 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (5 of 15)

JC39-02252A

HVPS
JC44-00240C (P10)

JC39-02228A

3634 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-27 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (6 of 15)

USB 2.0

5QK03-50006

Control panel 8 inches

3SJ15-60101

8"

JC39-02829A

Control panel 10.1

inches 2nd
5QK42-60104

EMR diagrams: PCA 3635

 Figure 8-28 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (7 of 15)

LVPS
(110V) JC44-00149C, (220V) JC44-00150C (P11)
FDB
(110V) JC44-00235C, (220V) JC44-00236C (P12)

JC39-02845A

JC39-02845A

5QK03-50008

JC39-02808A

3636 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-29 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (8 of 15)

Tray 2 paper size sensor PCA

JC92-02622A (S5)

Tray 3 paper size sensor PCA

JC92-02622A (S9)

5QK03-50008

5QK03-50008

EMR diagrams: PCA 3637

 Figure 8-30 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (9 of 15)

Toner collection unit full

sensor
JC92-02417A (S32)

JC39-02815A

3638 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-31 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (10 of 15)

Yellow eraser
JC92-02744A (P16)

Magenta eraser
JC92-02744A (P16)
Yellow drum CRUM
Cyan eraser 3SJ07-60001 (P15)
JC92-02744A (P16)
Magenta drum CRUM
Black eraser 3SJ07-60001 (P15)
JC92-02744A (P16)
Cyan drum CRUM
3SJ07-60001 (P15)

Black drum CRUM

3SJ07-60001 (P15)

5QJ90-50008

JC39-02255A

EMR diagrams: PCA 3639

 Figure 8-32 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (11 of 15)

JC39-02214A

JC39-02261A

3640 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-33 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (12 of 15)

Fuser CRUM
6CF14-60001

JC39-02810A

JC39-02809A

EMR diagrams: PCA 3641

 Figure 8-34 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (13 of 15)

3SJ11-50006

Platen PCA

Tarot HS platen PCA: 3SJ32-60104 (P801)

Tarot platen PCA: Y6V12-60035 (P811)
CIS platen PCA: 3SJ00-60109 (P821) 3SJ11-50022

3SJ11-50021

3642 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-35 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (14 of 15)

sHCI
6GW56-60001
(P301)

DCF
6GW47-60001 (P101)

JC39-02187A

HCI
6GW57-60001
(P201)

EMR diagrams: PCA 3643

 Figure 8-36 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (15 of 15)

JC39-02169A

Inner finisher main PCA

6GW49-60001

JC39-02308A

Stapler stacker finisher,

Booklet finisher main PCA
6GW55-60001

JC39-02194A

Input devices
Learn about input devices for electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF)

Learn about the DCF electrical mechanical relationships.

3644 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-37 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram DCF (1 of 4)

Tray 4 feed sensor

0604-001490 (S107)

Tray 4 paper empty

sensor
0604-001393 (S102)
Prefeed 4 sensor
0604-001381 (S101) €‚ƒ„ƒ †‡ˆƒ‰Š‹Œ‰†ƒ Š Ž€
„‘’“”“ƒ•–103)

JC39-02272A JC39-02271A

EMR diagrams: Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF) 3645

 Figure 8-38 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram DCF (2 of 4)

!"#$%$&"&'!$'(&)#$*'+*,!
„-„.ƒ„„/‚$01/„%2

3!'4''5$%$*'+*,!
„-„.ƒ„„/6/$01/„.2 !"#$%$*)"78$9':;9)$*'+*,!
„-„.ƒ„„/‚$01106)

€‚ƒ„ †„‡ €‚ƒ„ -‚‡

3646 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-39 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram DCF (3 of 4)

DCF feed motor

JC31-00177A (M103)

Tray 4 pickup motor

JC93-01083A (M101)
Tray 4 paper size sensor
JC93-01408A (S108)

Tray 5 pickup motor

JC93-01083A (M102)

Tray 5 paper size sensor

JC93-01408A (S109)

JC39-02274A
DCF right door open switch
JC90-01385A (S110)

JC39-02275A JC39-02268A

JC39-02268A

JC39-02268A

EMR diagrams: Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF) 3647

 Figure 8-40 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram DCF (4 of 4)

Main PCA

JC39-02606A

JC39-02603A

EMR diagrams: High Capacity Input Tray (HCI)

Learn about the HCI electrical mechanical relationships.

3648 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-41 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram HCI (1 of 5)

HCI paper shift motor

JC31-00125A (M201)

HCI tray lift motor

JC31-00109A (M202)

JC39-02282A

HCI feed sensor

0604-001381 (S202)

JC39-02281A JC39-02280A
Prefeed 4 sensor
0604-001490 (S201)
HCI paper empty sensor
0605-001393 (S203)

HCI stack height sensor

0604-001393 (S204)

EMR diagrams: High Capacity Input Tray (HCI) 3649

 Figure 8-42 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram HCI (2 of 5)

HCI tray open sensor

0604-001393 (S211)

HCI pickup motor

JC93-01115A (M204)
HCI right door open
sensor HCI feed motor
JC93-01114A (M203)

JC39-02286A

JC39-02286A

3650 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-43 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram HCI (3 of 5)

HCI PCA
6GW57-60001 (P201)

JC39-02286A

JC39-02356A

HCI sub PCA

JC92-02792A (P202)

sHCI
6GW56-6000
1
JC39-02605A (P301)

JC39-02604A

MainPCA

EMR diagrams: High Capacity Input Tray (HCI) 3651

 Figure 8-44 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram HCI (4 of 5)

HCI shift tray level sensor

2
0604-001393 (S209)

HCI shift tray level sensor

1
0604-001393 (S208)
HCI shift gate solenoid home
sensor
0604-001393 (S212)

HCI shift gate solenoid

JC33-00031B (SL201)

JC39-02351A

3652 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-45 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram HCI (5 of 5)

HCI shift tray home

sensor
0604-001393 (S206)

€‚ƒ„ †‡‚‡ˆ‰Š‚‹Œ‚ƒ‹ŒƒŽˆ HCI shift tray empty

‘’“”•”‚–—207) sensor
0604-001393 (S210)

HCI knock-up home

sensor
0604-001393 (S205)

5QK03-50013

EMR diagrams: Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI)

Learn about the sHCI electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI) 3653

 Figure 8-46 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram sHCI (1 of 3)

sHCI stack height

sensor
0604-001393 (S306)

€‚ƒ„ „†‡ƒ†ˆ„‰Šƒ†‹Œ‡
Ž‘’“’ƒ”•307)

Prefeed 5 sensor
0604-001490 (S308)

JC39-02290A JC39-02289A

sHCI cover open

sensor
JC39-02346A (S303)

3654 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-47 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram sHCI (2 of 3)

sHCI pickup motor

JC93-01083A (M301)

JC39-02289A

sHCI feed motor

JC31-00163A (M302)

sHCI lift motor

JC31-00109A (M303)

sHCI detection sensor 2

0604-001393 (S302)

€‚ƒ„ † ‡†ˆ‰Šƒ Š‰‹ƒŒ

ŽŒ‘’‘ƒ“”301)

JC39-02291A

EMR diagrams: Side High Capacity Input device (sHCI) 3655

 Figure 8-48 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram sHCI (3 of 3)

€‚ƒ„ „†‡ƒˆ†‰†ˆƒ†Š‹‡ƒŒ
ŽŒ‘’‘ƒ“”‘•–

€‚ƒ„ „†‡ƒˆ†‰†ˆƒ†Š‹‡ƒ
ŽŒ‘’‘ƒ“”306)

!‘’ ""#

Output devices
Learn about output devices for electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Inner finisher

Learn about the inner finisher electrical mechanical relationships.

3656 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-49 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (1 of 10)

€‚ƒ„ †‡ˆ‚

!"#$%&'(#)

*‡ˆ €‡+‚ƒ‚‡,
%(%-$%%'".'ƒ/0#1'2

!"#$%&'(()

!"#$%&'3-)

EMR diagrams: Inner finisher 3657

 Figure 8-50 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (2 of 10)

()‘’Œ*•Ž+

€€‚ƒ„ †‡ˆ‰Š€‹†‚„‚ˆ
ŒŒŽŒŒ‘’‘†“”’•Œ–
()‘’Œ*•Ž+

!‰ƒ†"#‚$„†%ˆ&†‚„‚ˆ
ŒŒŽŒŒ‘’‘†“”’'–

3658 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-51 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (3 of 10)
JC39-02176A

JC39-02166A

Exit sensor
0604-001415 (S971)

Output tray lower

limit switch
JC90-01320A (S957)

JC39-02178A

Finisher docking
sensor
0604-001393 (S970) Front cover switch
JC39-01610A (S953)

Rear joint PCA JC39-02173A

JC39-02172A
JC92-02780A

EMR diagrams: Inner finisher 3659

 Figure 8-52 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (4 of 10)

JC39-02176A
Output tray motor
JC90-01334B
(M954)

Output tray motor sensor

0604-001393 (S956)

JC39-02168A

Paper holding sensor

0604-001393 (S959)

JC39-02175A

Top cover switch

JC39-01610A
(S965)

Paper holding solenoid

JC33-00037A (SL951)

JC39-02180

Output tray top of

stack sensor
(transmitter)

JC82-01039A
(S958)

Output tray top of

stack sensor
(receiver)

JC82-01039A (S963)

3660 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-53 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (5 of 10)

JC39-02176A

End fence sensor

0604-001381 (S967)

Main paddle motor

JC93-01001A (M953)

Stapler position motor

EMR diagrams: Inner finisher 3661

 Figure 8-54 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (6 of 10)

JC39-02168A

Exit motor
JC31-001369B (M952)

Main paddle motor

JC93-01001A (M953)

JC39-02177A
Main paddle home
sensor
0604-001393 (S954)

3662 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-55 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (7 of 10)

Stapler position sensor

4 x 0604-001393 (S952)

Main paddle motor

Punch waste full JC93-01001A (M953)
sensor
0604-001381 (S969) Stapler position
motor
JC93-00999A (M951)

JC39-02177A

Stapler position motor

Stapler amount

JC39-02177A

Staple joint PCA

JC92-02772A

Rear joint PCA

JC39-02172A JC92-02780A JC39-02173A

EMR diagrams: Inner finisher 3663

 Figure 8-56 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (8 of 10)

JC39-01336A JC39-02165A
Ejector 2 home sensor
0604-001393 (S960)

Ejector 1 home sensor JC39-01127A

0604-001393 (S966)

Ejector 1 motor
JC93-00998A (M957)

Ejector 2 motor
JC93-01168A (M956)
Ejector 2 motor
sensor
0604-001393 (S961)

3664 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-57 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (9 of 10)

Paper support home

sensor
0604-001393 (S962)

Paper support motor

JC93-00802B (M958)

JC39-02179A JC39-02176A

EMR diagrams: Inner finisher 3665

 Figure 8-58 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (10 of 10)

Front tamper home sensor

0604-001393 (S955)

Front tamper motor JC39-02167A JC39-02168A

JC93-01001A (M959)

10

JC39-02175A JC39-02176A

Rear tamper home

sensor
0604-001393 (S964)

Rear tamper motor

JC93-01001A (M955)

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher electrical mechanical relationships.

3666 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-59 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram bridge unit

Bridge exit sensor

0604-01393
(S903)

Bridge motor
Bridge door sensor 3SJ19-8-501
0604-01393
(S902) Bridge
entrancesensor
0604-01393
(S902)

6GW51-50001 6GW51-50003

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3667

 Figure 8-60 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram punch unit

JC39-02314A

JC81-08505A

Punch unit (P902

2-3: Y1G10-67901
2-4: Y1G11-67901
Swedish: Y1G12-67901

3668 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-61 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram entrance unit
Entrance motor assembly
8GS05-60104 (M912)

JC81-02313A

Entrance sensor
JC32-00020A
(S912)

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3669

 Figure 8-62 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram tray diverter unit

JC81-02313A

Tray diverter home sensor

0604-001415 (S904)

3670 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-63 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram top exit

Top exit sensor

0604-001393 (S911)

JC39-02322A JC39-02313A

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3671

 Figure 8-64 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram top output tray unit

JC39-02313A

Top output tray paper full

sensor (receiver)
JC82-01039A (S958)

Top output tray paper full

sensor (transmitter)
JC82-01039A (S958)

JC39-02322A

3672 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-65 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram main exit (1 of 2)

JC39-02312A

Exit motor assembly

3SJ19-80501 (M913)

Main output tray top of

stack sensor
JC82-01039A (S920)

JC39-02319A

JC39-02319A
Main output tray lower limit
sensor
0604-~001415 (S906)

JC39-02319A JC39-02325A

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3673

 Figure 8-66 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram main exit (2 of 2)
Main exit sensor
JC32-00020A (S910) (M913)

JC39-02322A

JC39-02313A

Main exit cam motor assembly

JC90-01453A

JC39-02313A

Main exit cam home sensor

0604-001393 (S907)

3674 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-67 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram paddle unit

Paddle motor
JC93-01001A (M901)
Paddle home sensor
0604-001393 (S909) JC39-02313A

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3675

 Figure 8-68 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram end fence unit

End fence motor

JC93-01001A (M903)

JC39-023~13A

End fence home sensor

0604-001393 (S907)

JC39-02318A

3676 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-69 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram tamper unit
Rear tamper home sensor
0604-1393 (S906)

Rear tamper motor

JC93-01001A (M903)

Front tamper home sensor

0604-1393 (S906)

JC39-02313A

Front tamper motor

JC93-01001A (M904)

JC39-02318A

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3677

 Figure 8-70 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram stapler unit

Manual staple sensor

0604-1415 (S927)

JC39-02315A

JC39-02330A

Stapler mid-rear sensor

0604-001393 (S925)

Stapler rear sensor

0604-001393 (S930)

Stapler mid-front sensor

0604-001393 (S924)

Stapler position motor Stapler front sensor

JC93-00163A (M908) 0604-001393 (S921)

JC39-02318A

3678 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-71 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram ejector unit

JC39-02317A JC39-02324A

JC39-02326A

Ejector sensor
JC32-00000A (S914)

Ejector1 home sensor

0604-001415 (S927)

Ejector1 motor sensor

0604-001415 (S927)
Ejector2 motor sensor
0604-001415 (S923)

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3679

 Figure 8-72 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram main output tray unit

Main output tray motor

JC90-01415B (M911)

Main output tray motor

sensor
0604-001393 (S933)

JC39-02312A

JC39-02316A

Main output tray

top of stack switch
JC39-02316A (S934)

3680 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-73 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram paper holding unit

JC39-02319A

Paper holding motor

8GS05-60104 (M907)

Rear paper holding

sensor
0604-001393 (S931)
Front paper holding
sensor
0604-001393 (S917)

Paper holding
home sensor
0604-001393 (S922)

JC39-02319A JC39-02325A

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3681

 Figure 8-74 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram buffer unit

Buffer
home sensor
0604-001393 (S933) Buffer sensor
JC32-00020A (S913)

Buffer solenoid
JC33-00038A (SL901)

Buffer motor
JC93-01152A (M910)

JC39-02575A

3682 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-75 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram door switch

JC39-02631A

Top door switch

JC31-0231A (M910)

JC39-02325A

Front door switch

JC39-02309A (S918)

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3683

 Figure 8-76 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA

JC39-02325A

Booklet maker PCA

6GW51-60001 (P902)

Manual staple PCA

JC92-02789A (P901)

JC39-02325A

JC39-02345A

JC39-02313A

3684 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

A Certificate of Volatility

Review the certificates of volatility for the printer.

Certificate of Volatility
Learn about the product certificate of volatility.

Figure A-1 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 3)

Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Color LaserJet Managed Managed Hewlett Packard Company
MFP E877dn 5QK03A= E877dn 11311 Chinden Blvd
HP Color LaserJet Managed
5QK08A= E877z Boise, ID 83714
Flow MFP E877z

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, Size: User Function: Steps to clear memory:
etc): Modifiable: Used for temporary When the printer is powered off
6GB Yes No storage the memory is erased.
DDR4 DRAM during the process of
jobs, and for applications
that are
running on the OS. (Note:
Total memory on
formatter
consists of 6GB.)

Certificate of Volatility 3685

 Figure A-2 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 3)
Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32 KB Yes No Backup device for critical There are no steps to clear
system counters and product this data.
configuration information.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
SPI Flash 8MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear
factory product configuration this data.
data required for the device
to function.
User modifications are
limited to downloading
digitally signed HP firmware
images.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
TPM 2.0 NVRAM Flash 7206 bytes Yes No Stores HP-signed immutable ID Drive lock password can be
certificate and associated changed through the device
RSA key pair in locked embedded web server
memory, engine speed interface and/or Preboot Menu
configuration data, of the Control Panel.
SED (self-encrypting drive) drive No other data stored on
lock password. the TPM 2.0 Flash can be cleared.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD Engine EEPROM 32 KB Yes No Stores device lifecycle data There are no steps to clear
(e.g. device page counts), this data.
consumables information,
device specific printing handler
data (e.g. fusing, EP,
paper handler),
toner supply control data,
device configuration data
(e.g. margin info),
device maintenance information
(e.g. calibration data)

Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HDD 500GB Yes No Store customer data, OS, There are several ways to erase
applications, digitally signed this:
firmware images, persistent data, 1. Secure Storage Erase - Erases
and temporary data used for temporary files and job data by
processing and system functions. overwriting information one or
three
times
2. Secure Disk Erase - Industry
standard ATA Secure Erase.
Overwrites all data on the hard
drive.
3. Secure File Erase - Erases files
when jobs finish processing by
overwriting them one or three
times.

3686 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Figure A-3 Certificate of Volatility (3 of 3)
USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics? (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:
Other Transmission Capabilities
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Product contains an integrated Wi-Fi/NFC accessory modules consisting of a Wi-Fi 802.11n and Near Field
Communication (NFC) radio. The Wi-Fi portion acts in Access Point mode ONLY and provides AP client connection
capability. NFC is used to pass NDEF tag data (Wi-Fi SSID, WPA configuration data). The latter is used to enable
wireless direct print for mobile devices.
Frequency: 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz Bandwidth:

Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):

Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n (Wi-Fi) NFC Tag Type 4 ISO14443B Compliant (NFC)
Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Fax
Specifications: Fax modem max speed 33.6kbps
Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
Hewlett Packard Company Technical Marketing Eng [email protected] Print Hardware Systems
(PHS)
Date Prepared: March 8, 2022

Certificate of Volatility 3687

 Glossary of terms

802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the
IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).

802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share the same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up
to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices might occasionally suffer
interferences from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.

AC
An electric current that reverses its direction many times a second at regular intervals. For example, the
110V line current found in a typical US electrical wall receptacle.

AC Control Module (PageWide)

The AC Control Module controls the heating elements in the airflow assembly. Functions include voltage
monitoring (ensuring correct operation in a low-quality-power environment), isolation (low voltage heater
control signals are isolated from the high voltage AC power for safety), AC switching (power is switched
on/off to the heater), and heating element configuration (heating element configuration is changed
between series and parallel for temperature predictability).

ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a device that automatically feeds an original sheet (or multiple
sheets) of paper into the image scanner. The document feeder is a component of the integrated
scanner assembly (ADF and image scanner).

Airflow System (PageWide)

The airflow system conditions the printed pages to avoid page curling due to the ink on the page. The
airflow system functionally consists of a fan and heating elements. The pressurized air is blown on the
page through the nozzles that are placed on the paper path of the airflow system between print and
eject zone.

BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically.
This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP servers assigns an IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables “diskless
workstation” computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.

CCD
A Charged Coupled Device (CCD) is the scanner module which enables a scan job. A CCD locking
mechanism is used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when the printer is moved.

CIS
A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) scanner captures an image using the printer's optical path. Red, green,
and blue LEDs sequentially illuminate a small strip of the document (often called a raster line), and the
optical system captures each color in a single row of Charged Coupled Device (CCD) sensors that cover
the entire page width.

3688 Glossary of terms

Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints
an entire set before printing additional copies.

Control Panel
The control panel is a flat, typically vertical panel or screen where the user can control and/or monitor
the printer. The control panel is found on the front of the printer.

Coverage
Coverage is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5%
coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. If the paper or original has
complicated images or a large amount of text, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner
usage will be as much as the coverage.

DC
An electric current flowing in one direction only. Typically, a low voltage load current supplied to an
electrical assembly.

DCC
The DC controller (DCC) controls the operation of the printer sub-systems and electrical components.
the DCC sends out various signals to operate motors, solenoids, and other printer components based
on the print command and image data that the host computer sends the formatter.

Default
The value or setting that is in effect when a printer is unboxed, reset, or initialized.

DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server
provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. The DHCP also provides a mechanism for
allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.

Digital Send Software

Digital send software allows a mufti-function printer (MFP) to scan and send information quickly and
securely to email, network folders, other printers, and fax services.

DIMM
A Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) is a small circuit board that holds memory. The DIMM stores all
data within the printer, such as printing data and received fax data.

DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally,
higher DPI results in a higher resolution (more visible detail in the image and a larger file size).

Duplex
A mechanism that automatically turns over a sheet of paper so that the printer can print (or scan) on
both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a duplex unit can print on both sides of the paper during
one print cycle.

Glossary of terms 3689

 Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally, the
printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
the printer limit is 2,400 pages a day (assuming 20 working days/month).

Dynamic Security
Dynamic Security is a toner cartridge design and process for authenticating genuine HP supplies. HP
printers use toner cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a non-HP
chip, or modified chip, or non-HP circuitry might not work (now or in the future).

e-Duplex
Single-pass electronic duplex (e-Duplex) printer use two separate scan modules to scan the front-side
and back-side of an e-duplex copy job page in a single pass through the document feeder.

EMC
EMC is a measure of a device's ability to operate as intended in its shared operating environment while,
at the same time, not affecting the ability of other equipment within the same environment to operate as
intended.

EMI
EMI is the electromagnetic energy which affects the functioning of an electronic device. Electronic
devices (like printers) are a source of EMI. Because it is rare for electronics to operate in isolation,
products are generally engineered to function in the presence of some amount of EMI.

eMMC
An embedded Multi-Media Card is a compact memory device consisting of NAND flash memory and a
simple storage controller.

Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates
the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first
system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior. This is different from simulation,
which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.

EPS
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) is a PostScript (PS) code file which is used for storing font and vector
graphic image information.

ESD
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) is a sudden flow of electricity between two electrically charged objects
caused by contact, an electrical short, or dielectric breakdown. Discharge of built up static electricity.

Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines
wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access
control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. Ethernet
has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to present.

Ferrite
A ferrite is used to reduce the amount of radio frequency noise (or interference) in a wire or cable. A
ferrite enables proper EMC/EMI performance for regulatory purposes.

3690 Glossary of terms

FFC
Flat Flexible Cables (FFCs) are designed for Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA) to PCA connections (for
example, connecting a fax PCA to the formatter).

FIH
A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) is a port that enables HP multifunction printers (MFPs) to use third-
party devices to extend the capabilities of the MFP.

Firmware
The formatter stores the printer firmware. A remote firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and
upgrade the firmware.

Flash memory
Flash memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.

Flow integrated scanner assembly

A printer scanner assembly that includes a slide-out external physical keyboard.

Formatter (LaserJet)
The formatter controls printer functions like receiving and processes print data, developing and
coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA, storing font and customer
configuration information, communicating with the host computer, and monitoring control panel
functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel.

FTP
FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol. FTP is a protocol designed for transferring files over the Internet.
Files stored on an FTP server can be accessed using an FTP client, such as a web browser, FTP software
program, or a command line interface.

Fuser Unit
The fuser unit is part of a laser printer that adheres the toner onto the printed page. It consists of a
heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and
pressure to make sure that the toner stays on the paper permanently (which is why paper is warm when
it comes out of a laser printer).

Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. A
gateway is used to connect two different computer networks, especially a connection to the Internet.

Grayscale
Shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of a color image printed in monochrome. Colors
are represented by a range of gray shades from white to black.

Halftone
Halftone is a way of reproducing a photograph or other image in which the various tones of gray or color
are produced by variously sized dots of ink or toner. Halftone simulates grayscale by varying the number
of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller
number of dots.

HDD
A Hard-Disk Drive (HDD) (commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk) is a non-volatile storage
device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

Glossary of terms 3691

 IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional
organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity.

Image scanner
The image scanner (or Sub Scanner Assembly) contains the components to digitally scan an original
source document. The image scanner is a component of the integrated scanner assembly (ADF and
image scanner).

IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that a device uses in order to identify and
communicate with other devices on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.

IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a method of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the
number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete in one minute.

IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing and managing print jobs,
media size, resolution, etc. IPP can be used locally, or over the internet to reach hundreds of printers. IPP
also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a capable and secure printing
solution.

ISA
The Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA) includes the document feeder and image scanner.

ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body
composed of representatives from national standards bodies. In produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.

JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or
quality. It was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used for
other images.

JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a commonly used standard method of loss compression for
photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.

LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying
directory services running over TCP/IP.

LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that can indicate the status of a printer
(formatter LEDs) or a component in a contact image sensor (CIS) scanner that helps capture an image.

LEDM
Low end data model (LEDM) provides one consistent data representation method and defines the
dynamic and capabilities tickets shared between clients and devices, as well as the access protocol,
event, security, and discovery methods.

3692 Glossary of terms

LPDC
Late point differentiation configuration (LPDC) allows the channel partner to configure the speed to the
printer depending on the customer’s order. LPDC configuration is stored on the Trusted Platform Module
(TPM).

LVPS - SMPS
Low Voltage Power Supplies (LVPS) and Switching Mode Power Supplies (SMPS) supply direct current
(DC) voltages to various printer components and assemblies.

MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC
address is a unique 48–bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (for
example, 00–00–0c-34–11–4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by
the manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on a large network.

MEt
HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety
of font- and data-compression methods. MEt is available only in Printer Command Language (PCL) mode;
it is not functional when printing in PostScript (PS) mode.

MFP
A Multi Function Printer (MFP) is a printer that incorporates multiple functionalities in a single physical
body. For example, an MFP printer can scan, digitally send, fax, copy, and print.

MHV
Miniature High Voltage (MHV) is designed for high voltage applications of BNC connectors (DC voltage
between 500 V and 5 kV).

Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a
carrier signal to decode transmitted information.

MPCA (PageWide)
The MPCA integrates both formatter (LaserJet) and engine control electronics (DC controller) into a
single assembly. The Main PCA (MPCA) controls printer functions like receiving and processes print
data, developing and coordinating data placement, storing font and customer configuration information,
communicating with the host computer, and monitoring control panel functions and relaying printer
status information through the control panel.

NAND
NAND is not an acronym (the term is short for NOT AND a Boolean operator and logic gate). NAND
(flash) memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.

NVRAM
Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) is used to store I/O and information about the print
environment configuration (stored data even when the power is turned off).

OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam
emitted from a laser printer. It is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging
unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface during its usage in the printer, and it should
be replaced appropriately due to wear from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning
mechanism, and paper.

Glossary of terms 3693

 Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph, or text which is copied, reproduced, or
translated to produce additional copies. The original itself is not copied or derived from something else.

PCA
Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA). Once the printed circuit board (PCB) is complete, electronic components
must be assembled to form a functional printed circuit assembly or PCA.

PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer
protocol. PCL has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early Inkjet printers, PCL has
been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printers and laser printers.

PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems. A PDF
represents two dimension documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.

PJL
Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition to the standard PCL
and PostScript (PS). With standard cabling, the printer can use PJL to perform a variety of functions like
dynamic I/O switching, context-sensitive switching, and isolation of print environment settings from one
print job to the next.

PML
Printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration of the printer and status read-back
from the printer through the I/O ports.

PostScript (PS)
PostScript (PS) is a Page Description Language (PDL) and programming language used primarily in
electronic and desktop publishing. PostScript is run in an interpreter to generate an image.

PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning
the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.

Print Media
Media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, scanner, fax, or
copier.

Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.

Printhead (PageWide)
The printhead converts the digital firing instructions from the printer electronics into properly formed
and timed microscopic drops of the four ink colors.

Printhead Wiper (PageWide)

The printhead wiper system keeps the printhead nozzles firing correctly throughout the life of the printer
as it performs the wiping and capping functions. The wiping function cleans the nozzles of ink residue
and particulates. The capping function keeps the nozzles moist during storage and when the printer is
idle.

3694 Glossary of terms

Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer
between two computing endpoints.

RAM
Random Access Memory (RAM) is the printer memory device where the data in current use is kept so it
can be quickly retrieved by the device's processor. This memory is an important factor in avoiding errors
and printing documents properly. Printer memory is used to store, and process print jobs as they are
sent to the printer from a computer. After printing, the job is cleared from the memory to make room
for more print jobs. Printer memory is directly linked to two print characteristics: speed and print quality.
More memory allows you to print faster and print larger, high-quality graphics.

REDI sensor
An optical reflective edge detection interrupter (REDI) sensor. Usually used in conjunction with mirrors
to sense the presence or absence of paper in the paper path. These sensors are carefully aligned and
calibrated at the factory, so care must be taken when servicing these sensors.

Resolution
The sharpness of an image is measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the DPI, the greater the
resolution.

SCB
The Scanner Control Board (SCB) controls the functions of the image scanner components in the Sub
Scanner Assembly (SSA).

Service fluid and aerosol management systems (PageWide)

There are two types of service fluid, shipping fluid and ink. The service fluid management system is
contained entirely within the duplex module. Service fluid is discharged as droplets from the printhead,
and then collected in a container inside the duplex module. Some of the droplets are called aerosol
because they are lighter than air. Aerosol can float inside the printer and collect on the lens of optical
sensors, producing false failures. The aerosol management system transports the aerosol and collects
it in a safe place. Aerosol management consists of an aerosol fan, mounted on the rear wall of the air
flow assembly, which creates air flow that pulls the aerosol through the holes in the platen and into the
aerosol filter inside the duplex module.

SFP
A single-function printer only processes print jobs sent from a host computer or from an USB port on the
printer.

SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports,
and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. SMB also provides an authenticated
inter-process communication mechanism.

SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for email transmissions across the internet. SMTP
is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipient of a message is specified, and the
message text is transferred. It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to
the server.

SODIMM
Small outline dual in-line memory module (SODIMM) is a thin profile memory storage device (a smaller
alternative to a standard DIMM device).

Glossary of terms 3695

 SSA
The Sub-Scanner Assembly is the image scanner component of the Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA,
which includes the document feeder and the image scanner).

Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the
address is the network address and which part is the host address.

TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP) are the set of communications
protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the internet and most commercial networks run.

TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bit mapped image format. TIFF describes image
data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images use tags, keywords defining the characteristics
of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for
pictures that have been made by various image processing applications.

Toner Cartridge
A bottle or container that holds toner, which is used in a machine like a printer. Toner is a powder used
in laser printers and photocopiers. The toner forms the text and images on printed paper. Toner can be
fused by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind the fibers in the paper.

TPM
The HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a security accessory for printers. The TPM strengthens
protection of encrypted credentials and data stored on your printer. Certificate private keys are both
generated by and protected by the TPM. Once installed, the printer and the TPM are sealed, and the
printer owns the TPM. The TPM may not be moved to another device without losing its ownership from
the original printer. Installing a TPM accessory might necessitate a firmware upgrade. The TPM prevents
the printer from starting if the TPM is missing. If the TPM is removed from the printer, a control-panel
error message appears indicating that the TPM is missing.

NOTE: The TPM is not a service part for some printer models. Check the printer service manual to determine if
the TPM is a replaceable service part.

TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with TWAIN-
compliant software, a scan can be initiated from the program. TWAIN is an image capture API for
Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.

URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the internet. The
first part of the address indicates what protocol to use. The second part specifies the IP address or the
domain name where the resource is located.

USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to
connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.

Walk-up USB
Some printers support direct printing from a USB flash drive (the walk-up USB port is usually near the
control panel).

3696 Glossary of terms

Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by
transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282. Watermarks have been
used by paper makers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other
government documents to discourage counterfeiting.

XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new
document format developed by Microsoft. This has benefits for portable document and electronic
documents. It is an XML-based specification based on a new print path and vector-based, device-
independent document format.

ZIF Connector
Zero insertion force (ZIF) connectors use a mechanical locking method to secure Flat Flexible Cables
(FFCs) to a Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA).

Glossary of terms 3697

 Index

Symbols/Numerics document feeder simplex ADF cover – 300sh Flow 171

operation 200 ADF FFC
200sh ADF
lift plate unit 196 automatic document
parts and diagrams 3515
pickup unit 197 feeder 1762
200sh ADF 1 of 2
scan and exit unit 200 ADF image scanner cleaning –
parts 3515
ADF – 200sh Flow 191 200sh 204
200sh ADF 2 of 2
ADF cover 191 ADF image scanner cleaning –
parts 3516
ADF image scanner 200sh Flow 204
300sh flow ADF
cleaning 204 ADF image scanner cleaning –
parts and diagrams 3512
ADF PCA 204 300sh Flow 189
300sh flow ADF 1 f 2
ADF sensors 193 ADF PCA – 200sh 204
parts 3512
ADF solenoid 194 ADF PCA – 200sh Flow 204
300sh flow ADF 2 of 2
ADF system motor 194 ADF PCA – 300sh Flow 190
parts 3513
ADF system overview 193 ADF roller – 200sh Flow 194
520-sheet trays
ADF workflow 193 ADF roller – 300sh Flow 175
jams 417
deskew operation 203 ADF sensors – 200sh 193
76.00.24 433
deskew unit 198 ADF sensors – 200sh Flow 193
document feeder hinges ADF sensors – 300sh Flow 173
A
operation 203 ADF solenoid – 200sh Flow 194
accelerator 153 document feeder simplex ADF solenoid – 300sh Flow 175
accelerator card operation 200 ADF system motor – 200sh
removal and lift plate unit 196 Flow 194
replacement 1584 pickup unit 197 ADF system motor – 300sh
accessories scan and exit unit 200 Flow 175
dimensions 1, 6 ADF – 300-sheet Flow ADF system overview –
weight 1, 6 ADF unit 171 200sh 193
acoustic specifications 1, 6 ADF workflow 173 ADF system overview – 200sh
ADF ADF – 300sh Flow 171 Flow 193
removal and ADF cover 171 ADF system overview – 300sh
replacement 1667 ADF image scanner Flow 173
ADF – 00sh Flow cleaning 189 ADF unit – 200-sheet 192
ADF roller 194 ADF PCA 190 ADF unit – 200-sheet Flow 192
ADF – 200-sheet ADF roller 175 ADF unit – 300-sheet Flow 171
ADF unit 192 ADF sensors 173 ADF workflow – 200sh 193
ADF – 200-sheet Flow ADF solenoid 175 ADF workflow – 200sh Flow 193
ADF unit 192 ADF system motor 175 ADF workflow – 300-sheet
ADF – 200sh 191 ADF system overview 173 Flow 173
ADF cover 191 deskew operation 188 ADF, 200-sheet
ADF image scanner deskew unit 182 dn bundle 1735
cleaning 204 document feeder hinges ADF, 200sh
ADF PCA 204 operation 188 parts and diagrams 3515
ADF sensors 193 document feeder simplex ADF, 200sh 1 of 2
ADF system overview 193 operation 185 parts 3515
ADF workflow 193 lift plate unit 177 ADF, 200sh 2 of 2
deskew operation 203 pickup unit 179 parts 3516
deskew unit 198 scan and exit unit 184 ADF, 300-sheet
document feeder hinges ADF cover – 200sh 191 z bundle 1667
operation 203 ADF cover – 200sh Flow 191

3698 Index
ADF, 300sh flow removal and replacement, registration and loop sensors,
parts and diagrams 3512 5QJ90-67011, service parts 3490
ADF, 300sh flow 1 of 2 5QJ90-67012 1751 remove and replace parts 614
parts 3512 automatic document feeder power reservoir , service parts 3496
ADF, 300sh flow 2 of 2 cable sensor, service parts 3506
parts 3513 removal and toner cartridge, service
ADF, tarot HS platen replacement 1715, 1768 parts 3494
parts and diagrams 3516 automatic document feeder toner collection unit, service
after-service checklist 602, 603 printed circuit assembly parts 3498
authorized service providers, removal and toner flow, service parts 3494
parts 601 replacement 1704 tray 1, service parts 3487
automatic document feeder removal and replacement, tray 2, 3, service parts 3489
200-sheet dn bundle 1735 5QJ90-67011, Base printer 45
300-sheet z bundle 1667 5QJ90-67012 1756 before servicing
removal and automatic document feeder rear ESD precautions 601
replacement 1667 cover how to use part lists 601
removal and replacement, removal and ordering parts 601
5QJ90-67011, replacement 1685 remove and replace 601
5QJ90-67012 1735 automatic document feeder top service approach 601
automatic document feeder color cover bin, output
panel removal and locating 1
removal and replacement 1690 booklet diverter unit 324
replacement 1683, 1743 automatic document feeder white operation 326
automatic document feeder backing overview 324
damper module removal and booklet end fence unit 310
removal and replacement 1692, 1746 operation 312
replacement 1729 overview 311
removal and replacement, B booklet entrance unit 307
5QJ90-67011, overview 307
backup error
5QJ90-67012 1781 booklet exit unit 326
32.WX.YZ error 390, 432
automatic document feeder FFC overview 326
reset error 390, 432
removal and booklet finisher
restore error 390, 432
replacement 1762 booklet maker, remove and
base printer
automatic document feeder flat- replace 2681
covers, remove and
flexible cable diverter unit, remove and
replace 614
removal and replace 2942
covers, service parts 3484
replacement 1709 electrical mechanical
CPR, service parts 3505
automatic document feeder front relationships
developer, service parts 3500
cover diagrams 3666
drum, service parts 3502
removal and end fence unit, remove and
duplex , service parts 3493
replacement 1676 replace 2759
electrical mechanical
automatic document feeder hinge entrance unit, remove and
relationships 3608
kit replace 2703
exit unit , service parts 3492
removal and replacement 1721 fold unit, remove and
fan, service parts 3506
removal and replacement, replace 2880
feeding system, service
5QJ90-67011, miscellaneous parts, remove
parts 3487
5QJ90-67012 1774 and replace 3005
fuser, service parts 3506
automatic document feeder input output tray unit, remove and
image creation, service
tray replace 2978
parts 3499
removal and paddle unit, remove and
ITB, service parts 3503
replacement 1697 replace 2745
laser scanner unit, service
automatic document feeder parts and diagrams 3547,
parts 3499
pickup roller kit 3556
parts and diagrams 3484
removal and PCA, remove and
PCA, service parts 3508
replacement 1700 replace 2989

Index 3699
 presser unit, remove and booklet finisher diverter booklet finisher presser home
replace 2784 removal and sensor
stapler unit, remove and replacement 2942 removal and
replace 2860 booklet finisher diverter motor replacement 2784
booklet finisher 1 of 5 removal and booklet finisher staple cartridge
parts 3547 replacement 2972 removal and
booklet finisher 3 of 5 booklet finisher diverter motor replacement 2877
parts 3551 assembly booklet finisher stapler
booklet finisher 4 of 5 removal and removal and
parts 3553 replacement 2966 replacement 2860
booklet finisher 5 of 5 booklet finisher end fence home booklet finisher tamper
parts 3554 sensor removal and
booklet finisher booklet blade removal and replacement 2789
home sensor replacement 2759 booklet finisher tamper home
removal and booklet finisher end fence motor sensor
replacement 2910 removal and removal and
booklet finisher booklet blade replacement 2772 replacement 2806
motor booklet finisher entrance motor booklet finisher tamper motor
removal and removal and removal and
replacement 2927 replacement 2734 replacement 2824
booklet finisher booklet diverter booklet finisher entrance sensor booklet finisher tamper sensor
home sensor removal and removal and
removal and replacement 2716 replacement 2842
replacement 2959 booklet finisher entrance unit booklet finisher, only
booklet finisher booklet fold motor removal and removal and
removal and replacement 2703 replacement 2680
replacement 2937 booklet finisher entrance-presser booklet fold unit 319
booklet finisher booklet fold motor motor assembly operation 322
assembly removal and overview 319
removal and replacement 2730 booklet maker 247, 307
replacement 2933 booklet finisher harness guide booklet diverter unit 324
booklet finisher booklet maker removal and booklet end fence unit 310
removal and replacement 2691 booklet entrance unit 307
replacement 2681 booklet finisher main PCA booklet exit unit 326
booklet finisher booklet maker removal and booklet finisher, remove and
PCA replacement 2989 replace 2681
removal and booklet finisher output tray booklet fold unit 319
replacement 2995 removal and booklet output tray unit 328
booklet finisher c-fold blade replacement 2978 booklet paddle unit 309
assembly booklet finisher output tray sensor booklet presser unit 312
removal and removal and booklet stapler unit 316
replacement 2880 replacement 2981 booklet tamper unit 314
booklet finisher c-fold blade home booklet finisher paddle home bridge unit 266
sensor sensor covers 252
removal and removal and detailed specifications 247
replacement 2892 replacement 2745 overview 255
booklet finisher c-fold blade motor booklet finisher paddle motor stapler-stacker finisher 268
removal and removal and booklet maker PCA 334
replacement 2904 replacement 2754 booklet or stapler/stacker finishers
booklet finisher c-fold blade motor booklet finisher paddle motor removal and
assembly assembly replacement 2127
removal and removal and booklet output tray unit 328
replacement 2898 replacement 2749 operation 329
overview 328
booklet paddle unit 309

3700 Index
 overview 309 Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit Counts 541
booklet presser unit 312 overview 125 coverage report 542
operation 314 color plane registration sensors CPMD 390
overview 312 removal and CTD Sensor Cleaning 588
booklet staple unit replacement 1429 Custom Color 587
staple and staple color plane registration shutter Drain 579
cartridge 317 driving 128 Engine NVM Read/Write 557
booklet stapler unit 316 color plane registration shutter Enhanced 1200 DPI Print
operation 318 motor Quality 590
overview 316 removal and replacement 1451 Event Log 540, 600
booklet tamper unit 314 color plane registration shutter Fax menu (fax models
operation 316 sensor only) 390, 401, 435, 534
overview 314 removal and Fax Reports 594
bridge unit 266 replacement 1439 Fax Service Log 596
external finisher, remove and color plane registration unit Fax Speaker Mode 596
replace 2192 removal and Fax T.30 Trace Report 595
overview 266 replacement 1418 Fax V.29 Speed 584
print quality diagnostic 381 Color Toner Density (CTD) Fax V.34 595
buffer unit 302 operation 128 Finisher Adjustment 548
external finisher, remove and component test Footer 582
replace 2669 special mode test 390, 398, Full Auto Color
operation 305 400 Registration 586
overview 302 components Humidity 581
diagnostic tests 390, 398, 400 Import/Export 585
C connector error JBIG Compression 595
65.WX.YZ error 390, 433 License Management 590
cables
control panel 137, 139 locating 1
automatic document feeder,
10.1 inch 137 locating features 4
power 1715, 1768
8 inch 137, 139 Low Alerts 544
Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control
ACR Reference Low-temperature Idling
panel 390, 401, 435
Adjustment 585 Mode 579
cassette 47
ACS Page Adjustment 546 Maintenance menu 584
caution vi
Advanced Print Quality Manual Tone Adjustment 589
certificate of volatility 3685
Pages 599 Other Pages 594
Channel partners
Altitude Adjustment 580 overview 137, 139
WISE 420
Auto Color Registration 586 Paper Path Page 600
checklists
Auto Tone Adjustment 587 Part Replacement Count 582
after-service 602, 603
Backup/Restore 585 PQ Troubleshooting
preservice 602, 603
Backup/Restore menu 390, Pages 596
cleaning page 390, 401, 435
401, 435 Print Adjustment 546
cleaning the paper dust stick 34
Buckle Adjustment 547 Print menu 390, 401, 435, 538
cleaning the scan glass 34
Calibrate Scanner 590 PTT Test Mode 582
cleaning unit kit, ITB
Calibrate/Cleaning menu 390, removal and
removal and
401, 435 replacement 1557
replacement 1415
cleaning page 585 remove and replace
clutches
Cold Reset Paper 544 parts 1557
Tray 1 clutch 773
Color Band Test 599 Reports menu 390, 401, 435,
color plane registration
Color Calibration 589 452
remove and replace
Component tests 569 Reset Engine NVM 556
parts 1418
Configuration/Status Reset Supplies 583
Color Plane Registration (CPR)
Pages 594 Reset Supplies Level 544
unit 124
Consumables Access Retrieve Diagnostic Data 600
Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit
Control 545 Retrieve Fax Diagnostic
operation 127
Copy menu (MFP only) 390, Data 600
401, 435, 496 Run Fax Test 600

Index 3701
 Scan menu 505 DCF rear cover 1918 removal and replacement,
Scan menu (MFP only) 390, DCF right cover 1916 external finisher booklet
401, 435 DCF right door 1922 front cover 2190
Scanner Settings 542 DCF Tray 4, 5 color panel 1924 removal and replacement,
Sensors 559 DCF, remove and replace 1916 external finisher booklet
Serial Number 543 document feeder color output tray 2150
Service ID 543 panel 1683, 1743 removal and replacement,
Service menu 539 document feeder front 1676 external finisher
Service Reports 546 document feeder rear 1685 caster 2184
Setting Standard Tone 588 document feeder top 1690 removal and replacement,
Settings menu 390, 401, 435, dual cassette feeder left external finisher caster
454 cover 1920 cover 2130
Software Version 545 dual cassette feeder rear removal and replacement,
Supplies menu 390, 401, 435, cover 1918 external finisher caster fix
538 dual cassette feeder right nut 2187
Test Support 582 cover 1916 removal and replacement,
TR Control Mode 577 dual cassette feeder right external finisher front
Trays menu 390, 401, 435, 539 door 1922 cover 2159
troubleshooting menu 390, dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 removal and replacement,
401, 435 color panel 1924 external finisher front
Troubleshooting menu 593 exit cover stacker 682 door 2127
USB Firmware Upgrade 590 exit rear cover 622 removal and replacement,
USB Firmware Upgrade external finisher, remove and external finisher front lower
menu 390, 401, 435 replace 2127 left cover 2175
Vapor Mode 581 flatbed scanner 1796 removal and replacement,
control panel base PCA 165 front cover 703 external finisher front lower
control panel diagnostic front cover CMF panel 705 right cover 2180
flowcharts 390, 393 front lower cover 700 removal and replacement,
control panel menus 390, 401, hardware integration pocket external finisher left lower
435 [HIP] 678 cover 2132
control panel messages 431 HCI, remove and replace 2017 removal and replacement,
control panel PCA 165 high capacity input front CMF external finisher left upper
control panel base PCA 165 panel 2025 cover 2140
control panel PCA – 10.1 high capacity input left removal and replacement,
inch 166 cover 2021 external finisher main output
control panel PCA – 8 inch 166 high capacity input rear tray 2155
control panel PCA – 10.1 inch 166 cover 2019 removal and replacement,
control panel PCA – 8 inch 166 high capacity input right external finisher punch
controller cover cover 2017 cover 2164
removal and replacement 620 high capacity input right removal and replacement,
conventions used vi door 2023 external finisher rear
Copy menu (MFP only), control HIP 678 cover 2157
panel 390, 401, 435, 496 inner cover 685 removal and replacement,
copy specifications 1, 6 inner finisher, remove and external finisher right upper
CoV replace 3017 cover 2172
certificate of volatility 3685 left cover 632 removal and replacement,
cover left top cover 626 external finisher shaft hinge -
inner finisher 340 left upper cover 628 door 2182
covers middle left 680 removal and replacement,
base printer, remove and middle upper cover 635 external finisher top
replace 614 parts 3484 cover 2166
base printer, service power key 669 removal and replacement,
parts 3484 rear lower 618 external finisher top
controller 620 rear upper 614 door 2168
DCF left cover 1920

3702 Index
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, sHCI covers 2 of 2
external finisher top jam pickup cover 1830 theory of operation 46
cover assembly 2245 removal and replacement, sHCI CPMD 431
removal and replacement, rear cover 1823 CPR
external finisher top output removal and replacement, sHCI electrical mechanical
tray 2152 rear top cover 1827 relationships
removal and replacement, HCI removal and replacement, sHCI diagrams 3623
front CMF panel 2025 right cover 1820 parts 3505
removal and replacement, HCI removal and replacement, sHCI removal and
left cover 2021 top cover 1833 replacement 1418
removal and replacement, HCI right door 716 remove and replace
rear cover 2019 right door front damper 726 parts 1418
removal and replacement, HCI right door front damper CPR sensors
right cover 2017 bracket 731 removal and
removal and replacement, HCI right door front link 721 replacement 1429
right door 2023 right door sHCI dummy CPR shutter motor
removal and replacement, inner cover 638 removal and replacement 1451
finisher front cover right front cover 651 CPR shutter sensor
assembly 3017 right middle 661 removal and
removal and replacement, inner right middle assembly 653 replacement 1439
finisher middle cover right rear cover 648 CRUM module assembly
assembly 3027 right upper 640 removal and
removal and replacement, inner sHCI, remove and replacement 1149
finisher output tray replace 1820 current settings pages 390, 401
assembly 3037 side high capacity input door
removal and replacement, inner links 1st 1845 D
finisher PCA cover 3041 side high capacity input door
DC controller communication error
removal and replacement, inner links 2nd 1850
55.WX.YZ error 390, 433
finisher punch cover side high capacity input front
DC controller firmware error
assembly 3033 cover 1838
70.WX.YZ error 390, 433
removal and replacement, inner side high capacity input front
DCF 45
finisher rear base top cover 1841
covers, remove and
cover 3055 side high capacity input
replace 1916
removal and replacement, inner harness cover 1825
electrical mechanical
finisher rear punch side high capacity input link
relationships
cover 3059 holder 1855
diagrams 3644
removal and replacement, inner side high capacity input pickup
harness, remove and
finisher sub cover 1830
replace 1987
stayassembly 3044 side high capacity input rear
motor, remove and
removal and replacement, inner cover 1823
replace 1936
finisher top cover side high capacity input rear
PCA, remove and replace 1987
assembly 3021 top cover 1827
roller, remove and
removal and replacement, sHCI side high capacity input right
replace 1933
door links 1st 1845 cover 1820
sensor, remove and
removal and replacement, sHCI side high capacity input top
replace 1950
door links 2nd 1850 cover 1833
unit parts, remove and
removal and replacement, sHCI stapler-stacker finisher and
replace 1931
front cover 1838 booklet maker 252
DCF (department)
removal and replacement, sHCI TCU cover and CMF panel 709
removal and
front top cover 1841 tie stoppers 698
replacement 1916
removal and replacement, sHCI tray 1 unit 736
DCF 1 of 2
harness cover 1825 tray 2 color panel 712
parts 3519
removal and replacement, sHCI tray 3 color panel 714
DCF 2 of 2
link holder 1855 covers (1 of 2)
parts 3521
theory of operation 45

Index 3703
 DCF caster wheel DCF Tray 4 paper stack height defeating
removal and sensor interlocks 390, 398, 399
replacement 1927 removal and definitions and terms
DCF feed drive assembly replacement 1957 glossary 3688
removal and DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly Department Dual Cassette Feeder
replacement 1944 removal and (DCF, Tray 4, 5) 210
DCF feed motor replacement 1953 covers 210
removal and DCF Tray 4 pickup motor feeding system workflow 211
replacement 1947 removal and motor operation 219
DCF feed sensor replacement 1939 motors 217
removal and DCF Tray 4 prefeed sensor operation 218
replacement 1981 removal and PCA 220
DCF holder wheel kit replacement 1961 rollers 212
removal and DCF Tray 4, 5 cassette sensors 215
replacement 1929 removal and unit 212
DCF IF harness replacement 1931 Department High Capacity Input
removal and DCF Tray 4, 5 color panel tray (HCI, Tray 4) 222
replacement 1996 removal and covers 222
DCF left cover replacement 1924 motor operation 229
removal and DCF Tray 4, 5 paper size sensors motors 226
replacement 1920 removal and operation 229
DCF motor harness 2nd replacement 1950 PCA 231
removal and DCF Tray 4, 5 rollers rollers 224
replacement 2003 removal and sensors 225
DCF PCA replacement 1933 sub PCA 232
removal and DCF Tray 5 paper empty sensor unit 223
replacement 1990 removal and replacement 1971 workflow 222
DCF pickup drive assembly DCF Tray 5 paper stack height Department Side High Capacity
removal and sensor Input device (sHCI, Tray 5 or
replacement 1936 removal and replacement 1971 6) 233
DCF rear cover DCF Tray 5 pickup assembly covers 233
removal and removal and feeding system workflow 235
replacement 1918 replacement 1966 motor operation 245
DCF right cover DCF Tray 5 pickup motor motors 241
removal and removal and operation 244
replacement 1916 replacement 1942 PCA 245
DCF right door DCF Tray 5 prefeed sensor rollers 238
removal and removal and sensors 239
replacement 1922 replacement 1975 unit 237
DCF right door open switch holder DCF tray heaters department stand 209
removal and removal and deskew operation – 200sh 203
replacement 1992 replacement 1987 deskew operation – 200sh
DCF sensor harness 1st DCF, Tray 4, 5 210 Flow 203
removal and cover 210 deskew operation – 300sh
replacement 2005 feeding system workflow 211 Flow 188
DCF sensor harness 2nd motor operation 219 deskew unit – 200sh 198
removal and motors 217 deskew unit – 200sh Flow 198
replacement 2009 operation 218 deskew unit – 300sh Flow 182
DCF size harness PCA 220 determine problem source 390
removal and roller 212 developer
replacement 2013 sensors 215 electrical mechanical
DCF Tray 4 paper empty sensor unit 212 relationships
removal and decoding diagrams 3619
replacement 1957 message 390 parts 3500

3704 Index
developer and drum document feeder error parts and diagrams 3519
remove and replace 31.WX.YZ error 390, 432 PCA, remove and replace 1987
parts 1341 document feeder hinges operation roller, remove and
developer and drum unit – 200sh 203 replace 1933
driving 115 document feeder hinges operation sensor, remove and
developer and drum unit – 200sh Flow 203 replace 1950
operation 114 document feeder hinges operation unit parts, remove and
developer and drum unit – 300sh Flow 188 replace 1931
overview 110 document feeder simplex dual cassette feeder (department)
developer drive assembly operation – 200sh 200 removal and
removal and document feeder simplex replacement 1916
replacement 1362 operation – 200sh Flow 200 dual cassette feeder 1 of 2
developer motor K document feeder simplex parts 3519
removal and operation – 300sh Flow 185 dual cassette feeder 2 of 2
replacement 1382 document feeder skew (LX du parts 3521
developer motor Y/M/C models) 390 dual cassette feeder caster wheel
removal and door open switch and harness removal and
replacement 1379 removal and replacement 1927
developer powder. replacement 1999 dual cassette feeder door open
removal and drive system 45 switch and harness
replacement 1353 drivers, supported 1, 6 removal and
developer unit 110 drives replacement 1999
developer unit. feed drive assembly 883 dual cassette feeder feed drive
removal and tray 2 pickup drive assembly
replacement 1345 assembly 830 removal and
diagnostics tray 3 pickup drive replacement 1944
adjustment 390 assembly 838 dual cassette feeder feed motor
component 390, 398, 400 drum removal and
engine 390, 398, 399 electrical mechanical replacement 1947
fax 390 relationships dual cassette feeder feed sensor
image management 390 diagrams 3621 removal and
LED 390, 398 parts 3502 replacement 1981
print test patterns 390 drum CRUM PCA 163 dual cassette feeder holder wheel
scanner 390 drum drive assembly kit
diagrams removal and removal and
use parts lists and replacement 1362 replacement 1929
diagrams 601 drum home sensor dual cassette feeder IF harness
digital sending error (firmware) removal and removal and
44.WX.YZ error 390, 432 replacement 1376 replacement 1996
dimensions drum motor K and ITB dual cassette feeder left cover
accessories 1, 6 removal and removal and
printer 1, 6 replacement 1373 replacement 1920
diverter unit 352 drum motor Y/M/C dual cassette feeder motor
booklet finisher, remove and removal and harness 2nd
replace 2942 replacement 1369 removal and
operation 353 drum unit 110 replacement 2003
overview 352 removal and dual cassette feeder PCA
diverter unit operation 353 replacement 1341 removal and
diverter unit overview 352 dual cassette feeder 45 replacement 1990
document feeder covers, remove and dual cassette feeder pickup drive
jams 414 replace 1916 assembly
locating 1 harness, remove and removal and
document feeder / image scanner replace 1987 replacement 1936
assembly motor, remove and
parts and diagrams 3510 replace 1936

Index 3705
 dual cassette feeder rear cover dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 E
removal and paper size sensors
easy-access USB port
replacement 1918 removal and
locating 1
dual cassette feeder right cover replacement 1950
echo PCA 159
removal and dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5
removal and
replacement 1916 rollers
replacement 1600
dual cassette feeder right door removal and
ejector unit 293, 369
removal and replacement 1933
external finisher, remove and
replacement 1922 dual cassette feeder Tray 5 paper
replace 2510
dual cassette feeder right door empty sensor
inner finisher, remove and
open switch holder removal and replacement 1971
replace 3338
removal and dual cassette feeder Tray 5 paper
operation 295, 371
replacement 1992 stack height sensor
overview 293, 369
dual cassette feeder sensor removal and replacement 1971
ejector unit operation 371
harness 1st dual cassette feeder Tray 5 pickup
ejector unit overview 369
removal and assembly
electrical mechanical relationships
replacement 2005 removal and
base printer 3608
dual cassette feeder sensor replacement 1966
electrical mechanical
harness 2nd dual cassette feeder Tray 5 pickup
relationships diagrams 3608
removal and motor
booklet finisher 3666
replacement 2009 removal and
CPR 3623
dual cassette feeder size harness replacement 1942
DCF 3644
removal and dual cassette feeder Tray 5
developer 3619
replacement 2013 prefeed sensor
drum 3621
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 paper removal and
duplex 3613
empty sensor replacement 1975
exit unit 3612
removal and dual cassette feeder tray heaters
fuser 3624
replacement 1957 removal and
HCI 3648
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 paper replacement 1987
inner finisher 3656
stack height sensor duplex
input devices 3644
removal and electrical mechanical
itb 3622
replacement 1957 relationships
lsu 3617
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 pickup diagrams 3613
output devices 3656
assembly parts 3493
PCA 3629
removal and duplex 1 motor
registration and loop
replacement 1953 removal and
sensors 3611
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 pickup replacement 1074
reservoir 3615
motor duplex 2 motor
sensor and fan 3626
removal and removal and replacement 1111
sHCI 3653
replacement 1939 duplex assembly
stapler-stacker finisher 3666
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 removal and
toner cartridge 3614
prefeed sensor replacement 1091
toner collection unit 3616
removal and duplex jam 1 sensor
tray 1 3608
replacement 1961 removal and
tray 2/3 3609
dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 replacement 1058
electrical specifications 1, 6
cassette duplex jam 2 sensor
electrostatic discharge
removal and removal and replacement 1101
(ESD) 602
replacement 1931 duplex unit 79
Embedded Jetdirect error
dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 color remove and replace
80.WX.YZ error 390, 433
panel parts 1091
end fence unit 284, 361
removal and duplex unit driving 82
booklet finisher, remove and
replacement 1924 duplex unit operation 81
replace 2759
duplexer error
external finisher, remove and
69.WX.YZ error 390, 433
replace 2363

3706 Index
 inner finisher, remove and ITB, remove and replace engine error (LaserJet)
replace 3254 parts 1392 46.WX.YZ error 390, 432
operation 285, 362 ITB, service parts 3503 63.WX.YZ error 390, 433
overview 284, 361 laser scanner unit, remove and engine error (PageWide)
end fence unit operation 362 replace parts 1334 61.WX.YZ error 390, 433
end fence unit overview 361 laser scanner unit, service engine, printer
engine parts 3499 parts and diagrams 3484
color plane registration, remove loop sensing unit, remove and entrance unit 268, 350
and replace parts 1418 replace parts 912 booklet finisher, remove and
control panel, remove and LSU, remove and replace replace 2703
replace parts 1557 parts 1334 external finisher, remove and
covers, remove and main PCAs, remove and replace replace 2220
replace 614 parts 1561 inner finisher, remove and
covers, service parts 3484 main printed circuit assembly, replace 3095
CPR, remove and replace remove and replace overview 268, 350
parts 1418 parts 1561 entrance unit overview 350
CPR, service parts 3505 PCA, service parts 3508 environmental sensor 133
developer and drum, remove PCAs, remove and replace environmental sensor, fan, switch
and replace parts 1341 parts 1561 overview 133
developer, service parts 3500 power supply PCAs, remove and environmental sensor, switch, and
diagnostics 390, 398, 399 replace parts 1642 fan
drum, service parts 3502 power supply printed circuit remove and replace
duplex , service parts 3493 assembly, remove and parts 1490
duplex unit, remove and replace replace parts 1642 eraser PCA 164
parts 1091 printed circuit assembly, error
environmental sensor, switch, remove and replace fault 390
and fan 1490 parts 1561 ESD electrostatic discharge
exit unit , service parts 3492 registration and loop sensors, (ESD) 602
exit unit, remove and replace service parts 3490 Ethernet (RJ-45)
parts 982 registration unit, remove and locating 3
fan, service parts 3506 replace parts 912 event log 390, 401
feeding system, remove and remove and replace parts 614 clear using touchscreen control
replace parts 716 reservoir , service parts 3496 panel 390, 401
feeding system, right door reservoir unit, remove and find links to information 404
assemblies remove and replace parts 1157 event log error (firmware)
replace parts 716 sensor, service parts 3506 42.WX.YZ error 390, 432
feeding system, service sub PCAs, remove and replace exit 2 motor
parts 3487 parts 1584 removal and
feeding system, Tray 1 unit sub printed circuit assembly, replacement 1028
remove and replace remove and replace exit 2 sensor
parts 736 parts 1584 removal and
feeding system, Tray 2-3 units toner cartridge, remove and replacement 1043
remove and replace replace parts 1117 exit cover stacker
parts 786 toner cartridge, service removal and replacement 682
fuser unit, remove and replace parts 3494 exit rear cover
parts 1463 toner collection unit, remove removal and replacement 622
fuser, service parts 3506 and replace parts 1180 exit stack guide
image creation, remove and toner collection unit, service removal and
replace parts 1334 parts 3498 replacement 1089
image creation, service toner flow, remove and replace exit unit 73, 354
parts 3499 parts 1117 electrical mechanical
image transfer belt, remove and toner flow, service parts 3494 relationships
replace parts 1392 tray 1, service parts 3487 diagrams 3612
ITB cleaning unit, remove and tray 2, 3, service parts 3489 inner finisher, remove and
replace parts 1415 replace 3147

Index 3707
 overview 354 external finisher bridge door external finisher end fence motor
parts 3492 sensor removal and
removal and replacement 982 removal and replacement 2382
remove and replace parts 982 replacement 2196 external finisher end fence motor
exit unit driving 78 external finisher bridge entrance assembly
exit unit for duplex printing 78 sensor removal and
exit unit for simplex printing 77 removal and replacement 2377
exit unit overview 354 replacement 2202 external finisher entrance motor
exploded parts views, use parts external finisher bridge exit sensor removal and
lists and diagrams 601 removal and replacement 2239
external booklet 2 of 5 replacement 2207 external finisher entrance motor
parts 3549 external finisher bridge motor assembly
external finisher removal and removal and
bridge unit, remove and replacement 2214 replacement 2235
replace 2192 external finisher bridge unit external finisher entrance sensor
buffer unit, remove and removal and removal and
replace 2669 replacement 2192 replacement 2220
covers, remove and external finisher buffer motor external finisher exit motor
replace 2127 removal and removal and
ejector unit, remove and replacement 2676 replacement 2286
replace 2510 external finisher buffer solenoid external finisher exit motor
end fence unit, remove and assembly assembly
replace 2363 removal and removal and
entrance unit, remove and replacement 2669 replacement 2283
replace 2220 external finisher caster external finisher front cover
main exit unit, remove and removal and removal and
replace 2308 replacement 2184 replacement 2159
main output tray unit, remove external finisher caster cover external finisher front door
and replace 2585 removal and removal and
paddle unit, remove and replacement 2130 replacement 2127
replace 2336 external finisher caster fix nut external finisher front door switch
paper holding unit, remove and removal and removal and
replace 2630 replacement 2187 replacement 2330
punch unit, remove and external finisher ejector 1 home external finisher front lower left
replace 2243 sensor cover
stapler unit, remove and removal and removal and
replace 2473 replacement 2540 replacement 2175
tamper unit, remove and external finisher ejector 1 motor external finisher front lower right
replace 2407 sensor cover
top exit unit, remove and removal and removal and
replace 2273 replacement 2555 replacement 2180
top output tray unit, remove and external finisher ejector 2 motor external finisher front paper
replace 2289 sensor holding sensor
tray diverter unit, remove and removal and removal and
replace 2245 replacement 2570 replacement 2630
external finisher booklet front external finisher ejector sensor external finisher front tamper
cover removal and removal and
removal and replacement 2524 replacement 2407
replacement 2190 external finisher ejector unit external finisher front tamper
external finisher booklet output removal and home sensor
tray replacement 2510 removal and
removal and external finisher end fence home replacement 2418
replacement 2150 sensor
removal and
replacement 2363

3708 Index
external finisher front tamper external finisher main output tray external finisher right upper cover
motor top of stack switch lower guide removal and
removal and removal and replacement 2172
replacement 2430 replacement 2398 external finisher shaft hinge - door
external finisher left lower cover external finisher mounting removal and
removal and brackets replacement 2182
replacement 2132 removal and external finisher staple cartridge
external finisher left upper cover replacement 3006 removal and
removal and external finisher paddle replacement 2479
replacement 2140 removal and external finisher stapler front
external finisher main exit cam replacement 2336 sensor
home sensor external finisher paddle home removal and
removal and sensor replacement 2481
replacement 2320 removal and external finisher stapler manual
external finisher main exit cam replacement 2351 staple sensor
motor external finisher paddle motor removal and
removal and removal and replacement 2496
replacement 2325 replacement 2357 external finisher stapler mid-front
external finisher main exit cam external finisher paddle motor sensor
motor assembly assembly removal and
removal and removal and replacement 2489
replacement 2315 replacement 2346 external finisher stapler mid-rear
external finisher main exit sensor external finisher paper holding sensor
removal and home sensor removal and
replacement 2308 removal and replacement 2489
external finisher main output tray replacement 2643 external finisher stapler position
removal and external finisher paper holding motor
replacement 2155, 2585 motor drive assembly removal and
external finisher main output tray removal and replacement 2502
lower limit sensor replacement 2656 external finisher stapler unit
removal and external finisher punch cover removal and
replacement 2600 removal and replacement 2473
external finisher main output tray replacement 2164 external finisher stapler/stacker or
motor drive assembly external finisher punch unit booklet finishers
removal and removal and removal and
replacement 2616 replacement 2243 replacement 2127
external finisher main output tray external finisher rear cover external finisher top cover
motor sensor removal and removal and
removal and replacement 2157 replacement 2166
replacement 2612 external finisher rear paper external finisher top door
external finisher main output tray holding sensor removal and
top of stack sensor removal and replacement 2168
removal and replacement 2630 external finisher top door open
replacement 2588 external finisher rear tamper switch
external finisher main output tray removal and removal and
top of stack switch replacement 2440 replacement 2253
removal and external finisher rear tamper home external finisher top exit sensor
replacement 2620 sensor removal and
external finisher main output tray removal and replacement 2273
top of stack switch guide replacement 2450 external finisher top jam cover
removal and external finisher rear tamper assembly
replacement 2388 motor removal and
removal and replacement 2245
replacement 2461

Index 3709
 external finisher top lower feed feed motor FFC
assembly removal and replacement 891 automatic document
removal and Tray 2 65 feeder 1709
replacement 2289 feed roller finisher main PCA - shared 331
external finisher top output tray Tray 2 65 firmware communication error
removal and feed sensor 49.WX.YZ error 390, 432
replacement 2152 Tray 2 65 firmware install error
external finisher top output tray feeding system 45, 47 99.WX.YZ error 390, 433
paper full sensor cassette 47 hard disk error 390, 433
removal and duplex unit 79 remote firmware upgrade
replacement 2301 duplex unit driving 82 error 390, 433
external finisher tray diverter duplex unit operation 81 flat-flexible cable
removal and exit unit 73 automatic document
replacement 2249 exit unit driving 78 feeder 1709
external finisher tray diverter cam exit unit for duplex printing 78 flatbed scanner
removal and exit unit for simplex printing 77 covers 1796
replacement 2257 job separator 76 harness 1798
external finisher tray diverter loop sensing 70 PCA 1798
home sensor loop sensor 72 sensor 1798
removal and main components and whole unit replacement 1788
replacement 2265 functions 47 flatbed scanner (Tarot HS)
external finisher tray extension motors 51 removal and
removal and MP feeder assembly 47 replacement 1788
replacement 2298 overview 47 flatbed scanner system 45
external finisher, booklet maker pickup unit 47 flatbed, FFC 50 pin
parts and diagrams 3547, registration unit 47, 70, 72 removal and
3556 registration unit driving 73 replacement 1802
external finisher, stapler/stacker remove and replace parts 716 flatbed, FFC 68 pin
parts and diagrams 3540 right door assemblies, remove removal and
and replace parts 716 replacement 1807
F rollers 47, 48 flatbed, open sensor
sensor, motor, and solenoid 47 removal and replacement 1817
fan error
sensors 50 flatbed, PCA
58.WX.YZ error 390, 433
solenoids 51 removal and
fans 133
Tray 1 53 replacement 1798
FDB fan 1507
Tray 1 unit, remove and replace flatbed, power cable
front fan assembly 1514
parts 736 removal and
laser scanner unit fan 1532
Tray 2 cassette 58 replacement 1812
LVPS fan 1503
Tray 2 pickup assembly 60 flatbed, rear cover
parts 3507
Tray 2-3 units, remove and removal and
fax card
replace parts 786 replacement 1796
removal and
Tray 3 cassette 58 flatbed, whole unit
replacement 1639
Tray 3 pickup assembly 60 removal and
Fax menu (fax models only), control
workflow 48 replacement 1788
panel 390, 401, 435, 534
feeding system information 47, flow ADF skew (LX du
FDB
58 models) 390
removal and
duplex unit 79 fold unit
replacement 1652
exit unit 73 booklet finisher, remove and
FDB fan
loop sensing 70 replace 2880
removal and
registration unit 70 formatter 143
replacement 1507
Tray 1 unit 53 locating 1, 2
feed 2 sensor
Tray 2 unit 57 removal and
removal and replacement 902
Tray 3 unit 57 replacement 1561
feed drive assembly
feeding system overview 47 formatter lights 390, 398
removal and replacement 883
feeding system workflow 48

3710 Index
front cover removal and PCA overview 140
removal and replacement 703 replacement 1463 power key PCA 160
front cover CMF panel remove and replace riser card 151
removal and replacement 705 parts 1463 riser card for HDD 151
front door fuser unit temperature riser card for HDD, USB ports,
locating 1 control 131 and accelerator board 152
front door switch fuser wrap jam sensor 132 solid-state drive 154
removal and storage 154
replacement 1536 G SVC-internal USB expansion
front fan assembly kit 152
General Settings menu, control
removal and replacement 1514 toner cartridge CRUM
panel 390, 401, 435, 454
front lower cover PCA 163
general specifications 1, 6
removal and replacement 700 Toner Collection Unit full sensor
glass cleaning
fuser PCA 162
image scanner and flat-bed
electrical mechanical Trusted Platform Module
glass 207
relationships (TPM) 150
glossary
diagrams 3624 USB hub PCA 158
terms and definitions 3688
jams 419 hardware configuration
guides
parts 3506 information 140
left cable guide 1385
fuser and exit drive assembly hardware configurationcontrol
right cable guide 1389
removal and panel PCA – 10.1 inch 166
replacement 1465 H hardware integration pocket (HIP)
fuser and exit motor locating 1
removal and replacement 1471 hard disk hardware integration pocket (HIP)
fuser CRUM PCA 164 removal and is not functioning 390, 393,
fuser drive assembly 45 replacement 1579 397
fuser drive board hard disk cradle hardware integration pocket [HIP]
removal and removal and removal and replacement 678
replacement 1652 replacement 1575 harnesses
Fuser Drive Board (FDB) 170 hard disk partition error DCF, remove and replace 1987
fuser drive board fan 98.WX.YZ error 390, 433 flatbed scanner 1798
removal and hard-disk drive 157 HCI, remove and replace 2105
replacement 1507 hard-disk drive rivet removal and replacement, DCF
fuser driving 133 removal and IF harness 1996
fuser error replacement 1573 removal and replacement, dual
41.WX.YZ error 390, 432 hardware configuration 45, 140 cassette feeder door open
laser scanner error 390, 432 accelerator 153 switch and harness 1999
paper path error 390, 432 control panel base PCA 165 removal and replacement, dual
fuser error (LaserJet) control panel PCA 165 cassette feeder IF
50.WX.YZ error 390, 433 control panel PCA – 8 inch 166 harness 1996
fuser fan duct drum CRUM PCA 163 removal and replacement, dual
removal and echo PCA 159 cassette feeder motor
replacement 1528 eraser PCA 164 harness 2nd 2003
fuser gap motor formatter 143 removal and replacement, dual
removal and fuser CRUM PCA 164 cassette feeder sensor
replacement 1476 Fuser Drive Board (FDB) 170 harness 1st 2005
fuser gap sensor 131 hard-disk drive 157 removal and replacement, dual
removal and High Voltage Power Supply cassette feeder sensor
replacement 1480 (HVPS) 167 harness 2nd 2009
fuser out sensor island of data (IOD) 159 removal and replacement, dual
removal and replacement 972 keyboard PCA 161 cassette feeder size
fuser out sensor harness Lower Voltage Power Supply harness 2013
removal and replacement 976 (LVPS) 169 removal and replacement, high
fuser unit 129 overview 140 capacity input DC motor
overview 129 paper size sensor PCA 162 IF 2117

Index 3711
 removal and replacement, high HCI gate solenoid home sensor HCI shift gate solenoid
capacity input inner drawer removal and removal and
IF 2124 replacement 2098, 2101 replacement 2064
removal and replacement, high HCI holder wheel kit HCI shift motor
capacity input main IF removal and removal and
harness 2112 replacement 2029 replacement 2044
removal and replacement, high HCI inner drawer IF HCI shift plate
capacity input motor removal and removal and
IF 2120 replacement 2124 replacement 2048
removal and replacement, high HCI knockup home sensor HCI shift tray empty sensor
capacity input sub tray IF removal and removal and
harness 2115 replacement 2083 replacement 2092
HCI 45 HCI knockup plate HCI shift tray end sensor
covers, remove and removal and removal and
replace 2017 replacement 2053 replacement 2083
electrical mechanical HCI left rear HCI shift tray home sensor
relationships removal and removal and
diagrams 3648 replacement 2021 replacement 2092
harness, remove and HCI lift motor HCI shift tray level sensor 1 and 2
replace 2105 removal and removal and
motor, remove and replacement 2044 replacement 2088
replace 2044 HCI main IF harness HCI sub PCA
PCA, remove and removal and replacement 2112 removal and
replace 2105 HCI motor IF replacement 2108
roller, remove and removal and HCI sub tray IF harness
replace 2040 replacement 2120 removal and
sensor, remove and HCI paper gate replacement 2115
replace 2068 removal and HCI Tray 4 paper empty sensor
unit parts, remove and replacement 2056 removal and
replace 2031 HCI PCA replacement 2079
HCI (department) removal and HCI Tray 4 paper stack height
removal and replacement 2105 sensor
replacement 2017 HCI pickup assembly removal and
HCI 1 of 2 removal and replacement 2079
parts 3523 replacement 2036 HCI tray open sensor
HCI 2 of 2 HCI pickup motor drive removal and
parts 3525 removal and replacement 2096
HCI cassette replacement 2062 HCI unit
removal and HCI prefeed 4 sensor removal and
replacement 2034 removal and replacement 2031
HCI caster wheel replacement 2068 HCI, Tray 4 222
removal and HCI right cover covers 222
replacement 2027 removal and motor operation 229
HCI DC motor IF replacement 2017 motors 226
removal and replacement 2117 HCI right door operation 229
HCI feed motor drive removal and PCA 231
removal and replacement 2023 rollers 224
replacement 2059 HCI right rear sensors 225
HCI feed sensor removal and sub PCA 232
removal and replacement 2019 unit 223
replacement 2074 HCI rollers workflow 222
HCI front CMF panel removal and HDD
removal and replacement 2040 removal and
replacement 2025 replacement 1579

3712 Index
HDD, cradle high capacity input gate solenoid high capacity input right door
removal and home sensor removal and
replacement 1575 removal and replacement 2023
HDD, riser card and cradle replacement 2098, 2101 high capacity input rollers
removal and high capacity input holder wheel removal and
replacement 1568 kit replacement 2040
Help button removal and high capacity input shift gate
locating 4 replacement 2029 solenoid
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port high capacity input inner drawer IF removal and
locating 3 removal and replacement 2064
high capacity input replacement 2124 high capacity input shift motor
covers, remove and high capacity input knockup home removal and
replace 2017 sensor replacement 2044
harness, remove and removal and high capacity input shift plate
replace 2105 replacement 2083 removal and
motor, remove and high capacity input knockup plate replacement 2048
replace 2044 removal and high capacity input shift tray
parts and diagrams 3523 replacement 2053 empty sensor
PCA, remove and high capacity input left cover removal and
replace 2105 removal and replacement 2092
roller, remove and replacement 2021 high capacity input shift tray end
replace 2040 high capacity input lift motor sensor
sensor, remove and removal and removal and
replace 2068 replacement 2044 replacement 2083
unit parts, remove and high capacity input main IF high capacity input shift tray home
replace 2031 harness sensor
high capacity input (department) removal and replacement 2112 removal and
removal and high capacity input motor IF replacement 2092
replacement 2017 removal and high capacity input shift tray level
high capacity input 1 of 2 replacement 2120 sensor 1 and 2
parts 3523 high capacity input paper gate removal and
high capacity input 2 of 2 removal and replacement 2088
parts 3525 replacement 2056 high capacity input sub PCA
high capacity input cassette high capacity input PCA removal and
removal and removal and replacement 2108
replacement 2034 replacement 2105 high capacity input sub tray IF
high capacity input caster wheel high capacity input pickup harness
removal and assembly removal and
replacement 2027 removal and replacement 2115
high capacity input DC motor IF replacement 2036 high capacity input tray 45
removal and replacement 2117 high capacity input pickup motor high capacity input Tray 4 paper
high capacity input feed motor drive empty sensor
drive removal and removal and
removal and replacement 2062 replacement 2079
replacement 2059 high capacity input prefeed 4 high capacity input Tray 4 paper
high capacity input feed sensor sensor stack height sensor
removal and removal and removal and
replacement 2074 replacement 2068 replacement 2079
high capacity input front CMF high capacity input rear cover high capacity input tray open
panel removal and sensor
removal and replacement 2019 removal and
replacement 2025 high capacity input right cover replacement 2096
removal and high capacity input unit
replacement 2017 removal and
replacement 2031

Index 3713
 High Voltage Power Supply Image Transfer Belt (ITB) image scanner and flat-bed glass
(HVPS) 167 operation 118 cleaning 207
high voltage power supply Image Transfer Belt (ITB) image scanner assembly
PCA 45 overview 116 parts 3510
high-voltage power supply ITB cleaning unit 122 parts and diagrams 3510
removal and ITB cleaning unit Image Scanner Assembly (ISA)
replacement 1642 operation 124 ADF – 200sh 191
hinge kit ITB cleaning unit overview 122 ADF – 200sh Flow 191
automatic document Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) 107 ADF – 300sh Flow 171
feeder 1721 Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) Tarot high speed (HS)
automatic document feeder, operation 108 platen 205
5QJ90-67011, Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) image scanner assembly/
5QJ90-67012 1774 overview 107 document feeder
Home button motor 105 parts and diagrams 3510
locating 4 overview 102 image transfer belt
home button is remove and replace removal and
unresponsive 390, 393, 396 parts 1334 replacement 1392
HP internal users Second Transfer (T2) Unit 120 remove and replace
WISE 420 Second Transfer (T2) unit parts 1392
HP Jetdirect print server operation 122 Image Transfer Belt (ITB) 116
lights 390, 398 Second Transfer (T2) unit Image Transfer Belt (ITB)
HVPS overview 120 driving 119
removal and sensors 103 Image Transfer Belt (ITB)
replacement 1642 workflow 102 operation 118
image creation information 102, Image Transfer Belt (ITB)
I 107, 110, 116, 120, 122, 124, 129 overview 116
image quality 433 image transfer belt engage motor
ILSB, theory 379
black lines, vertical 390 removal and
image creation 45, 102
blurred image 390 replacement 1407
Color Plane Registration (CPR)
flow ADF or ADF skew (LX du image transfer belt engage motor
unit 124
models) 390 assembly
Color Plane Registration (CPR)
foggy image 390 removal and
unit operation 127
jitter image 390 replacement 1400
Color Plane Registration (CPR)
light image 390 individual component
unit overview 125
light lines, vertical 390 diagnostics 390, 398
color plane registration shutter
periodic black dots, information
driving 128
horizontal 390 general 390
Color Toner Density (CTD)
periodic black lines, print reports 390
operation 128
horizontal 390 software version 390
developer and drum unit 110
periodic light/dark dots, supply status 390
developer and drum unit
horizontal 390 inline scanner bridge unit,
driving 115
periodic light/dark lines, theory 379
developer and drum unit
horizontal 390 inner cover
operation 114
poor fusing 390 removal and replacement 685
developer and drum unit
skewed image 390 inner finisher 336
overview 110
stain on back side 390 cover 340
fuser driving 133
standard tone, setting 390 covers, remove and
fuser gap sensor 131
uneven pitch 390 replace 3017
fuser unit 129
white lines, vertical 390 detailed specifications 336
fuser unit temperature
image scanner diverter unit 352
control 131
covers, flatbed 1796 ejector unit 369
fuser wrap jam sensor 132
harness, flatbed 1798 ejector unit, remove and
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) 116
PCA, flatbed 1798 replace 3338
Image Transfer Belt (ITB)
sensor, flatbed 1798
driving 119
whole unit replacement 1788

3714 Index
 electrical mechanical inner finisher 4 of 5 inner finisher front paper support
relationships parts 3536 removal and
diagrams 3656 inner finisher 5 of 5 replacement 3219
end fence unit 361 parts 3538 inner finisher front tamper
end fence unit, remove and inner finisher detailed removal and
replace 3254 specifications 336 replacement 3265
entrance unit 350 inner finisher docking sensor inner finisher front tamper home
entrance unit, remove and removal and sensor
replace 3095 replacement 3467 removal and
exit unit 354 inner finisher ejector replacement 3280
exit unit, remove and removal and inner finisher front tamper motor
replace 3147 replacement 3338 removal and
main PCA 376 inner finisher end fence sensor replacement 3272
output tray 372 removal and inner finisher guide rails
output tray, remove and replacement 3254 removal and
replace 3347 inner finisher entrance motor replacement 3013
overview 342 removal and replacement 3111 inner finisher hole punch
paddle unit 358 inner finisher entrance motor removal and
paddle unit, remove and assembly replacement 3079
replace 3226 removal and inner finisher lock release handle
paper holding unit 372 replacement 3100 removal and
paper holding unit, remove and inner finisher entrance motor replacement 3062
replace 3347 timing belt inner finisher main interface
paper support unit 356 removal and harness
paper support unit, remove and replacement 3122 removal and
replace 3186 inner finisher entrance roller replacement 3065
parts and diagrams 3531 removal and inner finisher main paddle
PCA 376 replacement 3128 assembly
PCA, remove and inner finisher entrance sensor removal and
replace 3429 removal and replacement 3226
punch unit 347 replacement 3095 inner finisher main paddle home
punch unit, remove and inner finisher exit bin full sensor
replace 3079 removal and removal and
rail, remove and replace 3009 replacement 3076 replacement 3243
rear joint PCA 378 inner finisher exit motor inner finisher main paddle motor
removal and removal and assembly
replacement 3008, 3009 replacement 3181 removal and
staple and staple inner finisher exit motor assembly replacement 3250
cartridge 367 removal and inner finisher main PCA 376
stapler unit 365 replacement 3176 inner finisher middle cover
stapler unit, remove and inner finisher exit roller assembly assembly
replace 3309 removal and removal and
switch, remove and replacement 3147 replacement 3027
replace 3429 inner finisher exit sensor inner finisher middle roller
tamper unit 363 removal and removal and
tamper unit, remove and replacement 3156 replacement 3139
replace 3265 inner finisher exit sensor actuator inner finisher output tray assembly
whole unit, remove and removal and removal and
replace 3009 replacement 3166 replacement 3037
inner finisher 1 of 5 inner finisher front cover assembly inner finisher output tray lower
parts 3531 removal and limit switch assembly
inner finisher 2 of 5 replacement 3017 removal and
parts 3532 inner finisher front cover switch replacement 3367
inner finisher 3 of 5 removal and
parts 3534 replacement 3451

Index 3715
 inner finisher output tray motor inner finisher punch cover inner finisher top cover switch
removal and assembly removal and
replacement 3353 removal and replacement 3462
inner finisher output tray motor replacement 3033 input accessory error
assembly inner finisher punch waste full 67.WX.YZ error 390, 433
removal and sensor input device (department)
replacement 3347 removal and removal and
inner finisher output tray motor replacement 3085 replacement 1820
sensor inner finisher rear base cover input devices
removal and removal and DCF, Tray 4, 5 210
replacement 3360 replacement 3055 department stand 209
inner finisher output tray top of inner finisher rear joint PCA 378 electrical mechanical
stack sensor kit removal and relationships
removal and replacement 3441 diagrams 3644
replacement 3374 inner finisher rear paper support HCI, Tray 4 222
inner finisher overview 342 removal and parts and diagrams 3517
motor and solenoid 345 replacement 3186 sHCI, Tray 5 or 6 233
PCA 346 inner finisher rear punch cover Input devices 208
roller 346 removal and input tray
sensor 343 replacement 3059 automatic document
workflow 342 inner finisher rear tamper feeder 1697
inner finisher paper holding removal and input/output error
actuator replacement 3288 40.WX.YZ error 390, 432
removal and inner finisher rear tamper home Integrated Scan Asset (ISA) 171
replacement 3385 sensor integrated scanner assembly
inner finisher paper holding kit removal and flatbed (Tarot HS), removal and
removal and replacement 3302 replacement 1788
replacement 3396 inner finisher rear tamper motor removal and
inner finisher paper holding sensor removal and replacement 1656
removal and replacement 3295 integrated scanner asset
replacement 3418 inner finisher staple cartridge 200-sheet dn bundle, whole unit
inner finisher paper holding removal and replacement 1662
solenoid replacement 3314 300-sheet z bundle, whole unit
removal and inner finisher stapler assembly replacement 1656
replacement 3407 removal and removal and replacement dn
inner finisher paper support home replacement 3309 bundle 1662
sensor inner finisher stapler position removal and replacement z
removal and motor bundle 1656
replacement 3194 removal and whole unit replacement 1656
inner finisher paper support motor replacement 3329 interface ports
removal and inner finisher stapler position locating 2, 3
replacement 3210 sensor interlocks
inner finisher paper support motor removal and defeating 390, 398, 399
assembly replacement 3317 internal diagnostics error
removal and inner finisher sub paddle assembly 90.WX.YZ error 390, 433
replacement 3202 removal and video display error 390, 433
inner finisher PCA replacement 3236 IOD 159
removal and inner finisher sub stay assembly removal and
replacement 3429 removal and replacement 1595
inner finisher PCA cover replacement 3044 ISA
removal and inner finisher top cover assembly parts 3510
replacement 3041 removal and parts and diagrams 3510
replacement 3021 removal and
replacement 1656

3716 Index
 removal and replacement dn jams laser scanner unit fan
bundle 1662 520-sheet trays 417 removal and
removal and replacement auto-navigation 413 replacement 1532
flatbed, FFC 50 pin 1802 causes of 414 Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) 107
removal and replacement document feeder 414 Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)
flatbed, FFC 68 pin 1807 fuser 419 operation 108
removal and replacement locations 390, 412 Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)
flatbed, open sensor 1817 output bin 419 overview 107
removal and replacement right door 419 LEDs
flatbed, PCA 1798 Tray 1 416 See lights
removal and replacement Tray 2 417 left cable guide
flatbed, power cable 1812 Tray 3 417 removal and
removal and replacement Jetdirect print server replacement 1385
flatbed, rear cover 1796 lights 390, 398 left cover
removal and replacement job accounting error (firmware) removal and replacement 632
flatbed, whole unit 1788 48.WX.YZ error 390, 432 left top cover
removal and replacement z job management error removal and replacement 626
bundle 1656 (firmware) 390, 432 left upper cover
whole unit replacement 1656 job pipeline error removal and replacement 628
ISA, 200-sheet (firmware) 390, 432 lift plate unit – 200sh 196
dn bundle, whole unit job parser error (firmware) lift plate unit – 200sh Flow 196
replacement 1662 47.WX.YZ error 390, 432 lift plate unit – 300sh Flow 177
ISA, 300-sheet printer calibration error 390, lights
z bundle, whole unit 432 formatter 390, 398
replacement 1656 job separator 76 troubleshooting with 390, 398
island of data local area network (LAN)
removal and K locating 3
replacement 1595 loop actuator
keyboard
island of data (IOD) 159 removal and replacement 962
removal and
itb loop sensing 70
replacement 1630
electrical mechanical loop sensing unit
keyboard PCA 161
relationships remove and replace parts 912
kits
diagrams 3622 loop sensor 72
removal and replacement, sHCI
ITB operation 72
Tray 5 or 6 tray roller
parts 3503 loop sensor 1
kit 1869
removal and removal and replacement 947
tray 1 roller 783
replacement 1392 loop sensor 2
tray 2/3 rollers 798, 852
remove and replace removal and replacement 955
Kits
parts 1392 low voltage power supply 45
ITB cleaning unit kit 1415
ITB cleaning unit 122 low-voltage power supply
remove and replace L removal and
parts 1415 replacement 1647
ITB cleaning unit kit LAN port low-voltage power supply fan
removal and locating 3 removal and
replacement 1415 laser scanner assembly 45 replacement 1503
ITB cleaning unit operation 124 laser scanner error (LaserJet) low-voltage power supply fuser
ITB cleaning unit overview 122 51.WX.YZ error 390, 433 drive board fan assembly
52.WX.YZ error 390, 433 removal and
J laser scanner unit replacement 1510
parts 3499 Lower Voltage Power Supply
jam error (LaserJet)
removal and (LVPS) 169
13.WX.YZ error 390, 432
replacement 1334 lsu
jam error (PageWide)
remove and replace electrical mechanical
13.WX.YZ error 390, 432
parts 1334 relationships
diagrams 3617

Index 3717
 LSU menu map 390, 401 Low-temperature Idling
parts 3499 menus, control panel Mode 579
removal and ACR reference Maintenance 584
replacement 1334 adjustment 585 Manage Trays 390, 401, 435,
remove and replace ACS Page Adjustment 546 539
parts 1334 Advanced Print Quality Manual Tone Adjustment 589
LSU fan Pages 599 Other Pages 594
removal and Altitude Adjustment 580 Paper Path Page 600
replacement 1532 Auto Color Registration 586 Part Replacement Count 582
LVPS Auto Tone adjustment 587 PQ Troubleshooting
removal and Backup/Restore 585 Pages 596
replacement 1647 Buckle Adjustment 547 Print 390, 401, 435, 538
LVPS fan Calibrate Scanner 590 Print Adjustment 546
removal and Calibrate/Cleaning 390, 401, PTT Test Mode 582
replacement 1503 435 Reports 390, 401, 435, 452
LVPS FDB fan assembly cleaning page 585 Reset Engine NVM 556
removal and Cold Reset Paper 544 Reset Supplies 583
replacement 1510 Color Band Test 599 Reset Supplies Level 544
Color Calibration 589 Retrieve Diagnostic Data 600
M Component tests 569 Retrieve Fax Diagnostic
Configuration/Status Data 600
machine cleaning for
Pages 594 Run Fax Test 600
maintenance 34
Consumables Access Scan 505
cleaning the ADF) 34
Control 545 Scan (MFP only) 390, 401, 435
cleaning the paper dust
Copy (MFP only) 390, 401, 435, Scanner Settings 542
stick 34
496 Sensors 559
cleaning the scan glass 34
Counts 541 Serial Number 543
main exit unit 279
coverage report 542 Service 539
external finisher, remove and
CTD Sensor Cleaning 588 Service ID 543
replace 2308
Custom Color 587 Service Reports 546
operation 280
Drain 579 Setting Standard Tone 588
overview 279
Engine NVM Read/Write 557 Software Version 545
main output tray unit 296
Enhanced 1200 DPI Print Supplies 390, 401, 435, 538
external finisher, remove and
Quality 590 Test Support 582
replace 2585
Event Log 540, 600 TR Control Mode 577
overview 296
Fax (fax models only) 390, 401, Troubleshooting 593
main printed circuit assembly
435, 534 USB Firmware Upgrade 590
remove and replace
Fax Reports 594 Vapor Mode 581
parts 1561
Fax Service Log 596 middle left cover
maintenance 34
Fax Speaker Mode 596 removal and replacement 680
machine cleaning for
Fax T.30 Trace Report 595 middle upper cover
maintenance 34
Fax V.29 Speed 584 removal and replacement 635
preventive maintenance 34
Fax V.34 595 miscellaneous parts
maintenance counts
Finisher Adjustment 548 booklet finisher, remove and
part replacement count 390
Footer 582 replace 3005
Maintenance menu, control
Full Auto Color motor error (LaserJet)
panel 584
Registration 586 59.WX.YZ error 390, 433
maintenance parts 1, 6, 20
General Settings 390, 401, motors
manual staple PCA 335
435, 454 CPR shutter sensor 1451
memory error
Humidity 581 DCF, remove and replace 1936
82.WX.YZ error 390, 433
Import/Export 585 developer motor K 1382
EMMC error 390, 433
JBIG Compression 595 developer motor Y/M/C 1379
hard disk error 390, 433
License Management 590 drum motor K and ITB 1373
menu
Low Alerts 544 drum motor Y/M/C 1369
Support Tools menu 539
duplex 1 motor 1074

3718 Index
duplex 2 motor 1111 removal and replacement, DCF removal and replacement,
exit 2 motor 1028 Tray 5 pickup motor 1942 external finisher paper
feed motor 891 removal and replacement, dual holding motor drive
fuser and exit motor 1471 cassette feeder feed assembly 2656
fuser gap motor 1476 motor 1947 removal and replacement,
HCI, remove and replace 2044 removal and replacement, dual external finisher rear tamper
image transfer belt engage cassette feeder Tray 4 motor 2461
motor 1407 pickup motor 1939 removal and replacement,
image transfer belt engage removal and replacement, dual external finisher stapler mid-
motor assembly 1400 cassette feeder Tray 5 front and mid-rear
registration motor 934 pickup motor 1942 sensors 2502
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, HCI
booklet finisher booklet external finisher bridge lift motor 2044
blade motor 2927 motor 2214 removal and replacement, HCI
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, shift motor 2044
booklet finisher booklet fold external finisher buffer removal and replacement, inner
motor 2937 motor 2676 finisher entrance
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, motor 3111
booklet finisher booklet fold external finisher end fence removal and replacement, inner
motor assembly 2933 motor 2382 finisher entrance motor
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, assembly 3100
booklet finisher c-fold blade external finisher end fence removal and replacement, inner
motor 2904 motor assembly 2377 finisher entrance motor
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, timing belt 3122
booklet finisher c-fold blade external finisher entrance removal and replacement, inner
motor assembly 2898 motor 2239 finisher exit motor 3181
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
booklet finisher diverter external finisher entrance finisher exit motor
motor 2972 motor assembly 2235 assembly 3176
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
booklet finisher diverter external finisher exit finisher front tamper
motor assembly 2966 motor 2286 motor 3272
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
booklet finisher end fence external finisher exit motor finisher main paddle motor
motor 2772 assembly 2283 assembly 3250
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
booklet finisher entrance external finisher front finisher output tray
motor 2734 tamper motor 2430 motor 3353
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
booklet finisher entrance- external finisher main exit finisher output tray motor
presser motor cam motor 2325 assembly 3347
assembly 2730 removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
removal and replacement, external finisher main exit finisher paper support
booklet finisher paddle cam motor assembly 2315 motor 3210
motor 2754 removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
removal and replacement, external finisher main output finisher paper support motor
booklet finisher paddle tray motor drive assembly 3202
motor assembly 2749 assembly 2616 removal and replacement, inner
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, finisher rear tamper
booklet finisher tamper external finisher paddle motor 3295
motor 2824 motor 2357 removal and replacement, inner
removal and replacement, DCF removal and replacement, finisher stapler position
feed motor 1947 external finisher paddle motor 3329
removal and replacement, DCF motor assembly 2346
Tray 4 pickup motor 1939

Index 3719
 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 feed motor, flow ADF 390 page error
removal and fuser 390 21.WX.YZ error 390, 432
replacement 1879 image system 390 paper
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 pickup motor, laser scanner assembly 390 jams 414
removal and scanner 390 paper dust holder
replacement 1876 outer temperature humidity sensor removal and replacement 979
sHCI, remove and assembly, sensor and holder paper handling error (LaserJet)
replace 1872 removal and 56.WX.YZ error 390, 433
TCDU motor 1211 replacement 1490 paper handling specifications 1,
toner collection duct output accessory error 6
motor 1211 66.WX.YZ error 390, 433 paper holding unit 299, 372
toner collection unit output bin external finisher, remove and
motor 1280 clear jams 419 replace 2630
toner dispense motors 1125 locating 1 inner finisher, remove and
toner dispense motors output bin 1 sensor replace 3347
assembly 1117 removal and replacement 996 operation 301, 375
toner reservoir motor 1171 output device overview 299, 372
toner reservoir motors parts and diagrams 3530 paper jams
assembly 1117 removal and 520-sheet trays 417
tray 2 pickup motor 835 replacement 2127 document feeder 414
tray 3 pickup motor 841 output devices 246 fuser 419
multipurpose feeder booklet maker 247 locations 390, 412
assembly 47 electrical mechanical output bin 419
relationships right door 419
N diagrams 3656 Tray 1 416
ILSB 379 Tray 2 417
Near Field Communication error
inline scanner bridge unit 379 Tray 3 417
81.WX.YZ error 390, 433
inner finisher 336 paper size sensor PCA 162
Bluetooth error 390, 433
stapler-stacker finisher 247 paper support unit 356
external I/O card error 390,
stapler-stacker finisher and inner finisher, remove and
433
booklet maker 247 replace 3186
internal EIO error 390, 433
output tray 372 overview 356
wireless error 390, 433
inner finisher, remove and Paper support unit
network and software
replace 3347 operation 357
specifications 1, 6, 21
operation 375 Paper support unit operation 357
network interface 1, 6, 21
overview 372 paper support unit overview 356
no control panel sound 390, 393,
output tray unit paper transfer belt unit 45
395
booklet finisher, remove and parts 601
note vi
replace 2978 200sh ADF 1 of 2 3515
O OXPd/Web kit error 200sh ADF 2 of 2 3516
45.WX.YZ error 390, 432 300sh flow ADF 1 of 2 3512
on/off button 300sh flow ADF 2 of 2 3513
locating 1 P booklet finisher 1 of 5 3547
operating systems, supported 1, booklet finisher 3 of 5 3551
paddle unit 281, 358
6 booklet finisher 4 of 5 3553
booklet finisher, remove and
operating-environment range booklet finisher 5 of 5 3554
replace 2745
printer 13 covers 3484
external finisher, remove and
option specifications 1, 6, 23, 26 CPR 3505
replace 2336
optional configurations 1, 6, 23 DCF 1 of 2 3519
inner finisher, remove and
options list 1, 6, 23 DCF 2 of 2 3521
replace 3226
orderable parts 601 developer 3500
operation 283, 360
other errors drum 3502
overview 281, 358
drive unit 390 dual cassette feeder 1 of
paddle unit operation 360
electrical circuit 390 2 3519
paddle unit overview 358
feeding system 390

3720 Index
 dual cassette feeder 2 of ADF / image scanner parts, miscellaneous
2 3521 assembly 3510 booklet finisher, remove and
duplex 3493 base printer 3484 replace 3005
exit unit 3492 base printer, covers 3484 parts, order by authorized service
external booklet 2 of 5 3549 base printer, CPR 3505 providers 601
fan 3507 base printer, developer 3500 parts, orderable 601
fuser 3506 base printer, drum 3502 parts, ordering 601
HCI 1 of 2 3523 base printer, duplex 3493 PCA 331, 376
HCI 2 of 2 3525 base printer, exit unit 3492 automatic document
high capacity input 1 of 2 3523 base printer, fan 3506 feeder 1704
high capacity input 2 of base printer, feeding automatic document feeder,
2 3525 system 3487 5QJ90-67011,
image scanner base printer, fuser 3506 5QJ90-67012 1756
assembly 3510 base printer, image booklet maker 334
inner finisher 1 of 5 3531 creation 3499 electrical mechanical
inner finisher 2 of 5 3532 base printer, ITB 3503 relationships
inner finisher 3 of 5 3534 base printer, laser scanner diagrams 3629
inner finisher 4 of 5 3536 unit 3499 finisher main - shared 331
inner finisher 5 of 5 3538 base printer, PCA 3508 inner finisher main 376
ISA 3510 base printer, registration and inner finisher rear joint 378
ITB 3503 loop sensors 3490 manual staple 335
laser scanner unit 3499 base printer, reservoir 3496 PCA overview 140
LSU 3499 base printer, sensor 3506 PCAs
PCA 3508 base printer, toner accelerator card 1584
print quality diagnostics 3556, cartridge 3494 booklet finisher, remove and
3557 base printer, toner collection replace 2989
registration and loop unit 3498 DCF, remove and replace 1987
sensors 3490 base printer, toner flow 3494 echo PCA 1600
reservoir 3496 base printer, tray 1 3487 fax card 1639
sensor 3507 base printer, tray 2, 3 3489 FDB 1652
sHCI 1 of 2 3527 booklet finisher 3547, 3556 flatbed scanner 1798
sHCI 2 of 2 3529 DCF 3519 formatter 1561
side high capacity input 1 of document feeder / image fuser drive board 1652
2 3527 scanner assembly 3510 HCI, remove and replace 2105
side high capacity input 2 of dual cassette feeder 3519 high-voltage power
2 3529 engine, printer 3484 supply 1642
stapler/stacker finisher 1 of HCI 3523 HVPS 1642
4 3540 high capacity input 3523 inner finisher, remove and
stapler/stacker finisher 2 of image scanner replace 3429
4 3542 assembly 3510 IOD 1595
stapler/stacker finisher 3 of image scanner assembly / island of data 1595
4 3544 ADF 3510 low-voltage power supply 1647
stapler/stacker finisher 4 of inner finisher 3531 LVPS 1647
4 3545 input devices 3517 parts 3508
tarot HS platen 3517 ISA 3510 power key PCA 1622
TCU 3498 output device 3530 removal and replacement,
toner 3495 sHCI 3527 booklet finisher booklet
toner collection unit 3498 side high capacity input 3527 finisher main PCA 2989
tray 1 3487 stapler/stacker 3540 removal and replacement,
tray 2, 3 3489 tarot HS platen 3516 booklet finisher booklet
use parts lists and parts and diagrams, using 601 maker PCA 2995
diagrams 601 parts list and diagrams, how to removal and replacement,
parts and diagrams use 601 DCF 1990
200sh ADF 3515 removal and replacement, dual
300sh flow ADF 3512 cassette feeder 1990

Index 3721
 removal and replacement, high precautions inner finisher, remove and
capacity input PCA 2105 replacing parts 602 replace 3079
removal and replacement, high preservice checklist 602, 603 operation 272, 350
capacity input sub presser unit overview 270, 347
PCA 2108 booklet finisher, remove and punch unit operation 350
removal and replacement, inner replace 2784 punch unit overview 347
finisher PCA 3429 print bar error (PageWide)
removal and replacement, inner 62.WX.YZ error 390, 433 Q
finisher rear joint PCA 3441 print drivers, supported 1, 6
quality, image 433
remove and replace Print menu, control panel 390,
parts 1561 401, 435, 538 R
sHCI PCA, removal and print quality
replacement 1912 test 602, 604 rail
sHCI, remove and print quality diagnostic inner finisher, remove and
replace 1912 bridge unit 381 replace 3009
USB hub PCA 1587 operation 388 real-time clock error
PCAs, main stacker unit 385 11.WX.YZ error 390, 432
remove and replace workflow 380 rear lower cover
parts 1561 print quality diagnostic removal and replacement 618
PCAs, power supply overview 380 rear upper cover
remove and replace print quality diagnostics 379 removal and replacement 614
parts 1642 parts 3556, 3557 registration and loop sensors
PCAs, sub print quality troubleshooting 390 electrical mechanical
remove and replace flow ADF skew adjust 390 relationships
parts 1584 image quality 390 diagrams 3611
pickup assembly, tray 2 other errors 390 parts 3490
removal and replacement 788 print specifications 1, 6 registration drive assembly
pickup assembly, tray 3 Print Test Page 390, 401, 435, 454 removal and replacement 927
removal and replacement 844 printed circuit assembly registration motor
pickup unit 47 automatic document removal and replacement 934
pickup unit – 200sh 197 feeder 1704 registration sensor
pickup unit – 200sh Flow 197 automatic document feeder, removal and replacement 919
pickup unit – 300sh Flow 179 5QJ90-67011, registration unit 47, 70, 72
ports 5QJ90-67012 1756 operation 72
locating 3 remove and replace removal and replacement 912
post-service tests 602, 604 parts 1561 remove and replace parts 912
power printer registration unit driving 73
consumption 1, 6 dimensions 1, 6 operation 73
power key operating-environment removal and replacement
removal and replacement 669 range 13 accelerator card 1584
power key PCA 160 weight 1, 6 automatic document
removal and printer engine feeder 1667
replacement 1622 parts and diagrams 3484 automatic document feeder
power subsystem 390 printer memory error color panel 1683, 1743
power supply 20.WX.YZ error 390, 432 automatic document feeder
troubleshooting 390 Process Cleaning Page 390, 401, damper module 1729
power supply printed circuit 435 automatic document feeder
assembly Product installation 34 damper module,
remove and replace Product maintenance 34 5QJ90-67011,
parts 1642 product number 5QJ90-67012 1781
power-on troubleshooting locating 1 automatic document feeder
overview 390 location 2 FFC 1762
pre-boot menu options 390, 401, punch unit 270, 347 automatic document feeder
435 external finisher, remove and flat-flexible cable 1709
find links to information 404 replace 2243

3722 Index
automatic document feeder booklet finisher diverter 2942 controller cover 620
front cover 1676 booklet finisher diverter DCF (department) 1916
automatic document feeder motor 2972 DCF caster wheel 1927
hinge kit 1721 booklet finisher diverter motor DCF door open switch and
automatic document feeder assembly 2966 harness 1999
hinge kit, 5QJ90-67011, booklet finisher end fence DCF feed drive
5QJ90-67012 1774 home sensor 2759 assembly 1944
automatic document feeder booklet finisher end fence DCF feed motor 1947
input tray 1697 motor 2772 DCF feed sensor 1981
automatic document feeder booklet finisher entrance DCF holder wheel kit 1929
pickup roller kit 1700 motor 2734 DCF IF harness 1996
automatic document feeder booklet finisher entrance DCF left cover 1920
pickup roller kit, sensor 2716 DCF motor harness 2nd 2003
5QJ90-67011, booklet finisher entrance DCF PCA 1990
5QJ90-67012 1751 unit 2703 DCF pickup drive
automatic document feeder booklet finisher entrance- assembly 1936
power cable 1715, 1768 presser motor DCF rear cover 1918
automatic document feeder assembly 2730 DCF right cover 1916
printed circuit booklet finisher harness DCF right door 1922
assembly 1704 guide 2691 DCF right door open switch
automatic document feeder booklet finisher main holder 1992
printed circuit assembly, PCA 2989 DCF sensor harness 1st 2005
5QJ90-67011, booklet finisher output DCF sensor harness
5QJ90-67012 1756 tray 2978 2nd 2009
automatic document feeder booklet finisher output tray DCF size harness 2013
rear cover 1685 sensor 2981 DCF Tray 4 paper empty
automatic document feeder top booklet finisher paddle home sensor 1957
cover 1690 sensor 2745 DCF Tray 4 paper stack height
automatic document feeder booklet finisher paddle sensor 1957
white backing 1692, 1746 motor 2754 DCF Tray 4 pickup
automatic document feeder, booklet finisher paddle motor assembly 1953
5QJ90-67011, assembly 2749 DCF Tray 4 pickup motor 1939
5QJ90-67012 1735 booklet finisher presser home DCF Tray 4 prefeed
booklet finisher booklet blade sensor 2784 sensor 1961
home sensor 2910 booklet finisher staple DCF Tray 4, 5 cassette 1931
booklet finisher booklet blade cartridge 2877 DCF Tray 4, 5 color panel 1924
motor 2927 booklet finisher stapler 2860 DCF Tray 4, 5 paper size
booklet finisher booklet diverter booklet finisher tamper 2789 sensors 1950
home sensor 2959 booklet finisher tamper home DCF Tray 4, 5 rollers 1933
booklet finisher booklet fold sensor 2806 DCF Tray 5 paper empty
motor 2937 booklet finisher tamper sensor 1971
booklet finisher booklet fold motor 2824 DCF Tray 5 paper stack height
motor assembly 2933 booklet finisher tamper sensor 1971
booklet finisher booklet sensor 2842 DCF Tray 5 pickup
maker 2681 booklet finisher, only 2680 assembly 1966
booklet finisher booklet maker cleaning unit kit, ITB 1415 DCF Tray 5 pickup motor 1942
PCA 2995 color plane registration DCF Tray 5 prefeed
booklet finisher c-fold blade sensors 1429 sensor 1975
assembly 2880 color plane registration shutter DCF tray heaters 1987
booklet finisher c-fold blade motor 1451 developer drive
home sensor 2892 color plane registration shutter assembly 1362
booklet finisher c-fold blade sensor 1439 developer motor K 1382
motor 2904 color plane registration developer motor Y/M/C 1379
booklet finisher c-fold blade unit 1418 developer powder 1353
motor assembly 2898 control panel 1557 developer unit 1345

Index 3723
 drum drive assembly 1362 dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 external finisher caster fix
drum home sensor 1376 cassette 1931 nut 2187
drum motor K and ITB 1373 dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 external finisher ejector 1 home
drum motor Y/M/C 1369 color panel 1924 sensor 2540
drum unit 1341 dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 external finisher ejector 1 motor
dual cassette feeder paper size sensors 1950 sensor 2555
(department) 1916 dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 external finisher ejector 2 motor
dual cassette feeder caster rollers 1933 sensor 2570
wheel 1927 dual cassette feeder Tray 5 external finisher ejector
dual cassette feeder door open paper empty sensor 1971 sensor 2524
switch and harness 1999 dual cassette feeder Tray 5 external finisher ejector
dual cassette feeder feed drive paper stack height unit 2510
assembly 1944 sensor 1971 external finisher end fence
dual cassette feeder feed dual cassette feeder Tray 5 home sensor 2363
motor 1947 pickup assembly 1966 external finisher end fence
dual cassette feeder feed dual cassette feeder Tray 5 motor 2382
sensor 1981 pickup motor 1942 external finisher end fence
dual cassette feeder holder dual cassette feeder Tray 5 motor assembly 2377
wheel kit 1929 prefeed sensor 1975 external finisher entrance
dual cassette feeder IF dual cassette feeder tray motor 2239
harness 1996 heaters 1987 external finisher entrance
dual cassette feeder left duplex 1 motor 1074 motor assembly 2235
cover 1920 duplex 2 motor 1111 external finisher entrance
dual cassette feeder motor duplex assembly 1091 sensor 2220
harness 2nd 2003 duplex jam 1 sensor 1058 external finisher exit
dual cassette feeder duplex jam 2 sensor 1101 motor 2286
PCA 1990 echo PCA 1600 external finisher exit motor
dual cassette feeder pickup exit 2 motor 1028 assembly 2283
drive assembly 1936 exit 2 sensor 1043 external finisher front
dual cassette feeder rear exit cover stacker 682 cover 2159
cover 1918 exit rear cover 622 external finisher front
dual cassette feeder right exit stack guide 1089 door 2127
cover 1916 exit unit 982 external finisher front door
dual cassette feeder right external finisher booklet front switch 2330
door 1922 cover 2190 external finisher front lower left
dual cassette feeder right door external finisher booklet output cover 2175
open switch holder 1992 tray 2150 external finisher front lower
dual cassette feeder sensor external finisher bridge door right cover 2180
harness 1st 2005 sensor 2196 external finisher front paper
dual cassette feeder sensor external finisher bridge holding sensor 2630
harness 2nd 2009 entrance sensor 2202 external finisher front
dual cassette feeder size external finisher bridge exit tamper 2407
harness 2013 sensor 2207 external finisher front tamper
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 external finisher bridge home sensor 2418
paper empty sensor 1957 motor 2214 external finisher front tamper
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 external finisher bridge motor 2430
paper stack height unit 2192 external finisher left lower
sensor 1957 external finisher buffer cover 2132
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 motor 2676 external finisher left upper
pickup assembly 1953 external finisher buffer solenoid cover 2140
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 assembly 2669 external finisher main exit cam
pickup motor 1939 external finisher caster 2184 home sensor 2320
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 external finisher caster external finisher main exit cam
prefeed sensor 1961 cover 2130 motor 2325

3724 Index
external finisher main exit cam external finisher right upper flatbed, rear cover 1796
motor assembly 2315 cover 2172 flatbed, whole unit 1788
external finisher main exit external finisher shaft hinge - formatter 1561
sensor 2308 door 2182 front cover 703
external finisher main output external finisher staple front cover CMF panel 705
tray 2155, 2585 cartridge 2479 front door switch 1536
external finisher main output external finisher stapler front front fan assembly 1514
tray lower limit sensor 2481 front lower cover 700
sensor 2600 external finisher stapler manual fuser and exit drive
external finisher main output staple sensor 2496 assembly 1465
tray motor drive external finisher stapler mid- fuser and exit motor 1471
assembly 2616 front sensor 2489 fuser drive board 1652
external finisher main output external finisher stapler mid- fuser fan duct 1528
tray motor sensor 2612 rear sensor 2489 fuser gap motor 1476
external finisher main output external finisher stapler fuser gap sensor 1480
tray top of stack position motor 2502 fuser out sensor 972
sensor 2588 external finisher stapler fuser out sensor harness 976
external finisher main output unit 2473 fuser unit 1463
tray top of stack external finisher stapler/stacker hard disk 1579
switch 2620 or booklet finishers 2127 hard disk cradle 1575
external finisher main output external finisher top hard-disk drive rivet 1573
tray top of stack switch cover 2166 hardware integration pocket
guide 2388 external finisher top [HIP] 678
external finisher main output door 2168 HCI (department) 2017
tray top of stack switch lower external finisher top door open HCI cassette 2034
guide 2398 switch 2253 HCI DC motor IF 2117
external finisher mounting external finisher top exit HCI feed motor drive 2059
brackets 3006 sensor 2273 HCI feed sensor 2074
external finisher paddle 2336 external finisher top jam cover HCI front CMF panel 2025
external finisher paddle home assembly 2245 HCI gate solenoid home
sensor 2351 external finisher top lower feed sensor 2098, 2101
external finisher paddle assembly 2289 HCI holder wheel kit 2029
motor 2357 external finisher top output HCI inner drawer IF 2124
external finisher paddle motor tray 2152 HCI knockup home
assembly 2346 external finisher top output tray sensor 2083
external finisher paper holding paper full sensor 2301 HCI knockup plate 2053
home sensor 2643 external finisher tray HCI left cover 2021
external finisher paper holding diverter 2249 HCI lift motor 2044
motor drive external finisher tray diverter HCI main IF harness 2112
assembly 2656 cam 2257 HCI motor IF 2120
external finisher punch external finisher tray diverter HCI paper gate 2056
cover 2164 home sensor 2265 HCI PCA 2105
external finisher punch external finisher tray HCI pickup motor drive 2062
unit 2243 extension 2298 HCI prefeed 4 sensor 2068
external finisher rear fax card 1639 HCI rear cover 2019
cover 2157 FDB 1652 HCI right cover 2017
external finisher rear paper FDB fan 1507 HCI right door 2023
holding sensor 2630 feed 2 sensor 902 HCI shift gate solenoid 2064
external finisher rear feed drive assembly 883 HCI shift motor 2044
tamper 2440 feed motor 891 HCI shift plate 2048
external finisher rear tamper flatbed, FFC 50 pin 1802 HCI shift tray empty
home sensor 2450 flatbed, FFC 68 pin 1807 sensor 2092
external finisher rear tamper flatbed, open sensor 1817 HCI shift tray end
motor 2461 flatbed, PCA 1798 sensor 2083
flatbed, power cable 1812

Index 3725
 HCI shift tray home high capacity input prefeed 4 inner finisher entrance motor
sensor 2092 sensor 2068 timing belt 3122
HCI shift tray level sensor 1 and high capacity input rear inner finisher entrance
2 2088 cover 2019 roller 3128
HCI sub PCA 2108 high capacity input right inner finisher entrance
HCI sub tray IF harness 2115 cover 2017 sensor 3095
HCI Tray 4 paper empty high capacity input right inner finisher exit bin full 3076
sensor 2079 door 2023 inner finisher exit motor 3181
HCI Tray 4 paper stack height high capacity input inner finisher exit motor
sensor 2079 rollers 2040 assembly 3176
HCI tray open sensor 2096 high capacity input shift gate inner finisher exit roller
HCI Tray pickup solenoid 2064 assembly 3147
assembly 2036 high capacity input shift inner finisher exit sensor 3156
HCI Tray rollers 2040 motor 2044 inner finisher exit sensor
HCI Tray unit 2031 high capacity input shift actuator 3166
HCIF caster wheel 2027 plate 2048 inner finisher front cover
high capacity cassette 2034 high capacity input shift tray assembly 3017
high capacity input empty sensor 2092 inner finisher front cover
(department) 2017 high capacity input shift tray switch 3451
high capacity input caster end sensor 2083 inner finisher front paper
wheel 2027 high capacity input shift tray support 3219
high capacity input DC motor home sensor 2092 inner finisher front
IF 2117 high capacity input shift tray tamper 3265
high capacity input feed motor level sensor 1 and 2 2088 inner finisher front tamper
drive 2059 high capacity input sub home sensor 3280
high capacity input feed PCA 2108 inner finisher front tamper
sensor 2074 high capacity input sub tray IF motor 3272
high capacity input front CMF harness 2115 inner finisher guide rails 3013
panel 2025 high capacity input Tray 4 paper inner finisher hole punch 3079
high capacity input gate empty sensor 2079 inner finisher lock release
solenoid home high capacity input Tray 4 paper handle 3062
sensor 2098, 2101 stack height sensor 2079 inner finisher main interface
high capacity input holder high capacity input tray open harness 3065
wheel kit 2029 sensor 2096 inner finisher main paddle
high capacity input inner high capacity input unit 2031 assembly 3226
drawer IF 2124 high-voltage power inner finisher main paddle
high capacity input knockup supply 1642 home sensor 3243
home sensor 2083 HVPS 1642 inner finisher main paddle
high capacity input knockup image transfer belt 1392 motor assembly 3250
plate 2053 image transfer belt engage inner finisher middle cover
high capacity input left motor 1407 assembly 3027
cover 2021 image transfer belt engage inner finisher middle
high capacity input lift motor assembly 1400 roller 3139
motor 2044 inner cover 685 inner finisher output tray
high capacity input main IF inner finisher 3008, 3009 assembly 3037
harness 2112 inner finisher docking inner finisher output tray lower
high capacity input motor sensor 3467 limit switch assembly 3367
IF 2120 inner finisher ejector 3338 inner finisher output tray
high capacity input paper inner finisher end fence motor 3353
gate 2056 sensor 3254 inner finisher output tray motor
high capacity input PCA 2105 inner finisher entrance assembly 3347
high capacity input pickup motor 3111 inner finisher output tray motor
assembly 2036 inner finisher entrance motor sensor 3360
high capacity input pickup assembly 3100 inner finisher output tray top of
motor drive 2062 stack sensor kit 3374

3726 Index
inner finisher paper holding integrated scanner asset z right upper cover 640
actuator 3385 bundle 1656 riser card and cradle 1568
inner finisher paper holding IOD 1595 secondary transfer (T2)
kit 3396 island of data 1595 unit 942
inner finisher paper holding ITB 1392 sHCI (department) 1820
sensor 3418 ITB cleaning unit kit 1415 sHCI door links 1st 1845
inner finisher paper holding keyboard 1630 sHCI door links 2nd 1850
solenoid 3407 laser scanner unit 1334 sHCI front cover 1838
inner finisher paper support laser scanner unit fan 1532 sHCI front top cover 1841
home sensor 3194 left cable guide 1385 sHCI harness cover 1825
inner finisher paper support left cover 632 sHCI link holder 1855
motor 3210 left top cover 626 sHCI PCA 1912
inner finisher paper support left upper cover 628 sHCI pickup cover 1830
motor assembly 3202 loop actuator 962 sHCI prefeed 5 sensor 1908
inner finisher PCA 3429 loop sensor 1 947 sHCI rear cover 1823
inner finisher PCA cover 3041 loop sensor 2 955 sHCI rear top cover 1827
inner finisher punch cover low-voltage power supply 1647 sHCI right cover 1820
assembly 3033 LSU 1334 sHCI top cover 1833
inner finisher punch waste LVPS 1647 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 detection
full 3085 LVPS fan 1503 sensor 1 1889
inner finisher rear base LVPS FDB fan assembly 1510 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 detection
cover 3055 middle left cover 680 sensor 2 1893
inner finisher rear joint middle upper cover 635 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 door open
PCA 3441 outer temperature humidity sensor 1896
inner finisher rear paper sensor assembly, sensor sHCI Tray 5 or 6 feed
support 3186 and holder 1490 motor 1879
inner finisher rear punch output bin 1 sensor 996 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 lift drive 1883
cover 3059 output device 2127 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 lift
inner finisher rear paper dust holder 979 motor 1886
tamper 3288 pickup assembly, tray 3 844 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 paper level
inner finisher rear tamper home power key 669 sensor 1899
sensor 3302 power key PCA 1622 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 pickup
inner finisher rear tamper rear lower cover 618 assembly 1860
motor 3295 rear upper cover 614 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 pickup
inner finisher staple registration drive motor 1876
cartridge 3314 assembly 927 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 pickup, feed
inner finisher stapler registration motor 934 drive assembly 1872
assembly 3309 registration sensor 919 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 stack height
inner finisher stapler position registration unit 912 and paper empty
motor 3329 return gate solenoid 1012 sensors 1903
inner finisher stapler position right cable guide 1389 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 top cover open
sensor 3317 right door 716 switch 1866
inner finisher sub paddle right door exit assembly 970 sHCI Tray 5 or 6 tray roller
assembly 3236 right door front damper 726 kit 1869
inner finisher sub stay right door front damper side high capacity input
assembly 3044 bracket 731 (department) 1820
inner finisher top cover right door front link 721 side high capacity input door
assembly 3021 right door sHCI dummy links 1st 1845
inner finisher top cover cover 638 side high capacity input door
switch 3462 right door switch 1553 links 2nd 1850
input device right front cover 651 side high capacity input front
(department) 1820 right middle cover 661 cover 1838
integrated scanner asset dn right middle cover side high capacity input front
bundle 1662 assembly 653 top cover 1841
right rear cover 648

Index 3727
 side high capacity input TCDU motor sensor 1224 tray 3 empty sensor 856
harness cover 1825 TCU cover and CMF panel 709 tray 3 open and paper size
side high capacity input link tie stoppers 698 sensor 876
holder 1855 toner cartridges, control tray 3 pickup drive
side high capacity input panel 1140 assembly 838
PCA 1912 toner cartridges, tray 3 pickup motor 841
side high capacity input pickup disassemble 1142 tray 3 prefeed sensor 866
cover 1830 toner collection duct tray 3 stack height
side high capacity input prefeed motor 1211 sensor 856
5 sensor 1908 toner collection duct unit 1180 tray heaters 880
side high capacity input rear toner collection duct unit USB hub PCA 1587
cover 1823 detection sensor 1182 removal order
side high capacity input rear toner collection duct unit drive removing order 602, 604
top cover 1827 assembly 1198 remove and replace
side high capacity input right toner collection duct unit motor before servicing 601
cover 1820 sensor 1224 Remove and replace 601
side high capacity input top toner collection unit 1239 remove and replace parts
cover 1833 toner collection unit detection base printer 614
side high capacity input Tray 5 sensor 1241 color plane registration 1418
or 6 detection sensor toner collection unit drive control panel 1557
1 1889 assembly 1263 CPR 1418
side high capacity input Tray 5 toner collection unit full sensor developer and drum 1341
or 6 detection sensor PCA 1316, 1604 duplex unit 1091
2 1893 toner collection unit environmental sensor, switch,
side high capacity input Tray 5 motor 1280 and fan 1490
or 6 door open toner collection unit motor exit unit 982
sensor 1896 sensor 1298 feeding system 716
side high capacity input Tray 5 toner CRUM module feeding system, right door
or 6 feed motor 1879 assembly 1149 assemblies 716
side high capacity input Tray 5 toner dispense motor feeding system, Tray 1 unit 736
or 6 lift drive 1883 sensor 1132 feeding system, Tray 2-3
side high capacity input Tray 5 toner dispense motors 1125 units 786
or 6 lift motor 1886 toner dispense motors fuser unit 1463
side high capacity input Tray 5 assembly 1117 image creation 1334
or 6 paper level toner reservoir 1157 image transfer belt 1392
sensor 1899 toner reservoir motor 1171 ITB 1392
side high capacity input Tray 5 toner reservoir motors ITB cleaning unit 1415
or 6 pickup assembly 1860 assembly 1117 laser scanner unit 1334
side high capacity input Tray 5 Tray 1 clutch 773 loop sensing unit 912
or 6 pickup motor 1876 tray 1 empty sensor 754 LSU 1334
side high capacity input Tray 5 tray 1 roller kit 783 main PCAs 1561
or 6 pickup, feed drive tray 1 unit 736 main printed circuit
assembly 1872 tray 2 color panel 712 assembly 1561
side high capacity input Tray 5 tray 2 empty sensor 802 PCAs 1561
or 6 stack height and paper tray 2 open and paper size power supply PCAs 1642
empty sensors 1903 sensor 826 power supply printed circuit
side high capacity input Tray 5 tray 2 or tray 3 786 assembly 1642
or 6 top cover open tray 2 pickup assembly 788 printed circuit assembly 1561
switch 1866 tray 2 pickup drive registration unit 912
side high capacity input Tray 5 assembly 830 reservoir unit 1157
or 6 tray roller kit 1869 tray 2 pickup motor 835 sub PCAs 1584
TCDU 1180 tray 2 prefeed sensor 814 sub printed circuit
TCDU detection sensor 1182 tray 2 stack height sensor 802 assembly 1584
TCDU drive assembly 1198 tray 2/3 roller kit 798, 852 toner cartridge 1117
TCDU motor 1211 tray 3 color panel 714 toner collection unit 1180

3728 Index
 toner flow 1117 riser card for HDD, USB ports, and sensor
removing parts accelerator board 152 removal and replacement, inner
checklists 602, 603 rivet, hard-disk drive finisher output tray top of
replacing parts removal and stack sensor kit 3374
precautions 602 replacement 1573 sensor and fan
Reports menu, control panel 390, RJ-45 port electrical mechanical
401, 435, 452 locating 3 relationships
reservoir rollers diagrams 3626
electrical mechanical automatic document feeder sensor error
relationships pickup roller kit 1700 54.WX.YZ error 390, 433
diagrams 3615 automatic document feeder 58.WX.YZ error 390, 433
parts 3496 pickup roller kit, sensors
reservoir unit 5QJ90-67011, base printer service parts,
remove and replace 5QJ90-67012 1751 registration and loop
parts 1157 DCF, remove and replace 1933 sensors 3490
return gate solenoid HCI, remove and replace 2040 CPR sensors 1429
removal and removal and replacement, CPR shutter sensor 1439
replacement 1012 DCF 1933 DCF, remove and
revision history iii removal and replacement, replace 1950
right cable guide HCI 2040 drum home sensor 1376
removal and removal and replacement, inner duplex jam 1 sensor 1058
replacement 1389 finisher entrance duplex jam 2 sensor 1101
right door roller 3128 exit 2 sensor 1043
jams 419 removal and replacement, inner feed 2 sensor 902
locating 1 finisher exit roller flatbed scanner 1798
removal and replacement 716 assembly 3147 fuser gap sensor 1480
right door exit assembly removal and replacement, inner fuser out sensor 972
removal and replacement 970 finisher middle roller 3139 fuser out sensor harness 976
right door front damper sHCI, remove and HCI, remove and replace 2068
removal and replacement 726 replace 1869 loop actuator 962
right door front damper bracket loop sensor 1 947
removal and replacement 731 S loop sensor 2 955
right door front link outer temperature humidity
scan and exit unit – 200sh 200
removal and replacement 721 sensor 1490
scan and exit unit – 200sh
right door sHCI dummy cover outer temperature humidity
Flow 200
removal and replacement 638 sensor assembly 1490
scan and exit unit – 300sh
right door switch outer temperature humidity
Flow 184
removal and sensor holder 1490
Scan menu (MFP only), control
replacement 1553 output bin 1 sensor 996
panel 390, 401, 435
right front cover parts 3507
Scan menu, control panel 505
removal and replacement 651 registration sensor 919
scan specifications 1, 6
right middle cover removal and replacement
scanner error
removal and replacement 661 flatbed, open sensor 1817
30.WX.YZ error 390, 432
right middle cover assembly removal and replacement,
scanning system
removal and replacement 653 booklet finisher booklet
components 45
right rear cover blade home sensor 2910
Second Transfer (T2) unit 120
removal and replacement 648 removal and replacement,
Second Transfer (T2) unit
right upper cover booklet finisher booklet
operation 122
removal and replacement 640 diverter home sensor 2959
Second Transfer (T2) unit
riser card 151 removal and replacement,
overview 120
riser card and cradle booklet finisher c-fold blade
secondary transfer (T2) unit
removal and home sensor 2892
removal and replacement 942
replacement 1568 removal and replacement,
security error
riser card for HDD 151 booklet finisher end fence
33.WX.YZ error 390, 432
home sensor 2759

Index 3729
 removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement,
booklet finisher entrance external finisher end fence external finisher top output
sensor 2716 home sensor 2363 tray paper full sensor 2301
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement,
booklet finisher output tray external finisher entrance external finisher tray diverter
sensor 2981 sensor 2220 home sensor 2265
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, HCI
booklet finisher paddle external finisher front paper feed sensor 2074
home sensor 2745 holding sensor 2630 removal and replacement, HCI
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, gate solenoid home
booklet finisher presser external finisher front sensor 2098, 2101
home sensor 2784 tamper home sensor 2418 removal and replacement, HCI
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, knockup home
booklet finisher tamper external finisher main exit sensor 2083
sensor 2842 cam home sensor 2320 removal and replacement, HCI
removal and replacement, DCF removal and replacement, shift tray empty
feed sensor 1981 external finisher main exit sensor 2092
removal and replacement, DCF sensor 2308 removal and replacement, HCI
paper size 1950 removal and replacement, shift tray end sensor 2083
removal and replacement, DCF external finisher main output removal and replacement, HCI
Tray 4 paper empty tray lower limit shift tray home
sensor 1957, 1971 sensor 2600 sensor 2092
removal and replacement, DCF removal and replacement, removal and replacement, HCI
Tray 4 paper stack height external finisher main output shift tray level sensor 1 and
sensor 1957 tray motor sensor 2612 2 2088
removal and replacement, DCF removal and replacement, removal and replacement, HCI
Tray 4 prefeed sensor 1961 external finisher main output Tray 4 paper empty
removal and replacement, DCF tray top of stack sensor 2079
Tray 5 paper stack height sensor 2588 removal and replacement, HCI
sensor 1971 removal and replacement, Tray 4 paper stack height
removal and replacement, DCF external finisher paddle sensor 2079
Tray 5 prefeed sensor 1975 home sensor 2351 removal and replacement, HCI
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, tray open sensor 2096
external finisher bridge door external finisher paper removal and replacement, inner
sensor 2196 holding home sensor 2643 finisher docking
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, sensor 3467
external finisher bridge external finisher rear paper removal and replacement, inner
entrance sensor 2202 holding sensor 2630 finisher end fence
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, sensor 3254
external finisher bridge exit external finisher rear tamper removal and replacement, inner
sensor 2207 home sensor 2450 finisher entrance
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, sensor 3095
external finisher ejector 1 external finisher stapler removal and replacement, inner
home sensor 2540 front sensor 2481 finisher exit sensor 3156
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
external finisher ejector 1 external finisher stapler finisher exit sensor
motor sensor 2555 manual staple sensor 2496 actuator 3166
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
external finisher ejector 2 external finisher stapler mid- finisher front tamper home
motor sensor 2570 front and mid-rear sensor 3280
removal and replacement, sensors 2489 removal and replacement, inner
external finisher ejector removal and replacement, finisher main paddle home
sensor 2524 external finisher top exit sensor 3243
sensor 2273

3730 Index
removal and replacement, inner tray 2 open and paper size base printer, registration and
finisher output tray motor sensor, removal and loop sensors 3490
sensor 3360 replacement 826 base printer, reservoir 3496
removal and replacement, inner tray 2 prefeed sensor, removal base printer, sensor 3506
finisher paper holding and replacement 814 base printer, toner
sensor 3418 tray 2 stack height sensor, cartridge 3494
removal and replacement, inner removal and base printer, toner collection
finisher paper support home replacement 802 unit 3498
sensor 3194 tray 3 empty sensor, removal base printer, toner flow 3494
removal and replacement, inner and replacement 856 base printer, tray 1 3487
finisher rear tamper home tray 3 open and paper size base printer, tray 2, 3 3489
sensor 3302 sensor, removal and sHCI 45
removal and replacement, inner replacement 876 covers, remove and
finisher stapler position tray 3 prefeed sensor, removal replace 1820
sensor 3317 and replacement 866 electrical mechanical
removal and replacement, tray 3 stack height sensor, relationships
prefeed 4 sensor 2068 removal and diagrams 3653
sHCI prefeed 5 sensor, removal replacement 856 motor, remove and
and replacement 1908 serial number replace 1872
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 detection locating 1, 2 PCA, remove and replace 1912
sensor 1, removal and service and support roller, remove and
replacement 1889 WISE 420 replace 1869
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 detection service approach 602 sensor, remove and
sensor 2, removal and precautions 602 replace 1889
replacement 1893 service functions unit parts, remove and
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 door open capture log 390 replace 1860
sensor, removal and debug log 390 sHCI (department)
replacement 1896 envelope rotate 390 removal and
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 paper level main memory clear 390 replacement 1820
sensor, removal and transfer assembly control 390 sHCI 1 of 2
replacement 1899 Service menu, control panel 539 parts 3527
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 stack height service mode 390 sHCI 2 of 2
and paper empty sensors, diagnostics 390 parts 3529
removal and entering service mode 390 sHCI door links 1st
replacement 1903 information 390 removal and
sHCI, remove and maintenance counts 390 replacement 1845
replace 1889 mode menu tree 390 sHCI door links 2nd
TCDU detection sensor 1182 service functions 390 removal and
TCDU motor sensor 1224 service parts replacement 1850
toner collection duct unit base printer, covers 3484 sHCI front cover
detection sensor 1182 base printer, CPR 3505 removal and
toner collection duct unit motor base printer, developer 3500 replacement 1838
sensor 1224 base printer, drum 3502 sHCI front top cover
toner collection unit detection base printer, duplex 3493 removal and
sensor 1241 base printer, exit unit 3492 replacement 1841
toner collection unit full sensor base printer, fan 3506 sHCI harness cover
PCA 1316, 1604 base printer, feeding removal and
toner collection unit motor system 3487 replacement 1825
sensor 1298 base printer, fuser 3506 sHCI link holder
toner dispense motor 1132 base printer, image removal and
tray 1 empty sensor 754 creation 3499 replacement 1855
tray 2 empty sensor, removal base printer, ITB 3503 sHCI PCA
and replacement 802 base printer, laser scanner removal and
unit 3499 replacement 1912
base printer, PCA 3508

Index 3731
 sHCI pickup cover sHCI Tray 5 or 6 top cover open side high capacity input link holder
removal and switch removal and
replacement 1830 removal and replacement 1855
sHCI prefeed 5 sensor replacement 1866 side high capacity input PCA
removal and sHCI Tray 5 or 6 tray roller kit removal and
replacement 1908 removal and replacement 1912
sHCI rear cover replacement 1869 side high capacity input pickup
removal and sHCI, Tray 5 or 6 233 cover
replacement 1823 covers 233 removal and
sHCI rear top cover feeding system workflow 235 replacement 1830
removal and motor operation 245 side high capacity input prefeed 5
replacement 1827 motors 241 sensor
sHCI right cover operation 244 removal and
removal and PCA 245 replacement 1908
replacement 1820 rollers 238 side high capacity input rear cover
sHCI top cover sensors 239 removal and
removal and unit 237 replacement 1823
replacement 1833 side high capacity input side high capacity input rear top
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 detection sensor 1 covers, remove and cover
removal and replace 1820 removal and
replacement 1889 motor, remove and replacement 1827
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 detection sensor 2 replace 1872 side high capacity input right cover
removal and parts and diagrams 3527 removal and
replacement 1893 PCA, remove and replace 1912 replacement 1820
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 door open sensor roller, remove and side high capacity input top cover
removal and replace 1869 removal and
replacement 1896 sensor, remove and replacement 1833
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 feed motor replace 1889 side high capacity input tray 45
removal and unit parts, remove and side high capacity input Tray 5 or 6
replacement 1879 replace 1860 detection sensor 1
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 lift drive side high capacity input removal and
removal and (department) replacement 1889
replacement 1883 removal and side high capacity input Tray 5 or 6
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 lift motor replacement 1820 detection sensor 2
removal and side high capacity input 1 f 2 removal and
replacement 1886 parts 3527 replacement 1893
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 paper level sensor side high capacity input 2 f 2 side high capacity input Tray 5 or 6
removal and parts 3529 door open sensor
replacement 1899 side high capacity input door links removal and
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 pickup assembly removal and replacement replacement 1896
removal and 1st 1845 side high capacity input Tray 5 or 6
replacement 1860 removal and replacement feed motor
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 pickup motor 2nd 1850 removal and
removal and side high capacity input front replacement 1879
replacement 1876 cover side high capacity input Tray 5 or 6
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 pickup, feed drive removal and lift drive
assembly replacement 1838 removal and
removal and side high capacity input front top replacement 1883
replacement 1872 cover side high capacity input Tray 5 or 6
sHCI Tray 5 or 6 stack height and removal and lift motor
paper empty sensors replacement 1841 removal and
removal and side high capacity input harness replacement 1886
replacement 1903 cover
removal and
replacement 1825

3732 Index
side high capacity input Tray 5 or 6 network specifications 1, 6, 21 tray diverter unit 273
paper level sensor options 1, 6, 23 stapler-stacker finisher and
removal and options list 1, 6, 23 booklet maker 247
replacement 1899 paper handling booklet maker 307
side high capacity input Tray 5 or 6 specifications 1, 6 bridge unit 266
pickup assembly print specifications 1, 6 covers 252
removal and scan specifications 1, 6 detailed specifications 247
replacement 1860 software and solutions 1, 6, 21 overview 255
side high capacity input Tray 5 or 6 software specifications 1, 6, 21 PCA 331
pickup motor supplies 1, 6, 19 stapler-stacker finisher 268
removal and SSA stapler-stacker finisher and
replacement 1876 flatbed (Tarot HS), removal and booklet maker unit
side high capacity input Tray 5 or 6 replacement 1788 overview 255
pickup, feed drive assembly stacker unit motors and solenoids 261
removal and print quality diagnostic 385 PCAs 265
replacement 1872 staple and staple cartridge 291, rollers 264
side high capacity input Tray 5 or 317, 367 sensor 256
6 stack height and paper empty stapler unit 289, 365 workflow 255
sensors booklet finisher, remove and stapler/stacker finisher
removal and replace 2860 parts and diagrams 3540
replacement 1903 external finisher, remove and stapler/stacker finisher 1 of 4
side high capacity input Tray 5 or 6 replace 2473 parts 3540
top cover open switch inner finisher, remove and stapler/stacker finisher 2 of 4
removal and replace 3309 parts 3542
replacement 1866 operation 292, 368 stapler/stacker finisher 3 of 4
side high capacity input Tray 5 or 6 overview 289, 365 parts 3544
tray roller kit staple and staple stapler/stacker finisher 4 of 4
removal and cartridge 291, 367 parts 3545
replacement 1869 stapler unit operation 368 stapler/stacker or booklet finishers
Sign In button stapler unit overview 365 removal and
locating 4 stapler-stacker and booklet maker replacement 2127
Sign Out button staple and staple static, precautions for 602
locating 4 cartridge 291 storage 154
software and solutions 1, 6, 21 stapler-stacker finisher 247, 268 sub printed circuit assembly
solenoids bridge unit 266 remove and replace
removal and replacement, buffer unit 302 parts 1584
external finisher buffer covers 252 supplies
solenoid assembly 2669 detailed specifications 247 toner cartridges, control
removal and replacement, high ejector unit 293 panel 1140
capacity input shift gate electrical mechanical toner cartridges,
solenoid 2064 relationships disassemble 1142
removal and replacement, inner diagrams 3666 supplies error (LaserJet)
finisher paper holding end fence unit 284 10.WX.YZ error 390, 432
solenoid 3407 entrance unit 268 supplies error (PageWide)
return gate solenoid 1012 main exit unit 279 17.WX.YZ error 390, 432
solid-state drive 154 main output tray unit 296 Supplies menu, control
solve problems overview 255 panel 390, 401, 435, 538
control panel messages 431 paddle unit 281 SVC-internal USB expansion
CPMD 431 paper holding unit 299 kit 152
specifications 1, 6 punch unit 270 switch
copy specifications 1, 6 stapler unit 289 front door 133
electrical and acoustic 1, 6 stapler-stacker finisher 268 right door 133
general specifications 1, 6 tamper unit 286 switches
maintenance parts 1, 6, 20 top exit unit 276 front door switch 1536
network interface 1, 6, 21 top output tray unit 277

Index 3733
 inner finisher, remove and inner finisher, remove and Color Plane Registration (CPR)
replace 3429 replace 3265 unit 124
removal and replacement, DCF operation 288, 364 color plane registration shutter
door open switch and overview 286, 363 driving 128
harness 1999 tamper unit operation 364 Color Toner Density (CTD)
removal and replacement, DCF tamper unit overview 363 operation 128
right door open switch Tarot high speed (HS) platen 205 control panel 137, 139
holder 1992 tarot high speed platen control panel base PCA 165
removal and replacement, dual motor 207 control panel PCA 165
cassette feeder right door PCA 208 control panel PCA – 10.1
open switch holder 1992 sensors 207 inch 166
removal and replacement, workflow 205 control panel PCA – 8 inch 166
external finisher front door Tarot high speed platen covers (1 of 2) 45
switch 2330 cover 206 covers 2 of ) 46
removal and replacement, Tarot high speed platen developer and drum unit 110
external finisher main output cover 206 developer and drum unit
tray top of stack tarot high speed platen driving 115
switch 2620 motor 207 developer and drum unit
removal and replacement, tarot high speed platen PCA 208 operation 114
external finisher main output tarot high speed platen developer and drum unit
tray top of stack switch sensors 207 overview 110
guide 2388 tarot high speed platen drum CRUM PCA 163
removal and replacement, workflow 205 duplex unit 79
external finisher main output tarot HS platen echo PCA 159
tray top of stack switch lower parts 3517 environmental sensor, fan,
guide 2398 parts and diagrams 3516 switch overview 133
removal and replacement, TCDU eraser PCA 164
external finisher top door removal and exit unit 73
open switch 2253 replacement 1180 feeding system motors 51
removal and replacement, inner TCDU detection sensor feeding system overview 47
finisher front cover removal and feeding system rollers 48
switch 3451 replacement 1182 feeding system sensors 50
removal and replacement, inner TCDU drive assembly feeding system solenoids 51
finisher output tray lower removal and formatter 143
limit switch assembly 3367 replacement 1198 fuser CRUM PCA 164
removal and replacement, inner TCDU motor Fuser Drive Board (FDB) 170
finisher top cover removal and replacement 1211 fuser driving 133
switch 3462 TCDU unit motor sensor fuser unit 129
removal and replacement, sHCI removal and fuser unit temperature
Tray 5 or 6 top cover open replacement 1224 control 131
switch 1866 TCU fuser wrap jam sensor 132
right door switch 1553 parts 3498 hard-disk drive 157
system error (LaserJet) removal and hardware configuration 140
62.WX.YZ error 390, 433 replacement 1239 High Voltage Power Supply
system requirements TCU cover and CMF panel (HVPS) 167
minimum 1, 6 removal and replacement 709 image creation motors 105
temperature/humidity image creation overview 102
T sensor 133 image creation workflow 102
terms and definitions Image Transfer Belt (ITB) 116
T2
glossary 3688 Image Transfer Belt (ITB)
removal and replacement 942
tests driving 119
tamper unit 286, 363
post-service 602, 604 Image Transfer Belt (ITB)
external finisher, remove and
print-quality 602, 604 operation 118
replace 2407
theory of operation Image Transfer Belt (ITB)
accelerator 153 overview 116

3734 Index
imge creation sensors 103 toner reservoir 92 toner collection duct unit motor
Integrated Scan Asset toner reservoir driving 95 sensor
(ISA) 171 toner reservoir operation 95 removal and
island of data (IOD) 159 toner reservoir overview 92 replacement 1224
ITB cleaning unit 122 toner residual amount sensor toner collection unit
ITB cleaning unit operation 94 electrical mechanical
operation 124 Tray 1 unit 53 relationships
ITB cleaning unit overview 122 Tray 2 cassette 58 diagrams 3616
keyboard PCA 161 Tray 2 pickup assembly 60 parts 3498
Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) Tray 2 unit 57 removal and
operation 108 Tray 2/3 unit overview 58 replacement 1239
Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) Tray 3 cassette 58 remove and replace
overview 107 Tray 3 pickup assembly 60 parts 1180
Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)( 107 Tray 3 unit 57 Toner Collection Unit (TCU) 96
loop sensing 70 Trusted Platform Module Toner Collection Unit (TCU)
Lower Voltage Power Supply (TPM) 150 overview 96
(LVPS) 169 USB hub PCA 158 toner collection unit detection
paper size sensor PCA 162 tie stoppers sensor
PCA overview 140 removal and replacement 698 removal and replacement 1241
power key PCA 160 tip vi toner collection unit drive
registration unit 70 toner assembly
riser card 151 parts 3495 removal and
riser card for HDD 151 toner cartridge 87 replacement 1263
riser card for HDD, USB ports, electrical mechanical toner collection unit driving 101
and accelerator board 152 relationships toner collection unit full sensor
Second Transfer (T2) unit 120 diagrams 3614 PCA
Second Transfer (T2) unit remove and replace parts 1117 removal and
operation 122 toner cartridge CRUM PCA 163 replacement 1316, 1604
Second Transfer (T2) unit toner cartridge operation 90 Toner Collection Unit full sensor
overview 120 toner cartridge overview 87 PCA 162
solid-state drive 154 toner cartridge unlock driving 90 toner collection unit motor
storage 154 toner cartridges, control panel removal and
SVC-internal USB expansion removal and replacement 1280
kit 152 replacement 1140 toner collection unit motor sensor
toner cartridge 87 toner cartridges, disassemble removal and
toner cartridge CRUM removal and replacement 1298
PCA 163 replacement 1142 toner collection unit
toner cartridge operaton 90 toner collection duct unit operation 100
toner cartridge overview 87 removal and toner CRUM module assembly
toner cartridge unlock replacement 1180 removal and
driving 90 Toner Collection Duct Unit replacement 1149
Toner Collection Duct Unit (TCDU) 96 toner dispense 90
(TCDU) 96 toner collection duct unit detection toner dispense motor sensor
Toner Collection Unit (TCU) 96 sensor removal and
toner collection unit removal and replacement 1132
driving 101 replacement 1182 toner dispense motors
Toner Collection Unit full sensor toner collection duct unit drive removal and
PCA 162 assembly replacement 1125
toner collection unit removal and toner dispense motors assembly
operation 100 replacement 1198 removal and replacement 1117
toner dispense 90 toner collection duct unit motor toner flow 83
toner flow motors 85 removal and replacement 1211 main components and
toner flow overview 83 functions 83
toner flow sensors 84 motor 83
toner flow workflow 83 motors 85

Index 3735
 overview 83 touchscreen tray 2 pickup drive assembly
remove and replace parts 1117 locating features 4 removal and replacement 830
sensor 83 touchscreen blank, white, or dim tray 2 pickup motor
sensors 84 (no image) 390, 393 removal and replacement 835
workflow 83 touchscreen has an unresponsive tray 2 prefeed sensor
toner flow information 83 zone 390, 393, 394 removal and replacement 814
toner flow motor 83 TPM 150 tray 2 stack height sensor
toner flow sensor 83 tray 1 removal and replacement 802
toner flow system base printer, service Tray 2 tray heater 64
toner cartridge operation 90 parts 3487 Tray 2 unit 57
toner cartridge overview 87 electrical mechanical tray 2, 3
toner cartridge unlock relationships base printer, service
driving 90 diagrams 3608 parts 3489
Toner Collection Unit (TCU) parts 3487 parts 3489
overview 96 Tray 1 tray 2/3
toner collection unit jams 416 electrical mechanical
driving 101 jams, clearing 390 relationships
toner collection unit locating 1 diagrams 3609
operation 100 Tray 1 clutch Tray 2/3 driving 68
toner dispense 90 removal and replacement 773 tray 2/3 roller kit
toner reservoir driving 95 tray 1 empty sensor removal and replacement 798,
toner reservoir operation 95 removal and replacement 754 852
toner reservoir overview 92 Tray 1 empty sensor 55 Tray 2/3 unit
toner residual amount sensor Tray 1 operation 55 overview 58
operation 94 Tray 1 pickup roller 55 tray 3
toner flow system information 87, tray 1 roller kit removal and replacement 786
92, 96 removal and replacement 783 Tray 3
toner flow unit Tray 1 solenoid 55 jams 417
toner cartridge 87 tray 1 unit jams, clearing 390
Toner Collection Duct Unit removal and replacement 736 locating 1
(TCDU) 96 Tray 1 unit 53 paper size sensor 64
Toner Collection Unit (TCU) 96 Tray 1 unit driving 57 tray heater 64
toner reservoir 92 tray 2 Tray 3 cassette 58
toner reservoir 92 removal and replacement 786 tray 3 color panel
removal and replacement 1157 Tray 2 removal and replacement 714
toner reservoir driving 95 feed motor 65 tray 3 empty sensor
toner reservoir motor feed roller 65 removal and replacement 856
removal and replacement 1171 feed sensor 65 tray 3 open and paper size sensor
toner reservoir motors assembly jams 417 removal and replacement 876
removal and replacement 1117 jams, clearing 390 Tray 3 paper size sensor 64
toner reservoir operation 95 locating 1 tray 3 pickup assembly
toner reservoir overview 92 paper size sensor 64 removal and replacement 844
toner residual amount sensor tray heater 64 Tray 3 pickup assembly 60
operation 94 Tray 2 cassette 58 tray 3 pickup drive assembly
tools, additional tray 2 color panel removal and replacement 838
troubleshooting 404 removal and replacement 712 tray 3 pickup motor
top exit unit 276 tray 2 empty sensor removal and replacement 841
external finisher, remove and removal and replacement 802 tray 3 prefeed sensor
replace 2273 tray 2 open and paper size sensor removal and replacement 866
overview 276 removal and replacement 826 tray 3 stack height sensor
top output tray unit 277 Tray 2 operation 67 removal and replacement 856
external finisher, remove and Tray 2 paper size sensor 64 Tray 3 tray heater 64
replace 2289 tray 2 pickup assembly Tray 3 unit 57
overview 277 removal and replacement 788 tray diverter unit 273
Tray 2 pickup assembly 60

3736 Index
 external finisher, remove and Use Requested Tray 390, 401,
replace 2245 435, 454
operation 275
overview 273 W
tray heaters
warning vi
removal and replacement 880
Web-based Interactive Search
tray motor error (LaserJet)
Engine (WISE)
60.WX.YZ error 390, 433
HP internal users and Channel
tray selection - use requested
partners 420
tray 390, 401, 435, 454
weight
trays
accessories 1, 6
jams, clearing 390
printer 1, 6
locating 1
white backing 1692, 1746
removal and replacement,
whole unit
DCF 1931
inner finisher, remove and
tray 2 or tray 3, remove and
replace 3009
replace 786
whole unit replacement
tray heaters, remove and
flatbed scanner 1788
replace 880
integrated scanner
Trays menu, control panel 390,
asset 1656
401, 435, 539
WISE
troubleshooting 433
HP internal users and Channel
additional tools 404
partners 420
checklist 390, 401
control panel checks 390, 393
jams 412, 414
lights, using 390, 398
power 390
process 390
Troubleshooting menu, control
panel 593
troubleshooting tools
control panel messages 431
CPMD 431
Trusted Platform Module
(TPM) 150

U
understand lights on the formatter
formatter lights 390, 398
understand the lights on the
formatter
HP Jetdirect LEDs 390, 398
unit parts
DCF, remove and replace 1931
HCI, remove and replace 2031
sHCI, remove and
replace 1860
USB hub PCA 158
removal and
replacement 1587
USB port
locating 3

Index 3737